Chapter Text
“Soonyoung, wake up! You need to go to school!”
My mom yelled at the top of her lungs before bursting into my room and opening the curtains to let the morning light come into my room.
“Just five more minutes, please mom!” I groan and pull the covers up my head.
“No way, you’ll be late for the first day of your last year of high school!” She pulls the covers away and I sit up in the middle of my bed.
“Yeah, it’s the last year so they already know me. They already know that I’m always late.” I protest, trying to grab the covers from her hands to sleep just a little bit more.
“Don’t be lazy and get up!” However, my mom doesn’t give up and keeps tugging on the blankets until I am the one who has to give up.
“Okay! Just know that I’ll get my revenge...no one can get away with separating me from my lovely bed.” I point my finger at her, glaring, but my voice betrays me, cracking in the middle of the sentence.
“I’ll deal with it.” She shrugs, not taking my words seriously.
“Ah ah ah. At least you could pretend to be scared,” I say while pouting.
“There’s no time for that. Breakfast’s ready and it’s waiting for you,” she says while pulling me up from the bed.
“Fine! I’ll get up!” I stand up and let her drag me to the kitchen like we do every time she’s at home because she’s not on an early shift.
Oh, I think I should pause this for a moment!
You’re already here? Yes, I’m talking to you who are now reading this! I think I need to quickly introduce myself before resuming the story.
My name’s Kwon Soonyoung and I’m 18. I’m quite a handsome boy of average height and dark brown hair. My eyes are my charm as they are a little bit slanted. They look like the clock’s hands when they’re on 10:10 or someone else said that they look like the eyes of a tiger. However, many of my friends don’t see me as a tiger but as a hamster and that’s all because of my chubby cheeks but hey, remember that I am a person, not an animal so I can’t be a hamster!
Okay, I need to go back on track or else I’ll lose my train of thoughts.
As you may have noticed from the talk with my mom, this year is my last year in high school!
*insert cheering*
I think that’s all you need to kno- Oh, wait! I almost forgot to mention that I came here from Japan!
Now, you could be asking yourself
‘here? where is here?’
Of course, it’s Seoul!
My parents and I lived in Japan for quite a while and then we had to move back here. Why? Because of their jobs.
They both work for an important Korean company that has one of its main branches in Japan and as they were needed there, I had to follow them when they had to move. Hopefully, now we came here to stay as the company noticed they could be more of help to the main branch in Seoul.
As we lived for 10 years in Japan, my family and I got used to speaking Japanese even at home so I had to pick up my Korean before coming here. I quickly practised the basics so I wouldn’t die on the streets in case I had got lost and, to be honest, it was a bit difficult because Japanese got in the way, but people had been so patient with me and helped me to improve and even get rid of the light Japanese accent I had.
Okay, now I seriously need to stop talking or else I will never be able to continue with the story!
“Today your father’s going to bring you to school, I can't come with you as I already need to leave,” my mom says while handing me the spoon to eat the bowl of rice that I am struggling to eat with the chopsticks. I’m so tired that my body doesn’t properly work.
“Hey, but I’m old enough to go alone,” I protest upon hearing the news of my father sending me to school.
“I know that but you know your father. Every year he gets very excited about your first day of school. I guess he feels sorry for not being there and not doing that when you were a child.” A sad sigh escapes her lips while she puts her hand on my shoulder.
“It’s okay, mom. I know he had to work,” I say while patting her hand “However, it’s just for today, okay? Tomorrow I’ll go alone.”
“Okay, deal!” Her features soften as she smiles at me. “Now, let me take a look at you.” She makes me stand up and her eyes quickly scan my figure.
“Uh? What are you doing?” I ask dumbfounded.
“You say you’ve grown up but your uniform is messy!” She shakes her head. “Fix your shirt and tie then take your backpack or you’ll be late, my child!” My mom winks at me when the words ‘my child’ leave her mouth in a mocking tone.
I reply to her by sticking my tongue out.
I hurriedly finish eating my breakfast trying at the same time not to choke and fix my uniform. While tucking the shirt in the trousers, I think about my comfortable sweatpants. Ah, how much I love them. Wearing this too-formal clothes is just not for me. My mom usually nags at me saying that I should wear this kind of outfit more since I am a ‘young man’ but hell no, I won’t do it, never. I want to live while being comfortable!
“Okay, should we get going?”
My father’s voice startles me. I turn around and I see him standing by the door, car keys in one hand and his briefcase in the other.
“Yeah, I’m ready. Let’s go!”
I run to my mom and leave a kiss on her cheek before grabbing my bag. My father and I wave at her and we walk out the door. In an unusual silence, we reach our car parked in the driveway before our house.
As soon as my father starts the car, he starts the conversation too.
“So, it’s your last year in high school, how do you feel about it?”
‘Here we go again. He and his awkward questions,’ I think, mentally rolling my eyes.
“Normal?! Should I feel something else?” I giggle.
“Ah, you’re really growing up...you’re an adult.” His awkwardly flat tone tries to hide his emotions. After all, his only son is just a year away to officially enter the adult world.
“Don’t be like that! You know that I am always my old self.”
“There’s no doubt. Your height is the only thing that grew. Your mind is still the one of a 5-year-old child!” My dad stifles a laugh.
“Oh thanks, dad, you’re too kind!” I deadpan.
“You’re right. Maybe you’re even younger than that.”
“Wow, the disrespect! I can’t hit you because you’re driving. Consider yourself a lucky man!” I raise a bit the voice and then everything goes silent.
That is until we both start laughing out loud.
As the laughter dies after a while, I look outside the car window and I’m soon lost in my thoughts.
My father and I usually joke around like this but, right now, he has a point. I may be an adult, but my mind didn’t grow up. I mean, I get serious when the situation requires it, but I like to joke around a lot and keep the atmosphere light and bright. That’s because, everywhere I look, I see people of my age acting too serious and already being sure of what they want to be in the future. They are already working hard to achieve their goals, sometimes forgetting how it is to have a good laugh. I’m not like that. I know what I want to do but I want to keep on living like today is the last day of my life, keep on trying to find the bright side to every experience, keep on laughing at silly things together with my friends. I still can’t get all serious about my future.
I snap out of it the moment my father pulls over the front of my school. I’m about to open the door to get out of the car when my father stops me and gives me a kiss on the top of my head.
“I’ll see you at home for dinner, young man,” he says ruffling my hair.
“See you later, old man! Wish me luck for this first day!” I say while fixing my locks.
“Good luck!” My father shouts so loud I almost breaking my eardrums.
I smile at him before getting out of the car and closing the door behind me. My father drives away, I take a deep breath and confidently throw my bag over my shoulder while walking towards the school entrance.
Suddenly, I feel someone pulling me backwards. I quickly lift my hand to hit the person who has now his arm around my neck in a loose armlock.
“Ouch. Is this how you treat someone who’s trying to welcome you back?”
“You deserve it, Shua hyung! You scared me!” I almost yell.
“I’m sorry," Joshua says in a half-assed tone "By the way, how was your trip back to Japan?” He asks, still rubbing his hand on the spot I hit.
“Splendid. What about you? Did you go back to Los Angeles?”
Tall, honey coloured skin, red-brown hair that frames the gentleman-like features of his face. He is Hong Jisoo, better known as Joshua or Shua, and he is my best friend.
I wish he was my classmate but that’s not the case as he’s 23. I would be worried if he was still in high school. We met here though! To be exact, we met in the school’s library where he works as a part-timer. Since the day we met, we’re inseparable.
We may look like we’re a bit different because of our personalities and that’s why people ask themselves how are we even friends: I am outgoing and can’t stop the words from coming out of my mouth while he looks shy and quiet. However, I swear that once you get to really know him, he’s pure evil. He comes up with jokes and random things that no one would expect from him. To be honest, you wouldn’t be even able to think about the things he does. It’s at those times that people finally understand the reason why we are best friends.
We both like music and that’s another thing that has brought us together. Another one can be the fact that, shortly after we met, he had moved in two houses away from mine. Because of that, we walk to school together every day. When we get at the gate, he goes to the library while I go to class. We get lunch together and sometimes I go to the library to study while I wait for him to end his shift.
Joshua is a skilful guy. He can sing and play the guitar and that’s why he’s in a group. He and some of his friends have a band originally called ‘Al1’ but that is now known as ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’ apparently because they lost a bet to Jeonghan. They have recently started playing their music at pubs and clubs and they got a small fan base. I haven’t had yet the pleasure of watching them perform because I’m still not the age to get in clubs. I’m still a minor so I need to wait for them to get a showcase in a place that is not age-restricted. I can’t wait though because I know I am missing a lot!
“No, I didn’t get to go back with my parents. I had to stay here because I had some showcases. A lot of clubs called us at this round,” Joshua says with a smile, proud of this little achievement.
“Did you get to sell some of your albums?!”
“Yes! And the amazing part is that a lot of people even asked for our autographs!” He jumps up and down out of excitement.
“Okay, now I am jealous! It’s a matter of time before I have to share you with the rest of the world or, even worse, you will forget about me!” I cross my arms and make a pout.
“Don’t say that! You know you’re my favourite little bro.” He lifts his hand, waiting for a high-five.
“And you’re my favourite hyung!” I high-five him and we bro-hug.
“Aww, how sweet of you! Did you put too much sugar in your milk today?” Joshua asks in a sarcastic tone.
“Hyung, I didn’t even drink milk at breakfast!” I chuckle before getting serious again. “Speaking of the band, when will I be able to watch you and the other Jeonghan’s bitches perform?”
“Soon, I promise. We’re organising a huge performance for the school’s festival. They asked me to get the band playing for the ending stage. It would be during the winter break, though.”
“And you call that soon?” I cry out at the thought of waiting for months until the break actually arrives.
“Be patient, Soonyoung…” Joshua tries to comfort me by patting my back.
“You know that it’s not my forte but I’ll try…” I let out a sigh.
“Oh right, Soonyoun-” I cover Joshua’s mouth with my hand before he could say what he wanted to say.
“Shhh. Was that the bell?” I ask, pupils shaking as I panic due to being late for the first class when I could be on time for the first time in years.
“I t...nk...o” Joshua tries to say but his voice is muffled by my hand.
“Oh my god, I’m late! I need to rush to class! I even got here early today! It’s all your fault, hyung!” I shout as Joshua pulls my hand off of his mouth.
“Yeah, yeah, whatever it makes you sleep at night” He deadpans. “Don’t waste more time and run!”
“Yeah! See you later at lunch, hyung!”
I sprint through the hallways to get to my class. I’m super late, nothing new about that. I reached the point where the teacher has given up on me as I’m a lost cause. She doesn’t even get angry at me anymore.
However, for the sake of this last year, I’m willing to change this habit of mine, I swear!
Once I get to class, I sit at my desk and I am out of breath. I have probably left my lungs at the gate as I can’t seem to catch my breath.
I feel a hand on my shoulder and, when I turn my head, I see my other best friend offering me a bottle of water.
“You’re finally here! I thought you got lost on the way to class!”
Lee Seokmin is the first person I met in this school and he’s the bestest of friends you could ask for!
As tall as me, dark brown hair and eyes that disappear every time he smiles. His smile is so bright that I often tell people that they should wear sunglasses to look at him as he’s a literal sunshine!
Like me, he cannot stay put, not even for a second. We improvise a lot of skits and we are known as ‘Seoksoon’, the best comic duo of our school and group of friends. For a while, we even had our own radio broadcasted in the school and it was really popular. In the end, we had to stop doing that because of how busy we were getting due to studying and various tests.
Like Joshua, Seokmin likes singing and sometimes uploads his covers on Soundcloud. I swear, with his voice, he could get into any agency and quickly become a top star but he doesn’t want that. He enjoys singing as a hobby and he said the idol life would be just too much for him, he wants to have a quiet life.
The two of us plus Joshua are a perfect trio, especially when it comes to music and anime that we often watch together at my house.
“I came early but, as I was talking with Shua hyung, I didn’t notice it was already time for class!” I say after gulping down half bottle of water.
“Has Shua hyung told you about the festival? I can’t wait!” He makes a high-pitched screech, arms flailing.
“You already knew it?!” I ask, shocked.
“Yeah, he told me about that a couple of days ago through text,” He says as if it wasn’t a big deal.
“Wow, I feel betrayed!” I put a hand over my chest to put emphasis on the sentence. We both giggle. “However, I’m super excited about it! Up until now, we’ve only got to listen to their song through their Soundcloud but we can finally see them live!” I clap my hands in excitement like a seal.
“Knowing them, it will be fantastic!”
“It’s going to be lit!”
“Kwon! Lee! I understand that you hadn’t seen each other in a while but you can catch up during the break. Now it’s time to focus on the new English writer I’m about to explain!” The teacher scolds us as soon as she sets foot in the classroom. I bet she hasn’t even heard us talking but only guessed that we would be chatting.
“Sorry, Teacher Kim,” we both say in unison as we open our books and shut our mouths.
However, Seokmin and I are too excited about the news to really focus on what the teacher is saying. We need to let out the fanboy-side of us, so we end up communicating through pieces of papers while pretending to take some notes as the teacher goes on with her lesson about some English author whose name I didn’t catch.
By doing that, the rest of the class goes by rather quickly and so do the other classes until it’s lunchtime. I really want to use this time to talk with Joshua about the details of the performance. I bet he already knows the song they will sing and their concept. I need to investigate.
“I’m starving!” Seokmin says, rubbing his hand over his belly, as he gets up from his seat.
“Me too! We better get going to the canteen or else they will snatch the best dishes!” I say, bolting out of class.
“Hey, Soonyoung! Wait for me!” Seokmin runs out of the class, trying to keep up with my fast pace.
We arrive at the canteen and get in the queue to get our food. We chat a bit with our classmates and, after we got our trays filled with every kind of food kindly offered by the cooks as they kept saying we are too skinny, we get to our table.
While getting closer to the table, we notice a guy whose red-brownish locks highlighted his tan skin and his sharp jawline. He is sitting and talking to Joshua. We haven’t seen him before and he surely isn’t from this school as he doesn’t wear a uniform. However, by the way they are talking, he seems close to Joshua.
We stop right before the table so we won’t interrupt them but at the same time we are able to eavesdrop a bit of their conversation.
“Well, we need to discuss it with the others, to check if we can do that,” the guy says with his honey-coated voice.
“I haven’t talked to the owner of that place yet, so there’s still no guarantees.”
“Yeah, but I still need to ask them if they are okay with that. I’ll let you know as soon as possible so you can contact the owner and talk with him. Now, I have to leave. Got some stuff to buy. See you later, hyung.” The guy says as he high-fives Joshua.
“See ya!”
The guy stands up and we can’t help but notice how tall he actually is. He’s a fucking beanpole! A good looking one if I should be honest. When said beanpole walks away, Joshua finally notices us standing there next to the table with our mouths half open. He smiles.
“Close your mouths and sit down before your food gets cold.”
“Yes, hyung,” I say, nudging Seokmin with the elbow to make him move.
“Hyung, who’s the guy who just left?” Seokmin asks as he sits beside Joshua.
“He’s one of Jeonghan’s bitches. His name’s Mingyu.” Joshua says while pointing at the direction where Mingyu went just a while ago.
“Oh, now I get why his voice sounded familiar,” Seokmin says.
“Wait. Did we just see THE Mingyu? The rapper of your band who has also great vocals?” I ask, the tone of my voice going at least an octave higher.
“Don’t you dare say that in front of him! He already thinks he’s an Adonis so do not add fuel to the fire, please.” Joshua shifts in his seat to point his finger at me to warn me.
“Well, with that looks, he can add as much fuel as he wants to the fire.” Seokmin wiggles his eyebrows to emphasise the concept.
“Seokmin has a point, though. He’s tall, handsome, has a great voice and I bet there’s a lot more he can do.” I say while putting a mouthful of kimchi in my mouth.
“You’re right. He’s also a perfect housewife. He can cook, clean the house and take care of almost everything.” Joshua lists down, eyes losing focus as he recalls the things Mingyu can do.
“Does he even have any flaw?” Seokmin says, his tone as if to state that it’s impossible that a perfect man like Mingyu could lack in something.
“He’s clumsy as hell. Do not give any fragile object to him...he can break it in a matter of seconds.” Joshua proudly says while looking at Seokmin.
“I’m ready to give him my heart. I think I would be thanking him even if he broke it or stepped over it.” Seokmin jokingly says just to annoy Joshua who, instead, looks a bit defeated by Seokmin’s words.
“Oh! Finally someone as talented and clumsy me!” I step in the conversation to lower a bit the tension between those two.
“You’re just clumsy and stupid, Soonyoung,” Joshua says, his head turning towards me.
“Hyung! Why do you always have to treat me like this?” I whine as I put down my chopsticks and everybody laughs.
“Oh, right. Hyung, we actually heard you and Mingyu hyung talking about checking some places. It’s about a new showcase?” Seokmin asks, his eyes lit up at the perspective of a show to attend.
“Probably yes. We want to get known outside the circle of clubs and pubs so we need to go around to find some new places where we can play.” Joshua says. “There are a lot of people who don’t really like to go to pubs and we want to reach to them too.”
“To do that it would be great if you could get to perform in one of the cafés around the school area. Plus, I would be able to see you playing the guitar!” I throw my hands in the air at the thought.
“But you have already watched me do that at least a thousands of times at home!”
“It’s not the same. Do not argue with me...hyung.” The last word coming out with less confidence compared to the authoritarian one at the beginning of the sentence and the three of us burst into laughter.
We spend the rest of our lunch break talking about our holidays and the new anime that is now airing and that we absolutely need to watch together.
The moment out trays are empty and the bell rings, we part ways. Joshua has another shift so he goes back to the library while we go to our next class.
Luckily, afternoon classes go by in the same way as the morning ones and soon it’s time to go back home.
The bell rings and everyone bolts out of the class, already tired despite this being just the first day of school.
I walk Seokmin to the school gate and wait for him to get into his father’s car before going to the library and wait for Joshua to end his shift.
Once I get there, I go straight to the manga section where he usually is around this time. He’s surely going through some of his favourite books. However, I am wrong. He’s not here. Actually, he’s nowhere to be found. I look around and go through every aisle but I can’t seem to find him.
‘Where the fuck did he go?’
I decide to not waste time going around like that and talk to the girl working at the info desk who has a crush on Joshua. She doesn’t take her eyes off of him so she surely knows where he is.
“Noona, hello!” I greet her with a smile on my face. “Do you perhaps know where Joshua hyung is?”
“Hi, Soonyoung. Joshua left around 30 minutes ago, he didn’t tell you?” She asks with a confused expression as he knows that whenever Joshua left before the end of his shift, he would’ve texted me.
“No, and it’s weird,” I mumble. “Well, thank you noona! Have a great day!” I wave at her and walk away.
As I make my way home, a lot of questions pop up in my mind.
‘Why he hasn’t sent me a text? Did something happen? Should I be worried? Naah...if something did really happen he would’ve told me, right? Maybe he had to rehearse with the band. Thinking about it Mingyu did say they would see each other later.’
Little did I knew that Jisoo leaving early that day would be leading to a series of events that would’ve made things in my life a little bit more interesting.
Chapter 2
Notes:
Important announcement to all of the soonhoonists at the end of the chapter!!!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Walking while having your head up in the clouds never brought any good to people, on the whole, let alone to a clumsy ass like mine. Thus, I shouldn’t be too surprised when as soon as I get around the corner, I bump into someone.
The impact is too sudden and unexpected that I get scared and lose my balance, falling on the ground with a loud thud.
‘Joshua was right. I am a goofball indeed.’
Surely blushing due to the embarrassment, I take a peek above me to see if the person I’ve bumped into is still here. Standing in front of me, there’s a guy. Even while I’m on the ground he looks like he’s shorter than me. He has raven black hair in contrast with his pale skin that makes his rosy lips stand out. He is glaring at me and I know for sure that this is not a good sign.
”Watch where you’re going!” The guy says through gritted teeth.
”I’m sorry. I was thinking and I haven’t paid attention to the street for a while,” I say in an apologetic tone while getting up from the ground.
”Well, next time try to think less.” His tone still aggressive.
”But you could have paid attention too, you know? If you were so focused on the road you’ve surely seen me,” I say using my height as an advantage to try and scare him.
“I wouldn’t have imagined bumping into such a whiny kid,” He sarcastically says looking annoyed at the situation.
“Said the one who really looks like a kid,” I say with a smirk on my face. I soon learned that doing that was a big mistake.
He grabs me by the tie and tugs on it, bringing me to the same level of his face. “You’re lucky I’m running late so I can’t properly teach you a lesson. However, remember this: Don’t you dare call me a kid ever again.”
He releases my tie and I almost fall flat on my face. Without even looking at me, he leaves and not even once he looks back.
‘Wow. What did just happen? Did I really meet a shorty who had the guts of calling me a whiny kid? He’s lucky I didn’t get too worked up or else who knows what I could’ve done.’
I shrug my shoulders, fix my tie and keep walking towards my house trying not to think about that shorty.
I’m positive none of this would’ve happened if Joshua had been with me and hadn’t abandoned me to my cruel destiny. Speaking, well thinking of Joshua, he still hasn’t contacted me at all.
‘Did he really forget about me?’
I pick the phone from my pocket and open the kakao talk app to send him a text.
Hoshiya:
Oi, hyung. Where are you?
Noona said that you left work.
Why haven’t you told me?
Joshuji:
Are you sure?
I remember sending you a text.
Hoshiya:
I got nothing.
Joshuji:
Shit.
I hadn’t noticed that it’s unsent!
Maybe the wifi wasn’t working when I sent the text.
I’m sorry, Soonie. Mingyu came to fetch me because we had to go to his house and practice a few new songs.
I will soon make it up to you, I promise.
Hoshiya:
You better be true to your words!
How’s the practice going?
Joshuji:
To be honest, we haven’t started yet.
Jihoon and Seungcheol aren’t here yet.
You’re already home?
Hoshiya:
Not yet.
I’m on my way.
Joshuji:
What are you waiting for?
Fasten your pace!
Soon it will be dark.
Hoshiya:
What am I? 5 years old?
Joshuji:
Actually, you’re 3 but I’ll let you believe you’re a grown up, my little man.
Hoshiya:
Not you too, hyung.
Joshuji:
Hahaha, I will never let you live.
Btw, I need to get going. Those two stragglers are here.
Talk to you later!
Hoshiya:
Yeah, talk to you later!
I plug in the earphones and put the phone back into my pocket. I follow Josh’s advice and start walking faster to get home as soon as possible as this day has really stressed me out.
I reach the driveway of my house and I know that I will find nobody home as my parents are still working. They won’t be home before 9 in the evening and in my current state it’s great because I can go straight into my room and then head in the bathroom for a shower.
As I set foot into my room, I throw the bag on the floor next to my bed, and look for my pyjamas so that I can go and have a long hot shower. It’s September so technically it’s still summer but I can already feel the autumnal chill creeping on my skin, making me shiver a bit. Moreover, it's widely known that the warmth helps your muscles to relax and that what I really need right now. I feel so tense.
I get in the shower but not before connecting my phone to the bluetooth speaker, blasting some music to drown my thoughts in a sea of upbeats songs.
I stay still under the stream of hot water for a while before the notes of a ballad start filling the tiny space of the bathroom. I don’t know why but my mind swiftly goes to that guy I bumped into before.
‘What a rude asshole.’
Just having to recall his features, his glaring eyes, his soft-looking lips gets on my nerves. I want to make that image of him fade from my mind, that’s why I bolt out of the shower, almost losing balance, to change that song into a more upbeat one. However, it doesn’t work because I keep on thinking of that scene, of his piercing eyes and his strong grip on my tie. At this moment, I know that the only way to get him out of my head is to talk about it with someone and that someone is Seokmin.
Talking with him it’s better than going to any session with a therapist. Every time I tell him something sad or weird that happened to me, he always finds a way to make me laugh. Then I totally forget about the issue because we end up changing the topic and talking about something less serious like the new fan-made video he found about his ship in the current anime we’re watching.
After what it feels like hours but in reality it’s just 30 minutes, I get out of the shower, dry my hair and put my pyjamas. I turn off the music and then run into my room where I plop on my bed, phone in my hands.
I check for the time. It’s still 7 pm, so there’s still a little bit of time left before my parents come home. I press the call button and wait for Seokmin to answer. It takes three rings.
“Here’s doctor Lee Seokmin speaking, how can I help you today?” He asks in what he thinks is a professional tone.
“Am I disturbing you right now?” I ask, worried I might’ve interrupted his anime binge-watching session.
“Yeah, you always disturb me,” He tries to deadpan but the little giggle at the end betrays him.
“Wow, is this how you treat your best friend when he calls you?!” I pretend to be hurt and Seokmin stifles a laugh.
“Okay, okay, I’ll stop. Did something happen?”
“Kind of…”
“Well, then tell me everything. I’m all ears.”
I tell him all the things that happened since he left school and I got back to the library up to the ‘incident’. I leave out the part of me thinking about that shorty under the shower because I know he will mock me, calling me a creepy pervert.
“What a jerk!” It’s the first thing Seokmin says.
“I know, right? He could’ve said sorry and keep on living as if nothing ever happened.”
“True but he could’ve been angry. Like something may have happened to him and he was already on edge. Bumping into you was the last straw that broke the camel’s back,” Seokmin says, trying to find a way to explain that guy’s behaviour.
“Even though you may be right about this, he has no rights whatsoever to take it out on people he doesn’t know! It’s just rude,” I say not wanting to lose the argument.
“I have to admit that you do have a point. However, what can you resolve now by getting angry? Just calm down and think that you won’t meet him ever again. Seoul it’s big, how many chances there are that you can actually see him again?” Seokmin tries to comfort me, knowing that I get worked up really quickly.
“I hope you’re right. However, let me tell you that if I ever happen to meet him again, I will have a quick talk with Mr I-forgot-good-manners-at-home. Wait...that’s too long of a name. Hhm... " I take a pause, thinking of a nickname for that guy. "Should I call him vertically challenged?! Oh my! That’s it! That’s perfect!” I throw a fist up in the air as a sign of victory.
“What the hell, Soonyoung?” He asks while laughing out loud. “Calm down, tiger. Just let it go and let’s talk about something else instead.” I can hear rustling sounds from the other end and I can practically see him shifting on the bed to find a better position to speak on the phone. “In the end, did you get ahold of Joshua hyung?”
“Yes...I texted him and he said that he was at Mingyu’s to practice with the other Jeonghan’s bitches.”
“Well, at least now you know where he is and you can stop worry about our hyung,” Seokmin says, mocking me because he knows that I was already overthinking when I knew that Josh left without me.
“He said that he will soon make it up to me. Do you want to bet that he’s going to come here after the practice?” I chuckle.
“I don’t want to bet because it’s a matter of fact that he’s going to come there. He basically lives at your house.” I can feel Seokmin rolling his eyes.
“That’s not true! We take turns! I take over his house too!”
“Hmm..I’m sure something is going to happen between you two...if you know what I mean.”
“I can see you wiggling your eyebrows from here and no. Nothing’s going to happen. Just because we’re gay doesn’t it mean that we’ll end up together. You’re gay too and that doesn’t mean that soon one of us is going to ask the other out. Plus, Joshua hyung already has a crush on someone…” I say, willingly leaving out the name of Joshua’s crush to check something.
“Who is he? Where is he from? Do we know him? Tell me, please! Pretty please!” Seokmin begs, dying to know who the said crush is.
“I’m sorry, I can’t tell you. I made an oath and I have to keep it until the day I die.”
“C’mon! I’m your best friend! You know I won’t tell anyone!” Seokmin whines.
“And tell me Seokmin, why are you suddenly so interested in Shua’s love life?” I ask him, a smirk on my face.
“I’m just curious. He’s my friend after all.” Seokmin’s voice cracks in the middle of the sentence.
“Are you sure about that?” Putting pressure on Seokmin is the only way to make him talk and, sadly for him, it’s what I do best.
“Yeah?” It comes out from Seokmin more as a question than as a statement.
“I don’t believe you. Do you perhaps have a crush on Joshua hyung?” That’s it, that’s the final question.
“Pfff what are you talking about?” His voice cracks again, in a way that it makes me understand that he definitely likes Shua.
“A-ah! I knew it! You like Hong Jisoo, you like Hong Joshua!” I sing-song to him while making a little victory dance on my bed.
“I swear to god, Soonyoung. Stop it,”
“Don’t worry, I won’t tell anybody...maybe.”
“Let it slip out of your mouth and you’re a dead man.” He says, his tone changing into one more threatening.
We keep silent for a second before we both start laughing out loud. I assure him that I won’t tell Joshua and then we keep on gossiping about our friends’ relationship until I hear the front door opening, signalling that my parents are finally home. I hang up the phone call and run downstairs to greet them as the good son that I am.
Today is my turn to cook dinner and to tell the truth, I’m not a great chef. However, I know my way around the kitchen: all I need is a recipe book, the right ingredients, a lot of willpower and dinner is done! I would like to learn how to cook more elaborate dishes but my parents don’t trust me enough to do that...yet.
I get the dinner ready while my parents shower and relax a bit watching the tv. When they come home at this hour they’re always so tired that I would feel bad if I asked them to help me cook. That’s why I only call them when everything’s ready and they just have to eat. Usually, the atmosphere is very light as we try to keep out from our conversation the problems for school and work. That kind of topic is for those nights when my parents are less tired and can actually think straight, without having their minds clouded by the tiredness of a day’s work. We share funny stories or new gossips like co-workers flirting in the office or classmates breaking up in the middle of the hallway at school.
After dinner, I am helping my mom washing the dishes when I see with the corner of my eyes my phone screen lighting up followed by a loud ‘katok’. I dry my hands on the towel and take the phone from the counter. I see Joshua’s name on the screen and tap on the notification to check the message.
Joshuji:
Give me 10 minutes and I’ll be there.
Hoshiya:
???
Joshuji:
I’ll bring ice cream.
Hoshiya:
Well, then the door to my house is open and I will welcome the ice cream with open arms.
Joshuji:
Oh, so it is like that? You want me just for the ice cream?
Hoshiya:
Of course. 5 years of friendship and you’ve noticed that just now?
Joshuji:
The disrespect.
Hoshiya:
C’mon, you know I’m joking!
I’ll tell my parents you’re coming here.
Should we watch a movie?
Joshuji:
Let’s start a new anime.
You choose which one.
Hoshiya:
I adore you, hyung!
See you in a while!
“Mom! Joshua hyung is coming here!” I shout as I walk in the living room where my mother had gone after finishing washing the dishes.
“Is he going to sleep here?” She asks already getting up from the couch.
“I think so.”
“Okay, so we’ll leave. The living room is yours, we’ll go upstairs to watch the tv,” she says while nudging my father to make him stand up.
“Thank you, mom! I’ll bring some ice cream to you later.”
“Ice cream? Joshua did something, didn’t he?” My father asks. He knows that if ice cream is involved, it means that Joshua has something to make amends for.
“Yup, he forgot to tell me that he wouldn’t be able to come home with me today,” I whine to my parents.
“Oh, poor you!” My father cooes while pinching my cheek.
“Dad! Don’t mock me!”
“Don’t worry, my son. I’ll take him away.” My mother grabs my father by the arm and drags him upstairs so he will stop torturing me.
“Thank you! I owe you one!” I shout as they disappeared upstairs.
My parents really got used to this. It’s so Joshua-like to randomly come home after dinner bringing snacks with him. Every time he does that, it then ends in the same way with us passing out on the couch because it’s too late and we’re tired as fuck. The same thing happens when I am the one to crash at his place.
The first few times this happened, we were not prepared and so we’d end up sleeping with our clothes on and then ask the other to lend some clean clothes the day after. However, things have changed so we now always bring a bag with our pyjamas and a set of new clothes whenever we plan to go to the other’s house. At this point, we should consider the idea of freeing up some space in our closet so that we can leave at least one set of pyjamas and a set of new clothes. This way we wouldn’t be bothered about bringing our ‘survival kit’ every time.
My train of thoughts gets interrupted by the doorbell ringing. I check for the time and 10 minutes sharp have passed from the last text. Joshua’s on time. I run to the door and as soon as I open it, I’m faced with a black plastic bag.
“Ice cream, aaaaah!” Joshua screams while shaking the plastic bag.
“Was that a pun? Was I supposed to laugh at that?” I ask, facepalming.
“Yes?”
“Please don’t do that ever again.” I sigh.
“You don’t understand the art of this joke,” He says, sassily getting his way into my house “By the way, I brought ice cream as I promised.”
“Strawberry and chocolate?” I ask with expectant eyes.
“Of course, your favourite flavours,” He says giving me a little smile.
“You are indeed the best hyung!” I snatch the bag from his hands “The bowls are already on the counter waiting for the ice cream. You go get changed or else you will pass out still dressed like the last time you slept here. Roger that?”
“Yes, sir!” He makes the salute like a soldier and then marches towards the stairs.
While Joshua goes upstairs to get into his pyjamas, I walk in the kitchen to put the ice cream into the bowls. I add some toppings like chocolate chips and granola to the bowls belonging to my parents and I bring them into their room.
As Joshua takes a lot to get changed, I go to the living room to fix the sheets and the pillows on the pull-out couch. After doing that, I go to grab our bowls of ice cream only to find Joshua already on the couch waiting for me when I walk back in the living room.
“I’m ready to eat this ice cream,” Joshua says rubbing his hands.
I hand him his bowl then I throw myself on the couch. Two minutes sitting here and we are already fighting for the blankets. When we’ve found our balance, we start digging in the ice cream while watching the first episode of Black Clover.
The thing I love the most when we’re together watching the tv is that as soon as there’s one of those epic scenes, we look at each other and keep on making comments until we realise we lost another important scene. That’s why we then need to rewind part of the episode and try not to talk until the end.
However, tonight is different. We’re halfway through the episode when I notice that Joshua is not really here.
“Hyung, what’s up?” I ask as I pause the episode.
“Hm?”
“You’re not following it,” I say while pointing at the tv.
“That’s not true.” Joshua tries to defend.
“Hyung, you know there’s no use in lying.” I reprimand him.
“You’re right and I’m sorry. It’s just that I’m too tired,” he says letting out a sigh and slowly sliding onto the couch until he’s completely lying.
I turn off the tv and lie on my side of the couch, facing Joshua. I bring my blankets up until I’m covering my chin and he does the same.
“Is it because of the practice?” I ask, yawning as sleep starts creeping.
“Yeah. We need to practice a lot so that we’re sure we’ll do our best when we perform and, to be honest, it’s a little bit exhausting.” Joshua yawns too. He looks so drowsy.
“I know what you mean but if you want to get known, you need to sacrifice a lot. That’s because all of you are fighting together to achieve your dreams, am I right?” I ask, the tone of my voice suddenly going serious.
“Are you trying to sound more mature?” Joshua giggles before yawning again.
“From time to time I have to say things like this or else you will really think that I have no brain. You keep telling me that I’m 5 and I’m scared that sooner or later I will really forget I am actually 18!” I jokingly say to make him smile a bit.
“I really can’t with you.” Joshua smiles and shakes his head.
“I’m glad I made you smile, hyung.”
“Thank you, Soonie.” He brings one of his hands out of the blankets to ruffle my hair. “By the way, I’m terribly sorry for today. I swear I thought the text went through.”
“Don’t worry but don’t do that ever again, okay? Check twice next time because when you’re not with me, things happen.” And here I go again, thinking of that short guy.
“Things? What do you mean?” Joshua asks visibly confused.
“I met a vertically challenged asshole who forgot what good manners are.” The tone of my voice and my expression showing how annoyed I am at this situation.
“Wow, what did he do that got you so worked up, wild hamster?” He chuckles, poking my puffed cheeks.
“Let’s leave this topic for another day. It’s late now and you need to sleep as you’re tired! Plus tomorrow I have to go to school while you need to be at the library...”
“...and to the practice,” Joshua adds. “However, this time I can come home with you before going to Mingyu’s.”
“That’s perfect! Maybe this time I can avoid meeting people who got a stick up of their ass,” I say while shifting on the couch.
“Soonyoung!” Joshua almost shouts and hits my back that he is now facing “Stop! Go to sleep!”
“Yeah, yeah,” I deadpan.
“Good night, Soonie.” He sing-songs.
“You too, hyung!”
And like that, it’s a matter of time before we drift in Morpheus wide arms.
Notes:
Hope you enjoyed the chapter!
I'm curious about this vertically challenged guy's true identity...who is he? hahahaBy the way, the 'vobo, rabo & pabo' group chat is planning to hold the soonhoon awards! The idea is to let other people know about your soonhoon works so if you're interested and want more info, you can check the thread here https://bit.ly/2KVbH8o or dm me at @Yleisnotonfire1
Chapter Text
It’s 7 in the morning when the alarm on my phone goes off. Shinee’s Ring Ding Dong echoes in the living room signalling that I have to wake up. Damned alarm and who invented it!
If it was a normal day, I would sleep at least 20 minutes more and in fact, I don’t really want to get up, but today I need to rush as Joshua has to get ready here to go to work.
Do you know how people believe in the stereotype that women take hours to get ready? If that was really the case, then Joshua is a woman. Or maybe he’s worse.
It takes him 20 minutes just to shower and he doesn’t get out of the bathroom if every strand of his hair is not fixed in the way he wants to.
If I want to get to school on time, no if I want to get to school, I need to conquer the bathroom before he does that. If he gets it before me, we won’t ever be ready, not even for the end of the first period.
I go grab my things in my room and head to the bathroom. I get ready and wear the uniform in 10 minutes. After that, it’s the time of the truth. Is Joshua hyung still asleep?
I head downstairs to check on him and of course, he is still sleeping.
Damn, I really believe that not even an earthquake would be able to wake him up!
“Shua hyung, wake up!” I hate to do this because he will hold it against me for the entire day but I have to.
“Five more minutes, mom,” Joshua mumbles still half asleep. Do you get now why we are alike?
“Hyung, I’m not your mother and no, you can’t sleep anymore. I didn’t get to do that yesterday and you won’t do that today. Plus, it’s late and you still need to eat breakfast!” I scold him, mimicking what my mom did to me yesterday: being insisting until I got up from the bed.
“Do I really need to?” He turns towards me and rubs the sleep away from his eyes.
“Yes. You need to work and, what’s more important, you can’t skip meals! Now, get up!” I take the blankets away from him.
“Okay, I got it! There’s no need to be this annoying!” He gets up and heads toward the kitchen.
As mom hasn’t already woken up, I am the one that has to make breakfast. There isn’t enough time to cook something gourmet, so we just eat some cereals with fresh milk. Then Joshua goes to the bathroom to have a brisk shower while I sit on the couch to watch a little bit of tv. There’s nothing interesting as there are only the same endless morning dramas. I was zapping like there’s no tomorrow when I decide to put on the music channel and clean the kitchen while waiting.
“Wow! One day, you will be a great homemaker!” Joshua suddenly appears in the kitchen, startling me.
“Well, when my parents are not home or still asleep, someone else has to clean the house,” I say while putting the bowls in the dishwasher.
“And that someone is you?” He asks stifling a laugh.
“Of course! Who else there is in this room aside from me and you?” The question full of sarcasm.
“But if you can’t even tidy up your own room!” Joshua almost yells but manages to keep his tone as quiet as possible.
“Hey, my room is like a different world and you already know that. It’s like...Narnia!”
“I can’t…” He laughs and shakes his head.
“You just need to put up with me and not complain,” I say patting his back as to comfort him.
“Dear little bro, I’m doing that since you’ve stepped back in Korea,” Joshua says trying to keep his cool.
“That was so funny,” I say while fake laughing. “Now, move that ass of yours or we will be later than usual!”
We grab our things and get out of my house to finally walk to school. During the trip, we stop at our favourite cafè because Joshua has to grab his coffee.
When we get at the gate, I check the time and I’m surprised at us. Today I’m on time for classes which is a rare occasion. These are the times the teachers of the first period should appreciate: students sacrificing hours of sleep just to sit in their desks and listen to them. I’ve once read on the Net that your brain is not even fully functioning before 9 am, so why starting school at 8? It’s scientifically proven that we cannot focus so what’s the point of having classes this early? Can’t they change at least this one thing?
“See you at lunch, hyung?” I ask before parting ways.
“Yeah! Have a good day and try to stay awake as you woke up at dawn!” Joshua jokes.
“You too, have a good day and try not to flirt with too many students!” I reply.
“I may flirt but my heart is already taken and you know that!” Joshua says before disappearing into the library.
As for me, I walk in the class and I quickly go sitting next to Seokmin. He’s always the first to arrive at school and I sometimes believe that he’s the one opening the school gates, not the janitor.
“Good morning!” I greet him.
“Morning!” Seokmin greets back, one of his big and bright smiles plastered on his face. “Joshua slept at yours?”
“How do you know that? Did you put cameras in my house?” I ask while embracing myself as to protect myself.
“Idiot! The only times you come early is when he stays at your house.” Seokmin rolls his eyes.
“Yup, he came to my house yesterday. He did say that he had to make it up to me.” I say while grabbing my things from the backpack.
“He’s a man of his words,” Seokmin says, looking a bit dreamy.
“He indeed is!” I nod my head.
“What about you? Are you still mad at him?” Seokmin suddenly asks.
“No? Why should I be? Not that it was a big matter anyway.” I reply a little bit confused.
“I’m not talking about Joshua. It’s about yesterday’s accident.” He says as it was obvious from the start that he was referring to that.
“Oh my god, Seok! I had stopped thinking about it but now you have reminded me of...him!” I groan.
“I’ll give you two minutes and you’ll forget about him again.” Seokmin must have seen my confused face as he continues saying “First period today is maths.”
“That guy is totally forgotten now. I have an even worse problem to solve now.” I want to bang my head on the desk. I hate maths.
“Literally.” Seokmin chuckles.
I am about to reply when the teacher walks into the class while telling us to go sitting to our places as he has to take attendance.
Except for the first period, the school day goes by pretty quickly and uneventful, except for Seokmin almost choking on his food when Joshua said that one of our classmates asked for his number, it was super. The bell signalling the end of this school day rings and we are all grateful to it as the teacher had been talking for an hour straight without pausing, not even for a second. Seokmin leaves first as he has something to do later today while I stay a little longer in class because the teacher has something to ask a bunch of us.
When I finally get outside the library, I find Joshua already waiting for me.
“Hyung!” I shout while running towards him.
“Soonie!” He waves at me.
“For a while, I was afraid of not finding you here.”
“I had told you I would’ve walked home with you and then I would’ve gone to the practice.” Joshua rolls his eyes.
“What a kind hyung I have! He takes care of his little brother!” I pinch his cheek as I speak.
“Don’t overthink!” He swats my hand away from his cheek. “It’s just because I need to grab my things at home and because I need you to listen to the new song we’ve recorded.”
“Wow, you have already recorded a new song?” I ask, excited to hear a new masterpiece.
“Yes, Jihoon composed it and even wrote the lyrics!” He says while looking for the song on his phone.
“Oh, I didn’t know Jihoon produced songs,” I say, suddenly intrigued by this Jihoon.
“There are a lot of things you don’t know about him. He may be a lazy ass but he has a lot of skills hidden behind that laziness.” Joshua says, still not looking up from his phone.
“He must be really good if you’re praising him like this. You rarely compliment people as you prefer roasting them,” I say, expecting him to hit me.
He doesn’t do that but we both start laughing. Joshua finally finds the song so we can start heading home. He passes me one of the earpieces and when he’s sure I put it, he hits the play button. The song starts and we keep silent until the song ends, heads bobbing to the rhythm. It’s really beautiful and the feelings of the lyrics hit you really hard even though you may get tricked by the up-tempo beat.
“So, what do you think of it?” Joshua asks and he’s a bit nervous about the feedback, I can tell it from his tone.
“It’s really great, like really.” It’s the only thing I can say as I still need to get myself together after listening to it.
“Really? Aren’t you saying that because you’re my friend?” He asks still unsure.
“I know that I’m biased but I’m dead serious or else I wouldn’t have said that.” I stay quiet for a couple of seconds before adding “I’m positive that with this song you will have a lot of new fans.”
“I hope it will turn out as you said.” He sighs.
“If that won’t happen, it would be the demonstration that people do not understand anything about music,” I deadpan.
“Again, your opinion is biased!” He points a finger at me.
“Oh my! It’s not true! I only speak the truth and you know that!” I yell.
We had been quiet for a while when I suddenly say “Oh, right. That Jihoon is really good. Every time I hear him singing, my eyes start filling with tears.”
“You can say that! Our maknae has a very sweet and clear voice that gets right to your heart,” He states like a proud father.
“Maknae? Is he the youngest in the band?” I ask shocked.
“Yup, he’s the same age as you.”
“Really? I don’t know why but I have always assumed that you were more or less of the same age!” I still can’t believe that.
“No, it’s just Jeonghan, Seungcheol and I that are same age friends, the rest of them is younger than us and Jihoon is the maknae. Despite the young age, is better than us in a lot of things!” Here again the father-like tone...he can’t stop doing that.
“I bet he’s cocky because of that.” I automatically roll my eyes.
“Not at all! He keeps saying that he can’t do things even though he aces them when he actually does them. He’s also caring for his hyungs even though he won’t admit that he loves us. He’s a funny one too when you actually get to know him.”
“He can’t be as funny as you.” I joke as Joshua can’t compare to the Seoksoon duo.
“You could say that!”
“But I bet he beats you when it comes to being humble…”
“Stop it or I will be seriously offended” He chuckles.
Talking and joking, we get to the driveway of my house. I invite him to get in to drink a cup of tea and eat something before leaving.
“Are you sure you don’t want to come in? Not even if I make a cup of your favourite tea?” I try to persuade him.
“I can’t, Soonie. I need to go to Mingyu’s and I don’t want to be late.”
“Are you one hundred percent sure?” I insist.
“Yes. Maybe I can come over after the practice if it’s not too late at night.” He ruffles my hair.
“You know that it’s never too late to come over,” Says my mom suddenly popping from behind us, startling us a little bit.
“Mom! You’re already home?” I ask her.
“Yes, my dear.” She too ruffles my hair. “Today our team had finished checking a stack of papers earlier than planned and so the boss gave us a free afternoon,” she says while proudly pointing her thumb towards herself.
“That’s good!” I smile at her.
“Well, I need to get going. See you later!” Joshua interrupts us to greet us before leaving to head to his house.
“See you later!” My mom and I say at the same time, causing us to laugh.
My mom and I watch Joshua walk away before going inside the house.
While I change into more comfortable clothes, my mom makes some tea and we make small talk while drinking.
“Wait,” I suddenly say, remembering something really important. “Tomorrow is dad’s birthday!”
“You’re right, honey. However, tomorrow your dad is not going to be here as he has to leave due to a business trip.” Her expression darkening a bit.
“So we can’t celebrate his birthday?” The question sounding more like a whine.
“Not tomorrow, dear.” She sighs.
I can’t stand to see her like this so I am about to change the topic when I have a breakthrough. “What if we make a cake now and wish him a happy birthday when he comes home?”
“That’s a great idea!” Her face lights up again. “We can make a strawberry cake, his favourite one.” She says after thinking for a while which is the best cake to make.
“Do we have everything we need?” I ask her as probably we won’t have half of the ingredients to make the cake.
“Let me check...hmm…” She checks in the fridge and in the cupboards around the kitchen. “Not really.” I knew it. “We need just a few things. Can you go and buy them?” She makes puppy eyes to convince me to get out of the house again to go to the convenience store.
“Okay, what do I need to buy?”
“Eggs, sugar and strawberries.”
“I’ll be quicker than lightning,” I say while rushing towards the front door.
“I’m sure you will do that, but how about bringing money with you?” She shouts from the kitchen.
“Right, I forgot to grab my wallet.” I head back to run upstairs and grab the wallet from my backpack.
While I go again towards the front door I can hear my mom mumbling “You won’t ever change…”
And the things that happened later, made me think that maybe I shouldn’t have agreed to go out to buy the ingredients for the cake...
Chapter Text
I sprint out of the front door of my house. I need to be quick so that I can get back and bake the cake before dad gets home. If I get late the surprise effect will be ruined.
Luckily for me, the convenience store is right around the corner of my block and I know it like the back of my hand so I enter, buy all the things I need and rush outside, as fast as a lightning.
However, as I am running with my hand down, I bump into someone as soon as I step foot outside the store. I’m taken aback and so the shopping bag slips from my hands.
‘I can’t believe it! It happened yesterday too! Is this the fate trying to tell me to stay at home and never get out or to just pay more attention when I walk?’
I am about to pick up the bag from the ground while apologising, not daring to look at the person I hit when I hear him.
“I’m sor-”
“What’s wrong with all of you?”
‘Wait a minute...this voice..no, it can’t be….’
“You again?” The douche says in an accusatory voice.
“No way!” I groan annoyed that I’ve met him again and in the same way as yesterday.
“You still haven’t learned how to multitask? Like you know, walking and focusing on the things that are around you so that you don’t bump into them.” His sarcastic tone makes me want to punch him right here.
“You are the one who came out from nothing!” I defend myself.
“Look, I was standing here even before you came rushing outside. Moreover, is it this the way to get out of a store? It’s just normal that you end up bumping into people.”
“Well, maybe I have my reasons to run.”
“Well, unless the shop hasn’t set on fire, I don’t think there’s any reason to bolt out of a place like that.” He deadpans with a know-it-all expression on his face.
“Who are you to judge if my reason is a good one or not? You knob!” My voice raising an octave.
“I do not have time to waste on things like this.” His face showing that he’s trying to keep it together and not grab my collar again. “It’s better for you if I leave.”
He’s about to walk away when he turns towards me and says, “Be careful next time, you wouldn’t want to make a mess like this again.” and points towards a point next to my feet.
“Uh?”
Confused I follow his hand and I end up looking at the shopping bag that was still lying on the ground, completely forgotten.
‘Something is dripping from it...Wait…’
“Oh my god, the eggs!” I dramatically fall on the ground next to the bag “Now I need to get in again and buy them. Thank you so much, your douche.” I point an accusatory finger at him, almost crying from the frustration.
“You’re welcome,” He says with a smug grin on his face. “I sincerely hope not to meet you ever again.”
“I hope so too.”
“Good,” he says before starting to walk away.
“Good!” I yell at his retreating back not wanting to lose to him.
At these words, the guy turns around and comes towards me looking like he wants to beat me up.
‘I’m not scared. I can fight him.’ I keep repeating in my head.
He’s just a palm from my face when he suddenly gets down and picks up a strawberry from the shopping bag. He takes a bite of it and smirks before leaving, proud of his doing.
I release my breath that I hadn't noticed I was holding.
Angry and trying not to curse out loud, I head into the shop to buy again the eggs and go back home.
I haven’t even completely opened the door when I hear my mom asking “Why did it take you so long?”
“Something came up...the eggs broke.”
“Soonie...what should I do with you?” She chuckles and ruffles my hair.
“I swear it wasn’t my fault...this time. I bumped into a guy so the bag fell on the ground and the eggs broke.” I defend myself even though there’s no need to do that.
“Was he cute?” She asks nudging me with her elbow.
“MOM! WHAT?” I shriek.
“I was joking! C’mon, let’s bake this cake before it’s too late, shall we?” She takes two aprons, lending me mine.
We bake the cake trying not to make a mess in the kitchen, which is a total failure. You now know from whom I picked my clumsy trait, yes, from my mom.
After almost an hour and a half, the cake’s ready and the kitchen is clean. I dare to say that the cake looks very pretty with all that whipped cream and strawberries on top of it. I hope dad will like it!
While my mom was lucky and didn’t get anything on her, I have to go taking a brisk shower to get rid of the flour stuck on my body and hair. When I’m done and I’ve put my pyjamas, I join my mom on the couch.
I can’t really focus on the drama she is watching, so I decide to text Seokmin to know what he’s doing.
Hoshiya:
Seokminieee
DonkeyKong:
Soons!
What are you up to?
Hoshiya:
I’m waiting for dad to come home and have dinner.
What about you?
DonkeyKong:
I need to get up from my bed to cook dinner.
Ugh.
Do you have any juicy news?
Hoshiya:
Are you a ghost?
How do you know that I have some news ready for you?
DonkeyKong:
I had a hunch.
So, what happened?
Hoshiya:
You may not believe it but I met that vertically challenged guy again.
DonkeyKong:
Are you kidding me?
Hoshiya:
I wish I was kidding you, but no, I’m not.
I bumped into him again, outside the convenience store.
DonkeyKong:
Fate is mocking you HAHAHA.
Hoshiya:
Don’t you dare to laugh at me, Lee Seokmin.
Btw, what upset me the most was that because of him, the shopping bag slipped from my hands and the eggs I had bought broke.
DonkeyKong:
Did he apologise this time?
Hoshiya:
Of course he didn’t!
He has been a dick again but I’ve told him this time.
DonkeyKong:
What did he say?
Hoshiya:
He acted like it wasn’t his problem and he walked away.
But before doing that he picked up and ate one of the strawberries for my dad’s cake.
Right.
in.
front.
of.
my.
salad.
DonkeyKong:
Hahaha calm down!
You won’t meet him tomorrow too.
That’s if life doesn’t hate you for real.
Hoshiya:
Don’t say that!
Yesterday you said something like this and I met him today!
DonkeyKong:
Okay, I’ll shut up!
Now, I have to cook something or I’ll starve tonight.
Talk to you later!
Hoshiya:
Yeah, later!
I throw my phone on the couch and I try to focus on the drama to understand what’s going on and after a while, dad comes home.
We have dinner and the mood is even brighter than usual, laughing and mocking each other when talking about the making of the cake. At the end of the dinner, we bring dad his cake. sing happy birthday to him. Happy, he blows out the candles and opens the gift that mom had bought him when she came out from the company. He gives a kiss on my head and on mom’s too before starting a fight with the whipped cream. It’s useless to say that I need to wash my hair again and change in another pair of pyjamas.
Dad now really needs to go to sleep and I’m a bit sad that we have to wrap up the celebration like this but a long trip to Greece awaits him tomorrow so he really can’t stay awake any longer. I envy him a bit because he has the chance of seeing so many different places around the world thanks to his work and the company even pays for flight and hotel. However, it’s also true that his job kept him away from me and he sometimes regrets not having witnessed most of the most important events in my childhood. I don’t hate him for this though. I know he loves my mom and me and that’s what matters to me.
I wish a good night to him and to my mom, who is still in the kitchen to wash the dishes, and I go to my room. I throw myself on the bed, put my headset on and press the play button. Listening to music before going to sleep is really what I need right now.
I’m almost in Morpheus’ arms when I hear a loud ‘katok’ going off.
Joshuji:
My little bro!
Hoshiya:
My hyung!
Joshuji:
I just wanted to tell you that I can’t come to your house later.
We’re still in the middle of the practice.
Hoshiya:
Don’t worry, hyung.
I’ve imagined that you couldn’t come.
Plus, everyone was about to go to sleep.
Joshuji:
Oh, I see.
But I really wanted to drop by to wish a happy birthday to your father.
It’s midnight so it’s basically his birthday.
Well, I think I have to do that tomorrow morning when I’ll come to pick you up.
Hoshiya:
Tomorrow morning he has to leave for a business trip.
He won’t be here by the time you’ll come.
Joshuji:
Oh, well, I guess I’ll send him a text in the morning then.
Hoshiya:
Wait.
Since when do you have his phone number?
Joshuji:
Since his son doesn’t answer his phone when he’s hanging out with his friends aka Seokmin and me.
Hoshiya:
Gosh.
That man won’t ever leave me alone.
Joshuji:
One day, he probably will.
Don’t worry.
Now, go to sleep...it’s already late.
Hoshiya:
But I’m not sleepy (?)
Joshuji:
Go or tomorrow morning you’ll keep on whining that you haven’t gotten enough sleep and that you’re late for classes.
Hoshiya:
I have never complained.
Joshuji:
Really?
Hoshiya:
Maybe a couple of times I did something that resembled a whine.
Joshuji:
…
Hoshiya:
Okay!
You’re right, I whine a lot.
You’re happy?
Joshuji:
You wouldn’t believe how HAHAHA.
Hoshiya:
I hate you.
Joshuji:
Nah, you love me.
Now, go.
Good night.
Hoshiya:
Good night, hyung!
See you tomorrow morning.
Joshuji:
See you tomorrow, Soonie!
I turn off my phone after Joshua’s text and after sending Seokmin his goodnight text to try and get some sleep.
However, my mind is still in full activity and can’t stop thinking of that guy who I bumped into in the span of these two days.
‘I can’t believe that someone as annoying and irritating like that exists. Next time, and I hope for him that there won’t be a next time, he’s going to see who Kwon Soonyoung is. I’m going to teach him a lesson!’
With that burning desire of prevailing against that asshole, I drift off to sleep.
Notes:
I'm sorry if this chapter is a bit short but the MAMA week and other things kept me busy! I'll try posting another chapter as soon as possible!
Chapter Text
At 7:30 am, the alarm goes off. I snooze the alarm and I sleep for another 10 minutes before getting up to have a cold shower so that I can be fully awake. When I’m dressed with my school uniform and I have gotten rid of the bird’s nest on my head, I run downstairs to have breakfast.
The first thing I notice when I come downstairs is that on the coffee table in the living room there’s a bright yellow post-it.
Surely, it was the mom the one who left it there.
‘I am dropping your father off at the airport. I will go to the office straight after that. Your breakfast is already on the kitchen table, you just need to heat it in the microwave. See you at home tonight. Lots of love from mom.’
I walk into the kitchen and I look at the table. When my eyes finally focus, I see that mom made pancakes. She even prepared some fruit next to them! She really knows me the best!
I heat a couple of pancakes and I put the rest of them into a Tupperware so that I can bring them to Joshua. If he knew that mom made it and I haven’t brought him any, I would be a dead man.
I quickly eat my portion of pancakes topped with banana and chocolate syrup, then I brush my teeth and by the time I’m done, the doorbell rings. Joshua is here, on time, as always. I take my time to open the door as it’s still quite early and we’re not in a rush.
“Shall we go?” Joshua greets me with a smile.
“Good morning to you, too!” I say and Joshua snorts. “Let’s go.”
I put my favourite pair of white snickers, grab my bag and I lock up the door once I stepped out of the house.
“How are you, hyung?” I ask Joshua as I see that his usual honey skin is a shade paler.
“Tired and hungry. I skipped breakfast so that I could sleep a little bit more.”
“You’re lucky to have me then.” I grab the plastic bag with the Tupperware and shove it in Joshua’s hands. “Mom made pancakes and I brought you some.”
“That’s great! I love you both!” He says hugging me
“What would you do without me?” I flip my non-existent long hair.
“Probably, I would die of hunger or loneliness.” He chuckles.
“And of boredom too! I know you can’t live without my fantastic jokes.”
“I can live without them,” Joshua says after pretending to think about it. “I did that up until 5 years ago and I was doing fine!”
“Ya!” I point an accusing finger to him. “You could agree with me sometimes, you know?!”
“I will do that when my stomach will be full.” Joshua pats his stomach and we both fall silent for a while as Joshua is stuffing his face with the pancakes.
When we have almost reached the school gates, I break the silence with a quite random question.
“Yesterday you wrapped up the practice late, right?”
“Yup...it was because of Jihoon and Seungcheol, again. They were both late. Seungcheol is busy writing some rap parts and Jihoon said it was because all of a sudden something came up.”
“Oh, I can totally understand him. Me too, when I’m late, I tell it’s because something unexpected happened on the way to where I am heading to.” I cover up my mouth after realising that I’ve just let one of my biggest secrets slip out of my mouth.
Joshua giggles at my actions and then says, “You should meet him. Jihoon, I mean. I think you two would get along well.”
“Do you think so?”
“Yup. I will try and set up a dinner with the guys and I’ll introduce them to you as soon as possible.”
“It would be great! That way, I could finally meet your friends!” I squeal at the idea of getting introduced to the infamous Jeonghan’s bitches.
“I’ll let you know the date as soon as I get to talk about this with the rest of the band!” Joshua says before leaving a daydreaming me in the middle of the school courtyard.
‘I will finally meet him.’
Today I’m not particularly focused on the lesson and there’s nothing new about it. What is weird is that I don’t even want to talk to Seokmin using our method of writing on pieces of paper.
There’s something in the air that keeps getting me distracted...I can’t even remember what class I am in right now. Is it literature? Maybe it’s Korean. I don’t know. The only thing I know is that I just want to look out from the window and stop for a while to doodle things on my notebook. The pencil flies on the paper, leaving behind meaningless lines that don’t follow a particular pattern, just the flow of my thoughts. Curved lines that suddenly break at the changing of thought. It looks like one of those modern painting that seems to have no meaning at all when you first look at them. However, the more you observe, the more you can seem to partly understand what was going on the painter’s mind. You notice if at the moment they were troubled or peaceful because it’s all in those lines. The mind wanders free on the thread of those lines that go in a direction, then in another one to just go back at the starting point. I take my eyes off the paper and I look outside, again. Today the weather’s great. There are just a few white cotton-candy-like clouds in the blue sky: some are in a weird but funny shape, some seem to chase each other like little children at the park. Everything is quiet and at the moment, I would be really glad be out there to enjoy that quietness, become one with that scenery that, as cliché as it may sound, it gives me a sense of peace.
I get back to reality the moment the sound of the bell rings in my ears. Apparently, the school day has ended and Seokmin is next to my desk. He moves his lips but I seem to be still in a haze as I can’t understand what he is saying.
“Hey Soons, are you here with us?” Seokmin waves a hand in front of me. I must’ve been staring at him.
“Yes, yes! I’m sorry. What were you saying?”
“I was asking you if you want me to drop you off at your house. My dad’s coming to pick me up and I can give you a ride so you can avoid having hard luck on the trail.” He sniggers.
“Don’t worry, my friend. I’ll go home with Joshua hyung,” I say, pointing my thumb towards the door. “At lunch, he told me that he would’ve walked home with me as today’s practice session is at his house.”
“You could go there and meet them, you know?” Seokmin leans more on my desk, a quite evil smirk on his face.
“Yeah, but I don’t want to,” I say while getting up and slinging my bag over the shoulder. “Joshua and I already spend a lot of time together and this is just one of the few times he has to stay with his friends. I don’t want to meddle unless he is the one to say so.”
“You’re right,” Seokmin agrees after thinking about it. “It’s better to let him have some privacy.”
Seokmin is about to leave when something comes up in my mind.
“Hey, Seok.” And he turns around upon being called. “Since today we’ve got nothing to do, what about going out for a walk?”
“Sounds good to me! Should we go to the cafè?”
“The usual caramel macchiato…” I start saying.
“...at our usual place!” And Seokmin ends. We both start laughing at that. “We’ll meet at 6 pm in front of the cafe, okay?”
“Call! See you later!” I wave at him as he starts walking again.
“Later!”
I’m about to walk out of the classroom when I notice that Joshua is already waiting for me at the door. A lot of girls are checking him up and then spare glances of approval at each other before starting giggling in hope to get noticed by the handsome boy standing in front of them. Joshua is popular with girls even though he would always deny that and say that he’s just average. I am average, not him!
“You finally got out of your class!”
“I had my head in the clouds. It took a while to come back to Earth,” I state, as a matter of fact, shrugging my shoulders.
“So you were being just you,” Joshua deadpans.
“Exactly, what’s even the point in trying and deny that, am I right?” Our chuckles resonate in the almost empty hallway. “How was work today?”
“Same people coming, same books being picked up for the same essays,” he counts on his fingers. “At least I can take advantage of the free time I get while reordering the books and search for the things Seokmin asks me to find.” He rolls his eyes as it’s not the first time that he has to research myths and legends that inspire those creepy video games sometimes Seokmin likes playing.
“What is it now? A new race of zombies? Indigo children?”
“Trust me, you don’t want to know,” Joshua says putting a hand on my shoulder. “You easily get scared.”
“You’re the one talking! The man who fears nothing! Joshua the brave!”
“Okay, okay, I got it!” Joshua tries to shush me as the few students left in the schoolyard were now watching us. “I’ve warned you. It’s the legend about the Wendigos.”
“Those people who get possessed by evil spirits as soon as they eat human flesh?”
“Yup, them! How did you know that?” Joshua asks, shocked that I’m not even bothered by these cannibal beings.
“Seokmin has been talking about this for days and showed me some pics and videos.”
“True...he won’t shut up about it.” A fond smile spreads on Joshua’s face.
“But it’s kind of interesting spending time listening to these stories. Seokmin is so passionate about it.”
“You should spend your time studying!”
“But what they teach at school isn’t this interesting! They are not catchy enough!” I say as this could be a valid excuse to defend my lost cause.
“You will fail your classes if you don’t study!”
“That’s impossible, hyung. You know that, in the end, I will always pass.” A smug look on my face.
“You’re just lucky.”
“No, it’s called being good.” I mockingly brag about my ability to save my own ass at the last minute when the desperation takes over and, like magic, makes me learn every single thing on my notes.
“C’mon, hyung. Walk faster or you’ll be late for your rehearsals.” I push him from behind to make him fasten his pace as we're still halfway.
“Hey, don’t worry. They won’t die if they wait a little bit.”
“It’s not polite to make them wait for you, you know?”
“Says the one who always makes me wait.”
“That’s not true!”
“Yeah, yeah, whatever you say.” Joshua then changes the topic just so he won’t have to admit that I’m not always late. “Planned something for today?”
“I will hang out with Seokmin.”
“Usual caramel macchiato at the same place?” Joshua asks but it’s just a rhetorical question as he already knows the answer.
“Yup...are we this predictable?”
“You go to the same cafè and order the same coffee since you came here in Seoul!”
“Well...that’s true!” I chuckle.
“I swear that you would get along with Jihoon. He is a man of habits, too. It’s been quite a while since he started ordering the same black coffee from the same place as you. Who knows, maybe you even met him.”
“He seems to have a great taste in cafès. Not coffee though. How could he drink that poison?”
“Not everyone is a baby like you who can’t handle the bitter taste of coffee.” He flicks my forehead for no apparent reason.
“Hey! Why did you do that?”
Joshua doesn’t answer my question and keeps talking about Jihoon. “Indeed, he is an interesting guy. I think you will find a lot in common with him because of your age,” he says, fingers on his chin as he is thinking about topics that could “unite” this Jihoon and me.
“What do you mean?”
“You are the same age so maybe that’s why you kind of like the same things. Anime, music, eating…”
“Eating...now I’m hungry!” My stomach rumbles as to prove my statement.
“You really are something else,” Joshua says before doing a dramatic facepalm.
“You are the one who mentioned eating. I haven’t eaten since lunch!”
“I forgot that the monster inside you has to be fed every two hours.”
“Every hour if I’m nervous.” While cackling, I notice that we’ve reached our destination. “Hyung, we’re in front of your house.” I point towards Joshua’s house as if he hadn’t seen it. “There’s no need to escort me home, nobody will kidnap me.”
“You’re a baby, I need to walk you home.”
“Please, don’t. You can literally see me from here,” I say while pointing at where Joshua’s standing. “So I’ll go there and wave at you, okay?”
“Okay.” He sighs knowing there's no way he can win an argument against me.
I high-five him and then start running towards my house. When I get in front of the door, I stop and turn around to wave at him as I’ve promised. Joshua does the same then sticks his tongue out and disappears through the door.
Once I’m inside my house, I go straight for the couch. The idea of napping it’s so appealing that I check the time.
“It’s 5 pm and I’ll see Seokmin in an hour. I can rest for 5 minutes then I’ll get changed.”
I close my eyes and something that shouldn’t have happened, happens.
I was fast asleep and dreaming of eating a plate of katsudon with Victor Nikiforov when I jolt up because of the notification sound coming from my phone. I quickly check the time and it’s a quarter to six. It’s super late! I then check the notification and it’s a text from Seokmin
DonkeyKong:
I just got out of my house, see you at the café!
Hoshiya:
Sure!
I’m already heading there!
Lie.
I am still with my uniform on and my hair looks like a bird’s nest as it was this morning.
I get undressed as I walk upstairs to get into my room. I wear the first pair of jeans I find on the floor and the first sweater I grab from the closet, hoping that they will somewhat match.
I run to the bathroom to style my hair down, my bangs almost covering my eyes still puffy from the “nap”, I brush my teeth and run again downstairs. I leave a post it for my mom, telling her I went out with Seokmin and that I would be home for dinner.
I check the time again and it shows a big “5:55 pm” on the screen.
“Crap, I need to take my ass there as soon as possible!”
I wear my shoes, lock the door behind me and I sprint towards the street.
I run as fast as I can on the pavement, trying to slalom among the few people walking there.
‘Seokmin will kill me if I get late.’
While I run, I don’t know why but my mind wanders to those movie scenes where you can see the female lead running while wearing ridiculously high stilettos. How the hell they can do that? It already burns my thighs to run with sneakers, I cannot imagine the pain of running with those stilts on.
Too focused on these useless thoughts, I don’t notice that there’s a guy in front of me. My body doesn’t react fast enough and you know what? I bump right into him, head first.
How do people say? Everything happens in threes. Well, that’s right. Three out of three days, I’ve managed to get myself in the same damned situation. This time, I really hope that asshole is not involved.
Oh and, of course, I have fallen “graciously” on the ground.
I hesitantly look up and I swear I go pale in a nanosecond.
“I can’t believe it,” the guy says, annoyance evident from his tone.
“You’re a nightmare! Why are you always involved in this?” My arms flailing to make him understand what ‘this’ is. Basically, me bumping into him.
“You are the one who always hits me,” he says trying to blame it on me.
“You are the one who always stays in the middle of the road.”
“I’m starting to think that you’re stalking me and do this on purpose just so you can talk to me. Am I that handsome?” He smirks and then runs a hand through his hair.
“You’d love that,” I deadpan. “I’m sorry to disappoint you but you’re not that handsome. Actually, I’m not sorry at all.”
“Idiot,” he mutters thinking that I wouldn’t hear him. Well, he’s wrong.
“And you’re a knob.”
“I know, you’ve already told me that yesterday.”
“Good. Glad to know that my point got across.” I cross my arms over my chest.
“Good, now move. I need to go that way.” He points at the direction where I am coming from.
“I’m sorry, your Highness if I’m standing in your way.” I bow and stress the word ‘highness’ as this guy isn’t that tall. Is he around 1,60 meters? Is he a middle schooler? Whatever, it doesn’t matter.
“You’re forgiven.”
“Are you kidding me?” I ask, shocked by this guy’s audacity.
“Why should I be kidding you? I’m just accepting your apology.”
“My apology.” I snort. “I can’t believe it.”
Suddenly my phone starts buzzing and a loud ‘katok’ comes from it.
“It’s your phone,” the guy says pointing at the front pocket of my jeans.
“I know that it’s my phone.”
“Answer, the sound is bothering me,” he distorts his face as the sound keeps coming from the phone.
“I am the one who decides when to answer.” I reach for the pocket and then add, “If I take the phone out it’s not because you told me to do that, it’s because I want to check who’s texting me.”
Of course, it’s Seokmin. I told him I was on my way 10 minutes ago.
DonkeyKong:
Where are you?
I’m waiting outside the café.
Don’t tell me you’re not coming anymore.
Hoshiya:
Had a bit of a snag.
I’ll tell you when I get there.
Be there in a minute.
I look up and the guy is not in front of me anymore. I turn around and I see him leaving.
“Well, I wish not having to tell you this again. Focus on your walking and not on your thinking,” he says without looking at me.
“And you try to stop your mouth from saying bullshit!”
Hoping that he won’t turn around, I stick my tongue out at him. I know it’s kind of childish but I really can’t stand him.
“You’re finally here!” Seokmin exclaims trying to look like he’s mad at me but inevitably fails.
“I’m sorry, Seok.”
“C’mon, let’s get inside so that you can tell me what happened.”
We get inside and sit at “our” booth. Seokmin and I don’t even have to place our orders because, as soon as the waitress sees us, she smiles and goes straight to the counter to get our coffees done. She knows us too well so, after a while, she brings our caramel macchiatos to our table. Joshua swears that the girl remembers our orders just because she has a crush on Seokmin. In reality, Joshua just likes to tease Seokmin and watching him getting flustered.
“You know, every time there’s this in front of you, you have heart eyes.” He points at the cups standing on the table.
“You know how much I love this. I don’t like absolute coffee but this is just the perfect mixture of coffee and sugar. Without it, I would be a zombie.”
“When was the last time that you had a decent amount of sleep?” He asks seriously concerned about my sleeping schedule.
“I don’t even know anymore.” I rub my nape, embarrassed by the fact that my friends have to nag at me because of how late I sleep at night.
“You need to rest more, Soon.”
“I know, but habits are hard to break. However, I will try to do that, okay?”
“How many times have you already said that?”
“Five?"
“If you count just the last six months,” he sighs. “Please, promise me that you will really try.”
“I swear on my Naruto’s collection,” I put my right hand on my heart while having the left one lifted to make an oath.
“I will take the entire collection if you don’t do as promised,” Seokmin threats me and I really regret putting my favourite collection at stake. “Now, tell me what happened.”
“I met someone on the way here,” I say through gritted teeth.
“WHO?” Seokmin almost yells.
“Try to guess…”
“Don’t tell me it’s the assh-, ehm, that guy,” Seokmin says, surprise shows on his face.
“I won’t tell you, then.” I run my fingertips along the rim of my cup.
“Oh my God, are you for real? He’s a nightmare!”
“That’s exactly what I told him.”
“No way!” Seokmin takes a sip of his coffee before asking, “How is it possible to meet the same person for three days in a row?”
“Let’s not forget the fact that I’ve been meeting him in the same way, too. Bumping into him three times and that’s because he’s always at the wrong place at the wrong time.” I really am frustrated at the thought of all of this. It’s just ridiculous.
“Really?” Seokmin’s eyes go wide all of a sudden and I’m worried they could pop out of his head.
“I swear! He had even the guts to say that I stalk him and crash into him on purpose.”
“Has he gone insane?” His voice is so high pitched that it grabs the attention of the few customers around.
“I think so.”
“Don’t you have any clue about who this person is?”
“Not at all and I’m not interested in finding out who he is.” I look outside the window and take a sip of my lukewarm caramel macchiato.
“Damn, I’m curious! I want to see him!”
“If you stick to me, we may meet him tomorrow, too.”
“Do you think so?” Seokmin asks as if he’s really hoping to run into him the day after.
“No, I’m joking. I don’t want to meet him anymore.” I fiddle with the handle of the half-empty cup.
“Every time one of us said that you ended up meeting him.”
“Right, the exact opposite of what we wished, happened. I need to tell this to Shua hyung.”
“Knowing him, he will laugh at you a lot!” He chuckles.
“Yeah, I know!” I chuckle, too deciding that it’s better to laugh at the situation than to get mad at that little guy. “Speaking of Shua hyung, he said that soon he will plan a dinner with the Jeonghan’s bitches so that he can introduce them to us.”
“Oh, really?”
“Yes! I need to ask him if they have already decided when to do that.” I gulp down the rest of the coffee and then proceed squealing. “Finally we will meet them!”
“You know that I’m only interested in one person from that band.” A slight blush creeps on his cheeks.
“And it’s Hong Joshua!” I yell. All the people inside here and maybe even those passing by the street have heard me.
“Keep your voice down!” He shushes me and slaps my arm.
“I’m sorry.”
“Don’t do that ever again or I will kick you.” His eyes are so fierce that I really fear for my life, better say that I fear for my shin.
“I promise!” I throw my hands in the air to prove that I surrender to his threat. “By the way, I think that Shua hyung wants to introduce me to a specific person,” I tell Seokmin as I remember the conversation I had earlier with Joshua.
“And who is this person?”
“Jihoon. Joshua said we’re the same age and because of this, he has this weird idea that we will get along well. Something about sharing some interests.” I shake my head as to shake off the idea. It just doesn't make sense. How come having the same age involves having the same interests?
“Who knows, maybe this meeting could lead to other things…” Seokmin doesn’t finish his sentence but making it clear what “other things” stands for.
“Nah! I’m good with my life as it is. I’m already a mess, a boy would mess it up even more!”
“Well, you do have a point. You’re a mess.”
“Yah!” I get up just to flick his forehead.
“I’m joking.” He sniggers while rubbing the spot I hit.
“However, I have to admit that I am curious to meet him.”
“See? He has already gotten your attention!”
“That’s not true! I was just wondering if we would really get along,” I say trying to explain my previous statement.
“I forgot that the only thing that has your attention is food.”
“Can’t deny that!”
We both start laughing out loud and when we calm down, we change the topic, chatting at the cafè about this and that for a little while longer before going back home.
Notes:
I'm sorry if this chapter took quite a while but I stopped for a bit to post my soonhoon Christmas tale on Twitter.
By the way, I have curious cat now so if you want, you can hit me up there to ask questions about the au or whatever thing crosses your mind!Here's the link https://curiouscat.me/Yleisnotonfire
Chapter Text
Joshua’s point of view
These last days spent practising with Jeonghan’s bitches are killing me.
I can’t rest a lot but what saddens me the most is that I can’t spend time with Soonyoung and Seokmin. We used to hang out a lot just the three of us before the band got called a lot for different events in pubs.
Soonyoung just told me that now they went to drink a Caramel Macchiato...I envy them so much because I would kill for a cup of that coffee and a chat with my two best friends!
However, no matter how much I complain about it being tiring, the band is a part of me. It means spending time with my friends and it’s also a way for us to show people what we can do, to boast about our skills. It’s also a way to enjoy our time, to express our ideas and feelings through our songs, to make people relate to us, to make them understand they’re not alone in this cold, big world.
“Earth calling Joshua! Hyung, are you here with us?” Mingyu waves a hand in front of my eyes who lost all of their focus.
“Yeah, Mingyu. Don’t worry.” I look at him and smile to reassure I’m really with them.
“He’s here, but what about Jihoon? Where’s he?” Seungcheol asks from the couch he’s laying on.
“I tried calling him but he doesn’t answer,” Jeonghan says from the other side of the room, phone still attached to his ear, trying to get in contact with Jihoon.
“Why is he late?” Seungkwan asks a little bit annoyed.
“Maybe he has a reason to why he is this late,” Wonwoo tries to defend Jihoon while finishing the lyrics for his rap part in the new song.
“Yeah, but it’s been three days since he’s 'this late'.” Jeonghan fingers flying on the screen of his phone to send a text to Jihoon.
“And the later he arrives, the later our practice ends.” Seungkwan really can’t stop complaining.
“Tomorrow we need to work, we can’t end too late at night.” Seungcheol yawns, his eyes slowly closing.
“Today, even I got here on time!” Mingyu suddenly gets up from his seat as to emphasise the fact that this is a rare event.
“I’ll try to call him.” Wonwoo sighs while picking the phone from the front pocket of his jeans.
“No need to do that. I’m here,” Jihoon says, walking in the living room where all of us was waiting for him.
We hadn’t noticed that Jeonghan left the room to open the door and he’s now behind Jihoon, ready to scold him as a mother would do with his son who got home late.
“Where have you been?”
“Something came up when I was coming here.”
“Again? What in the world has happen to you that you got late for three days?” The tone of Jeonghan’s voice is slightly frustrated.
“Wait, have you perhaps find a lover, hyung?” Seungkwan suddenly asks, interrupting the scolding.
“What? Me? I hope you’re kidding.” Jihoon is clearly annoyed by Seungkwan’s statement.
“He’s denying it! So he really found himself a lover!” Mingyu stands up from his chair, pointing a finger at Jihoon and laughing.
“When will we have the pleasure of meeting this special someone?” Wonwoo started mocking him too, knowing that there aren’t a lot of occasions to tease the little one of their band.
“Listen here, I don’t have a lover,” Jihoon stomps one of his feet to the ground. “Yeah, these days I was late at practices because of a guy but there’s nothing going on between us. He’s just a clumsy idiot.” He huffs
“Are you sure?” I ask, eyebrows wriggling and with a smirk on.
“Never been so sure of something in my life. I can’t stand him and I don’t even know him or his name. The only thing I know is that I don’t want to meet him ever again.”
“Woah, calm down. Why are you so angry at him?”
“Because he keeps blaming me for his mistakes and wanting to be right! Plus, he’s haughty!”
“Seems like a tough one,” Seungcheol says, the corners of his mouth a slightly upwards as he enjoys seeing Jihoon frustrated like this by someone that it’s not Mingyu or Seungkwan.
“You can say that!”
Jihoon sighs and is about to go sitting on the couch when Seungkwan clears his throat to grab everyone’s attention.
“Not to be that kind of guy, but we really should start practising or we will never be able to get home.”
All of us nods and sits up from their comfortable spots on armchairs and couches to go to their instruments: Mingyu and I go to our guitars while Jeonghan comes next to me to take his bass; Seungkwan is at the keyboard and Jihoon at the drums; Seungcheol and Wonwoo are ready to take charge of the rap and some vocals.
After checking that everyone’s ready, Jihoon gives us the tempo with his drumsticks to start playing our first song. As we go on with the rehearsing, we sing some of our old songs and Seungkwan and Mingyu practice even their MCing skills before coming back to play and sing again.
To be honest, this is a bit tiring but nothing can compare to the sense of fulfilment in seeing the group growing not only in skills but also in number. A couple of years ago, when everything started, it was just the four of us: Seungcheol, Jeonghan, Wonwoo and I. Now, there’s seven of us with Seungkwan, Mingyu and Jihoon.
Our family became bigger and even louder as we like joking around but that’s why we love Jeonghan’s bitches a lot and we were formerly called Al1.
Before this, we were ‘alone’ but now we’re together, we’re 'all one'.
We’re taking a little break, sprawled on the floor when I see the screen of my phone lighting up and showing a notification from the Kakaotalk app.
Hoshiya:
Don’t you think that we’ve forgotten you!
There’s a caramel macchiato waiting for you!
You’re the one to decide: should I buy one and bring it to you there or do you want to come to my house later and I will make it?
As I read the text, a smile blooms on my face.
I know that I pester him, but I really don’t know what I would be doing if that little rascal wasn’t in my life. He takes care of me whenever he can, even if it should be the other way round as I’m the hyung. He treats me as if we were blood brothers and not just friends.
He’s a very kind and sweet guy even though he puts the tough guy façade on.
Joshuji:
Thank you, Soonie!
I will come to yours if we don’t wrap up too late!
“Who are you texting to, hyung?” Mingyu rolls to where I am laying on the floor.
“Soonie, my best friend.”
“The one from the canteen?”
“Yup, the one who kind of looks like a hamster.” I chuckle imagining Soonyoung’s annoyed face if he heard that.
“Oh, I remember him!”
“You know, I have actually told him that I would set up a dinner with all of you.”
“Why? He wants to meet us?” Seungcheol asks, showing that he was eavesdropping from where he was staying, next to Jeonghan.
“Exactly. He’s not only my friend but he’s also our first fan, that’s why I want to introduce him to you,” I say as I lift my self, laying on my forearms.
“Every friend of yours is also our friend, you know that.”
“Plus, he’s really a cool guy! His personality is a mix of Seungkwan’s and Jihoon’s.”
“I am kind of curious now,” Jihoon says, hoping nobody would hear him, but I did as I was right beside him.
“Me too! A new friend! That’s cool!” Seungkwan stands up faster than The Flash would’ve done and starts clapping, excited by the idea of meeting someone new.
“That’s if you don’t scare him off before you can even get to introduce yourself,” Jeonghan suddenly says.
Everyone bursts out laughing as Seungkwan pretends to be mad at us, especially at Jeonghan.
As we keep on bantering and cooing at Seungkwan, we start practising again and we work even harder than before.
We need to be really good for our next event.
Soonyoung’s point of view
I was checking my Twitter timeline when I hear the doorbell.
I’m wondering who it might be and I check the time on the phone.
It’s eleven in the evening and this means it can be only one person who’s here at this hour. I open the door and automatically smile when I see Joshua standing in front of me.
“I brought some chocolate cake!” He says as he takes his shoes off.
“I love you, you know?”
“I couldn’t come here empty-handed, moreover, it’s delicious if combined with a homemade caramel macchiato.” Joshua is licking his lips as he could already taste the cake and the coffee.
“Come on, get inside,” I say when I grab him by his shoulder and literally push him inside the living room.
“Manners, young man. I’m still your hyung!” He complains while trying to glare at me.
“Forgive me, hyung-nim. From this moment onwards, I will address to you with more respect in my words.” I humbly bow to him.
“Idiot.” He laughs and takes off his coat, hanging it on the rack.
“Now, give me the bag with the cake and go wearing your pyjamas. I will make some delicious coffee!”
“What happened to the respect?” Joshua lifts his right eyebrow at me.
“He went to take a walk around.” Again, I push him towards the stairs. “Hurry up!”
“Yes, sir.” Joshua brings his hand to his temple as if he was a soldier and goes upstairs to get changed.
In the meantime, I take two empty cups and put in there some pieces of chocolate caramel and a tiny bit of milk.
I melt the chocolate into the microwave and pour some more milk in it. I keep heating the mixture of chocolate and milk as I make the coffee.
Just one shot of espresso in each cup et voilà! The caramel macchiato is ready!
I take the plastic container with the cake out of the bag and, as soon as I put everything on a tray, Joshua walks in the kitchen.
“Smells like caramel in here,” he says while sniffing the air just like a dog would do.
“Why do you think it called caramel macchiato for?” I snigger. “Should we watch something while eating?”
“Not today. It’s late and tomorrow we need to get up early. Besides, I’m pretty sure I will fall asleep as soon as my head hits the pillow."
“Okay, okay. I get it.”
I pick the tray with our desserts on and reach Joshua who’s already sitting at the end of the dining table. I put the cups and the plates on the wooden surface of the table before sitting at his left.
Just as I started munching on my slice of cake, Joshua drops the bomb.
“You know, I talked to the guys about the dinner.”
“Yeah? What did they say?”
“They can’t wait to meet you,” Joshua says with a smile on his face, eyes almost disappearing into crescents.
“Really? You’re not kidding me, right?"
“It’s for real. They even set the date.” He takes a sip of the coffee and hums as he likes the taste of the homemade caramel macchiato.
“When is it?”
“This Saturday evening.”
“WHAT?” I screech. “Oh my God! I’m not mentally prepared for this!” Hands reaching my temples to massage them.
“Why?” Joshua asks genuinely confused.
“We’re talking about dining with seven people, six of them are my best friend's friends. My first impression has to be good or else what will they think of me? Wait. What should I wear? What should I say? Do I need to put a little bit of BB cream? The pressure is too much to handle,” I am at the point I am blurting out every single thing crossing my mind, almost without taking a breath in between my words.
“Woah! Slow down a bit!” Joshua puts his hand on my shoulder and pats me. “You’re getting too nervous. They will like you no matter what, trust me.”
“Okay.” I take some deep breaths to calm down and try to be more chill about the issue. “I’m calm. I still need to find an answer to all of these question, though.” I take a pause to think about what to do, but I sigh as nothing comes into my mind. “Tomorrow, I will talk about this with Seokmin.”
“Oh, of course, he’s invited too,” Joshua says, with a pink blush creeping on his cheeks that doesn’t get unnoticed.
“I was about to ask you that! Our telepathy game is getting stronger, hyung!”
“This is because I know you way too well and Seokmin is my friend too, don’t forget that!” He nervously taps his fingers on the sides of the empty cup when he mentions the word ‘friend’.
“Friend, true,” I look at him, waiting for him to crumble under my gaze and finally say the truth about having a crush on Seokmin but nothing happens. “Well, I think tomorrow we will be shopping after school,” I say as I stand up to pick our cups and plates.
“Are you for real?”
“I told you, the first impression means a lot. When you see someone for the first time, you can already understand if they can be your friends or not,” I state matter-of-factly after putting the dirty dishes into the sink as I will wash them tomorrow morning.
“If that was the case and I should’ve based on my first impression of you, we wouldn’t be friends right now.” Joshua has a smug look on his face, thinking about our first meeting as he makes his way towards the hallway before the stairs.
“It’s not funny.” I stick my tongue out and quickly change the topic before I can cringe at the memory of that day. “Okay, do you want to come with us? So you can advise and protect us.”
“I’m up for it if we won’t be practising!” He then reflects upon my words and adds, “But why should I protect you?”
“You have to protect me from bumping into other people.”
“It happened again?” Joshua’s eyes wide open and I fear his eyeballs may pop out of his orbs.
“It’s been three days that this is happening! I can’t have gotten this clumsy!” I grab and ruffle my hair in frustration.
“You’ve always been like that, don’t even try to deny it. Again, should I remind you of how we met?”
Here he goes. If he doesn’t bring up this accident once a month, he’s not happy.
“It was an accident, okay? Your foot was in the way!” I try to defend myself.
“Soonyoung, my dearest bro, you tripped over your own feet and pushed me into one of the library shelves!”
“I.tripped.over.your.foot,” I slowly spell every word through gritted teeth.
“Whatever it helps you sleeping!” He says and starts climbing the stairs.
“Shut up! Let’s get ready for bed,” I pout and pass him to get to the bathroom before he can.
“Okay, you baby!” He laughs and trails behind me.
We brush our teeth and wish a good night to my parents before returning to the living room and let out tired bodies fall on the couch.
We need to get as much sleep as possible.
Tomorrow, it will be one hell of a day!
“What are you even doing here?
Go away!
You moron, you’re not welcome here!
What did you say?!
I--”
A sudden loud sound starts resonating into the room and I jump from the couch. I look at my right and see that the sound is coming from the alarm. I have never loved this straight-out-of-hell device this much! I was dreaming of that..guy but thank god it was time to get up!
I shake my head to fight off the drowsiness and walk into the bathroom to spray my face with cold water, just to be sure to erase his face from my mind.
As I’m already upstairs, I grab my uniform from my room and I get ready as fast as I can so I can still make a proper breakfast.
When I’m done, I go downstairs to wake Joshua up.
“Hyung, wake up! We need to go.” I shake him by the shoulder and he stirs in his sleep for a while before cracking an eye open.
“Why Saturday is so far away?” Joshua whines, hiding his head under the pillow.
“It isn’t. Sadly, there are just a few days left before the weekend,” I sigh.
“Sadly?”
“Yeah, because I don’t have enough time to get ready for the dinner!”
“Why did I even ask?”
“Come on. Get up or we’ll be late!”
Luckily, we get to school on time and as Joshua goes to the library as if he is walking on a runway, I run to our class as fast as I can. I have to talk to Seokmin and tell him the great news before our teacher arrives for the first period.
I bet he will be as excited as me!
I walk into the classroom and I find him looking out of the window. I had no doubts about him being already here.
“Morning, Seok!” I chirp with a big smile plastered on my face.
“Morning, Soons! Why are you smiling like that? It’s kind of creepy as you’re usually grumpy this early in the morning,” Seokmin says, putting his hands in between us as to keep his distance from me.
“Good news, that’s why!”
“What?”
“Shua hyung told me that the guys and he have already scheduled the dinner with us.”
“Really? When?” Seokmin’s eyes grow wide.
“On Saturday.”
“As in THIS Saturday?” His voice rising in pitch.
“Exactly.”
“Oh my god! I can’t wait!!”
“Yeah, me too!!”
“Wait, I have nothing to wear!” His excitement suddenly replaced by worry.
“Me neither and that’s why we absolutely need to go shopping this afternoon!”
“True! We need to be flawless!”
“I’m already flawless, though,” I deadpan and flip my non-existent long hair.
“It’s better if I shut up on this.”
I am ready to get back at him when the teacher walks into the classroom. She’s already staring at us and we take it as a sign to be quiet while she takes the attendance. However, we’re still too excited to just shut up, so, when she’s not looking, we pass each other pieces of papers with our thoughts and ideas on what to wear and do at the dinner.
We’re way too much into it, that we can’t focus on the lesson.
Luckily for us, it’s just the first week of school so we can still afford to get a little bit distracted.
It’s six in the evening and Seokmin should be almost here. I’m on the driveway and, while I’m waiting for Seok, I see the door of Joshua’s house opening and reveal his figure.
He spots me and gives me a big smile, flailing his arms around to make sure I notice him too. When he sees me waving at him, he starts walking towards my house and I decide it is better to meet him halfway.
“Hyung! Where are you going?”
“Practice at Mingyu’s,” he says, pointing at the car parked in his driveway. “What about you? What you’re doing outside?”
“I’m waiting for Seokmin. We need to buy something for the dinner, remember?”
“Oh, right. I would’ve really liked to come with you but we really need to practice as much as possible.”
“Don’t worry, hyung! That is definitely more important than coming with us. Next time, you’ll come with us.” I shrug my shoulder as to get across the fact that it’s not a big deal.
“I’m one hundred percent positive that ‘next time’ means very soon!” Joshua shakes his head.
“What do you mean?” I ask as his words kind of confused me for a moment.
“Just that you both like shopping. Nothing more behind my words.” Joshua draws a cross on his chest as a backup for his statement.
“It’s relaxing! And don’t act innocent, I know you were pretending just now!” I huff and puff my cheeks in annoyance.
Suddenly, we hear a horn honking from behind us.
We both turn around and we see Seokmin getting off from his father’s car.
Joshua checks his wristwatch and widens his eyes.
“It’s late! I got to go! I’ll text you later!”
“Okay, hyung!”
Joshua walks away and I run to my house’s driveway to try and jumpscare Seokmin that hadn’t seen me coming from behind him.
He shrieks and hits me on his arm before stomping away and starting making his way downtown.
It’s been two hours since Seokmin and I have been walking around, trying to find something to wear. We’ve been in almost all the shops and still haven’t found anything. The clothes seem to be just too fancy for a dinner and we need casual ones.
Suddenly, a shop grabs my attention. Well, it’s better saying that the outfit on the mannequin in the store window is the thing that grabs my attention.
The second I lay my eyes on the clothes, I fall in love with them: it’s a pair of skinny fit black jeans, ripped just over the knees; a black shirt with white stamps over it, just the front of it tucked in the jeans; at the feet, a pair of black leather heavy boots.
It’s one of those outfits that you can wear on more than once. Plus it makes you look cool while being comfortable.
“Should we enter in here? I would like to try on this one,” I say as I point to the said outfit.
“Sure thing, maybe I’ll find something for me, too.”
We walk in and I ask the shop assistant if is it possible to try the outfit on.
After telling her the size I need for each item, she gives me everything and shows me the way to an empty fitting room. I get in there and once I’m ready, I open the door to walk out, witnessing a Seokmin with his mouth agape.
“Does it look good?” I ask while checking myself into the mirror.
“Does it look good? This looks amazing on you!”
“Are you sure? It’s not too much?”
“I’m sure. You’re killing it. Black is definitely your colour,” Seokmin says as he gives me both his thumbs up.
“I’m taking it, then!” I grin from ear to ear, finally relaxed. “What about you? Don’t you want to try anything on?”
“I have already chosen my outfit while you were getting changed.”
“Are you sure of your pick?” I ask, used to Seokmin be this quick and firm when it comes to choosing.
“Never been this sure!”
We keep looking for some accessories which can match our outfits, like earrings and necklaces.
Once we pay for our items, we get out of the shop.
We’re happy and just a little bit more ready for the big night.
“What should we do now? There’s a little bit of time left before going back home,” I ask Seokmin after checking the time on my phone.
“Should we take a walk in the park along the Han river?”
“I think it’s a great idea! It’s been a while since I’ve gone there.”
“You’ve been away for the entire summer break, of course, it’s been a while!” Seokmin sniggers.
We walk in silence for a while. Seokmin is observing the people passing by him and I am thinking about the city, the lights and how busy the streets are.
“You know,” I start, making Seokmin turn towards me. “When I was away, I missed Seoul. I think I got used to calling this city my home and it felt weird being far away from it.”
“You’ve been living here for the past five years. It’s not a short period of time,” Seokmin slings his arm over my shoulders. “Plus, you’ve grown fond of the city and also of the people living here.”
“That is true. I think I could never get too far away from Joshua and you. These months without you have been so lonely and boring!”
“Aww, that’s so sweet of you!” Seokmin coos.
“I know that I have some friends in Japan too, but even when I was with them, it felt as if something was missing. I can’t hide the fact that I would sometimes turn around, expecting to find either Joshua or you and getting sad when you were not there,” my face falls a bit at the memory of the trip back to my old home.
“That was cheesy. Why are you like this today? You’re almost scaring me.” He detaches himself from my side as to highlight the fact that he was scared.
“Hey! I’m a sweet boy but I strive to hide it!” I get closer to Seokmin to hug him, but he just avoids me. I put on the expression of someone who experienced the worst betrayal and look at him.
“Let’s go to the park before I get diabetes or I’ll hit you!”
As we’re sitting on a bench, I fish my phone out of the pocket to check if there’s a new text from Joshua. The second I take the phone, a new notification from his is shown on the screen.
Joshuji:
Bro!
Have you found something?
Hoshiya:
Hyung!
Mission complete!
I found the one!
Joshuji:
That’s great!
What is it?
Hoshiya:
Something fabulous, you just need to know this!
You will see it on Saturday.
Joshuji:
Okay, I won’t pressure you even though I’m curious!
What are you doing now?
Hoshiya:
Seok and I are at the Han River for a walk.
What about you?
Joshuji:
We’re still practising.
Hoshiya:
You still haven’t finished?
Isn’t it tiring to do that for more than three hours?
Joshuji:
It is, I can’t say otherwise.
However, we need to practice both the songs and the mcing.
Hoshiya:
I see...
Are you still at Mingyu’s?
Joshuji:
We’re at mine now.
Mingyu’s parents got home so we had to leave.
Hoshiya:
Oh, I see.
Joshuji:
Soonie, I got to go.
The practice’s starting again.
Hoshiya:
Okay, hyung!
Talk to you later!
I sigh and put my phone back into the pocket of my jeans.
Seokmin looks at me with a questioning look on his face, as he could understand why I sighed without even speaking.
I make things easier for him this time, saying out loud what’s bothering me.
“The guys are still practising.“
“They’re really working hard for the sake of the band. They are really passionate about it,” Seokmin nods along with his words. “Like this, it’s just a matter of time before they will make their dream come true!”
“I hope they will really make it. They deserve it.”
“One day, they will be the top of the top.”
“It would be great! They would be so happy!”
“Right. You know, they say hard work makes the dream work. I think this is the case.”
I hum as I look at the people promenading on the riverside.
There are families walking with their children and helping them making big jumps; people cycling or jogging in the chill air of the early hours of the evening; others are sipping on their coffees and munching on snacks as they admire the waters of the river ripple at the light breeze.
I was thinking about drinking something before going home when I have an idea.
“Hey, Seok. Want to come with me to the cafè?”
“Why?”
Notes:
Happy new year to all of you!!! Hoping this is going to be one great year for Seventeen and all of us!!
I'm sorry if this took quite a while, but Christmas holidays are pretty busy as parents keep coming and visiting to exchange wishes and gifts! I'll try to be quicker with the next one!!
Chapter Text
Joshua’s point of view
I was getting one with the couch when the doorbell suddenly rings.
I feel like a meerkat the moment I turn my head towards the door.
‘I wasn’t expecting anyone to come home. Who’s is it going to be? It won’t be Soonyoung because he has just told me he is at the park with Seokmin.’
Jeonghan must’ve seen the confused look on my face because he pats my leg and asks, “Aren’t you going to open?”
“I’m going now.” I sigh as I get up from the couch.
I’m in front of the door, hesitating a bit before opening it and finding the last person that could come into my mind.
It’s Kihyun, my friend and the delivery guy from the cafè we always go to, the “Coffee & Goodpie”.
I remember asking the owner why she chose that name.
She told me she once said ‘goodpie’ instead of ‘goodbye’ when leaving a bakery.
The mistake got kind of stuck in her head and she thought it could be fun to use it as a pun in the name.
“Good evening, Joshua. I have a delivery for you.” Kihyun flashes one of his smiles as he waits for me to grab the boxes he is holding midair.
“Wait, I haven’t ordered anything.”
“Oh, I guess they gave me a wrong address back at the cafè. Well, I’m going to take these six caramel macchiatos and this black coffee back then.” Kihyun is about to leave when something comes up into my mind.
“Did you say that there are seven coffees?”
“Yup.”
“Guess they are for me after all and I even know who sent these." He hands me the boxes he's carrying. "Thank you, Kihyun.” I say while high-fiving is now free hand.
“You’re welcome. See you around!” Like that, he leaves on his scooter.
I come back into the living room with two boxes: one is full of coffees and another one full of food to munch on while taking a break: sandwiches, cinnamon rolls and pretzels. The only person popping into my mind and that could do this is Soonyoung. He knew that we’re at my house, plus, he has an obsession with the caramel macchiato and I see six of them here.
“Who was at the door, hyung?” Wonwoo asks, eyes glued on the screen of his phone and still laying on the floor.
“Kihyun, the Coffee & Goodpie delivery guy.”
“You ordered coffee?” He finally looks at me as the word coffee caught his attention.
“Not me, it was someone else.”
“Who?” He gets up from the floor and immediately sits on the nearest chair.
“I think it was Soonyoung.”
“He told you he sent them?” Mingyu asks from his place where he is strumming his guitar.
“No, but it must be his doing. I told him we were here and that Jihoon likes his coffee black from this café. Apparently, he remembers since there’s one in the box.”
“I think I may like him,” Jihoon says, not even bothering to get up and secretly wanting me to bring is coffee to him. “Plus, I see he has good taste in snacks.”
“You say that because these are the things you like eating,” Seungkwan points out.
“Of course,” Jihoon adds.
“By the way, I want to warn you, Jihoon. If you don’t come here right now, I will eat yours too!” Seungkwan threatens, hand already making its way into the bag with the snacks.
“Don’t you even try. You’re a dead man if you touch my food.” Jihoon jerks up from the couch and runs to where Seungkwan is standing.
“The same goes for me,” Mingyu says and this gives an occasion for Jihoon to tease him.
“That you’re a dead man? Because if it is that what you mean, you’re right.”
Mingyu looks offended and pouts. He kind of looks like a kicked puppy before seeing Jihoon laughing and understanding that the younger is only messing with him. Mingyu breaks into a smile, you can almost see a tail wagging behind him. Everyone starts giggling at the sight and silence comes again after Seungcheol claps his hands, grabbing our attention.
“C’mon guys. Let’s take a proper break and eat everything Soonyoung sent. Our stomachs deserve it.”
We almost roar in approval and sit in a circle on the floor, putting the boxes with coffee and food at the centre.
A bite here, a sip there and everyone was praising and adoring Soonyoung for this little gift.
When even the tiniest crumb is gone, the guys turn towards me and each one of them says something.
It’s almost creepy as if they have planned to do that since the beginning.
“Joshua, thank Soonyoung on our behalf,” Jeonghan says.
“Yeah. Tell it was kind of him to think about us.” Seungcheol nods in approvement at his own words.
“And that we will properly thank him on Saturday,” Wonwoo adds.
“And that we will make a surprise for him too.” Excitement can be heard in Mingyu's voice.
“And that we adore him for doing this even though he doesn’t personally know us,” Seungkwan takes a little dramatic pause before adding “yet.”
“Yeah, that,” Jihoon says, doing a gesture with the hand to make me understand that he agrees with what the others have just said. The guys stare at him, waiting for him to add something more. He rolls his eyes, knowing they won’t let him leave until he speaks again. “And because he remembered about my preference for coffee.”
“Couldn’t have said that before?” Mingyu asks.
“Did I have to? You had said everything!”
“I will tell him, don’t worry,” I intervene before the two can start quarrelling again. “He will be happy hearing that you liked his surprise and knowing he saved our maknae from starvation and grumpiness as he still hadn’t had his daily dose of caffeine,” I say, gaining a glare from the youngest.
“So, after this long break, should we start again?” Seungcheol asking while standing up.
Everyone screams that, yes, we are ready to start again.
We keep practising without any pause and it’s past ten in the evening when we decide it’s been enough for today and to wrap up.
“See you tomorrow, guys!”
I wave at them as they get in their cars and close the door when they’re out of sight.
I go upstairs and I’m walking towards the bathroom with the intention to take a long steamy shower to relax. My dream of staying hours under the spray of hot water gets shutter the moment I feel the phone buzzing in my pocket.
Hoshiya:
Did you like the surprise?
Joshuji:
I did!
Wait, I’ll take a shower and I will be at yours.
Hoshiya:
No need to do that.
I’m already here.
Open the door.
I run downstairs, trying not to slip on the stairs as I am rushing to open the door.
Soonyoung is here, pyjamas already on, school bag thrown over the shoulder, a bag in his left hand with his school uniform and another bag full of food in the right hand.
“Have you had dinner yet?” Soonyoung is already inside, taking off his shoes and putting his pair of slippers on.
“To be honest, no.”
“I had imagined that. However, If you don’t eat, you won’t have enough energy not even to stand on your feet!” He scolds me as if I don’t already know that.
“I know that but we’ve just wrapped up and I was about to take a shower. Wait, why are you here?” I ask him, dumbfounded.
We hadn’t agreed on meeting after the boys left.
“Why do you think? To stand here in front of you and play the staring game?” He snorts. “Of course, I knew you would’ve ended up skipping your dinner so I decided to come here and cook it for you.”
“It was a coincidence that you came here when the guys left or you knew it?” I think I already know the answer, but I wait for him to answer me.
“I was at the window, waiting for their cars to leave your driveway,” Soonyoung says trying to look innocent as if he wasn’t stalking us.
“You did what?”
“It doesn’t matter.” He shrugs and quickly changes the topic. “Now, go showering while I make dinner.”
“Aye, aye.”
I watch Soonyoung making his way to the stove, bags forgotten next to the kitchen door frame and head already disappearing into the cupboard to take the plates to serve the dinner. I shake my head and smile before going again upstairs.
‘He really is one of a kind.’
While I’m showering, I think about these past years with him.
Soonyoung had always been a kind guy and he took care of me in every situation. Sometimes it seems like, between the two of us, he is the hyung and doesn’t need me to protect him or to teach him that life can be tough. Well, he already knows that.
Like me, he has first-hand experience about how life can be hard on people.
We were both living abroad before coming to live in a different country whose language we barely spoke. We had to adapt to a different way of living, different from the one we had in Los Angeles and in Japan. I was still a child when I came here so it wasn’t much of a trouble for me, but him...he was already a teenager and had already moved from Korea to Japan years before.
I know how, in the beginning, he used to pretend everything was just fine even though he missed his house and his friends. People don’t know how many times I’ve seen him smiling when all he wanted to do was crying because of the weight he had on his chest.
He is strong and you can see it in the way he faces head-on the difficulties he finds on his path, in the way he fights every day for what he wants, in the way he prefers being silly and loud to hide his emotional side that shows only through his actions, just like today.
“JOSHUA HYUNG!”
His yelling from downstairs brings me back to reality.
“ARE YOU DONE? DINNER WILL GET COLD IF YOU DON’T COME.”
“LET ME WEAR SOMETHING AND I WILL BE THERE!” I yell back.
Soonyoung’s point of view
Joshua has been in the bathroom for almost thirty minutes.
I bet he was lost in his own thoughts. He has a lot going on in his mind lately.
He is very concerned about the group’s future and does his best to hype the others up. Maybe he feels responsible for them because, in the end, it was his idea to create the group and try to hit the top. If they don’t succeed, Joshua will feel guilty for getting their hopes up only to let them down.
“Don’t run, you could fall,” I say upon hearing loud footsteps coming from the hallway across the kitchen.
“My name’s not Kwon Soonyoung,” Joshua says, appearing into the kitchen. “You’re the clumsy one here.”
“I am not.”
“Said the person who keeps bumping into people.”
“You haven’t just said that…” I glare at him as he laughs at me.
“So, where’s my dinner?” Joshua asks rubbing his hands together in anticipation.
“At the table, of course. Sit down and make yourself at home,” I joke as I walk towards the table.
“I am at home.” Joshua joins me at the table. “Oh, wait,” he says. He was reaching for the chopsticks but stopped midway. “You haven’t poisoned it, right?”
“Oh, god! I got busted. I didn’t want to tell you or else you wouldn’t have eaten!” I act dramatically as if he really caught me red-handed.
“I knew it!”
“I forgot to bring the dessert with the antidote in it!”
“Don’t worry, I will eat it anyway.” Joshua finally picks his chopsticks and starts eating.
“You like my cooking that much?”
“No, I’m just hungry,” he says through a mouthful of stir-fried rice.
“Don’t treat the next best chef of South Korea like this!”
“Idiot.”
I watch Joshua eating everything really fast as if he had been starving for days when, in reality, he had eaten the snacks I sent just a few hours ago. And I still need to understand where the food he eats goes! He is so slim and has a perfect body without even hitting the gym! What a lucky guy!
After dinner, we wash the dishes together and it ends up being a very bad idea.
We spray water at each other with either our hands or the sponge, making the kitchen even messier than before.
We dry the little pool we made on the floor, go brushing our teeth, take our position on his two couches and get ready to sleep.
“This is the third time we sleep together in a week. Did you miss me a lot when I was away?” I ask turning on my right side to look at him.
“Actually, no. It was so peaceful and quiet when you weren’t here.”
“The audacity! The betrayal!” I throw one of my pillows at him while he laughs.
“On a more serious note, thank you.” He hugs the pillow and turns towards me. “Thank you for taking care of me and my stomach these past days.”
“You don’t have to thank me.”
“Oh, and the boys thanked you for the little surprise. They said they will get a surprise for you, too.”
“They don’t have to!”
“But they want to.” He sighs but it was a content one. “Everyone appreciated what you did, in particular, Jihoon who was glad you remembered he likes black coffee.”
“Stop it! You are flattering too much, all of you did, for a trifle like this.”
“It wasn’t a trifle, it was an amazing thing you did. So, on Saturday, you will accept our surprise.”
“Okay! Just so you know, I did it because I thought you would’ve been tired and hungry.”
“I know that and we appreciated that.”
“And I’m happy.” A smile spreads on my face.
“And now we really have to sleep. You have classes tomorrow!” Joshua throws the pillow back at me.
“What about you?” I ask, putting the pillow under my head, the other one already secured between my legs. A recently-picked habit.
“I won’t work but I will walk you to school anyway.”
“Why?”
“I took a day off. We agreed to practice in the morning so that we have free time in the afternoon to get things ready for Saturday.”
“Okay, now I’m nervous again. Tomorrow’s already Friday! It’s a tragedy!” I throw the left arm over my face in a theatrical gesture.
“Don’t be dramatic! Sleep over it.”
“I will try! Goodnight, hyung.”
“Goodnight, Soonie.”
It’s morning. The sun is seeping through the living room curtains and I woke up before the alarm could go off. The latter is a really rare event.
I sit up on the couch I was sleeping on and look at the one across me. Joshua isn’t there. He’s already up and that’s pretty weird, it’s even rarer than me getting up early.
I was panicking about him getting to the bathroom before me when a good smell reaches my nose. I feel my stomach rumbling and I start thinking it was this amazing fragrance of food that woke up my stomach and me.
I stretch my limbs before getting up and stepping into the kitchen where I am left with my mouth hanging.
“I can’t believe my eyes,” I say while looking at the feast waiting for me at the table.
“Good morning, Soonie.” Joshua turns around to greet me, bowl and whiskers still in his hands.
“Again, I can’t believe my eyes. Is this an illusion?”
“What’s making you so surprised?”
“The fact that you woke up early to make breakfast.”
“It’s not the first time I do this, c’mon.”
“If you keep doing this, even the sky will be shocked to the point we will have snow and summer at the same time.”
“Oh my god, you’re so not funny Kwon Soonyoung,” he says, sticking his tongue out at me.
I sit at the table, taking in all this delicious food displayed in front of me.
“Why did you do this?” I ask, looking at Joshua’s back.
“Nothing in particular. These days you were the one to cook for me and I felt like I was neglecting you.”
“You aren’t and I have already said that you don’t need to do anything.”
“I guess you don’t want to eat these waffles then. Well, I’m going to make them just for me and eat them by myself.”
“Don’t you dare! Give me my waffles!”
We laugh and start eating once Joshua has finished cooking, trying to be less loud than usual. It’s just half past six in the morning and Joshua’s parents are still sleeping. They went to see a show at the theatre and so they came back home pretty late. If we wake them up, we’re dead meat.
“Did you wake up because of something? I didn’t hear your alarm going off.” Joshua’s confused look with his bed hair is something Seokmin should really see. I think he would go crazy about it.
“I could ask you the same,” I say, taking a waffle and biting it. “But as I am really kind, I will answer first. The smell of food woke me up.”
“I can’t with you…” Joshua sighs and facepalms.
“What about you?”
“I felt a little bit nervous but I don’t know why. Do you know what I mean?”
“No, because I’m mentally sane.”
“You little shit.” Joshua hits me on the head.
“I’m just joking!” I rub the spot he hit. “Well, it happens. You know, sometimes when you’re too tired, you can’t sleep as well and tight as you want. But, I have to thank your being nervous because it made you get up early and make all of this!”
“I would’ve woken up early to cook anyway.”
“Of course, Mr I-wake-up-everyday-10-minutes-before-going-to-work. If it wasn’t for your mother, you would be sleeping through all of your alarms.”
“One, that was a long name. Two, you’re no better than me. You always get late at school after the first week of classes of every year.”
“That’s a different case. While my mind is awake since the moment I open my eyes, my body won’t cooperate until it’s nine.”
“Or after a caramel macchiato.”
“Indeed.”
We both laugh at our bickering. We really can’t stop doing that.
“Keep eating! We will take my car today so you won’t be late.”
I finish eating my breakfast and while Joshua washes the dishes, I go and get ready for school. When it’s his turn to get changed, I take my phone to text Seokmin, telling that I’m on my way to school and to wait for me at the gate.
The short trip in the car is loud as usual, blasting music so loud with the windows rolled down that people from other cars or the street watch us as if they were so close to suing us for listening to music this early in the morning.
Joshua pulls over the gate and Seokmin is already here, kind of in a daydream while staring at us. Joshua waves at him and Seokmin snaps out of it just when I close the door of the car, smiling and waving back at Joshua. I shake my head and grab him by the wrist to drag him inside the courtyard.
“Why did you do that?” He asks, quite annoyed before realising what he said and getting himself together. “I mean, there was no need to drag me.”
“Your crush was showing.”
“What crush? What are you talking about?”
“Don’t play dumb because you have already confessed to me that you like him. And if you ask me, you were pretty obvious out there.”
“Really?”
“Yes, you had this expression on your face, smiling like an idiot,” I say, mimicking his expression of a while ago.
“Did I? Damn, I need to control my facial muscles.”
“You really should if you don’t plan to confess to him in the near future.”
“Eh? Confess? Have you gone crazy?” Seokmin shrieks.
“Why? I think you should. It’s worth trying,” I say, making my way towards our classroom.
Seokmin froze for a while on his spot before trailing after me and saying, “No. I don’t want to ruin our friendship.”
“You won’t ruin it. You know that Joshua isn’t the type of guy who will end your friendship because of that.”
“You’re right. He isn’t the kind of person who would do that. However, I am. I know that I wouldn’t be able to look at him or stop my heart from hurting if he’d rejected me. I don’t want my heart to get shattered every time he will look with adoring eyes at someone who’s not me.” Seokmin’s smile has faded and his eyes are already glassy at the thought of a possible rejection.
“Oh, Seok. I’m sorry. I didn’t want to get your mood down.” I sling my arm around his shoulders and bring him closer to me. “If you think that hiding your crush is what you need to do at the moment, then go ahead. The only thing I want to say is that you should confess before this secret crushes you more than an eventual rejection would.”
“I will remember that,” he says, kind of defeated as he looks at the ground. He then clears his throat, flashes a smile at me to show that he is okay. “Now, let’s go to our classroom, shall we?”
This school day goes by rather quickly. I could even focus on the lessons and they were actually interesting.
Wait.
What is happening to me? I woke up early, I said that classes were interesting...am I sick? Maybe I am or maybe it’s just the fact that this is the last class of the week in which teachers pressure us less than they usually do as they’re still relaxed because of the holidays.
We’re walking in the hallways ready to leave when Seokmin says he will drop me at my house as he knows about Joshua not being here in the library. I almost want to say no, wanting to walk alone for a bit when he reminds me of the possibility of meeting that knob again. I shiver at the thought of his deep voice and gladly accept the offer.
I just got off from the car when Seokmin rolls the window down and calls for me.
“Hey, Soonie!”
“Yeah?” I turn around and look at his head peeking from the window.
“Can I come to your house tomorrow? We can get ready at yours.”
“Uh?”
“For the dinner with Jeonghan’s bitches.”
“Oh, that. Yeah, sure. Joshua said we will dine at his so it’s better if you come here. We’re closer.”
“That’s perfect, then!”
“Come right after lunchtime, we can chill a bit before getting ready.”
“Sounds good to me! Well, see you tomorrow!”
“Bye!”
I wave at him and bow to his father before turning around again and walking into my house.
The first thing I do when I reach my bedroom is connecting my phone to the Bluetooth speaker and blasting some music.
Thanks to Joshua, I have a lot of Jeonghan’s bitches’ songs on there. They are the kind of songs you either start jamming or crying on. There’s no in between.
The guys are really good at delivering their feelings through music and I really hope that more people will recognise their talent. They really deserve to reach the top and stay there for as long as it’s possible.
I hope it will be for a very long time.
I plop myself onto the bed after getting changed and decide I will rest a bit before going downstairs to make dinner.
As soon as I throw an arm over my eyes, the phone vibrates.
Joshuji:
Have you bumped into someone since I wasn’t there to prevent it?
Hoshiya:
Luckily not.
Seok took care of me and drove me home.
Joshuji:
That’s good to hear.
Hoshiya:
Lucky me.
Joshuji:
You have me as your best friend, you’re definitely lucky.
Btw, how was school?
Hoshiya:
Was good.
Today I was actually focused on everything.
Joshuji:
Who are you and what you’ve done to Soonyoung?
Hoshiya:
Hyung!
That’s not funny.
Joshuji:
You wouldn’t be calling me hyung in this kind of situation.
Who are you?
Hoshiya:
Your mom.
Joshuji:
Eomma!
Hoshiya:
I’m rolling my eyes at you, know that!
However, I can deduct from this that you’re either on a break or you have already finished.
Joshuji:
The second.
Now we’re taking turns for a shower and resting before arranging some things.
Hoshiya:
Do you need some help?
Joshuji:
We’re okay like this.
Don’t worry.
We have Seungkwan who is the top when it comes to organisation.
Hoshiya:
Okay, seems that I can trust him.
Joshuji:
Don’t you trust me?
Hoshiya:
Let me think about it...
No.
Joshuji:
Well, I see that the dinner is cancelled, like our friendship.
Hoshiya:
C’mon hyung!
If I didn’t trust you, I wouldn’t have eaten breakfast this morning.
Joshuji:
Idiot.
Hoshiya:
I know.
Joshuji:
Soons, I got to go.
It’s my turn to take a shower.
Talk to you later.
Hoshiya:
Later, hyung!
I close the Kakao app and set the alarm for an hour later before tucking myself under the blankets to finally rest.
In days like this, life is just wonderful.
Notes:
After a week, finally a chapter!
I wanted to upload it earlier this week but svt theories just took over me and I spent a lot of time doing researches and discussing details with my fellow carats from the vrp gc.
However, the big day in this fic is about to come!
Chapter Text
Joshua’s point of view
I dry my body after a quick shower, wear a pair of jeans and a white shirt and walk downstairs where the boys are waiting for me.
There’s only Mingyu, Wonwoo, Jihoon and Seungkwan sitting on the couch and zapping through the tv channels. Seungcheol and Jeonghan left early because they had to be somewhere for their monthiversary. Yes, they’ve been together for four months now after pining for who-knows-how-long. But this is a story for another time.
“Hey, guys, I’m ready. Let’s go grocery shopping for tomorrow’s dinner,” I say to the guys who turn to look at me at the same time.
This synchronisation kind of scares me.
“We will use your car?” Wonwoo asks.
“Yeah, or we can’t carry all the bags back here.”
“I will sit at the front.” Jihoon gets up from the couch and starts walking towards the entrance.
“No, I will!” Seungkwan screams, running after Jihoon.
“But it’s my turn!” Mingyu whines, still sitting on the couch.
“It’s my car so I’ll be the one choosing who will sit next to me. Age will be the choosing factor so, Wonwoo, you sit at the front.”
“Yes! Bye, you losers!” Wonwoo mocks the other three.
“I need to sit between those two? Fuck my life,” Jihoon complains.
“Our Jihoonie will be squished between his two favourite hyungs,” Seungkwan mocks.
“How cute.” Mingyu goes for pinching Jihoon’s cheek but he gets stopped.
“If you try to touch me, I will kill you with your own guitar,” Jihoon threatens, his glare really scary.
The two hyungs quickly retreat their hands, fearing for their life. They know Jihoon’s threats aren’t empty words.
Once, Mingyu tried to hug him and a moment later, he was running away from Jihoon who was wielding my acoustic guitar as a weapon.
We reach my car in the garage and begin our “special mission” aka the surprise.
As a surprise for both Soonyoung and Seokmin, we’ve decided to cook something for them instead of ordering something from the take out. We thought that putting more effort in this dinner to show how grateful we are will be more appreciated than anything else. Well, I have to admit that is mostly because they would nag at us for spending money buying something that, according to them, is useless.
Luckily, we’ve got Mingyu on our side. He is a very skilled cook even though he’s a bit messy and could probably set the house on fire. It’s worth the risk, right?
We drive past Soonyoung’s house and I see the lights are all off. He is home but I bet he’s playing something on his phone or he may be sleeping, the only two things he does when he has nothing to do. It’s then that from the rearview mirror, I see Jihoon suddenly shivering.
“Jihoon, are you cold? I saw you shivering,” I ask worried Jihoon could’ve gotten sick.
“I’m not cold. I don’t know why but I just felt a weird vibe and that sent shivers down my spine.” Jihoon hugs himself, still confused at why he shivered.
“Uh?”
“I don’t know but it’s nothing to worry about.”
“Okay. If you say so…” I drop the conversation and turn on the music, just a little bit.
After another ten minutes of driving and hearing Mingyu and Seungkwan bickering over what kind of dessert to eat, we arrive at the supermarket. As we get off the car, I check the time.
“So, the market is going to close in less than an hour,” I say while we all step into the store.
“We need to hurry and take the items we need,” Wonwoo intervenes.
“Mingyu, you’re the chef. Tell us what we should grab and we will.” I look at him and give a small nod to encourage him.
“Seungkwan and Jihoon, you go grab two carts and then join us at the meat aisle,” Mingyu confidently says. “Wonwoo hyung, you go finding some bread, the baguette kind if there’s any left, and try to grab some snacks for the aperitif. Joshua hyung and I will go to the meat aisle.”
We all nod and then separate, every one with his task to fulfil. I see that Mingyu is well organised, meaning that he already knows what to cook for tomorrow. It’s a pity though that we don’t know what’s crossing his mind and we can’t make things quicker and easier by going and take items on our own instead of waiting for his instructions.
At the meat aisle, he takes a lot of different cuts and kinds of meat: pork, beef and lamb skewers.
Jihoon and Seungkwan arrive with the carts.
“Leave them to us,” I say, taking one of the carts from Seungkwan’s hands.
“Yeah, you go grab ramen, seaweed, carrots, eggs, spam and rice,” Mingyu lists.
“We will be doing kimbap?” Seungkwan asks after realising to what use the ingredients will be put.
“And bibimbap.”
“Don’t forget the kimchi. Soonyoung loves it,” I add knowing that Soonyoung will eat a ton of it.
The two disappear with their new task and, at the same time, Wonwoo appears with all the things Mingyu asked for and a lot more.
“I didn’t ask for ALL of this, hyung.” Mingyu’s eyes wide open.
“I know. I got a little bit too enthusiastic and ended up bringing things I wanted to eat.”
“Good job. A lot of this will disappear into our stomachs while cooking. I’m sure about that,” I say to back Wonwoo up.
“True,” Mingyu giggles. “Wonwoo hyung, can you grab some fruit and look for Seungkwan and Jihoon? We’ll meet at the drinks aisle.”
“Okay!”
Wonwoo goes grabbing the fruit and we stop by the deep-frozen food section to grab some ice cream and some other sweets.
To drink, we take beer and soju for us adults and as Jihoon, Soonyoung and Seokmin are still minors, we grab a couple of bottles of coke for them. Well, Jihoon basically lives off of coke. It’s the only thing he drinks besides black coffee.
We wait for the rest of them to reach us here and, with our two carts completely full, we go to the checkout. We really bought a lot of things, who knows if we can cook everything on time.
Once we’re at home, we put the groceries away.
“Mingyu, when should we start cooking?” I ask as he passes me the items to put in the cupboard.
“Mmmh...at around ten in the morning?”
“That early?!” The pitch of my voice raising of an octave or two.
“Yeah, so we don’t rush things for the preparation. For the actual cooking, we’ll start an hour and a half before they’ll come here,” he explains as if it was the most obvious thing of the world.
“Okay.” I turn towards the other three boys and say to them, “Guys, Mingyu and I will take care of everything. You can come in the afternoon.”
“Don’t worry, hyung. We can help you. Am I right guys?” Wonwoo says and then looks at the younger duo at his left.
“Right! We can still help around,” Seungkwan says.
“Should you sleep here then? So you won’t go back and forth,” I propose to them so it would be easier and less tiring for them.
“I think we should sleep at our houses tonight so that tomorrow we can bring our outfits for the night,” Wonwoo says.
“At least stay here to have dinner. It has been a long day.”
“If you insist this much…” Seungkwan starts.
“We’ll stay here,” Mingyu ends his friend’s sentence.
“But we’ll be the ones to order and pay for the pizza. You didn’t let us pay at the supermarket so don’t even think about paying now too,” Wonwoo adds and I cannot say no. I know that if I even try to do so, he won’t give up until I let him do what he wants.
“Yay! Pizza!!” The three youngsters scream at the same time.
After a mess to decide which kinds of pizzas to eat, Wonwoo menages to order them and half an hour later, the Domino’s delivery guy rings the bell. We settle in the living room and turn on the tv to watch some variety shows.
It’s always great to spend time like this with the boys. They’re always ready to laugh and joke around, making the atmosphere enjoyable and making you forget about how tired or sad you are. They’re really amazing people to have around and I don’t know what would I be doing without them.
Soonyoung’s point of view
I don’t know what would I be doing without naps! I feel recharged and fresh!
Now, it’s time to make dinner before it gets too late!
While I was cooking, I get a text.
Joshuji:
Are you there?
Hoshiya:
Yes, I am.
Joshuji:
Slept well?
Hoshiya:
How do you know that I’ve slept?
Joshuji:
I drove past your house earlier and saw the lights off.
So you were either sleeping or playing games.
I went for the most obvious one.
Hoshiya:
You’re scary.
I could sue you for stalking.
However
Where did you go?
Weren’t the boys at yours?
Joshuji:
They were.
We went somewhere.
Hoshiya:
Where?
Joshuji:
It’s something between me and them.
You don’t need to know that.
Hoshiya:
Oh c’mon!
There’s no secret between the two of us.
Joshuji:
I had to go grocery shopping for my mom and they tagged along.
Hoshiya:
What a man of the house!
We need to find you a boyfriend.
Joshuji:
What akjfjkdaf
Hoshiya:
What?
You were about to drop the phone and send that?
Joshuji:
No fkafjakdl
Hoshiya:
Then what?
Joshuji:
Jihoon.
Hoshiya:
Jihoon?
Joshuji:
He’s bothering me, like one of those cats who need attention.
He sits next to me and it’s randomly touching the keys on the screen.
Hoshiya:
What the hell? Hahaha
Joshuji:
Hi, Soonyoung.
It’s Jihoon.
I stole Shua hyung’s phone.
Hoshiya:
Hi, Jihoon!
Will you survive his anger after this?
Joshuji:
He loves me too much to be angry at me.
Plus, if he doesn’t catch me, I’m safe.
Hoshiya:
What do you mean?
Joshuji:
At this very moment, I’m running away from him so he doesn’t catch me.
Hoshiya:
Run in the bathroom and lock the door!
You’ll be safe then.
Joshuji:
I’ve just done that and he’s knocking at the door like a mad man.
Hoshiya:
I think it’s better if you give him his phone back hahaha.
I don’t know why he’s so jealous of it.
Joshuji:
You’re right.
Well, I’m going to hand it to him.
See you tomorrow!
Hoshiya:
Yeah, see you!
Joshuji:
Soonie, just wait a minute.
I’m going to kill Jihoon and then talk to you.
Hoshiya:
Oh, c’mon.
Let him be!
He seems nice.
Joshuji:
He thanked you and said that you seem nice too.
Hoshiya:
What?
You told him that?
Joshuji:
No, he’s again next to me and read the text.
Hoshiya:
Why did you let him?
You know that I’m shy!
Don’t let people see what I write.
Joshuji:
Don’t worry, he’s gone.
Mingyu called him to play Fifa.
Hoshiya:
How can I believe you?
Joshuji:
Trust me!
Hoshiya:
I will just because I don’t have time to waste.
I need to finish making dinner.
Joshuji:
What a man of the house.
We need to find you a boyfriend.
Hoshiya:
I’ve said that first!
Joshuji:
Doesn’t mean it doesn’t relate to you too!
I will set you a blind date.
Hoshiya:
Don’t you dare!
It’s too awkward and I need to choose my date.
Joshuji:
But they still need to get approved by me.
Hoshiya:
The same goes for your date.
Joshuji:
Hahaha okay!
Hoshiya:
Hyung, I got to go.
Mom’s here and I need to hurry with the cooking.
See you tomorrow!
Goodnight.
Joshuji:
Goodnight.
I greet my mom who just got home and is still wandering at the entrance, trying to take off her shoes. My dad is still away for his business trip, so it’s just the two of us in the house.
“Hi, sweetheart,” my mom greets me and sends me a flying kiss.
“Hi, mom. How was work?”
“It was good. Not too much to do today.”
“That’s good to hear!”
“What about you?” She asks after finally taking her shoes off and walking towards the living room to put her bag and jacket on the armchair.
“I took a nap after coming back from school. Oh, tomorrow Seokmin is coming here.”
“Sleepover?”
“No, mom. We need to go to Joshua hyung’s for dinner.”
“It will be the three of you?”
“Nope, there will be Joshua’s friends too. You know, those from the band.”
“Oh, I see. Those you’ve been dying to meet, right?”
“Exactly! So I need to make a good first impression.”
“Why?” She asks, curious as to why her son cares so much about the first impression when he usually doesn’t.
“Because they matter a lot to hyung and I don’t want to look annoying or else,” I say while staring at my feet, knowing that this could seem a stupid reason.
“Well, you are kind of annoying,” my mom mocks me to lighten up the mood and make me smile.
“Mom! I’m your son! You should be saying the opposite! You’re supposed to have a biased opinion!” I whine to her.
“You know that I don’t like being biased.”
“Betrayed even by my mother, my own blood…”
“Don’t be like that and go set the table. I will bring the plates.”
I do what my mom said and wait for her to come and join me at the table.
We eat and between a mouthful and another, I tell her what happened before with Joshua and Jihoon and try to get some advice for the night. She tells me that she will be seeing one of her friends tomorrow and then she has to get dad at the airport and probably be home before I come back from the dinner.
After eating, we wash the dishes together, then I send her to relax by watching the tv while I mop the floor. I wish her a good night and go into my room.
As soon as I throw the blankets over my body, anxiety hits me. My stomach has a big knot and my heart races. I know that it may seem as if I’m overreacting but I know how much this means for Joshua. It’s an important day for him more than it is for me. This dinner means to bring together two important parts of his life. He really wants that the guys and Seokmin and I get along well.
The more I think about it, the more the knot gets tight.
‘I guess it’s better to sleep so I can stop thinking. I need to be positive and thinking that tomorrow everything will be perfect!’
Notes:
A filler chapter before the big day!
I will try to update the fic as soon as possible! I'm excited for this!!
Chapter Text
Mom’s already out to meet her friend and so I can get up from my bed at around noon. This is just because I have to clean a bit around my room before Seokmin comes or else I will stay under my blanket until hunger overcomes laziness.
However, cleaning helps me not to think about tonight and forget about the nervousness that is hitting me, harder than a rock. My heart starts racing like crazy if I only think about the dinner.
As I dust off the shelves next to my desk, I text Joshua to know how’s he doing.
Hoshiya:
Good morning, hyung!
Not even thirty seconds pass before Joshua replies.
Joshuji:
It was about time!
Hoshiya:
It’s Saturday and I deserve sleeping a little while longer than I usually do.
Joshuji:
You slept while we were already working for tonight’s dinner.
Hoshiya:
I don’t know what you guys are doing
But
Are you sure you don’t need some kind of help?
Joshuji:
We don’t.
We’re doing great like this.
You know, even Jeonghan is helping us!
So it’s okay.
Hoshiya:
If you say so…
But if you need help, just call.
I’m only one call away!
Joshuji:
Stop listening to Charlie Puth!
I can’t with him anymore because of Wonwoo’s cousin.
Hoshiya:
???
Joshuji:
Wonwoo’s cousin, Jungkook, loves Charlie and blasts his song 24/7.
Hoshiya:
That was random.
But poor your ears.
Joshuji:
I can feel the sarcasm of the last text.
Hoshiya:
Damn, you know me too well.
Joshuji:
I do.
Btw, don’t worry and go get ready for tonight.
Hoshiya:
Yes, sir.
Seokmin will be here anytime soon.
Joshuji:
Already?
The dinner is at eight!
Hoshiya:
We will eat something
Then watch a movie
Lastly, we will get ready.
You know, a typical Seoksoon afternoon.
Joshuji:
Oh, okay.
Hoshiya:
Did you really think that we were already going to dress up for tonight?
Okay, we are queens and want to be perfect but we do not need all this time.
Joshuji:
It could be possible.
Hoshiya:
Said the one who spends 30 minutes every morning just to fix his hair.
Joshuji:
That’s not true.
Hoshiya:
Yes, it is.
Joshuji:
I need to go.
For what you’ve just said, you won’t be eating at all tonight.
Hoshiya:
Hyung, you can’t let me starve!
Joshuji:
Eat at your home then!
Hoshiya:
Don’t make me use my cuteness on you.
Joshuji:
Oh, Lord.
I will give you all the food you want.
Please don’t do anything cute, it’s terrible.
Hoshiya:
It’s not terrible.
It’s adorable.
Joshuji:
It’s definitely terrible.
Hoshiya:
Go away!
Joshuji:
See you tonight!
I put my phone on the desk without even replying to Joshua. My cute acts aren’t terrible! Joshua says that because he doesn’t understand the art of my cuteness.
I am making my bed when the doorbell rings. Seokmin’s here early than scheduled yesterday just because mom’s not home. It’s been a while since we last cooked something at home and had a lazy afternoon together.
“Hi, Soonie!” Seokmin lifts his hand, waiting for a high five.
“Hi, Seok!” I high five him. “How are you feeling?”
“Kind of nervous?!” He answers as he fixes the backpack stringing on his shoulder.
“I feel you. The pressure is just too much to handle.”
“That’s because we don’t want to screw things up.”
“Damn, you’re right. Come in.” I move so that he can walk in. “Give me your bag and jacket, I’ll bring them upstairs.”
“Thank you.”
“I don’t think I need to tell you but make yourself at home,” I say when I’m halfway through the stairs.
Seokmin doesn’t answer so I turn around and crouch to peek on him. I can’t help but chuckle at the sight: Seokmin had already his head stuck in the fridge to grab a soft drink.
I run upstairs, launch his things on my bed and return in the kitchen, my stomach already rumbling.
“Okay, so what about ramyeon for lunch?” I ask him while grabbing one of the pots.
“Sounds good to me!” Seokmin then bring his thumb and index around his chin and thinks for a while before asking “Shall we eat first and then watch a movie or do the two things at the same time?”
“Of course, we do that at the same time.”
“Perfect! I’ll choose the movie!”
“And I’ll cook the ramyeon!”
“What a perfect team we are.” And we do our secret handshake ending with a perfect mid-air high-five.
After that, I turn around to get the instant ramyeon packs from the cupboard and Seokmin walks into the living room. It takes a while to get things ready because we do eat a lot of ramyeon and we’ve already watched a ton of movies, but less then a half an hour and we’re already sitting right in front of the tv, the pot between the two of us and the opening credits already rolling.
When people say that times flies when you’re enjoying yourself it’s true. We got to watch a couple of movies. 21 and 22 Jump Street. We laughed a lot at how crack this series is and Seokmin couldn’t stop impersonating Channing Tatum in his iconic line “My name’s Jeff.”
Without even realising, it was already time to get ready for the night.
“So, let’s do it like this.” I clasp my hands and rub them together as I think of how to organise things. “You take a shower first and I’ll wash the dishes and clean a bit around downstairs.”
“Are you sure? I can help you with the cleaning.”
“Don’t worry. We’ll be quicker this way.”
“I’ll be as fast as lightning then.”
Seokmin goes upstairs and I start washing the dishes, the thing I love doing the most.
What I like about this chore is that above the sink there’s a window so I can look at the outside world while I do the dishes.
I look at the sky and see that there are some clouds here and there. They have weird shapes and the setting sun gives them pink, light purple and orange hues making them look like cotton candy. It’s a spectacle that you can see every day, but it still fascinates me how every sunset is different from the one of the day before and the day before that.
The same sun setting in the same sky standing above us but the details always change.
It’s breathtakingly beautiful and, when I admire it, I wish I could be able to draw that, to copy on a sheet of paper that fantastic scenery and its various shades.
“Soonie! I’m done! It’s your turn!”
Seokmin’s voice coming from upstairs makes me snap out of my reverie.
“I’m coming in a bit! I need to dry the dishes!” I yell back at him.
I dry and put the dishes back into the cupboard before going upstairs to take a shower in the minimum amount of time possible.
While I shower, Seokmin is in front of the mirror as he dries his hair with a towel before using the hairdryer. He’s thinking about something and you can see it from the expression he’s wearing on his face.
“Hey, Soonie. What do you think I should say when I walk in?” Seokmin asks me, breaking the almost quietness of the room, the only noise was of the water running from the shower head.
“Ehm, good evening?” My tone uncertain as I don’t know if he’s being serious or he’s just kidding me.
“Isn’t it too formal? I mean they’re guys around our age.” Seokmin is being serious.
“What are you talking about?” I giggle at his sudden concern on how to greet the others.
“I don’t even know anymore. I can’t think straight!” He grabs his still wet hair with his hands.
“I can see that. I don’t think we need to worry, Joshua is going to put us at our ease.”
“I really hope so.” He sighs.
“Yeah. By the way, the guys seem just fine so we will be okay.”
“How do you know that?” Seokmin turns towards me, curious by the confidence of this statement.
“If it wasn’t like this, Joshua wouldn’t introduce them to us.” I take a little pause trying not to sound too shy before adding, “Plus, yesterday I talked to Jihoon.”
“What? How? Did you meet him?” He shrieks.
“No, no. We talked over text. He took Joshua’s hyung phone while we were texting and-”
“Yah! And you haven’t told me?”
“It was nothing big! He just told me he was running away from Shua who wanted to get him and get his phone back.”
“That’s so Shua-like.” Seokmin smiles as he pronounces Joshua’s name. “Did he say something else?”
“Not much. I told Shua that Jihoon seemed nice and Jihoon read that and said I’m nice too.” I can feel the blush slowly creeping on my cheeks despite the cold water running on my skin.
“Oh.” Seokmin starts wiggling his brows and smirking as he wanted to imply something else.
“What?”
“Nothing.” He can’t stop smirking.
“Don’t get any weird idea! I don’t even know him!”
“He doesn’t know you but still complimented you a lot for the surprise.”
“How do you know that?”
“Shua hyung told me.”
“Oh, so you two now talk behind my back?”
“Us? Never.”
“Yes, you do!”
“Yah! It’s not the time to bicker over this. Hurry up or we will be late.”
“Just remember that this is not over. Don’t you have to use the hairdryer?”
“Yup. Five minutes and it’s yours. Then, I’ll go in the room and get dressed.”
After having dried my hair, I go back to my room.
Seokmin is already dressed up: a white t-shirt tucked in a pair of black jeans; a shirt which was longer at the back was worn open over the t-shirt; at his feet, he has the same pair of boots as mine and, around his neck, two different kinds of silver necklaces.
I make a long, low whistle.
“Wow! You look good!”
“I know, right?”
“If I didn’t know that you like Shua hyung, I would definitely hit on you. You look that good, bro.”
“Bro, thanks.” Seokmin wipes a fake tear.
“Bro.” I open my arms and walk towards him.
We bro-hug and then start laughing at our weird way of complimenting each other.
By the time I finish dressing up, it’s a quarter to eight.
“Should we wear a bit of makeup?” I suddenly suggest.
“I haven’t brought any, though.”
“You can use mine and I was thinking of something really light. Like, just a bit of eyeshadow and eyeliner.”
“That can do.”
We put makeup on and we’re ready for the night.
I leave a post-it for mom and dad, telling them that we’re at Joshua’s. I grab the house keys, wear my boots and we are finally outside.
“Are you ready?” Seokmin starts.
“I’m ready.”
“Are you ready?”
“Okay, let’s go.”
“I’m ready. You ready?”
“I’m ready. You ready?”
“Okay, let’s go.”
“You ready?”
“I’m ready.”
“I’m ready.”
“Okay.”
By the time we finish with this antics of ours to recharge our energy level, we’re in front of Joshua’s door. I ring the bell and that was the exact moment chaos blew behind that door and one could hear it from the outside. People shouting to close the doors to hide something, bickering over who should open the front door.
Seokmin and I look at each other and can’t help but chuckle, trying to imagine what’s happening in there.
Finally, the door opens revealing a handsome tall boy with silver hair and a killer smile.
“Hi, guys. Come in.” The boy moves to let us enter.
We both give a shy nod to thank him.
“Guys! You’re on time!” Joshua hyung welcomes us with open arms. “Soonie, I’m so surprised by that.”
“What do you mean?” I ask.
“You’re usually a straggler!”
“True,” Seokmin agrees.
“C’mon, guys. Stop it. I can be punctual when I want to!” I whine at Joshua.
“Okay, okay. I will stop teasing you...for now.” Joshua goes to the centre of the living room and wriggles his hand to make us follow him. “It’s time to introduce you!” He turns towards the boys sitting on the couches. “Guys, these two are Soonyoung and Seokmin.” He then turns towards us and points at the silver-haired boy. “The guy who opened the door is Seungcheol.”
“Hi, again.” Seungcheol lifts his hand to greet us.
“The blondie sitting beside him is Jeonghan, his boyfriend and the one who gave the band its name. He may look like an angel but, trust me, he’s the devil,” Joshua says, pointing at the said person.
“Shua, we’ll talk about this later,” Jeonghan threatens through gritted teeth. He then flashes a smile to us. “It’s nice to meet you, guys.”
Joshua rolls his eyes and points at the guy sitting on the other couch and bothering his black-haired friend. “The hyperactive and sassy one with dirty blonde hair is Seungkwan. I think that you three will definitely get along well.”
“Hi, guys! Let’s be best friends!” Seungkwan shouts, wriggling his arms in the air.
“The shy boy next to him looks like an emo and soulless person but is actually a cutie with us hyungs and cracks a lot of dad jokes. His name is Wonwoo.”
Wonwoo doesn’t speak and just waves at us with a shy smile.
‘Wow, he is handsome.’
“And you already know the big puppy, Mingyu.”
As if on cue, the said boy emerges from the kitchen, quickly closing the door behind him.
“It’s a pleasure to meet all of you,” I say, bowing to all of them.
“Right, it’s really a pleasure,” Seokmin repeats after me and bowing too.
“C’mon! Don’t be shy and come sitting next to us.” Seungcheol pats the space next to him on the couch.
“Where’s Jihoon?” Jeonghan asks, laying his head on Seungcheol’s shoulder.
“He’s still upstairs to get changed,” Joshua answers as he sits on the couch next to Seokmin. “He’s sorry for sure and will soon be here.”
With that said, we start talking about the usual things: school, job, music and other hobbies and interests.
The boys are really nice and they put us at ease at the speed of light.
I can’t help but notice how the six of them, including Joshua, are handsome and as hot as hell. I never thought that I would be standing in a room with six fine boys who are also funny and good at music. It’s like a dream. They are the type of guy every living being would want as their partner. Everyone looks perfect but the expectation gets higher because they keep saying ‘the best one has yet to come’. By the best one, they mean Jihoon. They said that even if he’s the shortest among them, he’s the hottest.
‘If they are hot like this, how’s Jihoon going to look like? I bet he is some kind of Adonis.’
As I was thinking about him, the sound of footsteps can be heard coming from upstairs.
‘It’s him.’
I hold my breath as I see a pair of legs draped in skinny light blue ripped jeans climbing down the stairs. Now the torso can be seen. He’s wearing a black t-shirt tucked into his jeans and a long shirt of the same colour of his jeans. Slowly, I can start seeing the face and…
‘Oh no.’
“It’s unbelievable,” I whisper as I freeze on the spot with a very much visible stunned expression on my face.
Seokmin shakes me, asking if there’s a problem, but I can’t seem to answer him.
“That’s not possible. I can’t believe it.” I keep saying like a mantra.
“What’s wrong?” Seokmin asks again.
“I need to go to the toilet,” I cry out, suddenly getting up from the couch. “Seokmin, come with me.”
I grab Seokmin by the wrist and drag him in the nearest bathroom of the floor before Jihoon could see me.
“Soonyoung, what’s happening? You’re so pale as if you’ve just seen a ghost.” Seokmin puts his hands on my shoulders and makes me sit on the rim of the bathtub.
“A ghost would’ve been better.” I groan and bring my hands to my face to cup it. “What am I going to do, Seok?”
“What are you talking about?” He asks with a very much confused expression on his face.
“The boy who was coming downstairs is...is…”
“Jihoon, he’s Jihoon,” Seokmin interrupts me. “What? You’re acting like this because of him?”
“Yeah because he’s the vertically challenged boy! The one who I’ve bumped into for three times streak! The one to whom I said he’s a knob!” I whisper-yell, pointing at the door.
“Are you for real?!” Seokmin’s eyes widen after putting the pieces of info together.
“I’m ruined.” I groan again.
“Don’t be dramatic. Maybe he doesn’t remember you and everything will go smoothly.” Seokmin’s attempt to comfort me is weak but I want to believe him.
He’s rarely wrong on this kind of things.
“I really hope so.”
Suddenly, someone knocks on the door.
“Is everything okay in there?” It’s Joshua. “Are you two holding a meeting? Come out! Jihoon wants to greet you and dinner’s ready.”
“I’m really close to crying,” I whisper to Seokmin before yelling to Joshua “We’re coming!”
‘Come on, Soonyoung. You can do this. You’re a tiger, you’re strong. He won’t remember you! You last saw him three days ago and since then can you imagine how many people he as met? Plus, there’s a big difference in appearance between the weekdays and the weekend. The makeup, the dresses, the way you style your hair. And he could never have taken a good look at your face. Even though you can’t stand him, don’t let it show. Behave for tonight and starting from tomorrow, you can hate him again. You won’t be seeing him that often, right? Now, show your best smile and get out of here.’
Seokmin gets out of the bathroom and covers me until we get to the couch we were sitting before. The place that was mine, was now occupied by him. Jihoon gets up and greets Seokmin with a smile on his face. He then turns towards me and his expression shifts.
“You…” Jihoon starts and squints his eyes.
‘Oh no. I knew it. He recognised me. My time has come. Because of him everyone will hate me and think that I am an asshole. I want to cry. I’m sweating. Have I already said that I want to cry?’
“You must be Soonyoung!” He exclaims, flashing a wide smile. “Nice to meet you! I’m Jihoon, the one you texted yesterday and said he’s nice.”
When he says the word nice, he emphasises it. He may be alluding to something but I don’t pay too much attention to it as I’m too relieved by the fact that he hasn’t recognised me.
When I will get the chance, I will celebrate this moment with a little victory dance.
“Yeah, I remember you and I’m glad that, the other day, you enjoyed the coffee and the snacks.” I extend my hand for a handshake.
“Oh, yes. Thank you very much.” He grabs my hand and shakes it, his grip strong and firm.
“About that. It’s time to talk about our surprise,” Seungkwan chirps in.
“Surprise?” Seokmin voices.
“As we wanted to thank you for the other day, we decided to prepare a surprise for you too,” Seungcheol starts explaining.
“And the surprise is that we cooked dinner!” Mingyu squeals as he opens the kitchen door, revealing the table full of different kinds of food.
“You didn’t have to!” Seokmin and I say at the same moment.
“We wanted to do that.”
“And we took advantage of this giant here who can cook really well,” Joshua says as he pats Mingyu’s back.
“That was really kind of you.” Seokmin claps his hands, happy due to the surprise.
“Finally, I will be able to taste Mingyu hyung’s food! I bet it’s even more delicious that Joshua hyung says!” I exclaim, already drooling at the sight of the food.
“Stop it! I’m going to blush.” Mingyu softly hits me on the arm.
“Yeah, stop it or he will get too cocky about his skills,” Seungkwan not so subtly says, letting Mingyu hear his words.
“Hey!” Mingyu pouts at Seungkwan’s words.
Everybody starts laughing while walking into the kitchen and taking their seats. At the head of the table, there’s Joshua and opposite to him, Seungcheol. Seokmin is sitting at Joshua’s left, Seungkwan is between Mingyu and me. On the other side of the table, there’s Jihoon sitting between Wonwoo, who’s at Joshua’s right, and Jeonghan, at Seungcheol’s left.
Jihoon is right in front of me and I can’t help but think ‘This is going to be an interesting night.’
Notes:
I decided to split this chapter into two parts to give a little bit of suspense to this dinner but, hey, the guys have finally met!
To make more clear how they're sitting at the table, here's a scheme:
DK HS SK MG
--------------
JS | | SC
--------------
WW WZ JH
Chapter 10
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Between a mouthful and another, we chat about little things, laugh and joke around as if we’ve known each other for ages while, in fact, we’ve met not even an hour ago. The mood is crazy and the anxiety that had been haunting me for days is now gone. I wish we could spend more quality time gathered together as we did today.
‘I need to tell Shua hyung that we should hang out like this more often.’
However, what makes me really happy is that Jihoon doesn’t seem to remember me! Yes, he glared at me the entire night but, when we were grabbing more drinks from the fridge, Joshua whispered to me that it’s a habit of his, especially when he is around people who are too loud. Upon hearing that, I’m a bit relieved because, well, we were being so loud. Our duo, tonight, has become a trio. The legendary SeokSoon has found another member and we’re now the BooSeokSoon! We found out that Seungkwan is as loud and funny as us so the three of us naturally clicked. We kept cracking jokes and had everyone laugh at them.
Everyone but Jihoon.
“Guys, you know, Seok and Soon are our fans,” Joshua suddenly says, making everyone look at the two of us.
“You can say that we’ve created your fan club,” Seok adds.
“True, I love all of your songs and I’m looking forward to when you will be a super band.” I smile to all of them.
“Do you think so?” Mingyu asks, his imaginary puppy tail wagging.
“We’re sure about it. You make really good music!” Seokmin screams out, not controlling his volume.
“And I’m sure you already have a pretty big fanbase. Your amazing looks helped with that,” I mumble the last part, suddenly too shy to say it out loud.
“I know that. One of my biggest qualities is to look great!” Seungkwan flips his non-existent long hair.
“Don’t mind his words. He tells himself that a lot and it got to his head.” Mingyu rolls his eyes.
“You cannot say it’s not true. He looks good,” Seokmin says, missing the glare he got from Joshua.
“See that? Unlike you, they can tell who is the real beauty here.” Seungkwan crosses his arms, annoyed at Mingyu.
“With all these compliments, you now have their hearts.” Joshua giggles.
“They had our hearts the moment they stepped in this house. They’re so funny!” Seungcheol says, still wiping the tears he shed while laughing.
“This means Soonyoung can relax now.” Joshua stands up and walks to where I was sitting.
“What do you mean?” Seungcheol asks a little bit confused by Joshua’s statement.
“He was afraid you wouldn’t like him.” Joshua ruffles my hair while blush starts creeping on my cheeks.
“Why do you have to expose me like this?” I look up at him and whine.
Everyone laughs and I get even redder than I already am. I am as ripe as a tomato due to the fact that they’re almost cooing at me. Luckily, Wonwoo saves me by bringing the dessert.
“Here we are. Different ice creams for you. Choose the one you like the most,” He says and then winks at me.
“I want the bigger one!” Seungkwan screams.
“No, it’s mine!” Mingyu leans over the table to reach for the ice cream.
“Hey, you know that I’m the eldest so the biggest one is mine!” Seungcheol grabs it. He then turns to Jeonghan and, with the sweetest voice, he says, “Hannie, for you.”
Jeonghan gladly takes the ice cream but not before giving a quick peck to Seungcheol.
“Why fighting over ice cream? Aren’t you full? You hate a whole cake before dinner!” Here it his mom Joshua scolding the kids.
“Hyung, you know that food is never enough!” Seungkwan cries out before turning again towards Mingyu.
And with that said, they keep on bickering over the ice creams left until they decided to play rock-paper-scissors to make things quicker.
After having enjoyed the sweetest part of the dinner, literally, it’s time to clean up the table and start doing the wash-up.
“Jeonghan and I are going to clean a bit and then join you in the living room,” Joshua declares, grabbing Jeonghan by the wrist so he couldn’t escape.
“No way. You have already done a lot. I will wash the dishes,” I say to stop Shua hyung.
“And I will mop the kitchen floor,” Seokmin adds.
“You’re the guests tonight. You can’t clean,” Jeonghan says with a stern look.
“Ah, hyung. There’s no written rule about that. C’mon! You deserve to rest. You guys have cooked a whole meal for us.” I grab Jeonghan by his shoulders and lightly push him towards the living room.
“Is the least we can do to thank you.” Seokmin does the same thing as I did but with Joshua.
Jeonghan looks at Joshua as if to urge him in standing up against this. However, the latter just sighs and says, “It’s useless trying to fight against them. They’re too stubborn for that. Let’s go watching some tv.” He pats Jeonghan on the shoulder and then turns towards us. “If you need help, call us, okay?”
“Yup.” Seokmin and I say in unison.
As soon as the boys leave the kitchen, we get to work. Seokmin arms himself with a mop, a bucket full of water and a bottle of floor cleaner. He mops not only the kitchen but the hallway too.
In the meantime, I pour a ton of dish soap on the sponge and start washing the dishes. I don’t usually wear rubber gloves as I like doing keeping my hands submerged in the foamy water. It relaxes me a lot. Washing the dishes is something I enjoy doing because, later, I’m satisfied by watching the crockery shine...okay, maybe it’s weird.
I was scrubbing and humming a song when I suddenly hear footsteps getting louder as someone gets closer to me.
“Seok, already done with mopping? Can you help me with this? I’ll do the washing and you’ll dry them,” I say without even turning around.
“I’m not Seokmin. I can still help with that, though.”
Jihoon.
‘Oh God, why is he here?
“Don’t worry. You have already cooked before.” I give a quick glance at him. He’s standing next to the table with his arm crossed.
“I haven’t done that much, plus, you said you need help.”
Jihoon reaches the sink, grabs a towel and takes the plate away from my hand to dry it.
“Okay. Suit yourself.”
For a while, we clean in complete silence. The tension in the air was so thick and almost suffocating.
It’s as if Jihoon wants to say something but keeps being quiet instead and it is somewhat frustrating.
I can’t stand the silence any longer so I decide to break it.
“Do you have something to say?”
“What do you mean?” Jihoon asks, eyes fixed on the plate he’s drying.
“I sense that you want to say something.”
“I do but it’s better if I don’t do that. It could ruin the mood.” He smirks but in a bitter way.
“You won’t ruin the mood.” I roll my eyes at him.
“If you say so…” He sighs and places the towel on the counter.
“Bring it on.”
“For how much more do you plan to play pretend?”
“Uh?” I look at him, confused.
‘Oh, wait. Don’t tell me that he-’
“Don’t play dumb with me, Soonyoung. After bumping into me, maybe stalking me and calling me names, you pretend you haven’t recognised me?”
‘Shit. He does remember.’
“I thought you had forgotten and I would’ve never come to you to say ‘oh, do you remember me? I used to slam into you a couple of times this week when I was rushing to be somewhere.’ Don’t you think I could do that?” I say without taking a breath in between words.
“I can’t forget a face as dumb as yours,” He scoffs.
“Here it is again, the knob you.” I rub the sponge on the plate with more strength that it is needed.
“Breathing and alive.”
I throw the sponge into the sink. “You know, you’re more bearable when you have your mouth shut.”
“That’s not what you said yesterday. You told me that I am nice.”
I look at him and he has a smirk on his face, one eyebrow raised.
“That’s because I didn’t know it was you. You’re rude and not funny at all.”
“Said the one who’s just like me.”
“I am not like you.” I grab the sponge and resume cleaning the dishes.
“Yeah, sure. Now, stop and wash those dishes.”
“Already doing that if you haven’t noticed. You keep drying them!”
We fight non-stop and keep picking on what the other’s doing.
“Clean them better. You’re leaving residues of food on the rims,” Jihoon complains.
“That’s because someone’s voice irritates me.”
“If you’re irritated by your own voice, stop talking.”
“Your voice irritates me, not mine!” I cry out in frustration.
“Not only you cannot focus on walking, but you also cannot even focus on washing.” He shakes his head.
“And you’re not focused on drying. I can see from here that they’re still wet and I bet that even from Mars they can see that. Knob.” I point at the dishes he put on the counter.
“Idiot.”
“Don’t call me idiot.”
“But you are an idiot.”
I put down the dish I had in my hands and turn towards Jihoon.
Thankfully, my height makes me tower over him and I can look just a tiny bit more intimidating.
“Stop it.”
“I stop when I want to.” He takes a step towards me.
“Blockhead.”
“Calling me names won’t stop me from calling you idiot.” Another step.
“I said stop it.”
We’re awfully close and looking in each other’s eyes, short-breathed for the pent up frustration.
He was about to get back at me when Joshua walks in the kitchen.
Both Jihoon and I turn towards the sink again, resuming our tasks.
“Everything okay in here?” He asks, an intrigued look on his face.
“Everything is great,” Jihoon answers a little bit too quickly.
“Yeah, why?” I ask him back.
“I heard some noises coming from here and so I came to check.” Joshua looks at Jihoon first and then at me.
“It was due to the dishes clashing.” I try to come up with an excuse.
“Wait a moment, Soonyoung…” Joshua takes a long pause as he comes closer to us. I start sweating as I think that he caught us fighting and he’s about to tell us how disappointed and sad he his. “You banned us from the kitchen and now he’s here to help you.” He points his index at Jihoon.
“Well…” I start but get cut off.
“I insisted on helping him, hyung. You know that I can’t keep still,” Jihoon says, trying to look convinced of what he was saying.
“Do you?” Joshua says doing the knowing look thing.
“Yeah,” Jihoon doesn’t waver under the elder’s gaze.
“Okay, if you say so. However, I see that you’re a great team.” Joshua pats us both on the shoulder.
“What?” I shriek.
“It looks like you get along so well.” Joshua smiles.
‘If he only knew…’
“Very well,” Jihoon says through gritted teeth while faking a smile.
“Like best friends.” Out of survival instinct, I throw my arm around Jihoon’s shoulder to prove my point. Jihoon stiffens at the sudden contact.
“I’m so glad to hear that!” Joshua claps his hands. “From today on, we will spend a lot of time together!”
“Really? Why?” Jihoon cries out, trying not to sound too whiny.
“The guys said that Seokmin and Soonyoung should come to see us practising from time to time.”
“Oh.” Jihoon’s mouth stays like that, in the shape of an O.
“Well, I’m going back to the living room. We will be waiting for you.”
Joshua leaves us and we both sigh in relief, not immediately realising that my arm is still on Jihoon. When we do realise that, Jihoon pushes me away and grabs the towel again.
We’ve survived from Joshua hyung’s questioning and this relieves me. Ruining his mood is the last thing that I want to do. He looks so happy that all of us are going along!
Well, almost all of us.
As soon as I finish washing the last dish, I bolt out of the kitchen, not even waiting for Jihoon to dry it.
When I come into the living room, I see that the two couches that were facing each other are now in an L shape around the tv and the two armchairs are at both ends of the couches.
Seokmin is sitting between Joshua and Mingyu. You can clearly see how happy Seok is because he’s next to his Shua hyung. I mentally roll my eyes and go towards Wonwoo and Seungkwan, the latter tapping the space among them, suggesting that I could sit there.
After a while, Jihoon walks in and goes straight for the armchair put next to where Mingyu is.
For the rest of the night, I try not looking at him because I know that, one way or another, he would get on my nerves and Joshua would end up noticing it.
Suddenly, Seokmin gets up from the couch and goes towards the entrance.
“I almost forgot that Soonyoung and I brought little presents for you!” He says, almost squealing.
“Really? You didn’t have to!” Seungcheol exclaims.
“We felt like we wanted you to remember this night through this present.” I stand up too to follow Seokmin.
“How sweet of you,” Jeonghan cooes.
“We would’ve remembered it anyway,” Mingyu says.
“It’s difficult to forget people like Seokmin and you,” Seungkwan adds, checking Seokmin out.
“Hey, Seungkwan, stop.” Joshua looks a little bit annoyed.
“What? You’re jealous?” Seungkwan wiggles his brows.
“I’m protective. They’re my little bros.” The elder looks away from the blonde guy who was teasing him.
“We wanted to get the same thing for everyone but, unfortunately, there were just six of them so one is going to be different,” Seokmin tells as he grabs his bag from the floor.
He pulls the seven little bags out of his backpack. I randomly take four of them and check the names on them. I’ve got Seungcheol, Wonwoo, Seungkwan and Jihoon.
'What a surprise! Life hates me, doesn’t it?'
I walk to them and hand the bags with a smile. When it’s Jihoon’s turn, I make sure to step on his foot.
“Ouch!”
“I’m so sorry! I didn’t mean to!” I say, voice coated in sarcasm and smirking at him.
“Don’t worry but next time try to pay more attention.” Jihoon’s voice is calm but his eyes are those of someone ready to fight.
I laugh on the inside because he can do nothing but to be kind.
“Now, open it!” Seokmin says once everyone got his bag.
〜〜
When we bought the gifts, Seokmin and I tried to gather some information from Joshua, trying to get to know what the boys needed.
We were careful with the questioning so that he couldn’t understand what we wanted to do.
We thought of buying them earrings but not everyone has his ear pierced. Then we opted for ties but it would be too formal. Bracelets were next on the list. Not was of our or the boys’ taste, so the last thing was to find necklaces.
We were walking by this jewellery store when we saw it.
The necklace we were looking for.
It was made with two little silver flat hoops intertwined, one of the two hoops a shade lighter of the other, hanging from a leather string. It was simple but really pretty and could fit the boys’ style.
We walked in the shop and asked them about the necklace. They told us it was one of the hot pieces in the late fashion. It was even possible to carve names on the rim and it could be done on the spot. It was perfect! This way they would have the same item but, at the same time, it was personal.
We asked for seven of them but, unfortunately, they had only six.
After a brief meeting, Seokmin and I decided to take them anyway and maybe give Joshua a different one.
While they were engraving the names, I take a look around the shop, trying to find something for Shua.
Nothing could really catch me. That was until I found it.
It was really beautiful and I don’t know why but a name flashes in my mind right at the moment I ask the shop assistant if one could carve a name on that necklace too.
Seokmin had looked at me with a confused look but eventually trusted me.
〜〜
“This is beautiful!” Seungcheol exclaims as he turns the necklace into his fingers.
“I love it!” Seungkwan is jumping around.
“How did you know that we needed more accessories?” Wonwoo asks, examining the item.
“We had a hunch,” Seokmin says.
“A hunch called Hong Joshua. Was it because of this that you asked me if we needed something for the next show?” Hyung asks still not believing that he was being used by us.
“Kind of…” I trail off as Mingyu tries to draw the attention.
“Look! Jihoon’s one is different!”
“What is it?” Joshua asks.
“It’s a gold crescent moon with little diamonds and a star hanging from the upper end of the moon. His name is carved on the back side of it,” Mingyu answers for the shorter who was still looking at the necklace.
“Soonyoung chose that one for Jihoon. He was so confident when he took that, saying that he knew it was the right one for him.” Seokmin exposes me.
I’m sitting far away from him so I cannot pinch his arm but I still glare at him.
Jihoon doesn’t need to know all the details.
“Hoon, that moon looks like the shape of your eyes when you smile.” Seungkwan points out.
“That’s true! Plus, he loves the moon and the stars.” Mingyu agrees.
“Now that I think about it, it somewhat matches the necklace that you have,” Seokmin says, pointing at the necklace I wear every day.
“What necklace?” Seungkwan asks, curious about what we’re talking about.
“He always has this necklace with a golden star, just like the little one in Jihoon’s,” Seokmin explains.
“Moon and stars, what a match!” Joshua claps his hands and smiles at us.
“You know I have that because of the nickname my friend gave me when I lived in Japan.” I try to defend myself.
“Hoshi, the star,” Seokmin says, almost as if to mock me.
“It makes me cringe a bit but it's cute. It matches you and your personality,” Wonwoo says, smiling at me.
“Thank you, hyung.” I blush a bit at the unexpected compliment.
At that moment, Seokmin phone rings, snapping even Jihoon out of his trance.
Seokmin takes his phone out and goes into the kitchen to answer it.
“My parents. They said they’re coming to pick me up.” He says, coming back after a while.
“Why? What time is it?” I ask him.
“Almost one in the morning.”
“Already?!”
“Guess that it’s late for every one of us,” Seungcheol says, rubbing his hands on his thighs.
“We need to go home and get some sleep.” Wonwoo stretches his arms and legs.
“Tomorrow’s Sunday and we need to make use of this free time to rest. We need to charge our batteries,” Mingyu says, getting up from the couch and grabbing Seungkwan to make him stand up too.
The guys pack their things and, one by one, they leave the house after exchanging numbers and goodbyes.
There’s only Jihoon left. He is going to crash at Joshua’s because his house is far away and he’s just too lazy to walk.
“Weird that your parents haven’t called you yet,” Joshua says to me while we’re moving the couches back to their place.
“Maybe they saw the time and just assumed that I would be sleeping here.”
“He sleeps here?” Jihoon asks, almost freaked out at the idea.
“Not today, but he usually does. Well, we sleep either at my house or at his house.” Joshua and I high five as we finish tidying up the room.
“Oh, I see,” Jihoon says.
After that, Seokmin and I grab our things and get out of the house, Joshua and Jihoon coming with us until the end of the driveway.
“My parents keep sending me texts telling me to come to the main road as they will pick me up there,” Seokmin says while scrolling the texts on his phone.
“I’ll come with you and then get back home,” I say as I turn around to say goodbye to Joshua.
“You alone? No way. I will go with Seokmin and Jihoon is coming with you,” The elder states with a super serious tone.
“What?!” Jihoon and I shriek at the same time.
“I can go home alone! My house is super near and you know that!” I keep fighting as I don’t want to go home with that knob.
“But it’s late and there could be danger everywhere.”
“Oh, c’mon! This is one of the most peaceful areas. Tell him that, Seok!” I look at my friend, seeking his support.
“You never know what could happen.” He shrugs his shoulders.
I glare at Seokmin.
If looks could kill, Seokmin would be dead by now.
Did he forget that Jihoon is the last person with whom I want to walk home?
I would rather never move from here than to walk with him.
“That’s it, I have already decided it,” Joshua says with a tone that leaves no space for fighting back. “Ji, do you have any problem with that?”
“No, hyung.” Jihoon has no choice but to agree.
“Good, so now we will get going. Ji, you take the house keys. I’m sure you will return here before I do.” Joshua then turns towards me and ruffles my hair. “Good night, Soons.”
With that said, Joshua and Seokmin go the opposite way and I’m left alone with Jihoon.
Great.
Seokmin gets to walk with his crush and I got stuck with the one person I can’t stand at all.
Why couldn’t it be Wonwoo the one to stay over at Shua’s? He looks really good and seemed an interesting guy.
“You’re so childish,” Jihoon says, interrupting the flow of my thoughts on Wonwoo.
“Excuse me?”
“I mean, stepping on my foot on purpose.”
“I didn’t do it on purpose.” I walk in the direction of my house, not checking if Jihoon is following me or not.
“Yeah, sure. And I’m a genie.” He catches up just to be this sarcastic.
“If you really are one, can you grant one of my wishes?” I took a quick glance at him before saying, “I wish you could disappear.”
“You’re not funny.”
“Not trying to be funny.” I close my eyes and sigh. “What’s your problem anyway?”
“The problem is that you stepped on my foot and it hurt.”
“Not my fault you can’t stand a little bit of pain.”
“What?”
“Look, I took a little revenge because you wouldn’t stop calling me idiot.”
“But you are an idiot.”
“If you call me again like that, I swear I’m going to hit you,” I warn him as I stop in my tracks right in front of my driveway.
“Idiot.”
I was about to really hit him with my fist when I feel something blocking me.
Jihoon had grabbed my wrists, the fist that was hovering just inches away from his left cheek.
He doesn’t move from that position and neither do I.
Jihoon’s there, looking at me and I feel like frozen on the spot.
The moon was shining bright and it illuminated just a half of his face.
Under that light, his sharp features softened, his skin is the same colour as the moon.
He almost looked like a porcelain doll that needs to be handled with extreme care because of how fragile it is.
However, this image of him breaks the very moment he opens his mouth to speak.
“See? You’re an idiot because you said you were about to hit me. That’s why I could block it.” His knowing-it-all tone is back.
“My hand moved on its own.”
“Control your body, then.”
“I always do that.”
While we’re arguing, his hand is still wrapped around my wrist.
Upon realising that, I snap my wrist out of his hold and turn towards my house.
“My house is here. You can go now.” I shoo him away with my hand.
“Go in. The children shouldn’t be walking around this late at night.”
“The same goes for you as you really look like a child.”
“Talking about my height?”
“Yes, there’s a problem with that?” I ask him, crossing my arms.
“You know, you should improve with your insults. You shouldn’t go and pick on people for things that are too obvious.” He scoffs.
“That’s because I usually don’t need to insult people. I get on with everyone. If I were you, I would ask myself why I can’t stand you.”
“Nope. Don’t have time to waste on such useless questions.”
“Useless just like you.”
I turn on my heels and walk down the driveway without even greeting him.
Why should I when he’s being nothing but an ass to me?
“Where are your manners? Won’t you say goodbye to me?” He yells after me, making me stop halfway.
“I do that only with people that I like.”
“How low of you.”
“I want to be like that, so I can match you.” I keep walking after having talked back at him for the nth time tonight.
“Good.”
“Good.”
“Great.”
“Perfect!”
And like that, I walk into my house. I close the door behind me and lean on it as I sigh.
He will make me have a stroke if he keeps being like that.
The lights in my house are all off, meaning that my parents are already fast asleep.
I step in the kitchen to drink a glass of water and I find a post-it written by my mom.
“I don’t know if you will be coming here to sleep but I’ll leave this here anyway.
Tomorrow, your father and I are going to pay a visit to some friends of ours and we’ll have lunch there.
Do you want to join us?
Let me know if I need to wake you up or not.
Love you, mom”
I grab the pen that she left next to the post-it and I write that they can go without me as I promised Seokmin to hang out with him in the morning.
I added that she shouldn’t worry about my lunch as I will cook it by myself.
I go upstairs, trying to be as quiet as possible while washing up and change into my pyjamas.
The moment I tuck myself under the blankets, I feel all the tiredness of the day weighing on me.
I throw my right hand over my eyes and I suddenly smell a weird scent.
It’s not the perfume I usually use, plus I didn’t wear any tonight because I forgot to.
I was trying to figure out where this scent comes from when I realise that it comes from my wrist, the one Jihoon had grabbed a while ago.
I have to admit that he uses good perfume with a strong but somewhat sweet scent.
What a night, really.
Time flew by really fast as we were in a great mood but what warms my heart the most is that Joshua was so happy he had gathered the people he liked the most in his house.
While my mind was replaying the highlights of the night, I slowly fall asleep with a smile on my face, lulled by this new found scent.
Notes:
This took quite a while because of the amount of dialogue and of the sudden inspiration that made me write a 3k-words angst (Hug (포옹) if you want to check it out).
A special thanks to the vobo, rabo, pabo group chat for helping me with a part of this chapter!
Hope you enjoyed it!
Chapter 11
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
At 9.30 in the morning, the alarm goes off with the loudest ringtone I had on my phone. You know, the one that makes you sure you wake up.
Sunday mornings are usually made to sleep in but not today as I have to hang out with Seokmin. We promised to meet at 10.30 at “Coffee & Goodpie” so that we can grab our coffee and then walk around a bit.
I get up and stretch my stiff limbs before going downstairs to have a quick breakfast.
My parents have already left and this means only one thing: this house is soon going to become a disco.
I turn on my stereo system, connect my mp3 to it and blast music to a very high volume. My playlist has different songs of different genres, plus a lot of ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’ songs, you can say that I have all the songs they had sung from their debut up to today.
Suddenly, one of my favourites starts playing, ‘Don’t Threaten Me With a Good Time’ by Panic! at the disco. I turn the volume up even more and start singing along with Brendon while dancing with the pan in one hand, trying to make breakfast.
While I’m about to sit at the table to eat, listening to a more soft song, I check my phone to see if there’s any message. There’s two, indeed: one’s from Seokmin and the other one from Joshua hyung. I give the priority to Seokmin and so I open his text.
DonkeyKong:
Morning!
I’m almost ready and I hope you woke up.
See you Soon!
Hoshiya:
Morniiiiiiing!
I’m super awake!
I just need to wear something more decent than my starry pyjamas and I’ll get going!
Now, it’s time to quickly see what Joshua wants. He is still online so the answer won't take too long to arrive.
Joshuji:
What you’re up to?
Hoshiya:
I’m getting ready to hang out with Seok, why?
Joshuji:
Do you want to turn off that damned stereo?
Hoshiya:
How do you know?
Joshuji:
I can basically hear the music from my room.
Hoshiya:
Really?
My stereo is that powerful?
Joshuji:
No, you hamster.
It was a figure of speech.
Hoshiya:
Then how do you know that I’m blasting music?
Joshuji:
Seventh sense.
Hoshiya:
Are you trying to be funny now?
It’s sixth sense, though.
For real, how do you know?
Joshuji:
Jihoon was out for a walk.
He walked by your house and when he came back he told me that.
Hoshiya:
Jihoon?
Joshuji:
Yup.
He said you were listening to P!atd.
Hoshiya:
God, he really heard.
I got busted.
Joshuji:
He’s laughing now.
Hoshiya:
Tell him to stop.
There’s nothing to laugh about.
Joshuji:
He said he won’t stop.
Hoshiya:
That shortie.
I will teach him a lesson someday.
Joshuji:
Calm down, tiger!
Hoshiya:
Never been calmer than this.
I got to go or I’ll be late.
Joshuji:
Okay, bro.
Talk to you later.
Hoshiya:
Bye, hyung.
I change clothes as quickly as possible and get out of the house, locking the door behind me. I start walking towards “Coffee & Goodpie” and, as today I’m not rushing, I put my headphones to listen to some music and enjoy my surroundings.
The song is slow and matches the atmosphere of this early autumn days. It’s a bit cloudy but it’s not cold so there’s a lot of people roaming around the city, even a lot of tourists.
Seeing the streets like this makes me feel good. If you live in a metropolis you may feel a bit lonely because, no matter how many people are surrounding you, they can give you the cold shoulder.
Though, there are some pros too.
You can see different ethnicities and cultures mixing; you see people walking around and not giving any particular attention to you who are passing by them and this makes you feel less as if you’re not standing out too much. You are less judged by others.
However, what I like the most is thinking where these people are going: are they going to meet their friends? Do they have a date with their lover?
One can’t get a proper answer but I often find myself hoping that no matter who they’re meeting or where they’re going, they can have a good time.
As the third songs I’m listening to fades away, I realise that I’m already near my destination.
Seokmin is already outside the café, our drinks in hands.
“Good morning!” I greet Seokmin waving my hand.
“Morning, Soon.” He smiles at me and hands one of the cups. “Here.”
“Thank you.” I take a couple of sips, relishing in the warmth of the drink. “Shall we go?”
We start down the road for our usual Sunday route, talking about the night before.
“I see that you’re particularly happy today, did something happen?” Seokmin suddenly asks when he sees me smiling without a particular reason.
“No, why?”
“Nothing,” he says as he averts my eyes.
I contently sigh. “I’m happy as any Sunday because I’m with my best friend.” I sling my arm around his neck. “Aren’t you happy?”
“Of course, I am!”
“I know why you’re happy and it’s not because of me.” I evilly laugh and tighten my hold on him.
“I don’t know what you’re talking about?” Seokmin asks, confused.
“I won’t fall for that. Now, tell me.” I wiggle my eyebrows.
“What?”
“C’mon. Yesterday, Shua hyung walked you to your parents’ car.”
“Oh, you were talking about that?” Seokmin’s brain cells finally connect.
“Of course! So? Don’t leave me hanging!” I whine as I sit down on the bench in the park we’re at now.
“I have nothing to tell.” Seokmin sits beside me, putting his cup of coffee between us. “We talked as per usual.”
“About what?” I take a sip from my cup before putting that too in between us.
“Nothing.”
“If you’ve talked to each other, it’s impossible for you to have said nothing.” I turn towards him to look in his eyes.
“I cannot tell you the topic of our conversation.” Seokmin is looking everywhere but at me.
“Why? You never keep it a secret.”
“Because I know you’ll get mad,” he says and then sighs.
“I won’t get mad! I’m in control of my anger.” I hit my chest with my hand as if that could prove my point.
“Yeah, sure.” Seokmin’s tone a mocking one.
“Tell me and I’ll show you how I can keep cool about it.”
“Remember your words.” Seokmin takes a deep breath and picks the cup in his hands to fidget with the plastic cap. “Shua said that you and Jihoon would look good together.”
“WHAT?” I shriek as I jolt up from the bench, making some passers-by flinch.
“You promised you wouldn’t get mad.” Seokmin bows to the strangers, feeling sorry to them because of my reaction.
“First, I never promised that. Second, why in the hell he would’ve said that nonsense?”
“He said that when he walked into the kitchen and saw you two next to each other, you looked good,” Seokmin admits.
“Crazy. One of my best friends has gone insane.”
“You know he said that because he doesn’t know the truth. Plus, Jihoon was behaving because he hasn’t recognised you.”
I sigh, defeated, as I sit back on the bench. “He did.” I rub one hand on my eyes. “He did recognise me.”
“WHAT?” Now, it’s Seokmin’s turn to scream and make some pigeons fly away.
“Yeah. He pretended not to so that we couldn’t start fighting and wouldn’t ruin the night.”
“I can’t believe it. When did he tell you? When he walked you home?”
“While we were washing the dishes. We were fighting until Joshua hyung walked in and we pretended everything was fine.”
“I’m speechless.” Seokmin takes a pause, thinking about something, then adds, “That’s why you were behaving like that about the gifts.”
“And when Joshua suggested that the shortie should’ve walked me home. We’ve fought even then, by the way.”
“Why didn’t you tell me? I could’ve helped you.”
“We hadn’t a spare moment, so I couldn’t tell you. Plus, you looked happy and I didn’t want to ruin your mood.”
“You wouldn’t have done that!” Seokmin sighs before looking at me. “What now? What will you do?”
“I need to find a way to tell Joshua what happened with shortie and, at the same time. try to avoid the latter.”
“It will be hard, but you can do it.” Seokmin put his hand on my shoulder, squeezing it a bit, as he tries to encourage me.
“Thank you.” I put my hand on his and smile at him.
At that moment, Seokmin’s phone rings. He looks at the caller’s ID and his eyes go wide. He walks away to answer but not before mouthing the words “It will take a minute”.
It’s weird. Seokmin never did this when he got a call. He was never anxious about talking on the phone in front of me, not even when he was making a cringe-worthy conversation with his ex-girlfriend.
While I wait for him, still sitting on the bench, I take out my phone to check the notifications.
I have a text from Joshua.
Joshuji:
Soons!
Are you busy this afternoon?
Hoshiya:
Since I’m home alone, no.
I’m not busy.
The moment I press the send button, Seokmin comes back, his expression the one of someone who’s scheming something behind his best friend’s back.
“It was...uhm...my mom. I have to go home!” Seokmin says, him too not so sure of his words as if he’s hiding something.
“What time is it?”
“It’s past midday.”
“Already?” I check my watch and he’s right. “Time really flies.”
“I know, right?” His laugh, a nervous one.
I get up from the bench so we can return to the cafè, our walk full of bantering and improvised scenes as we usually do, deciding to do some of them again in front of our classmates the day after.
“I really need to run home,” Seokmin says as soon as we get in front of the shop.
“Okay, bye Seok.”
I lift my hand for a high five but Seokmin doesn’t even greet back and sprints off the direction of his house.
‘What the hell is wrong with him today?’
I shake my head as I take my phone again to see if Joshua answered.
He did.
Jihoon’s point of view.
“Soonyoung will be home alone today,” Joshua suddenly announces from the couch in front of the one I’m laying on. He has been focused on the screen for quite a while, even getting up to make a call. Seemed like he was busy and I think it’s because of one of the upcoming gigs with the band.
“And?”
“Is it a problem for you if he comes here for lunch?” He looks at me with an expectant expression.
“Ehm...no?” My answer sounding more like a question than a statement but I can’t manage otherwise. “It’s your house, not mine, so you can invite whoever you want.”
I smile at Joshua but I’m mad at him on the inside. Why does he have to be kind and concerned about other people? Okay, it’s a good trait but why does it have to be like that with everyone? I don’t want to see that idiot again. I tried my best yesterday thinking that the moment he’d walk out of the door would’ve been the last time I’d see him. I did that for Joshua hyung. I’ve known him for so long that I know how happy he truly is that he got all of his friends together. He hadn’t shut up about that for hours.
“Okay, I will tell him to come.”
Joshua quickly types his message and sends it before throwing his phone at me, managing to hit me in the stomach, and getting up from his seat on the couch.
“I will start cooking something. If he replies, tell me and I’ll tell you what to write.” He starts walking towards the kitchen.
“What am I? Your slave?”
Joshua stops in his track and turns towards me, a hint of evilness in his eyes. “You either do that or you cook.”
“I will be glad to be your slave.”
“That’s the answer I like.”
He pats my stomach and goes in the kitchen to start his magic. I throw my head back and close my eyes, hoping that the idiot won’t come here.
The phone buzzes on my tummy and I open one eye to look at the bright screen. I pick it up and see that it’s him.
I open the app and read the previous messages.
Joshuji:
Have you already cooked something?
Hoshiya:
Nope.
I’m still on my way home.
Joshuji:
Why don’t you come over?
Jihoon’s still here.
‘Why Joshua had to mention me? Oh, maybe knowing that I’m here, he won’t come!’
Hoshiya:
Don’t worry, hyung.
I will make something by myself.
I smile to myself, happy because I won’t see his face again today. I get up from the couch and join Joshua hyung to tell him about the message.
“Hyung, he said no,” I say, leaning on the kitchen counter with my arms.
“Put pressure on him,” Joshua commands without even turning around and keeping on cutting the vegetables.
“Why? Maybe he wants to stay alone.”
“I told you to insist.” Joshua has now stopped and he’s holding the knife in a threatening way.
Scared, I type right away on the keyboard. As soon as hyung hears the sound of the keys coming from his phone, he resumes his cutting.
Joshuji:
C’mon!
Eat lunch with us.
Hoshiya:
Really, hyung.
I’ve been there yesterday too.
“He said he doesn’t want to come because he already did yesterday,” I read out loud.
“Weird,” Joshua mumbles as he moves the vegetables in a pan. “Tell him that he had never problems with that before and if he keeps acting like that, we will be the ones going to him.”
“What?” I shriek.
“You heard me.”
‘Great, so I will see him anyway. Why didn’t I get back to my house?’
Joshuji:
Since when you were worried about coming here for two days straight?
Hoshiya:
I’ve been always worried about that.
Joshuji:
If you don’t come here, we will come there.
Hoshiya:
No, hyung.
I want to be alone today.
Joshuji:
Why?
Did something happen?
It’s time for me to take a little revenge for how he stepped on my foot. As I will try to make him say why he doesn’t want to see us, I will reveal my identity. It’s Joshua’s phone so he won’t fight me as hyung could read the texts when he opens the chat again.
Hoshiya:
Nothing happened.
Joshuji:
Then why don’t you want to see us?
Hoshiya:
I don’t want to bother Jihoon and you.
Joshuji:
You won’t.
By the way, I’m Jihoon.
Hoshiya:
I will be a bother for you.
I know you want to be alone too.
Don’t insist.
Joshuji:
I insist because I know that hyung will be happy about eating lunch with his two little bros.
Hoshiya:
I’m sure of that but we can raincheck today.
“He wants to raincheck,” I say to Joshua who’s busy cooking the stew.
“Tell him not to cook, we’ll bring the food.” Hyung is not even listening anymore to what that idiot says.
Joshuji:
That is not possible.
Joshua just said you don’t have to cook because we will bring the food.
Hoshiya:
Tell him he doesn’t have to worry that much.
“He said again not to worry.”
“We will be at this house in 5. Tell him to set up the table.” Joshua tastes a bit of his stew and nods before turning off the stove.
Joshuji:
He said we will be there in 5 minutes.
Hoshiya:
I give up.
Come in 10 minutes.
I’m not home, yet.
“He said to go there in 10 as he’s not home yet,” I tell Joshua who just hums.
I think of some clever answer to get at him but in a subtle way.
Joshuji:
Don’t run or you can bump into someone.
Yeah, Joshua hyung told me that.
I giggle, waiting for his reply. Joshua really told me about the accident but he knew only about the first one. Apparently, that idiot hasn’t told him about the other two.
Hoshiya:
If that happens, I hope it will be a tall, handsome man and not a short knob.
;)
As I see the winky face, my right eye starts twitching. I put the phone on the kitchen counter and, without saying a word to Joshua, I go back on the couch.
‘Why, of all the people in Seoul, he had to be Joshua’s best friend?’
Notes:
This was a short filler chapter but this was the only thing I could do for now...let me know what you think about it!!
Chapter 12
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Soonyoung’s point of view
‘That fucker!’
That vertically challenged guy had the audacity of texting me from Joshua hyung’s phone knowing that I cannot fight him. Joshua could read our messages because hell if he would delete the insults texts from the chat. He even tried to make me slip up using the bumping accident from the beginning of the week. To my defence, I have to say that it’s been days since I’ve bumped into someone and it’s all because I haven’t met him. In conclusion, it’s obvious that the one causing all of the trouble was him and not me.
When I get home, I open the front door and walk in, going straight for the couch to throw my things there and set the table in that room. That way we can watch the tv too and stay warm as more sun comes in here thanks to the big windows. As soon as I’m done with the table, I put aside the blankets that my mother left around the room and turn on the stereo so that we can have background music and the house is less quiet. I put the playlist on shuffle and a song by Yiruma starts playing, ‘River Flows In You’. I love his music and especially this song. His melodies make me feel somewhat comfortable and they are able to carry you in a different world and make you live an almost fairytale-like story. I’m not the type who’s into classical music but his compositions never fail to give me the chills, in a good way of course.
River Flows In You slowly fades and it’s replaced by another song I love: Moonlight Angel’s OST. That anime is my favourite one as it was my companion in the years spent far away from my motherland. I treasure it a lot and that mostly the reason I have the ost in my playlist.
However, as the song starts, the doorbell rings signalling that the boys got here.
I run to open the door and they’re standing there, plastic bags in hands with the packed lunch in them.
“Hey, Soons!” Joshua greets me waving his hand.
“Hi.” Jihoon simply greets, not even smiling to try fooling Joshua hyung.
“Hi, guys! Come on in!” I grab Joshua’s arm and pull him inside the house “I’m starving!”
“What’s new about that?” Joshua giggles and takes his shoes off.
“I have been walking around since this morning and I had to sprint to come here because of you,” I whine as I hit his arm.
“Is this Moonlight Angel’s ost?” Jihoon suddenly asks as he walks in, making me turn towards him with wide eyes.
“Uh, yes. Do you know it?” I ask him back, still shook that he knew of this anime.
“Yes. It was my favourite anime. I watched it a lot while growing up.” He takes his shoes off and puts them next to Joshua’s.
“You know, it’s also Soonyoung’s favourite. He does a re-run of it at least twice a year,” Joshua reveals as he walks towards the kitchen to put the bags down the counter.
“It’s a great one.” Jihoon follows Joshua and answers without even looking at me.
“Yeah…” I whisper my answer so that he cannot hear it. I can’t help but agree with him as this anime is really amazing.
I sigh and go to the kitchen where I find Joshua looking at the table and then at me. “Why haven’t you set the table?”
“Already did. In the living room,” I say as I point to the said room.
“Have you cooked something?” He asks me.
“No. Jihoon said you would’ve brought lunch. Plus, I just got here so I didn’t have the time to make something.”
Jihoon snaps his head towards us at the mention of his name and when he realises he hadn’t been asked something, he quietly returns to play with his sweater paws. Not that I have been watching him, I just noticed it with the corner of my eyes.
“Good. The only thing you need to cook is rice.” Joshua is now taking the food out of the bags and putting it next to the stove. “Make a lot as Jihoon loves it.”
“Okay,” I say as I grab the tupperware from Joshua’s hands. “Go to the living room, I’ll make rice and put the food in the dishes.”
They walk towards the living room and I put the food in the microwave to heat it even though it’s still lukewarm. Then I put the rice and water in the rice cooker and press the start button. The only thing I have to do now is playing the waiting game as the food heats and cooks.
As I stand there, back leaning on the fridge, I notice that not even a sound comes from the living room. That is too weird considering how loud Joshua is when he has company.
‘What are they doing?’
I go in stealth mode through the hallway and then peek from the living room’s door, trying my best to don’t get noticed. I see that Joshua is not in the room and I assume he’s probably using the restroom. However, Jihoon is sitting on the couch, back facing the door, head moving as he’s studying the room until something catches his attention.
He stands up and walks towards that thing and...oh no. It’s the corner with my childhood photos!
‘If he sees them, I’m done! If he notices me standing here like a creep, I’m done! I have to do something before it’s…’
Too late. He has seen them and I’m mentally preparing for the mocking part to come when we will be eating. He takes one in his hands. It’s the one where a chubby younger me is doing a V sign with thumb and forefinger around his chin, wearing a Taekwondo uniform. Jihoon examines it, his face blank while doing so. He doesn’t show any emotion or reaction at all.
At that exact moment, the microwave’s timer goes off, making Jihoon jump and immediately put down the photo. As quickly as I can, I hide behind the door thinking he could turn around at any moment and I hope with all of myself that he hasn’t noticed my presence.
‘If he saw me, he would’ve already come here and mocked me about the photo, right?’
I quietly return to the kitchen, glaring at the microwave that had almost got me caught. I lost ten years of my life because of it!
I sigh and get the tupperwares from the infernal device as well as the cooked rice from the not-so-infernal device.
“It’s ready!” I yell as I bring the food over in the living room.
When I walk in the room, I see Jihoon sitting at the head of the table and Joshua at his left side. I want to be as far away as possible from that knob and that’s why I go sitting right at the opposite of him. We exchange the ‘enjoy your meals’ and munch the food while listening to the song currently playing. The atmosphere is a little bit awkward as no one dares to speak. After a while of putting up with this, the silence has become unbearable and that’s why I decide to be the one to break it.
“So, what have you done this morning?” I ask using the chopsticks to point both Joshua and Jihoon.
“Not much. I finished cleaning the house and Jihoon helped me with that.” Joshua just shrugs as to show that they hadn’t done much.
“I had to help you because I’m the maknae and you hyungs order me around all the time,” Jihoon complains.
“That’s because you don’t even move a finger until we use our hyung power on you,” Joshua rebuts, voice calm.
“That’s not true!” Jihoon widens his eyes in surprise. “I am the most active one among us.”
“Only when it comes to making music.” Joshua lifts his hand, palm facing Jihoon as the latter was about to talk back, again. “Oh right. Soons, why don’t you come to the practice this afternoon?”
“What? Today is Sunday!”
“Don’t you usually rest on Sundays?”
Jihoon and I answer almost at the same time and this makes Joshua smile.
“Special rehearsals. In a few days, we have a gig in a club outside the city and we need to practice every day,” Joshua says as he takes his phone to check the info about the club.
“Why I didn’t know anything about this?” Jihoon asks.
“Mingyu told me this morning.” Joshua’s simple reply makes Jihoon more suspicious about this.
“When?”
“When you went out for a walk. He called me and told about it. I just forgot to tell you.” Joshua hesitates a bit with his answer and, now, I’m starting to be suspicious too.
“You don’t sound too sure,” Jihoon says.
“Yeah. Something smells fishy,” I add, agreeing with the knob.
“What are you talking about?” Joshua scoffs. “There’s nothing smelling fishy here.” His eyes looking frantic between me and Jihoon. “Soons, call Seok too and make him come over.”
I glare at him in silence, waiting for Joshua to break under my gaze but his smile never falters. I sigh and give in. “Okay..at what time should he come?”
“Four thirty outside your house. Then we have to go to Mingyu’s.” Joshua looks proud of his doing. I hate him.
“We’ll go there on foot?” Jihoon asks. He sighs too, as a sign of giving up.
“No, we will take my car and Wonwoo is coming with us. I told him to come here,” Joshua states as he turns towards me. “Is it okay for you?”
‘Oh my God. Wonwoo is coming here. The handsome Jeon Wonwoo is coming here!’
“IT’S TOTALLY FINE!” I squeal a bit too loud. Upon realising how I answered, I cough and try to pull myself together as Jihoon rolls his eyes at me. “I mean, whatever. I’m going to text Seok and tell him to come here.”
I grab my phone and type a quick message to Seokmin and even squealing a bit about the fact that Wonwoo is going to come over. That boy is so handsome and I can’t wait to get to know him more.
As we finish our lunch, I relax on the chair and pat my stomach. “Hyung, it was delicious!”
“Thank you, Soons.” Joshua smiles and then snaps his fingers as if he just had an idea. “Do you know what this lunch is missing?”
Joshua and I look into each other eyes. He’s trying to telepathically send me his idea which successfully arrives at my brain. “Ice cream.” We say in unison, Jihoon looking at us as if he’s scared by our actions.
“I think there’s some left in the freezer.”
I stand up, chair screeching on the floor, and run to the kitchen.
I open the freezer, looking for the ice cream that, luckily for us, is still there.
‘There should be some hazelnuts and whipped cream somewhere.’
I look into the fridge and a couple of cupboards. After rummaging a bit, I finally have all the things I need to make the dessert, my special dish. I grab three tall fountain glasses and put a bit of chocolate and pistachio ice cream, chopped hazelnuts, whipped cream on the side with a piece of chocolate in it et voilà! The dessert is ready!
I put the glasses on a tray and bring them to the guys.
“Here I am!” I announce as I put the tray on the table.
“Your special dessert!” Joshua claps his hands like a seal and has heart eyes for the sweet standing in front of him.
“Special?!” Jihoon asks confused, looking at the ordinary-looking glass of ice cream.
“Yup! It’s special because it has a special ingredient…” Joshua makes a dramatic pause and inches closer to Jihoon as if he’s about to reveal the biggest secret of this world. “The special ingredient is love. He put a lot of love in this simple glass.” He points at the said glass, a serious look on his face.
“What love!” I hit him on the arm to make him shut up. “I only put hazelnuts, chocolate and whipped cream.”
“Okay, okay. There’s no need to be rude to your hyung.” Joshua rubs his arm. “Now, let’s eat it before it melts!” He takes the spoon and immediately digs in his glass of ice cream while Jihoon looks at his as if it could be poisoned.
“You got whipped cream moustaches!” I laugh as soon as Joshua lifts his head from the glass, showing these candid moustaches adorning his mouth.
“Uh? Really?”
“As always. Come here, let me wipe it.”
I take a napkin and stick it on his mouth. Joshua doesn’t let this occasion for a gag to go to waste and starts making weird faces while the napkin covers the lower part of his face. The three of us wholeheartedly laugh and keep on bantering until the ice cream is gone in our stomach.
“Now, I’ll do the washing up and you will relax on the sofa,” I state as I stand up and put the empty glasses on the tray.
“No way. I have already rested yesterday night.” Joshua stands up too, while Jihoon quietly goes for the sofa.
“But you’re my guests, you can’t clean!”
“There’s no written rule about that to use your own words,” Joshua says, trying to mimic my voice.
“Damned me. I speak too much.” I hit my mouth as a way to reprimand myself.
“C’mon, we will be faster if the three of us work together and then we can all rest.” Joshua then turns towards the sofa. “Jihoon, get your ass up from that sofa.”
“Okay, let’s get working!” Jihoon says in a fake excited tone while walking towards us.
The tasks are assigned: I will do the washing, Jihoon will dry and Joshua will put the tableware to their place.
We do work faster as we make a good team.
We even get to clean the floor and mop it.
“The floor in the living room, as well as the one in the kitchen, is wet. We can’t lay on the couches or sit on chairs.” I put the mop back into the cabinet and empty the bucket of water.
“Should we go to your room?” Joshua asks, already inching towards the stairs.
I hesitate a bit. I don’t want the vertically challenged guy to be in my most private space. But what can I do? It really is the only place we can go to. “We have to.” I sigh. “Let’s go upstairs. Hyung, show him the way.”
We climb up the stairs, Joshua leading the way to my room. I feel anxious as a stranger is about to see something that even I was unwilling to show even to Joshua and Seokmin until we got super close. It’s the space in which I can show my true self, without fear of being judged for the things I do or like. However, here we are now with Joshua opening the door to my room and Jihoon following him as he walks in the room. The shorter can’t help but look around, studying the room and noting every small detail.
‘I can say goodbye to that little privacy I had left.’
“I’m sorry for the mess but I hadn’t time to tidy it up.” I pick up my pyjamas from the floor and throw it in the wardrobe.
“It’s not that you hadn’t the time. You were just too lazy,” Joshua points out.
“True, but remember that there’s order in my chaos.” I cross my arms, proud of my statement.
“Whatever helps you sleep at night.”
Joshua doesn’t even wait a minute before plopping himself on the chair in front of my laptop. I already know that he’s going to listen to Sunday Morning and then put an episode of the show he enjoys watching these days.
I shake my head and then going to sit on my armchair. I put it next to the window so that I could look at the sky and the sun setting while being comfortably sitting and maybe sipping to some tea or hot chocolate. Jihoon, however, keeps looking around until he fixes his gaze on the wall next to my bed which is full of photos. There are shots of some of the happy and most important moments of my life. I have polaroids taken with my parents, with my friends who live in Japan, with Seokmin and Joshua and even the polaroid we had taken yesterday night at dinner.
“I plan to entirely cover it,” I suddenly say from my place next to the window.
“Uh?” Jihoon turns around to face me.
“The wall. I want to cover the entire wall with photos and even the one next to it.”
“Do you like photography?” He asks me with what I guess is interest in his eyes.
“I do. I would like to walk around with a professional camera around my neck so that I can capture with it the things that capture my eyes. However, I have to settle for my phone camera or the polaroid one for the time being.” I sigh.
“I see.” These are the only words Jihoon speaks while gently touching some of the polaroids hanging.
“Don’t stand there,” I say after a while, making him jump as he maybe was lost in his thoughts. “Sit on the bed, it doesn’t bite.” I giggle. “You can even lay there, it doesn’t matter.”
Jihoon looks at me, puzzled and surprised. I am too when I realise how kind I have been to him until now.
'What is happening to me? Have I gone crazy again?'
He probably decides to let it slide and lets himself fall deadweight on the bed, sprawling his limbs.
“It’s comfy, isn’t it?”
“A lot.” Jihoon closes his eyes and his lips automatically lift in a smile.
“If it hadn’t been comfortable, Soonyoung would’ve never bought it,” Joshua chimes in. I don’t know for how long he might have eavesdropped our conversation.
“Excuse me?”
“A prince has to sleep on a comfy bed,” Joshua says in a mocking tone.
“Hyung! Don’t mock me!” I whine.
“I wasn’t. I was actually complimenting you.” He’s trying to convince me he’s telling the truth.
“Really? Which part of that was a compliment?”
“When I called you a prince.”
“To mock me.”
“I get it.” He sighs. “I will never compliment you again.”
“You never do anyway.” I puff my cheeks and pout to pretend to be hurt by his words.
However, our bickering is interrupted by a light snoring.
We both turn around only to see that Jihoon has fallen asleep.
“He fell asleep faster than the flash! He just laid there!” I exclaim, shocked.
“I am as shocked as you are.”
“Was he that tired?” I mumble under my breath and Joshua doesn’t seem to catch that as he is pointing at Jihoon and says, “Seems he has found something to sleep with. Look at what he’s hugging.”
I follow Joshua’s finger and see that Jihoon is hugging my favourite stuffed toy: a hamster with a red ribbon around his neck and holding a heart with ‘I love you’ written on it. It was a gift that one of my close friends from Japan had sent to me for my birthday the year I came here. I always sleep hugging it and seeing Jihoon like that bothers me a little. It’s my plushie, not his. However, I decided to let it go. Jihoon looks so peaceful, the lines of his face more relaxed. He looks quite good without the constant frown he usually wears.
The fact that he was hugging the hamster made him look like a child who got knocked out after having played the entire afternoon at the park.
Joshua spares me a knowing glance before returning to his show while I get up from the armchair and walk towards the closet. I open it and grab a blanket to put on Jihoon.
I hate him but it’s chilly in my room and a few days from today they have to perform. If he gets cold, he could run a fever and the band couldn’t do their night. That’s the last thing I want as I would really feel guilty about it and that’s the only reason why I put my pride aside and cover Jihoon with the blanket.
After doing that, I grab my headphones and plug them to the phone as I go back to sit on the armchair. Before hitting the play button, I tell Joshua to pay attention to the doorbell as I won’t be able to hear it.
The tiredness from this morning suddenly falls on me and makes my eyelids feel so heavy to the point that I can’t help but close them.
As I listen to the music and imagine scenarios about Wonwoo and me, I slowly drift into the dreamland.
Notes:
I'm sorry if this took longer than it usually does but this weekend has been so busy!
I hope you enjoyed it as the things between these two are warming up!
What do you think will happen next? Let me know as I'm curious of what you think!!
Chapter 13
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Jihoon’s point of view.
I jolt awake and look around me, feeling a little bit lost.
I slowly take in the fact that I’m not in my room and not even in Joshua’s guest room.
‘Oh, right.’
I remember this is Soonyoung’s room and I fell asleep on his bed.
I slightly lift my head and see Joshua hyung watching something on the laptop wearing headphones so there would be no use in calling him. As I try to get up, I notice a blanket covering my body and a hamster plushie next to me.
‘What the hell? Was I holding it?’
Shaking my head with evident distaste on my face, I get up from the bed. I go to Joshua and tap his shoulder to make him turn around. He does and takes his headphones off.
I was about to speak when he puts his index over my mouth, gesturing that I shouldn’t talk. He then points towards the window and I finally notice Soonyoung sleeping on the armchair.
‘He must feel a little bit uncomfortable sleeping like that.’
When I realise what I was thinking, I automatically flinch.
‘Who cares if he’s comfortable or not. It’s his problem and not mine.’
When I turn around, Joshua’s not there anymore and I assume he just went downstairs.
I climb down the stairs, a little bit unsure of where to go, when I hear a faint noise coming from the living room. I walk in there to find Joshua sitting on the couch and zapping, trying to find a program that could suit his taste.
“For how long I’ve been sleeping?” I ask as I sit next to him.
“Not much. Maybe half an hour?” Joshua simply replies, not averting his eyes from the bright screen in front of him.
“Basically since we went to his room.”
“Exactly.” He takes a short pause and then starts again. “As you may have noticed, we’re here because Soonyoung is sleeping.” Joshua sighs and shakes his head but a fond smile is tugging at his lips. “That guy. He said you fell asleep faster than a bolt of lightning and he did the same thing right after putting the blanket on you.”
“He was the one who put it?” To say that I was taken aback it’s an understatement. “I thought it was you.”
“Nope. He did that on his own free will. You fell asleep hugging his favourite plushie too.”
“The hamster one?”
“The hamster one.”
Joshua hyung is now looking at me with a weird, almost creepy, smirk. I bet he’s plotting something in his head like he always seems to do.
Wait.
If that idiot hates me, why did he take care of me?
He has been kind this entire morning, even while I was looking at his photos in the room.
Oh, right.
It’s because Joshua is here with us so it’s only normal that he’s behaving like this, pretending to be kind and caring so hyung cannot figure out the mutual hatred lingering behind this façade.
Lost in my thoughts, I jump a little when I hear a sudden loud snore coming from right beside me. I turn only to find that Joshua fell asleep.
‘What’s wrong with everyone today? Did hyung put some sleep aid in our food?’
I sigh as it’s a matter of time before we have to go to Mingyu’s and both Wonwoo hyung and that idiot’s friend will come here and Joshua hyung had the guts of falling asleep.
I am a bit uneasy with being the only one awake in a house that is not mine or of one of my huyngs. I am a little bit thirsty but I guess I shouldn’t roam around and so I opt to steal hyung’s coke that he left on the coffee table.
Trying not to wake him up, I steal the remote from Joshua’s hands and start zapping like he was doing a while ago, looking for something interesting and funny to watch. When I was about to give up, I land on a rerun of one of my favourites variety shows and decide on watching it as I sip the not-really-stolen drink.
Not even half an hour has gone by when the doorbell rings. Both Joshua and Soonyoung are still sleeping and so it’s my duty to open the door and I really hope it’s not the idiot’s parents or it would be really embarrassing. Imagine if you’d find a stranger in your house while your son and his best friend are sleeping as if they had fainted. I would totally look like some sort of criminal.
To my luck, it’s Seokmin.
“Oh, hi, Jihoon.” Seokmin looks as if he has just seen a ghost which could probably be true considering how white my skin is. “What are you doing here?”
“Joshua hyung and I came here to have lunch.”
“I see.” Seokmin smile falters a bit with the next question. “Can I walk in?” He seems a little embarrassed.
“Oh, yes sure. I’m sorry,” I say as I move from the door, making him come inside.
“Where are hyung and Soon?”
“Joshua hyung is sleeping on the couch and the idio-” I cough and get myself together “ehm Soonyoung is sleeping in his room.”
“But it’s almost time to go! We should wake them up!” Seokmin’s voice showing is frustration as it may not be the first time they fall asleep before an appointment.
“Wonwoo is still not here so we can wai-” I was trying to calm him down when the doorbell rings again and my sentence gets cut off. “Speak of the devil. Here he is.”
This time, Seokmin is the one welcoming the newcomer. The latter is as lost as me when I first entered the not-so-familiar house.
“Are you ready to go?” Wonwoo asks us as he joins me in the hallway.
“Almost, we need to wake up Joshua hyung and his friend.”
“I will go upstairs to get Soonie, you take care of Joshua,” Seokmin suggests as he is already climbing the stairs.
Wonwoo hyung and I look at each other for a very short time. We both shrug and go waking Joshua hyung up.
It will be a hard task to carry out.
Soonyoung’s point of view.
I jolt awake.
I fell asleep on the armchair and now my limbs are sore and stiff.
‘What time is it?’
I ask myself as I look around and I can’t find neither Joshua hyung nor Jihoon. I pick the phone that was sitting on my lap and I see that it’s slightly past four thirty.
I panic and stand up, making the armchair screech on the floor.
As I’m trying to recover from the dizziness due to the sudden movement, I hear footsteps from outside the door. The latter slowly opens as if the person behind it doesn’t want to be noisy. It’s Seokmin.
“You’re awake!” He exclaims, surprised to find me standing up.
“I just woke up.” I rub the sleep from my eyes. “How long did I sleep?”
“I don’t know. You should ask Joshua or Jihoon.” At the mention of that name, Seokmin stops in his tracks. “Wait, why is he here?”
“I ask myself the same thing.” I sigh. “He was at Joshua’s and they both came here because I was home alone.”
“Aw, that was cute. He is cute, though.”
“You know that Joshua hyung wouldn’t have left me alone.”
“I wasn’t talking about hyung.” Seokmin nudges me.
“Ya!” I yell and maybe they even heard me from downstairs. “Whose side are you on?”
“I was just kidding.” He rolls his eyes. “Now, be fast and get ready. Wonwoo hyung is here.”
“Really?” My demeanor changes in 0.0001 seconds. I was ready to fight Seokmin but now I am soft for that handsome hyung.
“Yup, they’re all waiting for you.”
“Give me five seconds.”
I sprint towards the bathroom and it was so quick and sudden that if I had been in a cartoon, a Soonyoung-shaped dust silhouette would’ve had lingered in the air for a couple of seconds before fading.
When I’m done, I go back to find Seokmin waiting for me in front of my room with my phone and backpack in his hands. I thank him and we both climb downstairs to join the others.
“Hi, Soonyoung.” Wonwoo greets me with the sweetest of smiles and I swear I could’ve melted right there, right then.
“Wonwoo hyung!” I greet him back, happiness evident from my tone. “How are you?”
“I’m good. Did you sleep well?”
‘That’s it. He is the one. Not only he is handsome and funny but he’s even caring!!!’
“I did, thanks,” I reply as I try not to blush too hard. “How much did I sleep?”
“You fell asleep right after Jihoon did,” Joshua answers from the couch. “You looked like two angels while sleeping.”
“I’m an angel even when I’m awake. Remember that, hyung,” I proudly say, straightening my back.
Joshua hyung snorts. “The only angel I know, it’s Jeonghan and it’s only because of his birthdate, not because of his personality.”
Jihoon bursts out laughing and I don’t know if it’s because Joshua has denied that I’m an angel or because of the reference to Jeonghan hyung.
In doubts, I glare at him but he doesn’t seem to notice as he keeps on laughing.
“Let’s go or we’ll be late!” I exclaim, blatantly pouting.
I grab my keys and wait for the guys to walk out before closing the door, a little voice inside my head making me wonder how would it be to lock Jihoon in and pretend to have forgotten him in there, even if it’s just for a couple of minutes. I shake my head, knowing that this evil thought would only bring more damages to me than to him. We all head towards Joshua’s house to get his car and, while we’re walking, Seokmin grabs me by the arm, motioning to slow down. I assume he has something to say that the others shouldn’t hear.
“So, how did he behave today? Did you fight?” He asks, nodding his head towards the knob.
“Not at all. He was like a normal person and not being a douche but it’s only because Joshua was with us.”
“Are you sure about that?” Seokmin is inspecting my face as if I was hiding something from him and he could’ve found out just by looking at me.
“Definitely,” I say as I nod my head. “When Joshua wouldn’t look, we kept on glaring at each other.”
“Do you really think you will never get along? I mean, you liked him as a singer and Joshua hyung has been saying that he’s a cool and funny guy.”
“You know how strong our first impression was. If there has been hatred since the first day, things cannot easily change.” I kick a pebble as I speak, not wanting to meet Seokmin’s eyes. “The fact that he is a great singer and drummer won’t change because he is amazing and I’m not ashamed of admitting it.” I sigh for the umpteenth time that day. “About the cool and funny part, I have some doubts. It’s not like he has been funny or cool with me.”
“But when he texted you from Joshua’s phone, you told he was funny and he had said the same thing about you,” Seokmin says in a low tone as the boys in front of us had been slowing their pace.
“That was before the truth was out. Now, there couldn’t be any kind of relationship between us if not the enemy one. However, let’s stop talking about His Highness,” I spit out a bit frustrated at how Seokmin is pushing me to change idea about the douche.
I know that he may be more than a douche but the way he had been treating me is not helping his case. Plus, it’s not like he wants to befriend me too.
Seokmin and I keep on walking in silence as we get to Joshua’s house.
Once we’re there, we wait for him as he goes grabbing the car keys. While he’s not here, we start fighting for the seats because everyone seems to want to be sitting at the front. Joshua has to intervene to reach an agreement the moment he steps out and sees us almost cursing at each other because of a lost rock-paper-scissors match. Seokmin will be sitting on the front and he gains an eye-roll from me because of how close he was to fangirl about sitting next to his crush. However, this leaves me sitting between Jihoon and Wonwoo hyung in the back seats.
‘If that knob hadn’t been here, it would’ve been a great trip.’
“Hyung, you still haven’t told me when and where we have the gig,” Jihoon suddenly says after Joshua had started the engine.
“The gig? Isn’t it in two mont-” Wonwoo is cut off by Joshua.
“Wonwoo, did you forget it?” Joshua asks through gritted teeth. “We have a gig in two days or else why on earth would we rehearse on a Sunday?”
“Uh? Oh, right. I-I forgot?” Wonwoo’s words sounding more like a question than a statement.
“By the way, it’s a club right outside the city,” Joshua adds looking at us from the rearview.
“How come you haven’t told me?” Jihoon asks, still doubting his hyungs behaviour.
“We thought you knew since not only Mingyu told me this morning but we even talked about it yesterday during dinner.”
“Yes, I remember that.” Seokmin chirps in to agree with Shua hyung. “Maybe it was when Jihoon was washing the dishes.”
“I was washing the dishes. He was just drying them while I was the one doing the hard labour,” I say the moment they try to give credit to him for something I did.
“Look, drying the dishes is as important as washing them,” Jihoon says, turning towards me to glare.
I pinch Jihoon on his leg to make him shut up because he’s being annoying, again.
“Oi!”
“Did something happen?” I smirk.
“You pinched me.”
“I did? I would never do that.” I clutch my chest, pretending to be hurt by the not-so-false accusation. “We’re not into that kind of relationship in which we can pinch each other.”
“Aren’t they adorable? Look how they bicker.”
Upon hearing Joshua’s words, I pull myself together and I remind myself that nobody but Seokmin knows the truth. I sit straighter than before but then I look at Wonwoo and remember that I’m not that straight.
He’s looking outside the window and his jawline is so sharp I bet he can cut everything with that. He looks like he’s straight (I hope he's not) out of a music video, the sunlight making him glow up.
I don’t have the time to look away when he turns towards me and smiles at me. I melt at how sweet and cool he looks right now, the light behind him creating a kind of aura around his figure.
He is an angel, I swear.
I take the chance to start a conversation with him and I’m so glad we’re stuck in traffic so we can talk a little bit more while we get to Mingyu’s house. Sometimes, I spare a glance in Jihoon’s direction as he has been silent since Joshua’s remark but he doesn’t seem interested in any conversation be it Joshua and Seokmin’s one or Wonwoo and mine. He’s just there, tapping his fingers on his leg to an inaudible tune that’s probably playing in his head.
After more or less fifteen minutes, we are at Mingyu’s. Seungkwan is welcoming us at the door.
“Boys, you did it!” He says, hugging Seokmin who’s at the front of the group. “I almost thought you had given up on our plan.”
“Plan? What plan?” Jihoon says, emerging from behind Joshua and Seokmin.
“The rehearsal’s plan, of course!” Joshua hysterically laughs and pushes Seungkwan inside.
“The others are already in the garage?” Wonwoo asks to change the topic of the conversation.
“Yes, hyung. Follow me, y’all!”
We follow Seungkwan into the garage where we find everyone sitting on the floor in a circle, mumbling and whispering things. The mood is a little bit awkward as we walk in there because they were probably hiding something from us but I don’t want to overthink it. Maybe Jihoon and I are being too paranoid as we are on our guard, afraid of them finding out the truth and shatter Joshua’s happiness. That’s why I don’t pry too much in it and decide to just enjoy this moment. It’s the first time Seokmin and I see them singing live and we are so excited.
The boys get their instruments and, when they’re ready, Jihoon gives the tempo with his drumsticks. I immediately recognise the song. It’s the one Joshua often talks about since the moment I said I really liked it. He said that this is one of the first pieces Jihoon had composed and if you could hear it, you would agree with people calling him a genius composer.
They all look so energetic and it’s good to see how much passion they put in their music. It looks as if they’re already performing and not just rehearsing.
I have to admit it, watching them live it’s really different than listening to their songs on my phone. You can really feel from the way they play that music it’s what they live for.
After almost two hours, the boys take a break to rest a little. Seokmin and I get closer to them, eyes sparkling.
“Hyung! I would like to say that you are good but…” I take a dramatic pause because I live for Joshua’s panicked and scared face. “...it wouldn’t be enough. You are amazing!”
Joshua, who was holding his breath, visibly relaxes. “Did you had any doubts about that?”
“Never had.” I smile at him.
“I have to agree with him,” Seokmin adds, going to Joshua’s side.
“It’s so obvious that every single one of you loves music! All your feelings and the unspoken words are all held in your songs and one can feel it.” I can’t contain my excitement as I flail my hands left and right.
“Too many compliments, these boys will end up getting swelled heads.” Seungcheol snickers.
“But it’s true! You were fantastic!” Seokmin claps his hands in a seal-like way.
“What do you think about our voices?” Jeonghan plops himself on the couch in there, right next to Seokmin.
“We love them!” Seokmin takes Jeonghan’s hand as he answers, gaining a glare from both Joshua and Seungcheol. However, he doesn’t notice that.
“True! The vocals were good and stable.” I look at Wonwoo and then add, “I especially liked the rapping.”
“Stop it or you’ll make us blush.” Wonwoo says, kind of flustered as he dries his sweaty forehead with a towel. He had been so hype while rapping.
“You know, Soonyoung is maybe too shy to admit it but he loves our maknae’s voice,” Joshua says, that evil smirk appearing again.
“Uh?” Jihoon looks confused.
“Hyung?” The words ‘what the fuck are you doing’ lingering there as I glare at him.
“C’mon, you always say that you like Jihoon’s voice a lot!” Joshua walks over where I am sitting to ruffle my hair.
“Let’s not exaggerate.”
“I’m not exaggerating.”
“Yes, you are,” I insist to make hyung stop.
“Aren’t you thirsty?” Seokmin asks, a clear sign for us to stop bickering.
“Yes, I’ve been dying to drink something,” Seungkwan says, quickly grasping what Seokmin was trying to do.
“The minibar in here is out of service. The drinks are upstairs, in the fridge. Volunteers to get them?” Mingyu’s only answer to his question was dead silence.
Until Jihoon spoke. “I will go.”
“Can you do it by yourself?” Seungkwan asks. One would think that he wanted to help Jihoon with the drinks, but he hasn’t moved an inch from his seat on the floor.
“Of course. Bringing nine bottles of water is a piece of cake,” Jihoon says, not even trying to hide the sarcasm in his tone.
“Soons, why don’t you help him?” Joshua has is gaze fixed on me.
“Me? Why me? Can’t you help him?”
“I’m too tired.” And he lays on the floor to prove his point.
“It’s not your house and you know that I’m too shy to go roaming around someone else’s house.”
“Don’t worry,” Mingyu says, clasping his hands together. “My parents and my sister are not here so the house is empty. Apart from us, of course. You won’t meet a soul upstairs.” He insists.
“But-” I was about to protest again when I get cut off.
“Look, I don’t bite. If you don’t want to come, I can go by myself.” Jihoon is already climbing up the stairs not even sparing a glance at me to see if I’m following him or not.
“You’re making such a fuss about this,” Joshua says as Seokmin repeatedly slaps me on the back to make me stand up.
“Okay, I got it. I’ll go!” I lift my hands to show that I surrender and quickly climb the stairs to catch up with the knob.
‘Joshua, I don’t care if you’re my favourite hyung. I will get my revenge sooner or later.’
Notes:
I'm sorry if this took quite a while and it's a little bit of a filler chapter, but these days have been hectic since on Monday it was my birthday and I didn't have too much time left to plan this chapter.
I hope you'll enjoy it!!
Chapter 14
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Here I am. Wandering around the house of a hyung I’ve recently met with the guy I hate. Who would’ve thought that, someday, I’d found myself in this kind of situation?
Jihoon glances me from time to time as we go upstairs and this is driving me insane. Why does he have to look at me while I’m having a silent mental breakdown?!
‘Okay, Soonyoung. Calm down. You just have to shut up. If you don’t talk to him, you don’t fight with him. You just need to grab water and go back to the garage without even opening your mouth to breathe. You can do it, champ.’
I follow the knob in the house and he is now going towards what I think is the kitchen.
“So, you like my voice, uh?” Jihoon turns towards me with an unrestrained smirk.
“What the fuck?” I look at him. “No, I don’t.”
“I don’t think Joshua hyung would lie on this.” He enters the kitchen and leans on the counter to look at me, arms crossing on his chest.
“Are you trying to get on my nerves?” I clench my fists as my plan to shut up failed thanks to him.
“Oh my God, no.” Jihoon’s voice is so full of sarcasm.
“Stop being sarcastic.” I would really like to punch his face but I can’t.
He scoffs. “Jeez, what can I do when I’m around you? Do I have to turn into a statue and maybe stop breathing, too?” He licks his lips and runs his fingers through his hair in frustration. The gesture makes my stomach make a weird flip. It must be anger.
“You can do whatever you want to, just stop torturing me!” I take a step closer to him.
“Well, unless proven otherwise, you are the one who attacks me.” He takes a step closer to me as well.
“That’s not true!” Offended, I scoff and turn my head on the side.
“It is true.” He runs his hand through his hair, again. “Look, I’m trying to act like a normal person would, at least in front of the others.”
“And why would you do that?” I glare at him.
“Because everyone is fucking certain we get along and we’re similar. Before actually meeting you, Joshua hyung wouldn’t shut up about the fact that you and I would’ve become great friends because we share some traits and interests.” He sighs and takes a pause before adding in a little voice, “I don’t want to disappoint him.”
“Neither do I.” My shoulders slumped in resignation. Jihoon is right about that.
“Then next time, stop behaving as you did a while ago. You will draw suspicion on us.”
“I was just trying to avoid bickering like we’re doing right now.” I jam my hands in my front pockets and sigh. “I’m so tired of it.”
“Well, I’m not fond of the idea of being left with a cry-baby like you, but I’m not making a big federal case out of this, right?” He throws his hands in the air to put emphasis on his words.
“Yeah, yeah. So, what do we have to grab? Just something to drink?” I try to put his focus back on our task or the people downstairs could worry about our disappearance.
“Yup, water will do.”
I walk towards the fridge and open it to grab the bottles of water when a rumbling sound fills the silence of the room. I jerk my head in the direction of Jihoon and I find him lifting his hands to grab his tummy, face red because of the sound it emitted.
“I think we should grab some snacks too.”
“You’re right. The guys must be hungry. But I don’t know where he has them locked.” Jihoon tries to act indifferent as the one being hungry it’s not him.
“We need to look for them, then.”
“It’s not your house! You can’t rummage through other people’s cabinets!” He grabs my arms to try and stop me.
“I’m aware of this, but you are hungry and I bet the others are too! You can’t starve! The Kims will understand.” I put my hands on his arms to shove them away.
Looking around the room, a certain cupboard gets my attention. I don’t know why, but it looks like food could be in there. I open it hoping there will be something light they can munch on without feeling too full and, bingo!
“Found them!” I squeal.
“What?” Jihoon asks as he has his head inside the fridge to grab the bottles of water.
“Pepero! I will grab a couple of boxes, no, I will take four of them. I think they’ll be enough, right?”
“I think so,” He says as he closes the fridge with his foot, arms too occupied to do that.
“Great! We can go back.” I really want to mind my own business but I can’t seem to do that as I see him struggling with the water. “Give me a couple of bottles, I’ll carry them.”
“I can do it.”
“I’m sure of that but let me take at least two, my other hand is free.” I show him my empty hand to prove my point.
“I said, I can do it,” He insists.
“Okay but then don’t go around saying that I didn’t help.”
We return to the garage and when we step foot in the said room, we find the guys looking at us with eyes full of expectation.
“What did it take you so long?” Jeonghan asks, sprawled on the floor and head on Seungcheol’s lap.
“We brought water,” Jihoon declares, ignoring the hyung.
“And I thought you would be hungry as well, so I brought some snacks.” I look at Mingyu and, smiling, I add, “Hyung, I hope you don’t mind if I took them.”
“Nope, you did the right thing.” He smiles back.
“Well, actually, I am a bit hungry.” Seungkwan chirps in.
“The question is, when aren’t you hungry?” Mingyu mocks him as he pokes Seungkwan’s belly.
“While eating.” Seungkwan slaps Mingyu’s hand, the latter making a sad puppy face.
Everyone bursts out laughing at how sincere Seungkwan is and at how Mingyu looks right now. I stretch to high-five Kwan hyung because let’s be honest, that is so relatable.
Once we all calmed down and dried our tears, Jihoon goes around handing the water while I give the pepero boxes.
“So, there’s seven of you and only four boxes. You need to share them.” I wait for everyone to nod and then proceed in handing the packs. “One to Wonwoo and Seungkwan hyung.”
“Seungkwan-ah, let hyung eat some too, okay?” Wonwoo takes the packet from my hand, our fingers brushing. He smiles at me as I blush and move away.
“We’ll see,” Seungkwan says, snatching the pack from Wonwoo’s hands.
“One to Seungcheol and Jeonghan hyung.”
“Thank you!” They answer in unison. I swear, sometimes these hyungs are one brain, one soul.
“One to Mingyu and Joshua hyung.” I hand the box to Joshua hyung.
“Thank you, Soons.”
“And one to Jihoon,” I say as I am now in front of him, handing out his pack of pepero while he his drinking. Jihoon looks shocked and a drop of water weaves its way on his chin, jawline and neck.
“It’s not fair! Why does he get an entire pack for himself?” Seungkwan cries out.
“There’s a particular reason for this?” Joshua’s evil smirk is back. He seems like he never gets tired of that gesture.
“It’s not unfair. I’m the maknae and this is one of my rights,” Jihoon says once he snaps back.
“Bullshit.” Seungkwan crosses his arms, pouting.
“It’s because he’s the most hungry out all of you.” I point to all of them and then, with one hand I gesture Seungkwan hyung to get closer so I can not-really-whisper, “Upstairs, his stomach wouldn’t stop rumbling.”
“Hey! That’s not true!” Jihoon looks at me in disbelief.
“Would it kill you admitting it?” I giggle as I’m messing around with him.
“It wasn’t my stomach. The noises came from the streets.” He pouts and the hyungs are those who look at him in disbelief now.
“Stop making excuses and admit it.”
Jihoon glares at me, then he looks at the boys and sighs.
“Yeah. It was my stomach,” He admits as the others giggle at how cute he looked.
‘Cute? CUTE? DID I THINK THAT WAS CUTE? IT WAS DISGUSTING. YEAH.’
“Seokmin, Soonyoung, do you want some?” Seungcheol asks, pointing at the pepero box in his hand and making me snap back from my internal crisis.
“No, thanks, I’m okay.” Seokmin shakes his hands and smiles at the hyung.
“Me too,” I say as I’m plopping myself on the couch next to Seok.
“Weird. You love pepero.” Joshua takes a bite of the chocolate stick as he looks at me.
“I’m still full from the food you brought for lunch.”
“You made food?!” Jeonghan asks a bit shocked.
Joshua proudly nods. “Yes, and Jihoon helped me.”
“Really?” Seungkwan snaps his head towards the maknae, eyebrows wiggling.
“Hyung, there’s no need to mention it,” Jihoon shots at Joshua hyung, ignoring Seungkwan.
“You both were at Soonyoung’s?” Seungkwan asks Joshua this time, certain of getting an answer.
“Yup. We ate there and even took a nap.”
“A nap?!” Wonwoo sarcastically asks. “Hyung, when I got there you were in a slumber! Jihoon and I had to push you from the couch in order to wake you up!”
Wait. I didn’t know that Joshua had fallen asleep and if both Seokmin and Wonwoo came inside my house means that…
‘JIHOON WAS THE ONLY ONE AWAKE IN THE HOUSE?’
The idea of that knob wandering in my house and touching my things makes me go pale.
“Yeah.” Jihoon smiles, eyes disappearing into crescents and showing the dimples I had never noticed before.
“Lucky me, I hadn’t to go through the same struggle. When I went upstairs, Soonyoung was already awake!” Seokmin proudly pats my shoulder.
“I never went in a slumber,” I say lifting my chin to show that I’m superior to Joshua.
“Between you two,” Jihoon points at me and then at Joshua hyung “I don’t know who the worst heavy sleeper.”
“Says the baby who fell asleep in a nanosecond on my bed while hugging my plushie,” I retort.
“He really did that?” Mingyu asks before slapping a hand on his mouth to prevent a laugh coming out of that, signing, that way, his death sentence.
“He did.” Joshua doesn’t even try not to laugh.
“WHY NOBODY HAS TAKEN A PICTURE OF THAT?” Seungkwan shots up from his seat and screams.
“He caught us off guard,” Joshua says.
“But, in the end, he woke up and if it hadn’t been for him, I would’ve been waiting for an eternity outside the door,” Seokmin teases while Wonwoo hyung nods in agreement.
“That’s not true!” I screech out in embarrassment.
Everyone is laughing at how flustered both Jihoon and I look at the moment. Both pouting like two babies: him because he got exposed, me because of the teasing. I don’t want Wonwoo hyung to have a weird image of me.
We kept on chatting and laughing for a while longer when, suddenly, my phone vibrates.
I fish it out of my pocket and open the Kakao app.
Mom:
We’re home!
Should we wait for you to have dinner?
“Guys, I’m sorry but I got to go. I think tonight it’s my turn to cook dinner at home.” I stand up from the couch and put the phone back in my pocket after typing a quick answer.
“One day you should cook for us too. Joshua says you’re good at that,” Seungcheol says getting up as well as Jeonghan to stretch his legs.
“Not really but I try.” Cheeks heating up at the compliment. “However, if you insist, I will cook for you.”
“I’ll get going, too. I still need to do my homework.” Seokmin rubs his hands on his thighs before standing up.
“Do you want us to come with you?” Mingyu proposes.
“Don’t worry. You still need to practice, right?” Seokmin shots a smile at him, Joshua hyung is not-so-subtly glaring at the two.
“Plus, we like walking! We’ll make use of the situation to walk a bit.” I nod at myself.
“Are you sure?” Wonwoo hyung asks. He is suddenly next to me, hand lightly put on my arm and he is looking at me a bit worried. “It’s already dark and you told me you’re not so familiar with the area.”
“Y-yes, I’m sure, D-don’t worry.” I stutter as I try to reassure him. I can’t help but smiling and softening at how he reciprocates the smile. Butterflies fill my stomach as everything around us seems to be fading.
“Text me as soon as you get home,” Joshua says, making me realise Wonwoo and I aren’t the only people left in the room.
“I will.”
“Minnie, you too.” Joshua is now looking at Seokmin who’s flustered at the endearment hyung rarely uses.
“Oh...I w-will.” Seokmin lowers his head to hide the redness creeping on his cheeks.
“Try not to bump into someone bad,” Jihoon says as he plops on the seat that was mine until a while ago.
“I’m pretty sure I won’t do that today.” I give a half shrug to him and then flash a smile at the others. “See you then.”
The boys all shout their greetings at the same time, making the room so chaotic. Seokmin and I wave at them before following Mingyu who shows us the way out.
After a while, Seokmin and I have to part ways, so I greet him as well.
While skipping to my house, all I can think about is taking a hot bath and then sleep tight (and maybe dreaming about Wonwoo hyung) as a new week is about to start.
When I walk in, I see my parents waiting for me on the couch.
“You’re finally home! We haven’t seen each other since yesterday morning!” My mom comes to hug me. Her embrace is so tight I’m afraid she could choke me to death.
“Have you been at Joshua’s?” Dad asks, remote in his hand as he lowers the volume of the tv.
“I was with him but we were at his friend’s house. He took Seokmin and me to see their rehearsals.”
“Finally!” Dad claps his hands together. “Tell me, are they good?”
“They’re amazing!” I chuckle as dad is acting a bit like a fanboy.
“Did Joshua come here today?” Mom asks going back to her place next to dad.
“Yup. He brought lunch.” I lean against the door frame.
“What a good boy.”
“Oh, another friend of his was with us. He ate here, too.” I admit to them.
“Who?” Alarmed, my dad asks.
“His name’s Jihoon. He’s part of the band.”
“Are you telling the truth?” Mom has a suspicious look in her eyes.
“Mom? Why should I be lying?”
“What if he’s your boyfriend and you don’t want us to know?” She asks, arms folding on her chest and dad copying her.
“Jihoon? My boyfriend? Have you gone crazy?” I scoff “Don’t make me laugh.” I roll my eyes as well.
“Uh? What’s wrong with that?” Mom raises one of her eyebrows.
“I can’t stand him.”
“Why?”
“I don’t want to talk about him but I hate him,” I say through gritted teeth, fists clenching.
“Calm down, tiger. You look like you’re going to explode.” Dad laughs to lighten the mood.
“I’m going to make dinner. Are you craving something in particular?” I grab the opportunity to change the topic.
“Not really. What about making kimbap so we can eat it here while watching the tv? We ate too much and our stomachs aren’t ready for another full course meal.” Mom pats her belly as dad cooes at her, earning a slap from her.
“Sounds good to me! I’m going to make it.” I punch the air making my parents giggle.
I bring my things upstairs before going to the kitchen and get the work done. I was my hands, cook the rice and get the other ingredients ready on the counter. Once the rice cools down, I make the kimbap, cutting it and bringing it in the living room. As we’re eating and laughing at the nice gag we saw on tv, my phone vibrates. It’s Joshua.
Joshuji:
Are you home?
Hoshiya:
Yes, hyung!
Joshuji:
I told you to text me as soon as you got home.
Hoshiya:
I’m sorry.
I totally forgot about it.
Joshuji:
I picked up on that.
Hoshiya:
In my defence, I had to cook!
Joshuji:
We were all worried about you.
Hoshiya:
Oh my God.
Are you for real?
Joshuji:
Yup.
I was really thinking of going out and looking for you together with Jihoon.
Hoshiya:
With Jihoon?
Why him?
Joshuji:
No particular reason.
Hoshiya:
Hyung, are you hiding something from me?
Lately, you’ve been acting weird and you kept mentioning Jihoon.
Joshuji:
You would get mad at me if I told you.
Hoshiya:
I won’t.
I promise.
Joshuji:
I’ll tell you tomorrow.
On the way to school.
Hoshiya:
C’mon, hyung!
Tell me now!
Joshuji:
Nope.
It’s late.
You need to go to sleep or else you won’t wake up tomorrow.
Hoshiya:
I hate you.
I hate these cliffhangers of yours when you have to tell me something.
Joshuji:
I love you, too.
Hoshiya:
Are you still at Mingyu’s?
Joshuji:
Yup.
We’re about to leave, though, or else his parents won’t let us come here anymore.
Hoshiya:
Mingyu hyung couldn’t even argue with them.
We basically occupied their house the entire afternoon.
Joshuji:
True hahaha.
Hoshiya:
By the way, you were great today!
I’m looking forward to your performances!
I’m even considering to found a fan club!
Joshuji:
It’s better if you go to sleep.
You’re starting blabbing a bunch of nonsense.
Hoshiya:
I’m telling the truth!
But I’ll go to sleep.
It’s 10 pm and I’m a bit tired.
Joshuji:
You’re tired 24/7.
Hoshiya:
As if you weren’t born tired, too.
Joshuji:
I’m proud of that.
Hoshiya:
Sadly, I know that.
Now, I’ll go.
Good night, hyung.
Joshuji:
Night, Soons!
I wish my parents a good night as I get up from the couch and then go upstairs. I walk towards the bathroom to take my long awaited bath. When the bathtub is full of hot water, I light up my favourite scented candle and dip my body in the water. As I hum along with the now-playing song, my mind returns to Jihoon’s words about not wanting to disappoint Joshua hyung.
Wouldn’t it be easier for both of us to tell him the truth instead of pretending to get along? Sooner or later, the truth will be uncovered and I think Joshua would be even more disappointed by us.
We could even try to cope with each other for real, but there’s bad blood between both of us so we would eventually end up fighting like we already do. We’re both stubborn and no one would let the other win, not even for the sake of the other’s peace and quietness.
After around thirty minutes of being in the water surrounded by foam and bubbles, I get out of the tub. I dry my body and wear my pyjamas.
As soon as I walk in my room, I launch myself on the bed face first. I stay like that for a while, until breathing becomes difficult and I decide to get up and get under the blankets.
‘That’s enough. I thought about it even more than I would’ve ever done. I need to follow my guts. Tomorrow, I’ll tell everything to Joshua hyung. He needs to know.’
Thinking of the consequences this decision may bring and a little bit afraid of how everyone would react at the truth, I eventually fall asleep.
Notes:
I hope you enjoyed the chapter!
This week, I'll try to update twice as for about 10 days I will be not able to write any chapter. So, maybe in one or two days, chapter 15 will be ready as well!
Chapter 15
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
It’s eight in the morning of a rather sunny day and I’m in my yard, waiting for Joshua to come and relishing in the warmth of the sun rays. When he comes out of his house, I run to him.
“Good morning, Soons.” Joshua greets me with a big smile.
“Morning hyung! How are you? Did you sleep well?” Instead of smiling, I glare.
“Yes, I did. And you?” His smile never faltering.
I scoff almost automatically. “I roughly slept because of you.”
“Why?”
“You promised to tell me what is going on with you,” I shout as he’s pretending not to know why I am being like this with him.
Something clicks in his head after pondering for a while. “Oh, that,” He simply says and then starts heading school.
“Yes, that.” I run after him because he won’t get away with that.
“You promised not to get angry, though.” Joshua shoves his hands in the pockets of his hoodie.
“I remember promising that.”
“Okay.” Joshua takes a few seconds to scrutinise my face, maybe to check if I was already angry at him or not. Then, he takes a deep breath and without any pause in between his words he says, “Almost everyone has noticed a certain chemistry between Jihoon and you. I convinced the boys to pretend there’s a gig and special rehearsals so you could spend a little bit more time together and get to know each other better.” He puts in invisible air quotes the word special.
“Eh?” I stop in my tracks. “Are you fucking serious? So yesterday’s practice was a lie?”
“Yes.”
“I can’t believe that. I’m speechless.” I throw my hands in the air almost willing to give up on this friendship. Why is everyone so clueless?
“Don’t get mad,” Joshua pleads as I walk past him without even sparing a glance at him.
“I’m not mad. However, there’s a thing you should know before going further with this plan of yours.” I suddenly stop and Joshua, who was trying to catch up, bumps into my back.
That’s it. That’s the moment. I have to tell the truth now before things take a bad turn.
“What?” Joshua asks, rubbing away the pain from his nose.
“To be honest, Jihoon and I…”
At that exact moment, Joshua’s phone rings and I get interrupted. Is it a sign from above that I should shut up about the matter? Maybe if I tell him now and he gets in a bad mood, something bad will happen. I don’t know why this thought crosses my mind but, for now, shutting up may be the best option.
“Hello? Yes. We’re on the way there. See you in a while.”
Just a few words and a little giggle before hanging up and putting his phone back in his pocket.
“Who was at the phone?” I ask, curious about the caller.
“Seungcheol. He’s outside our school.”
“Why would he be there?”
“I can’t tell you that. It’s a surprise.” Joshua boops my nose and winks.
“You know I don’t really like surprises. Moreover, yours have this tendency of blowing up in my face.” I shiver at the thought of what’s going to happen.
“My lips are sealed. I can only tell you that my behaviour is linked to this, too.” He giggles and then slaps my arm. “Now, walk faster!”
We do quicken our pace and in five minutes we’re at the school gates. I am doubling over as I’m out of breath. Fast pace meant running and I can’t do that first thing in the morning!
When I am able to breathe from my nose and not from my mouth like a puppy, I straighten my back and notice that leaning on the banner with the school’s name there’s Seungcheol, trying to look cool as the girls walk next to him, eyes fixed on his figure. They’re so lucky Jeonghan is not there. With “they” I mean the girls and Seungcheol. Joshua hyung said the blondie can be quite possessive of his boyfriend. I can imagine Jeonghan hyung grabbing Seungcheol by the ear and dragging him away as he whines. That image immediately shatters the one I see right in front of my eyes right now.
“Good morning, Soonyoung.” Seungcheol hyung greets taking his sunglasses off.
“Morning, hyung. How are you?”
“I’m good, thanks.” He returns the smile I was flashing at him.
“What are you doing here?” I ask, shifting from one foot to the other.
“I was just passing by and decided to stop here and greet Joshua.” Seungcheol is awkwardly rubbing his nape and looks at Joshua as if he’s desperate and in need of help.
“Shall we go to the library?” Joshua asks, chiming in. “I’ll clock in and then we can go to the cafeteria to drink coffee.”
“Sounds good to me. Bye Soon, see you around!” Seungcheol says a little bit too rushed, looking like he wants to run for his life.
“Soons, see you at lunch!” Joshua screams as he gets dragged away by Seungcheol
‘Mmh...those hyungs are particularly odd today. I can sense that something unpleasant will happen very soon. Should I investigate or wait for it to hit me?’
I shrug and with those thoughts in my head, I reach my classroom. When I walk in, I see that Seokmin is not sitting where he should be, aka next to me. He is almost on the other side of the class and has this look in his eyes I can’t quite catch.
‘Is he hiding something too or am I becoming paranoid?’
No, I’m not paranoid.
I’m positive that something’s going on with Seokmin too. I’ve not gone crazy and I don’t see conspiracies wherever I look at.
The bell rings and the teacher walks in. We all stand up to greet her and as we’re sitting down, she starts speaking.
“Everyone, listen really carefully. Today, a new student is joining us. He just got transferred to our school and will spend this last year with us, well, more with you all.” She makes a gesture with her hand to include every student in the class. “I ask for your collaboration. Make sure to put him at ease and give him all the help he needs.” She then turns towards me, a smile so wide that it’s quite scary. “You can come in and take your seat next to Mr Kwon.” She points at the desk next to mine and then looks outside the classroom.
Upon hearing his name being called, the new student walks in. Chin up and shoulders back, he makes his way to his new seat. Seokmin, worried, turns to look at me as I had gone tense, blank and pale at the same time. I can’t believe my eyes. It’s a dream, no wait, it’s a nightmare. It can only be a nightmare but right now I cannot even move a finger to try and pinch my arm for a reality check.
The student keeps walking, reaches the desk and turns his whole body to me once he sits down. The whole room is dead silent and I think I had never hated the world, the fate and the gods above as I did at that exact moment.
“Missed me?” He smirks.
It’s Jihoon. Lee Jihoon. The vertically challenged boy. The knob.
“Not at all,” I say through gritted teeth.
“Disappointed but not surprised.” The other students are all looking at each other, whispering and already gossipping. “From today on, we’ll get to see each other every single day. Aren’t you happy?” He teases me as he rests his chin on his palm. The left corner of his mouth rising in a half smile.
“I’m not. I’ll pretend you don’t exist. I think it’s going to be an easy task if you cooperate and shut your mouth,” I spit out, arms crossed over my chest.
“That hurt, Kwon.” He clutches his chest, faking being hurt by the remark. “Just so you know, I transferred to this school not because I wanted to but because my parents decided to move in this area and this school was the nearest one.” He takes a pause before adding, “Don’t get weird ideas in that empty head of yours.”
“So you’re not here to torture the hell out of me?”
“Don’t flatter yourself that much.”
The teacher coughs to grab our attention. “Mr Kwon, one more thing. During the lunch break, bring Mr Lee on a tour of our school, show him the different classes and talk to him about the clubs and the other activities.”
“Teacher Kim, why me?”
“Because your friend, Mr Hong, told us that Lee and you are already familiar with each other.” She rubs her hands clasped together. “We thought it would be more comfortable for him to be around people he already knows, hence the desk next to yours.”
Fuck it. Not this too. It’s just too much to take in at once.
Joshua knew, Seokmin knew and neither of them has told me. Wait, was Seungcheol out there because he brought Jihoon here? That must’ve been the reason. Passing by? Bullshit. As expected, Joshua’s surprises aren’t the ones you’ll end up loving. This is almost be considered as throwing me in a cage full of lions. Moreover, as it wasn’t already enough, the teacher made us being “desk buddies” and now she asked me to be his cicerone. Should I go around the school with him?
No.
Fucking.
Way.
I look around and I find all the girls, and even some of the boys, checking him out, eyes fixed on his face and body as if they had never seen a boy in their lives.
‘Is he that special and handsome that people are staring at him as if they’re under some kind of spell?’
I try to check him out too, careful not to make him notice that I’m looking at him. I turn my chair and my body in a slanted position so that it looks as if I am facing the teacher and, at the same time, it makes me able to spare glances at the said boy. Being this close to him without having anger blinding me, makes me notice a lot of things I hadn’t cared about before.
His black bangs almost cover his small eyes, which tend to disappear in little crescents when he smiles at Seokmin. A smile that forms dimples around his not-so-plump rosy lips. Is that a mole under his left eye?
He kind of looks like a harmless cat, but his muscles say otherwise. His body is well built, the school uniform a bit tight around his biceps. He has this kind of sexy and charismatic vibe when he gives one of his half smiles to one of the girls staring at him. One could say that he doesn’t go unnoticed despite not being very tall. I know I hate him, but I can’t ignore facts. He is good-looking. Handsome. But his personality doesn’t match the looks. People’s right when they say one shouldn’t judge a book by its cover.
“Stop staring,” Jihoon suddenly mumbles, a smug look on his face.
“Uh?”
‘Was he talking about the girl? Or did he mean me? Did he notice?’
I don’t have time to think about it or to ask him further about the matter that the bell rings. I decide not to dig in his statement and just brush it off like I didn’t hear him.
An hour, two hours go by and it’s already lunchtime. Jihoon gets up from his seat and looks at me for the first time after our little “talk” during the first period.
“So, should we begin the school tour?” He asks, hands sliding in his uniform pockets.
There’s no way I’m going to do that. I’m sure that Seokmin’s going to ditch me if I tried to make him come along. I need to make up an excuse and pass the baton to someone else. Maybe I should ask one of the students who was drooling for him a while ago. Maybe they’re waiting for a chance to talk to him and I’m really glad to help them.
I fiddle with one of my earrings and then sigh before saying, “Look, I’m kind of busy now. I’m going to ask someone else to be your guide. I can quickly solve this problem.”
Jihoon opens his mouth as if he’s about to argue with that. However, he doesn’t. He closes his mouth and his shoulders go slump. A resigned “okay,” leaving his lips.
I quickly tap one of my classmates on their arm and suggest them to be Jihoon’s guide as I can’t really do that due to plans I had beforehand. The idea of being left alone with the new student makes my classmate smile so bright and wide that I’m actually scared their face is going to split in a half. This provokes a sort of pain in my stomach but I blame the hunger. It’s because of that, isn’t it?
The said person whispers a “thank you” in my ear before introducing themselves to Jihoon and walking out of the class with him, hand placed on Jihoon’s back, to show him around.
‘Thank God, I’m safe.’
“Why did you send him with Chanyeol?” Seokmin appears from behind me, making me jump to my feet. “Did you forget he tries to seduce every person he lands his eyes on? Don’t you remember what happened with Baekhyun, last year?”
“They can do whatever they want to. It’s not my business.”
“Do you hate him that much?” He has a pained expression on his face.
“Yup. I don’t care about what he does.”
“Why?”
“Because he’s cocky, unlikeable and a knob,” I list the adjectives on my fingers as I walk out the class followed by Seokmin.
The latter pinches the bridge of his nose and heavily sighs. “That’s because you don’t give him a chance to change the image you have of him.”
“It’s not like he tries to do that!” I raise my voice and then realise I’m still in the school hallway. People are staring at us. “Look, we’ve already talked plenty about that. I’m tired of having every conversation of ours revolve around him in one way or another.”
“If you say so…” Seokmin looks so defeated right now.
“Let’s get lunch before it’s too late.”
I move without waiting for Seokmin or checking if he’s following me or not but he did as he’s now behind me in the queue at the canteen. After loading our trays with food from today’s menu, we see Joshua waving at us from our usual table. We join him and he looks particularly expectant. I mentally roll my eyes as I sarcastically wonder why.
“So, Soons, did you like the surprise?”
I can’t help but be sarcastic out loud, too. “Oh, I liked it. A lot.”
“I was sure of that.” He smiles, proud at himself. “Wait, where is he now?”
“He is around with Chanyeo-” Seokmin looks around and stops talking when he spots Jihoon looking for a table to sit at. “Oh, never mind. He’s here.”
Joshua looks at where Seokmin is pointing with his finger. When he sees the younger, he yells and throws his hands in the air to make Jihoon spot him. “HEY, JIHOON! OVER HERE!”
“Hyung, stop yelling.” Both Seokmin and I lean over the table to slap him.
Jihoon smile at us and then nods at Chanyeol who just inched closer him to tell something. The taller’s back is facing us so I can’t read his lips and get an idea of what they’re talking about. When they part ways, Chanyeol joins his circle of friends at the centre of the place and Jihoon joins us. He sits next to Joshua, hence right in front of me.
“What do you think about our school?” Seokmin kindly asks and you can tell by his voice that it’s a genuine question.
“I haven’t seen all of it, but I already like it,” Jihoon answers as he digs his spoon in his bowl of rice and then dips it in the soup.
“Not all of it?” It’s Joshua’s turn to ask a question.
“Chanyeol said we should continue our tour after the afternoon classes or else we would’ve missed the chance to eat lunch. To be honest, I am starving.” He gives Joshua a full smile as he answers, a smile that doesn’t falter, not even a bit, when he glances at Chanyeol’s table.
That pang, again. Am I still hungry? I swallow a spoonful of rice in hopes to soothe my stomach.
“What a great idea. This Chanyeol seems a considerate guy as, this way, you won’t skip your meal,” Joshua’s tone is cheerful but he doesn’t look like it. He keeps on looking between Jihoon and me. “Plus, you still haven’t joined any club so you’re free after classes and you can check on the activities to see which one suits you better.”
“That’s right. Maybe I’ll join the music club with Chanyeol! You know, he said he’s interested in producing music just like me. Oh, he seems very friendly, too.”
“You can say that.” This time, Seokmin is the one who can’t hide the sarcasm in his tone.
“It’s true though.” Jihoon frowns and pouts a bit.
“I know,” Seokmin says before lowering his tone to mumble, “He’s friendly to all of his preys.”
Seokmin did that hoping Jihoon wouldn’t hear but, apparently, that’s not the case as the shorter asks, “What do you mean?”
“Nothing!” I say, maybe a bit too rushed, and laugh. “You know, there’s a bit of bad blood between us. School competition, you know how that works.”
I lower my head to play with the grains of rice left in the bowl. My nervous laugh dies pretty quickly and the table is left in silence. I can’t stand this any longer. I need to leave.
“Well, I’m done eating. I got to go. I don’t want to be late to the next class.”
I get up, chair screeching on the tiles and I walk away so fast that I almost drop my empty tray. Seokmin follows me, leaving Joshua and Jihoon alone at the table.
Thank God, Seokmin doesn’t say a word about it or else I would’ve had to explain for the umpteenth time the reason why I don’t want to spend a lot of time with Jihoon. On the contrary, we discuss whether or not apport some changes to our “SeokSoon Talk” radio show for the new upcoming season.
Afternoon classes start and time flies while I’m busy not focusing on the lesson and doodling, again. Maybe time goes by really fast because I get easily lost in the flow of my thoughts and in the surroundings. For example, I can’t help but notice the looks Chanyeol has been giving Jihoon since we came back from lunch or the way one of the girls tries to slip a paper (probably with her phone number on it) in Jihoon’s bag. The knob doesn’t seem to catch on any of that or maybe he pretends not to.
When the last class is finally dismissed, Chanyeol rushes over to our desk. The taller pull his signature magnetic gaze when he asks Jihoon to resume their tour, a gaze that sends shivers down my spine. The smaller gladly accepts the offer, greets both Seokmin and me with a quick nod of his head before disappearing outside the classroom while giggling.
That evening, Seokmin is over at my house to sort our notes of today’s classes and to finish our project for the radio show. When we’re pretty done with everything, we go downstairs to make dinner as my parents are still at the company.
“Did you know about Jihoon transferring to our school?” A sudden question was thrown to Seokmin. It just popped in my head and out of my mouth. I hadn’t even the time to refrain myself from asking it.
“Yes, but I didn’t know he would’ve joined our class.”
“Why haven’t you told me?”
“Joshua hyung made me promise not to tell you because he wanted to surprise you.” Seokmin’s head hangs low and I know he feels a bit guilty about it.
“That was kind of you but you know it wasn’t a delightful surprise.”
Silence. The only sound that could be heard was of the vegetables getting chopped, of the soup boiling and the cars driving by on the streets.
“I think your relationship with him isn’t that bad.” Seokmin breaks the silence after having an inner debate on whether to tell me that or not. “Maybe it’s already improving but you don’t want to admit it to yourself.”
“Improving?!” I ask, taken aback by the sudden statement.
“Yup.” He vigorously nods. “Even if the both of you bicker every time you open your mouth, you’re not at the point of wishing to be able to kill the other. You’re even getting more comfortable with one another.”
I stop chopping and think about his words for a while. “Seems true but there’s still bad blood.”
“And I still think it was cruel to send him with Chanyeol. That’s pretty low of you.” Seokmin crosses his arms over his chest and lightly taps his foot on the floor tiles.
I scoff and it seems to have become a habit of mine. “Cruel?!”
“Yes, cruel. Chanyeol has been eyeing Jihoon since he had stepped foot in our class. You could already tell that he has become the next prey and you basically shoved him in his arms.” Seokmin is mad, his voice and face show it all. “Chanyeol pretends to care and uses people as if they are toys he throws away once he’s bored or when he founds a prettier one to play with. Would you like to be treated like that? Getting attached to him just to be broken when he’s tired of you?” His voice raising at every question while his breath shortens.
“Jihoon wouldn’t fall for that. He is not dumb to fall for someone like that. Plus, he doesn’t care about anyone!” I yell back, frustrated.
“How do you know he won’t fall for that? Have you seen how sparkly his eyes were when he left the room? He’s already drawn by his charm to the point he’s about to walk straight into the trap after only half a day!” He rubs his face with his hand to calm himself down. He takes deep breaths and rubs circles on his temples. “Look, I know you don’t like him but you could at least spare him this. He doesn’t deserve to go through that.”
“It’s his problem if he chooses to follow Chanyeol, not mine.” I turn towards the counter and resume chopping the vegetables.
I know that I’m being stubborn but he’s a grown-up man and he can take care of himself. He should be able to understand when people are using him, right?
Seokmin is about to talk back when we hear the door opening and the sound of keys being left on the table followed by one of the slippers sliding on the floor. My parents are here. With just a glance, we mutually decide to drop our talk about Chanyeol and Jihoon in order to ask my parents about their day, to finish cooking and to set the table so we can finally eat.
The mood returns to be peaceful during the entire dinner.
After the dessert, mom sends dad, Seokmin and me in the living room so she can clean the kitchen. When she joins us, she finds us sitting on the floor and eyes glued on an episode of the latest night drama about an actress falling in love with a lawyer. My parents laugh at the looks of disgust Seokmin and I share during the cheesy lines and at the tears we shed when we laugh too much at a funny scene.
It’s past ten when Seokmin’s dad comes to pick him up.I wish him a good night as he makes his way to the car and then I do the same with my parents. I wish them a good night and then scoot off to bed. It has been so stressful today and more days like this about to come.
The reason it’s only one and its name is Lee Jihoon.
Notes:
So many things going on in this chapter: Jihoon becoming Soonyoung's classmate, Chanyeol finally appearing, Seokmin snapping. What a journey hahahaha
As usual, I hope you enjoyed it!PS: I won't be able to post for at least two weeks as real life needs me! I think I'll come back with a new chapter for this fic and maybe another Soonhoon one-shot. You can look forward to them!!
Chapter 16
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Three weeks have gone by from the moment Jihoon has transferred to our classroom.
Since the day after he arrived, he waits for Joshua and me outside the school gates. He says it’s because he has to get used to the new environment but it’s just because, that way, I am forced to walk in the class with him. Of course, I get all kind of looks from our classmates as they think I am hanging out with the new boy. Seokmin is the only one who flashes me one of his signature smiles while other people just glare or scoff when we’re passing by them.
Once we get to our seats, the other students all rush to our spot and shove me away in order to be as close as possible to Jihoon and “harass” him with questions and compliments.
They would ask things like:
“Jihoon-ah, what did you do last night?”
“Jihoon-ah, what’s your ideal type?”
“Jihoon-ah, is it true that you play in a band?”
“Jihoon-ah, when it’s your next gig? I want to come and see you!”
Or throw compliments like:
“Jihoon-ah, oh my. The uniform really suits you!”
“Jihoon-ah, you look really good with your hair pushed back!”
“Jihoon-ah, your fake earring is so cool, why don’t you get a real one?”
Jihoon-ah, Jihoon-ah, Jihoon-ah.
It’s a constant repetition of his name, plus random things, from the moment we step foot in the classroom until the teacher starts the lesson. It’s like people don’t really know what personal space and minding their business is.
However, Jihoon doesn’t seem to mind it. I started thinking he loves being in the spotlight and labelled as the popular guy .
I really hoped they would grow tired of buzzing around him like bees with their queen bee, but it’s been almost a month since he’s here and both boys and girls still act as if the sun shines out of his ass.
It’s so frustrating.
I know what you may be thinking but, no, I’m not jealous.
The fact is that I am his “seat buddy” and what bothers me is that I have to bear with all the people trying to win his heart every single day. Letters, boxes of chocolates, flowers and all kind of gifts are left on our desk and Jihoon smiles that annoying dimpled smile every time he reads one of the love letters, eats one of the dark chocolates, takes in the fragrance of a rose or touches the music note charm swinging from a new bracelet or necklace they would give him.
I blame that smile.
I blame it for all of this fuss that I have to endure. If he stopped smiling, the students would eventually get bored of sending him gifts but no, he has to smile to each and every one of them because he has to play the role of the kind and lovable guy. If they only knew what kind of a dick he can turn into.
The only perk of this whole situation is that he is so into his admirers that we barely quarrel these days. The only times this would happen is when he suddenly pokes my sides or legs because he wants me to get caught by the teacher or when he would slip a little piece of paper to me to just call me an idiot, to tell me to stop looking at the sky and focus on the lesson or to simply irritate me. “Fuck off” is what I’m used to reply. “You’re no fun, reason why I like Chanyeol better,” he writes back. At this point, I would scribble to go and have fun with him since they seem to have become the bestest of friends.
They spend a lot of time together at school and even after that.
Joshua is sad about this because, even at lunch, Jihoon prefers sitting at the taller’s table instead of ours.
Hyung has been sending texts to Jeonghan telling him he finally gets how losing one of your favourite dongsaengs feels like. Jeonghan ends up calling him and they both get overly dramatic about it.
Seokmin, on the other hand, hasn’t really been speaking his mind about the relationship between the two. I bet he still thinks I was cruel to Jihoon and I have to admit that maybe he’s right.
I had been reflecting upon his words every time Jihoon goes and sits with Chanyeol at lunch, smiles and looks at him during classes, runs to his desk when the last bell rings so they can head to the club-room together, brightens when they discuss composing and producing a new song. Chanyeol seems to show interest in him but I wonder if it is sincere, if on the inside he feels the same way as Jihoon does, if he shares the same excitement of the shorter about having found someone who understands his love for writing music.
I can’t help but mull over all of that, can’t help but feel slightly guilty of probably having pushed Jihoon in something bigger than him, which could end up with him being hurt. But, again, Joshua told me that Jihoon sees Chanyeol as his friend and that he’s particularly fond of him just because they both love music. There is no reason at all for me to be worried about it. Joshua made sure that Jihoon doesn’t have feelings for Chanyeol the player like Seokmin thought. Jihoon is safe.
Or so I thought until today.
Another day of school means another boring day.
Classes seem to be never-ending and the fact I pulled an all-nighter to finish the script for the next episode of the “SeokSoon Talk” radio show isn’t helping me stay focused.
Finally, it’s the last period for the day and the English teacher decided to put on a movie. She explained that it’s a helpful exercise allowing us to improve our listening and comprehension skills. It would’ve been an interesting thing to try if my brain would have cooperated with me but the urge of sleeping has become too much to be fought off. That’s why, I make up my mind to take a quick nap as the teacher wouldn’t notice in the darkness of the room, illuminated only by the faint light coming from the projector.
However, Jihoon, being the straight-out-of-hell brat he is, decides it’s the perfect time to annoy me: he keeps on poking my sides with a pen and laughs at me when I would shove his hand away. I am so mad at him that the moment the bell rang, I bolt out of the classroom without even looking at him, waiting for him or checking if I had all my belongings in the bag.
And, in fact, I had forgotten something really important: my phone.
I am walking with Joshua hyung and we are almost halfway home when I realise that the said device is missing from my pockets and backpack.
“Hyung,” I call for Joshua as I stop in my track. “I forgot something in my classroom. I have to head back before the club activities end and they’ll close the gates.”
“Do you want me to come with you?” He asks turning around, face concerned.
“Don’t worry, there’s no need to.” I smile at him. “You have to go at Mingyu’s, right?”
“Right.”
“So you better rush there!” I say as I push him in the direction of our houses. “I’ll see you later at my house?”
“Yup, you will. I’ll come right after practices are done.”
“Okay, then, see you later!” I wave at him before turning around and sprinting.
I run and run until I reach the school gate that it’s still open.
“Are you okay?” The janitor asks as he spots me, panting and sweaty, leaning on the gate. “What happened that made you run here?”
“I forgot something in my classroom,” I explain.
“Couldn’t have you waited until tomorrow? Nobody would’ve touched your belongings anyway.” The man asks as he scratches his head.
“It was pretty urgent. I needed it for a paper due to tomorrow morning.” I lie in hopes he would stop questioning me.
“Be quick, young man. The clubs are almost done with their activities and this means I soon have to close the rooms and the gates,” he says, head nodding towards the building standing next to him.
“Don’t worry, sir. I will be super fast. I won’t be wandering around.”
“Okay, then.” He pats my shoulder. “Come and see me in the courtyard once you’re done so I’ll know I won’t be locking you up in the school.” He chuckles.
I nod my head and rush to the classroom which is located on the first floor.
The phone is still on the small wooden shelf placed under the desk. I grab it and immediately check if a certain someone has perhaps unlocked it and peeked in.
Let’s be honest here. When I say someone, I definitely mean Jihoon. He looks like the type who would meddle in other people’s business. In my case, it would’ve helped his cause of torturing my existence.
However, to my luck, I see that nobody has touched it so I secure it in my pocket and start heading to the courtyard.
I climb down the stairs and almost trip on my own feet as I am trying to be as fast as possible to avoid being locked up in the school. I reach the agreed spot and, with the corner of my eye, I spot a silhouette. Thinking it belonged to the janitor, I walk towards it.
“Sir, I got the…”
It is at that exact moment, I realise that who I am seeing is not the janitor.
I freeze on the spot, eyes blinking fast as if that could change the event unfolding right before my eyes.
Chanyeol is towering over Jihoon who is leaning on one of the school’s walls.
Jihoon’s cheeks are flushed with a warm shade of pink and he’s shyly smiling at the taller.
The latter is slowly inching closer, a smirk on his lips that disappears the moment his mouth touches Jihoon’s.
They are kissing.
The smaller closes his eyes as if he’s relishing in the feelings the kiss is giving him.
He then puts his hands on the taller’s shoulders to steady himself as he’s tip-toeing to try matching the other’s height.
Chanyeol is now lifting his left hand to cup Jihoon’s cheek, thumb caressing his once fair and now pink-tinted skin.
The time, that for a while seemed to have stopped, flows again. The fear of getting caught suddenly growing bigger and making me snap out of my shocked state.
‘I need to leave before they notice me.’
I try not to make any sound as I slowly retreat.
When I’m off of their radar, I run back home.
I hadn’t even realised I was running until I heard myself panting, drops of sweat streaming down my skin and lungs burning because of the lack of air. I stop in front of the door a couple of minutes to get myself together and, as soon as I walk in, I go for the bathroom to take a shower, hoping the water would wash away not only the fatigue but also the image of those two kissing.
However, that doesn’t happen.
The kiss plays and replays in my mind, becoming the only thought filling my mind. It was too shocking and I know the only way to get rid of all of this is to tell Seokmin.
Towel held tight around my waist and hair still dripping wet, I walk in my room and call my best friend who answers after only two rings.
“Hello?!”
“Thank you for picking up right away,” I say as I plop on the bed right away.
“Did something happen?” Seokmin asks, his voice filled with concern.
“Yes but not to me. It’s something that I saw. Do you know what it is?”
“I wasn’t with you, dummy. Unless you tell me, I cannot know what you saw.” I can feel Seokmin rubbing circles on his temples.
“It’s not the right time to joke around,” I deadpan to make him realise I’m not joking either.
“For once, I was being serious.” He sighs before adding, “Hurry up and tell me, you’re worrying me.”
“I saw Chanyeol and Jihoon kissing in the schoolyard.” I spurt out as if I am rapping and not talking.
I hear Seokmin coughing, probably choking on something he was eating or drinking, or maybe on air. “No way. Are you kidding me?”
“I’m not.” I give him a bitter chuckle as I throw my arm over my eyes.
“I see that Chanyeol is moving faster than usual.”
“You know, it seemed sincere. I mean, the kiss.” I take a small pause to think about how to describe the way I saw it. “Jihoon was sweetly smiling and Chanyeol was being gentle with him.”
“From Jihoon’s side, maybe it was sincere. With Chanyeol I wouldn’t be too sure.”
“Still believing that he’s playing with him?”
“Knowing what he did in the past, yes, and we have to do something.” Seokmin suddenly goes silent as he’s thinking about how to rescue the endangered princess from his castle of delusions that might crumble with him inside of it. “Someone has to warn him about the risk of getting hurt before it’s too late and, I think, Joshua hyung seems the only one who could do that. They are friends and he surely knows how to talk to Jihoon.”
“Maybe it’s already too late but I’ll tell Joshua to talk to him anyway.”
Seokmin deeply sighs. “He will be so sad at the news.”
“Jihoon? Yes, I guess. He has just got together with…”
“I meant Joshua hyung,” He chirps in, interrupting me. “He hoped that Jihoon and you would end up dating.”
“Not even in my worst nightmare. I wouldn’t date someone who’s annoying and tries his best to get on my nerves.” I bolt up from my bed, the sudden action making me dizzy.
“Still, Joshua hyung will be disappointed.”
“He will get over it.” I walk to the closet and open its doors to look for a clean set of pyjamas.
“And what about you?” Seokmin asks and I’m quite confused at his question thrown like that.
“What do you mean?” I ask back, shifting the phone from one ear to the other and then holding it between my shoulder and ear as I pick the clothes up.
“How did you feel when you saw them kissing?”
I put the phone on speakerphone so I could dry myself and put the pyjamas on. “I was just shocked because I thought he was better than this.”
“Uh? I can’t quite follow you.” He is probably scratching his head trying to find the meaning behind my words.
“You know, in his songs, he writes of a love which is pure, innocent, romantic. I strongly believed he would look for someone who can make him feel the things he sings about. However, he kissed the first person who flirted with him, showing that he’s an easy kid with no taste whatsoever in his partners. I’m starting to think the love he talks about is bullshit and he had never felt those things in his life.”
“Is it jealousy the one I sense, right there, in your words?” He mumbles so quickly that I almost don’t catch what he’s saying.
“Me? Jealous?” I scoff. “I see that your last brain cell has stopped working.” Having worn my pyjamas and with Seokmin still on speakerphone, I move to sit on the armchair in front of the window to look at the sky and the people passing by, the children playing in the neighbour’s yard.
“Are you sure you’re not jealous?”
“I told you, I’m not jealous.” I shove the damp hair away from my face “C’mon, you know me! If I had been jealous, I wouldn’t be this calm about the matter.”
“You are jealous and that’s why you called me.” Seokmin insists.
“I called you because I wanted to gossip, for once, about something that’s not my crush on Wonwoo hyung or yours on Joshua hyung.” I point my index to his picture on the screen in an accusatory way before saying, “Next time, I will not share this info with you and I’ll only tell Joshua hyung.” Seokmin laughs and I let myself laugh together with him. “Speaking of which, any news?”
“News?” He asks dumbfounded.
“You know what I’m talking about. Don’t try to avoid the topic.”
“I am not. I’m not Kwon Soonyoung who just asked me about Joshua hyung so he could avoid further questions on the Jihoon topic.” His sarcasm so evident that makes me want to pinch his arm so he could stop.
“I will pretend not having heard any of it,” I say through gritted teeth but still with a smile on my face even though he can’t see me. I know he will understand nonetheless. “So?”
“We text more than we used to but it’s nothing special.”
“It’s a good start, though. Little by little, things will go further and reach the point you’ll, finally, be my brother-in-law!” I fanboy over the idea of the two getting together.
“First of all, Joshua and you aren’t really brothers so I cannot be one of your in-laws. Second, stop talking gibberish. Joshua doesn’t like me.”
“If you say so, soon-to-be brother-in-law.” I can’t help but tease him.
“Stop it.”
“Make me.”
“What should I do with you?” I bet he’s rubbing his face in frustration. I would do the same if I were him.
“You can do nothing but bear with me.”
“It’s been five years since I’ve put up with you and your dumbass brain.”
“Ya! Shouldn’t you say ‘What do you mean? You’re an angel and I’m really lucky to have such a good friend’ or things like that?” I ask, pretending to be offended.
“Oh, no. I really shouldn’t.” His tone serious even though he’s joking. “You already think too highly of yourself and I’m not going to fuel that ego of yours.”
“Ouch. That hurt.” I clutch my chest, crumples appearing on the area of the shirt I held on to.
We laugh and keep on chatting, about our club and if we should make a new corner in our show, for a while. Then Seokmin has to hang up because his mother was about to burst into his room as his son didn’t hear her shouting multiple times that dinner was ready. By the time we hang up, my hair is fully dried so I get up from the armchair I’ve been sitting on and go downstairs to watch the tv while waiting for my parents to come back home.
When they do arrive, I help my mom making dinner. I told her I hadn’t started cooking yet because I thought Joshua hyung would’ve joined us. However, hyung sent me a text a couple of minutes before they’d arrive telling me he would come after dinner as Mingyu’s parents insisted for them to eat something before leaving.
My parents and I eat in the living room while watching a rerun episode of “Knowing Brothers” and, when we’re done, I tell my mom not to worry about washing the dishes as I’ll do it while waiting for Joshua. They should enjoy their time lazing on the sofa while they still can. Soon, they’ll have to shoo away because the room will be in Joshua and I’s hands. Mom puffs her cheeks in protest but then complies with it and joins dad who’s already laying on the couch.
Being alone in the kitchen and hearing nothing but the faint voices and waves of laughter coming from the tv, leaves too much room for unwanted thoughts in my head. They’re all about a certain someone and I need to make them go away. That’s why I grab the first pair of earphones I find on one of the counters, probably dad’s ones, plug them to my phone and blast all the rock songs I have on my stop-thinking-playlist. They’re always the best remedy against thinking as the sound of the guitars and the drums fill your brain, making it impossible for you to focus on something that’s not the song you’re currently listening to.
As I was humming and riding the rhythm, I suddenly feel a hand grabbing my shoulder.
I jump and turn around, swinging the pan I was about to dry almost like a weapon.
Luckily, Joshua ducks and avoids being hit. He is now looking at me, fear in his eyes and hands thrown in the air to show he’s surrendering.
“You scared me!” I yell, clutching my chest and putting the pan in the sink to take the earphones off.
“And you almost hit me with that pan!” He yells back, pointing his index at the sink.
“I didn’t want to hit you! I was just rinsing it, see?” I move a bit on the side so he can see the pan and some other dishes waiting to be rinsed and dried.
“If I hadn’t moved, you would’ve hit me!” He is embracing himself, still scared for his life.
“Then why do you have to give me such heart attacks?!”
“I wanted to prank you but, next time, I’ll be sure not to do it. You could be swinging a knife at me, who knows.” Joshua shudders at the thought.
“Right! Don’t do it ever again! I really think that 10 years are gone from my lifespan!” I shake my head and turn around to focus again on the dishes that need to be cleaned. “How long have you been here?”
“It’s been ten minutes?! I was in the other room talking to your parents.”
“I didn’t hear the doorbell.”
“You were too busy singing and dancing, how could’ve you heard me?” Joshua leans on the counter next to the sink, giving his judging look.
“I wasn’t singing, I was humming,” I precise, glancing at him with the corner of my eye.
“Trust me, you weren’t humming. I think you took a note so high that could be heard from my house.” I see him turning away not to laugh in my face, covering his mouth with a hand.
“Are you for real?”
“Ask your parents if you don’t believe me.” He’s now looking at me again, arms crossed over his chest.
“Fuck! I won’t be using earphones next time.”
He laughs and shakes his head. “Are you done with the dishes?”
“Almost. I need to dry the last things.”
“C’mon, I’ll help you,” Joshua says as he takes another towel from one of the drawers of the counter he has been leaning on and we dry the remaining plates and cutlery.
However, not too long after, they’re dirty again as Joshua begged me to make him a hot chocolate because he was suddenly craving it. When two cups of the steamy drink are ready, we go to the living room where our parents wish us a good night before heading to their bedroom. They tell us not to be too loud and to sleep early: the day after is a weekday and we still need to go to school. We promise we’ll behave, that we’ll just chat a bit and then we’ll sleep. Satisfied by our response, my parents leave and we settle on the couch.
“Hot chocolate and warm blankets. Is this heaven?” Joshua asks after taking a sip from his cup.
“Not yet. You can say it’s really heaven when you add a movie marathon or a new drama to all of this.”
“True but you heard your parents, we’re not allowed to do that tonight. Plus, I think I am so tired that I would pass out after only five minutes into the movie. I wouldn’t even go past the opening titles.” He rubs his eyes, sleep making his eyelids heavy.
“To tell you the truth, I’m tired too.” I try to cover myself better with the blanket, which I now realise is too short for my body but it was of the perfect length the moment it was used on Jihoon. “Did you have a tough practice round today?”
“Actually, no. We wasted time because of Jihoon.”
“How come?”
“He was late, as always, and we wasted even more time when he explained the reason why.” Joshua’s tone is a resigned one. He sighs before taking another sip of chocolate.
“You look sad. Is it because of what happened to him?” I already know what he’s talking about and Seokmin said that he would be affected by it but I hoped it wasn’t the case, that he isn’t sad because of the newly-born couple.
“Somewhat?” His reply coming off more as a question than a statement.
“What did he tell you?”
“It’s nothing to be worried about, really.” Joshua takes a pause, his internal conflict on whether telling me or not evident in his expression. “Basically, he made it official that he’s dating Chanyeol. He said he picked interest in him since the day they went around school when he first arrived. They had been texting a lot and, sometimes, went on friendly dates that apparently will soon become real dates. You know, today, Chanyeol brought him in the schoolyard and…”
“He kissed him,” I finish for him as he seemed like he was struggling to finish his story.
“Yeah...wait. How do you know that?”
“I saw them.” I shift my gaze down, playing with the hem of the blanket.
“What? How? When?”
“Remember that I had to go back to school because I left my phone there?” I wait for Joshua to nod before continuing. “I went to the courtyard to tell the janitor I was about to leave as I found the phone and I saw them kissing.”
“Oh. Why didn’t you tell me right away?” He asks and I can feel his eyes on me, trying to study me.
“As you said, it’s nothing big. Plus, I wanted to make it a topic for our gossip section while drinking our chocolate.” I look at him again, smiling and raising my half-empty cup. “But why are you sad? Isn’t it good that he has a boyfriend now?”
“Soons!” He yells and glares at me. “We know that Chanyeol isn’t a good guy! Even I am aware of what kind of person he is and what happened last year with Baekhyun!” He ruffs his hair in frustration. “He will make Jihoon feel like he’s on cloud nine and then push him down just to laugh at him falling,” he says, eyes losing focus while staring at the content of his cup and thinking of something only he knows about. “Jihoon may not want to get up again after that fall.”
“C’mon! I don’t think he is that weak!” I get up to go sitting next to Joshua. “He doesn’t look like someone who can easily get hurt.”
Joshua sighs, puts his cup on the coffee table and takes my hands in his. “Look, he may look like he’s tough, but he’s a softie. If he gets too attached to him, it’s the end. He would end up being scarred once again in his life and he doesn’t need that.” The grip on my hands slightly tightens. “Plus, Chanyeol is not his type and we know that.” His evil smirk making an unwanted comeback.
“Who better than Jihoon knows who can be his type? Maybe Chanyeol fits his idea of a perfect partner.”
“I can’t agree with that. I strongly believe Jihoon needs someone like you.” He stops talking to take in my reaction, a reaction that never comes and that’s why he adds, “To be honest, I hoped that you two could become something more than friends, reason why I am sad at the news.”
“There isn’t any kind of chemistry between us that could lead to becoming something more than friends. If that was the case, he wouldn’t have gotten together with the first person who flirted with him. Maybe he likes being used and thrown away. Maybe it will be him the one to use Chanyeol and throw him away in the end. Maybe y’all are worrying too much.”
“Hey, Soons, lower your voice! Your parents said not to be loud!” Joshua whisper-shouts, slapping my arm to make me shut up.
I hadn’t realised I was raising my voice.
I run a hand through my hair in frustration as this whole thing is making me lose control over my body and actions. Why does everyone believe there could be something between me and that knob? I hate him and he hates me, this is the only thing going on with us and I think it’s pretty obvious!
“I’m sorry.”
“Tell me, how did those two end up together?” Joshua scoots closer and gives me his ear to attentively hear what I was going to say.
“When he was transferred to our school, the teacher said that to get Jihoon used to the environment, he should’ve toured our school to see the different classrooms and the club activities that take place inside of them.”
“And she sent him with Chanyeol?!”
“Actually, no. In the first place, she told me to go with Jihoon, you know, because you told her we already knew each other. I didn’t want to and that’s why I asked Chanyeol to accompany him.” The last part almost whispered as if it could prevent Joshua hyung from hearing it.
But that isn’t the case.
“What the actual fuck? Why didn’t you go with him? You two were already friends!” He whisper-shouts again.
“Because I can’t stand him, hyung.” The words leaving my mouth before I could even try to stop them.
Both Joshua and I freeze. “What?”
‘Oh, God. I told him. Fuck my big mouth. It slipped out. I didn’t mean to tell him that way but it’s better if he knows, right?’
“I can’t stand him. He’s cocky, rude, annoying and a knob!”
“That’s not true! He’s the opposite of that!” Joshua defends him.
“With me, he’s like that.” I shift on the couch so I can face him. “Do you remember when I told you that I bumped into a rude guy after the first day of school and we soon got on each other’s nerves?”
Joshua hyung nods.
“Well, I kept bumping into him for three days straight. At the dinner with the band, on that weekend, I found out that the boy was actually Jihoon. In the first place, I thought he hadn’t recognised me, but I was wrong. While we were washing the dishes, he said he remembered me but he didn’t want to fight just because it could’ve disappointed you. As we both love you as our hyung, we tried our best not to fight in front of you or any of the guys.”
The pieces in Joshua’s mind seems to all connect now as he asks me, “That’s why you didn’t want to be left alone with him? Why didn’t you tell me sooner?”
“You were so happy about us getting along and I didn’t want to crush the smile you used to have on your face when we were together.”
“But it’s not the end of the world if you don’t like someone. We’re human and it’s normal not to particularly like someone.” He smiles as he ruffles my hair in the same way a parent would do with their toddlers when making them learn a new lesson about life.
“So, you’re not mad?”
“I am not. But you have to promise me something.” Pinky finger already sticking out to seal the promise.
“What?”
“Promise me that you’ll try to get to know him. I assure you he’s not the person you describe. Don’t judge him too soon. Sometimes, he can act like a complete dick but it’s his method to shield himself from people’s wickedness. He had been let down so many times by the ones he loved that he now tries to put the tough and cold-hearted façade in order to protect his heart.”
I lift my hand and lock Joshua’s pinky with mine, my heart softened by the sadness in his eyes and smile as he told about the smaller. “Okay, I will try. But remember that I’m doing it just because I care about you, hyung.”
“I know and I care about you, too. Now, let’s go to sleep. A new day is already about to start.” Joshua pushes me away, afraid of getting emotional to the point of shedding some tears.
“Okay, okay!” I faintly chuckle as I go to my couch and bring my blanket up to my chin. “Goodnight, hyung.”
“Good night, Soons.”
Notes:
And I'm finally back!!! I admit that I missed writing this story during these days I was away!
I hope you liked the chapter and are ready to suffer a bit in the future because of what these two idiots are going to do.Next week, I'll try to post both another chapter and write the new one-shot!
Stay tuned!!
Chapter 17
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
The night goes by without any kind of disturbances. No dreams, no nightmares at all and, thanks to that, I wake up feeling pretty rested and energised for the day.
‘I will surprise hyung by making some pancakes!’
As I was preparing the batter, ingredients scattered all over the kitchen counter, Joshua’s phone rings. The ringtone is echoing in the whole living room and kitchen too. I run to answer so he can rest a bit more and, to be fast, I end up picking up the call without checking the caller’s ID.
“Hello?”
“Hello? Soonyoung?” Says the last person I would like to talk to first thing in the morning.
“Jihoon?”
“Yes, it’s me.” Jihoon takes a pause, maybe to check if he had dialled the right number. When he confirmed that it was indeed the right one, he asks “Why are you the one answering to Joshua hyung’s phone?”
“He spent the night here and he is still asleep.”
“Oh.” A short answer that sounded like he wanted to say more but decided not to.
“Do I need to wake him up?”
“No, I just had something to tell him.”
“Can’t you say it to me?” I ask as I keep mixing the batter, phone locked between my shoulder and ear.
“Mind your own business. Just tell him I called when he wakes up.” Here it is, the bright brat side of him.
“Why should I if you told me to mind my own business?” I scoop part of the batter with the ladle and pour it in the already hot pan.
“Because I need to talk to him and because it’s his phone and you answered without his permission.”
“Blah, blah, blah. I’ll hang up or the pancakes I’m making will burn.”
“Wa-”
Jihoon hasn’t the time to come back at me as I hang up on him right away. I can picture him cursing at me on the other side of the phone and the idea of upsetting him making me smile. It is indeed a good day.
“Who were you talking to?” Joshua inquires as he walks in the room, making me jump a little at his sudden appearance.
“Oh, you’re already up?” I flash him a smile while flipping a pancake. “It was Jihoon.”
“The smell of the pancakes woke me up.” He sniffs the air and takes in the aroma of the freshly baked pancakes. “What did that brat want from me at seven in the morning?” Chuckles come out from him showing the fondness hidden behind his words.
“He said it wasn’t my business, so if you’re dying to know the reason why he was looking for you, you should call him.” I put the plate with Joshua’s breakfast in front of him and he beams at the sight.
“I’ll do it after changing clothes.” He rubs his hands together and then proceeds in taking the fork and the knife placed next to the plate. “Now, I want to eat these delicious pancakes! I’m starving.”
“You’re complimenting and not complaining about my cooking skills? Hyung, is it really you?”
“Ya! I’ve never missed a chance to compliment you for your pancakes!”
“In all modesty, it’s the thing I can cook the best.”
Joshua suddenly makes a loud noise, making me almost drop the plate with my breakfast. “Wrong. It’s the only thing you can cook.”
“That’s not true!” I bring a cup of freshly brewed coffee for hyung and one of milk for me. Joshua holds his in between his hands for a while, enjoying its warmth.
“C’mon! I’m joking!” I know he’s just messing with me but, still, glare at him and threaten to take his dish away from him.
We keep on eating, the chirping of the birds and the cars passing by are the only sounds that prevent the room to be fully silent. When Joshua’s done with his portion of pancakes, he goes to the bathroom to wash up and get changed while I do the dishes.
As I made too much batter and, therefore, too many pancakes, I pack the leftovers. I’ll bring them to school and share them at lunch together with Seokmin and Joshua hyung.
Once Joshua is ready, we head to school.
The sky is blue and the sun still shines bright but it’s not that hot anymore. A light breeze blows from time to time, making the weather a bit chilly. After all, autumn is about to come and I can’t wait for it.
I love admiring the vibrant colours of the leaves which, one by one, leave the tree to lean and rest on the soil. It’s a meeting happening only once every year. The one between the leaves and the ground I mean. I don’t know why but it has a melancholic note to it. Think about it: they leave the tree on which they were born in spring and grew up in summer only to fall and meet the ground in autumn and die with it during the cold and long winter.
It’s sad but somewhat romantic.
“Soonyoung?” Joshua makes me snap out of it. “What are you thinking about?”
“Have you called Jihoon back?” I opt to ask not wanting to share my thought as I’m one hundred per cent sure he will mock me.
“Yes and, honestly, it wasn’t a big deal. He could’ve sent a text or even made you deliver it to me.”
“What did he say?” Feeling both of my arms a bit sore, I stretch them forwards.
“That today there won’t be any practice because Mingyu’s not home.” He kicks a pebble found on the pavement before saying, “I guess you two don’t get along for real.”
“Yeah.” A bitter chuckle comes from both of us. “Ah, hyung, if you have some spare time today, why don’t we go to the mall? It’s been ages since we went there together!”
“Sounds good to me!”
“Yes!” I pump a fist in the air, happy about spending time some more time with my best friends. “I’ll tell Seok later!”
“We’ll go with my car.”
“Then, it’s better if we stay home.”
“Why?” Joshua wears a puzzled expression on his face.
“With your driving skills, It will take the whole day for us to get there, you slow snail!” I hold up a finger in his direction.
Joshua grabs my finger. “You’re a dumbass!” He twists the finger and I give a yell that surely woke up the entire neighbourhood. I rub my poor finger in pain and he enjoys watching me suffer. “Today, my shift ends early.”
“How come?”
“I covered Taehyung’s shift a while ago and he said he wants to pay me back for that favour, hence, I can go home early. This means I can relax a bit while waiting for you two to get ready. I’ll pick you up at six so we can go picking up Seokmin too.”
“Hyung, please tell one of the boys to tag along. Maybe...Wonwoo hyung?”
“Why?”
“Because if left alone with you two, I’ll end up third wheeling,” I whine.
“You keep being a dumbass, don’t you?” Joshua glares at me, eyes threatening to kill me.
I stick my tongue out and make faces at him only to run away so that Joshua can’t catch me and teach me a lesson like he’s shouting to do.
When we arrive at school, Jihoon is waiting for us at the gates. He looks a bit confused as he sees us panting and trying to catch our breaths.
Joshua greets him with a smile and a high-five while I just nod my head to show that I have, at least, acknowledged his presence. The three of us reach the door and I turn to Joshua hyung to high-five him.
“Have a good day! We’ll see at lunch!”
“You too, have a good day.” Joshua is about to walk away but then he turns around. “Don’t sleep in class!”
I roll my eyes and don’t even answer him as I enter the school. I walk down the hall with Jihoon trailing behind and it’s a bit more uncomfortable than it usually is. He hasn’t said a word and this isn’t like him because, after parting ways with Joshua, he would pester me about how great things are in here since he has so many “fans”. However, things are different today. I can feel it in the air and also in the way Chanyeol is waiting for him at the end of the staircase we take to reach the first floor where our class is. When Jihoon is close enough to notice him, he smiles and puts his arm over the shorter’s shoulders.
He’s marking his territory.
He wants people to know that Jihoon doesn’t need a crowd buzzing around him anymore.
He’s now taken, he’s off-limits.
I roll my eyes at Chanyeol’s childish behaviour and I fasten my pace.
I walk in the classroom and stop by Seokmin’s desk to greet him before taking my place. The couple stays a little while longer in the hallways and they come in only when the bell rings, reaching their respective seats: Chanyeol behind Seokmin and Jihoon next to me.
Before Jihoon got transferred here, Seokmin was the one sitting next to me. Then Joshua had to tell the teacher that this knob right here and I are friends and so they thought it was a great idea to let us share the desk. Seokmin and I used to talk on notes but, now, talking to him is impossible. We need to wait for the little break in between periods or lunchtime.
Nowadays, the only papers I receive are those from Jihoon, like the one landing on my notepad just now.
Hey, Soonyoung.
What?
Don’t be like that.
I can be like whatever I want.
Rude.
I know.
What were you thinking about?
Why should I tell you?
Because this literature class is getting boring.
I can’t do anything else but talk to you.
I was thinking about the good old times when Seokmin was next to me.
I am offended.
I’m not good enough as your seat buddy?
You know I can’t stand you.
The same goes for me.
We can’t change.
Yes, we can.
No, we can’t.
The teacher won’t allow us.
What?
If we could’ve changed our seats, now I would be sitting next to my best friend.
You could be sitting right in front of your boyfriend.
The moment Jihoon is about to read what I’ve written, I realise the mistake I’ve made. I am so impulsive for fuck’s sake. I have opened some metaphorical gates for a conversation I didn’t want to have with him. I hate being like this, unable to control my mind and body. It leads me to some unpleasant situations.
How do you know it?
Joshua hyung told me.
Plus, this morning, Chanyeol draped his arm over you and you even walked in class like that.
Did you really think that no one would’ve noticed?
Right.
Tell me, what do you think about him?
I don’t think you need my opinion on him.
You’re the one who likes him, I don’t have to like him.
You’re so rude it’s frustrating.
One tries to have a normal conversation with you and look at how you reply.
It’s impossible.
And you still don’t give up on me.
Don’t expect a reward for this.
You’re annoying.
Now, let me focus.
No, I’ll keep writing to annoy you.
Lucky me, it’s lunch break in a while.
Do you only think about food?
What else should I think about?
Me.
Let your boyfriend think about you.
Right now, he’s looking at you and he’s drooling.
In a while, his eyes will shoot lasers at me and I don’t want to deal with that.
Stop this, please.
Jihoon sucks it up and doesn’t reply. With the corner of my eyes, I see him turning to look at Chanyeol who smiles at him and waves as if to check if his puppy is still loyal to him. I shake my head and try focusing on the last fifteen minutes of this class but I how can I understand a thing since I haven’t followed anything up until now? And it’s all Jihoon’s fault.
The bell rings and, after the teacher leaves the classroom, I rush to Seokmin, grab him by the wrist and basically drag him at the canteen. We load our trays with food and join Joshua who’s already eating, not waiting for us.
“You were fast today,” Joshua says as he pats the chair next to him.
“Soonyoung dragged me out of the class.” Seokmin whines and sits right next to Joshua.
“I was starving and didn’t want to waste too much time queueing.”
“Starving?” Joshua scoffs and points his finger at me. “You ate 5 pancakes at breakfast!”
“Not enough to fill up this stomach of mine.” I proudly pat my belly which, on cue, rumbles in answer.
“Where’s Jihoon?” Joshua asks, looking around to find his friend.
“I don’t know. He was still in class when we came here.” Seokmin replies between a mouthful of food and another.
“Do you think he will eat with Chanyeol?”
“He did it when they weren’t dating and I think he now has more reason to eat with him,” I chirp in their conversation about Jihoon.
“You’re wrong,” says someone coming out of nowhere.
Shocked, I freeze with the spoon full of rice midair.
Jihoon is standing right behind me with a smug face I wish I could punch away with my fist.
He puts his tray on the table and seats at the head of it, between Joshua and me.
“Why are you not with him?” Seokmin asks, not caring of the fact he might come off rude.
“I know that, lately, hyung was disappointed because I wasn’t eating with you anymore. So I came here.” He eats a bit of his rice and subtly winks at me. He then looks at Joshua. “If Chanyeol wants to eat with me, he’s welcome at our table. Am I right, hyung?”
“Yes, you are! What a good dongsaeng I have!” Joshua keeps saying things as he picks food from his tray to put it in Jihoon’s one. “This hyung is proud of you. Eat a lot.”
“Since when I’m a good dongsaeng of yours?” Jihoon sarcastically asks.
“Since now, you little brat!”
We all burst out laughing the moment Joshua blocks Jihoon in an armlock and ruffles his hair while the latter whines about not being a brat and begs of being let go.
When we finish our lunch, I take out the Tupperware with the leftover pancakes. Jihoon doesn’t even wait for me to put them down and grabs one to wolf down it.
“Hey! I didn’t say that you could eat them.” I hit his hand the moment he is about to grab another one.
“I don’t want this one at the top. It’s a bit burnt.” He winks at me and eventually takes the top one.
“Oh, then I should’ve hung up on you a little bit sooner.” I attack him with sarcasm and a wink.
Jihoon almost chokes on the pancake and tries to hide his shocked expression. I’m confused by his reaction until I realised I haven’t told him that Joshua knows the truth. Maybe he’s thinking that I’m insane and about to screw up our plan. Joshua senses that something’s wrong and tries changing the topic.
“Soons, did you tell Seokmin about this afternoon?”
I look away from Jihoon and start playing with the few grains of rice left in the tray. “No, I was about to, though.”
“What?” Seokmin looks between Joshua and me, almost worried about our next words.
“Joshua hyung and I decided to hang out today. You know, going to the mall and stuff like that.” I glance at Jihoon who suddenly looks interested in the conversation. “They don’t have to practice and, to us, it sounded like a plan. What do you think about it?”
“It’s a great idea!” Seokmin smiles and claps like a seal. “It’s been a while since we spent some quality time together.”
“Great! We’ll pick you up at around six, so you’ll have enough time to get ready,” Joshua gently says as he pats Seokmin on the shoulder.
“Perfect.”
“Oh, right. Soonyoung, I texted Wonwoo and he said he’ll come.” Joshua’s words are for me but he’s looking at Jihoon, studying his expression.
“Wonwoo hyung?” Jihoon asks and his voice goes an octave up.
“Yes,” Hyung smirks satisfied and then looks at me. “He said he hadn’t anything scheduled for the day and he can come with us.” He grabs a pancake and tears a piece of it to hand it to the shorter. “Jihoon, do you want to tag along, too?”
I glare at Joshua, wishing that looks could really kill. He knows now, so why keep forcing us to be in the same space when we don’t want to?
“No, don’t worry. I have to hang out with Chanyeol, anyway.” Jihoon hangs his head and plays with the end of his tie, probably disappointed because he can’t join us.
At that moment, our lunch break ends so we have to say goodbye to Joshua and go back to the class for the next period.
Jihoon is lost in his thoughts for a while and doesn’t pass any note nor looks at me until the last period comes.
Then, as if by magic, a scribbled paper appears on my side of the desk. I roll my eyes and pray not to be annoyed.
Are you crazy?
What do you mean?
A while ago, at the canteen.
A while ago, at the canteen, what?
Please, define this.
When you said you had hung up on me.
There was Joshua with us.
Oh, that.
What’s the problem with that?
Joshua hyung knows we hate each other.
Excuse me?! Since when?!
Yesterday night.
How did you end up talking about that?
How did he react?
We were talking about this and that and it slipped out that I don’t really like you.
At first, he was shocked but then he said it happens not to like someone.
Half truth.
I can’t tell him I yelled that I can’t stand him while we were talking about Chanyeol and him getting together. I can’t even tell him about the promise of getting to know him better.
I see.
You can stop pretending to be cute and kind in front of him and the others from today on.
Am I cute?
You’re a little shit, that’s what you are.
C’mon you can say it.
I know you have a soft spot for me.
No fucking way.
There’s no soft spot for you, not even a hard one.
There’s no spot for you at all.
Plus, you need to stop acting this way.
Your boyfriend might misunderstand.
But I’m bored.
Be bored without writing things to me.
So you’ll go to the mall later?
Oh my God.
Are you even ignoring what I say now?
You repeat the same things so they do not affect me anymore.
So, you’re going?
You were with us when we talked about it, an answer to that question is useless.
Still, you could be kind with your answers.
Again, no use in doing that.
Anyway, to quote you, ‘mind your own business’ .
I will.
Like, I will have a lot of fun while hanging out with Chanyeol.
Good for you.
Have fun.
Now, leave me alone.
Jihoon answers and I see the piece of paper being pushed towards my side but I ignore it. I have dealt enough with him today and the only thing I want to think about is how to dress to impress Wonwoo hyung and the things we will do together at the mall. Will we be left alone for a while? Will I end up spending time with Seokmin while Wonwoo and Joshua will talk about the band? Who knows.
As I mentally decide the outfit to wear, the last bell rings. Seokmin and I bolt out of the classroom and part ways when we reach the gates, excited about the afternoon and the night awaiting ahead of us.
Notes:
And this is it for this week! What do you think about these two? Are they really enemies or are they just too stubborn to notice things? Who knows!
However, I can't wait to write the next chapter! There will be a scene I particularly like and I want to show it to y'all!
PS: The other soonhoon one-shot I was talking about became a whole interactive au on Twitter! It's a collaboration with a dear mutual of mine born from our habit of writing short stories on the spot in the voborabopabo groupchat we have on Twitter. The story is called "Meet my eyes" and it's about Soonhoon being roommates at college and Jihoon avoids Soonyoung and the latter thinks it's because he hates him. I'll leave the link to it here
[𝙢𝙚𝙚𝙩 𝙢𝙮 𝙚𝙮𝙚𝙨]
In which Soonyoung and Jihoon are roommates in University. However, Jihoon makes the best excuses to avoid being left alone with him and Soonyoung swears it's because he hates him. But why? Why won't Jihoon look at him in the eyes?#soonhoon #howoo pic.twitter.com/8HBKQVHxdK— Ylene (@angstylene) March 17, 2019
Hope you enjoyed the chapter!! As always, thank you for reading it!! <3
Chapter 18
Notes:
Before you start reading, I'll leave here the playlist
I listened to while writing the chapter and Chet Baker's song
If you want, you can listen to them to get in the mood.
See ya at the end notes ;)
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Jihoon’s point of view
‘Soonyoung will go to the mall later and Wonwoo will be with him. I wonder what they will do together.’
I stop in my tracks to kick a pebble. The shot is hard and it flies away, disappearing in the grass of someone’s yard. I keep on walking and thinking, not really focusing on where I am going.
I don’t know why but hearing that they will spend the afternoon together makes me feel a bit uneasy.
I’ve met Soonyoung a month ago and since then, we’ve been at each other’s throat. He’s the most upsetting person I had ever met in my eighteen years of life but I have to admit I quite enjoy annoying him too. He’s like the only person who reacts that way to my teasing methods and it’s amusing seeing him getting all worked up and fuming because he would very much like to punch me in the face but he can’t. It would make him look bad in front of the others.
However, since the moment we started pretending to get along for Joshua’s sake, something in me changed. I discovered a side of him I didn’t expect to see. He is usually rude and sarcastic with me but with his friends, he’s the opposite of that. He looks funny when he reenacts drama scenes with Seokmin. He cares about the others, like when he has to get ready to record his radio show and helps the other students in arranging the equipment and the cue sheets so they won’t get too tired. He is sweet when he brings food for Joshua and acts silly to make the elder smile after a busy day at work or when he feels a bit down.
All of the things he does make me want to stay by his side and see if I’m able to change his mind, if I can get on his good side and receive the same kind of attention.
You, who are reading this, are surely asking yourself: “Why are you with Chanyeol if you’re slowly gravitating towards Soonyoung?”
Well, I like Chanyeol and there’s no reason for me to call it into question. He reflects the type of person I had always wanted as my partner, as my boyfriend.
I’ve never been interested in looks or money, I’ve only wanted to find someone who can touch my heart with their actions, their words and the way they make me feel when I’m with them.
Chanyeol loves music just like I do and his songs really reach out to my heart. As tall and scary he can seem, he’s actually a softie who likes cheesy and sappy things. He treats me as if I’m the only one for him, as if my heart is his most precious belonging and it needs lots of care and attention. Whenever I see him, I feel giddy and in want of stopping time or impressing every moment with him inside of my memory. When he’s by my side, I feel like I can be myself, showing parts of me I’m afraid of showing the others.
It’s also true, though, that I’ve been picking interest in Soonyoung. It’s not love though, I’m quite sure of it. I’m just interested in this weird dog-and-cat dynamic going on between us that keeps me attracting to him. Again, no feelings involved so I can’t figure out why it bothers me that, later, he’s going out with Wonwoo.
As I stop thinking for a moment, I realise my feet have brought me to the park near our neighbourhood. At the centre, there’s a small playground but there are no kids playing around as the weather has become more chilly, especially during the late hours of the day. When it’s morning, the sun shines brightly over the area, warming it up. Now, it’s five in the afternoon and the sun is almost setting, disappearing behind the tree canopy.
The air chilled, making me shiver a bit as I walk towards the swing to sit on it.
I close my eyes and throw my head back, lightly moving the swing to lull myself and taking in the smell of the leaves carried by the wind. I was deep inside of the moment, basking in the quietness of my surroundings when my phone repeatedly vibrates against my thigh.
It’s a call and it’s Wonwoo hyung.
“Oh, hyung.”
“Where are you? I kind of need your help.” His voice a bit frantic.
“I was about to go home, why? Do I need to come over?” I ask a bit worried. It’s not every day that Wonwoo hyung calls instead of sending a text. It must be an urgent matter.
“There’s no need for that. It’s embarrassing, though.” I’m pretty sure he’s rubbing his temples now, trying to find the right words to tell me what he needs me for. “Please listen to me and don’t laugh, okay?”
“I can’t promise you,” I tease him to cheer him up.
“Little shit.” Wonwoo snickers.
“I get that a lot.”
“Okay.” I can hear him taking a deep breath before he drops what I thought was a bomb. “So, later, I’ll go to the mall and Soonyoung will be there too. What should I wear?”
“Jeon Wonwoo, is it really you?” I move the phone from my ear to the front of my face to jokingly check again the caller’s ID. “Okay, it’s you but have you really called me asking for fashion advice? You know that Mingyu is more helpful as his knowledge of fashion and clothes is better than mine.”
“I fucking know it but you’re the only one I can trust with this.”
“Eh?” I’m confused. How am I the only one he can trust?
“Look, you’re the last person I should reach out to ask for tips about what to wear for a not-really-a-date but you’re the one who will tease me the less about this.” He whines. Wonwoo is whining and this alone is enough to shock me.
“What makes you think that I won’t tease you?”
“In fact, I didn’t say you won’t tease me. I said you won’t be as a dick like the others.”
“Can’t deny that.”
“So, please, help me pick a nice outfit. I want to impress him without being too much of a show-off.”
I stop swinging for a second, closing my eyes and sighing. “I can’t give you proper advice about what to wear but let me tell you something. Don’t try too much impressing him. Don’t wear something you know he will like but will make you feel uncomfortable. He has to like you for who you are and not for the person he wants you to be, okay?”
There’s silence on the other line until Wonwoo decides to ruin the moment. “Wow, Jihoon. I would’ve expected this kind of ment from Cheol hyung who won’t stop acting like he’s our father. I think you’re taking after him.”
“Shut up.” I chortle.
“Manners, young man. I’m still your hyung,” Wonwoo says but he’s laughing too. “By the way, are you coming with us?”
“No, I’ll be with Chanyeol, my boyfriend.”
“I see. Well, I guess I’ll call you when I’m back home. I’ll tell you if your advice worked or if you need to be updated on how fashion and dates work nowadays.”
I give him a sarcastic laugh. “I will be waiting for your phone call. Good luck with your not-really-a-date!”
“Thanks! You go and have fun with your boyfriend, you sappy little shit.”
He hangs up and I’m left alone again with my thoughts.
Wonwoo has a crush on Soonyoung since the night they met at Joshua’s house.
He is the type of guy everyone would fall for. He’s sweet and caring although he looks as cold as ice. He is romantic but also manly. He loves music and books and people tend to sway to his talks about his favourite books or albums, his low-toned voice drawing them in a kind of hypnosis they cannot snap out of. However, he’s introverted and doesn’t easily let people in. This is often mistaken as coldness, gaining him the title of the “Ice King” when he was still in high school. Back then, most of the guys were irritated by his blank expression, thinking he pulled it just to look cool in front of the others; the girls, on the other hand, were fascinated by it, betting among themselves who could’ve been the one able to melt his apparently frozen heart. Nevertheless, only a few people tried going past the shield he put as a front and got to see the real Jeon Wonwoo, the bright guy who likes to smile a lot.
He has a fragile heart, so I don’t know what to think of this situation.
If Soonyoung likes Wonwoo too then there should be no problem, right? Wonwoo would be happy about getting into a relationship with the guy he has been crushing on for a month. But what if Soonyoung doesn’t? Wonwoo would be crushed by yet another rejection. In the worst case scenario, he could shut himself in even more, wanting to not feel love anymore.
The more I think of it, the more there’s an unsettling feeling in my stomach. I try ignoring it, figuring out it’s better to stop mulling over and go back home to get changed.
I have a date, too.
I slowly walk on the path leading to my house and take my phone out to check the Instagram timeline. I scroll through it, without really focusing on the posts. In the end, it’s always the same things: love quotes, sad quotes, people travelling, people showing off they’re living life better than you.
That’s until I see a particular post.
“Vinyl Art”
Come trying our new retro-themed shop where you can choose your favourite music on vinyl and sip your favourite milkshake.
Every booth has its own gramophone and two pairs of headphones.
Ideal for dates with your significant other or to just dive in the good old days.
The post rings a bell in my head.
What if I coax Chanyeol into hanging out at the mall? Maybe I’ll be lucky enough to meet them and see how Soonyoung acts around Wonwoo, if he’s interested in hyung or sees him as a friend. That way, I can also figure out what to do with Wonwoo hyung. Yes, it’s a good idea but the hardest part is going to be how to persuade Chanyeol.
I text him as soon as I get home.
Woozy:
Hey, Channie.
Channie:
Hey, Hoonie.
Woozy:
Why don’t we go to the mall later?
Channie:
To the mall?
Why?
Woozy:
I don’t want to aimlessly walk around today.
Plus, they inaugurated the new cafè called Vinyl Art.
We wanted to check it out once it opened, right?
Channie:
Oh, yeah!
It has already opened?
Woozy:
Yup, I saw a post on Instagram.
Channie:
I really want to go, Hoonie.
But, how do we get there?
We can’t drive and no one can drop us there.
Woozy:
We can take the bus.
Channie:
Uh?
Woozy:
Didn’t you say you wanted to try the things actors do in dramas?
Like sitting together on a bus, playing with each other’s hands while waiting to get to our destination.
Channie:
You’re right.
I really wanted to go for walk with you, however, I will agree under one condition.
Woozy:
Whatever you want, Channie.
Channie:
That once in there, we’ll watch a movie and we’ll buy at least one couple item.
Woozy:
Couple item?
Channie:
Yeah, like a scarf or a phone case.
I think it’s sweet to have matching things and it helps in having people stay away from my man hahaha.
Woozy:
Okay, we can do that.
Channie:
Yay!
I’ll be waiting for you at the bus stop next to our school!
See you there in an hour!
Woozy:
See you there, Channie.
I can’t believe what I just agreed to do.
Was it really me texting or some ghost had just possessed my body for the past 10 minutes? A drama-like couple? Couple items? I must be crazy and for what? To keep an eye on Wonwoo hyung and Soonyoung.
Something keeps bugging me to follow them and see what happens. It bothers me to the point I accepted doing cringy stuff I wouldn’t ever do if I was in my right mind. I like Chanyeol but that is too much for me. I already regret this decision but it’s too late now to back away.
It’s been an hour since we started wandering in the mall when we finally reach the Vinyl Art cafè and we sit down at a booth, milkshakes on the table and headphones plugged in to listen to Chet Baker ’s I Fall In Love Too Easily .
We sip the drinks in silence, heads slowly swaying to the melody of the song and fingers tapping on the table or the glass to follow the tempo.
I fall in love too easily,
I fall in love too fast,
I fall in love too terribly hard
For love to everlast.
My heart should be well schooled
‘Cause I’ve been fooled in the past.
But still, I fall in love too easily
I fall in love too fast.
Chanyeol looks at me and shyly smiles upon hearing these words. The mellow solo with the saxophone plays as we lock our gazes and with the dim lights of the place, he looks amazing, almost breathtaking.
The solo comes to an end and the words replay.
My heart should be well schooled
‘Cause I’ve been fooled in the past.
But still, I fall in love too easily
I fall in love too fast.
I’ve fallen too fast and easily for him.
It took not even a month to be completely drawn in him and it’s almost scary. Why? Because it’s scary how fast you can open up to someone out of love, how fast you can put your guard down so you can be loved, too. I did that with Chanyeol and that’s why we’re now, here, together and with loads of matching items to wear at school or on dates. I said that cheesy things like that are just too much for me but I found myself powerless, unable to say no to him and his puppy eyes. I couldn’t say no to the excited smile he wore on his face when he’d find something he liked.
I’ve fallen too fast and easily for him and maybe that’s why the lyrics sound a bit like a warning. To quote it, “My heart should be well schooled, ‘cause I’ve been fooled in the past.” I’ve been fooled so many times by people who pretended to love me, to put me at the centre of their world only to let me down again and again. I had promised myself not to fall in love again, but here I am. Smitten for the man sitting before me.
But why does my mind keep on thinking about Soonyoung?
After the milkshakes are gone and a good thirty minutes are spent listening to various vinyl albums, we make our way to the movie theatre.
It’s when we’re almost there that, out of the corner of my eye, I see some familiar silhouettes. It’s Wonwoo hyung and he’s alone with Soonyoung.
‘What about Joshua hyung and Seokmin? Where did they go? Why are those two alone?’
Luckily, their backs are facing us so they still haven’t noticed us. Before they could, I grab Chanyeol’s wrist to drag him away.
However, I’m known for not being lucky and things never go the way I want them to. In fact, Wonwoo turns around and his eyes land straight on us. He then taps Soonyoung on the shoulder and he turns around too, a bit confused until he spots us. Confusion soon turning into shock and disbelief.
Wonwoo rapidly moves towards us, Soonyoung trailing behind him and looking annoyed, probably because this random meeting is going to take away some of his alone time with hyung.
“Hyung!” I call out, making few people turn to look at us.
“Hey, Ji. What are you doing here?” Wonwoo asks genuinely surprised.
“Right, what are you doing here?” Soonyoung crosses his arms over his chest.
“Oh, Soonyoung. You’re here, too. I hadn’t seen you there.” Sarcasm always there when I talk to him.
“I should be the one saying that since you are the short one.” That was a low blow from Soonyoung. A dirty low blow.
I ignore him and turn to Wonwoo, smiling at him. “Wonwoo hyung, this is Chanyeol. He’s my boyfriend.”
“Nice to meet you.” Wonwoo extends a hand for Chanyeol to grab it.
“It’s my pleasure.” Chanyeol bows first and then takes Wonwoo’s hand, shaking it. “Jihoon told me a lot of things about you.”
“Really? Well, don’t say that in front of the others when you’ll meet them, but I am his favourite hyung.” Wonwoo jumps on me and locks my head in an armlock, ruffling my hair.
“You wish.” I easily get out of his light grip.
“Well, why are you around here?”
“We came here to try the milkshake at the Vinyl Art and we bought some couple items,” Chanyeol answers, showing the bags with the said items.
“Are you for real?” Soonyoung scoffs and looks between us. “I can’t picture you two doing this kind of cheesy stuff.”
“Well, we are. After all, we are a couple , right Jihoon?” Chanyeol drapes his arm over my shoulders, eyes never leaving Soonyoung’s.
“I see that you’re marking your territory, aren’t you?” Wonwoo chuckles at the scene unfolding in front of him.
“Exactly.” Chanyeol is chuckling, too.
“Since we’re all here, why don’t you come with us?” Wonwoo smoothly changes the topic to break the tension arose because of Chanyeol and Soonyoung. “We’ll eat some pizza when the other two will come back.” He points with his thumb in a general direction, the one in which those two disappeared or the one where the pizzeria is.
“No!” Soonyoung and I answer in unison.
I scowl at Soonyoung and then say to Wonwoo, “Don’t worry hyung. I promised Chanyeol to watch a movie with him and to eat sushi after that. You can go ahead.”
“Are you sure?”
“Never been this sure in my life.” I flash him a reassuring smile.
“Then, okay.” Wonwoo turns his head to look at Soonyoung. “Should we go, Soonie?”
“Let’s go, hyung.”
“Talk to you later, Jihoon. Have fun!” Wonwoo waves at both of us.
“You too, hyung.” I lift my head to greet him.
While they’re walking away, Soonyoung hooks his arm around Wonwoo’s one.
‘They’re already at that stage, uh?’
As I watch their backs, the regret for not joining them for dinner knocks on my mind’s door. I could’ve closely observed them but I really want to keep the promise I made to Chanyeol. After all, Wonwoo will tell me everything when he’ll get home, right?
When the two are no longer in sight, I turn to Chanyeol and smile, taking him by the hand to walking in the theatre.
We watched the movie, ate loads of sushi accompanied by some good sake and the time to leave the mall comes. We take the bus again to get home. Instead of getting off at the stop near the school, we get off near Chanyeol’s house so I could keep him company to his house.
“You didn’t have to walk me, I’m big enough to scare people off.” Chanyeol suddenly says, pointing out the fact that he indeed is bigger and able to fight people if they tried to mess with him.
“I wanted to be with you a little bit longer.” I lower my head so he can’t see the blush creeping on my cheeks.
“You’re so cheesy, do you know that?”
“Maybe?” I look at him and we both laugh, shying away the second after. “Well, see you tomorrow,” I say when we reach his door.
“See you tomorrow.”
Chanyeol steals a quick peck from me and then opens the door to his house, waving before closing it behind him.
Now, I could take the bus again to reach my place, but I want to walk and clear my head which is still clouded by the alcohol drank not so long ago.
The streets are almost deserted, the only people passing by are couples, who are on a date, or students rushing to their dormitories before curfew. Everyone seems to be in haste. Maybe it’s because this day is fading into a new one as we’re going deeper in the night hours or maybe it’s because in the night breeze lingers the sweet scent of the rain. Considering how clouded is the sky, soon enough, there will be a downpour.
It doesn’t take long to arrive.
While the others seem frantic, running to reach their houses or somewhere they can shelter under, I walk unbothered by it, the slow pace of my feet not matching the fast one of my suddenly racing heart.
Walking in the rain had always been one of my favourite things since it feels like the raindrops take away all the dark thoughts, the doubts, the fears and, sometimes, they even wash away the worst of me.
You come out of it, feeling cleaner, better, lighter even if this sensation lasts just for a while.
I love the rain also because it can help masking the sadness.
There was a time I used to go out a lot on rainy days. When things became stuffy and frustrating, when I couldn’t hide any longer the things I held inside, I waited for a downpour like this so that I could let everything go, cry the pain out. There were few people who looked at me, a poor drenched boy, walking towards god-knows-where without an umbrella. However, none of them would notice the tears I was shedding as they were mistaken as simple raindrops streaming down my face.
No one would’ve imagined how salty and heavy those raindrops were.
Thinking about those times, makes me want to cry even though I don’t have a reason to. It’s just that my heart feels unexplainably tight at the moment and my mind, once again, goes to Soonyoung.
It’s inevitable.
As I said before, there’s something about him that pulls me towards him every time I try to turn my back and step away.
Perhaps, it’s because of his slanted eyes shining so bright when he hears of things he likes or how his eyes disappear behind his puffy hamster-ish cheeks as he smiles. He keeps on throwing any kind of insult at me because of my endless teasing, he had enough of me but his gestures seem to say otherwise. The little things he does for me, they leave me speechless and with a feeling of warmth inside of me. I feel cared about.
I wander and wonder again, clothes stuck to my body and heavy as I’m drenched.
The downpour hasn’t stopped yet just like my thought about both Chanyeol and Soonyoung.
I keep bouncing from one to another, feeling more and more helpless and frustrated with every bounce and every step.
At a certain point, I wished I had my earphones with me so that maybe the music would shut my mind up, easing the knot at the mouth of my stomach.
After what it seems like hours, tiredness starts creeping up and I decide it’s finally time to head back home.
I’m past Joshua hyung’s house and it will take another 5 minutes to reach my place, however, my feet act on their own again, making me stop right in front of Soonyoung’s house.
I fix my gaze on the door as if it could make him appear right before my eyes.
The loud sound of the water drops hitting the ground and the leaves slowly tuned out as I tune in the sound of Soonyoung’s bubbly laugh that’s playing now in my head.
The salty scent of the rain becomes the strawberry scent I could smell on the plushie and the blanket I slept with at his house almost a month ago.
The bitter taste of the alcohol slowly fading and turning into the taste of the peperos he gave me when he knew I was hungry.
All these things were the things which made me look at him in a different light while, before, I was blinded by his bad temper, thinking he could be nothing but a pain in the ass.
However, to him, I will be nothing but an evil being sent on Earth to annoy and torture him, while Wonwoo is the angel descended on Earth to save and love him. It feels a bit unfair but I’m happy for hyung because, maybe, he has finally found someone to keep by his side. Someone to love.
I don’t know for how long I’ve been standing still, looking at the door. I start feeling a bit cold, shivers running up and down my spine and reaching the rest of my body, too.
Suddenly, the coldness and the hard rain are probably playing a trick on me making me see things that aren’t really happening. Because it’s impossible that Soonyoung has opened that damned door and is now running to me with a red umbrella opened over his head, right?
Apparently, it’s possible.
“Jihoon,” Soonyoung calls out as he takes big steps to reach me, concern written all over his face.
“Soonyoung, what are you doing here?” I stupidly ask.
“I should be the one asking you that.” He sighs and pushes the umbrella forward so that it’s now covering me too. “I was in my room, sitting on the armchair next to the window. I was staring at the rain when I saw you. Why are you standing still in the rain? Is everything okay?” There’s worry in his eyes, they look so pained it hurts.
“Yup, I was going back home.”
“Why are you walking to get there? It’s raining cats and dogs! You could’ve taken a bus or a taxi. Hell, you could've even asked us to drop you home.” Every word of his tugs at my heart.
“Calm down. I just wanted to walk and it wasn’t raining before.”
“I know but you can get sick.” He runs a hand through his hair, lips darting to wet his lips as he thinks about what to do with me. “Here, take my umbrella,” he then says, extending even more the hand holding the umbrella.
“I don’t need it, I’m almost there.” I push it towards him again.
“C’mon, you can still be saved. Take the umbrella and as soon as you get home, dive in a hot bath or take a hot shower.”
“You don’t need to worry.”
“Even if I can’t stand you at all because you are the number one knob out here, you can’t get sick.”
“Why can’t I?” I almost shout, tired of his never-ending worries that do nothing but make me want to cry even more than I already want to.
“Because you need to think about the wellness of the group. If you’re ill how can y’all practise or perform?”
I can feel something cracking inside my chest. “It’s not like we have a gig scheduled this next week.”
“For fuck’s sakes, don’t be stubborn and just take my umbrella.”
I look at him for a while, pondering on whether appeasing him or keep on being stubborn. He’s wearing nothing but his pyjamas, consisting of a thin long-sleeved white shirt and pants barely reaching his ankles. He’s slightly shaking from being too much outside in the coldness. His eyes, though. They’re fierce and steady on me, warning me that he’ll not take no as an answer. “Okay, I’ll take it. But, first, I’ll take you back or you’ll wet yourself, too.”
Soonyoung nods, pleased by my answer, and hands me the umbrella. When I grab the handle, our fingers gently brush. Both of us flinch a little at the sudden contact. Maybe it is because it felt somewhat intimate, maybe it’s simply because of the coldness taking over our bodies. Soonyoung averts his gaze and tilts his head towards the door, a cue to start walking. I hold the umbrella high over our heads, the gap between our bodies almost none as I try not to get Soonyoung wet. The faint beams of light coming from the lampposts colour Soonyoung’s face with a golden shadow. He looks like one of those masterpieces whose artist is so proud of, they decide to cover it with a gold leaf, to make it even more beautiful and precious.
He’s that stunning at this moment.
Once we reach the entrance to his house, he stands there, rocking back and forth on his heels. He doesn’t need to say a word that I already know why he’s being like this. He’s waiting for me to walk away and I do that.
I walk away from him only to turn around again when I reach the end of the driveway and shoo him inside with a gesture of my hands. He backs off and before closing the door, he sticks his tongue out.
The door closes behind him and I sigh, a weak smile tugging on my lips.
He’s like a little brat who will never give up on being annoying.
And what about me?
What am I?
I’m just an idiot who was getting carried away too much by the moment, by the atmosphere. For a moment, it really felt as if he came straight out of my mind to save me from the vicious cycle of my thoughts.
It felts as if he was really worried. He was but about the Jeonghan’s bitches as a whole, not about me.
What was I expecting? I’m only a nuisance, a dude who does nothing but bother him by just breathing, a guy who mocks him every time he can.
I take a quick glance at Soonyoung’s room and his light is still on. A foolish part of myself wishes that he’s still next to his window, watching over me, waiting for me to walk away before going to bed. But what’s the point of that? It’s not like I’m his friend or something else. He doesn’t have to. Maybe he’s telling Seokmin how dumb I am for standing in the rain outside his house.
I shake my head and go home, this time, for real. I need to get myself together and stop thinking about him.
‘I have Chanyeol who worries and cares about me. I worry and care about him too. I like him a lot and we cherish each other. Nothing matters more than this.’
However, not even a minute goes by that my head is filled for the umpteenth time with thoughts about Soonyoung and Wonwoo.
‘Why Wonwoo hasn’t called me yet? Did something happen between them? What should I do? Why am I a complete fool?’
The weather seems to reflect my mood and thoughts as the downpour is slowly turning into a storm.
Luckily, by the time thunders and lightning fill the cloudy sky, I’m home.
I go for the bathroom, trying to pass unnoticed by my parents or else I will be scolded by my mother for not taking an umbrella with me when the weather forecast had clearly said that a storm was about to come.
I run the hot water in the bathtub and in the meantime, I go in my room to grab some dry clothes and to charge my phone. I quickly check it before leaving it on the bedside table. Not even a single notification shows up on the screen. Good.
I undress and throw the wet clothes in the sink, submerging then my body in the boiling hot water which burns my skin. However, the pain slowly turns into a pleasant sensation which is quite hard to describe with words. I bask in that feeling and get lulled by the sound of the rain beating on the window glass, feeling more and more drowsy as the coldness leaves my body and warmth takes its place. Suddenly, the events from today feel distant almost as if they were a dream, a trick played by my imagination.
I was close to falling asleep in the tub when my mom loudly knocks on the door to check if I was alright. I reassure her, saying I was just relaxing a bit.
As soon as I get out of the water, the cold attacks me again. I quickly dry my body with a towel and wear my pyjamas. I clean up the mess I made in the bathroom and only after that, I go back to my room, covering myself with a couple of blankets.
I take my phone from the bedside table and check again for a text.
Nothing.
I take a deep breath and decide to call Wonwoo. Maybe he thinks I’m still out with Chanyeol.
I touch the contact list icon on the screen and scroll through it, stopping once I reach Wonwoo hyung’s number. I press the call button and the phone rings three times before hyung answers.
“Jihoon!” He has an excited tone as if the call he was waiting for had finally arrived.
“Hey, hyung!”
“Are you home?”
“Safe and sound. What about you?”
“Me too.”
“So, did you have fun?” I ask as I shuffle to turn on my side.
“You go first. What did you and Chanyeol do?”
“You already know part of it.” I giggle. “We went around the different shops, looking for matching items to wear at school and on dates; we sipped a milkshake while listening to some vinyl albums at that new cafè; we watched a rom-com and then ate some sushi. Then I walked him home.”
“I couldn’t ask you that at the mall but since when are you a fan of couple items? Weren’t you the one who said he’d rather chop off one of his balls instead of wearing something like that?” Wonwoo is now trying to tease me.
“It’s a long story but to put it simply, I couldn’t say no to him,” I admit, rubbing my forehead out of embarrassment.
“You’re that whipped? Wow, Jihoon.” I can hear him clapping on the other side. “Finally, we’ve found someone able to tame our maknae.”
“You’re so funny, hyung. Can you hear me laughing?” I give him a very sarcastic laugh.
“I know I’m funny.”
“What about your not-really-a-date?”
“It was good, really good.” He is smiling and I can hear it behind his voice. “Did you see that Soonyoung and I were alone?”
“Yes. How did that happen?” I ask genuinely curious about the dynamic behind that.
“Well, our plan was to leave Joshua hyung and Seokmin alone because everyone but them knows they’re mutually pining. Believe me when I tell you they hadn’t even noticed they were alone until they reached a shop and saw we weren’t behind them. They were too busy looking at each other to notice.” I roll my eyes upon hearing how dense those two are. “In the meantime, I spent some time with Soonyoung. I got to know him better.” Wonwoo contently sighs. “I felt so comfortable around him and I couldn’t help but smile. I swear, my heart almost jumped out of my chest whenever he laughed at one of my silly jokes or when he smiled or looked at me.”
“Hyung, you say I am whipped but are you listening to yourself? You’re the one who’s whipped.” I laugh at him, hoping it doesn’t come off as bitter as it tastes in my mouth.
“I have no problem to admit it.”
“Touché.”
“Jihoon, I’ve really enjoyed my time with Soonyoung and I hope I can have some proper dates with him. I just need to know if he feels the same way about me.”
“I hope he does.”
There’s a long silence uncomfortably settling in the conversation as I don’t know what else to say.
“Oh, wait,” Wonwoo suddenly says. “Aren’t you two sitting next to each other in class?”
“Yes, why are you asking?”
“Can’t you look into it and find out what he thinks of me?”
“How should I do that?”
“I don’t know, maybe you can ask him if he had fun tonight and things like that.” Wonwoo hyung’s voice is full of hope.
“I’ll try but I can’t assure you that I will succeed. There’s a high chance of being told to fuck off and mind my own business.” I turn to lean with my back on the mattress and comb my hair with a hand.
“I hope he won’t do it even if you deserve it.” He laughs.
“Instead of trying to be funny, pray he will give a serious answer and won’t attack me.” I join him in laughing at the matter. “I think you’re the only one who had caught up on the fact that we’re on bad terms.”
“Yeah. If you ask me, it was pretty obvious.” He pauses for a while and takes a deep breath. “You know, I think it’s only a matter of time. Soon, he’ll realise you’re not a complete idiot and. who knows, maybe you’ll even become friends.”
“Friends, yeah.” Another bitter laugh followed by a big and loud yawn. “I think my time to hang up has come, hyung. I feel sleepy and if I don’t close my eyes now, tomorrow I won’t wake up on time.”
“Right. Sometimes I forget that you’re still a kid.”
“I’m not a kid!”
“You are!” He chuckles. “Good night, Ji.”
“Night, hyung.”
I hang up and put the phone back on the bedside table.
I stay still for a while, staring at the ceiling and reflecting on what Wonwoo said.
He really is whipped for Soonyoung, obvious by the way he had described the not-really-a-date. The sincerity of his crush makes me hope that things will go well for him and that Soonyoung will treat him in the way he deserves to be treated.
The idea of Soonyoung being the one deciding how things will go on from this point onwards scares me a bit.
I’m not scared because I’m jealous, not at all.
I’m scared that he can bring Wonwoo’s hopes up and then crush them in a blink of an eye, leaving a broken Wonwoo behind. Hyung is a precious guy who needs to be happy and not let down by cruel and heartless people and I really hope Soonyoung is not one of them. I will personally warn him that if he wants to take things to the next level with Wonwoo, he has to want it for real and be one hundred percent sure of it or else I’ll chop his dick off.
With that in mind and a mild but constant heart pang, I slowly fall asleep, the idea of being in charge of two people’s happiness is pressuring me a little and is also tying knots in my stomach.
Their destiny is in my hands.
Notes:
And that's it for this week!
Honestly, I've been dying to write this chapter! It's one of my favourites so far because of the rain scene. I have the chills as it plays over and over in my mind. Seventeen's "I Don't Know" helped me a lot in writing the scene, it felt just perfect at the moment! I hope you liked it too and the chapter wasn't too overwhelming or redundant in some of its parts.
What do you think will happen now? What will Jihoon do? Leave your theories in the comments here or on my Curious Cat
Don't forget to check out the on going Soonhoon au on twitter Meet my eyes
With this story, I'll see you next week!!
Thank you so much <3
Chapter 19
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Soonyoung’s point of view
I wake up with a smile plastered on my face and get dressed while humming a happy tune.
What a great day it was yesterday.
I finally got to spend some time with Wonwoo hyung and it was wonderful. My heart wouldn’t stop beating fast, skipping beats from time to time when he smiled and scrunched his nose. He looked really shy at first but then he opened up and it was almost like as if he was another person. Plus, he had been really sweet and considerate to the point he walked me home from Joshua’s car so he could leave a quick peck on my cheek and wish me goodnight. He was perfect until the end of the night. I had troubles falling asleep because of how happy I felt. That’s why I was at the window, looking at the rain and I was Jihoon in the rain. He was staring at my house’s door, looking sad and defeated. That image of him somewhat tugged at my heart and I couldn’t help but run to him with an umbrella. I wish I could do something more for him, to make him wear a pair of dry clothes before sending him off, but knowing him, he would’ve said no without even thinking about it. That’s only because we can’t stand each other but after seeing him like that, I really want to give my best to make things better, to maybe become someone he can confide in and talk to when he feels sad. I know too well how it feels like not having someone to talk to when one of those days hits you.
'I’ll change. I’ll be a better person for me and a better friend for him.'
I nod at myself in the mirror and then go downstairs to have a quick breakfast.
When it’s eight o’clock, Joshua rings at the door. I grab my things and join him to go to school.
“Morning hyung! Today is a wonderful day!” I throw my hands in the air as to welcome the day.
“Morning Soons. Why are you so happy today?” Joshua has that knowing look on his face.
“Nothing in particular, I just woke up in a great mood.”
“I’m happy you’re feeling good but don’t you think it’s a bit too much saying it’s a wonderful day? The sky is grey and it’s cloudy.” He points at the sky.
I look up and see that, indeed, the sky is full of grey clouds and it’s probably going to rain. “Oh, really? I hadn’t noticed.”
“Are you sure nothing happened?”
“Sure.”
“Then, it’s either Jeon Wonwoo has a great effect on you or you hit your head while sleeping and went crazy.”
“Idiot.”
Joshua laughs as I roll my eyes. “You know, I had so much fun yesterday. We should hang out like that again.”
“It would be great.”
“But we have to tell the others, too.”
“Speaking of that, you know, yesterday I saw Jihoon.” I feel like I need to tell Joshua, maybe he knows something I don’t.
“At the mall? Yes, we saw him, too.”
“No, not then.” I put my hands behind my head. “I saw him once again. It was late and he was standing in the rain outside my house. I thought something had happened to him and so I ran out to check on him.”
“Hey, is he getting to that soft spot of yours?” Here he goes again. I want to have a serious talk and he has to mock me.
“Nope. It will take years for that, if not centuries or millennia.” I know I said I want to change but I won’t admit it to Joshua. At least, not now.
“Really?” He’s giggling, clearly not buying it.
“However, he looked a bit down. Did something happen with Chanyeol?”
“I don’t know.”
“Why don’t you try asking him?”
“Why?” Joshua has that annoying smirk and I really hate it.
“Nothing.” I lift my shoulders in a half shrug.
“I know you.” He repeatedly hits my chest with his index. “You want to gossip with Seokmin about it.”
“How did you know?” I play along so he doesn’t find out the real reason behind it.
“You’ll never change, you gossiper!”
We keep laughing and, without even noticing it, we arrive at school. Jihoon is not outside the gates so we both just assume that he’s already in class or somewhere with Chanyeol. Joshua goes to the library and I go to my class.
When I get in there, Jihoon is not at our desk and my mind immediately fills with worries about him catching a cold or even having a high temperature. But it’s not like that or else Joshua would’ve known it, right?
Before going to my seat, I head to Seokmin’s. Yesterday we hadn’t the chance to talk about the night’s events and I want to pry about him and Joshua hyung as the latter, too, didn’t tell me what happened when he was alone with my friend. Basically, the curiosity is eating me alive because I want to know if our plan was a success or not.
“Morning Seok.”
“Morning Soonie.”
“So?” I wiggle my eyebrows and flash him a creepy smile.
“What?”
“How was it yesterday?” I ask, eyebrows still wiggling.
“First of all, why the heck did you leave us alone?” Seokmin punches my arm. “Secondly, amazing.”
“What did you do after the movie?” I crouch and cross my arms on the table so I can prop my chin on there.
“We went drinking some caramel macchiatos and then aimlessly wandered around the mall, talking and laughing.” His ears are reddening as he tells and thinks about his time with Joshua hyung. “Every time our hands brushed, I had shivers running up and down my spine. I don’t want to be delusional but I think he was doing it on purpose. However, as I have already said, It was wonderful.” He hits me again. “I hate and love you at the same time.”
“I was sure about that.” I rub the sore spot on my arm, hinting at him to stop hitting me.
“Yeah but next time, warn me so I don’t panic when I turn around and I can’t find you anymore!” Seokmin aims for the chest this time.
“Where’s the fun in that? And, please, stop hitting me!”
“And you? What did you and Wonwoo hyung do?”
“After we left you at the movie theatre, we went into different shops and tried the cutest or funny items they had. For example, Wonwoo hyung wore a lion hat and suddenly started roaring. Then, we found a photo-booth truck and I convinced him to take a photo. At first, we opted for a serious one but, in the end, we took five and all with silly faces.” I show him a couple of the expressions we pulled for the photos. “While we were walking, we met Jihoon and Chanyeol. We chatted a bit and then joined you to eat pizza. That’s it.”
“What a cute date!” Seokmin coos at me.
“It wasn’t a date.” I feel my cheeks heating and I know that, soon enough, I’m going to look like a tomato.
“But the idea of going on a date with him makes you happy, right?”
“Uh?”
“Your eyes are sparkling and you’re smiling like a complete fool.”
“Really?” I ask while getting myself together and trying to make a blank expression.
“Really. You’re already a fool out of love!”
At that moment, the bell rings and so I reach my seat but not before slapping Seokmin’s arm and subtly giving him the finger.
The teacher walks in and she’s followed by Jihoon. Apparently, he’s not ill but he is pale. I hope for him he hasn’t come here with temperature or a cold.
He sits down next to me and nods in greetings. Not a ‘hi’, not a smile. Nothing at all. He almost didn’t even look at me before taking his notebook out of his bag and taking notes about what the teacher had started explaining.
The morning lessons go by with me glancing at Jihoon from time to time to check if there’s something wrong, if he’s really feeling well. If he had caught me staring, he doesn’t say that, he doesn’t even try to be annoying today and this worries me a lot. Was he in his right mind, he would’ve already mocked me about anything that crossed his mind. At lunchtime too, he goes sitting at Chanyeol’s table even though the latter isn’t here today. He’s there, with his boyfriends’ friends who are now his friends too but he’s not smiling and it’s not like the atmosphere around them is awkward. They usually get along so well and talk a lot but Jihoon is frowning. It’s as if there’s an ongoing fight inside of him from which he cannot snap out of. His body is here but not his mind.
Joshua notices that I’m not really listening to the conversation so he follows my line of sight and his eyes land on Jihoon. He puts down his chopsticks and reaches for m hand to grab it.
“Are you sure you’re not softening?” Joshua says and when, confused, I look at him, he nods his head towards Jihoon’s direction.
“I’m not. It’s just that something feels wrong.” I take my hand out of Joshua’s hold.
“Why do you care so much?”
“I don’t know. It’s just that I have this unsettling feeling inside of me.” I prop my chin on my hand.
“Don’t worry. I’ll talk to him later.” He pats my shoulder. “Now, go back to class. Seokmin already went there.”
“Uh? REALLY?” I look left and right and see that, indeed, Seokmin is not at our table anymore. “WHY DIDN’T HE WAIT FOR ME?” I yell.
“He called you three times but you were too focused on the little boy over there. I told him to go ahead.”
“Woah, I wasn’t too focused on him, okay?” I warn Joshua hyung and he just covers his mouth to giggle. “Since you find it so funny, return my tray too. I’ll get going.”
“I’m not your slave!” I barely hear hyung saying that, too busy on my running to really care about that.
Lessons start again and sleep kicks in as the weather gets more and more gloomy.
Soon, it starts raining and, for a while, I forget about being in class and just stare at the raindrops.
They’re falling, hitting the glass one by one and creating a sort of rhythm, broken by the sudden thunders. Then, I stop and stare at the drops moving on that glass. Most people look at them thinking they’re watching a race to see which drop can reach the bottom first. However, I’ve never seen it as a race. Every couple of drops fall following their path, a parallel path. They’re close enough to see each other but not close enough to reach the other. They keep streaming slowly and fast and then slowly again on that glass. It’s as if one of the two runs ahead but then remembers that it’s not lonely and waits for the other to catch up, to be by their side again. It’s a parallel path, though, and they reach the bottom on their own, alone, without the chance of being with the other drop they’ve grown close to. Some drops, despite starting on parallel paths, stray from their original course, getting the chance to join the other drop and reaching the end as one.
Two parallel lines are not bound to meet but the hopeless romantic residing inside of me believes that those drops are able to defeat such laws because of their need to reach out and touch their loved one.
Drop after drop it’s time for our literature class and it’s at that moment that I get a note from Jihoon.
Soonyoung.
Look who deigned to write me a note.
What?
You have ignored me the whole day.
However, how are you?
Did you catch a cold?
If I did, would I be here?
No, right.
I pass him the piece of paper and inspect his face to see if he’s telling the truth or is lying. He’s busy reading so I thought he wouldn’t have noticed but, of course, that’s not the case.
Don’t look at me like that.
I’m fine, really.
Okay then.
So, did you have fun yesterday?
I may take the chance and ask him myself if there’s any issue with Chanyeol, suspicions raised by the fact he hadn’t shown up at school.
A lot.
It was a lovely date.
What about your date with Wonwoo hyung?
It wasn’t a date!
Joshua hyung and Seokmin were there too, you know it.
As if Wonwoo hyung hadn’t told me you two were alone most of the time.
He told you?
You read it well.
He told me.
So?
Why do you want to know?
Because I’m bored and I want to talk about something.
I will just because I feel like talking to you.
It was a wonderful night, I had so much fun with Wonwoo hyung.
Really?
Really.
I can’t even remember when was the last time I had enjoyed going out with someone who wasn’t Seokmin or Joshua hyung.
Do you perhaps have a crush on him?
Eh?
Wonwoo hyung.
Do you like him?
Be honest.
I don’t have to tell you.
I know and you don’t have to.
It was just to talk.
I read the message and then look at him, remembering what I had promised to myself in the morning. Opening up to him is like straying a bit from my parallel path, is like taking a step forward to him. If I do this, can things really change and reach the point where I can be the friend he seems to be unconsciously needing for?
Yes. I like him.
Since when?
Yesterday?
Actually, it’s been a while.
I see.
Well, I hope everything turns out well for you.
Suddenly, you’re rooting for me?
Did you get caught by my charming presence?
Do you like me, now?
Not at all.
You can go back looking at the rain or whatever you were doing before.
I have nothing more to say to you.
He passes me the paper and then looks at the teacher who was telling the class about an upcoming mock test.
Jihoon went back to ignoring me for the rest of the classes.
When the school day reaches its end, Seokmin and I are the first to leave the class while Jihoon is still sitting at our desk. I’m tempted to stay and ask him why he’s acting like that, but I decide not to.
He wouldn’t tell me, right? He avoided the Chanyeol topic before, plus, I asked Joshua to talk to him.
I’m under the school porch as the sky is basically falling down in the form of rain. Seokmin offered me a ride to go back home but I’m waiting for Joshua to come.
We came on foot and I really hope he had an umbrella at the library or we’ll have to wait for the rain to stop before actually going home. Usually, I bring one of those fold-out umbrellas in my bag but I must’ve forgotten it at home.
It’s starting to get chilly and the uniform is too thin to be out in this kind of weather. I decide to wait for Joshua inside the hall and, as I’m turning around, I bump into someone.
It’s Jihoon.
He had just walked out with the red umbrella I landed him yesterday. He opens it and pushes it towards me.
“Take it. I don’t need it and it’s yours anyway.”
“What do you mean you don’t need it? It’s raining and you don’t have another umbrella.” I push the umbrella towards him.
“Don’t worry, I said I don’t need it.” He shoves the umbrella in my way, hitting my chest with the handle.
“I will wait for the rain to stop. You go home with it or else you’ll get drenched just like yesterday.” I grab his arm and move it so that the umbrella is covering his head.
“Stop worrying about me!” Jihoon shouts. “I told you it’s not a problem so take your stupid umbrella and go home!”
“Why are you mad, now?” I shout back.
“I get mad because you’re this stubborn and don’t listen to what other people say.” He’s not shouting but the volume of his voice is still high enough for other people to hear. In fact, there are few students who are watching our exchange as if it’s a scene from their favourite drama.
“Okay, give me that stupid umbrella.”
I snatch the umbrella from Jihoon’s hold and he walks away in the rain, not looking back.
Shocked by his attitude, I watch his retreating back asking myself if his behaviour had changed or if he had been like this from the start but I hadn’t noticed it until now.
But why does he have to get me worried this much about him?
Jihoon’s point of view
I must calm down.
I must control myself.
I raised my voice in front of Soonyoung and I’ve been acting weird with him the whole day. The fact is that guy riles me up to the point I couldn’t help but explode. He is so fucking stubborn. He worries about me getting drenched when he could’ve been in the exact same situation if he didn’t take that damned umbrella.
Moreover, why does he worry? It’s not like we’re best friends or friends at all. He is the one who keeps saying he can’t stand me but look at what he does. He asks me how I’m doing, he wants me not to walk in the rain, not to catch a cold. He uselessly makes me feel cared about and he doesn’t need to do that. I have a boyfriend who already does that. He will have Wonwoo to care about from now on.
Speaking of which, I have to tell him about Soonyoung having a crush on him so they can start dating and maybe he will stop crossing the line with me, stop making me feel kind of uneasy when I’m around him.
I look up at the sky, eyes half closed so the rain can’t get in my eyes. The weather perfectly reflects how I feel inside. It’s a storm of feelings and thoughts on which I have no control whatsoever.
By the time I get home, I am a mess both inside and outside.
I take a quick shower and get changed as I have to get out again: today is practice day. As I’m drying my hair, the phone buzzes in the pocket of my jeans. I take it out and see that Joshua hyung has texted me.
Joshuji:
Stay home, I’ll fetch you to go to Mingyu’s.
Woozy:
Okay, hyung. I’m ready.
Joshuji:
I just dropped Soonyoung to his house.
I’ll take a shower and be there.
Woozy:
I’ll be waiting for you.
After fifteen minutes since the last text, Joshua arrives and I get in his car so we can go to Mingyu’s.
In the car, Joshua can’t stop tapping his fingers on the wheel. He is nervous and wants to talk about something but he doesn’t know how to get to that topic.
“How are you?”
“I’m fine, why?” I ask back, eyebrows raised in confusion.
“You’re obviously not in your best condition. Did something happen?” Joshua takes his eyes off the road for a second so he could study my expression.
“No?” It comes out more as a question than an affirmation.
“Did you perhaps fight with Chanyeol?” He finally gets to the point. He thought there was some kind of trouble in paradise.
“No, I didn’t.”
“Are you sure? Because if that’s the case, you don’t have to be like that. Fights-”
“We’re okay, I swear.” I interrupt him before he could talk my ear off about the matter. “We’ve been together for two days, why should we be fighting?”
“There are plenty of reasons to fight, especially when you have a partner as jealous as Chanyeol is.”
“We didn’t. It’s just that this sudden change of the weather wore me down a little.” I lie. I can’t help but do that in order to avoid the never-ending questioning that would’ve followed.
“Okay, then. I’m glad it was not a big matter.”
He flashes me one of his warmest smiles and tries to lighten the mood by making weird freestyle rap to some random tunes on the radio. He said it’s something that, lately, Seokmin and he enjoy doing.
At Mingyu’s, it’s basically a disaster.
Every song we practice ends up being repeated at least twice because of my mistakes. I mess up the tempo, I can’t follow the rhythm, I forgot my parts and some of the notes. For some reasons, I can’t seem to focus on music. Drumsticks, that usually fly over the breakables, hardly move to hit the drums and the cymbals at the right time.
After five songs, Seungcheol calls for a break.
“Jihoon, are you okay?” Mingyu comes over, handing me a bottle of water.
“Yes, I am.”
“Are you sure?” Seungcheol drags a chair to where I am sitting on the stool and patting my back. “You don’t usually make mistakes.”
“I know that, hyung. It’s just that today is one of those days.”
“What do you mean?”
“I feel tired and it’s difficult to follow the rhythm and the flow,” I explain with a weak smile tugging at my lips.
“I think we can wrap it up today.” Jeonghan chirps in after eavesdropping the conversation
“Are you sure, hyung? We can keep going, I’ll focus more.”
“Ya! Stressing your body and mind won’t bring any good,” Seungkwan says from where he’s sitting.
“Seungkwan is right.” Seungcheol’s hand moves from my back to my shoulder. He gives a light squeeze before getting up and heading at the centre of the room. “Everyone could use some time to rest. What about taking the rest of the week off and practice again from Monday?”
“I think it’s a good idea. We need to charge our batteries.” Jeonghan joins Seungcheol and gives him a quick peck on the cheek.
“Then, that’s it. Let’s all go home and get some rest!” Seungkwan is already turning off his electric keyboard and ready to gather his things.
“Thank you. You really are the best hyungs.” I give them the most sincere smile I can manage at the moment.
I get up, greet everyone and I was about to walk out of Mingyu’s house when I hear Joshua hyung calling my name.
“Jihoon-ah. Wait for me, I’ll drop you off.”
“You don’t need to, hyung.”
“You’re tired and I forbid you to go home on foot. Plus, we live in the same neighbourhood so I have to go there too.”
“If you say so.”
He grabs his jacket and we leave the house.
In the car, I pretend to be asleep so I can avoid talking. My forehead is leaning on the window glass, it’s coldness being the only thing keeping me awake and not falling in a slumber for real. The trip is quiet and, once we’re in front of my house, Joshua puts his hand on my shoulder and lightly shakes me to wake me up.
I thank him before getting out of the car and wave at him when I’m about to walk inside my house.
The door closes behind me and it’s as if the weight of the day finally falls on me, making my shoulders sag.
I go to my room and fall face first on the bed.
Then, I take my phone and text Wonwoo hyung. I have to tell him what I’ve found out early this day before I completely forget about it.
Woozy:
Wonwoo hyung.
Nonu:
Yes, Jihoon?
Woozy:
Yesterday you told me to find out things about Soonyoung.
Nonu:
Did you find a method to do so?
Woozy:
Actually, everything’s already done.
Nonu:
Really?
Woozy:
Yes but I couldn’t tell you in front of the others.
Nonu:
Oh.
What did he say?
Tell me, quickly.
Woozy:
That he likes you and it’s been a while since he has had a crush on you.
Nonu:
You’re not kidding me, right?
Woozy:
I’m not.
I’m telling you the truth.
Nonu:
I can’t believe it.
Woozy:
Congrats, hyung!
Now, man up and ask him to date you.
Nonu:
I’m so happy!
Of course, I’ll ask him to date me.
Wait.
Did you tell him I like him too?
Woozy:
No.
You’ll be the one telling him that.
Nonu:
You’re the best!
Remind me of treating you to food one of these days!
Woozy:
You don’t have to, hyung.
Nonu:
Of course I have to!
I’ll buy you your favourite kind of meat.
Woozy:
If that makes you happy.
Nonu:
As if it won’t make you and your stomach happy, too.
Woozy:
You’re right hahaha.
Hyung, I feel sleepy so I’ll take a quick nap.
Talk to you later.
Nonu:
Rest and take care of yourself!
I want to see you shining on Monday.
Woozy:
I will be!
I put the phone on the bedside table and close my eyes. I feel like falling asleep out of desperation so I could stop thinking. I feel like wanting to get up when it’s already time to go to school or when at least a week has already gone by. I want to stay for a while with an empty mind and forget about everything and everyone.
I deserve at least that.
Of course, sleep doesn’t come at all. Not that evening nor that night.
It had started raining, again.
The sound of the raindrops is usually a perfect lullaby but not that night.
They are deafening, yelling at me to do something but all they really do is bringing me back to the night before, when I felt lost in the rain to the point of almost crying until he came to stand by my side, his red umbrella being the only bright colour in that dark and gloomy night.
Drop after drop, a melody starts coming into my mind and it’s followed by some words.
I reach for my phone to record that melody and once I’m done with that, I grab my laptop and start writing down some lines, fingers tapping fast on the keys, afraid of forgetting the words if I typed slower than that.
“When this rain falls on my head
I’ll get all wet, even my heart
Stay with me, I still can’t be
In the rain alone without you”
“Will it stop now?
These raindrops, these tears?
I don’t want to
Get wet with rain
And tremble with cold”
“I’m getting all wet right now
I don’t even have the strength to open an umbrella
But we know
Let me just cry for a moment
As I lean on the rain
So you won’t see my sad tears”
“It’s just a passing downpour”
By the time I finish writing my words and feelings down, it’s already four o’clock in the morning.
With a lighter heart, my eyes slowly start closing lulled by this newly created melody which brings a certain red colour within it.
Notes:
I'm sorry I couldn't post this as usual at the end of the week but I was really busy for the past few days and I got to update the story today.
Things seem to be finally changing between our Soonyoung and Jihoon. What do you think will happen now that Soonyoung's starting to open up to Jihoon? Let me know your theories! I really like reading them :D
As always, thank you for reading this and I hope you enjoyed the chapter! I'll try to post the next chapter asap to make up to the long wait for this one <3
Chapter 20
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Soonyoung’s point of view
As I have already said hundreds of times, Saturdays are the best days of the week for me. No alarms going off until you go deaf, no classes to attend, you can get up whenever you want and laze around the whole day.
Yeah, Saturdays are definitely my thing.
It’s ten in the morning when I decided to leave my bed and the first thing I do is opening the curtains, letting the sunrays seep in. It’s a sunny day and I take my time next to the window, liking the warmth spreading across my skin due to the sun.
I didn’t mind the rainy weather of these past days but this one definitely reflects my mood.
Yes, I’m still happy because of the not-really-a-date with Wonwoo hyung two days ago and I guess it’s because I’m totally whipped for him.
I haven’t properly told Seokmin or Joshua about my crush because I wasn’t sure I really liked him but after spending an entire evening with him, I realised that I do feel something for him. Up until today, my love life hasn’t been full of sunshine and rainbows so I was scared. experienced a lot of one-sided crushes.
Then.
Then there was her, the person I’m sure was I sincerely loved .
I first met her back in Japan when I was going through a tough time.
All of my friends started dating at that time. They were all happy with their partners and even if we would hang out together, I felt lonely. They were bringing me with them but they weren’t really with me. Too immersed in their love lives to notice that I was slowly drifting away from their group, sure that I could never experience what they were having at that moment.
Love.
All of those past crushes lead me to think I probably wasn’t worth any attention.
One day, though, I saw her. She came to greet one of my friends and the sparkle immediately ignited the fire. We got along so well, we became like best friends in just two weeks. But we knew, there was something else laying behind our smiles, our laughs, our jokes, our teasing and our hugs. When we were together, it felt like the rest didn’t matter, we were the only one that mattered right there and we felt like we could be our true selves. All of our friends told us we looked like a couple and we were close to becoming one.
However, another boy got in the way, someone who seemed to be better than I was considering that I had never seen her ever again after the day she told me we should’ve stopped being friends.
My heart broke the first time I saw them together; it shattered while watching her smiling like she used to do with me; it crushed under the weight of the infinite questions and what ifs popping into my mind; it wrecked as I felt like a fool for trusting her and believing that I was special to her, someone who she didn’t want to make suffer.
Indeed, I suffered. I suffered a lot because of her.
I didn’t feel like leaving the house anymore.
I didn’t want to meet my friends or spend time with my family.
I didn’t want to see things that would’ve reminded me of her.
I didn’t want to sleep, too afraid of seeing her in my dreams and wake up crying because of how much I missed her.
I didn’t want to do anything at all, I just wanted to laugh and smile with her again.
Luckily for me, my parents got transferred that same year so leaving Japan, helped healing the wound. I started a new life, met new people. I befriended Seokmin and Joshua with whom I immediately clicked and we became a great trio.
I feel better? Of course, I do.
Did I stop thinking about her? No, I didn’t.
The memory of her started fading but it never really left. On lonely and sad nights, when I least expect it to happen, my wound would open and flood my mind with the moments spent together, the touches, the words whispered to each other, our parting. Needless to say that, because of her, I was afraid of falling in love again and go through that pain over again. It’s unbearable. You feel like suffocating and no matter how much you breathe, air never really fills your lungs. It’s scary how heartbreaks can leave you this breathless, how it makes your heart ache. No unrequited crush can compete with the pain left by her.
In the first case, you get over it rather quickly as the other person hasn’t that kind of feelings for you and maybe you weren’t really into them.
In the second case, you can’t get over it, no matter how long you wait for the pain to go away. Knowing that the other person had feelings for you, they felt the same as you did but then disappeared, that just tears your heart apart. It makes you wonder what kind of future would you have had if things went differently, if she didn’t put an end to it, if you grabbed her hand and didn’t let her go.
However, the past is in the past and we cannot do something about it. We have to learn from this kind of experience and grow up, become stronger, hoping the pain won’t numb you to the point of not feeling anything at all.
I thought I was surrendering to the idea of never falling in love again but then I met Wonwoo and something inside me says that things may be different with him, that he’s not like her, that I shouldn’t push him away because he makes me feel safe and happy and I want to keep feeling like this.
My thoughts are suddenly interrupted by the notification sound coming from my phone. I leave my spot next to the window to grab the device I had put on my desk. I check the notification and see that it’s Joshua hyung.
Joshuji:
Morning, Soons!
Hoshiya:
Hyung!
Why are you already up?
Joshuji:
I could ask you the same thing.
Did you fell from your bed?
Hoshiya:
No, but I fell asleep pretty early yesterday.
What about you?
Joshuji:
Same.
Yesterday our practices ended early and we won’t have any until Monday.
Hoshiya:
Why?
Joshuji:
We thought it was better to take a break and rest.
Hoshiya:
I’m glad you did!
You don’t have to overwork yourselves.
Joshuji:
Yeah and we now have a free weekend!
Hoshiya:
After a whole month.
Joshuji:
Do you know what this means?
Hoshiya:
What?
Joshuji:
That tonight we’ll hang out!
Hoshiya:
Where are we going?
Playing bowling?
Joshuji:
What about eating some sushi?
Hoshiya:
Sounds perfect to me!
It’s you, me and Seokmin?
Joshuji:
Well, Wonwoo and Seungkwan are tagging along.
My eyes go wide and I feel my legs giving up on me. Thank God, my butt landed on the bed.
Hoshiya:
Really?
Joshuji:
Yup.
They haven’t anything scheduled for the weekend so I thought it would be cool to have them joining us.
I almost squealed out loud after reading the text and I have to bury my face in the pillow sitting beside me to prevent any noise from leaving my mouth.
Hoshiya:
You did amazing!
Joshuji:
How come?
Hoshiya:
Uhm because we get to spend some time together and our group has grown bigger, duh.
Joshuji:
Are you sure there isn’t another reason other than that?
Hoshiya:
Yup. Sure!
Joshuji:
Ah, before I forget it, I talked to Jihoon yesterday.
Hoshiya:
And?
Joshuji:
He said there’s no problem with Chanyeol.
He felt a bit down because he’s tired.
Hoshiya:
That could explain why he was cranky.
Joshuji:
What do you mean?
Hoshiya:
While I was waiting for you after school, he came to me to return my umbrella.
I told him to keep it because it was still raining and he could’ve caught a cold.
He raised his voice saying that I had to stop worrying about him.
Joshuji:
He really did that?
It’s weird.
Hoshiya:
I know, right?
He was weird but I bet it could be because of the tiredness.
I am like that too when I don’t manage to sleep for days.
Hope he rests.
Joshuji:
Are you sure you hate him?
Because, lately, it doesn’t look like it.
I shuffle on the bed, not knowing what to answer since I feel like it’s still too soon to tell Joshua that I’m giving Jihoon a chance.
Hoshiya:
I’m sure.
My only concern is that if he’s ill he can’t join the practice and you can’t have any gig.
Joshuji:
What a thoughtful boy we have here.
Hoshiya:
I’ve always been like this.
Joshuji:
Yeah, sure…
Hoshiya:
...I don’t even want to answer you.
Joshuji:
But you just did.
However, what you’re up to?
Hoshiya:
I’m about to lay on my couch and binge some old dramas.
What about you?
Joshuji:
I’m going shopping with Mingyu.
Hoshiya:
Oh, how come?
Joshuji:
Nothing in particular.
Hoshiya:
Are you sure there isn’t another reason other than that?
Maybe because you want to dress up for someone named Lee Seokmin.
Joshuji:
That’s not true!
Hoshiya:
Bullshit!
You know you can’t lie to me.
Joshuji:
I could say the same thing to you Mr I-Have-A-Big-Fat-Crush-On-Jeon-Wonwoo.
Hoshiya:
How do you know that?
Joshuji:
You’re like an open book to me.
I can read it on your face and when someone mentions his name, you light up.
Hoshiya:
Are you for real?
Joshuji:
Yup. You’re pretty obvious.
Hoshiya:
Do you think he noticed it?
Joshuji:
Considering how dense he can be, I doubt that.
However, I figured that out just because I know you too well.
Hoshiya:
The same goes for me.
So, when do you plan to tell him?
Joshuji:
Tell Wonwoo you like him?
Hoshiya:
WHAT?
DO NOT DO THAT OR ELSE I’LL CUT YOUR TONGUE AND FINGERS!
I meant when do you plan to confess to Seokmin?
Joshuji:
Not now, I’m not psychologically ready.
Hoshiya:
You need to hurry up!
If you waste too much time it could be too late.
Joshuji:
I want to wait for the right time.
Hoshiya:
If you say so.
Joshuji:
Soons, I got to go.
Mingyu is almost here.
Hoshiya:
Tell him I said hi and don’t buy anything too classy for tonight hahaha
Joshuji:
How funny, ha ha ha.
See you later!
I’ll pick you up at 8:30 and then we’ll go fetching Seokmin.
Hoshiya:
Okay, hyung!
See you later!
I return to the home screen of my phone only to open the messaging app again to send a text to Seokmin. Knowing Joshua, he forgot to tell Seokmin about tonight’s plan so I have to tell him before I forget too.
After sending the text, my mind goes not really straight to Wonwoo. He will be there, too. I can’t stop smiling at the thought of spending another night with him. I can already feel that familiar knot tying at the mouth of my stomach, panicking about what to wear and how I should act around him.
When I check the time, I see that’s half past ten and I manage to calm down as I have plenty of time to choose my outfit. It’s better to keep my mind distracted for a bit so I bring my laptop downstairs, throw myself on the couch and start my marathon.
It’s almost seven o’clock when I turn off my computer. The morning and afternoon went by faster than expected so it’s already time to get ready, which means it’s time to officially panic. I’m home alone since my parents went to the mall after lunch, meaning I won’t have mom teasing me as she sees her son running around the house like a madman who’s about to lose his mind over what clothes should he wear. But it also means I can freely play music using the speakers.
I take a shower and as I do so, I ride the rhythm of the song and even held a mini-concert in the bathroom.
Drying my hair takes more than it should as I get lost in my thoughts and use the hairdryer to warm my body, too.
After that, I walk in my room to get dressed and I really don’t know what to wear. I take a shirt and a jacket but I reckon it would be too classy for a hangout. I think about wearing a plain white shirt with a tie but it would’ve been too much. In the end, I go for an oversized grey t-shirt with a “new wave” red stamp on the left. The shirt is half tucked in a pair of blue jeans ripped on the knees which had a belt/band around his right thigh. I put on the feet a pair of black Chelsea boots and I’m done!
I check the me reflecting in the mirror and I almost whistle at how look I good right now. I’m really dressed to impress but without exaggerating. I’m proud of myself.
I grab my phone to check for any incoming message and see that’s almost eight o’ clock. I need to hurry up if I want to put some makeup on: just a bit of foundation, eye-shadow and eye-liner. When I’m done with that, I hurriedly reach the bathroom to grab my perfume and spray a bit of it around the neck zone, hoping the scent is one Wonwoo likes. I check to see if I got all of my belongings with me and go to the kitchen to leave a post-it to my parents.
"To mom or dad or whoever reads it.
I’m going out with Joshua and Seokmin so I’ll be late tonight.
Don’t stay up waiting for me. I’ll bring my kyes.
Goodnight xoxo"
After sticking the note on the fridge, I decide to wait for Joshua outside since he will be here in two minutes anyway.
Indeed, two minutes in the chilly night air and Joshua is here, stopping his car in my driveway so I can get in.
Wonwoo and Seungkwan are already with him. The latter is in the front seat, the one I usually sit in that’s why I knock on the window and motion him to get down so I could sit there but Seungkwan is blatantly ignoring me. I can turn my hand to owt, Joshua planned this. He threatened convinced Seungkwan with his evil lovely smile to ignore me so I would go sitting next to Wonwoo.
‘Great. They want me to die before we even get to the restaurant.’
As I open the door to climb in the back seats, I feel the knot in my stomach tighten even more. Wonwoo looks dazzling. The warm yellow light coming from the lamppost created a sort of aura around him. It felt like I was looking at a real angel who was smiling at me.
I ignore the how the other two are looking at us with that knowing gaze of theirs and finally get in the car.
“Hi, guys!” I greet all of them as I close the car’s door.
“Hi, Soonie!” Seungkwan turns around just to flash me a smile, one that makes his cheeks go all the way up.
“Hi.” Wonwoo is suddenly shy, ducking his head and playing with the hem of his shirt.
“Is Seokmin ready?” Joshua asks while starting the car up.
“Yup, he’s waiting for us.”
“Let’s go then!”
The trip to Seokmin’s house would’ve been silent if it wasn’t for Seungkwan singing all the songs getting played on the radio, hitting those high notes just perfectly even when it was a song in a female key. When we’re in front of our friend’s house and Seokmin comes out of the door, Joshua whispers something in Seungkwan’s ear. The latter nods and gets out of the car only to join Wonwoo and me at the back, letting Seokmin sit next to Joshua.
Those two really plotted something against me.
Not that I don’t like being squeezed next to Wonwoo but I’m having a breakdown. I’m too aware of the points in which my body touches Wonwoo’s and it’s making me going crazy, my heart almost bursting out of my chest.
We arrive at the Japanese restaurant with Seokmin and Seungkwan having bickered over what kind of sushi they should eat at dinner, Joshua enjoying the show those two put up, Wonwoo looking outside the window while I tried to distract my mind from the warmth radiating from Wonwoo’s body next to mine. I swear, I’m going to kill Joshua sooner or later.
After parking the car, we all climb out and when it’s my turn Wonwoo keeps the car door open for me. He does the same with the restaurant one. I can’t help but give him a shy smile, happy about this little gesture.
Once we’re inside, the waitress leads us to the table Joshua had apparently booked that morning. Seokmin and I sit next to each other with Joshua and Seungkwan right across from us. Wonwoo, on the other hand, is sitting between Seungkwan and me, chair dangerously shuffling close to mine. I wonder if he did that on purpose or just to have a better look of Seungkwan and Joshua while talking to them.
We order our food, everyone is naming almost twenty different dishes per person and it seems as if we’ve been starving for days. The moment the waiter leaves, however, we immediately regret the amount of food we picked. There’s the five of us but we ordered enough to feed an army.
Knowing it would take a while to get the main dishes, we ordered some shrimp puffs to munch on, which arrive rather quickly. As soon as the baskets are placed on the table, Wonwoo and I reach, at the same time, for the one close to us and I end up grabbing his little finger instead of one of the puffs. Realising what happened, we lock eyes and shyly giggle.
“You first,” Wonwoo says, retracting his hand once I loosen the grip from his pinky.
“Thank you.” I grab the puff and smile at him after biting it.
“You shouldn’t do that, Wonwoo. You have to be quick if you want to eat some.” Joshua takes a couple of puffs from the basket before him. “Soonyoung is able to make them disappear in less than a second.”
“That’s not true!” I whine.
“Every time we come here, I have to fight you to eat two shrimp puffs. I’m not exaggerating.”
I stick my tongue out at him and then pout. Joshua, as if to dare me, reaches for my our basket and takes three shrimp puffs.
“I let you take them only because I like you, hyung,” I say through clenched teeth, trying to be as kind as possible with my words.
“Thanks.” Joshua shares the stolen puffs with Seokmin when suddenly glances at Seungkwan who’s too busy texting to join the conversation. “Seungkwan, who are you texting?”
“Jihoon,” the blondie answers still looking at his phone screen.
“Is he resting?”
“I don’t think so.” Seungkwan glances at us and notices that we’re all staring at him, waiting for an explanation. “He told me Chanyeol insisted on going on a date so he’s getting ready to meet him.”
“He should be resting though,” Wonwoo says as he plays with his chopsticks. “He didn’t look too well yesterday.”
“I know, right? Jihoon is not the type to make that many mistakes,” Seungkwan grabs his first shrimp puff and examines it before eating it. “He’s usually the one who scolds us for not being focused.”
“What if he’s sick but doesn’t want you to know?” I suddenly ask.
“Sick?” Seungkwan asks back, confused.
“Yeah. The other day, I caught him walking in the rain without an umbrella and he did the same yesterday, too.”
“Knowing him, he would hide the truth so we don’t worry about him.” Wonwoo rubs his chin, probably thinking about another time Jihoon did hide something from them.
I wish I didn’t know this because, now, I’m even more worried than I was before. What if he lied to them, to me? What if he’s really sick? What if he faints on the street due to high fever? But most importantly, why does he feel the need of hiding this kind of things from his friends? I bet it’s because he doesn’t want to feel like a burden to them, doesn’t want them to feel like they have to help him.
Thinking this may really be the reason why he pushes people away when in need of help, makes me want to do something, to let him know he’s not a burden at all. This whole situation makes me wish I could be a friend with whom he can be comfortable, talk about his problem and seek for help if he needs it. I want to be that kind of friends if he lets me and I’ll try my best to convince him that he can open up to me.
I didn’t realise I was lost in my thoughts so I almost jump from my seat when the waitress from before places the dishes full of sushi on our table. As she does so, we all stare in silence at the food being placed before us, already drooling at the sight.
“Soonyoung, are you okay? You were spacing out,” Joshua asks after nodding at the waitress to thank her.
“Yes, sure. I was only thinking about how hungry I am.” I try to give him my most convincing smile so he won’t ask more questions.
“What are we waiting for, then? Let’s eat!” Seungkwan yells the last words and the old couple sitting beside us shushes him, reprimanding him of being too loud.
It’s funny to see Seungkwan repeatedly bowing to the elders to apologise. As we try not to laugh and get scolded too, we dig in it the food.
If an hour ago we thought the food we ordered was too much, we realised that it wasn’t enough. Ashamed of the capacity of our stomachs, we order some more of sushi. While waiting for the food and then eating it, we share some funny stories, we talk about some upcoming Netflix series and now-famous groups.
“I’m pretty sure that Jeonghan’s bitches is soon going to be a top group too,” I say.
“You’re so good!” Seokmin agrees.
“Do you really think that?” Seungkwan asks with sparkling eyes.
“Of course, or else we wouldn’t have said that.”
“You’re the best fans one could ask for, for real.” The blondie wipes a fake tear.
“We’ll be the ones to create the official fan club!” Seokmin looks at me, already excited at the idea.
I nod. “I can’t bring myself to imagine the number of people joining it.” I use my chopsticks to point at no one in particular and say, “Everyone would like to be a fan of seven talented and handsome boys like you.”
“Are we handsome?” Wonwoo asks, his lips slowly forming a smirk.
I turn my face away, not being able to hold his gaze. “Uhm...yes.”
“Your ears are getting red!” Joshua sing-songs and points at my ears.
“Don’t say it, hyung! They’ll get even redder!” Seokmin slaps Joshua’s hand. He then turns towards me with this mischievous look on his face. “There’s no need to get shy, though, right?”
Wow, I’m being betrayed by him too, now! “I t-think so?”
“Cute.”
Wonwoo whispers and it probably wasn’t meant for me to hear but I eventually do. I slowly turn my head towards him, eyes wide due to the shock, and he realises I heard him. He immediately averts my gaze, looking at his hands resting on his lap. His cheeks are flushing, too.
He said I’m cute.
Wonwoo said it, I didn’t imagine it.
My heart skips a beat, as if it stumbled, only to run faster than it has ever done since I’ve met the black-haired guy sitting next to me. I have to get myself together before he can feel uneasy due to the intensity of my stare and before I actually start squealing.
“Ehm...I’m sorry, I need to use the toilet,” I say while bolting up, chair screeching on the floor. “Seokmin, do you want to come with me?”
“Uh?” Seokmin is quite lost, not understanding why I am suddenly asking him to join me in the bathroom. I have no choice but shooting him the ‘save-me look’. He seems to catch it because he stands up, too. “Sure!”
We smile at them, reassuring them we’ll be quick. The moment I turn my back, I almost run for the toilet.
Once I’m in the bathroom and I’m sure Seokmin is in too, I close the door and lean all of my body on it, eyes closed and taking deep breaths.
“Soonyoung, is everything okay?” The concern in Seokmin’s voice makes me open my eyes.
“No, I think I’m about to pass out.” I rush to the sink and look at myself in the mirror. The redness has spread not only all over my face but to my neck, too.
‘Great. He must’ve taken me as a fool.’
“Eh? What? Why?” Seokmin grabs my shoulder and turns me around a little so he can inspect my face, eyes hurriedly looking for hints about what’s happening to me.
I take the hand Seokmin has on my shoulder and take a deep breath. “I heard Wonwoo calling me cute.”
“REALLY?” He squeals and when a boy leaves one of the cubicles in the bathroom, he realises there may be other people in the room with them so he whispers again, “Really?”
“Yes! He said it thinking I wouldn’t hear him. However, I did and blushed when he noticed it.”
“That’s a good sign, isn’t it?” Seokmin lightly slaps my arm. “Could it mean that he likes you too?”
“I don’t think so, but I know that I was about to faint right there.”
“You’re so dramatic!” He rolls his eyes but the smile on his face grows wider. “How do you feel now?”
“On cloud nine! I have butterflies in my stomach and my head feels so light!”
“Ah, young love.” He sighs.
“Don’t even start it.”
He laughs. “Okay, tiger. Now, let’s go back to our table. They might be thinking we escaped from the window or something like that.”
“You’re right. Let me get myself together and then we can go,” I say as I spray some cold water on my wrists, hoping it helps at lowering my temperature and make the blush disappear. “I have to act like a normal person again and not like someone who nearly had a heart attack because of his crush.”
Seokmin laughs and taps my shoulder to encourage me. I laugh too definitely feeling calmer than before.
As he makes his way to the door, I look at my reflection in the mirror to fix some rebellious strands. Before stepping out of the bathroom, I take a deep breath. The boys’ gazes are on us all the time it takes to reach our table.
“Are you okay? We thought somebody kidnapped you,” Joshua says to both of us but he’s looking at Seokmin.
“Or that you ran away using the window,” Seungkwan says. “They do that in movies.”
“Seokmin knew you would’ve said that.” I try not to laugh at how proud Seokmin looks at this very moment.
“So predictable,” he says with a smug which irritates Seungkwan.
The two start bickering and the rest of us bursts out laughing at how childish those two can be.
When the two children stop yelling at each other thanks to the intervention of Wonwoo, we pay the check and leave the restaurant, apologising for being too loud.
We’re all walking to the car, contently rubbing our bellies because of full we are. To be honest, we had originally planned to eat some ice cream after the sushi but I guess we gave up on that by a silent mutual agreement. I think we’re all sure that if we try to put one more thing in our stomach, we might explode.
Not changing our original seats arrangement, we climb in Joshua’s car and go dropping Seokmin to his house since both Wonwoo and Seungkwan will be sleeping at Joshua’s.
On the way back to our neighbourhood, with (finally for my sanity) a gap between us, Wonwoo and I steal glances while the other doesn’t look. It goes like that for the entire trip and I know it because I caught him a couple of times while looking into the rearview mirror.
We arrive at Joshua’s house and I’m ready to bid my goodbye when hyung stops me.
“Where do you think you’re going?”
“Home?” Mine, of course, is a rhetorical question.
“Not alone.”
“Again? My house is literally there.” I point at it.
“I know, but it’s late and something dangerous could happen,” Joshua says as he closes the car’s door and locks it.
“The only danger is in your head, hyung.”
He ignores me and turns to Wonwoo. “Wonwoo, why don’t you walk Soonyoung home? Seungkwan and I will start heading in and arrange the living room for the night.”
“Okay, hyung,” Wonwoo says and then looks at me, shyly smiling. “Do you have any problem with that, Soonie?”
“Uh? Uhm..n-no problem at a-all.” I stutter and it’s not because he called me Soonie, not at all.
Right now, I’m smiling at him but I want to punch Joshua. I want to punch that grin away and next time I see him, I’ll make sure to do that.
Nevertheless, I wish him a good night as well as Seungkwan. Then, I turn around and find Wonwoo already waiting for me.
He makes a gesture with his hand, wanting me to show the way for my house so I start walking. I can’t bring myself to look at him but I can feel him next to me. We’re walking slowly, at a matching pace and in silence but it’s the comfortable kind of silence. It’s like we want to enjoy this alone time we have and take in every moment of it. We look around us, then at the sky and breathe in the night air. As we do that, hands lightly brushing in the little space between our bodies, I wish it would take longer to get to my house. I wish I could stay longer by his side, glancing at his profile lighted by the streetlights and the moonlight.
When we stop in front of my door, Wonwoo stands there, rocking back and forth on his heels. He looks at me and then at his shoes, suddenly feeling shy.
“I hope you had fun tonight.”
“I did. It’s always good to spend time with you.” When I realise what my words could imply, I quickly correct them and, of course, I stutter. “I m-mean, with all of y-you.”
He chuckles and I mentally facepalm because of how dumb I am. “I had fun too. Your company always puts me in a good mood. I mean, you, Seokmin and Seungkwan make a great trio.”
“Apparently, the three of us share one brain cell when we’re together.” What? I already have made a fool out of myself so why not going all the way?
“So who gets that brain cell when you part like now?”
“I don’t know, but I guess it’s not me.”
“Yeah, I think so too.” He immediately agrees, nodding his head.
“Hyung!”
“What? You had it coming.” He laughs, amused by my offended expression.
“Guess you’re right. I had to expect it.” I laugh too, rubbing my nape.
He keeps smiling, nose scrunched up and eyes almost disappearing in two thin lines. Right at this moment, with this light shining on him, in this chilly air, under this night sky, I decide that I would like to make a fool out myself hundreds, no thousands of times if it meant seeing him look like this, if it meant being able to hear that melodic laughter of his.
“I hadn’t a chance to tell you before but you look good, hyung,” I say with a confidence I didn’t know I had and that could maybe ruin the moment we were having two seconds ago.
“Thanks. You look great, too. Even better than I do.” Wonwoo whispers the last few words so I’m not quite sure if I heard him correctly.
“That’s impossible, hyung. You’re better-looking than me.”
“Well, to me, you’re more handsome than anyone else.”
I freeze on the spot, staring at him, mouth slightly agape. He isn’t looking at me, too focused on playing with his fingers.
‘Did I hear wrong? Did he really say what he has just said?’
I start feeling hot and I know I’m becoming an overripe tomato. “T-thank you. Do you really think that?”
‘Dumb question, Soonyoung!’
“Yes, I do.” He takes a pause and a deep breath before adding, “Also, I need to tell you something.”
“What is it?”
“It’s been a while since I’ve wanted to tell you but I wasn’t sure, I couldn’t muster my courage up until now.”
For the first time since we complimented each other, he lifts his head, eyes focused on me. I’m glad to see that his cheeks are flushed, too.
“I like you, Soonyoung.” The volume of his voice so low I could barely catch it. As I stay silent, he goes on and says, “At first, I thought I liked you as a friend, so in the same way I like Joshua hyung and the others but I was wrong. The more I got to see you, the more I could feel that something felt different. When I realised it, I couldn’t help but look forward to the times you would come over to watch our rehearsals. I hoped we could hang out too just like it happened the other day at the mall. You know, it was one of the best moments of my life and it gave me the courage to confess.”
The moment Wonwoo stops talking, silence envelopes us for a moment. “I must say I’m taken aback,” I manage to say but I’m not quite sure how.
I feel like the world is spinning around me, my light feeling super light and I’m sure I might float away if I don’t grab something that can keep my feet attached to the ground. My mind is in complete, utter chaos as it’s still trying to make sense out of Wonwoo’s words, still trying to make sure this is the reality and not just a dream. My heart is jumping, racing, skipping beats and it’s leaving me breathless.
“Why?” Wonwoo’s eyes are shaking, afraid I might be rejecting him.
“Because I can’t believe this is happening for real. Don’t get me wrong, it’s a good thing because I like you too.” The moment those words leave my mouth, Wonwoo relaxes and his face glows in happiness, his smile wider than I’ve ever seen it. “You may not believe it but you are the first one who made me feel like this after a long time.” With newfound courage, I reach out to take his hand. “Every time I’m next to you my heart races, butterflies fly around my stomach and I feel like I’m able to do anything, even the impossible.”
Wonwoo gets closer and pulls me towards him using the fact I’m holding his hand to his advantage. When I bump into his chest, he softly wraps his arms around me. Shocked by his sudden move, I don’t immediately hug him back but when I do, I can hear him contently sigh over my shoulder. I bury my head under his chin and try holding onto his shirt as I feel my legs shaking. We stay like that for what it feels like hours, already comfortable in each other’s arms and enjoying the warmth our joint bodies emanate.
“I’m so happy,” I whisper against his skin.
“Me too.” Wonwoo sighs again and tightens his hold around me.
“I still can’t believe it. Are you sure I didn’t fell asleep in the car and this is only a dream?”
“It’s not, trust me.”
“Thank God, then!” I exclaim and I can hear his laughter reverberate in his chest.
“Tomorrow, I have a surprise for you,” Wonwoo says, pulling away from the hug to look at me in the eyes.
“Another one? I don’t think it can beat this one, though.”
“I’ll come here at eight.”
“Why?”
“We’ll hang out. You and I.” He hesitates a bit before saying, “Our first date.”
God, the way he says it sends shivers down my spine and I can’t stop the smile that’s now blooming on my lips. “Can’t wait for it.”
“Now, head in. It’s late and we don’t want Joshua hyung annoying us about this, right?”
“Right. I wouldn’t stand it because he will be even worse than us when he’ll finally have the guts to confess to Seokmin.”
“Oh, he definitely will be worse.” Wonwoo chuckles and the way he’s smiling makes me unable to end this moment, unable to get inside of my house. “Goodnight, Soonie.”
“Goodnight, hyung.”
Wonwoo hugs me again and leaves a kiss on my forehead before taking some steps back, putting some distance between us. For a moment, I thought he was about to leave but he’s waiting for me to go inside.
I grab my keys and turn around to unlock the door. When I step in and face him again, there’s, suddenly, a bolt of lightning and it’s like Wonwoo’s image shifts for a couple of seconds, giving me the feeling of a déjà-vu. I swear I could see Jihoon with my red umbrella under the rain, a smile tugging at his lips as he waited for me to get inside my house. In hopes I hadn’t frozen on the spot, I wave at Wonwoo before closing the door.
Why does Jihoon have to pop up in my mind in a moment like this?
Shaking my head to get rid of his image, I run upstairs, trying not to be loud and wake my parents up. Once I’m safe and sound, surrounded by the walls of my room, I quickly remove my makeup and change into my pyjamas before throwing myself on the bed, still not quite believing that Wonwoo and I are going on a date tomorrow.
Wonwoo and I.
Wonwoo, the boy with a cute smile, and I.
I pinch my arm for a reality check and curse at myself because of the pain but I smile immediately after.
It’s real.
I could totally open the window and scream out loud how happy I am if it wasn’t that my parents are asleep and Wonwoo could hear it from Joshua’s house.
At that time, my phone vibrates.
DonkeyKong:
Are you alive? Are you home?
Hoshiya:
I’m in my bed.
See you tomorrow morning?
DonkeyKong:
Same place, same time.
Hoshiya:
Alright! Goodnight!
DonkeyKong:
Goodnight!
I can’t wait to tell Seokmin about what happened tonight and see his reaction at the news of me and Wonwoo dating. I was about to put my phone away when I remember I should threaten a certain someone.
Hoshiya:
You’re dead meat.
Joshuji:
Goodnight to you too, Soonyoung.
I hope you liked the little surprise.
Hoshiya:
I did but you’ll still die because of it.
You’re warned.
Joshuji:
I’m already shaking out of fear.
Hoshiya:
HA HA HA
I set the alarms for the morning and lock the screen before putting my phone on the bedside table.
The whole night I keep turning left and right, not being really able to sleep as I feel too giddy. I replay the scene before my eyes over and over again until, at some point, Wonwoo’s laugh becomes a sort of lullaby helping me sleeping and having sweet dreams.
I really can’t wait to see what happens tomorrow.
Notes:
I know Soonwoo wasn't what you were expecting but, trust me, we need this for the storyline hahahaha
What do you think about this chapter? Let me know in the comments, on my CC
or on my twt
I'm sorry this took a while but chapters keep getting longer and life getting busier. I think I won't have a regular schedule until the 4th May but I'll make sure to post asap!!
In the meantime, I wrote my first Meanie/Minwon one-shot! I'll leave it here if you want to check it out! Game Over (Give Up?)
Thank you so much for reading this and sticking with me!! See you at the next update!!
Chapter 21
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
The alarm goes off at nine in the morning and for the first time in a while, I don’t feel like snoozing it and sleep five minutes more.
Actually, I woke up earlier than I usually do on the weekend and I know it’s due to the excitement for tonight. From the moment I open my eyes, I can’t stop thinking about how Wonwoo’s arms felt around me yesterday and how much I want to feel them again.
I get up and open the curtains and the window’s doors to let some light and fresh air in the room. It’s chilly but it’s still a sunny day.
When I climb down the stairs to head in the kitchen and have a quick breakfast, I see my parents in the living room. They’re both sitting on the couch, my mom’s watching the tv while my dad’s reading the newspaper. I run in the kitchen to grab a bowl and put some milk and cereals before joining them on the couch.
“Good morning!” I sing-song, plopping beside my mom.
“Good morning!” Her eyes go wide for a second in fear I might spill the content of the bowl all over the couch. “How come you’re not sleeping in today?”
“I have to meet Seokmin in a while.”
“Don’t come back too late, today we have guests for lunch and I need a little help with the cooking,” She says as she cards a hand through my hair.
“Okay, lovely mommy,” I purr, relishing in her touch.
“Soonie, are you okay?” Dad worriedly asks, looking up from his newspaper.
“Yeah, why?”
“You just said ‘lovely mommy’ and last time you called her like that was when you were ten!” He legit looks scared.
“Really? I didn’t notice.”
“You’re acting weird…” Dad is about to add something when he gets cut off by mom.
“By the way, how was the night?”
“Amazing,” I declare between a spoonful of cereals and another. “We ate sushi after months.”
“You, Seokmin and Joshua?”
“Well, there were also two friends of Joshua hyung. Wonwoo and Seungkwan.” I look at the spoon in the bowl for a couple of seconds, waiting for my dad’s reaction that it’s soon to come.
“Wonwoo and Seungkwan?” He, in fact, asks, putting aside his newspaper so he can completely focus on me.
“Yes.”
“Why don’t I know them?” He is sitting on the edge of the couch, elbows leaning on his thighs and hands intertwined under his chin.
“Because they’re Joshua’s friends.” I gulp down the milk left in the bowl before adding, “I’ve met them around a month ago.”
“I need to meet them. I want to know with whom my son is hanging out.”
I put the empty bowl on the coffee table before my mom and me and wail my hands in the air to stop dad from thinking whatever he’s thinking. “You don’t need to meet them, I can already assure you they’re good guys. They’re Joshua’s friends after all and you know how’s he like.”
“Soonie is right,” Mom chimes in, ready to help me persuading dad from planning something that will embarrass me for the rest of my life. “You know Joshua is a good boy and doesn’t have any bad influence.”
“I won’t trust them until I meet them.” He leans back on the couch, still not wanting to let go of the matter.
That’s why is mom the one who smoothly changes the topic.
“Now you know from whom you take after when it comes to stubbornness,” She says as she turns her head towards me, moving her hand in between my father and me as if it wasn’t obvious from her words who she was talking about.
“I’m not stubborn!” I cry out.
“Yes, you are.”
I puff my cheeks and pout in fake annoyance until my mom shuffles closer and ruffles my hair. I flash her a big smile and she does the same.
“Oh, right.” I regain my composure in a second. “Tonight, I will go out again, around eight.”
“Where are you going? With whom?” He’s at it again.
“I don’t know. With Joshua. You don’t need to worry!” I answer both of his questions, lying about going out with Wonwoo for obvious reasons. He would not let me live if I told him I have a date and will insist on letting Wonwoo in the house only to interrogate him. “Now, I’m going to get ready or I’ll be late and Seokmin will kill me.” I bolt away from the living room before dad could even elaborate another question in his head.
I put the empty bowl in the sink and run upstairs to get dressed. When I’m done, I grab my phone and wallet and rush out of the house.
Of course, I’m close to being late and that’s why I sprint, trying to be as fast as possible and hoping Jihoon isn’t around so I won’t waste more time. You know, apparently I the only person I end up bumping into when I run it’s him, the reason why I hope he’s home.
When I’m near “Coffee & Goodpie” and checked that I’m not too late, I slow down so I can start catching my breath.
At that moment, I realise there’s someone walking towards me with a big smile plastered on the face and that someone is Jihoon.
“Habits are hard to break, am I right?”
Obviously, it’s a sarcastic question but I still give him a serious answer, “I was running late.”
“I would never have guessed.” He smirks and I can already feel the urge of fighting him arise “Well, at least, you didn’t crush into someone.”
“That’s because you weren’t around.” I cross my arms over my chest and shift my weight from a leg to another. “This proves that the absent-minded one was you and not me.”
“As if that was possible.” He scoffs, slightly irritated by the truth of my statement. “Where are you going, by the way?”
“Coffee & Goodpie to meet Seokmin.” The usual me would stop the conversation here, but I’m trying to be a better friend for him and that’s why I ask, “What about you?”
“I was jogging in the park and then bought my black coffee.” Jihoon looks at his surroundings and points towards the nearby park.
“Weren’t you supposed to rest?” I shriek, voice going an octave higher. “Joshua hyung told me you took a break from practising because you all needed to rest…” I instinctively inch closer and point my forefinger at him. “Especially you!”
“I am resting but I felt the need of jogging.” He lifts his shoulders in a half shrug as if it wasn’t a big deal.
“Don’t exert yourself too much. You may feel sick and faint.” The tone of my voice becomes sweeter. I even put a hand on his shoulder and give it a light squeeze before saying, “You should rest, okay?”
“I’m okay.” Jihoon looks at my hand but doesn’t shrug it off.
“I’m being serious.” I sigh and study his face for a moment. “Now that I’m looking, you’re quite pale.” I lift my other hand and grab his chin, turning his head left and right to examine it better.
“I’m always pale!” Jihoon shouts, swatting my hands away and taking his distance. “It’s my skin tone, you idiot!”
‘I could swear he was pale until a while ago, why his cheeks are now pink? Is he already sick?’
“Wait, what’s wrong with you?” Jihoon suddenly asks, eyes frantically going over my face as if they’re looking for something, a sign of me going insane, probably. “Why are you even worrying? Do you want to be my friend?”
“What? No way!” I cross my arms once again and look away from him. “Next time, I won’t even look at you, just like I’m doing now.”
“Good. Mind your own business, Kwon.” Even though the words may seem harsh, his tone is a playful one as he actually looking forward to the next time.
“Knob.” I snort and then smile as I look at him again.
“Weren’t you running to Coffee & Goodpie?” He’s serious again and he’s pointing towards the shop’s direction.
“OH, RIGHT!” I shout realising that I had completely forgotten about Seokmin for the entire time I was talking to Jihoon. “See you at school, bye!”
I walk past him and sprint again towards the cafè, now being definitely late. When I step in, I see Seokmin already sitting at one of the tables and waving the moment he spots me.
“Good morning!” I greet him still panting due to the running.
“Morning, Soons! I already ordered our drinks,” he says as he pats the chair next to his, wanting me to sit down as we wait.
“That’s good! Sorry for being late, I was talking to Jihoon.”
“Oh, really?” Seokmin inches closer with a weird look in his eyes. “Everything’s okay? Did you two have your daily fight?”
“Not really and we didn’t fight,” I admit as I sigh. “I just told him to go home and rest because he needs to do that.”
“He needs to rest? Why?” He’s dumbfounded as, apparently, Joshua hasn’t said anything to him.
“Lately, he was acting weird. I was a bit concerned about him so I asked Joshua hyung to check on him. He then told me Jihoon’s just tired and has to recharge his batteries,” I explain, hoping Seokmin won’t pick up the part about me being concerned about Jihoon. “Wait, you already know it! We’ve talked about this yesterday night at the restaurant.”
“I wasn’t paying that much attention...I was, uhm, busy thinking about something else,” He admits, rubbing a hand on his nape, embarrassed. Damn Joshua who distracts him! “Why was he around? Why isn’t he resting at home?”
“He told me he went for a jog.”
“WHAT?”
“I know, right? He’s crazy.”
“Indeed he is.”
I shake my head and heavily sigh at the thought of him probably being sick and still going around. Then, I remember what I really have to say to Seokmin. “By the way, I have some good news.”
The electronic device in Seokmin’s hand buzzes, noticing us of our order being ready. We pay and grab our take away cups.
According to Seokmin, since it’s a sunny day, it would be a waste spending time being closed inside the cafè hence why we go for a walk in the park while drinking our coffees.
Just like yesterday, it is indeed a great day even though it’s been officially autumn for a while.
The sun is shining and there’s almost no cloud in the sky, the few ones up there are chasing each other in that light blue field thanks to the blowing breeze. Birds are chirping as they soar or from their spot on the nearby trees. It’s quite chilly but there are still people who repair from the sun in the shadows cast by the bare tree branches.
Seeing everyone being out on a day like this, trying to make most of it before the cold winter comes has me smiling and Seokmin seems to notice it.
“Has the good news you were mentioning before something to do with why you’re smiling so bright today?” He takes a sip from his cup waiting for the answer.
“Maybe.” I give a half shrug and smirk.
“Tell me! Now!”
“Okay, so do you know Wonwoo?” I start messing with Seokmin as his frustrated expression is what I live for. “That tall handsome guy who yesterday held the door open for me, the one who said I’m cute? The one with the sharp features but an angelic smile?”
He hits me a couple of times on my back before screaming, “STOP DOING THAT AND TELL ME WHAT HAPPENED.”
“He confessed to me.” I, too, take a sip of the coffee as if I haven’t just dropped a bomb on Seokmin.
“REALLY?” He screeches and I can only nod to him as I smile and blush. “WHY DIDN’T YOU CALL YESTERDAY TO GIVE ME THE NEWS?”
“It was late and, more important than that, I wanted to see your reaction,” I say as I laugh at his still surprised expression: eyes wide open, eyebrows almost merging with his hairline, mouth hanging open.
He regains his composure after a good couple of minutes. “You lucky man! Tell me what he did and said without leaving a single detail out.”
I clear my throat and tell Seokmin everything that happened since we dropped him to his house: the stolen glances in the car, the walk home, the actual confession, the hug and the upcoming date.
“OH MY GOD! A DATE? I CAN’T BELIEVE IT!” Thanks to Seokmin loudness, everybody in this park knows that I’ll soon have a date.
“Me neither.”
“HOW ARE YOU SO CALM WHEN I’M FREAKING OUT?”
“I don’t know but I’m dying on the inside,” I finally admit and allow myself to squeal a bit about it.
“Do you know what he has planned for tonight?”
“Actually, I don’t. He just said he’s going to pick me up at eight.” I sip from my cup feeling the nervousness arise at the thought of what Wonwoo and I could be doing in a few hours. “However, it doesn’t matter where we go or what we do as long as I’m with him.”
“That was too cheesy, you whipped man!” Seokmin pinches my cheek. “But I’m so happy for you!” Suddenly, the happiness drains from his face, leaving it blank as he says, “Now, you need to do me a favour.”
“What favour?”
Seokmin stops in his tracks and puts his free hand on my shoulder, squeezing it. He looks right into my eyes when he fondly says, “Please, leave the past behind and be happy, enjoy every moment with him. You deserve it.”
“I will, Seok.” I put my free hand on his and smile at him. “Thank you for being an amazing friend.”
“Don’t thank me, you stupid.”
We giggle and start walking again. Once we’ve finished our drinks and tossed the empty cups in a bin, we find a spot in the sunlight on the grass and sit there next to each other.
“Oh, right. Do you think the others already know it? Did Jihoon say something about it before?” Seokmin asks as soon as he sits down.
“Of course, they kn-” I abruptly cut off myself and the smile on my lips disappears, Seokmin’s words helping me connect some dots in my head.
“What happened?”
“I just remembered something.”
“And what’s that?”
“Two days ago, while Jihoon and I were exchanging our daily notes during classes, he asked me about Wonwoo and if I liked him.”
“And what did you tell him?”
“I told him I do like Wonwoo,” I admit.
“So you think he told him.” Seokmin rubs his chin as he considers the option. “That’s possible.”
“I’m pretty sure he did. Someone must’ve told him to test the waters and he did.”
“So, it’s thanks to him that you’re now dating Wonwoo.”
“I can’t believe that among all the people in this group, he had to be my cupid.” I groan and this makes Seokmin laugh.
“In the end, you even have to thank him,” He pats me on the shoulder.
“I won’t,” I snort. “It would go to his head and he will pester me more than he already does.”
“I’m sure you’ll end up being great friends. He’s not a bad guy, you know.” Seokmin says as he leans back on his elbows and stretching out his legs, tired of being in the same position for too long.
“I have no doubts about that. He’s just annoying,” I give him a mirthless chuckle as I think about Jihoon’s way of acting around me.
“He has fun at annoying you because you always react to that.” He is now looking at me, one eye closed as to repair it from the sun. “I think he actually likes you as a friend and you could actually hit it off if you wanted to.”
Maybe it’s the way Seokmin said it or it’s the look in his eyes but I feel like I should let him know about my plan to slowly befriend Jihoon. “Actually, I want to.”
Seokmin seems surprised by that. “I wasn’t expecting this answer but I’m glad about that.” He nods to himself and turns to look ahead. “Can I ask you what made you change your mind?”
“I’m not quite sure. Something in the way he looked when he was outside my house got to my heart. He seemed to be sad like he had a lot going on in his mind but no one to talk to about that. I was so worried about him and the hurt in his eyes made me change my mind. When I woke up the day after, I felt like I needed to change and be by his side, become a friend he can rely on no matter what.” I realise I hadn’t taken a pause in between my words and I’m quite breathless. “However, it’s something I can’t do overnight. Considering how we’ve been treating each other until now, I’m aware that it will take some time.”
Seokmin remains silent for a while, closing his eyes and lifting his head up in thinking. “I’m proud of you,” He then says. “You really are mature after all.” He opens his eyes and looks at me then says, “Good luck! I’ll just be here cheering for you and wait for the day you’ll become attached to the hips!” Seokmin lifts his hands and whispers a “fighting” before going back to lying on the grass. “Going back to our main topic, do you already know what to wear tonight?”
“I really don’t know...I can’t think of anything!”
“Just relax and something will pop up in that mind of yours. Plus Wonwoo already said you’re the most handsome guy for him.” Seokmin vigorously wiggles his eyebrows.
I was about to answer him when my phone buzzes against my thigh. I check it and it’s a text from mom telling me to come back home.
“Seok, I have to go back home. I promised mom to help her cooking since we have guests,” I say as I bolt up on my feet, brushing away the strands of grass stuck on my jeans.
“Run before she gets mad and ends up grounding you.” Seokmin gets up as well and motions me to go away.
“I don’t need that today.”
“Exactly, so go!” He turns me around and repeatedly pats my back to make me move.
“I’ll text you later!”
Once again, I end up running trying not to steamroll people.
Too afraid of getting scolded, I slow down only when I’m in my neighbourhood and know that I’m safe. When I walk past Joshua hyung’s house, I can’t help but wonder if the boys are still there and still sleeping. A smile creeps up on my lips as I think again about the date Wonwoo and I have later. It still doesn’t feel real at all and I guess it will be like this for a while, until my brain will finally register that, yes, Wonwoo really likes me as much as I like him.
When I’m home, I immediately wash my hands in the bathroom and then step in the kitchen where mom’s waiting for me, ingredients all laid out on the counters. While she makes the main dishes, I help her by cutting the ingredients she needs, preparing the side dishes and the dessert. It’s something we do since I was twelve. She used to need a hand and I was interested in learning how to cook. That’s how we became a great team, fast and coordinated.
By the time the guests arrive, everything’s ready and set on the table in the living room.
After lunch, I tell mom and the guests to make themselves comfortable in the living room while I do the cleaning. I make a quick pit stop in my room to grab my earphones, then arm myself with sponge and dish soap to wash the dishes as well as the stove. When I’m done with that, I join the rest in the living room and listen to their stories about the old times, stories I heard thousands of times but never fail to make me smile or crack up at something crazy my parents did when they were about my age.
Then, my parent’s friends ask me if I already know to which university I should apply and if I’m excited about leaving high school. It’s a topic that makes me a bit nervous but it’s nothing I can’t deal with.
It’s six in the afternoon when the guests leave and, thank God, I have enough time to get ready. Before showering, I send a text to Wonwoo.
Hoshiya
Wonwoo hyung, instead of picking me up at my house can you come at Joshua hyung’s house?
Nonu
Yes, sure.
Can I ask you why?
Hoshiya
Because if my father spots you, he’ll end up giving you the third degree and we’ll never able to leave.
Nonu
Hahaha okay then.
See you soon(ie).
Giddy about texting with him and the nickname, I take my sweet time to wash my body and hair, getting out of the bathroom only when I feel calm enough to cope with the night.
Once I have dried my hair, I pick the first outfit that comes to my mind: a pair of black skinny jeans with a white-striped blue shirt tucked in it, the same black Chelsea boots as yesterday at my feet. I leave the first to buttons of my shirt open to show a small silver ring swinging from a leather string. For the makeup, I put just a bit of foundation and eye-liner. I spray some perfume and I’m ready to go.
While grabbing the phone to check the time, a text from Wonwoo arrives.
Nonu
I’m coming to Joshua’s house.
Hoshiya
I’ll be waiting for you there.
Being too nervous to wait at home, I decide it’s better if I already head there. I walk in the living room to notice my parents that I’m going out and they don’t need to wait for me as I’m bringing my keys with me. I also assure them I won’t be late as tomorrow we have school.
My natural fast pace mixed to the nervousness, makes me arrive in front of Joshua’s house in less than it usually takes and, at that moment, Joshua walks out of the front door.
“Soons!” He shouts as he comes to me.
“Hi, hyung.”
“What are you doing here?” Joshua is feigning ignorance and I know because of the smile he’s trying to hide.
“Waiting for Wonwoo.” I want to play with him and see until when he intends to pretend.
“And why?”
“We have to go on a date.”
“Oh, really?” His eyes widen and he brings a hand to his chest in surprise.
“As if you don’t know that already,” I state matter-of-factly, crossing my arms over my chest.
“I don’t! How could you think that I’m pretending not to know things?” His high-pitched voice signals that he got caught red-handed.
“You are pretending.” I roll my eyes before going closer and point a finger at him. “You’re here, standing before me, because you want to embarrass me or him before the date, right?”
“Jeez, I just wanted to send a pic of you two walking next to each other to the group!” He finally admits.
“Don’t you dare!” I warn him.
“Why? I feel like a proud father watching his sons going on a date.” He wipes away a fake tear.
“You know that if you put it like that it’s incest, right?”
“You’re the adopted son so it’s not really incest.” The stoic expression and his tone making it sound like it’s not a joke but the truth.
“Why am I the adopted one?” I whine, offended by the fact he chose Wonwoo over me as the real son.
He looks at me as the answer is obvious but the asks anyway, “Who’s the one who lived in Japan until five years ago?”
“Okay, fine. I’m the adopted son but please do not send our pic in the group chat! Don’t be the embarrassing dad,” I plead him, hoping to change his mind.
“That’s Seungcheol’s role.” Joshua looks behind me and smiles as he spots someone. “Oh, look, Wonwoo’s here.”
“Hi, hyung,” Says Wonwoo from behind me.
“Yo, Wonwoo.” Joshua high-fives him.
“Soonie, are you ready to go?” Wonwoo asks turning towards me and resting his hand on the small of my back.
“Y-yes,” I stutter, taken aback by the sudden touch that makes my heart beat so fast I’m afraid it might break my rib-cage.
“Have fun you two! Wonwoo, be careful and treat my Soons well.” Joshua comes closer to pat me on the head.
“Don’t worry, hyung. You know he’s in safe hands.” Wonwoo gives Joshua a reassuring smile and I just melt at the sight, like I always do.
“Bye, hyung! See you tomorrow.”
Wonwoo and I wave one last time at Joshua and then walk away, leaving him behind. I really hope he’s not taking pics of us right now but, knowing him, that’s exactly what he’s doing right now.
Our first stop is the cinema and I think it’s as we’re both too shy to have a proper conversation and it will later help to break the ice as we will have a topic to ignite the spark of a conversation. For the whole walk to the cinema, we exchanged just a few words and smiles, too nervous to come up with things to talk about.
At the cinema, we end up watching a rom-com. Wonwoo insists on paying for the tickets and so I convince him that it’s only fair if I buy the popcorns. When we’re in the theatre, I feel nervous to the point my legs shake as I sit down. I turn towards Wonwoo to hand him the popcorns and he’s looking at me. Under these dim lights, it takes just the tiniest smile of his to make me blush and smile like an idiot. I can’t help but react like this at every action of Wonwoo, too whipped to act like my normal self.
We were still looking at each other when the lights go out and the movie begins. It was an old movie they were screening again: 50 First Dates, a classic when it comes to rom-coms. It basically tells the story of a casanova finally falling in love with a girl. The day after he meets her, they meet again but she doesn’t seem to remember him that’s because, due to an incident she got in a year before, she suffers from a kind of amnesia that makes her forget the events unfolded that same day hence why she doesn’t remember him. When the guy comes to know what happened to her, he tries to win her heart every day in a different way.
I’m crying all of my tears when it comes the part where she decides to leave him so he can live his life in a better way, achieving his goals. Wonwoo, noticing I’m crying a river, doesn’t think about it twice before grabbing my hand and rubbing circles on it to soothe me. He does all of this without tearing his eyes from the screen, not wanting to lose one second of the movie.
When it ends and the lights are on again, I dry my tears as quickly as I can to look less like a mess. After that, I look down and see that our hands still linked. I can’t help but stare at them with the hint of a smile on my lips. Wonwoo follows my line of sight and his eyes too land on our joint hands. Thinking I may be uncomfortable with that, he quickly lets go of me and I’m kind of saddened at the loss of contact.
As predicted, it’s when we leave the cinema that we begin talking for real.
“Did you like the movie?” Wonwoo asks genuinely interested in the answer.
“A lot and you?”
“Me too. I didn’t know you could cry that much and that easily though.” He chuckles, hiding his mouth behind his hand.
“I know it’s stupid but when she left him it was so sad because she loved him to the point of letting him go, of wanting him to live a better life without her being a burden to him. Also, when at the end they get married and have a daughter...I couldn’t help but cry because he never stopped loving her and still wanted to be by her side even though their path will be full of obstacles.” And I’m tearing up again.
“It’s not stupid.” Wonwoo stops to cup my cheeks and wipe the tears away with his thumbs. “It means you’re sensitive and have a soft heart.”
“Do you really think so?” I sniff and expectantly look at him.
“Yup and, for the records, you were cute while crying.” He is still brushing his thumbs on my cheeks when he says, “You kind of looked like a sad hamster.”
“Hey!” I jokingly hit him on the chest and then chuckle.
“Ouch, I’m glad you smiled, though.” He laughs as well. “What would you like to do now?”
“I don’t know. What you feel like doing?”
“What about a walk at the Han River, since we’re near the area?”
“I’d love it.”
“Let’s go then!”
As soon as we arrive at the river’s area, all the tension I felt the whole day dissipates leaving space to calmness and happiness. This place is one of my favourites in all Seoul, especially in the nighttime.
The bridge enlightens and the different light colours reflect in the black waters of the river, making it look like an oil painting and the entire skyline per se it’s breathtaking.
A lot of people come here during the day as well as the night and each one of them seems to be in their own little world, not caring about what’s happening outside their personal bubble. I love it especially because of this. No one seems to care about what you’re doing and doesn’t seem to judge you, too busy enjoying their time there, alone or with their friends or dates.
I often come here when I have a lot to think about or when I want to be alone. Don’t get me wrong. I love spending time with my friends and family but there are times in which I feel the need of being by myself, left alone with my thoughts and I think there’s no better place than this where you can be surrounded by thousands of people but still able to be alone, not in a sad way, though.
Wonwoo and I walk to find a bench to sit on and, as we do that, we talk about this and that, commenting once again on the movie. That’s until an idea pops in my mind.
“Hey, Wonwoo hyung, what about playing a game to get to know each other?”
“What kind of game?” The glint in his eyes means he’s interested in the proposal.
“It’s simple. Basically, each of us has four questions to ask about anything we want and the other has to answer.”
He thinks about it for a second before nodding. “I like the idea.”
“You start, then.”
“Okay, first question. Seaside or countryside?”
“Seaside,” I immediately say, sure about my answer. “I was born in the countryside so I’ve seen enough of it. I would like to experience more of life at the seaside.”
“If you want to, we can go there sometimes,” he proposed out of nowhere, a bit flustered.
“I would very much love it.” I give him a shy smile, hoping he’ll understand that I mean to go with him at the sea.
For the next hour, we go back and forth with the questions, finding out a lot about each other. Wonwoo learns about how much I like dancing but have little time to practice it; about my days in Japan; about the days I was a Taekwondo champion. On the other side, I learn how much he loves reading books; how much of a nerd he is and his newly discovered passion for taking pictures.
“You know, it doesn’t surprise me that you’re into photography, too,” I state as I look at the river before us.
“How come?”
“You seem to love arts. First music, then books and now photography,” I list them down on my fingers.
“But taking pics isn’t my forte. Mingyu is the pro and I’m trying to learn something from him.”
“I bet your pics look great. You have great sensitivity and I’m sure it shows in them.”
“You have too much faith in me.” He gives a bitter chuckle, clearly not believing in himself.
“Then show me your pics next time we meet.”
“I promise I will, so you’ll realise how incompetent I am.”
“I’m sure I’ll love them,” I insist, clearly not wanting to lose against him in stubbornness.
As we giggle about our fake fight, I check for the time and see that it’s almost one in the morning. I sigh as I put my phone back into the pocket.
“I have to go back home. I promised my parents I wouldn’t be late as tomorrow there’s school.”
Wonwoo grabs the phone to look at the time too. “Right. I didn’t notice it was already this late. Time really just flew.”
“I know right?” I stand up, ready to go.
“But what about your question?” Wonwoo asks confused as he stands up too.
“My question?” I pretend not to understand what he’s talking about.
“You have one last question to ask me.”
To be honest, I was buying time talking to him because I saved the last question for this moment, for when we had to head back home. I wanted to be brave and take advantage of the situation to ask for something I wouldn’t be able to ask otherwise.
Before speaking, I look at him in the eyes, taking in his features and the way he looks under the different lights coming from the moon, the streets behind him and the bridge behind me. I think I’ll never get tired of admiring him.
“As we go home, can you take my hand just like you did at the cinema?”
“Uh?” He looks at me, confused, maybe not sure if he has heard correctly or if his mind made up my words.
“This is the last thing I want to ask. Can you hold my hand?”
Wonwoo looks at my hand for a couple of seconds. I was about to lose hopes and tell me not to mind what I had just blurted out when, without saying nothing, he takes my hand in his and intertwines our fingers. I look at our hands first and then slowly bring my gaze up to look at him who’s smiling at me with the most sincere and loving smile he has ever had, nose scrunching up.
We walk like that, never loosening the grip on the other’s hand, and talking about little things as well as what we should do for the next date. If we didn’t know better, we would be fooled by ourselves into thinking that we’ve been a couple for more than two days. The idea of that makes me feel so giddy and I look forward to the time I will spend with him.
I love being with him, everything feels genuine and spontaneous.
Jihoon’s point of view
It’s around eight in the evening and I’m trying to solve a math problem when my phone repeatedly buzzes. I press the home button so the notifications appear on the screen and see it’s from the group chat. I don’t know what kind of fuss is going on in there but it’s annoying me.
I’m ready to shout at them to stop writing through a voice note but when I open the chat, the first thing I see it’s a photo Joshua hyung sent.
It was taken near his house. Soonyoung and Wonwoo are in there, walking with no gap in between their bodies and looking at each other with obvious fondness and love in their eyes.
Joshua captioned it saying “Our little babies are all grown up and going on a date. You have a tissue? Because I’m crying.”
The others all sent heart and crying emojis, saying that they’re finally dating after being dense for so long about each other’s feelings.
“So they’re together now. Wonwoo did really man up and asked him out.” I say out loud to no one since I’m alone in my room.
I look at the picture again, thinking about what to write to congratulate them. I should be happy for the both of them as they’re able to be with the person they like but why do I feel my heart hurting and my eyes stinging?
Notes:
What to say...this meeting between Soonyoung and Jihoon, Soonyoung revealing his plan to Seokmin, Shua the proud father, the Soonwoo date. As always, there's a lot going on in the chapter and in the characters' head. What do you think about it?
Let me know in the comments! I love reading and replying to your thoughts and theories!!As always, thank you for reading it and I hope to come back with a weekly update!!
Chapter 22
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
It’s been a couple of months since Wonwoo and I started dating. Things between us do nothing but keep getting better and I really think he’s the kind of man everyone should have by their side. He worries and takes care of me in every way he can and he has been the sweetest, something I had never experienced and never thought I would live. He made me believe that whoever said prince charming isn’t real, well, they simply haven’t met Wonwoo. He’s funny, witty, a perfect gentleman and makes me feel important, needed, as if I am the boy without whom he couldn’t live.
From that night on, we went on so many more dates and each one of them was so special that I engraved them in my heart and memory. The shy glances, the soft touches of our hands, the wide and happy smiles, the sweet words whispered before the goodnight kiss.
Right, the kiss.
The first kiss came naturally after a couple of days.
_____________
After walking around aimlessly for an hour and still not wanting to go home, Wonwoo and I were at the Dongdaemun Design Plaza to see the LED rose garden. A lot of couples and families were roaming in the garden to take pictures with the pretty and bright white roses or to just admire the beauty of that garden with warm smiles tugging at their lips.
Convincing Wonwoo to take a selca there was quite easy: big eyes, pout, cheeks slightly puffed and it’s game over for him. He couldn’t say no to that and so there we were, in front of thousands of beaming flowers, trying different angles and different poses until we had the perfect shot: Wonwoo on the front with me on the side, my head leaning on his shoulder and the field full of roses resembling a sky full of stars as our background.
“I like this one, a lot.” Wonwoo had said as he looked at it. “We should put this as our lockscreens.”
“And you say I’m the sappy one.” I had chuckled and pinched his cheek.
“This place is pretty, isn’t it? I had seen it in the daylight but never at night.” Wonwoo had grabbed my hand again and looked around him, contently sighing.
“Me neither but I’m glad I got to see it with you.” Our gazes met and the fondness in Wonwoo’s eyes was so overwhelming I thought I could cry.
“Me too, and, who’s the sappy one now?”
“We were having a moment, don’t ruin it!” I jokingly hit him on the arm and he laughs, rubbing the spot I hit. “However, don’t you think it’s cool to have a sky replacement here?”
“A sky replacement?” Wonwoo seemed genuinely confused and I couldn’t blame him because my choice of words was the worst.
“Look up at the sky.” Wonwoo did as I said. “You cannot see the stars because of the city lights, right?”
“Right, so?”
“This garden full of glowing flowers looks pretty much like the night sky would if we weren’t in the city. Isn’t it cool to see it like this, up close, and imagine if it looks the same up there?”
“I think it is.” Wonwoo lowered his head to meet my eyes again. “But I don’t think I care about the far-away stars.”
“Uh? What do you mean?”
He lifted his hand to cup my cheek and I leaned in the touch. “How could I care about the other stars when I have my star here, right in front of me? No star in the sky and no rose in this garden can compare with your brightness and with how much light you had brought in my life.”
I was left speechless, breathless as I looked at him, the white lights from the flowers around us making him glow and, at that moment, my heart felt too big for my chest but too small to handle all the kind of things I was feeling.
Wonwoo, knowing my silence was actually because I was panicking inside, leans in. As our faces were inching closer, shivers ran up and down my spine and my heart could as well be Usain Bolt for how fast it was running. When our lips finally touched, my eyes closed on their own, wanting not to see him kissing me but feeling him kissing me and, I swear, the stars in the sky didn’t matter to me anymore.
_____________
However, during this time, my relationship with Wonwoo isn’t the only thing who got better.
Jihoon and I are finally friends.
After telling Seokmin what my intentions were, I felt like a new fire was burning inside me and gave me the determination to achieve my goal. I came with a plan of winning his heart and trust by being more kind to him; making the effort of being the first one starting a conversation; bringing him snacks when he would write in the group chat (Jeonghan’s bitches members, Seokmin and I have a group chat) that he skipped breakfast so he wouldn’t be late at school or cooking something delicious to share at lunch when he came over to our table or when we would go at the rehearsals.
I still remember the look he had on his face when I brought him breakfast for the first time.
_____________
Kwannie:
Morning y’all!
The sun is up!
Are you ready for today?
Do you want me to sing you a song to happily start the day?
Hoshiya:
Morniiing!
Pupgyu:
Shut up, Boo.
Kwannie:
I’m not talking, I’m writing so I don’t have to shut up.
Pupgyu:
Then stop writing and typing.
It’s still too early for this.
Woozy:
If you two won’t stop, I’ll have you killed before the sun sets.
DadCheol:
Jihoon, they’re your hyungs.
Woozy:
Hyungnim-deul, I’ll kill you.
Happy, Cheol hyung?
DadCheol:
That’s not what I meant but I appreciate the effort.
Woozy:
Thank you.
Now, please stop spamming.
You’re distracting me and I’ll end up being late at school.
1004Han:
You’re already late.
Woozy:
Oh shit!
Guess I have to skip breakfast.
Joshuji:
Language.
Joshua and I were on the way to school when this conversation took place.
“Ah, Jihoon is going to skip breakfast again.” Joshua sighed as he pocketed his phone.
“What do you mean by again?”
“It’s not the first time he’s late for school and when he’s late he never takes his breakfast. The same it goes sometimes with lunch and dinner.”
“He shouldn’t skip his meals.”
“I know, right? I keep telling him so but he ignores my words, saying he doesn’t need to eat a lot of food in order to live. He’s a lost cause,” Joshua said as he shook his head and stopped in front of the cafè nearby our school. “Usual caramel macchiato?”
I thought about it for a while and ended up saying. “Yes, and can you buy me two chocolate muffins?”
“May I know why?” Joshua looked at me, right eyebrow arched.
“Because I’m hungry, hyung. You ate all of my breakfast early and left me with nothing! It’s only fair if you buy me some muffins!” I whined as I shoved him inside and followed him in the shop to choose the two biggest muffins they had.
Jihoon, contrary to what I had expected, was already in the classroom when I walked in. He looked tired having probably run all the way from his house. His head was resting on top of his folded arms over the desk, his eyes were closed so he didn’t see me coming. Luckily, Seokmin hadn’t called out my name or else I would’ve lost the surprise effect. I drew closer to his side of the desk and let the box fall in front of his eyes. He had jumped, scared it was the teacher.
“Kwon, what the fuck? Are you trying to give me a heart attack?” He had asked, massaging the area over his chest as to make his heart decelerate.
“No, I was trying to give you this.” I had gone round him to reach my seat and pointed at the box before sitting down.
“What is it?”
“Open it and you’ll know.”
Jihoon had taken the box in his hands, shaking it a bit as he tried to guess what was inside of it. He hesitantly opened it, afraid of it being a prank and to make a fool out of himself. However, what he saw inside left him confused and speechless.
“You don’t like muffins?” I had asked, worried due to Jihoon’s expression.
“I like them. It’s just…” He had taken a pause. “Why?”
“You said you skipped breakfast and you shouldn’t. It’s the most important meal of the day, so go on and eat.”
Jihoon had remained silent, looking from the box of muffins to me. “Thank you,” He simply said taking one of the muffins and giving it a big bite.
“Don’t mention it. From today on, remember to eat and if you’re late, just tell me and I’ll buy you more of these.”
Jihoon only nodded his head, not wanting to risk to choke on food as he spoke. I was contently watching him as he ate, feeling like I made a big step forward.
_____________
My plan was a success considering that now, we don’t fight every three seconds; he asks me about my dates with Wonwoo; we give each other advice on what kind of gifts buying for our partners and on how to make up after a fight.
What surprised me, Seokmin and of course the rest of our class and school was that he was still together with Chanyeol. Don’t get us wrong, we’re all glad they’re still together and happy but it was a big shock for everyone.
Chanyeol was known to be a casanova who had no care in the world but for his own desires, he wouldn’t care less about feelings if they weren’t his (and honestly, we all thought he hadn’t feelings at all considering how he treated people). However, it looks like love really came to him in the form of Lee Jihoon who tamed the taller’s spirit.
Despite being friendly with the rest of the group, Chanyeol still seems to partly hate me for an unknown reason.
Back to Jihoon and me, being seat-buddies isn’t a pain in the ass like it was before, on the contrary, the teachers would very much like to split us due to how much we talk.
At some point, even though they had already understood it, I told Joshua and Seokmin and their reaction was exactly what I had expected.
_____________
“So, I have something to tell you”, I had started one Sunday morning, when Joshua had joined Seokmin and me at the cafè.
“Wha-”
“Don’t. Let me talk first and then you’ll ask questions.” I knew Joshua was just going to ask what it was the thing I wanted to tell, but that came out very naturally. “You probably already know, but Jihoon and I are finally friends.”
“Of course, we knew it. Do you think we hadn’t noticed?” Seokmin asked, gesturing towards Joshua to proceed and say something.
“You know, it’s not hard to notice when you two used to fight every time you breathed and now you don’t.” Joshua then added, “Seokmin has even told me that you two talk and laugh quite a lot during classes.”
“But it wasn’t surprising. Literally no one was shocked by the sight of you and Jihoon getting along. We all knew this was going to happen,” Seokmin said after taking a sip of his caramel macchiato.
“Yeah, we told you that it was just a matter of time before you softened. We were right and you were wrong.” Joshua suddenly raised his hand, waiting for Seokmin to high-five him but the latter was too focused on wiggling his eyebrows to me to notice the waiting hand. Joshua eventually gave up, awkwardly looking around and clapping his hands together.
“I expected that at least you would’ve pretended to be surprised by the news.” I had snorted and drank my coffee, feigning disappointment.
“This is going to be the start of something great.”
_____________
Of course, for the first week, I had gone through hell because of the evil duo Joshua-Seokmin. They wouldn’t stop telling me they were right about us becoming friends, that Jihoon was too hard to resist.
They threw out all kind of things but I knew they were just as happy as me that it happened.
Jihoon and I get on really well and realised we indeed share so many interests which brought us even closer.
Lately, as a group, we’re hanging out more often than we used to do before because, let’s be honest, everyone knew it would’ve been awkward sitting with us fighting and picking on each other. But now, watching Joshua spending time with Seokmin and me as well as his friends warms my heart.
Sometimes Jihoon and I even hang out alone, without the rest of the group.
We would go to the noraebang after classes to sing and dance like madmen, going back home with our bellies hurting from laughing too much.
We would eat at some stalls on the way home or in some new fast food place, ordering way too much food than we could actually eat, caught up in the excitement of trying new things.
We would sip our hot drinks and warm up in the familiar environment of “Coffee & Goodpie” or enjoy some dessert and sweet drinks while feeling the old-but-gold songs playing at “Vinyl Art”.
We would wander in the neighbourhood’s park and end up playing with the kids or walk until we reached the park nearby the Han River and just stay there, laying on the grass and sharing a blanket as we watched the people come and go in that cold weather, sometimes even ordering food.
On the coldest days, when it was impossible going out, we would study together at my or his house and re-watching some of the animes which marked our childhood or a classic the other had yet to watch.
I’ve never been this happy and I’ve never felt this loved by someone who’s not my family and it’s all thanks to these people who slowly came to be an important part of my life and I hope the feeling is mutual as I work hard to be there for them and make them feel loved too.
Despite not having slept in the same house, Joshua and I arrive pretty early at school. Joshua said he had some more work to do and wanted to clock in as soon as the school opened so he wouldn’t spend the entire day in the library but, at the same time, he didn’t want me to come alone. In the end, I gave up on some sleep to accommodate his request and, because of that, it’s not a surprise Jihoon isn’t at the gates.
Well, no one was around apart from those early birds who like the morning quietness of the halls and classrooms, which I have to admit is satisfying: no one yelling or fighting or running.
I wait for Seokmin so that we can reach the classroom together. As our class is empty apart from us to, I sit next to Seokmin’s desk. We were basking in the silence until one of our classmates walks in and reminds us of what day is today.
“Shit, I had totally forgotten that our English project starts today!” I groan and hide my face behind my hands.
“Me too. How could we? Mrs Kim has done nothing but talking about it.” Seokmin is so close to repeatedly bang his head on the desk.
“I know right!” I sigh and look at the desk but my eyes had lost focus. “Do you think we can pair up for this one?”
“I don’t know, man. I think it depends on what method she has decided to use this year.”
“I really hope we can work together. Last year, we aced it.”
“We got lucky with the topic. We both liked Robin Hood and aced because we even played a scene from the Disney movie.” Seokmin remembered and laughed at the Robin-Hood-inspired hats we wore.
“True. Maybe this year we can work on another interesting topic and get full marks again, who knows,” I say, shrugging my shoulders.
As we were talking, our classmates came and they filled in the empty classroom. It soon comes the time for me to leave Seokmin as the owner of the desk I was sitting at arrives.
Now alone and without any distraction, I keep glancing at the door waiting for Jihoon to walk. When I last checked the time, it wouldn’t be long until the bell rang.
‘If he doesn’t come right away, we’re in trouble. I don’t know if he’ll come in late or won’t come at all. If I try to cover for him and he comes in later, the teacher will scold both of us just like she did last time.’
At that moment, Jihoon’s figure emerges from the door and I sigh in relief. He sprints over to our desk, throws his bag on the floor and himself on the chair, sprawling the upper part of his body on the desk. He’s panting and there’s a sheen layer of sweat on his forehead.
“Thought you wanted to skip classes,” I say while rummaging in my backpack, looking for a small white and light blue box.
“I would’ve..told you...or else...how would you have covered for me?” He manages to say in between deep breaths.
“Because that’s my only job here, cover for you when you skip classes and…” I finally find the box and hand him to Jihoon. “...to buy you breakfast.”
Jihoon’s eyes widen as he takes the muffin out of the box. “How did you know I skipped breakfast?”
“Sixth sense.” I smile at him who’s already devouring the muffin as the lesson will start any moment now.
“Thank you and, by the way, I cover for you too, don’t make me look like the bad guy here.” Some crumbs got stuck at the left corner of his mouth but Jihoon seems not to feel them.
“You have a point.” I chuckle while handing him a napkin. Jihoon, taking the hint, wipes his mouth. “Well, won’t you go say hi to Chanyeol?” I nod my head towards the mentioned boy.
“Nope, we have fought yesterday,” Jihoon says, remaining composed.
I roll my eyes as we’re back at this, again. “What have you done this time?”
“Nothing, I swear!” Jihoon puts his left hand up and the right one on his heart. “He got mad because I told I don’t want to be paired up with him for our English project.”
“And why would you say that?”
“Because we would surely get distracted by other…” he trails off, trying to think of an appropriate word to say it “...things and I want to focus.”
“Since when are you interested in focusing and studying?” I ask baffled by his lie.
“Since always?” His voice rising in a question but it’s to point out that his answer is obvious.
I laugh out loud. Some of our classmates turn towards us, interested in what made me laugh. “Don’t make this kind of jokes first thing in the morning.”
“It’s true even if it doesn’t seem so, I care about my grades.” He puffs his cheeks, annoyed and this time, I can’t help but poke them
“Okay, I’ll believe you.”
The bell rings and the English teacher walks in. The first few minutes are spent taking attendance and then she proceeds by listing the different topics we will handle with this project.
“It will be due to next week and the presentation needs to last a maximum of fifteen minutes per pair.” Mrs Kim says before calling the students one by one so they can choose their partner and give them the book serving as a base for their research.
As she scans the room, her eyes land on Jihoon.
“Mr Lee, who do you want your partner to be?” She asks, a smirk on her face.
“Kwon Soonyoung, if it’s possible, Mrs Kim.” He says, unfazed by the gasps and whispers of the other students who expected Jihoon to choose his boyfriend.
“Eh?” I look at him, panicked, hoping he will understand it’s a bad choice. He has to change his mind before a murder would be committed in this very classroom.
“Sure it is. You will work on ‘Pride and Prejudice’ by Jane Austen.” She writes down our names and book on the paper in front of her before looking at us, again. “Make sure you’ll do an amazing job with it, I expect a lot from you two.”
“We won’t disappoint you, Mrs Kim.”
All the time Jihoon spoke with the teacher, my gaze has been frozen on Jihoon. A part of me wants to look away but I know that as soon as I tear my eyes from him, I will be met with Chanyeol’s deathly stare, which, I’m pretty sure, is already on me. Maybe Chanyeol, just like me, still expected Jihoon to choose him despite their fight. But no. Jihoon had to sign my death sentence like that.
As soon as I recover from the shock and the teacher officially starts the lesson, I furiously scribble on a piece of paper I then pass to Jihoon.
Ya! Are you crazy?
Why do you want Chanyeol to hate me more than he already does?
I don’t care about what he thinks.
I want you to be my partner.
This kid is crazy. He does what he wants, telling the teacher we will pair up without consulting me and he doesn’t even worry about my wellbeing? I’ll have to watch my back and sleep with an open eye because of him.
I do care about staying alive, though.
Look, I want a good mark for this project and I can’t achieve that if Chanyeol’s my partner.
If I die today, you can say goodbye to your plan and you’ll have my death on your conscience.
I will make sure he kills you after the project.
Oh, so you want to take advantage of my brain and then abandon me to certain death?
What a great friend I have.
Jihoon snickers at the message, amused by my overdramatic reaction.
I know I am.
However, we got lucky with the topic.
What do you mean?
It’s on Pride and Prejudice and you love that book.
My eyes widen and I can only stare at the words scribbled on the paper for a while before replying.
How do you know?
I assumed it when I noticed how worn out is the book in your room.
Why do you keep invading my privacy?
Because you invade mine when we’re at my place.
Touché.
The teacher turns around the moment I pass Jihoon the last note and judging by the glare she shoots at us, it’s better if we stop and focus on the lesson.
However, I immediately look outside the window and end up getting lost in my thoughts. I see Jihoon walking in my room, eyes darting from a shelf to another. He did that to kill time when I had to step out to take some snacks or because mom needed my help but I never thought he had paid so much attention to what I had on those shelves. So I am genuinely shocked by the fact he had noticed the condition of my copy of “Pride and Prejudice”.
I came across the book during my first year back in Seoul and irremediably feel in love with it, with the twist of the events in the two main characters’ love story. Mr Darcy rejecting to dance with Elizabeth at a ball because she wasn’t pretty enough but then falling in love with her the moment he sees her in her not prettiest state: mud on her dress and messy hair as she walked for miles on foot to visit her ill sister.
From then on, the two of them often clash because of their pride and their prejudices but Mr Darcy eventually confesses. Elizabeth was then the one rejecting him because of a misunderstanding resulting in them fighting.
However, Elizabeth changes her mind the moment Mr Darcy gives her a letter, explaining the truth behind a man whom they both knew and who was the cause of their misunderstanding. After reading the letter, it’s too late for them to meet.
Some time later, Elizabeth happens to visit Mr Darcy estate, knowing the owner wouldn’t be there. Fate, though, wanted them to meet again because Mr Darcy came back and their feelings couldn’t be hidden anymore, feelings that keep on growing when Darcy steps in to help Elizabeth’s little sister who had run away from home with her “lover”.
When problems are solved, Elizabeth has to face Mr Darcy’s aunt who doesn’t want her to accept Mr Darcy’s marriage proposal but she refuses and she indeed marry him not out of wealth as her father believed but out of love.
And love is the main theme Jihoon and I have to work on. The three kinds of love that appear in the novel.
At first, when he insisted on being paired up with me, I thought it was because he wanted me to do the hard work while he lazed around. However, I’m glad I was wrong. Throughout the entire week, we had perfect teamwork.
The topics were split by days as we had to run a precise research for each of the three couples: the Jane - Mr Bingley couple, the ones who represent true love free from the very start of the novel; the Elizabeth - Mr Darcy couple, whose love had been hindered by the pride and prejudices of the two characters; the Lizzy - Mr Wickham couple, the ones who end up together not because of love but to prevent rumours from spreading as they had run away together.
These researches had covered the first three days and the other three we had to put all the things together, write the essay and read it out loud to see if we exceeded the time limit.
It all went so smooth that we even had time to hand out with the others or by ourselves when we needed a break.
The day before the presentation, we had only the PowerPoint left to do. Jihoon is going to come over right after classes so we can work on it.
However, it’s been two hours since school ended and Jihoon is still not here.
We had walked home together, but once we were outside my door, he told me he would go home to shower and change clothes before coming back again. Two hours seems too long for that, though.
I’ve been texting him for the past thirty minutes and even tried to call him but he doesn’t answer any of that.
As I wait, I decide to put my pyjamas on and then wait for him on the couch while watching an episode of some random anime.
‘If he’s not here at seven o’clock, he’s a dead man and I’m going to erase his name from the presentation.’
After more or less thirty minutes, the doorbell rings noticing that Jihoon’s finally here. When I open the door, he’s smiling as if he wasn’t gone for almost three hours.
“Thought I got lucky and some aliens had abducted you while showering,” I say with no hint of a joke on my face, leaning on the doorframe with all my body.
“You’re right. I’ve been abducted but not by aliens.” Jihoon is rocking on heels, hands hidden behind his back.
“May I know by whom?”
“Chanyeol. He wanted me to help him choose a gift to buy for his friend’s birthday and then to walk him home.” He brings one of his hands to his nape and rubs it out of embarrassment.
Of course, it was Chanyeol. The whole week they could barely meet and I can understand they had missed each other. But I’m sure he didn’t like that I was spending more time with his boyfriend than he did.
“You could’ve let me know, I would’ve started working on the PowerPoint or at least do something else instead of laze on the couch as I waited for you.”
“As if you wouldn’t have lazed around anyway.”
I scoff. “You’re lazy just like me, so you don’t have a say in this.”
“Yeah, but can we, like, talk inside? I’m slowly becoming an icicle out here.”
Now that Jihoon mentioned it, I feel a shiver run down my spine realising I am in the cold weather with only my pyjamas on and no slippers at my feet.
“I would like to let you freeze because you had almost ditched me but I still need you tomorrow.”
“And I know you wouldn’t let these amazing odeng freeze, am I right?” He finally moves his hands from behind his back, revealing a black plastic bag containing the food.
“You know I could take the bag inside and lock you out, right?”
Jihoon laughs out loud as I grab the bag full of odeng from his hands and step aside so he can walk in. As he takes his shoes and coat off, I take a stick from the bag and almost devour it. It’s still hot so I end up burning my tongue.
“I’d say I chose the right method to apologise,” Jihoon says, still busy untying his shoelaces and not looking at me stuffing my face.
“Yo..re..ight,” I try to answer but my mouth is too full to do that.
“You’re already eating them?”
I swallow the food in my mouth before answering, “I couldn’t resist.” Then, I take another big bite of the odeng.
He smiles. “Eat a lot.”
Jihoon is about to pinch my cheek when he realises I would splutter food around and so he goes for a pat on my shoulder.
He heads in the kitchen to greet my mom who’s currently cooking dinner.
“Good evening, Mrs Kwon.” He bows his head to her.
“Oh, Jihoon! We were waiting for you!” She beams at the sight of the shorter, standing still in the middle of the room. “Have dinner with us.”
“I would like to if it’s not too much of a disturb for you.”
“It’s not like he can choose to have dinner here or not,” I chirp in their conversation. “We have a project to finish.”
“Good for me then as I’ll have some good company tonight.” Yes, my mom adores Jihoon and when he stays over for dinner, she does nothing but overfeeding him and talking his ear off which Jihoon seems enjoying as he comes back for more. “Now, you better study or I won’t feed you any of this fantastic kimchi stew I’m making.”
“Yes, mom. Don’t forget to cook some extra rice for Jihoon. He loves it.” At that, Jihoon hits me, embarrassed.
“I could never forget that.”
After giving us some almonds to snack on and two cans of coke, mom sends us in my room so she can finish cooking and we can finish this project.
For the next two hours, we rehearse our speech, coming up with questions the teacher may ask us, make an outline for the PowerPoint and then immediately work on it.
As my dad is taking a look at a document from his laptop, we are currently using mine. Jihoon is typing on the keyboard as he’s a faster writer and I dictate the quotes from the book he should write down as well as our considerations, our ideas regarding that kind of love we’re discussing.
We’re both on my bed. Jihoon has his back leaning on the headboard, pillow on his lap with my laptop balanced on it. I am laying on the bed, on my right side so I can face Jihoon as I read the paper and check how he’s doing with the slides.
“Don’t you think we’re a bit like Jane and Mr Bingley?” I suddenly ask when we finish with the first topic.
“What do you mean?” Jihoon asks confused.
“I mean, Wonwoo and I fit in this category of love and so do you and Chanyeol.”
“What makes you think that we fall in the category of true love?” Jihoon closes the laptop and places it on the top of the chair standing next to him. He lays down, pillow under his head and rolling on his left side.
“Because in both cases is a genuine love born due to our compatibility with the other. There was no pride or prejudice involved, especially in your case. There was a lot of shit about Chanyeol but you never cared and dated him.” I say as I turn around to put the essay sheets on the bedside table and then face Jihoon again.
“But don’t you think it’s too early to talk about true love? What if they aren’t our true love?”
“You don’t love Chanyeol?” I ask him back, not answering his questions.
“I don’t know. I like him but I don’t think I love him.” He brings his right hand under the pillow, while the left one is laying on the bed, next to my hand. “I feel good when I’m with him but love should be more than that, right?”
“Hmm, what do you think love is, then?” I shift closer to him, eager to hear what he has to say.
“I think love is about feeling giddy and nervous at the idea of meeting your significant other but being calm and comfortable when you’re actually with them. Love shouldn’t make you be impulsive, shouldn’t make you feel like you want to change for the other person. You feel loved for who you are and not for who they want you to be. You experience a bit of jealousy every now and then but, still, you have complete trust in them, knowing they won’t betray you because they love you too much, because they don’t want to see you hurt. True love isn’t all passionate and rough, true love is calm and makes you feel at peace, makes you feel that you’ve finally found the perfect other half of your heart. True love is the warmth your partner emanates, making you want to feel no other warmth but theirs for the rest of your life. You don’t need someone else when you find your true love.” Jihoon’s eyes were glued to mine as he spoke and I couldn’t tear my gaze away from his.
“You seem to have already experienced this true love you’re talking about.” I notice that a strand of his hair is out of place and I reach out to fix it, fingers lingering two seconds longer on his forehead, touching his fair skin.
“Maybe I have. Maybe I still have to fall in love.”
We stay like that, faces closer to the point I can clearly see the mole under his eye, I can feel his breath on my skin. Our eyes still locked, barely blinking as if not to miss a second of each other who are enveloped in the silence of the room.
Jihoon’s hand moves forward as if to grab my hand but my mother’s voice calling for us pops the invisible bubble which was surrounding us, making Jihoon retract his hand.
What is this bitterness I feel? Why did I want him to grab my hand?
At the table, as foreshadowed, my mom keeps giving Jihoon food even when he’s obviously full and talks to him only, blatantly ignoring dad and me. When I manage to stop mom from torturing Jihoon, we offer our help to do the dishes but, once again, she sends us off in my room.
To be faster and to fight the awkwardness from before, we work with two laptops, splitting the remaining slides which have yet to be made and then copy-pasting them in one spreadsheet. At one point, near eleven o’clock, my parents walk in my room to wish us a good night.
“Jihoon, are you sure you don’t want to sleep here?” My mom asks when she sees his tired face.
“I’m sure, Mrs Kwon. I have already inconvenienced you way too much by coming late and staying for dinner.”
“You’re not an inconvenience. It’s our pleasure to have you here so you’re welcome to stay here the night.” Mom gives him a big smile which Jihoon can’t help but return and, with that being said, she leaves us alone.
To be sure we won’t disturb my parent’s sleep as we tap our fingers on the keyboard and with occasional banter, we go working in the living room. Jihoon is sitting cross-legged on the couch while I’m on the floor, laptop placed on the coffee table and back facing the couch.
We work in complete silence, totally absorbed by what we’re doing, talking just when we’re checking if we missed something or quarrelling about the number of animations put in just one slide. When Jihoon finishes his part of the slides, he sends me an email with the file attached to it. As I copy-paste the slides on the main spreadsheet, I notice there are a lot of typos.
“Jihoon, why haven’t you checked the slides before sending them? It’s full of typos.”
No answer.
“Jihoon?”
I turn around and see he had fallen asleep. Sending him home would be the right thing to do but I don’t have the heart to wake him up when he’s sleeping already this tight. He didn’t hear me speaking, meaning he was far away in dreamland. That’s why I simply arrange the pillows, grab the laptop from his hands and help him laying down on the couch. I go taking the blankets from my room and tuck him under them.
He looks so serene while sleeping, almost adorable.
While I’m busy fixing the blankets around him, he makes a weird face to which I can’t help but laugh risking to wake him up. To avoid that or further damage, I go back to my place on the floor, leaning my back on the couch Jihoon’s sleeping on and finish the PowerPoint.
Needless to say that being alone makes it harder to stay awake so I end up falling asleep with the computer on my lap and head resting on the cushion behind me, next to Jihoon’s head.
That night, I sleep the tightest I had ever done in the past few weeks. Jihoon’s presence and faint fragrance being strangely comfortable.
Notes:
I'm finally back and I'm sorry it has to be with a chapter which is a little bit of a filler. It's just that sometimes it's difficult to find enough time to update both this au and the other one on twt as they both have a kind of tricky plot. I still try to update this one as soon as possible as I really enjoy writing about the dynamics of the different characters and I hope you'll stick with me because the real thing will start real soon!
However, talking about the chapter, there was a huge fast-forward of two months and many things have changed during that time. What do you think about these Soonyoung and Jihoon? Their relationship is the one which developed the most and who knows where it's going to bring them.
Leave comments with your ideas, theories or about whether you liked or not the chapter. I love reading and replying to your comments!
If you want to check the twitter au, here's the link Meet my eyes
Chapter 23
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
It’s morning and the alarm goes off really loud.
Without opening my eyes, I throw my hand on the left where the bedside table is so I can grab my phone and stop that infernal ringtone. After a while, when I can’t find neither my phone nor the bedside table, my eyes flutter open and I realise I’m not in my room.
Scanning the room and my surroundings, I finally understand that I’m currently in the living room and that I fell asleep while sitting and with my back leant on the sofa. It’s when I feel the weight of a hand in my hair that I turn around and see Jihoon sleeping on the sofa. It seems like he’s a heavy sleeper and can’t hear the alarm at all.
I turn towards the coffee table and see my phone there, next to my laptop whose screen was still on. I turn the alarm off and look at the computer, trying to make out the words written on the open file.
‘Jane Austen? Pride and Prejudice?’
That’s when the dots finally connect in my mind and remember about the PowerPoint.
Panicking, I wake Jihoon up.
“Jihoon.” I put my hand on his back as he’s sleeping on his stomach and lightly tap there to wake him up.
“Mmmh.” He stirs in his sleep.
“Jihoon.” My voice goes up of an octave and my hand reaches his shoulder to shake him.
“Mmmmmh.” He keeps stirring but his eyes won’t open.
“LEE JIHOON WAKE UP.” I finally yell and that seems to work because Jihoon’s eyes immediately open and he jolts up, sitting on the sofa.
“Uh? Soonyoung? What are you doing at my house?” He asks with a low and raspy voice, rubbing the sleep away from his left eye.
“Yes, I’m Soonyoung and you are the one who’s at my house.”
“Eh?” Jihoon’s eyes go wide, probably thinking that I am trying to pull a prank on him.
I sigh and really want to look serious right now, but his confused face makes me chuckle. “Look around if you don’t believe me.”
Jihoon does as he’s told and after studying the room, he says, “Oh, right.” He looks at me with the same confused face as before. “What am I doing here?”
“Are you kidding me?” I start but then remember that I was the same as him a while ago, not understanding why I was in this room. “You fell asleep on the couch after finishing your slides.”
“Why didn’t you wake me up?”
“Because I didn’t have the heart to do that. You looked so serene in your sleep.” The tip of Jihoon’s ears is red, probably embarrassed at himself and at how easily he fell asleep. I smile at him and we almost lose ourselves in that comfortable atmosphere surrounding us but then I remember the reason why I was panicking. “Jihoon, we have a problem.” I take a deep breath and say, “I couldn’t finish the PowerPoint.”
At those words, Jihoon seems to come to his senses.
“Oh, shit.” He runs a hand through his hair, panic evident on his face, too. “How did it happen?”
“I fell asleep too.”
“I can tell that by your hair. You have a birds nest on your head.” Jihoon’s laugh is lower than usual, still coated in sleepiness.
“Jihoon, this is not the time to mock my hair.”
“No, it’s not,” He nods in agreement. “What should we do?”
“Let’s do this. You’ll go upstairs and wash up and, in the meantime, I’ll finish the presentation. For breakfast, there are some cereals in the cupboard next to the fridge. While I get changed, you can have those,” I explain my sudden plan and I am quite satisfied by it. At least I know that in case of an emergency, I can come up with good plans rather easily.
“What about my uniform and underwear? We’re going to be late if I have to go back home and get dressed there. Plus, I’m pretty sure everyone in there is still sleeping.”
‘Dammit, I knew there was something I was forgetting.’
“For the underwear, you can take mine. You can find it in the last drawer of my closet.” One problem solved, I think about the second problem when Joshua pops in my mind. “Joshua should still have his uniform. I’ll text him so he can bring it.” I stand up and help Jihoon standing up too before pushing him towards the staircase. “Hurry up, though. We’re already running late!”
Without saying another word, Jihoon rushes upstairs, climbing the stairs two at the time. As soon as he disappears, I take my phone and text Joshua.
Hoshiya:
There’s an emergency.
Joshuji:
What do I need to do?
Hoshiya:
Be here in less than 10 minutes if you can and bring your old uniform.
Joshuji:
Why?
Hoshiya:
I’ll tell you later.
Now, come. Quickly.
I don’t even check if he replies or not because I know that, in no time, he will be here, knocking at the door. Curiosity will take the best of him and make him come as soon as possible.
Tossed my phone on the couch, I immediately work on the PowerPoint, pasting the last slides, correcting all the typos and reviewing it a couple of times more.
Probably because I was too focused on the presentation or because the loud sound of my typing on the keyboard was filling my ears, but I hadn’t noticed Jihoon’s presence in the room. It’s only when I hear him coughing that I take my eyes off of the screen and see him, proudly standing in the middle of the living room with nothing but a towel wrapped around his waist. From his wet hair, droplets of water fall on his shoulders and run down his pale skin.
“Are you crazy?! Put something on!” I shriek, quickly returning my eyes on the laptop and feeling my face burning in embarrassment.
“I have a towel on.”
“It’s not enough,” I say, trying to hide my face behind the screen so I won’t see Jihoon and Jihoon won’t see me.
“What?” He chuckles. “My handsomeness and body made you shy?”
I snort and bite him back. “Handsomeness, my foot.”
“I know, I have that effect.” From the tone of his voice, I can imagine the smirk he surely has plastered on that face of his.
“Stop it! Go upstairs and wear my bathrobe!”
“Why? I’m comfortable like this.” He’s still mocking me and it’s driving me crazy. Why can’t he just listen to me?
“Joshua will be here any minute now, what would he think if he sees you like this?” I hope he notices the desperation in my tone.
“Afraid he will misunderstand?”
“You’re not?!” Frustrated, I look at him again but regret it immediately.
He’s leaning with his back on the side of the dining table, arms crossed over his chest. The light coming from outside hits his wet skin, making him glow. He looks ethereal like that and I have to avert my gaze once again before my brain becomes mush. “Knowing Joshua, this would slip out of his mouth the very moment we’re with Wonwoo and Chanyeol.”
There's a beat of silence before Jihoon sighs. “Okay, I’ll do as you say.”
I hear him climbing the stairs and, not even a minute later, I see him coming down with my red robe on. With long strides and a smile on his lips, he comes towards me.
“Happy now?”
“Yes, thank you,” I say as I get up from the floor, feeling my legs a bit numb.
“You know, your face is the same colour of your robe.” He teases and laughs at me.
“Stop it!” I whine and hit Jihoon on the arm before sending him to the kitchen so he can have breakfast.
Once I copy the file on two different pen drives, I put one in my bag and the other one in Jihoon’s.
It’s my turn to wash up and get dressed and I need to be even faster than Jihoon as it won’t take too much before Joshua arrives and we need to leave for school. Luckily, he rings the bell the moment I come back into the living room.
When I open the door, Joshua is all smiles.
“Morning, Soons!” His face is the one of someone who’s waiting for the tea to be spilt.
“Morning, hyung.”
“Wait, why are you ready?” He asks after noticing that I’m currently wearing my uniform.
“Because your uniform it’s not for me to wear. Did you bring it?”
Joshua lifts the bag with the clothes “Why do you need it then?”
“Come in, I’ll explain everything to you.”
The moment Joshua steps in and toes his shoes off, Jihoon walks out of the kitchen. His robe had loosened resulting in one of the sleeves falling and revealing his collarbone. Joshua looks at Jihoon, then at me, then Jihoon again, then me again. Before he could ask something, I snatch the bag from his hands, give it to Jihoon who, for the fifth time that morning, climbs the stairs without saying a word.
“Wait a minute,” Joshua says and Jihoon freezes on the stairs.
“It’s not what you’re thinking.” I wave my hands in front of Joshua’s face to stop his train of thoughts.
“What are you thinking, Soonyoung?” Jihoon asks from his spot on the stairs, smirking and clearly waiting for me to get flustered.
“Shut up and dress already.” My teeth hurting from how gritted they are and Jihoon runs away with his tail between his legs.
“This” Joshua points at me and then at the direction where Jihoon has disappeared “needs an explanation.”
“Let’s go, I’ll give you some coffee first.”
We’re sitting at the table in the kitchen and Joshua is drinking his cup of coffee while I tell him why Jihoon is here wearing a bathrobe.
“So he fell asleep here while working for your project.”
“Exactly,” I confirm, back turned to Joshua while I’m washing the dirty cup and bowl Jihoon used.
“Nothing happened between the two of you.”
“Nothing.”
“Are you sure you’re not hiding something from me?”
“What should I be hiding? I told you that nothing happened.”
“Okay, I believe you.” If Joshua is still doubtful, he decides that it’s better to let go of the topic for the time being. “For the record, we’re running late.”
“Where the hell is he? He had to wear a uniform, not a heavy armour.” I throw the rubber gloves in the sink and turn around, glaring at the door.
“I’m here, looking weird with Joshua’s uniform on.”
Jihoon walks in the kitchen and Joshua and I can’t help but blatantly check him out.
The trousers were baggy, a couple of sizes too big for him but the shirt was a tight fit and you could tell from how it wrapped around his chest and shoulders. His physique is clearly different from Joshua’s.
He doesn’t look weird as he said, he looks somewhat...hot.
It’s been a while since Jihoon had started working out at the gym and the results were now showing as he isn’t wearing his oversized clothes. Well, I had noticed it even before, when he was wearing the towel. I looked at him for a short time but I remember how his chest was broader than it used to be, his abdomen well-defined and there was a glimpse of a V shape right above where the towel rested on his hips.
‘WHAT AM I THINKING? SOONYOUNG, GET YOURSELF TOGETHER!’
“Don’t worry, it looks good.” Joshua checks his watch and pushes both Jihoon and me out of the kitchen. “Now, we got to go if we don’t want to be too late.”
We all collect our belongings, put our shoes on and rush out the house.
Luckily, we get in our class on time, panting and sprawling our bodies on our desk, trying to catch our breaths. I turn towards Seokmin and he nods his head in a greeting before going back to review the notes for his project.
Not even a minute later, the bell rings and the teacher walks in.
“Good morning everyone, I hope no one forgot that today is presentation day.” Mrs Kim starts and someone groans, maybe hoping the teacher would’ve been the one forgetting about the project. “Let’s not waste any time and start with the first pair.”
She starts calling the groups one by one. Someone exposes Sir Walter Scott’s 'Ivanhoe', someone else Mary Shelley’s 'Frankenstein' and, before we could even realise it, our turn comes.
We stand in front of the whole class and all the students’ eyes are on us, waiting for us to present ‘Pride and Prejudice’.
I introduce the novel by giving first a quick overview of the author, the historical period in which she lived and the women’s status within that society. As for the main part, the one about the three different kinds of love, I leave it in Jihoon’s hands. He insisted on being the one presenting it so the teacher wouldn’t think he had done nothing and left all the work to me.
After an introduction of what the word ‘love’ means, Jihoon starts right away with the couple made by Jane Bennet and Mr Bingley.
As he describes the dynamics of this pairing, I remember the conversation we had last night, on my bed: Jihoon talking about what true love really feels like and that strange atmosphere that had surrounded us. My cheeks heat up and my heart beats faster at the memory of how my fingers had lingered on his forehead and the proximity of our bodies.
However, it’s when Jihoon talks about the next couple that an epiphany comes.
Jihoon and I are like Darcy and Elizabeth but, clearly, without the love story.
I am Elizabeth. She is the one full of prejudices towards Darcy, the one who believes that the other is too proud, cocky and presumptuous. But in the end, she finds out how lovable and charming Darcy is but because she is also proud, she’s not able to easily admit her faults in judging Darcy too quickly.
Jihoon is Darcy. He has prejudices towards Elizabeth and her attitude, too and this leads them to quarrel and drift away from each other. Darcy may look proud and arrogant, but the truth is that he just doesn’t feel comfortable around people so he prefers not to interact with them.
Jihoon and I were like this at first: the more time we spent together, the more we fought and drifted apart. However, time has made us realise we could become friends as long as we set aside our pride and our prejudice, just like Elizabeth and Darcy did at the end of the story. Once we stopped caring about being proud and stopped judging each other, we became inseparable. I can easily state that I almost have with him the same relationship I have with Joshua hyung, the only difference is that he had never slept at my house. Last night had been the first time and nothing would’ve been awkward if he hadn’t been half naked for almost an hour.
I can’t help but think about what would’ve happened if my parents were home and saw Jihoon walking around the house with only a towel covering his manhood. I think I would’ve gladly wanted to disappear completely and never be found.
God, the image of his half-naked body is once again in front of my eyes and, at this point, my cheeks are on fire as I find myself wondering how his abs would’ve felt under my touch, if his skin would be hard or soft just like his cheeks; wondering how many times you could trace the outline of his abdomen before getting bored of it; wondering how comfortable would it be to sleep on that chest of his.
Lost in my thoughts, I hadn’t realised I was staring at Jihoon’s back, him literally being one step ahead of me, and almost jump in surprise when he turns towards me. From the look of confusion he’s giving me and the silence of the class, I guess the time to wrap the presentation up has come.
“We’re glad we had the possibility of going over an interesting topic like this one which made us realise that no matter how many years had gone by since Jane Austen had written this story, some of its thematics are still relevant.” I take a step forward to stand beside Jihoon. “Many of us can find true love as soon as they meet their significant other, someone else lives a love which takes time and hard work before beautifully blooming or they can experience an unfortunate, almost fake, love in which they desperately want to believe in but, deep inside, they know it’s just based on one’s materialistic interests. However, the ones Jane Austen wrote and we presented are just three of the infinite shades of what love can be. Over the centuries, love has been a topic widely used in the art fields of every country and it’s fascinating how many different shapes it can take based on how different authors and artist perceive it.” I look at Jihoon, gesturing him to end the speech with a great quote.
“To say it in a very Austen-like way, ‘There are as many forms of love as there are moments in time.’ That was all for our presentation, thank you.” Both Jihoon and I bow to the rest of the class, who’s now busy clapping for us.
“Good job you two. I’m really impressed,” The teacher says as she claps her hands. “You can go to your seats.”
When Jihoon and I sit down at our desk, we subtly high-five and smile, satisfied by our presentation and teamwork, as the teacher calls for the next group.
While the new group is presenting their work, I can feel a pair of eyes boring holes on my back and, without even looking, I can already tell who these eyes belong to. The moment I turn around, the little doubts I had are now certainties. Chanyeol is basically threatening me with his glare and, for the first time in years, I’m really scared for my life. The last time I felt this scared is when mom ran after me in the house after breaking one of her favourite plates. I still shiver in fear at the memory of that day. However, trying to be subtle about it, I shift my gaze to Seokmin who is already looking at me, something between delight and confusion twinkles in his eyes.
To avoid being further stared at, I hide behind Jihoon and I know it’s quite useless considering he’s shorter than me, but it still gives me a sense of protection as his body shields mine.
The lesson ends after four or five presentations which were all interesting and, despite being someone who easily gets distracted, I found myself focusing and even enjoying them, noting down some of the topics on which I could do some more researches later on.
After the bell rings and before she leaves the class, Mrs Kim tells us she is going to give our marks by the end of the day and that we will find the paper with our grades in the main hall of the school.
I feel nervous and honestly can’t wait to know if we have aced it or not as Mrs Kim could change her mind if someone else had been better than us. Apparently, Jihoon feels the same as he is nervously bouncing his leg under the desk.
Next period starts and it takes another two hours before lunchtime. I feel my eyelids getting heavy, the number of yawns increases more and more. Luckily, the students sitting in front of me make a natural barrier and I can yawn as much as I want without the teacher noticing, so, for the time being, I’m safe from any scolding.
However, during the hour right before lunch, my eyes slowly want to close. The adrenaline rush from being late and the presentation had come to an end and I felt drained of all energies. I’m too sleepy but I have to find ways to fight sleep. For example, I pinch my arm and leg so maybe the pain wakes me up; I take notes so I have to be concentrated on what the teacher says. Nothing seems to work, though, and I feel more and more frustrated. That’s when I get a note from Jihoon. I rub my eyes to focus on the words written on the white sheet of paper.
Sleep for a while, please.
I’m the one frustrated at you trying not to fall asleep.
I can’t.
I’ll take notes and if the teacher wanders around the desks, I’ll wake you up. Okay?
It’s too risky.
Trust me, I won’t get you caught.
Plus, it’s my fault if we ended up working till late on the project so it’s only fair if I do the hard work while you rest.
I look up from the paper placed in between us and find Jihoon warmly smiling at me, slowly nodding his head in reassurance. I return his smile and accept his suggestion of napping a bit.
Maybe it isn’t too bad of an idea.
I lay my head on top of my folded arms and finally give in to sleep, closing my eyes. In no time, I enter the dreamland and the teacher’s voice becomes nothing but a distant humming.
The lesson is almost at its end when Jihoon wakes me up and saves me from being caught by the teacher. It’s the first time ever that I slept in class in the middle of a lesson but it was the best thing in my entire school life. The nap was long enough that I now feel rested and energised to face the rest of this school day.
The teacher walks away as soon as the bell rings and we’re free to go to the cafeteria.
I was about to thank Jihoon for letting me sleep when Chanyeol appears from behind Jihoon, grabs him by the hand and basically drags him out of the classroom. Chanyeol clearly wants to remind people of whom Jihoon belongs to after having seen his boyfriend being “stolen” by me due to the project for an entire week. Because, yes, Jihoon and I spent our lunch breaks in the library to find material for the presentation.
When the couple disappears out of the room, Seokmin and I look at each other and both shrug at Chanyeol’s behaviour before standing up and walking together to the cafeteria with rumbling stomachs.
Today, for the first time in a while, our group has gone back to the origins. Origins as in when only the three of us would sit at our usual table: Joshua, Seokmin and I.
“I see you’re alive, now,” Joshua mocks me as soon as I place the tray on the table. “This morning you totally were a zombie but I didn’t have the heart to tell you.”
“You had me going around looking like that?! Wow. What a friend.” I feign being offended and at that Joshua laughs.
“You always look good, my little bro.”
“Oh, please, don’t say that. It’s weird.” My face twists in fake cringing. “However, it’s because I slept in class.”
“Really?!” Joshua is shocked. His spoon almost falls into the soup he is eating.
“But just for a while and because Jihoon told me to do so.”
“And since when you do what Jihoon tells you to do?” Seokmin asks, his tone hinting at something else.
“I don’t do what he says, I slept on my own will.” I take a spoonful of rice and dip it in the soup so I wouldn’t meet his eyes.
“He’s becoming a bad influence.” Seokmin shakes his head and steals a cube of white radish from my tray.
“That’s not true and don’t steal my food!”
“I have to agree with Seok,” Joshua says and then turns to look better at Seokmin before saying, “You won’t believe what I have seen this morning and I wish I would know how to unsee it.”
“Oh my God!” I slap both my hands on my face and hide behind them, knowing where this is going to go. “Please, don’t tell him.”
“Tell me what?” Seokmin eyes dart from me and Joshua, waiting for one of us to explain what happened.
“When I went to his house,” Joshua points at me with his chopsticks “I found Jihoon walking out of his kitchen wearing nothing but a loose bathrobe.”
“No way.” It’s now Seokmin’s turn to drop his chopsticks in his dish. His mouth hangs open.
“Yes way. He even slept there.” Joshua looks proud of exposing me and Jihoon and even puff his chest.
“REALLY?” Seokmin shrieks and then looks at me. “Soon, did something happen between you two?”
“No, nothing happened, for fuck’s sake.” It comes out rude but I am tired of them thinking that Jihoon and I did something. The only thing we did was laying on the same bed while going over our speech for the presentation. There was this weird atmosphere as we were face to face but, of course, they don’t need to know that as we didn’t go past that. “We were working on the English project and fell asleep.”
“Wait, now I know why you were blushing during the presentation.” Seokmin rubs his chin as he recalls that particular event.
“He blushed?”
“While Jihoon was speaking, Soonyoung stood behind him and kept staring at him with a weird light in his eyes.” He gets closer to Joshua as if to whisper in his ear but purposefully keeps his volume high. “I bet he was thinking about the bathrobe.”
I was trying not to listen to their conversation and focus on my first decent meal of the day but upon hearing Seokmin mentioning the robe and as I was slowly zoning out, a sentence slips out of my mouth.
“It wasn’t the robe. Before that, he came down with only a towel-”
I stop midway, realising that I basically dug up my own grave.
“EH? HE WAS WEARING A TOWEL?” Joshua shrieks and his eyes go wide to the point I’m scared they could fall from his orbs.
“HE WAS HALF NAKED?” Seokmin screeches, too.
I shush them and shoot them the most murderous glare I can manage. “Don’t yell! There are eyes and ears everywhere here.”
“So our little Soonyoung isn’t as pure and innocent as we all believe, uh?” Seokmin nudges me with his elbows and his eyebrows repeatedly go up and down. “To be thinking about him in a towel, it must’ve been a great view.”
“I wasn’t thinking about him!” I push his arm away from my ribs.
“And you really want us to believe that you two did nothing?” Joshua scoffs.
“How many times do I have to repeat my words? We did nothing and nothing will never happen.”
“Said the one who was so sure about them never being friends.”
“And now they even sleep together. Did you sleep in the same bed?” Seokmin can’t help but pry and I reach my limit of self-control.
“Oh my God, no. We were in the living room. He slept on the couch and I fell asleep on the floor, that’s it.” I start gesticulating a lot out of annoyance. “Moreover, the first situation is different from this one. It was about friendship and now you’re alluring at something more than that and I can assure you nothing will happen between us.” I point at myself and at the general direction where Jihoon may or not may be at this very moment. “I like Wonwoo too much to cheat on him and the same goes for Jihoon with Chanyeol.”
“Did you realise that you two spend more time together than you do with your actual boyfriends?” Joshua pushes his tray away and folds his arms on the table.
“That means nothing.” I card a hand through my hair and lick my lips, dry from all the talking. “This week we’ve been seeing each other every day due to the project but we usually see during classes or sometimes after the band rehearsals. I can’t ignore him in class as we’re sitting beside one another and can’t ignore me when he is the one asking to eat out. All the things I do with him are the same things I do with you two, too.”
“But, trust me, it feels different. Who doesn’t know you would think you two are a couple, not you and Wonwoo or Jihoon and Chanyeol.” Seokmin starts, putting a hand on my shoulder and looking right into my eyes. “At school, Jihoon and you create a sort of bubble in which only the two of you exist. Because of that, if Chanyeol’s eyes could shoot lasers, he would’ve already killed you countless of times and, of course, Jihoon would follow and join you in the afterlife.”
Joshua turns to look at Seokmin and leans over to say, “I always believed that there was great chemistry between Jihoon and Soonyoung, they are the only ones who can’t seem to notice it.”
Saving me from being further frustrated by their argument, the bell rings signalling the end of lunchtime and of my interrogation.
“No one is pretending not to notice it.” I go back to being calm, keeping my hands busy with picking the grains of rice which spilt over the table. “There’s chemistry between us, I can’t deny it but it’s the same chemistry two friends have when they share the same hobbies and interests and who like to hang out together. Is that wrong? Why do we have to look like a couple? Why don’t you say the same about you and me, about Seokmin and me? Why is it that different?”
“Soonyoung, I-” Joshua starts, probably wanting to discuss it more but I had enough.
“No, let’s end it here.” I stop him before he could say something else. “And promise me you won’t breathe a word in front of Wonwoo. I don’t want him to misunderstand, I don’t want him to doubt himself and my feelings for him.”
Joshua and Seokmin look at each other for a while before nodding, promising to keep their mouths shut. I mouth the words ‘thank you’ for them to see before we all stand up and leave the cafeteria, Joshua going back to the library and us to the class.
Not too long after I sit down and rest my head on the desk, Jihoon comes back to our class and smiles as he walks towards me, hands hidden in his pockets.
“You know, you weren't wrong about Chanyeol wanting to murder you,” He says, plopping down on the chair.
“I told you. My death is near.” I close my eyes and sigh in resignation. “Take care of all my books and Shinee albums.”
“I will sell them and make a lot of money out of them so I can buy a new drum.”
“I'll haunt you in your dreams if you ever try to do that.” I shoot up on the chair and glare at him, trying to look as scary as possible.
“As if your face doesn't already haunt me while you are still alive.” Jihoon smiles but it doesn’t reach his eyes, it feels bitter.
I scoff and I’m ready to fight back but something tells me not to, so I change the topic. “By the way, thank you for letting me sleep.”
“Don't mention it, you needed it.”
The teacher walks in and we can’t talk anymore, too busy taking notes on the topic for the upcoming test.
Classes go by rather quickly that afternoon, Jihoon and I barely talk as I feel uneasy with Chanyeol’s eyes locked on me the entire time. I bet Seokmin sometimes looks over here, too, especially after the talk we had at lunch. Knowing him, there should be a voice at the back of his mind telling him he has to prove me wrong and that Joshua and he are right.
When periods finally end, everyone from my class rushes in the main hall where the English teacher has hanged the list of our marks. My heart is racing, its beating sound resonating in my ears as I push past a couple of my classmates to scan the paper and find mine and Jihoon’s name.
When I find them, I almost scream.
Immediately, I turn around and see that Jihoon is not too far from me. I grab him by the arm and guide him outside the crowd. When we get out of there, we hug, jumping in a circle out of happiness.
“FULL MARKS! WE DID IT!” I scream, Jihoon still engulfed in my arms.
“Yes, we really did it!” His voice is muffled by the fabric of my pullover.
“Not counting the last minute emergency, it was pretty easy.”
Jihoon and I part from the hug and he says, “That's because we have great teamwork.”
“We do!” I raise my hand for a high-five and, luckily, Jihoon doesn’t ignore it. “Oh my God, I'm so happy!” I continue squealing as I really couldn’t believe we got full marks during the first semester.
“Should we celebrate at ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ with a hot drink and a piece of cake?”
“Call but let's tell Seokmin and Chanyeol, they need to come with us.”
“Can it be just the two of us? In the end, it's our celebration.”
Seokmin’s words replay in my mind and I know I probably insist on bringing the other two with us but Jihoon is looking at me with expectant eyes, with a spark of hope in there that could turn into sadness if I happen to reject his offer.
I sigh. “Okay, then but let's sneak out before they can stop us.”
Not wanting to care about anything else, I sling my arm around Jihoon's shoulders, leaving my friend, his boyfriend and even Joshua hyung behind, both physically and mentally.
We’re aware that later we have to face the consequences of our choice but, at the moment, it doesn't seem to matter.
Despite the smile tugging at my lips as we look at each other, something heavy settles in the pit of my stomach, something telling me that I shouldn't be too reckless, that I should think carefully about the consequences of choosing to spend time with Jihoon.
All of the biggest mistakes in my life came from not paying enough attention to this kind of sensations.
Wonwoo's point of view
Mingyu and I are heading to Joshua's place as, today, we're rehearsing there.
The boys we a total pain in the ass in the group chat, asking us to buy food and drinks on the way to hyung's house.
Instead of buying them in our neighbourhood, we decide to do a pit stop to that cafè in Joshua's area, ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ which everyone seems to enjoy.
When we're out of the shop, from the big window, I can see Soonyoung.
Happy to see my Soonie after not having listened from him since yesterday morning, I rush to the door. Maybe I can spend some time with him while they make our orders or even asking him to come with us and stay at Joshua’s. It would be great having him by my side as I really missed him. However, when my hand reaches the doorknob, I notice that he's not alone.
He is with Jihoon.
They're laughing as they throw small pieces of paper at each other, smiling as they share a piece of cake, locking gazes as their eyes peek from the cup they're sipping from.
I feel a pang in my stomach, jealousy slowly trying to take the best of me while watching the two being happy in their own little world.
‘Why didn’t he tell me he was here with Jihoon?’
Mingyu, who probably hasn't noticed Jihoon nor Soonyoung, shoves me away and is about to walk in. I stop him on time by grabbing his wrist and he turns around, confused.
“What, hyung?”
“I f-forgot my wallet at home.” I lie sure that if I hadn’t, Mingyu would’ve walked straight to their table to either join or scold them.
“Oh? You told me you had it.” He feels his pockets, looking for his wallet but says, “I don't have mine too.”
“I'm sorry.”
He sighs and brushes a hand through his hair. “What do we do now? They'll kill us if we don't bring food.”
“We'll call Jihoon and tell him to buy something.” I glare at where Jihoon is seating and state with a voice colder than the current weather, “I'm pretty sure he's in the area.”
“Okay, I'll call him.”
As Mingyu fishes his phone out of the pocket, we resume our walking to Joshua's house. I don’t look back, not even once and as we get further from that cafè, the idea of Soonyoung being with Jihoon leaves a sour taste in my mouth.
How funny that, for once, the bitter taste doesn’t come from the black coffee but from what I thought was the sweetest thing in the world.
Notes:
And here we are, things are literally heating up between our Soonyoung and Jihoon and their friends seem to have noticed it! The incident really shook Soonyoung who can't stop thinking about it eheheheh teen hormones are like that, am I right? Hahaha
I'm sorry this chapter got delayed again but this week too has been a busy one and I think this one will be busy too so maybe I'll post next chapter on Monday instead of Saturday like I often do. In the meantime, you can read the other au I'm writing on twitter with my mutual and friend Rene! Here's the link Meet my eyes
By the way, I hope you enjoyed the chapter and, please, leave comments about your thoughts/theories if you want, I'll be glad to read them *-*
See you next week! I love yaaaa
Chapter 24
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Since the project was done, my afternoons weren’t as busy as they were before. Well, at least in terms of studying because most of the following week was spent with Wonwoo.
He got clingy all of a sudden, wanting to stay with me from the moment class ended until dinner time. I didn’t complain, though. It was nice being with Wonwoo considering how little I saw him the week of the presentation. As everyone pointed out, I had spent more time with Jihoon than with my boyfriend and maybe he missed me so much that he now wants me all to himself before he too had to disappear for a couple of weeks. Why? Because ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’ were engaged for a gig in a pub out of town the weekend before Christmas and so they have to practice a lot. According to Joshua, if they did well on this one, they could become regular performers at this pub as they held a music event every Friday. That’s why they all decided to have some time for themselves and for classes to finish at the end of that week before drowning in a sea of rehearsals.
Jeonghan and Seungcheol went on a short trip to the latter’s hometown down in Daegu.
Seungkwan decided to just rest at his house for the whole week, binge-watching some volleyball matches.
Mingyu went around the city to practice his photography skills, sometimes bringing Seokmin with him and using him as his model.
On the other hand, when Seokmin wasn’t with Mingyu, he would go over to Joshua’s to play some ‘Super Smash Bros’ at the Nintendo Switch.
Jihoon and Chanyeol had spent more time together, going on dates and having an early Christmas shopping, trying to find matching Santa or elves jumpers. I barely saw him and this saddened me a bit considering how busy he will be the following week, meaning that we won’t be able to see each other for a total of two weeks.
Wonwoo and I had pretty much the same routine every day. He would pick me up in the school courtyard and sometimes even sneak inside the building to wait for me right outside my classroom, his looks helping him elicit some useful info from a young junior. If I had to study or write an essay, he’d make me company at ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ as I did my homework, helping me out or just observing me working. If I was free, we would go either on a walk, using the cold weather as an excuse to stand close to each other, or at the arcade to play some games Wonwoo likes.
It’s at the arcade that I had another epiphany about him.
“You lost, again”, Wonwoo said, scrunching his nose as he smiles and turning on his stool to face me. The victory music playing from his machine which was right next to mine and it annoyed me.
“That’s not fair, you know I’m not good at games.” I had crossed my arms and pouted. “You don’t actually teach me how to play because you want to make sure you win. I bet if you taught me your techniques, I could even beat you, Jeon Wonwoo!”
“You’re right. I don’t teach you the right rules so you can lose,” he admitted quite proudly. “And do you know why?”
“Because you’re a cheater?!”
“Because you’re cute when you pout.” He quickly pecked my lips and before I could even realise what had just happened, he said, “Should I teach you how to properly play, now?”
Wonwoo had stood up from his stool to come behind me. He placed his hands over mine and started to move them to control the character fighting on the screen. He was explaining some of the moves and secret tricks I could use, his mouth hovering over my ear. Needless to say I couldn’t concentrate on the game as the only thing my mind could focus on was Wonwoo’s hot breath on my skin sending shivers down my spine and on all the places our bodies were touching: my back on his chest, his mouth on my ear, his arms over mine, his hands almost intertwined with my hands.
With a simple gesture like this one, Wonwoo had been able to make my brain go haywire, too lost in the sensation to notice that we had reached the end of the battle and that I had won.
“Should we get the price?” Wonwoo asked, moving away from me. I shudder from the lack of warmth his body radiated until a while ago. “You know, we can get a special prize if we use my tickets with the one you just won. Even if I helped you, you were the one who won.”
I turned around to look at him. He stood there, hand stretched for me to take. At that moment I realised that, yes, I had sure won the most special and precious prize and I didn’t even know how.
It’s Christmas time and the last time I’ve been this excited about a festivity was when I was 9 and still believed Santa Claus was real. Now, I’m happy not because of a made-up person but because the entire city seems to shine, to glow and everything seems more soft thanks to the white, candid snow.
Seoul’s streets are even more alive than they usually are, despite the weather being freezing cold. Banks of colourful LEDs are hanging from one side of the street to the other, hovering right above passer-bys heads; elves, reindeers, sleighs and fake snow reign in every shop in every area of the city; someone put LED lights on the trees alongside the streets and you could hear the Christmas carols in the Myeongdong and Hongdae area; on the riverside, there are numerous stands that had been set up for the Christmas Market and the vendors would be offering various kinds of things from hot food to souvenirs; in the different squares one could find some ice-skating rinks full of people showing off their skills or just learning how to ice-skate and every square has a huge pine tree fully decorated or just a cone-shaped LED tree still beautiful but not as much as a real tree.
At ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ the special Christmas drink is already available and it has become the only thing I drink when I set foot in here. I’m not the only one doing this, though. Since it’s a limited edition beverage everyone is here to get a taste of it before it’s too late and they have to wait a long time before they could drink it.
Everything seems to be so peaceful and happy around this time of the year. The atmosphere is even more perfect thanks to the falling snow which makes you feel like you’re inside a giant snowball on someone’s fireplace.
Christmas has been a holiday like the others to me since we’ve moved to Japan. However, this year it feels more special because it’s going to be different. It’s the first time in years that I’m going to celebrate Christmas here, in Seoul. When my parents got transferred here, their friends from there and mine, too, were sad due to our departure so my parents had promised them to go and pay a visit at least twice a year: once in summer and once in winter. So I never got the opportunity to spend this holiday with Seokmin and Joshua as we had to fly to Japan as soon as my classes ended to make sure to stay there as long as we could.
This year, however, I didn’t feel like going back.
While packing, I kept sighing and pouting to the point my parents came close to me, had me sit on the bed and asked me what was wrong. I told them the truth, that I was sad about leaving behind all of my friends, that I would’ve liked staying with them and that I was going to miss them so much.
I don’t know exactly what happened but what I know is that, at dinner, my parents suddenly proposed a deal to me. They would let me stay here, alone, as long as I didn’t throw big parties, didn’t procrastinate the house chores and phoned them at least twice a day: once in the morning as soon as I wake up and another one at around nine in the evening. Mom insisted on face-timing in case I called them when I was with Jihoon because she wanted to see him too. She had the audacity to say she’s going to miss that ‘little baby’ more than anyone right in front of Joshua’s salad who was at the table with us. He had come to say goodbye to us straight after the rehearsals and he too couldn’t believe his ears.
My parents were allowing me to be by myself.
If they weren’t 100% sure of their decision, Joshua helped my cause by promising them to keep an eye on me and to make sure I would go to his house to celebrate Christmas so I wouldn’t be all alone. Upon hearing that, they seemed more relaxed, of course, that’s because they trust Joshua more than they trust their own son. Well, that seems legit to me.
Happiness immediately took over all of my brain and body because I was going to celebrate this holiday with the best squad I could ever ask for and my boyfriend was going to be there, too. Actually, we had already planned how to spend Christmas and New Year’s Eve together and I bet it would be even greater because I, Kwon Soonyoung, am going to be there. All of the members of ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’ know that a party isn’t a real party if BooSeokSoon aren’t together. We’re the gag trio and no one is going to have fun without us. Or at least this is what we like to think.
Today it marks a week before Christmas and, to me, this is the best time to observe the different kind of people who roam the city. It’s a fun thing to do, watching with whom they are, where they go and guess what they’re thinking.
You can see those who frantically run from a shop to another to buy presents for their dear ones; those who enjoy their time under the falling snow, not worried about the shopping part because, maybe, they have already done it; small groups of teenagers loudly laughing and chatting before disappearing into a pc room and spend their afternoon in there, improving their gaming skills and levelling up their favourite character; couples promenading as they hold hands and stopping at some stalls feeding each other a mouthful of warm food; kids having snowball fights in the narrow side streets when they’re sure no one else is passing there, too afraid of getting scolded if they hit someone by mistake.
Christmas is such a happy holiday, everyone looks so happy and relaxed (if they had bought all the gifts), ready to enjoy some quality time with their families and friends free of any thought about work and school.
To be honest with you, I was just pretending to casually walk on the streets but I actually belong to the category of those who run to buy presents! I procrastinated the shopping part so here I am, spending the entire day finding the perfect items for the best squad. Luckily, I am pretty firm when it comes to buying things: I see it, I like it, I buy it. So by the time the sun is about to set, most of the people from my list are checked and the only ones missing their gifts are Joshua’s family and Jihoon.
You may be curious, so I’ll tell you what I got them. To Seokmin I bought some new earphones since he had recently broken his; to Joshua I thought a new game for his Switch would do the job; to Wonwoo I bought a scarf and a pair of gloves so he will stop freezing when we’re outside; to the rest of ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’ I bought matching jumpers with a “This is my too tired to function sweatshirt” stamped on it.
Another hour passes and I came out of a shop with a new classy wallet for Joshua’s father and a simple collar necklace for his mother. It’s not much considering how they’re taking care of me these days that I’ve been alone, sending me side dishes and bags of meat. I make a mental note to bake a cake to bring them on Christmas’ Eve.
Jihoon is the last one left and I’m really not sure what to give him. He has a lot of interests so I have a wide range of choice but because of the various things I could buy him, I panic. It’s like I see something and think “this will do”, but then I notice another item he could like and so I grab it and think “he may like this better” and then see something else and be like “or should I get this?”. It’s an infinite loop which does nothing but put me off.
However, as I walk down one of the main streets, my eyes land on a vitrine with lights which are dimmer than the others and I see it, the perfect gift. The feeling at the pit of my stomach is the same as when I saw the moon and star necklace some months ago. There’s that voice in my head saying “Yes, that’s the one for Jihoon.” So I confidently step in, feeling like I can be happier now that I’ve checked everyone from my list.
As I was going back home after a wild day of shopping (which basically counted as exercising), my phone buzzes and when I check the caller’s ID, I’m glad to see it’s Wonwoo.
“Hello?”
“Soonie, where are you? Are you still shopping?” From Wonwoo’s end, I can hear the drums playing and my mind immediately pictures Jihoon hitting the snares and the cymbals.
“I’m on my way to my house.”
“Did you find everything you needed?”
“Thank God, yes! It took almost a whole day, but I did it!” I giggle and Wonwoo does the same. “What about you? What are you doing?”
“We’re currently taking a break and I wanted to hear your voice. I miss you,” Wonwoo whispers the last part but, apparently, Seungkwan hears it anyway because he yells “Whipped!”
I snort and maybe Wonwoo hits the younger because suddenly the other side goes silent. It’s when I could tell that he was back that I say, “I miss you too, a lot. We’re haven’t seen each other as often as we did last week.”
“I know and I’m sorry.” I can tell he is really sorry from the way he softly speaks. “We basically spend the whole day playing and we even wrap up late. I wish I could take you to a date after practising but it’s too late at night.”
“I know and, anyway, I’m happier if you rest after the rehearsals. We have time to go on dates.” I wish I could be there now to hug him and tell him it’s really okay.
“God, what did I do to deserve you?” He contently sighs but there’s a note of tiredness to it. He must be really fatigued. “Are you free now or do you have something to do at home?”
“Nothing to do, why?”
“Do you want to come here? I’m sure that, as soon as I see you, I won’t be tired anymore!”
“Define here...where are you?”
“Joshua’s house.”
“I don’t know...I don’t want to be a nuisance.”
“You won’t, I promise!” He then whispers “Plus, Chanyeol is here too so why you should be a nuisance?”.
“Chanyeol is there too? Another reason why I should go home. He hates me.” It’s my turn to sigh as I watch a couple of kids chasing in the snow, one of them trying not to be the target of a snowball fight.
“C’mon! I know you don’t like him but we called Seokmin too and he said he’s on his way.”
I don’t need to see him to know he’s pouting right now thinking this trick could work on me. Well, it does work. “I will be there, then.”
“Oh, so you’ll come here because of Seokmin and not because I asked? Is this how you treat your boyfriend?” And he is now faking being offended. I roll my eyes as I mouth the words ‘what an actor’, knowing he isn’t able to see me.
“You know I would’ve come regardless of Seokmin’s presence. Let me leave the bags home and I’ll be there.” Wonwoo cheers on the other side and I can’t help but smile.
“Okay, baby. See you in a while.”
“See you.”
Wonwoo hangs up and I place the phone in my pocket, mind already working on what to bring them so I wouldn’t go empty-handed. I pitstop to my house so I could leave the bags in the living room and check my appearance in the mirror before going straight to ‘Coffee & Goodpie’. I know, I could’ve called Kihyun, the delivery guy, but the cafè is in its busiest hours so I would feel bad to call him when they probably need his help in there. Plus, I want to enjoy the snow for a little bit longer so I set off to go buying some hot chocolate for our hard-working boys and then go to Joshua’s.
As I take in the view of the sunset in this white and pure scenery, my mind wanders before focusing on this newfound feeling of freedom. It’s nothing big but I love being alone, being able to get in and out of my house without having to explain in detail where am I going and with whom I am meeting, free to watch tv up until late or cook something in the middle of the night when you feel hungry. Everything I do seems more thrilling, exciting but, at the same time, it makes me feel more responsible, almost an adult. I could get quite used to this.
When I finally get to Joshua’s house, Seokmin is the one opening the door. He looks at me as if I was his saviour.
“You’re here! Oh my God, I was really close to run away at the thought of you ditching and being left alone with Chanyeol.”
“I wouldn’t ditch you! I was late because of this.” I lift the two boxes filled with hot chocolate. “Ta-da!”
“You’re always the best!” Seokmin takes the boxes from my hands while I am toeing my shoes off so I could take my coat and beanie off.
“Am I forgiven?”
“Of course, you are. Now, let’s go.”
Seokmin leads the way to the garage where the boys had to move once Jihoon’s new drum set arrived. It was much bigger of a space and they made sure to make it soundproof before someone could complain about the loud music.
When we walk in, everyone was sprawled on the couches, chairs and beanbags of the small relax-area in one of the corners of the garage.
“And here it comes the most awaited guest of the day.” Everyone snaps their head towards Seokmin as he announces our entrance. “Give a round of applause to the Coffee & Goodpie’s hot chocolate!”
The boys all stand up and cheer as they eye the cups of the hot drink getting closer to them. A great reward for their work.
“So you’re cheering not for me but for the chocolate? Okay, I get it. I’m going away and the drinks are coming with me.” I pretend to be offended and I’m about to snatch the box from Seokmin’s hands when everybody shouts not to take the chocolate away from them.
“You know we were joking. Come sit here with us.” Joshua pats the spot next to him that it’s obviously meant for Seokmin.
I take care of handing the cups together with a heartfelt “you worked hard” to each one of them. Jihoon snorts when it’s his turn and I just stick my tongue out. When I give Wonwoo his cup and take one for me, I plop right beside him, giving him a quick peck on the cheek.
“How about a toast?” Seungcheol suddenly asks, all eyes are now on him.
“Now that I think about it, I’m kind of hungry.” Mingyu rubs his belly which rumbles as if to prove he is telling the truth.
Seungkwan hits Mingyu right on his head, Seungcheol mouthing a ‘thanks’ to him. Jihoon facepalms and says to a confused puppy/tree, “Hyung is not talking about that kind of toast, you idiot of a hyung.”
“A toast to what?” Jeonghan totally ignores the younger as he warms his hands with the cup.
“To us and our first holiday spent together.”
“I like it.” Joshua nods his head and the rest copy his action.
To everyone surprise, Jihoon is the first one to stand up and says, “Let’s all raise our cups, then!”
We all stand and form a circle, raising our cups midair. “To the first Christmas we will spend together. To our new family.” Seungcheol shouts while everyone else pushes their hot chocolate forwards cheering and laughing as they clink the cups and try not to spill the drink.
At the sight of them smiling, my heart is full and it feels almost too big for my chest. ‘our new family’ I think to myself and it seems incredible to finally feel like I belong to something, to somewhere.
Due to the constant moving from a city to another, from a country to another, I had many houses, many places to live in but none of them had ever felt like home. I had many friends from my childhood up until now with whom I grew up, played, hung out, shared some of the most important moments of my life but none of them gave me real affection.
Here everything is different. I found people I really adore, with whom I like spending my free time. They are people I want to spend my life with, making memories as we grow closer and closer, memories that eventually will become stories to tell my children and nephews. Joshua and Seokmin first and then the others became a new family to me, a family that gave me affection, love and made me feel like I was finally home.
One by one, I look at them, trying to engrave this moment in my mind and heart. I want to remember their voices, their smiles, their sparkling eyes. I want to remember everything so that in the future, I can recall it with a smile on my face and feel the same way as I do know, with my heart about to burst of joy.
After the break and having thrown the empty cups, the members go back to practising while Seokmin, Chanyeol and I go sitting on the couches in the living room so they won’t be distracted by our chatting or, should I say, gossiping.
“Have you heard that Bongcha and Chungho break up?” Chanyeol starts as soon as he falls on the couch.
“Bongcha and Chungho as the most popular couple of our school?” Seokmin asks, eyes widening at the news.
“The ones and only.”
“Why? Spill the tea, please.”
And like that, we spent the next hour or so talking about them and about the rumoured crushes of our classmates.
“Are you done with those rumours?” Joshua appears in the living room, jump scaring the three of us.
“Geez, hyung! Don’t do it ever again!” I whine.
“Why? It’s funny.”
I glare at him, trying to repress the instinct of killing him. “What do you want?”
“I wanted to tell you if you have decided what do you want for dinner.”
“For dinner?” Chanyeol checks the time on his phone. “It’s already dinner time?”
“We got to go then.” Seokmin stands up but Joshua stops him.
“I think that from my question it's pretty obvious that you will be eating here.”
“But you and the guys are surely tired and want to rest. Tomorrow there’s the gig and you need to be in great shape for it,” I say.
“C’mon! We had already planned it, to invite you over so you could dine here.” Joshua pulls his aegyo card and Seokmin is already wavering.
“Should we believe you?” Chanyeol asks, still sitting on the sofa.
“Yes. Everyone brought their bags here with their clothes so they could shower before eating.” Joshua proudly states as he straightens his back.
“He’s telling the truth.” Wonwoo walks in the room, backing Joshua up. “Please, Soonie. This way we can spend more time together.” He comes and wraps his arms around my shoulder in a back hug.
Once again, I find myself unable to resist him. “At one condition. We’ll be doing the cooking.”
“I see we have a deal.” Joshua comes closer to shake my hand, sealing the pact.
Seokmin, Chanyeol and I, shoo them out of the room so they could tell the others to start showering while the three of us would be deciding the menu and work right away on it. We grab a small blackboard to write the menu on it and then dispose it outside the kitchen so when the boy would go upstairs to use the bathroom, they could read it.
Menu of the day
Doenjang jjigae
Kimchi bokkeumbap
Meat cooked on the spot
Plain rice and side dishes
As we cook, the boys take turns to shower and then go to Joshua’s room to dry and get dressed so the bathroom is free for the next person to use. The ones who are already done join us in the kitchen and they make plans about what to do on New Year’s Eve as we forbid them to help us.
They decided to shower following their age order. By the time Seungkwan is done and calls Jihoon to hurry his ass and shower, we’re almost done with the food. Joshua helps me set the table, bring the portable gas stoves on the table and together with the huge dishes full of meat ready to be cooked.
As I am grabbing the drink from the fridge, I take a quick glance at the clock hanging on the wall and see that it’s time to call my mom.
“Joshua hyung, can you finish here? I have to call mom as I promised.”
“Go ahead, I’ll take care of the rest.”
“Thank you.”
The boys are making a ruckus around the entire floor and the loudest are, of course, Seungkwan and Mingyu as they’re having one of their bickering sessions with Seungcheol being on the side and laughing out loud at the two of them. Wonwoo is shaking his head, a smile tugging at his lips. In order to actually hear my mom speaking on the phone, I know I can’t stay here so I go upstairs in hopes the noises wouldn’t be as deafening as they are on the lower floor.
To my surprise, the door to Joshua’s room is ajar. Thinking that Jihoon may still be under the shower, I open it without hesitation only to find myself regretting it.
Standing in front of the mirror, there is Jihoon. He is completely naked and the only towel he has is the one he’s using to dry his hair before actually using the hairdryer.
I stop functioning for a while, gaze lingering for a second longer than it should’ve had on Jihoon’s butt before bumping into the doorframe with half of my body and zooming out the room, not really shutting the door behind me. I don’t get to reach the stairs that Jihoon is behind me, grabbing my wrist to stop me from walking.
He turns me around and, thankfully, the towel is now wrapped around his waist. Not that it matters anymore since I saw everything that towel hides, but I think my sanity would’ve definitely left me if I had to speak with a naked Jihoon.
“Soonie.”
“Uh? Yes? What?” I ask, trying to look everywhere but at him.
“Did you need something from Joshua’s room?”
“Y-yes. W-well, not r-really.” I mentally facepalm myself as I stutter. “I’ll come back later.”
“Are you sure?”
At that moment, I can’t help but look at him. It isn’t the first time I am seeing him like this. The same accident happened a couple of weeks ago at my house but, embarrassed, I had immediately averted my eyes.
However, today I can’t seem to be able to tear my gaze away from him. I keep on staring at Jihoon’s body, following the trail of this and that drop of water from his forehead to his jawline and then down his neck and collarbones; the veins on his arms are popping, his chest and abs even more defined. Then my mind runs to his lower body, remembering how well-built his thighs are and how firm and round his butt looked a while ago. I can’t deny that he is indeed handsome and now he even has the body of a grown-up man. No one would take him for an eighteen-year-old boy if they saw what I saw.
‘Soonyoung, get yourself together! you’re spacing out.’
“Soon, are you there?” Jihoon waves a hand in front of my face to check if I was there.
“Uh?”
“I asked if you are sure. If you need the room, I can get dressed and dry my hair in the bathroom so you can use it.”
“As you wish to do.”
“Just wait a minute then.”
Jihoon returns in the room and locks the door behind him. I just stay there, next to the stairs, waiting for him to get out, hopefully, fully dressed.
‘I can’t believe it happened again and that this time I saw him completely naked! I need eyes that didn’t see that. Fuck, he even caught me staring!’
Luckily for us, Joshua is downstairs probably busy helping in the kitchen or else he would’ve started laughing about it and screaming, getting everyone attention and eventually letting them know what happened. I don’t want even imagine what Wonwoo would’ve thought or if I would’ve died by Chanyeol’s hands before knowing it.
The sound of the door unlocking, makes me snap my head towards Jihoon. He comes my way. heading to the bathroom and when he’s close enough, he leans in and whispers in my ear “you know you’re blushing?”.
‘Kill me, now.’
I duck my head to hide my red cheeks and hit him on his arm. Jihoon pretends to be in pain because of my punch but then, he runs to the bathroom and sticks his tongue out before locking himself in there.
Sighing and shaking my head, I walk in Joshua’s room and go straight for the mirror to look at myself and, yes, my cheeks are as red and hot as chili pepper. But can you blame me? How could someone be emotionless in front of that?
Another sigh and I throw myself on the bed, finally being able to facetime mom. She asks me about the day and I tell her how I went shopping and that I’m currently at Joshua, waiting to eat dinner.
“There’s just the two of you tonight?”
“Actually no, mom. The rest of our group his here too.”
“So Jihoon is there too, right?” A light beams in her eyes as she mentions him.
“Yes, mom.”
“Can I see him? I miss him so much.” She wipes a fake tear to which I can only roll my eyes.
“Uhm, he-” I was about to tell her Jihoon was showering when he walks in the room. He was probably eavesdropping outside.
“Hello, Mrs Kwon! How are you?” Jihoon waves at her as he sits beside me on the bed.
“I’m fine, what about you? Are you eating? You’ve got skinnier since I last saw you.”
“Yes, don’t worry! I’m eating a lot, especially tonight. Soonyoung made a lot of delicious food.” He grins and his eyes disappear into crescents.
“I’m sure he did.” She has that motherly smile plastered on her face and I feel betrayed. She doesn’t smile to me like that. “When I’ll come back, you must come home so I can make you your favourite dish.”
“There’s no need to, Mrs Kwon.”
“I insist.”
“Think about enjoying your holidays over there.” I interrupt her, afraid they could go on forever with this. “We got to go, now! Dinner’s ready. Talk to you tomorrow!”
“Okay, bye Soonie, bye Jihoonie.”
We wave at her and once she hangs up, without saying anything to Jihoon, I go downstairs. I can’t even look at him in the face anymore, being super embarrassed.
When we get to the kitchen, everyone’s stare is on us. Head hanging low and a small smile on my lips, I go sitting next to Wonwoo while Jihoon takes the chair beside Chanyeol.
“What took you so long?” Joshua asks, breaking the silence.
“We were talking to my mom,” I answer.
“There was a minor inconvenience,” Jihoon says at the same time.
“Define minor inconvenience.” Seungcheol props his chin on his hands, curious to know what happened.
“Soonyoung needed to use Joshua’s room to call his mom and he walked in on me after I showered,” Jihoon admits, shy and quite ashamed of the situation.
“Again?!”
As that word leaves Joshua’s mouth, Jihoon and I snap our heads towards him and everyone follows our movement. At that moment, I could have used the power to turn people into ashes with just a stare. I would very much like using it on Joshua.
Wonwoo looks at me, waiting for an explanation and the same does Chanyeol with Jihoon.
“What does it mean ‘again’?” Wonwoo asks me.
“Has he already seen you like that?” Chanyeol asks Jihoon.
I feel like I could burst in tears from a moment to another. This was the only thing I didn’t want to happen. Joshua even promised he wouldn’t talk about it in front of Wonwoo. One day, that hyung is going to be partially the cause of my downfall.
“Actually-” Joshua is quick to interrupt me.
“It’s a figure of speech!” He laughs. “What are y’all thinking?”
“Right!” Jihoon awkwardly chuckles. “I was dressed and I was in there because I wanted to take the hairdryer to the bathroom.”
“That’s true.” At this point, I can only lie like they’re doing and hoping not to get caught.
“When I went into the living room, I saw Jihoon upstairs and he was dressed.” Seokmin lies, too, trying his best to back us up.
“Do you really think I would go around half naked?” Jihoon snorts, looking at a confused Chanyeol.
“We know he is shameless but not up to this point!” Joshua starts.
“Hyung! I’m not shameless!”
“Yes, you are.” Seungcheol agrees as he takes a mouthful of the jjigae.
“So shameless and with no manner that you sometimes scold your hyungs,” Jeonghan adds.
“And you don’t answer to our texts in the group chat when we ask you things,” Mingyu quickly takes advantage of the situation to get brave and say that to Jihoon.
“And you get late to our practices...” Seungkwan trails off, sorting the thoughts in his mind to look for things to blame on Jihoon.
“Well, go on. I have the whole day to hear you ranting about me.” Jihoon furrows his brows and puffs his cheeks, annoyed after the teasing.
Everyone laughs at his expression and the mood seems to lighten thanks to the guys’ jokes. Joshua and Jihoon’s last minute save has apparently been a success and they managed to fool the others.
Still, some time passes before I can completely relax and enjoy the rest of the evening between toasts and waves of laughter that never stop filling the room.
Around eleven, Joshua’s parents are back so we all have to leave. Wonwoo insists on walking me home so we leave but not before having helped them clean up the mess we made.
The atmosphere between us seems to be a little bit tense. As we walk, he has his arm wrapped around my shoulders so he can keep me close to him but I can sense that something is not right. He seems to be lost in a maze of thoughts but I guess this is not the right time to ask him. Instead, I try to enjoy the view of the snow covering the streets, the rooftops, overpowering every colour with its whiteness. I try focusing on the flakes floating in a magnificent dance, the air being their stage, the light from the lampposts their spotlight and the whistling wind the music their dancing to.
It’s only when we’re at my front door that I get brave enough to ask him the question.
“What are you thinking about?”
“Nothing,” he gives the expected answer.
“I can see it on your face that there’s something going on in there and there.” I bring my index to his forehead and then to his heart. “You can tell me everything, you know.”
“It’s nothing, really.”
“Well, if it’s nothing I can’t see why you can’t tell me,” I insist, knowing it’s the only way to make sure he lets everything out so he could feel better.
“Can I even win against you?” He chuckles and gives me a bear hug.
“Mmmh..no.”
We both giggle and then break the hug so that Wonwoo can explain what’s happening to him. “To be honest, I was thinking about when you and Jihoon came downstairs and at how Joshua looked happy to see you two together.” His eyes lose focus as he recalls the scene. “I know he wanted Jihoon to be your boyfriend. He had always said that before I met you and even when Jihoon and Chanyeol got together.” He deeply sighs. “Joshua is the person who knows you the best and if he says you and Jihoon are a match made in heaven, it makes me feel like I’m not enough for you.” His voice breaks and my heart tightens at the sight of a fragile Wonwoo. “At first, it was easier to bear with this feeling because you and Jihoon didn’t get along. However, now, you spend so much time together. Seeing both of you bantering and smiling makes me think that maybe Joshua is right.”
Wonwoo hangs his head low and looks at his feet, afraid I could confirm his thoughts and fears. My eyes get watery at the thought of how he must’ve felt when he saw us and because of how Joshua wouldn’t shut up about his theories on Jihoon and me.
‘How can he think he’s not enough for me?’
I take his hands and hold them tight, a fire burning in my eyes as I tell him, “Look at me.”
Wonwoo does lift his head to look at me in the eyes.
“Joshua can think whatever he wants but he doesn’t know what I think and feel. Jihoon is just a friend. At first, I didn’t like him but then I gave him a second chance and saw he’s not that bad. However, this doesn’t mean I have feelings for him. If that was the case, I wouldn’t be with you right now. The only person I like, the only one for whom I have feelings is you and you should never doubt that.” I leave one of his hands to hold mine up, pinky sticking out. “Promise me you will never think those things again.”
“But…”
“No buts. I told you I like you and all you need to do is to believe me.”
He links his pinky with mine and says, “I like you too, Soons.”
Wonwoo inches closer and kisses me.
Every time it happens, I can feel the butterflies in my stomach and I’m thrown back to the time we first kissed in that glowing garden. The weight of my feelings is too much that my knees can’t bear my actual weight. Somehow, Wonwoo knows it and he steadies me, his hands coming to hold me by my hips. I lock my hands on his nape and our breaths become one.
I’m on cloud nine once again.
As we kiss, with the corner of my eye, I see Jihoon walking past my house. He is wearing a weird expression, almost sad but I can really tell as we’re quite far from each other and he’s standing on the dark side of the road. Plus, I’m so inebriated by the kiss that I soon lose the concept of time and space and, for what I know, Jihoon could’ve been just a trick played by my mind.
When Wonwoo and I part, we’re short on breath and we’re both shy as we smile at each other. I slowly walk backwards, eyes never leaving his.
“So, good night.”
“Goodnight.”
Before walking in, I wave at him one last time and he does the same. I lock the door behind me and slide on the ground, back leaning on the wooden surface, the last trace of energy and control leaving my body.
I know I won’t make it to my bed feeling like this so I barely manage to throw myself on the sofa.
Once I succeed in climbing up the couch, I hide my face behind my hands and shriek thinking about Wonwoo’s face when I left him.
Everything was perfect out there: me, him, the snow and the kiss.
‘Stop Soonyoung, act normal for once. You’ve been together for a while now and you can’t be on the verge of fainting every time you kiss him. Be a man!’
I try to get myself together, trying to regain my lost sanity and, as I give myself tips on how to act next time we kiss, I slip into the awaited dreamland where everything smells like Wonwoo and, strangely, like Jihoon too.
Notes:
And here I am after 10 days since the last update. It's like the more I want to update on a regular schedule, the more everything gets against it. I tried to come back with a longer and spicier chapter though hahaha
After spending two weeks apart, do you think that something changed? Any guess about what Soonyoung bought Jihoon for Christmas? Is Wonwoo right about Soonyoung and Jihoon being meant to be? Let me know what you think!!
As always, thank you for being patient with me and my updates, for still sticking with me after six months of this au. The best part is yet to come! And also thank you for the 100+ kudos, this means really a lot to me T-T
See you soon!! <3
Chapter 25
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Today, it’s Christmas Eve and, to tell you the truth, it’s a bit sad that I can’t spend it with my parents but I’m excited to spend it with my friends.
We made plans for the entire week, from today until New Year’s day and almost every day is going to be a busy one as everyone suggested a lot of different things to do and try. For example, Mingyu suggested to spend Christmas Eve with our families so that on Christmas we could have lunch together and then hang out in the evening; Seungkwan proposed to try ice-skating, ready to get footage of our asses hitting the ground, including his; Wonwoo thought it could be fun to spend an entire day at someone’s house doing a Christmas movie marathon eating take-out food and drinking hot, homemade chocolate.
Of course, we left some free days that will be surely filled by those relatives who come to visit their families, to have neverending lunches or dinners, to bring presents and to tell the same old stories next to the fireplace: funny ones, cringy ones, boring ones.
Luckily or sadly, this year I’m exempted from family meetings but Jihoon and Joshua promised me to keep me company even during these times so that I won’t feel lonely. I teased them saying they will forget about me the moment they’ll see their uncles or cousins walk in through the door but Joshua and Jihoon exchanged one look and hit me at the same time on the head, telling me they won’t leave me alone, not even for a second.
They are willing to keep their promise but I’m willing to have at least twelve hours for myself so that I can laze around and mentally prepare to have people around me for the next week and a half.
So here I am, making breakfast in the kitchen to start my twelve-hour-freedom! I cooked some bacon with side-sunny up eggs and toasted bread. I basically inhale the food on the couch while watching the tv and the morning basically goes on like this with me going back and forth from the kitchen and the living room, eating whatever I can find and laying on the couch. I can finally catch up with an on-air drama that I started but put on hold for a while, too busy dating Wonwoo to watch it.
I was immersed in a fight between the female lead and the male lead’s mother when my phone buzzes. I try to ignore it but it keeps buzzing and I understand I have no choice but to answer if I wanted it to stop.
“What?” I shout annoyed at Joshua.
“My little bro, I see you are awake.”
“It’s almost two in the afternoon, of course, I’m awake!”
“Of course? Soons, when you’re home alone you wake up at four in the afternoon!” Joshua giggles.
“It was one time.” I sigh. “It happened just one time and it was because I fell asleep at seven in the morning due to binge-watching a tv series. You know it.”
“Yeah, yeah, sure thing.” Here it comes his sarcastic tone that only gets me more annoyed.
“I hope you called me for a valid reason!” I take a bite from the piece of sundae I’ve been holding for quite a while. “The drama I was watching had gotten to the good part aka the kimchi slap.”
“One, don’t talk with your mouth full of food or you’ll end up choking. Second, they still do that in dramas? They still let the guy’s mother hit the girl with kimchi? It’s gross. Third, it’s about dinner. Mom said to be here at eight, so you have six hours to get ready. Is it enough time for your slow ass?”
“Ah, ah, ah.” I fake a laugh. “You’re so not funny!”
“You know I am funny. So, see you at eight?”
“Yup, I’ll be on time, don’t worry.”
“Bye, then! Enjoy your time before the home invasion!”
“I will!”
When Joshua hangs up, I finish watching the episode before getting ready to make the dessert for tonight. I have bought all the ingredients to make a pie with custard and fresh fruit, Mrs Hong’s favourite one.
I blast some music while baking and eat some more but the dessert is ready and decorated by six o’clock, giving me enough time to relax in the bathtub, body immersed in hot water, a bath bomb making it all look glittery and sparkly. At some point, I even doze off in the tub but, knowing myself, I had set an alarm so that I wouldn’t end up being late.
Once I’m all clean and sweet-smelling, I head to my room to choose an outfit. It’s going to be just the four of us so I don’t wear anything too fancy. I pick a pair of blue jeans with a white t-shirt and a mustard-coloured sweater with holes in it (it’s not old, it’s just how fashion works nowadays).
‘Yup, this is perfect.’
I take the gifts and the pie I made, lock my house’s door and rush to Joshua’s house. When I check the time on my phone, I’m perfectly on time. The numbers on the screen had just changed from 7:59 to 8:00.
Joshua opens the door and he’s almost shocked to see me standing there.
“I thought you would be late for at least fifteen minutes!” He says moving away so that I could walk in the house and toe my shoes off.
“Surprise! Now, take the pie and put it in the fridge so I can take my coat off.”
“You didn’t have to make a pie, dear.” Mrs Hong appears from the kitchen, snatching the dessert from her son’s hands.
“Yes, I had to. Plus, it’s your favourite.”
She peeks inside the box and beams at the sight of the fruit on top of the custard. “You know me too well.”
“Don’t spoil her too much, son.” Mr Hong says from his spot on the couch.
“She has been cooking food for the four of us, she deserves a reward.” I grin as I join him and Joshua in the living room, placing the gifts under the big Christmas tree standing next to the window.
“Come sit with us, we were watching The Grinch.” Joshua pats the space next to him.
“I think I’ll check to see if your mom needs help in the kitchen.”
“She said she’s almost done!” He waves his hand absentmindedly, eyes trained on the tv screen.
“That’s because you don’t want to be the do-nothing between the two of us.”
“You caught me.”
“I know you too well.”
We both giggle and he ends up joining me and his mother in the kitchen. She really was almost done with the dinner so she simply lets us setting the table and decorating it with Christmas-y centrepieces and even some fake snow.
Once the plates were all laid down on the table, we take our places and start digging into the delicious food Mrs Hong made. Her cooking is the best, second to my mother’s of course.
During the dinner, we facetimed my parents and talked a bit with them, joking about how peaceful and quiet was the dinner without them. They pretended to be hurt and sad but we eventually laughed at that and admitted it was weird not having them around. They hang up when one of their friends tells them it was time to eat the dessert which becomes the cue to also bring my pie out.
Mrs Hong cuts the slices and Mr Hong is expecting to get the biggest one, but to his surprise (not ours, though) he gets a normal one while the biggest one is for Mrs Hong herself. Joshua’s father feels the betrayal and almost pouts which is a rare sight, hence why Joshua brings is phone out and takes pictures of this scene and sends it to his family overseas who immediately teases Mr Hong.
When we’re actually done with the dinner, Joshua and I suggest to Joshua’s mother to be the ones to clean up but she refuses, telling us to hurry up and go to my house as Seokmin texted me saying he was on his way.
Why Seokmin is coming over? Because we’re going to have a pyjama party at my house! I know my parents said no parties at my house but they had agreed to this as well as the lunch we’re going to have tomorrow with the guys. I’ll be stuck for more the next 24 hours with Joshua and Seokmin and it’s amazing! I know I’m going to be their third wheel, but still, I’ll have my best friends next to me for a whole day. We’re going to have a lot of fun!
The moment I was about to turn the key into the lock, Seokmin’s dad drops him off in my driveway. He quickly waves to his father first and then he runs to us with a bright smile on his face.
“I’m legit excited for this, you know?” He says.
“Me too. The three of us haven’t slept together for such a long time!”
“I know, right?”
“We’re just going to sleep, what’s exciting about this?” Joshua chimes in. “Please, open the door. It’s freezing out here.”
“You’re seriously no fun, hyung.” Seokmin huffs looking at Joshua.
“It’s almost midnight, what do you want to do at this hour?” Joshua hurries inside the house once I open the door and move so that they can walk in.
“Play truth or dare?” Seokmin gives a strange look to Joshua who seems to understand what his friend meant with that stare.
“Really? It’s just the three of us, though,” I say as I launch the keys on the living room’s table and already get myself to work on the arrangement of the sofas so we can sleep in here.
Seokmin runs to help me. “I know but it’s to kill some time. I’m not sleepy at all.”
“We could watch a movie.”
“Too boring,” Joshua shouts from the kitchen, rummaging the fridge for drinks and maybe something to eat as if he hadn’t already eaten a lot. “Truth or dare seems the best option anyway.”
“Okay, then. But don’t complain if that too gets boring, am I clear?”
“Yes, sir.” They shout at the same time.
We change into our pyjamas and I make some hot chocolate before we all gather around the coffee table to play the game. To decide who goes first, we play a round of rock, paper, scissors. Oddly, I win.
“Seokmin, truth or dare?”
“Let’s go easy, for now. Truth.” Seokmin brings his knees closer to him, maybe a little bit afraid of what I was going to ask him.
“Is it true that you had a summer fling with Yugyeom this summer?”
“What? No! Absolutely not!” His eyes widen and he shakes his head.
“Wait, where did this come from?” Joshua asks, confused.
“I heard one of his classmate saying that Yugyeom and Seokmin have spent their summer holidays together and that Yugyeom can’t shut up about our Seokminie so they thought they had a fling,” I explain, sipping my hot cocoa.
“It’s true that we went to the same resort this summer but there wasn’t anything between us, I swear,” Seokmin says while looking at Joshua.
“I know, it was just to tease you,” I smirk at him, evilly. “It’s your turn to ask.”
“Truth or dare?” Seokmin asks Joshua.
“Dare.”
“So brave, our hyung!” I mock him. “Seokmin, make him regret choosing dare.”
“Oh, I will.” Something shifts in Seokmin’s gaze, there’s an evil glint in his eyes when he says, “I dare you to text the last person you sent a flirty text to and ask them if they’d like to go on a date with you.”
‘What is Seokmin doing? Is he trying to ruin his chance with Joshua hyung?’
“No problem.” Joshua takes his phone out from his bag and quickly types a text, pressing the send button.
At that moment, Seokmin’s phone buzzes. I put my cup on the table and rush to Seokmin’s side to check who sent him a text.
“Don’t tell me…” I trail off when on Seokmin’s screen I see Joshua’s name and a simple ‘Want to go on a date with me?’ written on it. “Oh my God. What is happening?”
“I sent him a flirty text this afternoon, one of those weird pick-up lines and that’s why I now sent him this text.”
Seokmin is still in a shocked state, mouth open and eyes blinking as he stares at his phone. “Do I really have to go on a date with you now?”
“You dared me so you can only accept my invitation. You can think of it as a friendly date.” Joshua shrugs and puts his phone back in his backpack.
Seokmin clears his throat and, with evident redness on his cheeks, says “Okay, then. You choose when and where.” He takes a long sip from his cup. “You ask Soonyoung, now.”
“Right. Truth or dare?”
“Truth.” I’m too afraid of this man to answer ‘dare’. If I did, it would’ve meant willingly throwing myself into a cage with a hungry lion.
His usual devilish grin is back. “Do you like more Jihoon or Wonwoo?”
“What?”
“You heard me well, Soons.”
“I mean, it’s obvious I like Wonwoo, he’s my boyfriend!”
“But what about Jihoon? Don’t you like him?” Seokmin asks, once again his knees close to his chest so he can rest his arms on them.
“I like him but as a friend. It’s a kind of liking different from Wonwoo’s.”
“You really never thought of him as something more than a friend?” Joshua questions me and wears the expression of someone who wants to hear only the truth. “Never felt a tad bit attracted to him?”
“If I have to be honest with you, I did. When I saw him half naked but I guess it’s normal considering I’m a teenager and my hormones are all over the place.” I stand up, annoyed by the fact that they’re once again bringing this topic up. “If Seokmin had seen him, he would’ve been attracted to him, too. However, this doesn’t mean I necessarily want him as something more than a friend.”
“But the way you look at each other-”
“Stop, please.” I interrupt Joshua to beg him. “You know me. If you keep pushing me like that, I’ll end up pushing Jihoon away so that you would stop reading too much into things. I would lose him as a friend and I don’t want that.” Tears threaten to fall from my eyes. “Not now that I found him,” I whisper to myself.
“I’m sorry, Soonyoung. I didn’t mean to do that.” Joshua stands up and comes closer to hug me. I let his arms embrace me and I lean my head on his chest.
“Should we wrap the game up? It’s late and we all have to get some sleep as tomorrow is going to be a busy one. We have to cook for ten people,” Seokmin says as he comes over to pet my hair as one would do with children.
“More like an army considering how much Mingyu and Soonyoung eat.”
“Hey!” I pinch Joshua’s side and laugh.
“Let’s all go to sleep, c’mon.”
Joshua pulls away from the hug and pinches my cheek. I turn off the light and everyone tucks themselves under the blankets. Not even five minutes later, we’re all lulled by Morpheus’s arms.
Next morning I wake up because of a ringing sound. Thinking it’s the alarm, I sit on the sofa and look for my phone that’s probably somewhere beneath the blankets. However, the moment I find it, it’s the moment I realise that the ringing it’s not a constant one. It interrupts only to start again a minute or so later.
The doorbell, that’s where the sound comes from.
“Who’s at the door this early in the morning?” I mutter to myself as I reach the door, scratching my head and trying to comb my hair with my fingers.
When I open the door, I’m surprised to find Jihoon, standing there and about to ring again.
“You finally woke up!” He pushes the scarf that was covering his mouth down and smiles.
“Come in.” I move away and he walks in, taking off his shoes, scarf and coat. “What are you doing here?”
“Keeping you company! I promised you I wouldn’t leave you by yourself these days.” Jihoon goes straight for one of the stools in the kitchen.
“There’s no need to.” I join him, rubbing the sleep away from my eyes as I walk and almost tripping over my own feet. “Why haven’t you called?”
“I did but you wouldn’t pick up. I guessed you were still sleeping so I decided to just come over and take you out for breakfast. Just something quick before helping you cooking for today’s lunch.”
“That’s kind of you but I think we should just call Kihyun and tell him to bring the usual for breakfast.”
“We could do that too if you don’t want to go.” He fumbles with a bottle cap he had found on the table. “Actually, it’s too cold outside.”
“I’ll call him then.” I punch the number on the keyboard and wait for Kihyun to answer the call before ordering three caramel macchiato, a black coffee and four big chocolate muffins.
“Why did you order so much? It’s just the two of us,” Jihoon says as soon as I hang up.
“Because…”
“We’re here too.” Joshua emerges from the living room, Seokmin trailing behind him. From their expression, they’ve been awake for quite a while and just waited for the right time to pop out.
“Oh, why are you here?” Jihoon asks.
“Why are you here? Isn’t a bit too early to be at someone’s house?”
“First, it’s ten in the morning so it’s not early. Second, I’m here to make sure he woke up and he’s ready to cook for us,” Jihoon explains. “Now, it’s your turn to answer my question.”
“We had a pyjama party so that we could be already here and help Soons with the cooking.” Joshua places himself on the stool right in front of Jihoon’s.
“You had a pyjama party and I knew nothing about it?” Jihoon looks at me feeling betrayed.
“It was pretty boring. We tried to play truth or dare but went to sleep right after the first round,” Seokmin says, finally speaking as he’s now a tad bit more awake.
“Truth or dare? Something juicy happening?”
“Joshua hyung asked Seokmin on a date,” I tell Jihoon, happy to see some action between those two who have been pining for each other since who-knows-when.
“Finally! I thought this wasn’t going to ever happen!”
“I know, right?”
“What do you mean?” Joshua glares at us and we immediately stop talking about them.
“N-nothing. It was just a figure of speech,” I try defending Jihoon and me and I’m saved by the doorbell. “This must be Kihyun.”
“I’m going to take it. I’m the one who barged in here so it’s only fair if I buy breakfast.” He gets up and talks to Kihyun for a bit before coming back in the kitchen with our coffees and food.
Jihoon and I exchange glances as we look at Joshua and Seokmin barely making eye contact, too shy and too aware about what had happened last night. They will have to go on a date but they don't know how to act around each other in the meantime that’s why we were now looking at a quite bold Joshua who couldn’t help but stare at Seokmin who was a blushing mess.
It was amusing seeing this side of them which rarely came out. They have been so frustrating, Seokmin has heart eyes for whatever Joshua does but he is too dense to realise that Joshua looks at him with the same loving gaze and just pretends to flirt with other people because he’s not sure about how Seokmin feels. To us outsiders, it was pretty obvious and I hope it’s going to be this way for them too after the date so they can finally be together. At that point, we could officially have double dates or triple if Chanyeol and Jihoon wanted to join. His name makes a bell ring in my head.
“Is Chanyeol coming later?”
“Mmh, no. He said he would be busy the whole day so he won’t be able to join us at all today,” Jihoon says and he seems unaffected by the news, almost relieved that his boyfriend won’t be here.
“Oh, I see.”
An awkward silence falls on us until Joshua clasps and rubs his hands saying, “Should we get started with the cooking before it gets too late?”
“Aye!” We all shout in unison.
Seokmin cleans the table while I take the ingredients out of the fridge and pass them to Jihoon and Joshua who place them on the kitchen counter. As they’re all going to help me, I hand them an apron each and they wear it.
“Let me help you,” I say when I see Jihoon struggling to tie the strings on his back.
“I can do it, don’t worry.” He looks at me, still trying to make a knot on his own.
I hit his hands and he finally lets the strings go. “Here, that’s how you do it.” His back is facing me as I take the strings from the front, make them go around his waist and then tying them. “Done.”
“Thank you.” Jihoon turns around and gives me a smile.
“Shit, that was domestic,” Seokmin suddenly exclaims and Joshua giggles.
“Shut up and let’s get this food ready,” I push them both towards the table and pass them some vegetables that need to be chopped.
Thanks to them, the cooking is done sooner than expected. Joshua and Seokmin are good at chopping and cutting things while Jihoon is a valid assistant. He’s fast and a quick learner. He had done most of the work, leaving me nothing to do but passing him the ingredients and tasting the different dishes to see if they were cooked, too salty or too bland. That’s why I decided to give him credits for this after the boys will taste the food.
“Since we’re done, should we take turns to wash up and change? We’re still wearing our pyjamas,” Joshua makes us notice this detail and both Seokmin and I look at each other to confirm that, yes, we definitely needed to change clothes.
“Rock-paper-scissors to see who has to go first?” Seokmin proposes.
“Let’s do it!”
Joshua, Seokmin and I play three rounds, all won by Joshua. He goes first, then, of course, it’s going to be Seokmin’s turn and I will be the last.
Jihoon pats me on the shoulder. “Think that you will be relaxing while we’re going to set the table and welcome the guests.”
“I will have to hurry or else what kind of host they will take me for?” I groan.
“I’ll cover for you and tell them it was Joshua’s fault. They’ll pester him and leave you alone.” He whispers in my ear and then chuckles.
“Lee Jihoon, you’re a mean man,” I say but eventually ending up chuckling too.
“This is called telling the truth. It’s not being mean but being honest.”
I shake my head, still smiling. “Help me tidying up the living room. We need to take away all the blankets and put the sofas to their original place.”
“Yes, sir.”
We clean up, almost starting a pillow fight which is luckily avoided thanks to Joshua who came downstairs, glaring at us. It was a clear warning about not to make a mess before the guests arrived. Jihoon and I smile at him like the two angels we are and get back to tidy everything up while Joshua starts washing the utensils we used to cook.
By the time Seokmin is done, every corner of the house shines so they all sit on the sofa watching the tv while I go upstairs to shower, hoping the boys won’t arrive any time soon.
Of course, they get here the moment I step in the shower cabin and I wonder if Jihoon really blamed Joshua hyung for my absence.
As I was drying my hair, I hear a knock on the door.
“It’s open!” I shout over the sound of the hairdryer.
“Are you done?” Jihoon head peaks from the door and I thank God I was at least wearing my boxers and black jeans. “Joshua wants to know if he can start heating some of the dishes.”
“I just need to dry my hair, so tell him he can do that.”
“Okay,” Jihoon says but doesn’t walk away. He stays next to the door, staring at me.
“What? Why are you staring?”
“What do you think?” He winks as he bites his lower lip and then chuckles.
“You pervert! Get out! Immediately!” I throw a damp towel at him but he closes the door before it could hit him.
‘What has gotten into him? Why is he being such a flirt these days?’
I shake my head to get rid of the image of him winking and biting his lips, then I keep drying my hair, trying to convince myself that my cheeks are red due to the heat coming from the hairdryer.
When I go downstairs, everyone had already taken their place around the table, leaving a spot for me in between Wonwoo and Jihoon.
“I’m sorry if I wasn’t the one welcoming you,” I say as I sit down, giving a peck on Wonwoo’s cheek.
“Don’t worry, we know it’s Joshua hyung’s fault,” Seungkwan says, glaring at the said hyung.
“It’s not my fault he couldn’t win at rock-paper-scissors.” Joshua shrugs.
“Still, you could’ve let him go after you.”
The others follow Seungkwan and start pestering Joshua, blaming him for my being late in joining them at the table.
“Did you tell them?” I whisper in Jihoon’s ear while the others are busy shouting at each other.
Jihoon places his hand on my leg and leans in to whisper too. “Yup, they asked why you weren’t there and I told them the truth. No need to thank me”
He looks at me, hands still softly put on my thigh, and winks. I roll my eyes but I let a small chuckle slip out of my mouth. Then, I look around and see that they all had stopped bickering and were now talking like normal people usually do.
Wonwoo is staring down at Jihoon but when he notices me looking at him, his expression immediately changes and he smiles, taking my hand under the table.
I can feel the tension in the air and it’s becoming uncomfortable but before I could think further into this, Seungcheol speaks.
“Let’s eat, please. I’m starving and I can’t wait for you to open my gifts!”
The lunch goes by smoothly. We managed to avoid a food battle between Mingyu and Seungkwan, the latter was really trying his best to annoy the shit out of his taller friend.
As for me, I constantly felt like I was standing (well, more like sitting) in between two fires. One kept glancing at the other and they barely exchanged a word. When Jihoon tried to get my attention and talked to me for more than five minutes, Wonwoo would get possessive and wrapped his arm around my shoulder to pull me closer to him and put distance between Jihoon and me. Noticing that and remembering the talk Wonwoo and I had, I tried to keep my conversation with Jihoon to a minimum, making a mental note to explain him everything as soon as we had some spare time alone.
Joshua and Seokmin volunteer to wash the dishes and, taking the hint, I push everyone in the living room to leave the two love-birds by themselves. They must have a lot to talk about and I just hope things are going to turn out well.
Some of the boys are squishing on one of the sofas while some of them (read Seungkwan and Seungcheol) are laying on the other two couches, belly almost exploding due to how much food they had eaten. Wonwoo has taken the armchair and he’s letting me sit on his lap, his arm encircling my waist and chin resting on my shoulder.
No one speaks and some of us doze off as we wait for everyone to be in here so that we can move to the most awaited moment of the day, the moment in which we will all exchange our gifts.
When, after half an hour, I see Joshua and Seokmin walk in the room, I feel a knot tying in my stomach. I feel nervous as I wonder if they will all like the presents I chose for them, if maybe I had to work a little harder to find the perfect ones for each one of them.
Wonwoo seems to notice the slight shift in my mood because he pulls me closer to him and tightens the hold on my waist. I turn around to look at him and he simply smiles at me. Call me whipped, but this is enough to calm me down a bit.
“Since we’re all here, who wants to start?” Seungcheol finally sits on the couch, making space for Joshua and Seokmin.
“I’ll go first!” Mingyu yells, rushing to the corner of the room where all the gifts were. “I’ll be the ice breaker!”
He hands to each one of us their bag and then goes back to sit down between Jihoon and Jeonghan. After him, there’s Seungkwan, then Seungcheol, Jeonghan and so on.
When someone gave us our present, we were quick to open it up to check what we’ve gotten.
So far, I got shirts, phone cases, socks, gift cards to use at ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ and to buy manhwas. Wonwoo got me a book I had been wanting to read for ages.
Now, it’s Jihoon’s turn and he hands me a small paper bag with a box inside of it. I take the white box and I slowly open it with trembling hands. There’s a necklace inside: a silver pendant with a tiger on it standing beneath a starry sky and a crescent moon.
It’s beautiful and I can’t stop looking at it, brushing the carved tiger with my fingertips. I steal a quick glance at Jihoon. His eyes were already on me and I smile at him, trying to convey to him how grateful I am for the necklace.
I manage to close the case and put it back in the bag only when it’s my turn to hand the gifts.
Jihoon is the last one to whom I go to because I don’t want to miss his reaction when he opens it. Once again, I’m super nervous but the moment his eyes light up at the sight of the new pair of drumsticks, the frown on my face is replaced with a smile.
Yup, drumsticks were the perfect gift for him.
One of the first times I went over to his house, I had noticed the collection of his old sticks and he had so many of them with different styles and patterns on them. That’s why when I saw this pair of black drumsticks, I just knew I had to get them for him.
To make this pair even more special than the ones he already has, I asked the seller to make a small carving on each one of the sticks. On one are now carved, in a scarlet red, the words “From Hoshi to Jihoonie” and on the other one, the date of this Christmas.
Judging by his agape mouth and his teary eyes, I had done a great job. However, to be sure he liked it, I’ll just ask him later when we will be alone.
For now, his reaction still counts as a small victory.
“So, what’s the big thing y’all wanted to talk about?” I ask, placing the tray with the cups full of hot chocolate on the coffee table.
“We had a gig in a club some time ago, right?” Jeonghan asks to which all of us nod. “Well, the owner called Seungcheol this morning and they want us to be regular performers starting from after holidays.”
“Are you serious?” Seungkwan’s eyes grow wide and his head snaps towards Mingyu who’s wearing the same expression as him.
“They really want us to play for them?” Wonwoo, who’s usually good at controlling his emotions, is also shocked.
“They do.” Seungcheol reaches for one of the cups on the table and takes a sip of the chocolate. “They really liked our music and they said the customers have been talking about us a lot.”
“You’re going to be famous!” I throw my arms in the air, flailing them in excitement. “Isn’t that great?”
“This calls for a celebration!” Seokmin shouts from his spot on the floor, hitting Joshua on the knee so he could say something.
“We could go out tonight and have a drink, what do you think?” Joshua eventually asks to all of us.
“We definitely should before you become too famous to hang out with us.”
“Soonyoung, don’t say that! We will always have time for you and Seokmin.” Mingyu smiles and it makes his words sound like a genuine promise.
“However, he’s right. We need to celebrate tonight,” Jihoon says while looking at every one of us.
“I’m sorry but I promised my mom that I would’ve been home tonight. We hadn’t had lunch together today so she said I should be home for dinner.” Seungkwan shoulders slump a bit.
“Yeah, me too actually.” Mingyu sighs.
“Jeonghan and I have a double date with my older brother and his fiancèe so we can’t tonight.” Seungcheol downs his hot drink and places the cup back in the tray. “But we can celebrate another time, right?”
I nod. “Well, the rest of us can still hang out, though. What do you think?”
Wonwoo, Jihoon, Joshua and Seokmin all agree for a night together at the noraebang.
We stay a little bit more in the living room chatting about the band’s new songs, what to do on New Year’s Eve and how to manage time to see each other once they will start rehearsing for their once-a-week performance in the club outside the city.
Mingyu being caught dozing off on the couch was the cue for everyone to go back to their houses and spend the rest of the days with their own family and their own things to do.
Wonwoo goes back home too to get changed for the night and we agree to meet at the noraebang we always go to. At some point, Joshua and Jihoon go to their houses too, wanting to take a quick shower and then come back here since we live in the same neighbourhood and it won’t take them that long to change.
Seokmin and I are the only ones left at my house and we decided to just get already dressed for the night before those two brats could come again and bother us.
While Seokmin is in the bathroom, I take the phone and facetime my parents to tell them not to worry about the house and to thank them for letting the boys come here. We had a good time together and my parents seemed to be happy to hear about it. Of course, mom kept on asking about Jihoon and only stopped when I promised her to call later so she could wish him a merry Christmas. When I hear the lock of the bathroom door, I hang up and relieve Seokmin to take a (hopefully) long hot shower.
I walk in my room twenty minutes later to find a Seokmin dressed in a black and white striped sweater and a pair of white jeans, his hair styled down.
“You look good!” I repeatedly slap on his back. “Wanting to look good for someone in particular?”
“Not really.” His cheeks redden.
“Right, I forgot. You already scored yourself a date with him,” I chuckle as I put on a white turtleneck I took from the closet.
“I still can’t believe what happened last night.” Seokmin sits on the bed and grabs his head. “How could I’ve known I was the last person he flirted with through texts?”
“You couldn’t know, you’re just lucky.” I grab a pair of light blue jeans that was laying on the bed next to where Seokmin was sitting. “or it could be fate telling you this is the right time to confess your feelings for him.”
“I don’t know. I don’t think he reciprocates my feelings.”
“If you don’t tell him, you’ll never know.”
“But what if I lose him once I confess?”
I get closer to him and put my hands on his shoulder, looking at him straight in the eyes. “Trust me on this, you won’t lose him.”
“How do you know?”
“I just do. So, please, listen to me and put the words ‘the end’ to your and his pining.”
Seokmin nods and at that time, the doorbell rings too.
We go downstairs and Joshua and Jihoon are there, all handsome and ready for the night. As they get comfortable in the living room, I check them out and I can’t help but smile at how they dressed up to go to a simple noraebang. Joshua is wearing a red turtleneck, jeans and a long beige coat meanwhile Jihoon has a white and beige striped shirt, light blue jeans and an azure jacket on it.
“At what time should we meet with Wonwoo?” Joshua says plopping on the sofa right in front of the tv.
“At nine at the noraebang.” I look at the clock on the wall. “It’s almost six now. What should we do to kill time?”
“Should we watch a movie?”
“Sounds good to me!” Seokmin says taking the place next to Joshua on the sofa.
“Yeah, we could do that,” Jihoon agrees with them.
“Well, you pick a movie and I will bring food and drink, okay?”
“Call!” They all shout.
I was about to head to the kitchen when I remember my phone call with mom. “Oh, Jihoon, can you come with me in the kitchen?” I ask a very much confused Jihoon.
“Okay, sure.”
We step in the kitchen and he helps me taking the bowls to pour the chips in and he puts the corn in the microwave to make it pop.
“Jihoon, I have a favour to ask you.” I’m way too embarrassed about what my mom was about to make me do.
“Shoot.” He leans with his back on the kitchen counter, arms crossed over his chest.
“Well, I talked to my mother before and she wanted you to phone her.” I put my head in the fridge to take some cans of coke as a way not to look at him.
“That’s it?”
My head snaps towards him, slamming the door on accident “What do you mean?”
“You made it look like as if you were about to ask me for one of my organs so you could sell it at the black market.” Jihoon giggles and shuffles towards the microwave as the timer stopped and the alarm went off. “If it’s about calling your mother, I can do that.”
“It’s just that she’s being embarrassing. I don’t want her to burden you.”
“It’s not a burden.” He flashes me a bright and sincere smile “I’m glad she likes me.”
“She does. Almost more than she likes Joshua,” I whisper the last part to prevent Joshua from hearing. God knows how whiny he will get if he knew. “Here, you know how to unlock my phone.”
He takes the device from my hand and quickly unlocks it, scrolling through the contact list until he reaches my mom’s number. She answers after the first ring.
‘She must’ve been really waiting for his call.’
Unfortunately for me, I can’t hear a single word of what my mom is saying but I can hear Jihoon saying things like “Don’t worry, Mrs Kwon.” or “I will take care of him on your behalf.” and then laughing with her.
‘Mom really likes Jihoon. I hope she hasn’t gotten the wrong idea about me and him, though.’
After a long series of “goodbye” and “take care”, the phone call ends and we go back to the living room with a tray full of chips, popcorns, boxes of pepero and cans of cola.
The four of us squeeze ourselves on a sofa made for three people but it’s good like that. We giggle excitedly as the opening credits roll.
However, not even halfway through the movie, I slowly fall asleep, head gradually landing on Jihoon’s shoulder.
Joshua’s point of view
The final credits roll and as I try to soothe a crying Seokmin, I turn around to Jihoon and Soonyoung. They’ve been too quiet but I thought it was because all of us were too much into the movie to actually throw comments here and there.
When my eyes land on them, however, I find out they were quiet because they were both sleeping. Soonyoung had his head on Jihoon’s shoulder and Jihoon’s head was on top of Soonyoung’s. They look so peaceful and cute like that.
“Look at them.” I tap Seokmin’s shoulder and point at the two sleeping next to me.
“Oh my God.” He shrieks but then throws a hand on his mouth to shut himself. “Why do they look so cute?” He then whispers.
“I don’t know as well as I don’t know how they can’t seem to notice how much they act like a couple.” I sigh.
“I know, right? It’s as if they are opposites poles and they get pulled towards each other without even realising. They can’t help but stick together.”
“They’re too dense to notice but judging from how they act, one of them has already realised his true feelings.” I get up from the sofa, holding my hand out to help Seokmin getting up too.
“You think so?” Seokmin asks as he looks between the two boys.
“Yeah, I know them almost better than I know myself and something shifted in Jihoon’s eyes when he looks at Soonyoung.”
“Should we do something about it? Usually, in movies, the friends do their best to help the two dense people getting together.”
I place a hand on Seokmin shoulder and gently pat him before saying “It’s better if we let them deal with their own feelings or far more people would get their hearts broken by this.” I give him a bitter smile. “Now, let’s wake them up or we will be late.”
Jihoon’s point of view
By the time we reach the noraebang, Wonwoo is already there waiting for us.
As soon as he spots Soonyoung, he immediately goes next to him, wrapping his arm around his shoulder and pulling him even closer to himself.
They look at each other for a while before Soonyoung reaches up to give Wonwoo a peck on the cheek and then shyly smile at him.
My heart tightens at the sight. They look so in love, so happy to be next to each other and so complete. When standing in the same space, they cannot help but be close, to the point one may think they’re trying to englobe each other and literally become one body and one soul. Seeing them like that hurts a lot.
But what hurts even more is my stupid mind which desperately pictures myself next to Soonyoung, making me yearn for his affection, his touch, his kisses, his heart. It makes me want to be the reason behind his sheepish smiles, his rosy cheeks, his heart eyes. It makes me want to have a kind of love which I can never get, at least not from Soonyoung.
I must’ve got lost in my train of thoughts because I almost jump when I see Joshua standing right before me, fixing his scarf over his mouth and nose to keep them warm.
“What are you doing still there? Are you not coming in?”
“Yeah, I’m coming.”
Like that, I follow Joshua inside, not expecting what was going to happen that night.
Despite having to deal with Soonyoung and Wonwoo being all lovey-dovey with each other, I enjoyed myself. We spent hours in our room, eating snacks, drinking sodas and pleading the owner not to kick us out when Soonyoung or Seokmin would scream into the echo microphone.
The singing session had started rather calm with the usual group songs to break the ice, the ones everyone knows and could sing even without the mics. Then we moved to the duets and when our vocal cords were all warmed up, we had started getting hyped with songs like “Fantastic Baby” or “Amor Fati” the ones you mostly jump around, scream and dance to like there’s no tomorrow.
At a certain point, we started feeling exhausted and our voices and souls were leaving our bodies, that’s why we decided to rest a bit, get hydrated again and then start with the last round. Seokmin proposed to perform some solo songs, or as he said “our signature songs, the ones we’re most confident in singing”.
So here I am, singing Park Jimin’s Hopeless love.
It’s not my signature song, but it’s the one I feel like singing right now as I look at Soonyoung who’s sitting in front of me, skin flushed red after having sung and jumped around, the one I feel like singing to someone who makes me feel a hopeless love.
How can you smile so beautifully?
When I look at you, my time stops
How am I in this kind of love?
The words you say, the body movements when you talk
It knocks on my heart endlessly
But I am tightly shutting the door
That’s exactly what I ask myself every day since I’ve realised my feelings for him. How did I end up in this kind of love? In this love which I have to feel in secret? I cannot show to anyone how his smiles, his gestures, his everything affects me.
Everything he does keeps on knocking on my heart’s door, reminding me how much I treasure, adore and like him, how much he means to me.
However, when I look at him and see him with Wonwoo, there’s only one thing I have to do and it’s to shut that door even if the only thing I want to do is to open it and let everything in.
In your eyes that look at me,
there aren’t any feelings that are like mine
It’s such a sad thing
to know your heart
When we’re standing close enough, when Soonyoung looks directly into my eyes, I can see that the love, which is inside my eyes, doesn’t reflect in his.
His eyes cannot mirror my feelings because they already mirror Wonwoo’s and it’s so sad to be too aware of how he feels, to know his heart and his love for someone else who’s not me.
I know there’s no hope,
so every time I look at you
It’s so hard, because I love you so much
It hurts so much when you say I’m just a friend
I’m standing outside the line that I can’t ever cross
It hurts but why can’t I turn away?
This hopeless love
I sing these lines looking at him in the eyes, trying to make him understand that this is what I really feel.
The pain when he says I’m his best friend but I want to be something more because I like him too much to be just his best friend. But I have to stay here, behind the line he crossed between us, the line which I can’t ever go past.
I know too well this is a hopeless love but I can’t turn and run away from him. He keeps pulling me towards himself and I let myself being pulled. I feel like Icarus who keeps flying towards the sun who knows but ignores that the closer he goes to the sun, the higher is his risk to fall and die.
And I know I will be just like Icarus, falling and dying because of how much I love the sun.
The song almost reaches its end, I am about to sing the lines before the last chorus when I start feeling dizzy.
The grip on the mic loosens and it falls on the ground.
I stumble towards one of the sofas of the room, a hand placed on the wall to keep my balance.
A sudden pang at the head, makes me lean with my shoulder on the wall, eyes closing from the pain and hand rubbing at my temples in an attempt to soothe the pain.
I have almost reached the sofa when everything goes black and I feel the strength leaving my body.
In a matter of seconds, I collapse on the floor and lose consciousness.
The song was still playing in the background as I fainted.
Once again, the song was speaking on my behalf.
This hopeless love
Is so painful
Notes:
I'm sorry this took almost a month but life has been really busy for the past days but now I'm almost free! That's why I could finish this chapter. I hope you can forgive me for the long wait! T-T
A lot of things happened in this chapter and Seokmin still can't believe he has to go on a date with Joshua.
Poor little Jihoon fainted while singing and who knows what's going to happen now...I hope you enjoyed it! Leave comments about what you think will happen next and why Jihoon fainted and how Soonyoung will react. Do you agree with Joshua telling Seokmin not to meddle with them?
Thank you for sticking with me and I love you all!!
See you as soon as I can! (Hoping it's not going to take another month)Ps: This is the song I used for Jihoon's part at the end, if you want to listen to it. Hopeless Love
Chapter 26
Notes:
I couldn't edit this chapter so, if you notice any mistake, I'm sorry for that T-T
Enjoy!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Jihoon’s point of view
It’s morning and the sunlight seeps from the window lighting the whole room as the curtains are wide open. The sound of the people walking down the neighbourhood streets wakes me up and I slowly open my eyes to let them adjust to the bright light.
I stare at the ceiling and sigh as I throw an arm on my forehead, recalling what happened last night.
The lunch at Soonyoung’s, the drumsticks he gifted me with our names carved into them, the way we fell asleep next to each other on the couch, the night at the noraebang.
My mind replays blurred images from the last part of the night and after that, I can’t seem to remember what happened or how I got home. I focus harder, trying my best to recall a detail that can ignite the fire of that particular memory, I stare at the dancing dust particles in the sun rays as if they can give me the answer, the missing part of that night. I was so into my own world that I jolt when a car’s horn goes off in the streets.
Instinctively, I bolt up on the bed into a sitting position, turning towards the window to curse the driver who had to honk that hard first thing in the morning. The movement was too fast that now my head spins and pounds and I try to ease the pain by shutting my eyes closed and massaging my temples.
As I do so, I hear someone groaning and shuffling next to me.
I snap my head towards the noise (wrong move again) and shoot my eyes wide open when I see Soonyoung sleeping. He’s sitting on an armchair, folded arms placed on the bed and his head on top of them.
Frozen and shocked, I don’t move for a while, waiting for Soonyoung to snore as he falls into deep sleep again.
While standing still, I finally look around me for the first time since I’ve woken up and I realise that this is not my room.
The shelf with countless of books; the desk with the worn out copy of 'Pride and Prejudice' and the open red box from which a silver pendant peeks out; the wall covered in polaroids and colourful notes with quotes from books, songs or movies.
‘Yup, I’m definitely in Soonyoung’s room and on Soonyoung’s bed.’
With my hand, I caress the soft sheets and the corner of my mouth goes up in half a smile. It feels good to be here but my mind can’t stop bugging me. It asks me why am I here? Why am I in Soonyoung’s room and not in mine?
As if acting on its own accord, the same hand that was gently brushing the sheets goes towards the sleeping figure to wake him up and get some answers. It was about to shake his shoulder when I regain control over my body and stop.
He is sleeping so peacefully and looks so ethereal that I don’t have the heart to bring him back to the real world. Maybe he’s dreaming of something beautiful, of being somewhere far away from here with his family and his old friends, with Seokmin and Joshua, of staying in one of those paradises on Earth with Wonwoo, enjoying running on the beach, chasing each other and being chased by the waves crashing on the shore.
Once again, my body acts before my mind can even send an input to it and I finds my hand buried in Soonyoung’s hair, gently brushing some locks away from the boy’s eyes.
I can’t help but wonder if there’s a place for me in Soonyoung’s dreams. If Soonyoung has ever dreamt of me as a friend or as something more than a friend, just like I do. It’s been a while since my dreams were filled with Soonyoung: one night we are walking around as we hold hands; the following night he’s holding me in his arms, cuddling the living daylight out of each other; some other time become the main characters of an action movie and then of a romance one; another night we’re just standing on a dancefloor made of galaxies, dancing to the tune of our hearts and souls being in harmony. In almost every dream, there’s just Soonyoung and me, completely and deeply in love.
However, there are also those nights in which I dream of losing him, of him running away, of him falling and me not being able to hold him, of Soonyoung dying because of my feelings for him which led him into a dangerous situation causing his death. These are the nights I wake up on the verge of tears, wanting to scream but the voice dying in my throat, suffocating me together with my fast heartbeat and making me unable to breathe. These are the nights I give up on sleep because I can’t calm down until I see Soonyoung’s face again. It may sound stupid but these dreams feel so real and vivid that I’m really afraid I’ve lost him and it’s only when I see him smiling at me that I feel like I can properly breathe again.
I keep on brushing his hair, playing with some rebel strands, as I think of how much of a mess I am.
Foolishly, I thought that my feelings for Soonyoung would disappear if I ignored them, if I spent time convincing myself that I like him as a friend and that I feel this way around him just because we click so well together. But as time passed by, these feelings only grew stronger and deeper. The way he acts, thinks, smiles and cares for me made me fall over and over again.
Selfishly, I wanted to make him mine, to have him all for myself, mine to pamper, to cuddle, to love. However, I couldn’t possibly do that. Soonyoung had found someone whom he loves, who makes him feel all fluttery like young love usually does. He can’t stop talking about how much Wonwoo makes him feel special, makes him feel the centre of the universe and makes him feel all giddy. He says his body can’t get used to Wonwoo’s kisses, his scent, his smile and deep voice. Everything about the older deeply affects Soonyoung.
In the end, I realised that my love for Soonyoung is only slowly turning me into a cruel person doing nothing but hurting people.
I’m hurting Chanyeol, my boyfriend, because I don’t treat him like I used to do when we first started dating, I don’t want to spend time with him because if I do, I can’t stay by Soonyoung’s side.
I’m hurting Wonwoo, my best friend, because as I always try to get Soonyoung’s attention, to have him focus on me and not on his boyfriend, I’m depriving him of the trustworthy and loyal friend I once was.
I’m hurting Soonyoung, the boy I like, because I’m putting in danger two things which are the main reason for his happiness as of the moment: his relationship with Wonwoo and our friendship.
I’m hurting myself because there’s nothing I can do to change things, to stop people from hurting and, at the same time, have Soonyoung for myself. I’m hurting myself as I keep longing for the very person who makes me feel alive, the person who already has someone to love.
As I feel my cheeks getting wet, I stop stroking Soonyoung’s hair and quickly wipe the tears who don’t seem to stop falling. Maybe it’s because my heart feels too heavy right now, but all I can do is crying, trying not to make any sound and getting caught by the sleeping boy.
‘Will I be able to get over you or is my fate to love you from afar, unable to hold you close to me?’
By the time Soonyoung stirs in his sleep and then opens his eyes, I had calmed down and went back to lay on the bed, trying to get comfort from Soonyoung’s smell lingering on the pillow and sheets.
Still rubbing the sleep away from his eyes, Soonyoung places his hand on my forehead. It was a simple gesture but because of the atmosphere, it felt as something really intimate and my heart skips a couple of beats.
“You’re still hot but, thank god, you’re not burning up anymore,” he says and then proceeds to sigh.
I get up, sitting on the bed and willing to lighten the sudden heavy mood. “What do you mean? I’m always hot- Ouch! What was that for?” I cry out, hand clutching the spot on my chest hit by Soonyoung.
“How can you joke when you scared the shit out of me? Do you know how much I panicked? uh?” Head hanging low, he repeatedly hits me on the chest. When I finally manage to grab him by the wrist and stop him, I notice his tear-wet cheeks. He shoots his head up, his eyes meeting mine, and he starts crying even more.
“Hey, shhh, don’t cry.” I let his wrist go only to get closer and hug him. His head lands on my chest, his arms wrap tightly around my middle as he cries. I card my hand through his hair and lull him back and forth as a way to soothe him. “It’s okay, I’m okay.”
My method seems to work as Soonyoung breaks the hug and hurriedly wipes his tears with the back of his hands. “I’m sorry.” He sniffles. “It’s just that my mind replayed the moment you fainted and I couldn’t stop the tears.”
“Fainted?”
“You don’t remember?”
“No,” I admit. “The last thing I remember is that we went to the noraebang.”
“Well, you were singing when you suddenly fainted. We all jumped from our seats and tried to wake you up but you didn’t move at all. We didn’t know what to do, I didn’t know what to do.” Soonyoung looks up, trying so hard not to cry again. “I took your hand and you were burning up. I told Joshua. He checked your pulse and said you were probably running a fever and that your temperature went up so high it had you fainting. Wonwoo pulled you up and Joshua piggy-backed you to his car. We wanted to bring you to your house but Wonwoo thought your parents could get too scared if they saw you fainted in the middle of the night, that’s why we brought you here. I sent a text to your mom saying your phone died and you were going to sleep at my house. Joshua and Wonwoo helped me laying you on the bed, they wanted to stay here, taking turns to check on you during the night but I sent them away, saying I could do it alone.” His voice breaks and a tear streams down his face. “I checked your temperature and Joshua was right, you had a high fever, so I used some wet towel to lower it and halfway through the night you looked less pale and you were definitely less hot.”
Without thinking, I reach out for his face to wipe his tears with my thumb. “I’m so sorry.”
“Gosh, Jihoon, you can’t even imagine how scared I was when I saw you falling on the ground. The moment your body touched the floor, I felt all the air getting knocked out of my lungs.”
“I know, people say that a lot. That I leave them breathless, I mean.” I joke again and Soonyoung gives me a death glare. Before he could hit me again, I say, “Please don’t punch me. I’m only trying to make you smile. I can’t stand seeing you crying.”
He hits me again but this time he is smiling. “You’re an idiot.”
“I’ll take that.” I smile back as I place my other hand on his, still holding mine. “Just so you know, sadness doesn’t suit you, Soonyoung. So, please, don’t cry again.”
“And you don’t faint on me again if you don’t want to see me being sad.”
“I promise I will take care of myself so you won’t have to see me again like this ever again.”
“If you break this promise-”
“I won’t,” I say, interrupting him mid-sentence. “Now, can we get some breakfast? I’m starving.”
“You’re not getting out of this bed, Lee Jihoon.” Soonyoung stops me before I could even try pulling the blankets off. “I’ll go making food for the both of us while you’ll call your parents and tell them what happened, okay?” He says as he leaves the room.
“Okay, mom.” I roll my eyes with a small smile tugging at my lips.
Some time and a lot of alarming noises coming from downstairs later, Soonyoung is back with a tray with an amount of food that could feed all of ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’.
“I know what you’re going to say, but you need to eat a lot or else you won’t recover,” Soonyoung says as he carefully sits on the bed, right in front of me, and placing the tray on his thighs.
“Yeah, but this is just too much for two people.”
“You say that now, but I bet you won’t leave even the smallest grain of rice.” He hands me a bowl before moving the tray in the gap between our legs so that I could comfortably reach for the side dishes laid out on it. “Did you call your mom?”
“Yes, she said to give her a call as soon as we finish eating breakfast.”
“Good boy.” He ruffles my hair while smiling and my heart skips the nth beat. “Now, you can eat.”
I scoff. “What am I? A dog?”
“Nope, you’re a child who apparently needs extra care or else he will faint.”
“Fair enough.”
We both laugh and start eating.
As Soonyoung said, we end up finishing all the food on the tray in between a lively debate over which anime we should start next and a facetime call with his mother who almost cried just like her son upon hearing what happened to me last night. Once the food was all gone, I try one more time to get out of the bed to help Soonyoung washing the dishes or at least bringing the tray downstairs but he refuses. He tells me to stay in bed and call my mother to come and pick me up. I do as told and five minutes later my mom’s at the door, endlessly thanking Soonyoung for taking care of her dumb son who can’t take care of himself.
Ten minutes later, I’m in my bed, tucked under two huge blankets, waiting for the doctor to come and visit me.
In the meantime, I grab my phone and decide to send a text into the ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’ group chat.
Woozy:
Yo.
Kwannie:
Jihoon! You’re alive!
Pupgyu:
Wonwoo told us everything. Are you okay?
Woozy:
I’ve seen better days.
DadCheol:
Did you take some medicine?
Woozy:
Not yet.
I need the doctor to visit me first.
DadCheol:
Still hasn’t come?
Woozy:
Yup because I was at Soons’ until fifteen minutes ago.
Pupgyu:
Right, you stayed at his place for the night.
Joshuji:
Did he cry today too?
Yesterday, he couldn’t stop crying and holding your hand.
Woozy:
Knowing him, do you think he didn’t?
Joshuji:
No.
He totally cried.
Woozy:
Correct.
Kwannie:
Can you blame him?
Imagine seeing your best friend fainting right in front of you.
Pupgyu:
I would have probably fainted too.
Nonu:
So we got lucky you weren’t with us or it would’ve been two people to carry around.
Joshuji:
Or we would’ve left Mingyu on the floor.
Pupgyu:
You’re so mean, hyung.
Woozy:
If you weren’t that tall, maybe he wouldn’t consider that.
Pupgyu:
Not my fault you’re a shortie and easier to carry.
Woozy:
Just you wait until I get better, Mingyu hyung.
Kwannie:
Jihoon said
‘hyung’
.
Mingyu, you’re in trouble.
DadCheol:
Mingyu just went to his room to grab a sheet of paper and a pen to write his will.
Good job, Jihoon.
Woozy:
Thanks, hyung.
By the way, where’s Jeonghan?
Joshuji:
He said he doesn’t want to talk to you.
Woozy:
Is he angry?
DadCheol:
A lot.
I had to stop him from coming to Soonyoung’s house.
He wanted to punch you.
Woozy:
Tell him Soons already did that.
1004Han:
I’m so proud of him.
For hitting you, of course.
Woozy:
I bet you are.
1004Han:
Next time, and I hope for you there’s no next time, Seungcheol won’t be enough to stop me.
DadCheol:
He means it.
Woozy:
I already promised Soonyoung to take better care of myself so you don’t need to worry.
1004Han:
Good son.
Pupgyu:
I would’ve paid to see Jeonghan punching Jihoon, though.
Woozy:
Keep on writing your will, Mingyu hyung.
The clock is ticking for you.
With that message and a smile on my face, I lock my phone and take a good rest before the doctor comes.
Mr Hwang moves his stethoscope up and down, left and right on my chest and on my back, telling me when to breathe in, breathe out and cough. He takes a stick to hold my tongue down as he looks at my tonsil. He puts a thermometer under my armpit to check my body temperature. While we wait for the device do beep, he studies my face, gaze clearly lingering on my dark circles.
“He still has a fever,” Mr Hwang says once he read the numbers on the thermometer “but he doesn’t need any medicine.”
“How come?” My mother asks.
“Because it’s a fever caused by the extreme stress and fatigue he experienced in the past days. You can tell from the bags under his eyes that he hasn’t had an ounce of sleep.” They both look at me and I duck my head. “His body and mind need rest so a few days in the bed is the only cure to his sickness, plus some vitamin supplements.” Mr Hwang turns to look at me. “The fever should be gone in two-three days as long as you rest and stop getting stressed.”
“That’s a lot to ask.”
“What’s stressing you, Jihoon-ah?” My mom sits on the bed and pats my head like she used to do when I was little.
“N-nothing to worry about. You know, adjusting to the new school is still stressing me.” I lie but I can’t bring myself to tell her the truth.
“I advise you to spend time with someone you’re close to, someone who makes it easier to feel less stressed.” Mr Hwang comes closer, lowering until we’re face to face. “Do you have a lover?” He whispers, thinking my mother wouldn’t hear that.
“Yes, I do.”
“Then you know who to spend time with.” He smiles and ruffles my hair, taking his leave after repeating once again to my mother that it’s nothing to worry about and that I should just rest more.
Left alone in my room, I think about the doctor’s words.
I should stay away from my source of stress and we all know that it is none other than Soonyoung. He’s been the reason why I can’t sleep at night, I overwork myself and the reason why I keep feeling tense.
I should keep closer the ones who make me happy. My lover. At this time, Chanyeol’s face should pop up in my mind, his features but I can only see a pair of slanted eyes, chubby cheeks and his smile, so beautiful that it cannot be put into words. Despite everything, Soonyoung is the one with whom I’m the happiest, the one with whom I forget about the rest of the world.
When we’re together, it’s like only me and him exist.
As if he could read my mind, Soonyoung texts me.
Hoshiya:
Jihoonieeeee.
How are you feeling?
Woozy:
You saw me two hours ago.
You know how I’m feeling.
Hoshiya:
No, I don’t.
You could feel better...or worse.
Woozy:
*sigh* I’m good.
Hoshiya:
What did the doctor say?
Woozy:
It’s fever due to fatigue.
I should rest for a couple of days and take vitamins from now on.
Hoshiya:
I told you that you should stop pulling all-nighters and get some proper sleep!
Woozy:
If I could do that, I would.
Hoshiya:
Well, now you have to.
The doctor said so.
Woozy:
I know.
Hoshiya:
Good.
By the way, your mom called me a while ago and told me that tomorrow I should come by for lunch.
Woozy:
How come?
Hoshiya:
She wants to thank me for taking care of you last night.
Woozy:
Of course, she did.
Hoshiya:
Just so you know, even if she wouldn’t have invited me for lunch, I would’ve come the same in the afternoon to keep you company.
Woozy:
You don’t have to, you know?
Hoshiya:
I know but I want to.
I won’t leave you alone just like you didn’t want to leave me alone.
Woozy:
Are you sure this is Soonyoung?
That was too cheesy even for you.
Hoshiya:
Knob.
Always ready to ruin a good moment.
Woozy:
Oh, we were having a moment?
Hoshiya:
Stop it.
Woozy:
Hahahaha okay, I will stop.
Hoshiya:
Good.
I’ll let you rest, now.
Talk to you later!
Woozy:
Later.
When I lock my phone and put it on the bedside table, I lay down and pull up my blankets over my head. I rub my hands on my face and groan as I get again on the train of thoughts I was having before Soonyoung texted me.
If all of my tears are shed for him, why all of my smiles are for him, too?
If he is my sadness, why is he my happiness?
If our love is destined to be a tragedy, why is he my remedy?
Soonyoung’s point of view
The time to go to Jihoon’s house for lunch comes faster than expected. I had planned to cook something for them so I wouldn’t have come empty-handed but it’s almost midday and I can’t do anything if not stopping at ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ before rushing to the Lee’s household.
Wonwoo was the reason things didn’t go as planned. He had called me this morning, asking me to go on a morning date with him now that we can since school is closed.
I couldn’t say no to him so I grabbed my things and went out to meet him at the mall where we drank something at the ‘Vinyl Art’ and then walked around the different shops, not really wanting to buy anything in particular. We talked about this and that, he asked me about my parents, if Joshua was really keeping me company or just thinking about his date with Seokmin, how Jihoon is feeling.
“I called him this morning and he sounded a lot better than he did yesterday,” I said, carefully of where to step because of the crowd. “Guess he rested as the doctor and I told him to do.”
“So sleep was the main issue of his sickness?”
“Yup, he had been awake until late for so many nights and his body couldn’t take it anymore.” I grabbed Wonwoo by his sweater and pulled him towards me, preventing him from bumping into an old lady.
“What else the doctor said?”
“That the fever is going away by itself in a couple of days as long as he stops stressing himself. He should do things that relax him, including spending time with people he’s close to. I guess that’s why Mrs Lee told me to come by today. It’s not only because she wants to thank me but also because, that way, Jihoon won’t be alone.”
Wonwoo stiffened at the news because I hadn’t told him yet. “Do you think so?”
I hummed. “You know Jihoon better than I do. Do you think he would’ve asked any of us to come and hang around his house so he would feel less stressed? Lee Jihoon?”
“No, he would say that it’s a waste of time to stay with him since he’s okay and doesn’t need to be babysitted by his friends.”
“Exactly.”
“But why his mother asked you and not us?”
“I think it’s because, together with Joshua, I live near so it’s easier for me to get there. She doesn’t want to disturb you.”
“I see.” His face fell and his expression darkened.
“Don’t make that face. It’s not like I will stay there forever.”
“You’re right, I’m sorry.”
After that, neither of us talked about Jihoon again and, since I was getting late, parted ways as soon as we got out of the mall with the promise of texting each other and probably meeting the day after.
Without even knowing how I did, I’m only five minutes late when I ring at their door. Mrs Lee swings the door open and welcomes me with a wide, warm smile.
‘I see from whom Jihoon’s pretty smile takes after.’
“Come in, son. It’s too cold outside.” She moves aside to let me in and I hurry inside. “You can give me your coat and go inside the living room, Jihoon is glued to the heater in there.”
“Thank you.” But before taking off my long coat, I hand her the box from the café. “Mrs Lee, this is for you.”
“What is it?” She places the box on a nearby piece of furniture and carefully opens it.
“Just some muffins.” I hang the coat on the hanger and walk closer to her. “These are Jihoon’s favourite.” I point at the two big, chocolaty ones.
“You’re such a caring boy, Soonyoung.” She pinches my cheek. “Go to the living room. Someone has been waiting for you since he woke up even though he’s not willing to admit it.”
Mrs Lee winks and walks away to put the muffins in the kitchen so we can eat them later. I do as she said and head for the biggest room, where I see a little silhouette sitting on the floor and almost hugging the heater.
“Jihoonie,” I call him and when he turns around he doesn’t look as dead as he did the other day. He’s wearing fluffy navy pyjamas and a blanket covers his shoulder, reaching and keeping warm all the zones of his body not exposed to the heather. He looks so small and cute, just like a child.
“Soonyoung, you’re already here?” He tries to look nonchalant but the corner of his mouth betrayed his tone as it went up on its own accord.
“Aren’t you happy and excited? Your favourite person is here to spend the day with you!” I ask him as I, too, sit on the floor.
“Who said you’re my favourite person?” He moves a little so that we can share the warmth coming from the heather. “And I’m not happy or excited.”
“That’s a lie.” I scoot over and throw my arm around his shoulders. “A little bird told me that you’ve been waiting for me.”
“Since when you talk to birds? Who are you? Snow White?” He scoffs.
“If I’m Snow White, then you’re one of the seven dwarfs. Grumpy, of course.”
“At least I’m not dumb and eat poisonous apples given by strangers.” He pokes my cheeks after every word leaving his mouth. He may have dug a hole in my flesh for how much strength he was putting into his finger.
“Stop! You’re hurting me!” I snap my head and try to bite his finger but he’s faster than me and moves his hand away. “But I’m glad that you’re so energetic today. It makes me happy seeing you like this” I ruffle his hair and smile.
“Don’t do that. I’m not a kid,” He complains while fixing his hair but he can’t hide the blush creeping on his cheeks, which only makes my grin grow wider.
We chat a little bit longer in the room while waiting for Jihoon’s mom to call us for lunch and when she does, we rush to the table as we feel super-hungry.
Done with the food, she bans us from the kitchen, telling us to go upstairs so that Jihoon can lay in his bed. The shorter whines, trying to convince her that he doesn’t need to stay in bed the whole day but eventually complies when he sees how his efforts were useless.
“What do you want to do?” Jihoon asks me once I’ve helped him into his bed and tucked him in.
“Want to take a nap?”
“I can’t sleep and let you stay awake.”
“Who said you were the only one taking a nap? This bed is big enough for the two of us. Scoot over so I can lay down too.” I sit on his bed and repeatedly clap my hands to make him be faster. Once there’s enough space for me, I lay down on my left side so that I can face Jihoon who is looking at the ceiling.
“Do you really want to sleep?”
“Yup, I’m actually so tired that a power nap is what I need right now.” I yawn and close my eyes. “The first one to fall asleep will get a chocolate muffin as a reward.”
“Consider me already in deep sleep.”
It doesn’t take a lot of time for Jihoon to actually fall asleep. I open my eyes and watch over him as his chest slowly rises and falls, as his lips part.
A grin blooms on my face because of how calm and cute he looks while sleeping and I can’t help but card my hand through his hair to push some strands of hair out of his face and because I want to, because it feels somewhat relaxing.
At first, I didn’t really plan to fall asleep. I only said that so he could get some rest like the doctor said but the more my hand brushes his hair, the more I feel calmness takes over me, detaching me from reality and letting me slip into the dreamland.
Later in the afternoon, Mrs Lee comes to Jihoon’s room to wake us up. She thought we might be hungry so she had brought us the ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ muffins together with some warm milk. I give Jihoon his well-deserved prize for falling asleep and his eyes light up at the sight of his favourite sweet. We sit at his desk to eat so we don’t leave crumbs on his bed and then lazily spend the rest of the day. We watch some funny videos on his bed, catch up with some new anime, checking our SNS and face-timing Joshua.
Time flew so fast and it’s already night. I told myself I should leave before dinner so that Jihoon could still spend some time with his family.
“I’ll text you later and I’ll see you tomorrow,” I tell Jihoon as I grab my things from where I left them on his desk. Phone, wallet and keys.
“Mmh...see you.”
When I reach his room’s door, I turn around one more time to look at him and notice that his eyes had saddened. It’s as if he doesn’t want me to leave but doesn’t dare to say so. He’s too proud for that.
Mrs Lee, on the other hand, tries everything she can so that I can’t stay over the night or at least for dinner. Since Jihoon had planned to camp at my house for these holidays, his mother knew my parents weren’t here and that’s what made her determined to make me stay in their house. Like Jihoon earlier today, I couldn’t win against her but I found a compromise.
Mrs Lee lets me go home tonight as long as from tomorrow until Jihoon gets better, I’ll stay at their house. That way I can help with Jihoon’s recover and have some company myself.
She also makes me promise not to tell Jihoon so that we can surprise him.
Jihoon was indeed surprised when the next day I barged into his room with a duffle bag and the news of spending the next few days with him. At first, he wanted to come off as annoyed because I would be invading his private space for longer than it needed to be invaded. However, this façade lasts for the first ten minutes, just the time for me to place my belongings and clothes around his room and change into my pyjamas.
After that, we spent the next two days taking naps; playing with the Nintendo Switch I brought over; rewatching Jihoon's favourite Marvel movies. At some point, I had found myself working with him on a new song for the band, giving reviews and opinions about the base and the lyrics.
On the second day, while Jihoon and I were busy doing nothing, Joshua and Seokmin came by to check on Jihoon. They were so relieved to hear that he was okay and that his fever was finally gone.
Mrs Lee told his son to stay in bed for another day and then he was free to go wherever he wanted to. Upon hearing her words, we immediately planned to meet tomorrow at my house with the rest of the boys too. This way, we could be together and at the same time, Jihoon could rest some more.
After that, we chatted about our group of friends. I asked if there were any news since we hadn't checked our phones at all.
Apparently, Seungkwan got asked out on a date by Hansol, the guy he had been crushing on for a year. I joked about how he isn't the only one having a date and the two guests shyly looked at each other and blushed. Yup, they are so whipped for each other.
When they leave after dinner, Jihoon and I go upstairs to brush our teeth and then go straight to bed. We don’t sleep right away, we turn back to back on the bed and take our phones for the first time that day to check the loads of messages we respectively got from Wonwoo and Chanyeol. They were worried since we had ghosted them and thought something bad had happened to Jihoon. We took our time to calm them down, telling them we were just resting and then Joshua and Seokmin came by so we didn’t have time to stay on our phones.
I don’t know about Chanyeol, but I know that Wonwoo is not only worried about that. More than once he has expressed his fear of losing me to Jihoon since I spend so much time with him. Thinking about it, I do spend a lot of time with my best friend but this doesn’t mean that I’m going to leave him. I kept telling this to Wonwoo, how I’m going stay by his side for as long as he wants me to stay but he seems to get better just for a little while. The way he glares at Jihoon, the way he looks at us when we joke about something, saddens me and scares me.
Without noticing it, I let a sigh escape from my mouth when I lock my phone and put it on the bedside table next to me, turning around to face the ceiling.
“Something’s wrong?” Jihoon asks, him too putting his phone away and turning around to look at me.
“Nothing, don’t worry.”
“You're sure? You know you can’t tell me everything.” He places his hand over mine and gives me an encouraging smile.
The both of us are surrounded by the darkness, the weak light coming from the lamppost on the streets is not enough to light the whole room but it’s enough to make me able to see the way Jihoon is looking at me, to see his lips curved upwards and his deep dimples framing his mouth.
I sigh again. “I’m scared.”
“Of what?”
“I’m scared of losing Wonwoo.” I feel a lump in my throat but I fight back the urge to cry. Jihoon has already seen me crying too many times.
“Why?”
“You know, back then I had a special person whom I treasured a lot,” I start as I play with Jihoon’s fingers so that I could stop myself from shedding more tears for that person. “She was like an angel sent from Heaven to save me from the darkest moment of my life. We really hit it off and spent all our time together. She made me feel like the most important person of her life, she made me feel loved, the centre of her universe. We loved each other even though we never got to confess. I still vividly remember the day she crushed my heart.” I stop to take a deep breath and try to push down the lump in my throat. “We met up at the same spot we met for the first time. I was ready to wear my heart on my sleeve and tell her I love her but, apparently, listening to me wasn’t her intention when she came there. Before I could even say a word, she told me she was sorry, she liked me but we should’ve stopped being friends and never meeting again.” I stopped breathing as the pain of that memory still hurt like that time and Jihoon is quick to push a hand in my hair to soothe me. “I was so confused at that moment. How could someone like you but tell you to stop seeing each other? I later found out it was because she had found someone else, someone who was probably better than I was. In the end, I was the only one who fell in love and the only one who broke down in pieces. It took me a lot of time to mend those wounds and some of them still bleed when I touch them.”
Jihoon hugs me, let me burying my head in his chest and holding me tight. “I’m sorry for what happened.”
“Why? You’re not the one who did that.” My voice is muffled by his clothes. “But, yeah. That’s why I’m scared. Sometimes, the way Wonwoo treats me reminds me of her. He makes me feel so special, he brings me up so high. It feels good to be on that cloud nine but I’m afraid it will end up as it ended with her. He will find someone who treats him better than I do, who loves him more than I do and push me off from that cloud.” I tighten my grip around Jihoon’s waist at the thought. “Jihoon, if he does that, I’m pretty sure, this time, I won’t survive the fall. The wounds already healed will bleed even more than before and I can’t take it.”
“Soonyoung, look at me.” He places his hand under my chin and lifts my head so that our eyes can meet. “It won’t happen but if it does, you will survive. You will stand up and heal again because you’re a strong one. You’re hard to take down. Plus, you’re not alone. You have Joshua and Seokmin.” He takes a pause. He wets his lips and I notice that his pupils are slightly shaking, as if he is nervous to speak the next words. “You have me. I will stand by you through the pain, the toughest times. I will be the shoulder you can cry on and the hand to hold when you feel sad. I will not leave you alone, you can always count on me.”
Those words, the sincerity in his eyes and the intimate mood that had settled around us bring me into tears. Never before I felt this way, so sure that he meant every word he said. “Thank you, Jihoon,” I said in between a sob and another and I mean it. I’m so grateful that a beautiful person like him has walked in my life and I hope he has to never walk away from it.
“What about you? Any past experience that hurt you?” I ask him once I calm down, breaking our hug but still laying close to him.
“Not as deep as yours but I’m experiencing something now that may hurt someone else.” He doesn’t look at me while answering. “I don’t know what to do.”
“What do you mean? In what way it may hurt Chanyeol?”
“I think I don’t love him anymore.” And he dropped the bomb.
“Uh?” To say that I’m shocked is an understatement. “Wait, why? How? When did you find out?” I fire away almost all the questions popping in my head.
“It’s been a while now but I can’t explain to you the reason why. I simply found out I don’t feel the way I used to do when we were first together. I stay with him because I keep telling myself it’s a phase, that maybe I’m so caught up in other things that I think my feelings for him have gone numb but I’m not that sure anymore.” Jihoon’s eyes lost focus as he stares at a point of the room behind me. “I’m not sure if it really is a phase or a permanent thing.”
“Must have been hard for you, to keep all of this to yourself, to figure out what to do.” I put my hand on his arm and rub circles on it, thinking of some words that may comfort or help him but my mind is blank.
“It is but I came to the conclusion that I should give myself more time. Time with and without Chanyeol to clear my mind about my feelings for him.” He finally looks at me and gives me a weak smile.
“You know, Jihoon, I admire you. You tell me I’m strong but between you and me, you are the strong one. However, from now on, please tell me when you’re struggling with something, okay?”
“I will, don’t worry.” He pinches my cheek and finally smiles for real. “Now, let’s go to sleep. I’m exhausted.”
“Yeah, me too.” I yawn. “Good night, Jihoonie.”
“Good night, Soons.”
Jihoon’s point of view
Soonyoung is sleeping soundly next to me, the pain of his memories has knocked him out and maybe it’s a relief because, at least in his dreams, he can’t suffer anymore.
But why I did tell him about Chanyeol? I couldn’t even tell him the whole truth, not after I promised him to stay by his side if something bad happens.
Lying to him makes me feel so bad because I want to be nothing but honest to him and maybe that’s why, when I’m sure he’s deep in sleep, I look at him and impulsively whisper, “I’m sorry if I wasn’t completely honest with you. I don’t like Chanyeol anymore because I have someone else to whom I want to give my heart, whom I want to take care of.” I stay silent for a while, afraid to say out loud what I’m thinking because I know that once those words will slip out of my mouth, they will be real and there’s no turning back.
“That someone else is you. You are the person I love, Soonyoung, but you can never know that.”
And after these words have been said, I fall asleep with a heart that’s weirdly lighter and heavier at the same time.
‘I love you but I can’t ever let you know.’
Soonyoung’s point of view
It’s already the day after and we meet the other boys at my house as we planned to.
Yesterday, when Joshua wrote in the group chat that we could gather at my house (I asked the permission to my mother first), they didn’t waste any time and flooded the chat with infinite messages about what to do.
In the end, Wonwoo’s idea won and we all agreed upon watching movies for the whole night and eating takeaway food for dinner. Knowing some of us would end up falling asleep, I told them to bring some sleeping bags. I had three sofas and three futons so the rest had to help themselves if they didn’t want to sleep directly on the floor.
So here we are, it’s around seven in the evening and we’re all gathered in my living room, being loud and making a mess about which movie to watch first and what to eat.
“What about we watch the Grinch?” Mingyu asks while scribbling down Seungcheol’s order.
“Why would I want to see Jihoon on the screen too? Watching him being grumpy about Christmas in real life is enough for me,” Seungkwan says, staying as further away as possible from the said boy. He knows that being a hyung won’t save him from Jihoon’s beating but he can’t keep his mouth shut. “Can you add a bowl of jjampong for me?”
“Okay, does someone else want to add more to the order? If not, Joshua hyung is going to call the Chinese restaurant and place our order.” Seungcheol looks around to scan our faces.
“If in the list there’s tangsuyuk, then we don’t need anything else,” Jeonghan says.
“I’ll call the restaurant then,” Joshua gets up from the sofa and takes the list from Mingyu’s hand. “When I come back, I want to hear that you came to an agreement for the movie.”
“Yes, sir!”
Joshua goes upstairs to make the call, knowing he wouldn’t be able to hear a thing from the restaurant’s owner if he remained downstairs. In fact, the moment he left the room, everyone resumed shouting and debating over the movies. Luckily, by the time he comes by, Wonwoo is already putting ‘Love Actually’ in the DVD player, pausing it so that we can wait for the food to come.
In the meantime, we play the ladder game to see who will take which ‘bed’ so that after eating, we can already take our position so that even if we fell asleep, everyone would already be in their right place. The results of the ladder game were quite good and no one really complained about it. Seungcheol, Jeonghan and Mingyu will take the sofas; Wonwoo, Jihoon and I will be in the futons while the ones taking the sleeping bags are Seungkwan, Joshua and Seokmin.
After that, pretty much everyone did their things and rushed back to the sofa the moment they heard the doorbell ring. Seungkwan and I go to the door to pick the order and give an extra tip to the poor deliveryman who had to bring food for an army all by himself.
We hand the various plates and boxes to everyone and Seokmin goes in the kitchen to take the drinks. When everyone is ready and on the sofas, Wonwoo hits the play button and the opening titles roll on the tv screen.
During the movie anyone barely talks as we are all shoving food in our mouths and focused on what was happening to the different couples of the story, we throw some comments here and there when we really couldn’t help but share the thought crossing our mind at that moment. Done with ‘Love Actually’, we moved to a classic Christmas movie which is ‘Home Alone’. Everyone has already watched it but it always brings laughter, just like the first time. By the end of this movie, everyone had already taken their position but still wanted to watch more movies.
We had played a total of four films and it was around two in the morning when some of us were leaving us to run into Morpheus’s arms.
I’m talking about everyone but Jihoon, Wonwoo, Seungkwan and me.
We didn’t feel like going to sleep yet, so we decided to watch one last movie before going to sleep. Seungkwan gets up from his sleeping bag and pushes in the DVD. This time, we opted for ‘Serendipity’, a classic when it comes about romantic stories. I don’t know how many times I sniffled in the scenes where the main couple thought they weren’t destined to be together and Wonwoo had to cuddle me so that I wouldn’t end up crying out loud and waking up the others.
When the final credits rolls, I turn around and see that Seungkwan had fallen asleep and that Jihoon is struggling to keep his eyes open.
“I think it’s time for us to go to sleep.” I look at the clock on the wall and see that it’s slightly past four in the morning.
“Can you pass me the remote control?” Wonwoo asks.
I do as told and he turns off the tv. The room falls into darkness and it takes quite a while for my eyes to adjust and see where my pillow is. Once I retrieve it, I lay down and wish the two boys good night.
In no time, silence reigns in the living room. However, be it because it’s past my bedtime or because I’m too excited about having everyone here, I can’t seem to fall asleep. I toss and turn but my eyes don’t feel heavy at all.
It’s past six o’clock and the sky is turning in a pretty shade of serenity when I roll on my side and see that Jihoon’s shaking probably because it’s too cold for him.
‘Could it be that his fever has gone up again? He needs more warmth.’
I slowly sit down and was about to get up to go upstairs and take another blanket for him when I realise I can’t move. The futons are right in the middle of the room. Behind me, there’s a barrier made of sofas and the front is blocked by the sleeping bags.
Knowing how clumsy I am, if I even try to move past one of them, I’ll end up stepping on them or kicking them in the face, so it’s better if I stay put.
‘But Jihoon may be freezing...what do I do?’
While looking left and right, in search of a solution to the problem, I have an idea.
I move my pillow next to his and grab the blanket from my futon to put it half on him and a half on me. Careful not to wake him up, I slip my arm around him, spooning him so that I can warm him up. I even put my feet next to his since they were basically frozen.
‘How can he sleep while being this cold?’ I sigh as I rub circles on his arm ‘I really hope it’s a temporary thing and he’s not sick.’
Without even thinking about it, I place my head on top of his and hold him tighter. My strategy seems to work since he soon stops shaking and I can relax too.
Crisis being averted, my body finally feels the tiredness of the day and my eyes close on their own will.
With Jihoon cuddled in my arms, my mind goes to the time we quarrelled when we first met, the time we started getting along, the time we became inseparable without even realising it.
Thinking about all of the moments spent together, all the memories that I and the little boy in my arms have made, makes me feel warm all over, makes me feel something I can quite pinpoint but that I can roughly associate to the feeling of being home.
Maybe Jihoon is my home after all.
It’s just that, at the time, I didn’t really know that this word had a deeper meaning than I thought it would have.
Notes:
This chapter was, in some ways, challenging to write but I liked it a lot because there are finally so many Soonhoon moments and they're so domestic (even if angst is always present).
Seems like Soonyoung is realising something too, don't you think that? What is going to happen now? The only thing I can tell you is that I'm scared myself of what's going to be Wonwoo's reaction to them sleeping next to each other.
Next update is going to be either at the end of the month or at the start of the next one as I'm going on a trip for a week and a half. Some time to heal and, who knows, maybe get some inspiration for a future chapter.
As always, let me know what you think and your ideas by leaving comments! I love seeing your reaction!
Thank you so much for everything <3
Chapter 27
Notes:
19k words. A record for me.
Warning: For plot purposes, in this chapter, there are underage drinking and a bit of spice. I apologise in advance if you're not comfortable with this.
Ps: I wanted to share with you two of the songs which inspired some of the main parts of this chapter in case you want to get in the mood.
1) Sam Smith - Not In That Way
for the second 'Jihoon's point of view' (aka after Joshua's point of view)
2) Simon Curtis - Flesh
recommended by my Tei for the last part of the last 'Soonyoung's point of view' (y'all will know when to play it).
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
That night, I had a weird dream.
I was standing on a beach, feet sinking in the white sand as the cold water crashed in waves on my ankles. It felt like a quick caress on my skin before running back to the sea they belonged to.
The sun lingered at the horizon, not setting nor rising, just peeking from the point where sky and sea meet. Looking from that point upwards, you could see the sky coloured with pastel shades of orange, then pink and purple to end in an ocean blue, colours which are reflected in that vast body of water.
It was mesmerising.
I felt like I could stay there for hours, admiring that splendid view and basking in that sense of peacefulness radiating from it, and I did.
Despite the time flowing rather slowly or quickly, the sun didn’t move an inch from its place.
That reminds me of that time when standing on a beach for the first time as a teen while watching the sun setting, I thought it was a romantic, yet sad, sight.
It felt as if the sun didn’t want to leave just yet, as if it wanted to kiss the sea for a while longer after having looked forward to this moment the whole day. It felt as if they were allowing us, humans, to witness their love which manifests itself in the form of a spectacular sunset. However, no matter how beautiful, romantic and pure their love can be, it comes a time when they have to part to give space the dark night and the bright moon.
And even I, in this very place, came to experience for the first time in my life, how painful and scary it is to part ways with someone when all you want to do is to be by their side or simply have them in your life.
I am still standing on the beach when I hear someone calling my name. His voice carried by the light blow of the wind, feeling like a melody to my ears, it is a voice I can tell apart from hundreds, no, thousands of other sounds because it is my favourite one.
The moment I snap my head to the side, I see him in all of his beauty.
I see Jihoon.
He is standing on the other end of the shore, his feet too bathed in the seawater and his body turned towards me. He waves at me and flashes what I think it’s his sweetest dimpled smile.
Seeing him being so far away from me, makes my body act on its own and so I find myself sprinting towards Jihoon, wanting to reach him and enclose him in my arms.
I run as fast as I can, not caring about the burning sensation in my thighs and lungs, the thought of getting to Jihoon being the fuel for my whole body.
However, the more I run forwards, the more Jihoon gets farther away from me. I don’t know for how long I run because he is still out of reach and the sun is still lingering at the horizon.
After what it feels like a lifetime and for some sort of miracle, I am finally close to him.
I reach out for him with my hand, waiting for Jihoon to grab it but the moment he tries, the sun suddenly sets and we fall in what feels the darkest of nights.
Our bodies get pushed back just as if we were two positive poles repelled by each other.
That weird invisible force makes me fall on the sand but Jihoon...he lands in the sea and gets swallowed by it.
I wait and wait but he doesn’t reappear on the surface, there’s no sign of him.
Legs giving up as I surrender, I fall on my knees, screaming when I realise I had lost him forever. The screams get louder, the tears stream down my face and neck, the pain of the loss tearing me apart.
Jihoon wasn’t there anymore and it made me go crazy.
The moment I scream Jihoon’s name at the sea, in fear, in pain, in hatred, it’s the moment I wake up from that dream turned into a horrible nightmare. A sigh of relief naturally comes out of my mouth, reassured that none of what I’ve seen is real.
However, I don’t open my eyes just yet and stay there, trying to take deep breaths and shake off that weight that had settled on my heart. Even though I know it wasn’t the truth, it felt so real that I’m now scared to open my eyes and maybe find out it wasn’t just a dream.
I hold tight the soft pillow I have in between my arms and suddenly hear the rustling sound of the sheets and also feel like a light pressure on my chest.
Freezing on the spot but still holding the pillow tight, I wait for that pressure to disappear but it slowly increases and it feels more and more as if someone is pushing me.
‘It must still be the effect of my drea-...Wait. Why do I feel a hot breath on my neck?’
It’s then that I realise I was indeed being pushed away.
I shoot my eyes open and I’m face to face with Jihoon.
“Shit,” Jihoon whispers and I look at him in disbelief. “I’m suffocating.”
‘Why is he cursing first thing in the morning? And why is he suffocating?’
Then my eyes travel down and the reason why he can’t breathe becomes pretty clear. I have my arms around him, holding him close to me with his face pressed on my chest. Basically, the pillow wasn’t a pillow. It was Jihoon and I was still hugging him tightly.
When I realise it, all the blood in my body immediately rushes to my face, making it redder than a ripe tomato and I suddenly wished that some alien would come and abduct me so that I wouldn’t have to explain myself.
Busy with my own thoughts, it takes a while for my brain to finally give the input to my arms to free Jihoon from my grasp.
Without him into my arms, though, I feel anxious, as if he could really disappear just like in my dream if I didn’t hold him.
“I can explai-” I start but I’m interrupted by Jihoon’s hand which flies to my mouth to shut me up.
He doesn’t talk but, with his index, he points at us and then at the kitchen. Only when he’s sure that the message got across, he takes his hand away from my face and carefully stands up to make his way to the other room. I do the same, following his steps to be sure not to step on any of the still-sleeping boys.
Once I’m inside the room, Jihoon closes the door behind me.
“I didn’t want to wake the others up.” Jihoon goes sitting on a stool at the kitchen island. I look at the clock on the wall and see that’s nearly midday.
“It should be time they wake up, though. They probably have to go back home,” I say as I join Jihoon at the counter but instead of sitting down next to him, I stand across from him at the other side of the island.
“Still, we got lucky they didn’t or else they would’ve seen us like...that…” He trails off as his cheeks get rosy.
“Like that, what?” I smirk, amused by Jihoon’s shyness. He rarely gets this flustered and it’s a delightful view.
“Oh, stop it. You know what I mean.” Jihoon focuses his gaze on his fingers which were fidgeting with the shirt of his pyjamas.
“No, I really don’t know what you mean.” My tone is sarcastic as I lean on the marble surface of the counter so I could be closer to Jihoon, my gaze fixed on him.
He sighs, finally looking directly in my eyes, his expression showing he’s slightly annoyed. “That we were hugging.” He shuts his eyes closed and massages his temples. “They didn’t see us hugging while sleeping. Who knows for how long they could’ve mocked us for that...and Wonwoo.” Jihoon takes a pause and suddenly shivers, maybe a reaction to what he has imagined. “If he had seen us, he would’ve caused a scene.”
“Right. However,” I walk around the island to sit next to Jihoon and throw my arm around his shoulders. He flinches at the sudden touch, his shoulder tensing up for a second before sagging. “I would’ve explained the truth to him.”
“Which is?” He turns around to look at me. “Tell me, because I too would like to know why I woke up with you basically holding me so tight I thought you were trying to choke me to death.”
“Not too long after we all fell asleep, you were shivering. I couldn’t go upstairs to bring another blanket because if I tried to, I would’ve stepped on Seungkwan and the first thing that came to my mind was to warm you up by covering you up with my blanket and hugging you,” I share with him the thought process that went on my mind that night.
Jihoon groans. “Oh, yeah. Wonwoo would’ve totally not made a scene after seeing us and hearing your explanation,” He says in a sarcastic tone. “You know he doesn’t like me being too close to you and this would’ve worsened the situation.”
“You’re right but-”
“What are you two talking about in here?”
My sentence is interrupted by Seungkwan walking into the kitchen and going straight for the cupboard where the dishes are. He takes a bowl and then grabs the cereal box from another shelf before sitting down on the other free stool next to Jihoon.
“Soonyoung, do you mind passing me the milk?” Seungkwan asks as he scratches the back of his head, his eyelids not fully open. “Oh, and a spoon too.”
“Yeah, yeah.” I stand up to take what Seungkwan asked for. “Ji, do you want some cereals too? Should I grab you a bowl before I sit down?”
“No, I’m good. I’ll be soon eating lunch anyway so don’t worry.”
“Lunch?” Seungkwan’s suddenly super-awake. “Wait, what time is it?”
“It’s five minutes to midday,” I say as I point at the clock behind me.
“Shit, I promised mom to be home before midday because we had some guests today.” He stands up, making the stool screech on the floor and bolts out of the room while muttering “shit, shit, shit, shit, shit.”
“That was something.” Jihoon chuckles.
“I know, even though it’s not a rare sight to hear Seungkwan curse this much.” I put the bowl and the cereals back to their place and then go standing next to Jihoon. “Should we go waking the others up before Seungkwan does with his cursing?”
“We definitely should, even though I would like to see Mingyu getting mad at him for waking him up like that.” Jihoon laughs at the thought.
“Yeah, me too.” I join him in his fit of laughter and we both leave the room together.
Waking up the boys has been the most difficult task of my entire life.
I had to bear Mingyu hyung cursing, then Jeonghan hyung tried to use me as his plushie and, for a while, I thought that I wouldn’t be able to wake Seungcheol hyung up not even by causing some sort of explosion next to his ear.
Luckily, we had the Jeonghan’s card.
It took him just one sentence to have Seungcheol up on his feet.
What was that Jeonghan said? We didn’t hear but I think all of us know it was related to their private couple life (if you know what I mean). However, I had never seen someone get ready to leave as fast as Seungcheol did.
With the first couple going back to their houses, the rest started leaving too.
“Wonwoo hyung, do you need a lift home?” Mingyu asks while wearing his coat in the hall.
“No, Gyu, thanks. I promised Soonyoung I would’ve stayed here this afternoon.” Wonwoo turns around to fondly smile at me.
Mingyu nods. “What about you, Jihoon? You’ll stay here too with them?” He asks while looking at the boy who was helping Joshua putting the last sofa at his right place.
“No, actually, can you drop me at the bus station? I have to go on a date with Chanyeol.”
“Of course,” Mingyu says as he wears his sneakers. “Is everything okay with him? I ask because it’s been so long since you last met him.”
“Yup, everything’s fine.” He smiles to reassure Mingyu but he is faking it. I could tell by the fact that his eyes didn’t have that usual light they had when someone mentioned Chanyeol’s name when they were first dating.
Also, knowing that he is going through a phase where he isn’t sure about his feelings for him, made it even more obvious to me.
Instinctively, I try to reach out my hand and hold Jihoon’s arm to give him some sort of comfort, to let him know that I am here for him, but I drop it as soon as I see the way Wonwoo and Joshua are looking at my hand.
One is desperately hoping I won’t do it, the other one desperately wants me to do it so he can prove he’s right about Jihoon and me.
“That’s good,” Joshua says as he grabs his long padding from the hanger. “I thought something happened and that was the reason why you were spending more time with Soonyoung.”
“Can’t I spend some time with my best friend, hyung? Plus, I have been sick for almost an entire week so there wasn’t an occasion to go on a date.” Jihoon grabs his backpack and slings it on his shoulder, not even looking at Joshua as he answers.
“You have a point.” Joshua opens the door and Mingyu is the first one to walk through it as he cannot stand that weird atmosphere that has suddenly arisen around the two of them. “Well, I got to go now. See you, guys.”
“Let’s go, Jihoon or you’ll be late for the date,” Mingyu grabs Jihoon by the coat and drags him to the car.
“I’m coming. There’s no need to grab me like this...unless you have a death wish, hyung.” Jihoon creepily smiles at Mingyu and that poor soul looks so frightened to the point he immediately let go of the smaller.
“Don’t kill him, Ji. Wonwoo and I won’t help you dispose of his body.” I chuckle.
“There’s no need to. I can do it by myself,” Jihoon says as he gets in the passenger seat and closes the car door.
Wonwoo and I watch the car leave the driveway before walking in.
It’s almost two in the afternoon when everyone has finally left and we still have to eat lunch. Since cooking would take too much time and we are starving, we call the same delivery place as yesterday and order some more takeout food.
The afternoon goes by pretty quickly as we eat, watch an episode of Knowing Bros and then play some video-games.
I’m bad at games, so Wonwoo had to patiently teach me the basis of some computer games he liked and we played in a team to make things easier for me. However, when he proposed to play Fifa later that night, I was pretty confident of my skills and decided it was time for us to play on opposite teams.
One match, two, three and I lost them all.
“How is this possible?” I cry out pausing the game when I was about to lose 7-0. “I thought I was good!”
“It is possible.” Wonwoo giggles as he scoots over on the couch to wrap his arm around my shoulders. “You just need to practise since it’s that what makes you a good player. Also, you’ve never played Fifa before today.”
“Actually, I did.”
“When? I don’t think I’ve seen you play”
“It’s basically the only game I’ve been playing to this week and I won almost every match!” I turn towards Wonwoo to complain, letting his arm fall on the couch.
“You know, if you played on easy mode and against the CPU it’s only normal that you won.”
“It wasn’t against the CPU.” I cross my arms over my chest and pout, sulking at the fact that Wonwoo thought lowly of my skills at this game.
“Uh? Then with whom you played?” His brows are furrowed in confusion.
“Jihoon,” I say as if it’s the most obvious answer of this world. “I played a lot against him and, at this point, I think he only let me win so I wouldn’t whine about losing,” I scoff.
“Oh.”
“I can’t believe he lost on purpose. Does he think I’m that bad at games? I will teach him a lesson next time we-”
I stop mid-sentence when I hear a sniffing sound. I whip my head towards my left and see that the sound came from Wonwoo whose head is hanging low, hands closed in fists on top of his knees.
“Wonwoo?”
“Why everything has to come down to Jihoon, uh?” He asks, not lifting his head and tightening his fists.
“What are you-”
“NO,” he shouts, interrupting me. “Let me finish.” When he looks at me, right into my eyes, I could see the hurt and anger in them and my heart ached at the sight. “It’s all about Jihoon. You spend most of your time with him, hanging at his or your house. When we’re all in the same room, you refrain yourself from being near him just because you know Chanyeol and I would be too upset, however, you wait for the right time to interact with him, laugh at his jokes and spare glances at him. Last but not least, when Jihoon isn’t around, you end up mentioning him whenever a new topic pops up in our conversations.”
“I don’t do that!” I can’t help but say.
“Oh, you do. You did it a while ago, too. Not only now that we were playing Fifa but even before. While I was teaching you how to play a game, you went like ‘I have to tell Jihoon I learned this’ or things like that.”
“Am I not allowed to say that?” I almost yell, bolting up from the couch. “Am I not allowed to share with Jihoon the things I do with you? He tells me all the time about the things he does with Chanyeol!”
Wonwoo gets up too and stands right in front of me. “It’s not what I meant and you know it!”
“Oh, so what did you mean?” I cross my arms and nervously tap my foot on the floor. “Enlighten me.”
“I meant that you only have eyes for him! Right now, he’s the only person you can see and the rest of us including me, doesn’t matter at all,” Wonwoo shouts, right arm extended and finger pointing at nowhere in particular.
“How can you say such a thing? You know how much all of you, how much YOU matter to me.” I walk closer to him, eyes staring into his. “You’re my boyfriend, Wonwoo, and you come before anyone else.”
“I don’t think so.” Wonwoo snaps his head on the side, looking at the place where the futons were laying the night before. “Jihoon comes first and the event of the past days were a dead giveaway to me.”
“He was sick! What should’ve I done? Leave my best friend alone when he needed me?”
“Maybe. He would’ve been fine anyway.”
“Are you hearing yourself?! He’s your friend, too!”
“Right, he’s one of my best friends, too, but I didn’t act as you did.” His eyes, still trained on the floor, have now lost focus. “Of course, when he fainted I was scared and I was worried about his condition but I didn’t cry, I didn’t hold his hand and brought him to my house, I didn’t take care of him all night long and spent the next days to his house until he recovered, ignoring my boyfriend’s texts.” He takes a pause, his lips becoming a thin line for a couple of seconds, a sign that what he was about to say was something that had hurt him. “Most of all, I don’t go around spooning my best friends.”
My eyes widen at the realisation that Wonwoo had seen that.
‘How did he see that? We were the first one to wake up this morning.’
“Yes, I’ve seen you two cuddling,” Wonwoo adds. “Did you think I haven’t just because I woke up after you two did?” He scoffs as I don’t answer him. “You know, when tonight I heard some noises in the room we were sleeping in, I never thought I would see my boyfriend getting in my friend’s bed and cuddle with him as if I wasn’t laying down next to them.” At that moment, all the hurt in Wonwoo’s eyes morphed into something evil. “Tell me, did you wait for me to fall asleep so you could hug your Jihoonie?”
“No!” Shocked, I look at Wonwoo with wide eyes and disbelief as I feel wrongly accused. “I hugged him only because he was cold and I didn’t have another blanket to give him! I thought he was running a fever again!”
“You could’ve given him your blanket and come to sleep next to me since I am your boyfriend.” Wonwoo spits with venom. “Stop making excuses and just tell me the truth, Soonyoung,”
“It’s true, though! Why would I do such a thing behind your back?”
“Because you like him but you don’t have the guts to tell him.”
Here comes the first blow.
“And you’re not brave enough to break up with me.”
Another blow.
“Or maybe, you’re just too insecure, too afraid he won’t break up with Chanyeol for you.”
And I’m K.O.
“Why are you being so cruel?!” My voice breaks and the first tears fall from my eyes. “Not a thing of what you said is true. I love you and you should know by now how much you mean to me.”
“Apparently, I mean less than Jihoon means to you. You care about him more than you care about me and I’m fed up of people like you who say a thing and do a different one. You say I come first but I’ve never actually been your priority.”
“Are you being serious?” I refrain myself from shedding more tears in front of Wonwoo only to let all the words I’ve been holding back, flow out of my mouth. “Well, I’m sorry if I haven’t been the boyfriend you expected me to be but, you know, in real life, people are usually different from your expectations. I love my friends and I would do anything for them so all of the things I did for Jihoon, I would’ve done them for Joshua, for Seokmin, for Mingyu and for any of the Jeonghan’s bitches. I’m sorry to disappoint you, but I don’t have any kind of romantic feelings for Jihoon so all of the things you listed before are all up in your head. The only person I have eyes for, the only person to whom my heart belongs to is you and I’m so disappointed that your jealousy is blinding you to the point you can’t see how much I adore and love you.” By the end of the speech, I’m panting, short on breath due to the sudden outburst. “Now, get out of my house. You said you’re fed up of people like me, so that’s the door. You’re free to go.”
Without saying a single word, Wonwoo turns around and rushes to the hallway. He hurriedly grabs his belongings and walks away, slamming the door behind him without even wearing his coat before doing so.
Left alone with just the echo of the slam in the house, my brain processes what has just happened and I fall on the ground, knees giving up as a wave of sadness hits me right after the adrenaline rush from the outburst disappears.
Once again, tears stream down my face and my whole body shakes while bawling.
Everything hurts like hell, my body, my heart, my mind and I know the pain won’t stop soon.
I can’t help but think that I had already seen this coming, the moment when Wonwoo would’ve left me because I wasn’t enough for him. I couldn’t keep him close to me, couldn’t make him feel secure so it was only fair that he left me alone to cry. I deserve to suffer just how much (if not more than) he did because of me, because I couldn’t be the boyfriend he wished to have.
However, there’s a part of me wishing to be comforted, to be held close and gently sushed, to be told that things can be fixed, that it’s going to be okay. I need somebody who can take the pain away just by standing close to me. Somebody who promised to do all these things for me any time I needed it.
‘You said you would’ve been by my side through the pain and the toughest times. You said that you wouldn’t leave me alone. So where are you, Jihoon? Please, come to me. I need you.’
Jihoon’s point of view
The cold wind hits my face and I shiver as I shove my hands deeper in my pocket, hoping it would help me feel warmer.
Chanyeol and I are walking in a park near his house. The snow is falling from the sky, gently landing on our heads and bodies as well as the tall bare trees and the ground. Everything looks so white and pure because of this snow blanket.
The scenery is really beautiful but, for some weird reason, suffocating at the same time. Maybe it’s because of the big contrast with how colourful this park usually looks during the other seasons or maybe it’s just because I wish I could be with someone else right now, holding hands as we walk in the snow.
I can picture Soonyoung being excited of being here just like a puppy seeing the snow for the first time; Soonyoung looking adorable as he scrunches his nose because a snowflake landed on his nose, leaving a wet and cold spot on it; Soonyoung being playful as he crouches down saying he has to tie his boots but instead he gathers snow in his hands and throws it at me, starting a fight that would end up with the both of us falling in the snow and laughing at how childish we are; Soonyoung who could instantly warm me up with just a smile of his.
Unconsciously, I smile too at the thought of him and Chanyeol notices it.
“Why are you smiling?”
“Nothing. I was just looking at those children making snow angels and found them adorable,” I say and it’s kind of true because they were actually being adorable, one child saying that he couldn’t wait to grow up so that his angel would be bigger than it is right now.
“They’re cute but not as cute as me, right?” Chanyeol takes a hand out of his pocket to poke his cheek and do a cute pose.
“Yeah.”
I giggle and Chanyeol seems satisfied by it but then sighs and suddenly stops in his tracks.
“You know, Jihoon.” I stop too and turn around to look at him. He stands there, giving me a tight smile, hesitating before saying, “I’ve missed you and even though I’m here with you, I still miss you. However, it seems like I’m the only one who feels this way.”
I take a step closer to him. “What do you mean?”
“I mean that you maybe didn’t miss me too.” He sighs. “Look, I know you were sick and we couldn’t go on dates and things like that but we’ve barely spoken to each other.” The wind blows stronger than it did before and Chanyeol fixes his scarf so to cover his neck and chin better. “Your replies to my texts came after ages and I wanted to convince myself it was because you were sleeping to recover faster or because, I don’t know, your parents or friends came to visit you. However, at some point, it felt like it wasn’t that you couldn’t reply but you didn’t want to. Plus, when I asked you if I could come to your house to see you, to see how you were doing, your answer was always a no. I felt like I was being pushed away and it hurt.”
“It’s not like that. I wasn’t trying to push you away.” Ashamed of my actions, knowing that what I did was wrong, I break eye-contact with him and look at the snow-covered path under my feet instead.
“Then why were you kind of ghosting me? Why I couldn’t come to your house as the others did? Is it because you didn’t want to introduce me as your boyfriend to your parents?”
“That’s the reason...or at least part of it.”
“Part of it? So there’s more?” Chanyeol asks confused and his voice breaks at the end of the question.
Suddenly, I panic at the thought of him crying. I don’t want him to cry because of someone like me, someone cruel who knows that the truth will break his lover’s heart but is about to reveal it anyway, someone who doesn’t deserve his partner’s tears and love.
“I didn’t want you to come to my house because you would’ve only gotten angry.”
“At what? If you mean at you, yes, I was angry because you couldn’t take care of yourself and that’s why you fainted and-”
“Soonyoung has been at my house for the past three days,” I say, interrupting him before he could finish scolding me.
“That’s it? That’s the reason? Well, we’re not the bestest of friends, but I could’ve tolerated him or I could’ve come when he went back home.”
“No, he stayed over,” I explain to him. “You know that his parents aren’t home so he’s alone and that’s why my mother invited him to our house so we both would’ve had some company.” Once again, I look away from Chanyeol, not to see the way his broken heart is reflected in his eyes.
“Alone?! But even without you, he wouldn’t have been alone because he has Joshua, Seokmin and Wonwoo. The same goes for you because you have me, your boyfriend!” His voice shakes as he speaks. “I should’ve been the one staying by your side and taking care of you, not him!”
“I know and I’m sorry.”
“For what? For doing whatever you want to and not thinking about my feelings? For not loving me in the same way I love you? For being a shitty boyfriend who cares more about his new bestie instead of his own boyfriend?” He groans and I can hear him shifting on his legs as he tries to calm himself down.
“I’m sorry.” My head sinks ever lower than it already did.
“Sometimes, I think about how we were before Soonyoung came into your life, you know, when you still hated him. We were so happy, Jihoon. We couldn’t stay away from each other not even for a minute, we talked about so many things and the way you looked at me made me feel so special. However, things changed the moment that hamster became your friend. After school, you and him go home together when before you usually walked me to the bus station or went for a quick date; when we are alone, we don’t talk as much as we used to and most of the time is spent in silence or with me trying to start a conversation and you keeping your answers to the bare minimum.” At this point, Chanyeol has started crying, his words interspersed with sobs. “What hurts me the most is how the look in your eyes has changed, how cold they are when you’re with me but light up the moment you spot Soonyoung. It’s as if they’re alive again. The way they search for him when you two are in the same room and the way they smile together with your lips when your eyes met his.”
“I’m sorry.”
“All of this makes me feel like I was important to you at first but that, with time, I became a replacement, like I’m here with you just because you can’t have Soonyoung.”
“I’m sorry.”
Chanyeol takes big strides towards me and grabs me by the collar of my coat before shouting, “Stop saying you’re sorry, you asshole, and answer me! Am I right? Do you love Soonyoung more than you love me?”
“I’m sorry.”
“I swear, Jihoon, if you say sorry one more time, I’m going to leave.”
“I’m sorry.”
“I see you’ve made your choice.” And with that said, Chanyeol lets go of me.
It’s only when the sound of his shoes stomping on the snow becomes fainter and fainter that I lift my head again to watch him walking away and whisper to myself.
“I’m sorry for countless reasons. I’m sorry I’m causing you pain. I’m sorry you have to go through this because of me. I’m sorry you have to feel this way. I’m sorry I love Soonyoung more than I love you. I’m sorry for being a coward and keeping you by my side instead of letting you go. I’m so, so sorry, Chanyeol.”
After aimlessly walking around for an hour or so and watching the sky getting darker, thinking about whether running after Chanyeol and make up with him or not, I take a bus to go back home deciding it was better to leave him alone to hate me for one night.
As I get down at the nearest station and walk down the street, I feel some sort of tug towards Soonyoung’s house. It’s as if I am being pulled to him by a mysterious force even though I try to stop my feet from walking.
I try to make my body understand that I can’t suddenly show at his front door without even a heads-up. What if he’s still with Wonwoo? I would only embarrass myself and interrupt whatever they are doing right now.
Both Soonyoung and Wonwoo would hate me for not letting them have their deserved alone time after being apart for almost a week and after being surrounded by all of their friends for a whole twenty-four hours. I’m sure Soonyoung won’t let me off the hook for the rest of our lives if I do this.
But before I could’ve even realise it, my hand had already rung the doorbell.
‘Shit, why does my body acts on his own? What excuse should I make up? That I left something here? Think, Jihoon. Oh shit, the lights are all off. What if he is sleeping? He will definitely kill me if I’ve woken him up.’
However, all the excuses and all the thoughts running in my mind disappear the moment a crying Soonyoung opens the door. His eyes are swollen, red and watery, his cheeks stained with tears and his nose red from too much blowing.
The moment he realises who is the person standing in front of him, his eyes widen and he throws his hands around my neck, burying his head on my shoulder as he cries.
“Jihoon...you are really here...Jihoonie…” his sobs get louder after every word he says and the way he’s shaking worries me.
“Soonyoung, what happened? Why are you crying?” I ask while hugging him as tight as I can with one arm while I pet his head with the other one.
“Jihoonie...I was right…” He sniffles and sobs, arms moving from my neck to my waist to hold me tighter and closer to him. “Wonwoo left me.”
Seokmin’s point of view
It’s almost half-past two in the afternoon and I’m alone in the kitchen, heating some leftovers for a quick meal. My father is on the computer working on a project while my mom is on the sofa chatting on the phone with one of her friends. I came back home from Soonyoung’s house not even twenty minutes ago and that’s why I missed lunchtime. Luckily, my parents didn’t complain about this or about the fact that they will later have to drop me off again in that neighbourhood. However, this time they won’t leave me in front of Soonyoung’s house but in front of Joshua’s.
Why? Because today is the day of our first date.
Just the thought of it and of what happened earlier at Soonyoung’s house makes me blush.
It’s morning when Soonyoung and Jihoon come to wake me up, I don’t precisely know what time it is but judging from their faces and the way they shout at the others, it has to be pretty late. As soon as my eyes stop blurring things out, I grab my phone and see that it is indeed late. I text my father asking him if he can come and pick me up and he is quick to answer that he will be on his way right after he finishes lunch.
To kill some time, I change into clean clothes, pack my things and even offer help to my friends so we can wake the others up faster than it was done by just the two of them. And, to stay true to their evil nature, they let me wake Joshua up.
I walk closer to his sleeping bag and crouch to gently shake his shoulders.
“Hyung, hyung, you have to wake up,” I say in a loud voice to make sure he hears me.
Joshua shifts and rolls to lay on his side, hand covering his ear to block any noise from interrupting his sleep again.
“Hyung, don’t be like that.” I lean with my left hand on the part of the sleeping bag where Joshua’s back was, this way, I can be closer to his ear and say, “It’s time to go.”
He groans and doesn’t show any sign of waking up. I lift my right hand and was about to shake his shoulder again when he suddenly rolls around, knocking on the only hand supporting my whole body and making me fall right on his chest.
My eyes widen as soon as my head comes in contact with Joshua’s chest and when I turn around to see his reaction, he seems unbothered. He is rubbing the sleep away from his eyes as he yawns and he doesn’t seem to realise what has happened.
Even when he has just woken up, he looks like a god descended on Earth to bless me with his whole existence, making the butterflies in my stomach go crazy the moment his full lips stretch to flash me a smile and his fingers brush my hair away from my face.
“Do you like what you’re seeing?” He asks with the hint of a playful smirk on his lips. “Did you want to see my face from a different angle? Is it good from there?”
“What are you saying? I just fell.” I stand up and try to regain some composure, hoping the blood will rush away from my face.
“Did you fall for me?” He sits on the floor with his legs crossed and looks at me with his eyes still half-closed.
‘Yes, I definitely fell for you.’ I think but, instead, I answer, “I fell because of you, not for you.” and the plan of not blushing definitely failed. How can he say those things while looking so cute?
“I hope that, soon, you’ll fall for me, too,” He whispers as he plays with the hem of his shirt.
I don’t know if that was meant for me to hear but to avoid things from getting awkward, I drop the topic and leave the room to get something fresh to cool me down.
After that, Joshua is busy sending Jeonghan and Seungcheol off and then getting ready to drop Seungkwan off at his house while I’m lying on the now-free-from-Mingyu sofa scrolling through my Twitter timeline.
I am looking at memes about two idols from a famous girl group and boy group dating when I got a text from my father.
Dad:
Min, I’m outside.
DonkeyKong:
I’ll be right there.
Just let me tell Soonyoung I’m leaving.
Dad:
Okay.
Shoving my phone in my pocket, I get up to look for the house owner so I could tell him that I’m going to leave. I find him in the kitchen, trying to convince Seungkwan that going to the ice rink when Jihoon has just recovered wasn’t really a good idea.
“Soonyoung, I got to go. My father is already waiting for me,” I say, patting on his back to gain his attention.
“Okay, I’ll see you tomorrow morning, right? You need to buy that thing for your mother.”
“Yes, make sure to be on time.”
“I will! Do you want me to walk you to the door?”
“There’s no need to. Just let me know if we’re going to the ice rink or not.”
As soon as Soonyoung hums in answer, I turn around and go back to the living room to grab my bag.
I’m by the front door wearing my coat when I hear the sound of steps getting louder as someone is probably walking towards where I am standing.
“You’re already leaving?” Joshua leans on the wall, arms crossed on his chest.
“Yup and what do you mean by ‘already’? We should’ve been home a long time ago,” I tell him as I close the coat’s zip.
“You have a point.” He giggles. “However, what I wanted to tell you is not to forget about tonight.” He smiles, wide, before saying, “We have a date.”
“I didn’t forget. Half-past six at your house.” Joshua nods at my correct answer. “Wait, where are your parents though? Won’t they be there, too?” I ask, already panicking at the thought of having to dine with Joshua’s parents while I am someone different who I usually am. Yeah, because this time I wouldn’t be there as Joshua’s best friend but as his date and this is thrilling both in a good and a bad way.
“I made sure they won’t be home.”
“How did you do that?”
“Bought them tickets for their favourite musical which is playing at the local theatre tonight. This way, they can have some time for themselves and I can have the whole house just for the two of us,” He explains, proud of his foolproof plan and clearly excited at the idea of this date. “I did it because I know you would be uncomfortable if we went out to eat at some chic restaurant or if we stayed in the house with them around and I don’t want that. I want you to feel at ease.”
This is one of the things I have always liked about him, the way he cares about you and his gentleman-like manners, the way he makes sure to give you all you need so you can feel comfortable around him.
“T-thanks.” I stutter as my heart starts beating faster and I can feel knot after knot tying in my stomach. “I’ll see you later then.”
I have a date with Joshua hyung in a couple of hours and I still can’t believe this.
My mind goes to that night at Soonyoung’s, when we played truth or dare, and everything had escalated so quickly.
Me suggesting the dare of going out with the last person he had flirted with through texts.
Joshua sending me a text asking to go out with him.
Me realising I was the person he had last flirted with and that I got myself a date with him by chance.
Actually, I think it was pure luck or that some kind of god has pitied me as he saw me pining after Joshua hyung for years so they decided to bless me with this opportunity. They knew I would’ve probably never confessed my feelings, too afraid of rejection and of ruining the friendship between the two of us and with the rest of the group, that’s why they let this happen.
To be honest, at first, I wanted to dare him to go outside in the snow with just his pyjamas on and make a snow angel, but then I suddenly felt like I had to change it, to make things more interesting since there were just the three of us anyway.
I didn’t expect it to turn this way, with me having the opportunity to go out with the person I like.
However, I’m quite torn inside as I think about it.
A part of me keeps telling me that it’s just a dream and none of it it’s real, that I start hallucinating after having the biggest, fattest and longest crush on him.
The other part of me is just too excited to think straight and it panics quite a lot, and it does even now when I check the time and see it's almost five o’clock.
'For how long did I space out? When did I finish eating? Wait, what’s most important is what am I going to wear later?'
In a wave of real panic, I nearly break the dishes as I throw them into the dishwasher before running upstairs to take a bath, hoping not to space out for too long as I think about the right clothes to wear.
After a good thirty minutes of being soaked in water, I'm still undecided on how I can dress to impress but still look like as if I haven't tried too hard for it.
Digging in the closet and all the drawers didn't help; trying to look for something among my father’s clothes didn’t help either so I’m only left with panic and the need to ask for help.
Usually, I would call either Soonyoung or Joshua because they’re my best friends and they know what I may like, but today I can't. Soonyoung is with Wonwoo and I really don't want to bother them. As for Joshua, well, I can't ask my date what to wear and make him sense how tense I am about tonight.
People’s faces pass before my eyes while I decide to whom I can turn to for help and, in the end, the only person with a good sense of fashion I know is Mingyu so I quickly send him an SOS text.
DonkeyKong:
Mingyu hyung, are you busy?
Pupgyu:
Not really, why?
DonkeyKong:
I kind of need your help.
Pupgyu:
What happened?
Do I need to worry?
Is it something bad?
DonkeyKong:
No, it’s just that I have to go somewhere in a bit and I don’t know what to wear.
Pupgyu:
Are you talking about your date with Joshua hyung?
DonkeyKong:
How do you know that?
Pupgyu:
Everybody knows it, plus I heard you and Joshua earlier today.
DonkeyKong:
Well, if you heard, you also know that I’m running quite late.
Pupgyu:
You still have an hour left, right?
Calm down and tell me more or less the style you want to go for.
DonkeyKong:
I want to look good without trying too hard, do you know what I mean?
Pupgyu:
Yup.
Do you already have an idea?
DonkeyKong:
Kind of?
As I was texting you, three outfits came in my mind but I can’t decide.
Pupgyu:
Show me them.
Send me a pic of the clothes.
DonkeyKong:
Alright.
*Three photos attached* What do you think?
Pupgyu:
What if you wear the black turtleneck from the first outfit.
The black skinny jeans from the third one.
The leather jacket you were wearing last night, you know, the one with the fur inside and a pair of black boots?
DonkeyKong:
Isn’t it too much black?
Pupgyu:
For the kind of concept you want to go for, a total black outfit is just the perfect choice.
DonkeyKong:
If you say so, I’ll trust you.
And what about the hair?
Should I style them?
Pupgyu:
Just don’t.
Have them down as you usually do.
DonkeyKong:
Okay, I’ll change and send you a pic so you can check it out.
Pupgyu:
I’ll be waiting for it.
DonkeyKong:
Thank you, hyung.
Pupgyu:
Don’t mention it.
Just one thing, though.
DonkeyKong:
What is it, hyung?
Pupgyu:
Relax.
There’s nothing to worry or panic about.
Everything will go wonderfully.
DonkeyKong:
I hope so.
I really do.
I press the ‘send’ button and toss my phone on the bed, ready to get changed into my total black outfit. I’m not one to usually dress like this as I prefer having at least one colourful item but Mingyu is the fashion guru between the two of us and if he says I should go for this kind of look, I’ll follow his instructions hoping I won’t look too dumb in it.
Once I wear the jacket and style my hair down as I do every day, I check my reflection in the mirror and I have to admit that he was right. I should bring him with me next time I go shopping, maybe he can show me a whole new world in this mysterious (at least to me) field. However, seeing myself dressed like this makes me realise that the time for the date has come and I’m still not mentally prepared for it.
And what do I do?
I panic again.
I walk back and forth in the same space in front of the mirror, biting on my nails and trying to reassuring myself that I won’t fuck up and that I just have to see this dinner like any other dinner Joshua and I had alone when Soonyoung wasn’t around.
A good ten minutes later I finally calm down, I take a deep breath followed by the pic I have to send to Mingyu. When it’s all done, I go downstairs to wear my boots and I’m finally ready to get to Joshua’s house.
‘You can do this, Seokmin. Don’t be nervous and go get your man.’
By the time I ring at Joshua’s door, it’s half-past six sharp.
Out of habit, I turn around to glance at Soonyoung’s house and I notice that Wonwoo’s car is still there, parked in the driveway. I smile to myself knowing that my friend is spending some quality time with his boyfriend before the holiday season finishes and we have to go back to school while they go back practising for their gigs.
When I hear the sound of footsteps coming from the other side of the door, I quickly fix my bangs with one hand and hide the box from ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ behind my back.
Bringing a cake is common courtesy when you go to someone else’s house, right?
Every sound from the inside seems to stop for a couple of seconds, it feels as if everything is in slow motion (except for my heart which is beating faster and faster), and when the door opens to reveal Joshua’s figure, I’m left astonished. He looks so soft as he wears a pair of light blue jeans under a crimson red turtleneck with sweater-paws and has his hair styled down, almost covering his big doe eyes.
“Close your mouth and come in. I don’t want you to freeze to death on our first date.” Joshua giggles and drags me inside, grabbing me by the collar of the leather jacket.
Once I’m inside, Joshua goes straight to the kitchen. “I’m sorry if I can’t help you taking your jacket off but I have to check on another couple of things I’m cooking.” He yells from the room.
“Don’t worry, hyung,” I shout back to him as I hang the jacket and toe off my shoes before joining him in the room to put the cake in the fridge. “Is there something I can help you with?”
“No, Seok. You can just sit there, watch me cooking and…” he takes a dramatic pause, biting his lips while smiling before saying, “see if I’m boyfriend material enough for you.” He shows his cheeky grin as he walks near the stove to stir what I guess is pasta in a big pot.
“I-I brought a c-cake,” I stutter and try changing the topic as I feel all the blood rushing to my face, making me redden. “I figured it was the least I could do since you invited me over.” I sit down at the table which is already set for two.
A white tablecloth with a red ribbon sewed along the edges is spread on the wooden surface, the centrepiece is a short white vase filled with a bouquet of white and red roses whose petals are sprinkled with silver glitter. There are some small candles too and if they were lit, it could’ve been the perfect romantic dinner. However, he knows how clumsy I am when I’m nervous and, to avoid starting a fire because of me hitting the candles while flailing my arms around, he has left them unlit.
“You didn’t have to. You already brought yourself and that’s more than enough.” Joshua comes closer with a plate of heart-shaped mini sandwiches accompanied by a dipping sauce, which he puts on the table. “No cake is as pretty and sweet as you are anyway.”
“Hyung! Stop it, please,” I whine as I hide my face in my hands from the embarrassment.
“What? Are you shy?” He asks, ruffling my hair. When I hum in answer without lifting my head from where it was hidden, he says “You have to get used to it, though. I won’t hold myself back. Not today.” And with that, he winks and goes back on making pasta as if he hasn’t just left behind a blushing mess of a boy.
“How am I supposed to react to that?” I ask, trying to look as casual as possible but probably failing due to how red I must be.
“I don’t know?!” He giggles and I wish his back wasn’t facing me. I love the way he scrunches his nose and his eyes almost close as he giggles. I really wish I could’ve seen it. “I guess you just have to accept my shower of attention and compliments. Now, stop questioning things and eat something. I haven’t spent my evening cooking for nothing! You must eat.”
“Oh, right.” I immediately grab a mini sandwich and dip it in the red/brown-ish sauce, giving it a bite and trying to swallow it even though the knot in my throat makes it hard to. “I like the shape. Plus, it’s really good,” I say as I examine the other half of the heart-shaped sandwich I’m holding in my hand.
“Is it?” Joshua asks and, before I could even nod or say something to him, he grabs my wrist and eats the half I hadn’t eaten yet, staring right at me as he does so and licking his lips afterwards. “You’re right. It was good.”
“Hey! I was eating that?!” I complain, heart still beating fast at the dangerous proximity of mine and Joshua’s faces. “Why did you do that?”
“You ate a half and I ate the other one. Two halves of a whole” He takes a pause to put some distance between us, probably knowing that my last two brain cells were about to stop working “Don’t you think that it’s just like the two of us are? Two people finally ready to become one.”
Joshua’s point of view
At this point, I guess that, if I keep saying things like this, Seokmin will die on me before we even reach the end of this date.
“You’re c-cheesier than the cheese in these sandwiches, you know, hyung?” He says, grabbing another sandwich and shoving it into his mouth, looking away from me and I can’t help but smile at how adorable he is.
“I know but you must know by now that I’m like this only around you.” I bop his nose before finally going back to finish making the spaghetti I was cooking.
I pour out all the water from the pot and move the spaghetti in a pan where I had already stir-fried the guanciale. I add the pecorino cheese and the eggs to make the perfect carbonara, the one that Seokmin likes the most.
In fact, as soon as I put the dish in front of him, his eyes beam at the sight and he almost salivates the way Homer Simpson does when thinking about food.
“I guess that my dare was a great idea after all,” Seokmin says after tasting the pasta and contently humming in approval.
“You think so?”
“Yup. If I hadn’t asked you that, I wouldn’t be eating this delicious carbonara with the person I like.” He tries to sound confident but by the way he’s not able to meet my eyes, I can say it took him a lot of courage.
For the first time, I blush and almost can’t stop a smile from blooming as it’s the first time that Seokmin openly says he likes me. “So you like me, uh?” I opt for a smug-ish answer not to betray how the butterflies are crazily flying around my stomach.
“Of course, I do.” Seokmin swallows the spaghetti he has in his mouth before saying, "Or else I wouldn’t be here with you. Don’t you think?” He then takes a big sip of water. “If I didn’t like you, I would’ve declined your invite and I wouldn’t be this nervous around you.”
“Wait, are you the same Seokmin I know? How are you being this bold when you were a mess just a while ago?”
He giggles. “I guess I have to be straightforward too if I want to have the upper hand on you.” And then he winks at me.
Lee Seokmin, the shiest boy I know when it comes to flirting, just winked.
I stay there, mouth slightly agape and the corners of my mouth lifting upwards. I am shocked but in a good way as I’m finding out a side of Seokmin I definitely like. A kind of boldness and a way of flirting that I would’ve missed if we’d never ended up having this date. I silently thanks whoever blessed me by making this happen and keep on eating, casually bantering with Seokmin before a real flirting war started with the sole purpose of seeing who makes whom blush more.
When dinner’s over, I let Seokmin help me with the cleaning, a great excuse to “accidentally” brush my fingers with his as I pass him the dishes he has to dry.
Every time my skin touches his, I shiver and I can’t help but wonder if I’ll ever get used to it, if my heart will ever get used to the way Seokmin makes it run faster or skip some beats, depending if he’s in his flirtatious mode or if he is looking breathtakingly cute, that kind of cute that makes you want to hold him tight in your arms, shower him with kisses and never let him go.
There are times my heart does both things and it’s when a particular cute expression appears on his face every time he’s surprised by something. It’s so adorable that I would like to surprise him in so many different ways only to see that look of his, the one that every single time makes me realise how madly in love I am with him.
And it’s for the sake of seeing that look on Seokmin that I prepared something special for him.
“Come with me,” I tell him, as I grab his hand and drag him across the hallway.
“Where are we going?” He asks, shocked by the sudden action.
“You’ll see in a second.” I put him in front of the closed door of the living room and take a deep breath before grabbing the doorknob.
I keep my eyes focused on Seokmin as I open the door and what I see it’s exactly what I hoped for.
His lips part as he gapes at the sight in front of him; his breath kind of shortens as his heart probably beats faster; his cheeks get slightly rosy and his eyes widen just that tad bit that allows you to see better how they enlighten as he admires the blanket fort standing in the middle of the room. Fairy lights adorn the entrance and the inside of the fort where there are pillows and plushies ready to get hugged and squeezed by an excited Seokmin. Various flameless candles light the way as the rest of the room is dimly lighted, and each candle is surrounded by white and red rose petals.
“Hyung, I-I am speechless.” Seokmin takes a tentative step inside the room. “When did you prepare all of this?”
“Right after I came back from Soonyoung’s house. I wanted to surprise you.”
“Well, your plan worked.” He turns around to look at me and give a shy smile. “I don’t know what to say...it’s so beautiful.”
“Shall we get inside?” I extend my hand for him to take and he does it. I walk in front of him along the short path from the door to the fort and let him enter first.
Once we’re inside, Seokmin goes for his favourite plushie, a huge Shiba Inu. “It’s so soft,” he exclaims as he hugs the giant dog.
Since I love seeing him being all flustered and shy, I lay down by his side and hug him close, resting my head on the crook of his neck. “You’re softer.”
“What are you doing?!” He loses the grip on his plushie and lightly hits me on the chest.
“Hugging my plushie,” I say as I throw my leg on him. “Yup, I definitely prefer you over the other ones in the fort and in the entire world.”
At this point, Seokmin kind of surrenders to my bold advances. He doesn’t answer but turns around to face me. “Can I?”
At first, I don’t get what he’s asking but then I feel his finger carding through my hair in the softest and most loving way possible. I almost purr like a cat, relishing in the sensation. “Mmmh, I like it.”
We stay like that for a while, silence surrounding us as we breathe each other in, trying to make the distance between our bodies disappear by holding each other tighter and tighter. Space and time don’t matter anymore, the only thing that does is how our hearts are now matching each other’s beat so they could race together as they wish for this moment to never end.
“Seokmin, I want to tell you something,” I suddenly say, breaking the silence. “Something I’ve been wanting to tell for so long.”
“What is it, hyung?”
I move away from him, enough to allow me to look at him right in the eyes. I fix a few strands of his hair before saying, “I like you, Seokmin. I like you a lot” My hand slowly comes down to caress his cheek. “I don’t really have a good way with words and I’m not one for big and showy acts of love. I’m not like Jihoon who could easily write you a song filled with my true feelings and thoughts, I’m not a painter who could paint you in the way my mind and heart perceive you. I am just me and that’s why I couldn’t find another way but this to tell you how I feel about you. I like you and if you’d ask me since when, I wouldn’t be able to answer. I can’t remember when it happened but I know that one day, I woke up and just knew that something had changed inside myself, that I was whipped for the boy who used to be one of my best friends. From that day onwards, I realised that being your friend wasn’t enough for me anymore. I wanted to hold you close, walk while holding your hand, buy you things and just see you smiling. I wanted you to be happy by my side. I wanted you to like me back.”
“And I do, hyung. I like you too and I want to be happy by your side more than anything else,” Seokmin takes my hand from his cheek and puts it on his mouth to leave pecks on the back of it. “Actually, I’ve been wanting this for so long but I was afraid that you didn’t feel the same. Seeing you flirting with all those people in the library or basically everywhere we went, made me think that acting upon my feelings would be a stupid thing to do since you didn’t show any interest in me.”
“Trust me, the way I flirted with those people is nowhere close to the way I’ve been flirting with you for all this time, including tonight. With them, it was just bantering and I wasn’t really interested in their reactions but with you...I tease you because I love the way you suddenly turn shy or hit me on the arms to make me stop, the way you straighten your back and say that my words don’t work on you at all. I like seeing you flustered because you rarely look all soft and adorable like that.” Caught up in the moment, I take his hand and place it on my chest. “Can you hear it?” Seokmin nods. “Remember that my heart beats this way because of you and will beat only for you. What I mean is that this heart of mine is yours and will always be.”
“And mine is yours, too,” Seokmin says, shifting on his side so we could be face to face. “It was already yours to take and, now, it finally belongs to you.”
“I promise you to never take it for granted and always take care of it.” I intertwine my fingers with his and let my face get closer to his. “I like you, so, so much, Seok, and I want you to be my boyfriend, now and forever.”
“I’ll be your boyfriend as long as you will be mine, now and forever.”
Seokmin inches closer too, our lips only one breath away from each other and before we could even realising it, we were sealing our promise with a kiss, the sweetest kiss I could ever wish for because it tastes of all the time spent chasing after each other.
Because it tastes of all the tears shed at night, wishing for this not to be unrequited love.
Because it tastes of all the things waiting for us in our future, the one we will be living together.
Because it tastes of what I imagined love to be.
But most of all, because it tastes like Seokmin.
After dropping Seokmin at his house and spent around ten minutes hugging in front of his door, not really wanting this night to end, I come back home.
While walking in the driveway, I notice that Wonwoo’s car is not where it was when Seokmin and I left a while ago. He must’ve left and that’s why the lights in Soonyoung’s house are all turned off. Maybe Soons is already sleeping which would be weird considering it’s only half past ten and that we woke up at midday.
However, as I’m fishing my keys from the pocket of my coat, I see a silhouette heading to Soonyoung’s doorstep. I stop with my hand buried in my pocket, wondering and waiting to see what Jihoon is doing at Soonyoung’s house this late at night. Not even a minute passes before the door opens and the taller literally throws himself in Jihoon’s arms. Judging by the way his shoulders are shaking, he must be crying.
At that, my body reacts first and I’m already walking down my driveway but stop in my tracks the moment I see my two friends disappearing inside Soonyoung’s house.
A part of me thinks, ‘Should I go to check on them? What if something bad has happened?’ while the other one says, ‘Jihoon is with Soonyoung though. Maybe they had a fight and they’re now trying to make up. If that’s the case it is better to leave them alone. If it had been a more serious matter, Soonyoung would’ve called me, right?’
I nod to myself, yeah, Soonyoung would’ve definitely reached for me in case something really bad had happened but he didn’t, so it should be nothing to worry about.
Still worried, I convince myself that the best plan is to go inside my house, go to sleep and call Soonyoung first thing in the morning to ask him about Jihoon.
‘Yes, this could work.’
However, even after a cup of hot tea and a bunch of ASMR videos, I can’t seem to fall asleep. Not until I send him a text and leave the sound of his notification and calls on. This way, I’ll wake up the moment he replies to me and that kind of makes me feel better. After doing so, it’s kind of easier to close my eyes and try to reach the dreamland where dreams of happy days with Seokmin are waiting for me.
Joshuji:
Soonyoung, I know that I don’t tell you this enough, but I love you.
You’re my bestfriend and I want you to know that, no matter what, I’m here to listen to you, to hug you and to comfort you because, through the goods and the bads, we’ve always had each other’s back.
I hope you’re sleeping tight now and that you’re having the sweetest of dreams.
I’ll see you tomorrow, so prepare to be hugged like there’s no tomorrow hahaha
Once again, I love you!!
Jihoon’s point of view
“Wonwoo l-left m-me.” Soonyoung keeps saying in between sobs and his voice trembles since he’s shaking a lot.
Thinking it may be also because of the coldness, I lightly push him so that we can both walk inside without loosening the hug. Once we’re in the hallway, I pull away from him to take off my coat and shoes but the moment I’m free from the coat, he grabs my hand tight.
I look up at him and my heart breaks at the sight.
He is a mess and the dim light shining over him makes him look so small and fragile. He looks so wrecked that fire of rage sparks inside me, making me want to punch Wonwoo in the face even though I know nothing about what happened.
However, the way Soonyoung stands there, head hung low and hand partially covering his face as he sobs, makes my instinct of taking care of him stronger than the one wanting to beat Wonwoo up.
Without saying a word, I bring him to the kitchen first so he can drink a couple of glasses of water and then I manage to make him walk to the living room and make him sit on the sofa. As he’s still shaking a bit, I grab a blanket Joshua and I had left on the other sofa this morning and wrap it around his shoulders, leaving a soft and long kiss on his hair in hopes it could somewhat help.
“Can you tell me what happened or you don’t want to talk about it yet?” I tentatively ask as I sit down next to him.
“Wonwoo t-took his things and left me here, alone.” He abruptly turns around to face me but as soon as he finishes talking, he lowers his head to look at his fingers playing with the hem of the blanket.
“Why did he leave?” I fix the blanket threatening to fall from one of his shoulders. My hand lingers for a while in the air, wanting nothing but to caress his cheeks and wipe his tears, but I let it fall again on my lap.
He lifts his legs on the sofa, bringing them close to his chest and leaning with his chin on them before explaining the events leading to this. “We were playing video-games when he got angry at something and started saying mean things to me.” He sniffles. “He basically said that my love for him was a farce and that I’m only good to love him with words but I don’t show it with my actions.”
“What is that hyung saying? Even the dumbest person on Earth could see how sincere your feelings for him are. Your eyes and the way you look at him say it all.” Although it hurts, it’s the truth. Soonyoung’s eyes never lie and when he looks at Wonwoo, you could see the love and admiration in them. Sometimes, it’s as if he is looking at a star from up-close. “Wait, can you tell me what has gotten him so worked up?” I ask, my body turning towards him.
Soonyoung’s face suddenly turns pale, his pupils shake and he tries to hide all of this with a bitter laugh as he says, “I can’t really tell you but it’s because he got jealous, which, I guess, it’s normal. Still, why is he so blind?” Soonyoung, in the sprung of the moment, grabs my hands and I feel a familiar pang at my heart. “Why does he have to make things harder than they really are?”
“I guess Wonwoo told you about his previous relationships so you kind of know why he acts like this. He’s insecure because people from his past have hurt him.” I take a short pause in between my words to rub my thumb over the knuckles of Soonyoung’s hands, still laying in mine. “It happened to us too, remember?”
“Yeah, but what am I supposed to do if he doesn’t believe me?” New tears are forming in his eyes as he desperately asks for help. “What do you think I should do, Jihoon?” He scoots closer and lays down, the side of his face landing on my chest and his arms wrapping around my middle.
It’s at this moment, with him laying in my arms, that I realise how cruel the gods up above are.
Soonyoung’s mental state is very fragile right now as he asks for help, for advice on what to do, and I know that he will take to heart the next words I’ll say because he trusts me, because I’m the person he relies on the most together with Joshua and Seokmin. That’s why I feel as if the gods brought me here to test me. They gave me some sort of “power” to try and change things, to see if I can be a selfish or selfless person.
If I decide to be selfish, I could tell Soonyoung that Wonwoo will keep being like this and will never fully trust him because once Wonwoo starts having doubts on someone, it’s the end of his relationship with that person.
I could tell Soonyoung that he deserves something more than this kind of love, that he deserves a partner who can make him feel safe, who can give him certainties about not leaving his side, not even when they get angry at each other.
I could tell Soonyoung that maybe someone else ready to love him is waiting just around the corner and after some time, tell him that this someone is me, that I am the one who wants to love him and I want to do it out in the open and not in secret like I’m doing now.
If I decide to be selfless, I could tell Soonyoung that he needs to be by Wonwoo’s side and that he will eventually gain his trust.
I could tell Soonyoung that he has to fight for the love he has found if he feels like Wonwoo is the right one for him as he makes Soonyoung feel things he had never felt before.
I could tell Soonyoung that I will be by his side so that after all the hardships he can finally be happy with Wonwoo.
In the end, what to do and say it’s only up to me and what I want for us.
Even though I want to be selfish and I want it so bad, I’m still afraid of the consequences. It could work in the beginning but one day, Soonyoung would find out the truth, he would realise that I lied to him so I could have him for myself. He could end up blaming me for not having made his and Wonwoo’s love bloom and he would eventually leave my side forever because of that.
Plus, I don’t know if I would ever be able to confess to him, to say how I really feel and it’s all because, deep down, I’m certain of what he will say. I can picture him holding my hands just like he did a while ago while saying “I’m sorry. Believe me, I love you but not in that way.” It would hurt so much not only because of the rejection per se, but because slowly things will change, he will refrain himself from doing and saying what he really wants, thinking I would read too much into it or that it would hurt me and eventually we will fall apart, acting like strangers even though we had our backs in our hardest time.
And it’s because I don’t want this to happen, because I want to be there for him when he needs me the most that I have to be selfless.
It’s a paradox, but I have to let him go to if I want to have him by my side.
I wrap my arms around him and pull him closer, holding him tighter as I lean my chin on top of his head. “You know, there are people who say that love is easy and others who say that love it’s too complicated. What about you? To which group you belong to?”
“As of now, the second one,” he answers after thinking about it and not questioning why the sudden change of topic. “What about you?”
“At first, I agreed with what the first one thought but over the years I realised that also the second group is right. By now, I am in the middle ground,” I say as I rub my thumbs in circles on his arm to soothe him. “That’s because I think that love is both easy and difficult. Falling in love with someone is so easy, it takes not even a second to fall and, with time, you keep falling for that person; it’s easy to have them in your mind all day and all night; it’s easy to accept the things we love about them and it’s easy to feel giddy around them. At the same time, it’s difficult to truly love someone, to keep that happiness alive, that feeling of being home when you are in other person’s arms; it’s difficult to get to know them and to love them to the point you even accept their flaws and the ‘dark’ side they usually hide to people they don’t trust; sometimes it’s even difficult to make up after fighting and it’s difficult to overcome hardships together. Do you get what I mean?”
“To be honest, I’m a bit confused,” Soonyoung says, freeing himself from my arms just that much allowing him to turn his head towards me. Our faces are now a few centimetres away from each other. “What are you trying to say?”
I gulp down as I stare at his lips, too close to mine. “I mean that love is both easy and difficult. The pendulum isn’t stuck on one of the two sides but it swings from one to another, meaning that there are times in which loving someone comes easy and others when one must be patient and willing to work hard, to fight for that person. Can you do that?”
“Of course, I can.” He returns to his previous position in my arms and I brush his hair as I keep the hold on him loose. “I love him, so I’m confident I can fight for him.”
“Then, you have your own answer. Let him spend this night alone so he can calm down and tomorrow you can find ways to make up to him. I bet he wants that too and he will be sorry for the things he said.”
“I will do as you say. Thank you, Jihoon.” Soonyoung grabs one of my hands, placing a soft kiss on the palm and lovingly rubbing that spot. “I don’t know what I would be doing without you.”
“Probably eating tons of ice cream while watching a sad movie.” I try to lighten the mood and it seems to work.
“You know me too well.” Soonyoung giggles and he seems to have relaxed when he makes himself more comfortable in my arms as he turns the tv on to watch an episode of our favourite tv show. “Want to stay here a while longer and watch this with me?”
“Sure, why not?” I smile at him and then fix the blanket so it can cover both our bodies. As he watches the tv and laughs at whatever it’s shown to the screen, I can’t help but lose myself in a train of thoughts.
‘Soonyoung, I know I promised to be by your side and I’ll be with you for as long as I can. However, a time will come when these feelings will be too much for me and I won’t be able to keep my promise anymore. I hope that, when the time comes, you’ll have learned how to live without me because I’m going to run away from you, to run away from what I can never have. Please, promise me you won’t hate yourself for it and that you won’t be too much in pain for me. I want you to be happy and to smile because I love you. I love you so much, maybe too much.’
Soonyoung’s point of view
"Oh my God! You finally made it!” I screech even before opening the door and let the boys inside my house. “I thought you were going to dump us!”
“Right! I was about to call and yell at you, one by one,” Joshua screams from the kitchen where he was setting the table with snacks and cans of beer as well as some bottles of soda and water.
“We would never!” Seungkwan leaves his coat on the hanger and runs for the couch, plopping himself down and closing his eyes. “We were running late because of someone, aka Kim Mingyu, who wasted a lot of time in front of his mirror trying to decide on what to wear tonight when he can pull literally any outfit off.”
“I did not waste time!” Mingyu goes to sit next to Seungkwan only to hit him on the shoulder “I should welcome the new year while looking good.”
“What the fuck does that even mean?” The blonde one opens one of his eyes to glare at the tall puppy next to him who doesn’t know how to answer so he simply shrugs.
“Anyway, we brought some more alcohol to apologise.” Seungcheol walks with big strides in the kitchen and takes out a lot of bottles from his and Jeonghan’s backpacks, putting them on the table.
“And since we started drinking later than we originally planned to, we will drink more! Am I right?” Wonwoo cheers bringing one of the gin bottles up. It’s the first time I’ve seen him this excited about alcohol.
“Should we start drinking and playing then?” Jeonghan asks, already taking a seat at the table.
“Wait, Jihoon is not here, yet,” Seokmin states after looking around and noticing that indeed he’s the only one missing. “Is he coming, right?”
“I guess he went to pick Chanyeol up,” Mingyu says while coming in the room together with Seungkwan.
“You guys don’t know what happened?” The blonde one asks the rest of us.
“No, what happened?”
“To put it briefly, yesterday I met Chanyeol near his house. He said he would be going out of town and it’s mostly because he had a fight with Jihoon. He said he needed a break from the city and him, so he will stay at his uncle in the countryside for a couple of days.”
“When did they fight?” I meddle in the conversation, asking myself why Jihoon hasn’t told me that.
Seungkwan thinks about it for a while. “I think it was two days ago? Yup. The day when we all woke up late after sleeping here.”
I gulp and my eyes widen in realisation.
It was the same day Wonwoo and I fought and Jihoon came here to comfort me. He said he had a date with Chanyeol and that’s why he had left in the afternoon.
Did they fight during their date or was it after he came to my house? Did he come here wanting to be comforted and to vent his frustration and sadness? If this is the reason why he came, I can consider myself the worst friend on this planet, no, in the whole universe.
I was being stupid and got carried away by the idea that he had heard my mind and heart calling for him that I didn’t ask him why he had suddenly shown up at my door.
‘I am a total shit. And I call myself “Jihoon’s best friend”? I am the worst as I couldn’t even notice that he was hurting too. A selfish person like me doesn’t deserve someone like him in their life.’
At that moment, the doorbell rings and, still caught up in my thoughts, I slowly walk through the hallway to open the door.
When I open it and see that it’s Jihoon, I throw my arms around his shoulders and hug him tight before he could even step in.
“What happened? Are you okay?” He sounds worried and I guess it’s because what I just did reminded him of two days ago.
“Why didn’t you tell me?” I ask, still hugging him. “Why didn’t you say that you too had a fight with Chanyeol?”
Jihoon’s shoulders relax the moment he realises what I am talking about and pulls away from the hug to take off his hat and scarf as well as his coat. “It’s nothing. You know that we’ve been fighting quite a lot these days.”
“But it sounds serious since he has even left the city.” I take his things and hang them while he crouches to untie his shoelaces.
“His family had already planned this trip in order to celebrate the new year with the rest of their family. It’s just a coincidence that we fought before he left.”
“But you haven’t made up yet?”
“No, but I will try when he comes back.” Jihoon takes his shoes off and stands up again. “What about you? Have you made up with Wonwoo?”
“We did. I went to his house yesterday and when he opened the door he was about to go out. He said he was coming to my house to apologise for how he reacted and what he said. So, we’re all good now.”
“I’m glad to hear that.” He smiles but I can see that his smile doesn’t reach his eyes. Is it because Chanyeol is still mad at him?
“Hey, what’s taking you so long? We want to play before the new year!” Seungkwan shouts from the kitchen, the others complaining because of how loud he is.
“We’re coming!” I shout back, taking Jihoon by the wrist and dragging him in the other room with the others.
When I sit next to Wonwoo and Jihoon sits at the only free spot around the table aka between Jeonghan and Seokmin, our New Year’s Eve night officially starts.
The first game we play is Monopoly, a classic board game but with a twist to it.
“The rules are the same as the traditional monopoly, the only difference is that whenever you land on someone else’s property, you take a shot. If that person owns all of that colour, you drink two shots.” Jeonghan explains to the ones who never played the drinking Monopoly.
“However, if someone refuses to drink, they have to carry out a penalty,” Seungcheol adds.
Once everyone is ready with their shots, the game starts and halfway through it, some of the boys are already more than tipsy.
“Soonyoung, I dare you to show me the most recent photo you’ve taken and if I like it, you have to post it on you SNS,” Mingyu slurs after I landed on his property and refused to take a shot. He stretches his arm to take my phone from the kitchen counter and gives it to me with a wink.
“No problem.” Overly confident, I unlock the screen and tap on the gallery’s icon.
The last photo taken was one of Jihoon and I doing a derp face. We took it a while ago when everyone was fighting over who was owning which land and sent it to my mother. Quite afraid of Wonwoo’s reaction and hoping he is too tipsy to notice, I take a deep breath and turn the phone towards Mingyu who bursts out laughing.
“Oh my God, Jihoon. I didn’t know your face could do that!”
“Do you want to see what my hands can do to you if you don’t stop laughing?”
At that, Mingyu immediately gets himself together but the fact he’s tipsy doesn’t help his cause and he still giggles at the picture. “I like it. You have to post it.”
“I will when the game is done,” I nervously say after having looked at my side and seen Wonwoo frowning at the picture on my screen.
When we got bored with the Drinking Monopoly but still had some time left to kill before midnight, we play another drinking game aka the Drunken Ladders. Basically, it’s the old ladder game, purely based on luck, but at the end of the ladders there’s the number of shots one should drink. Since there’s nine of us we went from one to nine shots.
Seungcheol goes first, choosing the fourth ladder and landing on the three shots spot. He doesn’t even let us realise what was happening that he had already downed them.
Jeonghan chooses the seventh ladder and, of course, he had to be the luckiest member and get just one shot. We all complained about how unfair it is and how we have to stop playing games based on luck.
Joshua goes for the third ladder and gets four shots which he drinks slowly as the other played their turn.
Wonwoo chooses the ninth ladder, landing on six shots. He complains at first, saying he can’t drink all of that by himself but eventually does it.
Mingyu, contrary to Jeonghan, is the unluckiest member. In fact, after choosing the first ladder he finds out he has to drink nine shots. Luckily, he’s good at handling his alcohol so he downs them as if they’re fresh water.
Seungkwan is no better than Mingyu so he has to drink eight shots and, weirdly, he does it without making a fuss.
Seokmin ends up getting five shots but his black knight in shining armour, aka Joshua hyung, comes to the rescue so two shots go to Seokmin and the other three to Joshua.
Jihoon and I are the only ones left.
We glare at each other, knowing that one of us has to drink seven shots while the other one will only have two and it’s all up to our luck.
The tension is high, the boys sing-song the ladder game’s theme while Seungcheol follows the drawing from my name to the number of shots I will take.
He goes down, turns right and then left and even goes diagonally until the pen reaches the slot with the number seven on it.
“Soonyoung will drink seven shots!” Seungcheol exclaims, clapping like a seal.
“Jihoon, you’re a lucky one!” Joshua grabs him by the shoulders and shakes him.
“Wait, Soonyoung can you even drink these or it’s too much for you?” Jihoon asks. “Do you want me to take half of them?”
I know he means well and that he just wants to help me since I once told him I’m quite the lightweight, but the others may have taken it as a way to provoke me, to say that I’m a weakling.
Hearing them boo at me as I am taking my time thinking about Jihoon’s suggestion, a spark, no, a fire ignites inside of me.
I wanted to show them that I’m not weak and that my mom didn’t raise a quitter so I just say, “I can do it, so hurry up and drink yours” before grabbing the first of the seven shots Seungkwan had poured for me and then proceed drinking all of them.
When I put the last glass on the table, I start feeling dizzy and then realise that maybe I’ve gone too far.
“Are you okay?” Wonwoo asks, placing his hand on the small of my back, maybe noticing that I shut my eyes close.
“I am, I think I just moved my head too fast and that’s why I’m dizzy.” I smile to reassure him and he smiles back, seeming convinced by my answer.
“Guys, hurry up!” Seungkwan screams from the living room where he had gone to check the time since we had left the tv on. His voice is followed by Mingyu’s. “They’re about to start the countdown! Joshua hyung, bring the champagne and the glasses!”
We all rush to the other room, afraid we wouldn’t get there on time and, in fact, the countdown starts as soon as the last of us steps in the room.
I feel so excited while watching the numbers change, closer and closer to reach the zero.
This year, especially the end of it, has brought new people in my life, a new best friend and even a boyfriend. I’ve already experienced so many things with them in just a few months and I can’t wait to see what the new year has in store for me, for all of us.
I hope it’s going to be a great one during which every one of us can be a step closer to see their dream come true, a step closer to that happiness we are all chasing after and that we can still be one big family, still have each other’s back.
I look at my friends and boyfriend one by one, basking in the feeling of being surrounded by all the people I love and certain that I want to see this very scene each and every year because I want them to be part of my past, my present and, most of all, my future.
I want them to be part of my life, part of myself.
“Three...two...one...HAPPY NEW YEAR!” We all scream in unison, followed by a screech due to how startled we were by the sudden pop of the champagne bottle. Of course, Joshua had shaken it before opening it, so we all end up showering in the champagne and barely get to drink it. However, what matters the most is that we’re all laughing and hugging each other, happy to be sharing this moment, to be together.
“To the people who are all gathered here, to the ones we’ve known for the longest and the ones we’ve just met, to the memories we made last year and the ones we’re about to make!” Seungcheol starts the sudden ment, bringing his glass mid-air and the rest of us follows. “Let’s stay together for a long time!”
“Let’s be forever!” Our voices resonate in the room together with the clink of the glasses that are downed in just one second.
“And now that the new year has officially started, let’s get wasted with the next game!” Seungkwan excitedly screams and runs back into the kitchen together with Joshua and Seokmin to grab what is left of the beer and the alcohol.
“What if we play spin the bottle?” Mingyu proposes as we are already sitting in a circle. “To make it funnier, for the first ten rounds there are no questions or dares, we only drink the number of shots the other person tells us to.”
“I like the idea,” Seungcheol rubs his hands interested by the proposal. “This way, we can get drunk faster and then the truth and dares will get more and more interesting.”
Even the rest of us goes along with the idea, looking forward to what will happen because of our bodies driven by the alcohol.
So, when the trio comes back with the bottles, we explain to them the rules to the game and immediately start playing.
The first to spin the bottle is Joshua and the bottle stops in front of Seungcheol. Of course, Joshua doesn’t lose the chance to torture the elder and he makes him drink ten shots of vodka. Then, because karma it’s a bitch, Jeonghan gives Joshua the same amount of shots.
We kept going like this and, by the end of the tenth round, most of the people are already too drunk to keep playing.
Jeonghan and Seungcheol passed out on the couch after the fifth round.
Wonwoo’s luck had apparently abandoned him because, for the last three rounds, the bottle always stopped in front of him and he had never refused to carry out the penalty, that’s why he ended up drinking a total of twenty-one shots. I guess it’s only normal that he passed out after the last shot.
At this point, there is only six of us for the second part of the game and we all know that, from now on, there’s no going back and that things are about to get intense.
“My turn to spin the bottle!” Seungkwan reaches for the bottle and makes it turn. It lands on me and I kind of know what to expect from him. “Well, well, well. Since you haven’t drunk that much, I dare you to drink five shots of whiskey.”
“Call!” I grab the half-empty bottle of liquor and pour it five times in the glass in front of me, drinking the shot one after another. “Now, it’s my turn,” I say as I spin the bottle, my head feeling the same as the bottle going round and round. “J-Joshua! I dare you to tickle Seungcheol hyung and see if he wakes up. If you don’t do it, drink three shots!”
“Are you crazy? I prefer drinking rather than getting killed by him if he wakes up!” Joshua steals three glasses from us and pours vodka in them. “I’ll spin it, get ready!” The bottle stops in front of Seokmin and Joshua’s eyes light up. “Give me a peck on the lips.”
“What?!” Seokmin shrieks.
“What’s wrong with that?” Joshua pouts and puffs his cheeks. “We’re together!”
“WHAT?!” Everyone turns to look at them feeling shocked and betrayed at the same time.
“Yes, it’s our third day as a couple,” Joshua gets up to go and sit next to Seokmin, grabbing his hand and showing their laced hands to us. “I’ve finally made him mine.”
“Fucking finally! It took you three years but in the end, you did it! I’m actually so proud of you, hyung,” Seungkwan says as he pats Joshua on the shoulder.
“I mean, we all kind of knew that you would’ve ended up together, we were just waiting for you two to realise that your feelings were, indeed, mutual,” Jihoon says and I almost jump out because of the surprise (it’s the alcohol’s fault).
Jihoon has been weirdly quiet for most of the night, watching me drinking with a scowl on his face, almost as if he didn’t want me to.
I turn around to look at him and notice that his cheeks are flushed due to the alcohol he has drunk before, the shade of pink they took is so cute and it makes me want to pinch and squish them to see if they can turn even pinker than they already are. My body almost acts on his own and I had already lifted my hand when I get stopped by the loud cheers of the guys.
“You really did it! You kissed Joshua!” Mingyu is clapping like a seal and has thrown himself on Seungkwan. “Congratulations to the both of you!”
“Yeah, yeah. Now, please, let’s focus on the game again!” Seokmin says as he pushes Joshua away and grabs the bottle. “Okay, Soonyoung! Drink another four shots!”
I am already reaching for the vodka when Jihoon grabs my wrist to stop me. “Soonyoung, you’ve drunk too much already. Skip the dare.”
“I’m not drunk though, I can perfectly handle more alcohol.” I grab the first glass that Seokmin has poured for me and down it while looking at Jihoon in the eyes. I take the second one and drink it much more slowly, my head spinning even faster when I finish the third glass. Before I could even touch the fourth glass, Jihoon had already grabbed it and drunk it on my behalf. “You didn’t have to,” I slur.
“I wanted to, plus, you’re drunk and don’t say you’re not because everyone can tell by the way you talk and by those,” Jihoon says, pointing at my rolled-up sleeves.
“It’s true. You’re sweating and your skin matches the red of your sweater!” Mingyu adds as he pours himself a glass of water.
“Maybe I’m tipsy, but not drunk.” I can feel my words coming out of my mouth slower than they should do. “Trust me.”
Seungkwan rolls his eyes. “If you’re not lying and you can take more, then you have to drink the shot Jihoon took for you but you lose your chance to spin the bottle. Of course, you’ll still carry out your penalty in case the bottle chooses you.” He snatches the empty bottle from my hand and passes me a shot glass filled to the brim.
I look at it and my stomach is protesting, yelling at me that it has reached its limit and that drinking is probably not a good idea, because I’ll either pass out or throw everything up.
However, feeling pressured by Seungkwan’s gaze on me, I drink it in one go and when I put the glass down, the possibility of it not being a good idea becomes a certainty.
My eyes fix on the floor, every noise and voice sounds muffled and I feel like floating away from my body as my head spins faster than a yoyo and time seems to flow slower. Because of this, I probably miss a couple of rounds and what makes me (kind of) snap out of this trance is the pain I feel because of Seokmin’s elbow in my ribs.
“Soonyoung, did you hear what Joshua said?” He asks me, still elbowing me in the side.
“No, I’m sorry.” I turn my head towards Joshua, trying not to show on my face how that gesture made me feel even sicker. “What did you say?”
“I dare you to kiss the person sitting on your left.” He has a smirk plastered on his face and I don’t understand why until I turn to my left and see that the person he’s talking about is Jihoon. I look at Joshua again, confusion now evident on my face. “Yes, kiss Jihoon. Now.”
My eyes return on Jihoon’s face and I get closer to him to let them roam on his features.
I look at his eyes and remember the way they almost disappear when he smiles; his cheeks, still coloured of a cute tint of pink; his little nose which I booped countless of times only to see him annoyed and to giggle at his frown; his hidden dimples which appear whenever he drinks his ice americano, taking my breath away with them.
However, what I found myself staring the longest are his lips. His thin pink lips which stretch in the most beautiful smiles when I do something stupid or when he’s just happy; lips that can form the most cute pouts when he’s focused on playing his drums or writing lyrics; lips that make a thin line when he’s lost in his own world on when he’s playing video-games; lips which he liked to lick and bite when he had to tease me.
Maybe the image of him teasing me as he wears only a towel that appears right before my eyes, plus my drunken state, is what makes me lean forward.
“Soonyoung, you don’t have to-” I shut Jihoon up with my lips before he can finish his sentence.
It’s just a peck, not a proper kiss, but it’s enough to shock everyone in the room. They don’t dare to scream, afraid of waking the others up but when I look around, they’re all with their mouth hanging open, Mingyu is rubbing his eyes as if to check if they’ve seen right. Even Joshua who dared me to do kiss Jihoon seems surprised. Maybe he didn’t expect me to do it for real and maybe I shouldn’t have done it, but, at that moment, it felt right.
“Okay, I think it’s enough for tonight,” Jihoon says, standing up and bringing the empty bottles of liquor with him. “It’s time to sleep, now,” he says before disappearing in the hallway, probably going to the kitchen to throw the bottles in the trash can.
“Definitely. We all need some rest, so all of you, take your places and let’s all close our eyes,” Joshua moves his hands as to shoo us to our futons and sleeping bags but my feet take me somewhere else.
I go into the kitchen, where the lights are on, but Jihoon is not here, only the bottles he took are left on the table. After turning the lights off, I try checking upstairs, my heart beating faster as I panic, thinking that he may have left because of me and of the kiss. Feeling like I’ve sobered up, I check the bathroom first but it’s empty, then I rush into my parents’ bedroom but this one, too, it’s empty.
Scenes from that dream I had two days ago, scenes of me running for Jihoon only to lose him, to see him taken away from me, flashes before my eyes and make my heart tighten. What if what I had feared the most has become real? What if I had lost him forever because of what I just did?
With nervous and scared steps, I open the door to my room and at first, I feel like dying when I see that the lights are turned off but then I sigh in relief when I notice Jihoon sitting on the edge of my bed, head held in his hands.
“I thought you had left.” My voice comes out weak, almost like a whisper, and Jihoon snaps his head up.
“I wouldn’t.” Jihoon stands up but doesn’t come close. “I just needed to be alone because I was shocked.” He tries to giggle but what comes out is a mirthless laugh. “I didn’t expect you to do it for real, you know.”
“I was taken aback, too. My body moved on its own.” I take a step closer to him, feeling the need to explain myself to him.
“So you didn’t really want to.” And I don’t know if I’m seeing things because I’m still very drunk, but he seems hurt by my words.
This time I rush to him, grabbing his shoulders and looking directly in his eyes. “It’s just that I suddenly felt this urge to kiss you.” I take a pause before saying, “your lips…” my eyes fall on them and I’m in trance once again, my eyes slowly losing focus as my mind starts wandering.
All I can think of is that jolt of electricity I felt when my lips touched his soft and liquor-flavoured ones, a feeling I never experienced before, not even with Wonwoo. I shouldn’t think this but I want more of it. I suddenly feel like kissing him, this time for real, so I can taste his lips even better, so I can bite them until they’re red and swollen. “...they are too beautiful to resist.”
And with that, I grab his face in my hands and kiss him.
At first, I can feel Jihoon freezing at the contact, but I don’t move. I stay there with my lips pressed on his in a peck. He doesn’t fight to push me away and it doesn’t take that long until he surrenders to me and kisses me back.
The way our lips naturally move in sync amazes me. It’s as if we’ve been making out since a long time ago and that’s why our bodies got used to the way the other moves.
The wet sound of our kissing resonating in the room makes me feel alive and it gets incredible when, in the heat of the moment, Jihoon opens his mouth, letting my tongue in.
Our tongues meet, dance together and taste each other as we move closer to the bed, Jihoon sitting on my lap and my hands roaming under his loose sweater, wanting to feel more of his skin. The atmosphere around us gets hotter and heavier by the second as our bodies push closer, in need of more contact.
What makes me reach a state of ecstasy, though, is when I bite Jihoon’s lips and a small whimper leaves his mouth. At that moment, a fire starts burning inside of me, making me grab Jihoon by his firm thighs and lay him on the bed so I can be on top of him, my hands caging him and his legs wrapped around my hips. We break the kiss to breathe but when we do, I find myself admiring a Jihoon I’d never seen before, swollen lips, dishevelled hair, short on breath and with his white collarbone peeking from the sweater. This view and the echo of his whimper in my head make me go wild, make me want to hear more and make Jihoon come undone.
I first lower my head to leave wet kisses, slowly going from his jaw to the base of his neck, his body shivering whenever my lips came in contact with his skin and his hips rolling upwards on their own, his crotch brushing mine and fueling the fire inside my body. Following what Jihoon did, I push my hips downwards, trying to match his rhythm and let our clothed cocks rub against each other, as I keep kissing his neck until I reach his collarbone, successfully getting moans out of him.
I detach my lips from his skin for a while, to catch my breath and to look at him. He is a mess and his eyes show how needy he is right now. As I admire him, I feel quite proud to see the state he is in because of me, because of my kisses.
Drunk in the moment and of Jihoon’s scent, I lower my head on him once again and sink my teeth in his flesh, just above his collarbone, the very action making him moan loud and sending more blood to the lower part of my body which didn’t stop looking for friction with Jihoon’s hard dick.
However, the sound startled Jihoon himself who immediately covers his mouth and pushes me away from him. “S-Soonyoung, w-we can’t do this. It’s w-wrong.”
“Are you afraid the others can hear us?” I ask, leaning again forward to try and attach my lips again on that spot near his collarbone.
“Yes, and because they’re probably asking where the hell are we. What if they come in and see us like this?” He says, pushing me away again and getting out of the bed. “I’ll go downstairs, you stay here in your room. If they’re still awake, I’ll tell them I helped you put your pyjamas and made sure you fell asleep.” He fixes his hair and sweater, luckily long enough to cover the tent that had formed in his jeans. “Just hope nobody heard us, especially Wonwoo.” And then he leaves the room.
The moment the door closes, it’s the moment everything downs on me.
I was making out with Jihoon, my best friend, while Wonwoo, my boyfriend, is downstairs.
I lay down on the bed, closing my eyes and massaging my temples as I feel my head suddenly pounding.
‘Is this why people swear they’ll never drink again? Is it because it makes you do this kind of things where you act recklessly?’
Slowly, the panic creeps in at the thought of the others finding out what happened, causing me to lose two of the people I care about the most; at the thought that I might’ve fucked up for real because of my instinct and my stupidity which makes me prone to do the wrong thing.
‘But if it is supposed to be wrong, why did it feel so right? Why did I feel like I was finally alive while kissing him? Why could I breathe again? But most of all, why did I want to kiss him?’
And with my head spinning again because of the sudden loads of worries and with Jihoon’s taste still lingering on my lips, everything goes black as I pass out, kind of hoping this was just a vivid dream and that when I’ll wake up, I’ll be in the living room, precisely in Wonwoo’s arms.
However, there’s a tiny part of me that unconsciously wants this to be real.
A part of me that hopes not to forget what has happened in this room when I will wake up.
A part of me foolishly hoping for this to happen again someday.
A part of me that, tonight, has realised that nothing and no one can bring me as high as Jihoon does and that I don’t want anyone else to make me feel like this.
Why? Because this part of me knows that Jihoon is, and will probably always be, the only one for me.
Notes:
Hello everyone, I'm back from the dead!
I know I've kept you waiting a lot for this, but this chapter has been a great challenge for me first of all because of its length and second because of the shifting among the different points of view. However, the biggest challenge was to write all of this when work and other personal issues have been taking away most of my time so I couldn't write when it was actually the only thing I really wanted to do. I really hope to work faster on the next chapter but by now I should know that it always happens the opposite of what I hope for hahaha.Going back to the chapter, well, a lot of different things happened and to sum up things, we now have: Seoksoo dating, Jihoon who has temporarily broken up with Chanyeol, Soonwoo back to being boyfriends and Soonhoon are now in the awkward zone after they have almost reached the point of no return (I'm sorry for the poor smut but I'm not good at that and it's so cringy for me).
So, what are your thoughts on this? What do you think it's going to happen to our heroes? Let me know in the comments or on my twitter and I'll see you with the next chapter!!As always, thank you so much for reading it and sticking up with me!!!
I love you all!
Chapter 28
Notes:
Hello!
Before starting, if you want to get more in the mood, here are the playlists I listened to while writing this chapter.
Choose the one you prefer and enjoy the ride!
Playlist one.
Playlist two.
Playlist three.
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Jihoon’s point of view
There are a lot of ways I’d love being woken up in the morning.
For example, with the smell of freshly brewed coffee lingering in the air; with a gentle kiss on my forehead and fingers carding through my hair; with the sound of the rain tapping on the window and the feeling of someone’s arms wrapped around me, nuzzling their face further into the back of my neck as they chase for warmth in a cold winter morning.
However, none of this happened today because I wake up to loud footsteps coming from somewhere above my head which become even louder a couple of minutes later, as if someone was walking right next to my ears.
Slowly, I open my eyes and look around, brain registering even the smallest detail to try and decipher where the hell am I and why my head is pounding like crazy. It’s when I see the amount of empty bottles on the floor and the guys sprawled on the couches and on the futons that I realise I am at Soonyoung’s house and remember that we came here to celebrate the New Year’s Eve.
From the warm and soft light seeping through the blinds, I guess it’s still daylight but considering how much we had drunk yesterday, I wouldn’t be surprised if I checked the time and saw we’re in the middle of the afternoon. If that was the case, though, I guess everyone’s phone would’ve already blown out with calls from parents worried if we’re alive or not.
After having an internal debate with myself on whether going back to sleep or get dressed to buy some hangover recovery drink from the nearest convenience store for all of us, I decide the latter is the choice I should go for if I want to get rid of this terrible headache.
I lift my upper body, leaning on my elbow as I bring a hand to rub the sleep away from my eyes and fix the strands of hair I’m sure are sticking out after a full night of sleep, a strangely peaceful night where I had fallen asleep rather quickly and without dreaming.
“Shh! Let’s be quiet and not wake the others up,” Someone whose voice is too familiar suddenly says.
There’s a beat of silence followed by a sudden thud and some giggles. “Soonyoung, is your pinky toe okay?”
“Yeah. The pain made me forget about the headache for a while.”
Too curious as to what’s happening in the other room, I get up from where I was laying and go on full stealth mode so they cannot notice me getting closer to the kitchen. The door is left ajar, probably because it allowed them to hear if someone of us woke up and at the same time to freely talk without having to whisper.
I hide my body behind the door and lean forward so I can peek through the small gap and see what they’re doing.
“Oh, why did you mention it? Now I can feel my head throbbing even more than it did before.” Wonwoo goes to the cupboard where the pots are stored and takes the biggest one out. “Should we try making some hangover soup for us and for the boys?”
“I think there’s all we need in the fridge, so let’s make it,” Soonyoung says as he takes the pot from the taller’s hands. “I bet they will be the same as us, if not worse.” He walks towards the sink and turns on the faucet to fill the pot with water. “We got hammered yesterday.”
“I know, right? Can’t remember a thing about what happened after the last time I spun the bottle.”
“Nonu, that’s because you passed out after that and before the real game could even start.” Soonyoung giggles.
“And I guess I missed all the fun because of that.” Wonwoo sighs and goes behind Soonyoung to envelop him in a back-hug. “I swear I won’t touch a shot of alcohol for the whole year.”
“Yes, sure. You’re going to drink soju mixed to beer as soon as we will all gather for another dinner,” Soonyoung says placing the pot on the stove, turning around to look at Wonwoo and playfully hit him on the chest
“You know me too well.” Wonwoo chuckles before leaning in for a quick peck that soon becomes a full kiss.
Soonyoung’s lips touching Wonwoo ones seems to trigger my brain, showing me a moment that I had unconsciously pushed at the back of my head.
I move away from the door to lean on the wall as different images pass in a flash before my eyes.
A peck on the lips.
Standing in the darkness.
A heated kiss.
Laying down on a bed.
Hands all over me.
Moans.
Bites.
Lustful eyes.
Soonyoung.
They’re nothing but fragments of an event and I cannot really tell if they really happened or if they are just part of a dream. They’re blurred moments that only make my head spin and ache more.
It takes me a while to place them together, to make them flow together and when I do connect all the dots, I feel breathless as if someone had just punched me, taking me by surprise and knocking the air out of my lungs. I slide down the wall, knees close to my chest and hands buried in my hair, close to pulling all of them out in desperation and shock.
Soonyoung and I have made out in the darkness of his room, driven by the alcohol flowing in our bodies, minds clouded by the lust and the heat of that kiss that just deepened more and more instead of stopping. If I hadn’t run away from there, we would’ve surely gone past that, hormones taking control over our brains and making things worse than they already are.
‘What has gotten into me? Why didn’t I stop him earlier?’
Frustrated at myself, I almost start banging the back of my head on the wall behind me but I stop just in time. I don’t want the couple in the kitchen to hear and run out of the room to find a miserable me, sitting on the floor and looking like shit.
Sighing, I go back to the living room as quiet as possible to gather my things and get out of this house, suddenly feeling claustrophobic.
The moment I open the door and the cold wind hits my face, I can breathe again and I fill my lungs with all the air they can take so I can run, run away from that house, from the memories of last night, from Soonyoung.
I run and run, the fatigue mixed to the cold air makes my chest burn from the inside but this is nothing compared to the unbearable pain I felt whenever I saw Soonyoung being too lovey-dovey with Wonwoo, whenever I hurt Chanyeol; the pain I feel whenever I think of what happened, of the way we kissed; the pain I’m going to feel when things will become awkward between us, when the time for us to part ways will come.
I run only to stop when I’m in front of my house, eyes closed, hands on my knees and body folded in two as I try to catch my breath again. Gasping and hitting my chest in hopes it will help my lungs function, I look up at the sky and see the sun shining surrounded by few clouds floating in the wide blue sky. If it wasn’t for the snow covering the streets, the bare trees and the houses’ roofs, one would’ve thought it was a spring day but it’s not. To me, it feels like it’s the coldest day of this winter.
After fishing the keys in my backpack, I enter the house and the idea was to walk straight to my room but my mother’s voice resonates in the hallway.
“Jihoon, is it you?” She asks, appearing from the kitchen while wiping a dish.
“Hi, mom.” I give her a big smile.
“Have you had lunch? It’s past three in the afternoon but I can still heat up something if you didn’t.”
“Don’t worry, mom. We have already eaten at Soonyoung’s,” I say, faking a smile, as I walk past her to head to my room. “I’ll just take a nap.”
“Been burning the midnight oil?” She chuckles, pointing at my eyes. “You look so tired.”
“Yeah. We’ve been up almost all night talking and telling each other stories.” I lie as I don’t want to worry her with her son’s messed-up love life.
“I’m so glad you were having fun with your friends. You know how much I like them, especially that kid, Soonyoung.” She contentedly sighs and comes closer to pat me on the shoulder. “He seems so kind and he cares about you a lot, so don’t lose him, okay?”
My heart tightens and it hurts. “I hope I don’t, mom.” I disappear in my room, locking the door behind me, before I could cry in front of her.
Not having the strength to do anything else, I slide against the door, just like I did at Soonyoung’s house after my memory came back, and cry.
I cry and cry, only wanting for this pain to stop, to let me breathe and let me live.
Just two days ago I had to take one of the hardest choices for me, keeping Soonyoung or letting him go and I chose the latter for his happiness. He was such a mess after having fought with Wonwoo, so scared they would never get back together and I couldn’t bear the sight of him crying, of him looking that fragile.
Seeing him smile again, being carefree and throw himself on Wonwoo as he laughed at Seungkwan spilling his drink on Mingyu. It was beautiful, yet so sad because I wasn’t and I couldn’t be the reason for his happiness.
However, life must’ve thought I wasn’t suffering enough considering what has happened later. Not only I had to let him go, but I also had to experience what it feels like to kiss him, to be in his arms, to come undone and feel powerless under his control only to never be able to experience this again. It’s as if someone let you taste the most delicious food in the world but then took it away, saying you could never eat it again. It’s just cruel.
I remember him standing in the darkness, shaking as he thought I had left the house; the panic in his eyes when I told him he didn’t want to kiss me, eyes who lost focus before diving for a kiss; how I stood still while I was telling myself to stop him; how I gave in to his lips and the taste of alcohol, to the electricity in the air. I remember the way he touched me and how I shuddered; the way he bit me and how my body reacted to it.
For the whole time, I was fighting with myself knowing that what we were doing wasn’t right, that we would end up hurting the people we love and ourselves but, at the same time, I was getting lost in the moment, our bodies moving in sync as if they knew each other too well. It felt just right but the sudden fear of losing Soonyoung made me snap out of it and, to be honest, I’m still afraid. What if he remembers, freaks out and doesn’t want to talk to me again? Or worse, never see me again? I couldn’t stand it. I know I said that one day I will have to eventually leave him but that moment is not now, it’s still too early and I still haven’t learned to live without his bubbly laugh, his hamster-ish cheeks, his lame jokes and his pouts. I’d rather want him to forget about the kiss than to have him saying we should stop being friends because things went too far. Fuck, I’d even prefer if he told me that he remembers but wants to act as if nothing happened.
That’s why, after pondering for a long time in the darkness of my room whether to talk to him or not, I came to the conclusion that it’s better if I keep this for myself.
I may be stupid, a total fool but I prefer being the only one hurting rather than parting with him, than causing him pain too.
Releasing a long sigh and wiping the tears away from my face, I finally get up and throw myself on the bed as I check the notifications on my phone.
When I unlock the screen, I have around 60 missed calls and the groupchat is in panic.
1004Han:
Still no news about Jihoon?
Kwannie:
No.
I called him but he doesn’t pick his phone up.
Pupgyu:
What if someone has kidnapped him?
DadCheol:
Mingyu, don’t say this kind of things.
You’ll worry Soonyoung even more.
Nonu:
How is he?
Joshuji:
Still crying and shaking.
He’s blabbering things like “I knew it” and “he promised” but I don’t know what he’s talking about.
DonkeyKong:
He said he’s going to Jihoon’s house if he doesn’t text or answer for another hour.
1004Han:
I swear to God, I’m going to beat him up one of these days.
DadCheol:
Calm down, Hannie.
I bet he had his reasons.
I sigh, hating myself for making Soonyoung worry again.
‘I really don’t deserve someone like him in my life. He’s too good for me, even as a friend.’
Woozy:
Cheol is right.
I’m here, alive and breathing.
1004Han:
Enjoy this moment because it won’t last for too long.
I’m coming to kill you.
Kwannie:
Oh, my God.
Jihoon!
When Jeonghan hyung is done with you, I’ll kill you again.
1004Han:
What’s wrong with you?
Where did you go?
Why did you make my child worry like this?
Woozy:
I’m sorry, but my mom called me and I had to leave early.
My phone died on the way home and I left it charging in my room, that’s why I didn’t answer.
Is Soonyoung okay?
Joshuji:
He has stopped crying but he said he’ll punch you.
Woozy:
I totally deserve it.
Pupgyu:
I want to witness this.
Woozy:
Are you sure, Mingyu hyung?
Pupgyu:
Thinking about it again, I don’t.
I don’t like violence.
I love peace.
Woozy:
I knew it.
Kwannie:
This will never be unfunny hahaha
DonkeyKong:
All’s well that ends well.
We know where Jihoon was and now we can all relax.
DadCheol:
I can’t or else Hannie will escape and hunt Jihoon down.
Kwannie:
What about going to the ice-skating rink to calm ourselves and leave this episode behind?
Pupgyu:
YES!
I’ve been dying to go there!
DadCheol:
Jeonghan and I can come, too!
Nonu:
I think I have to pass this one.
I’m busy today T-T
Joshuji:
Soonyoung said it’s a good idea, so I’ll come, too.
DonkeyKong:
I’m in!
Kwannie:
What about you, Jihoon?
Are you coming?
Woozy:
Why not?
So I can even apologise to all of you in person.
Kwannie:
Than it’s decided!
We’ll see at seven outside the building.
DonkeyKong:
Are you bringing Hansol, too?
Kwannie:
Yup.
Pupgyu:
Oh my God, we will finally meet the only person who can apparently stand Seungkwan!
I have to tell him to run away before it’s too late.
Seungkwan:
I think you are the one who has to run before I whoop your ass.
After sending a thumb up emoji, I lock my phone and close my eyes feeling physically and emotionally drained.
I’m going to see Soonyoung later and I have to face him pretending that everything’s okay, that I’ve never kissed him, that I’ve woken up this morning not remembering a thing of what happened yesterday.
But how can I forget the taste and the softness of the lips I’ve been wishing to kiss? How can I forget the touch of the person my heart longs for? How can I forget such a beautiful yet painful memory, a memory not even the alcohol was able to erase?
‘I didn’t forget but I wish you did. For you and for me.'
Soonyoung’s point of view
By the time Joshua and I get to the meeting point, Seokmin, Mingyu and Jihoon are already there. The tallest of them runs towards us like an excited puppy to greet us.
“Hello! Long time no see!”
“We’ve been together since, like, five hours ago?” Seokmin says as he steps closer to Joshua and puts his hand in his lover’s pocket.
“Right. We would’ve still been together if it wasn’t for Jihoon suddenly disappearing.” Joshua pats me on the shoulder and nods his head in Jihoon’s direction. He is standing further away from the group, eyes trained on the ground as he mindlessly kicks the snow.
“Hi, Jihoon.” I walk closer and stop right in front of him.
Hearing my voice, he lifts his head to give me a weak smile. “Hi.”
“Are you feeling alright?”
“Y-yes, why?” At that, I hit him on the chest, but not too hard. He looks at me, confused, clutching the spot I hit. “What was that for?”
“Because you were alright while I was dead ass worried because of you.” The tone of my voices an octave higher.
He sighs. “You shouldn’t have. I just went home.”
“Well, I was. I thought you had run away or, as Mingyu said, that someone walked inside my house and kidnapped you,” I blabber, hands thrown in every direction in agitation.
“But Seokmin was the one nearest the door. If something they would’ve kidnapped him, not me,” he jokes to keep things light.
“You’re short so they could’ve thought you were a rich family’s kid,” I say, ruffling his hair.
“I’m not short, you are the ones who are too tall.” He scoffs. “However, I’m sorry for worrying you and making you cry.”
“You’re forgiven, but next time leave a post-it or something like that. Don’t disappear into thin air. It scared me.”
“Why? Why were you scared?”
And I’m here, standing in front of him as the snow falls around us and I’m ready to tell him about the reason why I’m acting like this. “I know it’s stupid, but some time ago I had a dream in which I lost you forever. I was running to you but we got pushed away and you disappeared. It felt so real that when this morning I didn’t find you, I thought the nightmare came true and you left me for good.”
“Did something happen that made you think I had a valid reason to leave you?” He asks, suddenly looking serious and weirdly paler too, sweat beaming on his forehead.
‘Is he sick again?’
“What do you me-” My question is interrupted by the loud noise of car doors closing. Seungkwan had arrived together with Hansol, Jeonghan and Seungcheol.
“Hello, everyone!” Seungkwan screams as soon as he and Hansol join the group. “Since the eldest hyungs have already met him, I’ll introduce Hansol to the rest of you.” He turns to his side and pushes the slightly taller than him, honey-haired boy by the small of his back. “There’s Joshua hyung and his boyfriend Seokmin.” They wave at him with big smiles on their faces. “Then we have Soonyoung and Jihoon. I can already tell you that Ji is a tsundere while Soonie is almost as chaotic as I am.” I glare at Seungkwan for a second before Jihoon nudges me and we both bow and greet Hansol. “Last, we have the tallest and dumbest person you’ll ever meet. Mingyu.”
“Hansol-ah, I’ll tell you before it’s too late. Run away from him,” Mingyu says as he shakes hands with a very confused Hansol.
“What are you saying? Do you have a death wish?” Seungkwan threatens the tall pup, glaring and getting ready to hit him.
“See? That’s what I mean!” Mingyu runs to hide behind Joshua and sticks his tongue out to his blond friend.
“Why should I run away? His sassy side is one of the reasons why I like him.” Hansol turns to Seungkwan and flashes the softest and whipped smile I have ever seen.
“Wow...he must be crazy,” Mingyu whispers loud enough for us to hear.
Luckily, Seungkwan doesn’t catch that and says, “However, I’m sorry that you couldn’t meet Wonwoo hyung, you know, Soonyoung’s boyfriend.”
“Soonyoung’s boyfriend? Wait, you’re telling me that Soonyoung and Jihoon aren’t a thing?” The honey-haired boy asks with a shocked expression, covering his open mouth with his hand.
“Oh, boy, no. Soonyoung is Wonwoo’s boyfriend while Jihoon is with another boy. You will eventually meet him too.” Seungkwan explains, eyes darting from me to Jihoon, sensing that the atmosphere has become somewhat awkward after Hansol’s supposition.
“It’s a pity though. They really suit each other, I think they should-” Hansol gets interrupted by Seungkwan’s sudden fake laugh and, before he could continue with what he was saying, he gets dragged inside the building.
“Let’s go inside, it’s freezing cold out here.” Jeonghan grabs Seungcheol’s hand and walks towards the entrance.
The rest of us look at each other and shrug at what just happened before trailing behind them.
While walking side by side, I steal a quick glance towards Jihoon’s direction and see him looking straight ahead of him, hands buried in his pockets and his favourite black beanie covering his hair and ears. His cheeks and the tips of his nose are pink due to the cold and he looks absolutely adorable.
As I hide my smile behind my scarf, a random thought crosses my mind.
'Do Jihoon and I really look like a couple?’
Since the rink is almost full, the girl at the entrance tells us that we should either split in two groups and enter one at a time or wait until all nine of us can enter at the same time. Of course, we choose the latter.
“If you want, there’s an arcade area where you can entertain yourselves as you wait. I will call you as soon as you can enter,” the girls says once she has finished writing down our names and the shoe size for the skates.
Needless to say that the moment we turn our heads around to look in the arcade’s direction, our mouths fall, hanging wide open.
The area is huge and there is literally every kind of game to play with: from singleplayer ones to multiplayer ones; from the classic pool to the latest VR games; from the DDR to a small room for the coin karaoke.
“Where should we go fir-” I can’t even finish my sentence that the others have already raced to the zone to play at their favourite game, leaving me behind with the female employee, giggling at them, to whom I bow before running to join them.
Seungcheol is on the DDR showing off his skills to some middle schooler students who are gathered around him in awe as his feet fly on the footboard.
Mingyu, Jeonghan and Joshua are playing pool, the two evil twins cheating as soon as Mingyu got distracted by a girl asking for his number.
I can see the back of Seokmin and Seungkwan’s heads from the small window of the coin karaoke room, I internally thank the owners of the place who made sure to make the room soundproof so that we can’t hear the two of them screaming and probably having a battle on who can hit the highest note.
However, I can’t see Jihoon and Hansol so I set off with the mission to find them. I check in the basketball area, the table tennis one, the VR one but I can’t seem to find them. Discouraged, I was thinking about checking outside the building when I hear familiar screams coming from one of the booths next to the DDR. I peek inside the central booth and see Jihoon and Hansol shooting at virtual zombies.
“Jihoon, watch my back while I kill the herd that is coming from that door.”
“Hansol, watch out! On your left!”
“I got them! Shoot the one in the corner...no, not that one, the one on your right!”
“Oh? Done! What should we do next?”
I can’t help but giggle at the sight which seems to startle them because they turn around screaming and pointing their plastic guns at me.
“Woah, there. Don’t shoot me, I’m a real person.” I raise both my hands to show them that I am harmless.
“Jeez, don’t do that ever again,” Hansol says massaging his chest, hoping it would help his heart to slow down.
“For a second I thought you were a zombie and was about to hit you on the head.” Jihoon swings his weapon in the air. “You’re a lucky one.”
“Would you even be able to reach my head?”
“Are you testing me, Kwon Soonyoung?” Jihoon grabs the gun with both of his hands. “Do you want to see how hard I can hit you?”
“But you already did. You attacked my heart with your cuteness.” I smirk and get closer to him, leaning forward as I keep my hands in the pockets of my jeans. “You look so cute right now.”
“Kwon Soonyoung! If you don’t stop right now, I’m gonna kick your ass.” He looks flustered and annoyed at the same time, flailing his limbs in the air as he threatens me.
Hansol coughs on the side to catch our attention.
We had completely forgotten that he was in there with us.
“Let's go and see what the others are doing.” He says, opening the booth’s curtain and leaving without even waiting for our answer.
I shake my head and follow Jihoon outside where we find the rest of the group gathered in the table tennis area.
“Should we hold a mini-tournament?” Seungkwan proposes as soon as we join them.
“Mingyu and I are going to be the referees and the hosts of the game.” Jeonghan grabs the tall boy by the sweater and rushes to the side, stealing a paddle from the nearest table to use it as a mic. “Mingyu-ssi, why are we here tonight?” He turns in his MC mode without even warning us.
“Ah, Jeonghan-ssi, today we are here for ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’ table tennis tournament,” Mingyu says and the rest of us claps even though we’re slightly embarrassed as their voices are loud and catching people’s attention. “Let’s introduce the players for the first game, shall we?”
“Our first player, Choi Seungcheol. As you can see, he has a very firm body.” Jeonghan feels Seungcheol’s arm while the latter screeches for him to stop.
“The second contestant looks like a church oppa who learned this at church! Please, welcome Hong Joshua!” Mingyu claps and Joshua makes his entrance, gentle steps and a bow before mimicking a smash with his paddle. “He’s gentle, yet fierce. He shouldn’t be underestimated.”
“Please choose the side of the table where you want to play.” Jeonghan gestures the players to take their place, before saying, “And the tournament starts….now.”
Mingyu grabs his lower lip and pulls it to whistle and officially start the game.
Joshua decides to immediately cheat by pretending to look at something behind Seungcheol. The latter, too curious, turns around and that’s when Joshua serves. The eldest’s reflexes save him as he receives the ball which unfortunately lands on his side of the table.
At some point, the match becomes so intense that people gather around us to watch and encourage either Seungcheol or Joshua. When the match ends and the players change, the small crowd doesn’t disperse and goes on cheering for the rest of us, even laughing at the banters between Seungkwan and Seokmin.
However, by the time mine and Hansol’s turn come, the female employee from before comes to get us and guide us to the other waiting room. After wearing the skates she gave us, we finally enter the rink, in which there aren’t too many people, meaning that we can goof around without worrying to bump or fall on someone else.
We skate for what it seems like hours, laughing when someone else would fall with his butt on the ice or when they would try to stand, legs wobbly and hands gripping the fence, as they cannot find the balance to properly skate. Then, there’s Mingyu, who almost looks like a professional skater if it wasn’t for the times he would trip on his own feet and fall in an ungraceful way.
The moment we start feeling confident on the skates, Jihoon and I start chasing each other on the rink, going in circles and hiding behind Mingyu or Seungcheol when one is close to catching the other. The chase is endless as neither of us wants to give up and when I was so close to finally grab Jihoon by his sweater, I get stopped by Joshua.
“Hyung!” I whine. “I was about to catch him! Why did you stop me?”
“I’m sorry to interrupt you but can you come with me for a moment?” He’s serious tone gets me slightly worried. “I have something to ask you.”
“Can’t we talk later?”
“We could but I think that maybe you don’t want me to ask this in front of the others.”
“Okay, I’ll come with you.” I turn around, looking for Jihoon and when I spot him, I wave my hand and shout “Jihoonie, we have to stop playing for a bit. Don’t get too bored without me!”
He rolls his eyes and gives me a thumb up before he starts laughing at Mingyu who once again has flown to the ground.
‘What in the world Joshua wants to talk about? Should I worry?’
Joshua’s point of view
“Don’t worry, it’s nothing too serious,” I say as I sit down on one of the benches surrounding the rink. “Something came up to my mind and I had to say it now or else I would forget, again.”
Soonyoung sits next to me. He plays with his fingers, visibly nervous about what I was going to say. “What is it, hyung?”
I take a deep breath while I let my eyes jump from one person to another of those who are now surrounding us, from those sitting on the benches to the ones skating and enjoying themselves in the rink, until they land on Jihoon. “Two days before New Year’s Eve, when I came back home after dropping Seokmin at his house, I saw you and Jihoon hugging outside your house.”
“Y-yeah.” He gulps down and quickly glances at Jihoon before training his eyes on the floor and saying, “I guess you want to know why.”
“I do. I’d like to know what happened.” I place my hand on top of his and rub my thumb over his knuckles.
“Wonwoo had left after we had a fight. I was so scared that he had broken up with me that I started crying and praying for someone to come and comfort me. Suddenly, Jihoon showed up at my door and I hugged him out of relief. He took care of me and gave me advice on how to deal with Wonwoo. However, I later found out that Jihoon too had fought with Chanyeol so maybe that was why he came to me. He was the one seeking for comfort.”
“What? Wonwoo and you fought? Why didn’t you tell me?” I ask, shocked at the news.
“Because we made up, so there was no need to tell about the fight, right?” His smile looks bitter.
“Still, why? What triggered the fight?”
He leans back, elbows on the bench behind him. “Let’s see if you can guess.”
I think about what could have possibly angered Wonwoo when I notice that Soonyoung is looking at something. I follow his gaze because I was once told that, most of the time, whatever people are looking at is what they’re thinking about. “Jihoon?”
“Ding-dong-daeng.”
“What about Jihoon?”
“To put it briefly, he said that I spend too much time with Jihoon and that he’s the only one I see while the rest of you doesn’t matter to me, that I may have feelings for him but I’m not brave enough to confess and that I am scared Jihoon would never break up with Chanyeol for me. This last part hurt me so much, hyung.” He turns around to look at me and his eyes are brimming with tears as he recalls those moments. “He was being so mean to me.”
“Hey, I’m sure he didn’t mean any of that.” I scoot over and hold him in my arms, in hopes it would be of some help to him.
“Jihoon said that too and, to be honest, it’s thanks to him that I’m back with Wonwoo. If he didn’t tell me that I need to be patient and that I need to fight for my love, I don’t think I would’ve gone to Wonwoo’s house or forgiven him at all the day after.” Soonyoung buries his face in my sweater. “He’s such a good friend, why does everyone have to try and make it awkward by thinking there’s more between us?” His voice is so weak that I almost miss what he says.
“I don’t want you to hate me, Soonyoung, but you should really think about it. Try to look at the things you two do in another perspective, as an outsider, and maybe you can understand why people doubt your relationship.”
“But, hyung, why should I doubt something that I am sure of? I know that Jihoon is my best friend like you and Seokmin are.” He pouts as he speaks.
“Everything changes over time, especially people’s feelings. Today’s friend can become tomorrow’s stranger while yesterday’s enemy can become today’s friend. Isn’t this what happened to you and Jihoon? You two used to fight a lot, then suddenly you became friends. So why do you think it can’t change again?”
“Because I know what both of us think of each other. I know he’s going through a tough time with Chanyeol and that he will eventually overcome it so they can be happy again. I know that I am happy with Wonwoo and I love him.”
“However, you also know that Chanyeol and Wonwoo are jealous of your relationship and that their jealousy will eventually lead to an important choice. When that moment will come, who will you choose, Soonyoung? Is it going to be Wonwoo or Jihoon? With whom do you want to be happy?”
“Did you really tell him that?” Seokmin asks when we arrive with the car in front of his house. “Wow, hyung, I’m impressed.”
“Yup, I did because he should stop pretending that everything’s okay like this.” I stop the car and unbuckle my seat belt.
“You’re right.” He sighs and leans his head on the window, shivering at the coldness. “Did he answer you, though?”
“Nope but I guess it’s because he is still confused about what my question really implies. However, he will soon find his answer and will know what to do.”
“But, hyung, why, of all times, you decided to ask him now?”
“Because now I’m sure that both Chanyeol and Wonwoo have realised that those two aren’t just friends. The way they look at each other has become so obvious that if you deny it, you’re only fooling yourself.” I sigh and close my eyes. At that, Seokmin takes my hand, rubbing little circles on it. I open my eyes to look at him and smile. “I wish Soonyoung wasn’t that clueless, that way, fewer people would be suffering right now.”
“I wish that too, hyung. I still think that to Chanyeol is only karma getting back at him but Wonwoo and Jihoon…”
“We should be glad that yesterday Wonwoo was asleep when Soonyoung kissed Jihoon.”
“But Jihoon’s expression…” Seokmin trails off, his hand tightening his hold on mine. “I still have engraved in my mind his shocked face after the kiss and I’m sure that this morning he ran away because of that. He didn’t want to face Soonyoung.”
“Yeah, you’re right. This is so frustrating, they are so frustrating.”
“Should we do something?” Seokmin asks, hope in his eyes.
“Something tells me that this is going to be a long trip for them, so we can just wait and hope for the best, dear.”
Jihoon’s point of view
I never thought that walking side by side with Soonyoung could’ve made me tremble just like a leaf shaken by the wind.
Of course, if he asks me, I would tell him it’s because I feel cold but the truth is that I can’t help but feel nervous, feel scared that something might trigger his memory, resulting in him remembering what has happened between us.
What if that happens?
Will he push me away?
Will he hate me for putting his relationship in danger?
Will he say to pretend nothing has ever happened?
Will he kiss me again and tell me to be with him?
‘As if that was possible. I’m just a best friend to him, nothing more than that.’
I shake my head at the thought, feeling ridiculous for even thinking there was a possibility for him to like me. He kissed me because of a dare and then because he was drunk, not because he feels something deeper for me.
Soonyoung must have seen me shaking my head because he asks me “Is everything okay?”
“Uh?” I turn my head and see him looking concerned.
“You were deep in thought and you were shaking your head. Did something happen?” He places his hand on my shoulder, kneading it to give me some sort of comfort.
“Nothing.” I sigh and get ready to lie. “I was thinking about Seungkwan tripping over Hansol and falling on top of him.”
“Oh, that. Yeah, it was too obvious that Seungkwan did it on purpose. He always said he wanted to try one of those scenes from the movies when he had a boyfriend and he took advantage of the situation.”
“No way!” I exclaim, shocked about how bold that hyung can be. “He didn’t trip for real?”
“Jihoonie, you sure are a naive one. Anyone could tell it was a fake fall.” He thinks over it and then laughs. “Apparently, anyone but you and Hansol.”
“That guy was so scared thinking that Seungkwan got hurt and insisted so much on bringing him to the hospital. It took all of us to convince him not to!” I start laughing too, now understanding why Seungkwan hyung looked like he wanted to disappear. “I can’t believe him.”
“Me too and I’m so glad I can finally laugh about it!” He abruptly stops laughing. “Oh, wait. I just remembered that we have some unfinished business.”
“What?!” I screech and then cover my mouth, realising it was a bit too loud. “What unfinished business?”
“I’m talking about us chasing each other in the rink. Joshua interrupted us so we didn’t have a winner. Do you want to see who wins now?”
“I’m in. The first one to arrive at your house’s door is the winner.”
“Call!” We jokingly glare at each other before staring at the road towards us. “Three…”
“Two…”
“One...Go!”
We run off at a fast speed and it doesn’t take a lot to Soonyoung, who is advantaged by his long legs, to effortlessly take the lead. I sprint, trying to at least not to be too far behind him but I can’t do it, I can’t reach him.
Isn’t it funny how this perfectly reflects my emotions too?
No matter how fast I run, he’s unreachable.
No matter how hard I love him, his heart is already too far away.
A pang hits my fast-beating heart and I can’t help but slow down, hitting my chest as the pain won’t let me properly breathe.
However, when I see Soonyoung slowly disappearing, I keep running again, faster than before, not caring about the burning in my legs and chest.
All that matters, all that I want right now is to still watch him, from behind, from afar. Even if it’s just for a short while. Even if he won’t be able to see me and my feelings for him.
I’m ready to be hurt if that means that I can at least see him.
Just until the time it will become unbearable.
And I foolishly pray for this time to never come.
“Jihoonie! You lost!” Soonyoung screams from his driveway. “You’re so slow!”
“I’m not slow! I just feel a bit weak.” I cough and lean on my knees as I try to catch my breath.
“Are you feeling sick again?” He asks worried, taking one of his gloves off and placing his hand on my forehead to check my temperature. “You’re hot.”
“Idiot, it’s because we were running!” I turn my head on the side, his hand remaining mid-air.
“Is that so?” He chuckles. “I guess it’s normal that you still feel weak. After all, it has been just a few days since you’ve recovered.” He puts his glove back and buries his hand in his pocket.
“Yeah. And I’ve done nothing but worrying you for all this time.”
“You did. You worried me not once but twice and I should be upset about that and not talking to you.” Soonyoung crosses his arms over his chest and huffs in a snob-ish way. “But I can’t stay mad at you. You’re the only one I have.”
Another pang and my heart hurts again. “I’m not the only one, you have Wonwoo too.”
“True but he’s not like you. I feel like you’re the only one I can fully trust because you will never do something to hurt me.” He pinches my cheeks and smiles. “Am I right?”
“Right.” I awkwardly laugh squatting his hand away from my cheek. “But stop pinching my cheek. It hurts.”
“It’s just that you’re so adorable!”
“I am not.”
“Shut up! You are.” He grabs my whole face and squishes it between his hands. “However, stop making me worry about you, okay?”
“I fwill, nowt fleft me gwo.” I repeatedly hit his hands until he lets me go. “I still haven’t thanked you enough for that day. You took care of me by yourself and then even came to my house for a few days.”
“That’s nothing, I know you would do the same. Moreover, you know how much I like spending time with you.”
And at this moment, I hate seeing him smiling, the fondness in his eyes as he throws those words in the conversation, not really knowing that they’re like sharp knives piercing through my body.
Everything aches because I know that what he said are nothing more than words for a friend.
There’s nothing more than that but my stupid mind still hopes that there’s a hidden meaning behind those words and my heart still skips a beat at the sweet tone of his voice. “I like it too but I guess that it’s also one of the reasons why you fought with Wonwoo.”
“Uh? What do you mean?” He asks, looking like he got caught red-handed stealing something.
“I can’t help but think that you two fought because of me, because of the time you spent at my house. That’s why you didn’t tell me when I asked you.” I lower my head, not daring to look at him in the eyes as I feel somewhat guilty. “I’m so sorry.”
Soonyoung walks closer and cages me in a tight hug, my face buried in his chest and his chin placed on top of my head. “You don’t have to feel sorry. Well, it’s true that you were brought up in the conversation but, trust me, you’re not at fault. The one at fault it’s me because I couldn’t give him the certainties he was looking for. However, he too is at fault because he knows I would do anything for my friends and you’re my friend.”
“Yeah.” And it feels like he hugged me just to stab me better in the back with his words. “Friend.”
“So, don’t feel bad about it, everything is in the past, we’ve made up so there’s nothing to worry about.” He squeezes me one last time before letting me go. “Now, let’s go home. It’s pretty late and cold.”
“Okay.” I give him a tight smile and, for the first time, I do want him to go away so my chest could stop hurting.
“What’s with that smile? Did your face get paralyzed in the cold?” He chuckles and takes his scarf off. “Take it.”
“What?” I look wide-eyed at him.
“I said take it.”
“No way! It’s yours.” I push the scarf away but he insists.
“I’m home anyway, so I won’t need it inside.” He grabs the scarf in both of his hands and gently wraps it around my neck, even covering half of my face. “Here, now you’ll warm up a bit.”
“Thank you.” I sigh. “Go inside before you catch a cold.” I shoo and push him towards his door.
“Goodnight, Jihoonie. I’ll see you tomorrow!” He waves and walks away.
However, when he’s halfway through the driveway, he jogs back to me and leaves a quick peck on my forehead. “You were too cute not to do it.” He giggles and runs to his door, disappearing in a second behind it, while I am still here, standing like an idiot in the middle of the road with his scent all around me.
I touch my forehead, skin burning with the ghost of Soonyoung’s lips on it, and hate myself.
I hate myself because I can’t stop my heart from beating this fast.
I hate myself because of the little smile spreading on my lips.
I hate myself because of the tears falling down just like the snowflakes that have started falling from the sky right at this moment.
‘Soonyoung, what have you done to me?’
Soonyoung’s point of view
The day after and the one after that, the guys and I didn’t meet. Actually, we didn’t meet for quite a while because everyone had fallen back in their routines even if school and workdays were far ahead of us.
Seokmin wasn’t around because he had finally convinced his parents to take singing lessons with Seungkwan’s help. The latter had bored holes in Seok’s parents’ head, going on and on about how Seokmin has a natural talent that shouldn’t go to waste and how this doesn’t have to mean that he should seek an artistic career, that he can still study and sing as a hobby. Seokmin’s parents seemed weirdly convinced by the elder’s words so they let him enrol in the academy Seungkwan suggested.
As for me, my parents came back from Japan two days after our last hangout and since then, we were busy visiting our relatives with whom we couldn’t spend the holidays. We went to lunches and dinners with my parents’ colleagues or friends as they needed to catch up about what they did during these days off and complaining how going back to the company will be hell because of how they got used to chill at home and spending a lot of time with their families. I meet Seokmin on Sunday mornings like we always did and sometimes even get the chance to do some studying or playing with yu-gi-oh cards together.
What about ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’? Well, they went back to practising for their Friday night gig at the pub and for other gigs Joshua and Seungcheol had been called for. Because of that, they were busy being either at Mingyu’s or Jeonghan’s from morning till night.
Seungcheol sometimes texted me to ask how are things and to apologise because we weren’t spending time together, that he’s trying to schedule everything so that we can hang out at least once before school starts and we will too busy studying. Joshua has been coming to my house to sleep over when practices finished earlier than usual so we ate dinner and he would then tell me about his days and anything funny that happened with the boys before ranting about how he misses Seokmin and can’t wait to see him again.
Wonwoo and I have been going on some morning or late nights dates since we didn’t have much free time. Sometimes it felt like it was enough for us to meet for a short time, while other times it was the total opposite and we wished we could stop time from running too fast and let us stay together for a little bit longer.
As for Jihoon, things took a pretty weird turn. I rarely heard from him, we just wished each other good morning or goodnight, reminded each other to rest and eat well. A couple of times we even tried to meet for a movie or simply a coffee but he either turned it down, telling me he wouldn’t make it or he rain-checked around twenty minutes before the meeting. His behaviour had been worrying me but I knew he would’ve just brushed it off if I asked him what was happening.
The only person I could ask about Jihoon was Joshua and I did two days ago when he last slept over.
It’s late at night and Joshua and I are in the darkness of my room. He’s at the computer playing some online multiplayer games with random people while I am laying on my bed, hands laced behind my head and looking at the bright full moon in the sky with a bitter smile on my face.
She’s there, surrounded by billions of shining stars although they can’t be seen, making her look like she’s lonely, with nothing but darkness around her.
She reminds me of myself, of the times I felt lonely even though I wasn’t alone but she also reminds me of Jihoon, of his fair pale skin, of his dimples, of the times we spent talking about going stargazing together or walking on the beach at night.
She reminds me of so many late-night talks on the phone or the deep conversation we had when he was sick.
I am so deep in my thoughts about Jihoon that, without even realising, I end up asking Joshua, “Hyung, how’s Jihoon?”
“Don’t you talk to him every day? Why are you asking me?” He asks back, still concentrating on his game.
“It’s been a while since he’s acting...strange. We barely text and when I ask him to meet, he either says no or cancels last minute and Jihoon isn’t the type to do that.” I sigh. “I’m worried.”
At that, Joshua pauses the game and turns around to give me and my problem his full attention. “Wait, before I say anything, did something happen between you two for him to act like that?”
“No, hyung. Everything was okay between us when we last met but after that day, he’s been acting like this. Do you know why?”
“Actually, I hoped you knew since you are his best friend.” He sighs and comes to lay on the bed, too. “He has been weird around us these past days and it’s worrying us. He comes late at every appointment, he’s not focused during practices, he has apparently lost his appetite and he’s been pulling a lot of all-nighters to work on new songs for the band and for himself. He doesn’t look good at all.”
Hearing these words, hearing that he’s once again not properly taking care of himself hurts me so much.
Imagining how dark the circles around his eyes may be, how sunken his cheeks and how paler he got because of the tiredness makes my heart tighten and tears form in my eyes.
‘That idiot. Why is he making me worried about him, again?’
“Do you think it may have something to do with Chanyeol?” I ask him when I realise he basically may be lovesick.
“Maybe you’re right. Jihoon may be like this because he misses him and wants to make up.” He then snaps his fingers, a sign that he’s just got an idea. “Soons, hear this. Tomorrow, Chanyeol will be back. All we need to do is convincing Jihoon to meet him and talk about what happened. I could bring Jihoon to the cafè, tell Chanyeol to join us and once he’s there, I’ll leave them alone. When they will be back together, Jihoon will be again a happy, grumpy small bean. What do you think?”
Suddenly, the idea of him getting back in the clutches of Chanyeol didn’t sound too convincing, it made a knot tie in my stomach and my heart nervously run. However, if reconciling with Chanyeol can bring Jihoon back to normal, then it’s a good plan. “Yeah. It may work,” I say, voice weak and I don’t even know the reason for it. “But why do we need to convince him?”
“Because he doesn’t really want to go out of his house if it’s not for the practises, so we need him to at least get to Coffee & Goodpie so they can actually meet.” Joshua shifts around to lay on his side and face me. “And that’s your task.”
“My task?!”
“Yes.”
“Why me?”
“Because he hardly says no to you.”
I sigh and rub my face in frustration. For some reasons, I don’t want to be the one helping them get back together but I change my mind again when I think it’s not about me but about Jihoon’s happiness. “Okay. I’ll try.”
“Then leave the rest to me, I’ll make sure they meet tomorrow so we can have Jihoon back!” He shouts, a little too loud than allowed at this hour of the night.
“Hyung! Do you want my parents to scold us and kick you out? Stop screaming!” I whisper-shout.
“I’m sorry. I got too carried away.” He giggles before burying himself under the blankets. “Let’s go to sleep now. Tomorrow we have a mission to accomplish.”
I shake my head and join him under the covers. “Goodnight, hyung.”
The whole night, I toss and turn around, feeling too restless to actually get some sleep.
After having stared at the ceiling for what it felt like an eternity, I decide to grab my phone from the bedside table and check the time.
It’s five in the morning and there’s no one I can bother at this ungodly hour, so I write a bunch of random tweets, clear the notification list on facebook and the spam folder in the mail, scroll through memes and videos on Instagram, read some webtoons till it’s way past seven.
By that time, my eyes are finally heavy and I don’t want to fight against the sleep so immediately lock my phone. However, when I’m about to put it on the table, I remember what Joshua asked me to do, so, before going to sleep, I unlock the screen and start typing.
Hoshiya:
Hi, Ji! I know that it’s too early in the morning for this and you don’t really like when someone nags at you but I need to say this.
Joshua told me that you’re not getting proper sleep and that you’re not getting out of your house and it pains me a lot.
It makes me think of when you overworked yourself and fainted because of your fever and I don’t want it to happen again.
I don’t know why you’re doing this to yourself too, not taking care of your needs but, please, stop it.
Stop hurting your body and stop worrying me.
Can you do that for yourself and me, for all the people that care about you?
Actually, Joshua told me that he was going to invite you for a drink at ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ so can you please, please, go with him?
I bet you’ll feel so much better after eating one of their muffins, the one you like the most.
If you don’t feel like answering my text, it’s okay, but please hang out with Joshua later today.
I hope you’ll have a nice day and I hope you remember that I care about.
If you’re having a hard time, I’m only one call away.
I love you so much, Ji!
I’ll see you soon!
I press ‘ enter ’ and stare at the screen until the text is sent.
Not being able to keep my eyes open anymore, I let the phone fall on the bed and I, too, fall in a deep sleep while the morning light starts seeping through the curtains of my room.
However, as I lose consciousness, I feel a weight on my chest.
‘This was definitely the right thing to do but why do I feel like this?’
What happened after that? Well, as I expected, Jihoon didn’t reply to my text and Joshua suddenly went M.I.A. without telling me anything about the outcome of his plan.
The only thing left to do was waiting for Seungkwan’s birthday party and see if we miserably failed or if something has changed.
When that night comes, I realise that something has definitely changed, but in an unexpected way.
The day of Seungkwan’s birthday has finally come and it’s a day he’s been anticipating a lot since he’s turning 21, meaning that he’s officially an adult. Because of that, he wanted to celebrate at the club with his friends, dancing and drinking all night long but since there’s some of us who are underage (his boyfriend, Hansol, is still one of us until next month), he decided to throw a party at his house instead. This way he could still dance and drink while having all his friends around.
Since Seungkwan has a wide circle of friends, besides ‘Jeonghan’s bitches’ (Seokmin and I became honorary members), he has invited some of his seniors and friends from uni, too.
Now, when you hear someone say ‘some’, you’d usually expect around five to ten people, right? However, when Seokmin and I walk inside his house, we are taken aback by the number of people who were already in there.
There are around forty people and none of them is a friend of ours, meaning there are more or less another ten people who have yet to fit in Seungkwan’s living room and kitchen.
Of course, the couches and most of the chairs placed around the room are already taken. The only free spots are next to people we don’t know. The two of us are too shy to sit there and we don’t want to make it awkward for those people who may feel like they have to make small talk with us. That’s why we decide to take some food set on one of the tables and go to one of the corners, waiting for someone from our group to save us.
Mingyu is the first one to come and he immediately spots us but when he is almost close to where we are, a girl (probably a friend of his) yelling “Mingyu-yah!” blocks him and drags him to the drinks table.
First hope crushed.
Seungcheol and Jeonghan arrive some time later, bags full of bottles of alcohol (at this point I think they’re the official dealers of every party). The moment they step inside the house, they’re called in the kitchen to help others make and mix drinks.
Second hope crushed.
Finally, Wonwoo is here and I’m happy that I can see my boyfriend again. No girl blocks him and no one calls him into another room so I walk towards him with a big smile on my face that falls when his phone starts ringing and he excuses himself to take the call.
Third hope crushed.
Ten minutes later, the bell rings a couple of times. Since Seungkwan is busy talking with a senior, he gestures me, the first person with whom he makes eye-contact, to open the door.
When I do open the door, I’m so glad to see Joshua’s face that I almost screech and jump to hug him but I stop the moment I realise he’s not alone.
Jihoon is here and he’s holding Chanyeol’s hand.
My heart skips a beat and the words die in my throat but, luckily, my smile doesn’t falter. However, I can’t seem to move a single muscle in my body or to tear my eyes from their hands. I just stand still, like an idiot.
“I know we’re late but the traffic was murder, you know,” Joshua says, walking past me and purposely bumping into me. “We’re lucky we got here now.”
I mentally thank my friend, his action actually helping me in getting myself together and moving aside so the others can walk in too.
Joshua runs to Seokmin’s side as soon as he takes his shoes off, leaving me alone with Jihoon and Chanyeol who are still busy taking their coats off. None of them greets nor says a word to me and I awkwardly stand there, a fight going on inside my head about if I should say something or keep being quiet.
The moment I decide to start a small talk, Jihoon slowly turns around and our eyes meet. All the courage I had mustered, vanishes and takes everything else with it, leaving nothing but emptiness in which the sound of my fast-beating heart echoes, loud and deafening. Time stops around me, around us, and space doesn’t exist anymore.
Having him, like this in front of me, makes me realise that this is the first time I’m meeting him in fifteen days and that all of my worries turned out to be true. The violet around his eyes is darker than they used to be, his cheeks have sunken and his favourite sweater falling loose on him as he got much thinner.
My heart aches and I want to do nothing but embrace him and cry because of how fragile he looks. I want to ask him sorry for not being next to him when he may have needed me the most, for not being the friend he deserves. He’s always here for me, he can tell when something’s off but I can’t seem to be able to do the same and I hate myself for this.
‘He’s right when he says I’m an idiot.’
“Hey,” I eventually manage to say, voice all crackly as I am trying to choke back tears.
Jihoon’s eyes, still glued to mine, show a hint of worry upon hearing me talk. I can’t help but chuckle with bitterness. He is the one in worse shape than I am but he still worries about me.
‘He’s an idiot too. He should care about himself.’
He opens his mouth, finally trying to say something, but Chanyeol takes his hand and drags him away before he could speak. Startled, he turns his head to look at his boyfriend and it’s like the spell that had been cast on us breaks.
Time flows again and I find myself feeling dizzy and in need of air, as if I’ve been underwater in apnoea way longer than I should’ve.
Seokmin comes closer, Joshua trailing behind him. Both of their faces showing their concern. “Are you okay?”
“Yes, I’m okay.” I smile at them who don’t seem convinced and, to be honest, neither am I. “I just need something to drink since I’m a bit thirsty.”
“Not alcohol though. Last time you went too far.” Joshua leads the way to the table, walking through the crowd and greeting the few people he knew. He takes the jar full of water and pours me a glass, filling it almost till the rim. “Here, drink some water.”
“Thank you.” I down half of it before my throat starts burning. In a flash, I put the glass on the table and cough. “Hyung! That was not water!”
Joshua takes the red cup and brings it to his nose to smell it. “That little shit-head,” he says before storming into the kitchen yelling at Seungcheol for his cheap trick of putting vodka instead of water into the jar.
When I stop feeling like my insides are melting because of the alcohol, I giggle at the scene of Joshua scolding Seungcheol with Jeonghan and Seokmin trying to calm him down. Maybe I giggle because the vodka helped me relax a bit or maybe because I’m already drunk.
The rest of the night goes by pretty chill, I spend most of the time on the couch, sitting on Wonwoo’s lap as he casually drinks beer and chats with his friends.
Sometimes they would throw some questions at me, wanting to know more about the person who could finally melt the cold heart of their “emo Wonu” and it’s actually entertaining, especially when they would tell about episodes of their high school life like the time they took part at the school talent show: they chose to cover Rainism by Rain but it was a disaster considering how bad they were at dancing, especially Wonwoo who looked like a robot. I laughed so much when one of his friends got up to mimic the way he danced and at that moment, I felt a pair of eyes on me.
I snap my head to the side and see that Jihoon is sitting alone on another couch. He is the one looking at me. From the look in his eyes, I can tell he wants to join us but maybe he doesn’t come because there are people he doesn’t really know.
Aware of the fact that he won’t come on his own will, I give him a small smile and gesture him to join us. At first, he shakes his head almost scared at the idea of leaving that sofa but seeing how much I insist, he can do nothing but sigh and give up.
He stands and fixes his clothes before walking towards the centre of the room, where we are sitting. However, he manages to take one step and then something, or rather someone, gets in his way.
Chanyeol has appeared in front of the sofa, blocking him from getting any closer to us and Jihoon seems genuinely startled to the point he goes back to sit on the sofa, not daring to look in our direction anymore.
My smile falls and my lips disappear in a thin line in what’s a mix of hurt and anger. At that moment, Joshua stops next to me and leans so that his lips are close to my ear.
“Come with me in the kitchen,” he whispers before disappearing in the other room.
After excusing myself for suddenly leaving the conversation, I follow him in the kitchen.
“I’m so glad you’re still alive,” he says out of nowhere. “For a moment I was scared.”
“What are you talking about?” I ask visibly confused. “Is it about the alcohol?”
“No. I thought Chanyeol was about to kill you a while ago.”
“Why should he? I’ve done nothing wrong, though.” The last sentence sounds more like a question than an affirmation.
“You called Jihoon over and that’s already a great crime for Chanyeol.”
“What the fuck? Why?”
Joshua sighs and sits on the counter, legs crossed and dangling. “Since they got back together, Chanyeol has become quite possessive and doesn’t let almost anyone near him. Truth is that you’re the first name written on his blacklist.”
“Me?” My voice comes out in a high pitched screech.
“Yes. I guess I don’t have to tell you the reason why as you already know.” He sighs again and says, “I’m sorry. I should’ve prepared you for this but things got so busy that I couldn’t find the right moment to tell you what happened.”
“Don’t worry, hyung. Even if you told me, I still wouldn’t be ready for this.” A bitter laugh escapes from my mouth. “I can’t believe the two of us can’t stay next to each other without being misunderstood. Why doesn’t it happen with you or with Seokmin when we do the exact same things I do with him? Why hyung? Why do they have to make me feel like it’s wrong to be friends with Jihoonie?”
My voice is suddenly so small that I’m afraid Joshua might have not heard me. I lift my head and see him with his mouth open as if he wanted to say something but then closes it. He rubs a hand on my back and sighs for the third time since we started talking. “You being friends with Jihoon is not wrong and soon both Chanyeol and Wonwoo will understand that too. You just have to be patient, okay?”
“You know it’s not my forte but, as long as I don’t lose him, I can wait. I can do anything for him.”
“You won’t lose him,” he says and his smile is so warm that I end up believing his words and relax a bit. “Now, let’s get you back to Wonwoo or he will accuse me of kidnapping his boyfriend.”
We laugh and go back to the living room where nothing has changed except for the fact there were a lot of people standing in a circle in the middle of the room. Joshua and I get closer to check what’s happening.
Seokmin and Seungkwan are in the middle of the circle, sitting on the floor with way too many shots in front of them.
“What’s happening?” Joshua asks Wonwoo once we find him in the crowd.
“They started bickering about who’s a better drinker between the two,” Wonwoo answers as he puts his arms around my waist in a back-hug and leans with his chin on my shoulder. “The bickering turned out in a full battle to prove who’s right.”
“I swear to God, Seokmin-” Joshua is about to enter the circle but Wonwoo stops him.
“Don’t. I tried early to do that and I almost got beaten up. Let them be, I bet they’ll soon fall asleep. Plus, it’s funny.”
Joshua comes back to our side to do as Wonwoo said and, truth to be told, it is indeed funny. Even while swaying and with their eyes half-closed, they still have the energy to squabble.
“You’re done, hyung,” Seokmin says, pointing a finger at Seungkwan and hiccuping.
“No, I’m not.” Seungkwan closes his eyes and shakes his head while pouting. “It seems like you’re the one whose eyes have lost focus.”
“They didn’t,” Seokmin complains as he widens his eyes. “See? They’re wide open.”
They go back and forth like that while drinking a shot after another until, as Wonwoo said, they don’t pass out on the floor.
The birthday boy being knocked out by the alcohol is everyone’s cue to leave the party.
Once Seungkwan’s friends and seniors have all left, I help Hansol bringing Seungkwan to his room, Mingyu trailing behind us with a bottle of water and aspirin so that tomorrow he can take it as soon as he wakes up.
Then I help Joshua with Seokmin and we both mentally thank God that they had already told Seokmin’s parents that he would’ve spent the night over to Joshua’s or else it would’ve been a complete disaster.
While I am fastening Seokmin’s belt, I see Jihoon and Chanyeol leaving the house with the corner of my eyes. Chanyeol probably took advantage of the fact that I wasn’t inside to sneak out and preventing Jihoon and me to bump in each other. I don’t even have the time to start getting angry at the thought that I’m startled by Joshua slamming the car’s door. He apologises for it and once he’s sure that Seokmin is okay, he starts the car and leaves.
Wonwoo was supposed to drive me home but since he had his fair amount of beer and he has to help Seungcheol and Jeonghan with cleaning, Mingyu is the one who drops me in front of my house.
“Thank you so much, Mingyu,” I say as I get off. “Let me know when you’re home, okay?”
“I will!” He winks and smiles. “I’ll talk to you later then!”
I stand there as I watch him rolling the window up after starting the car again.
While waving at him for one last time, I can’t help but think that Wonwoo not being here is a clear sign for me, a sign that I should do what I’ve been thinking about since I had that talk with Joshua.
That’s why once Mingyu’s car disappears around the corner, I run with all my might towards Jihoon’s house, hoping that it’s not too late for me.
Joshua told me to be patient and wait for things to calm down but I can’t stay still, spending every day with the fear of losing him forever and in hopes for things to change. Jihoon told me that when we love someone, we have to fight for them when times are hard and, right now, it’s what I have, no, what I want to do.
To make sure we will be together, I have to fight for Jihoon.
Jihoon’s point of view
When Chanyeol disappears behind his house’s door, my smile disappears too. I feel so tired, too tired, to keep pretending that I’m okay.
Replaying the events of the night as I walk home has made me realise the torture I put up with during the whole party.
When I saw Soonyoung opening the door, my heart jumped out of the chest at how cute he looked with his oversized pink sweater and his cheeks slightly flushed.
I stood there, hoping to make eye-contact with him and give a small smile in greeting, however, his eyes were glued somewhere else. I followed them and found out that he was staring at my hand holding Chanyeol’s. He seemed hurt even if he was smiling and, because of that, I instinctively wanted to let go of Chanyeol’s hand but I told myself that I couldn’t do that.
‘It’s probably my imagination anyway. Maybe he is just surprised that we already got back together.’ is what I thought. ‘Why should he be hurt?’
After that, there was a moment when our eyes finally met and it felt as if everything else had disappeared.
It was just the two of us right there and my heart was going crazy at how soft he looked, at how everything about him seemed even more beautiful now that I got to see him and truth be told, these days without Soonyoung were a never-ending hell.
I’m sure I had heart eyes for him as I felt in pure bliss just by staring at him.
Heart eyes that, however, broke the moment his smile fell and his eyes were brimming with tears.
Panicking as I didn’t know why his mood changed that suddenly, I was about to take a step forward and ask him what was wrong but stopped because Chanyeol was next to me. I squeezed my hands into fists, trying to resist the impulse of taking him into my arms and try to make his pain go away.
Then, he spoke to me. A simple “hey” and a bitter giggle escaped from his lips and it sounded so weak and choked that my heart completely shattered.
‘Fuck Chanyeol. I have to talk to him,’ I thought and when I was about to answer him, Chanyeol dragged me away.
I was so furious, I wanted to scream at him for taking me away but, once again, I remembered I couldn’t lash out on Chanyeol.
The rest of the night went on more or less like that, with me watching Soonyoung from afar and wishing to talk to him or even sit next to him without saying a single word; wishing to graze his arm or fingers when picking food; wishing for our eyes to meet and get lost in the world made of the two of us, just like before.
However, none of that happened with Chanyeol never leaving my side and making sure to take me away when the risk of me and Soonyoung interacting got higher.
I know, Chanyeol’s behaviour is kind of childish but I can’t blame him. How could I when I am the one responsible for his insecurities? When I am the one guilty of making him cry too many times? When I am the one whose heart now belongs to another person? I’m in no position to judge him, to call him names or to act up even if I want to do all of that because he’s the only one standing in the way, keeping me away from Soonyoung. However, I promised myself to wait a bit longer, to be patient and endure this torture if that makes things easier, if that means that at some point, I can go back to being at Soonyoung’s side.
We need each other...just not in the same way.
He needs me as a friend to laugh with in and to cry with.
I need him just as much as I need air to breathe. I need him to feel alive even if he’s the one who is slowly killing me.
'Sometimes, I just want to touch him, hold him, be with him because I love him. But at the same time, I wish I could leave him, hate him and erase him because I can’t love him.'
And right at this moment, I wish I could hate him and call him stupid for he’s standing in front of my house, body facing the road and head hung low.
He’s shivering, his scarf and hat probably being not enough to fight the coldness of this night.
“Soonyoung,” I call him out softly, in order not to startle him.
Upon hearing my voice, Soonyoung lifts his head and beams. “Jihoonie, you’re finally here,” he says before running to hug me, tighter than he has ever done.
“What are you doing here?” I ask still startled and frozen because of his sudden hug attack.
“Jihoonie…I-” He starts but his voice cracks as he starts crying. His sobs, loud, breaking the silence of the night.
At that, I can’t help but wrap my arms around him, hugging him back and pushing his body even closer to mine. He buries his head in the crook of my neck and lets all the tears out. “It’s okay, I’m here now.” I try to soothe him by patting the back of his head and cradling him just like you would do with a baby.
After a while, he seems to calm down a bit, enough for him to whisper “I’m sorry” and to lift his head to look at me in the eyes. “It’s just that I’ve missed you so much that it hurt.”
“I’ve missed you too, Soons.” And it’s true. God knows how much I’ve missed him. “But it’s not like we haven’t seen each other for years,” I say, trying to make him crack a smile.
“I know. In fact, I can’t understand why I’m acting like this.” He sniffs and he does smile, looking so cute that my heart tightens.
Tears keep on streaming down his face but he doesn’t care. He doesn’t let go of me to wipe them, leaving me no other choice.
I take my gloves off and tentatively move my hands towards his face.
Soonyoung doesn’t move, he looks at me as if to encourage me, to let me know that I can touch him.
Gently, I bring my hands to cup his face and he shivers the moment my warm hands come in contact with his cold skin.
As I slowly brush my thumbs on his cheeks to wipe his tears away, he leans in the touch, eyes closing, arms still wrapped around my middle and finally looking at peace.
“I wish time could stop now,” he says, breaking the long silence that had settled between us.
“Why?” I ask him confused.
“So that we don’t have to go back and act like strangers.”
“Just like at the party?”
“Yes.” He sighs. “It was torturous not being able to talk to you and see you getting dragged away.”
“You’re right, it was. At some point, I thought I was about to go crazy.” I chuckle and it sounds too bitter even to my own ears.
Soonyoung opens his eyes and stares for a couple of seconds before asking “Then why you put up with it?”
The pain in his eyes seems to mirror mine as I answer him. “I guess it’s to stop him from feeling insecure so that he will eventually trust me.”
“Aren’t you afraid, though?”
“Of what?”
“That things won’t change and that we’ll end up losing each other? Because that scares me to death.”
My thumbs stop for a split of second before going back to caress his cheeks. “To be honest, I am.” I flash him a weak smile. “I’m afraid too but I want to trust him for now.”
Soonyoung takes my hands off of his face and closes the gap between our bodies to lean his head on top of mine. “Then promise me one thing, Jihoonie. If he ever makes you choose between me and him, please, choose me.”
‘Soonyoung, I will always choose you over him, over anyone else. But what about you? Would you choose me over Wonwoo?’
I wish I could tell him what I really think but instead, I end up saying, “There will be no need to choose.”
“Promise me.”
My eyes are getting watery and I close them to prevent tears from falling as I bury my face on his chest. “I promise you.”
“Promise me one more thing.” I can tell he is talking while pouting from the tone of his voice.
“What?”
“That you will properly take care of yourself. You got too thin that there’s almost none of you left to hug.” He chuckles, a melody to my ears. “I know you were suffering for your breakup with Chanyeol but you don’t have to starve.”
“I promise you. I will stop skipping meals and get proper sleep, is that enough?”
“Yes. You better keep your word,” he says once he breaks the hug but grabbing one of my hands and rubbing circles on it. “I’ll keep my eyes on you.”
“Yes, mom.” I roll my eyes pretending that I’m annoyed. Truth is that it suddenly feels too cold and scary without his arms around me.
He laughs and pats my head with his other hand. “Good boy.” He pinches my cheek before saying, “I think I have to go now and you too need to sleep.”
“Do you want to sleep here? It’s late.”
“Don’t worry. I already told my parents I would sleep at home. They would probably freak out if they don’t find me in my bed when they wake up.”
“Okay.” I hold his hand tight and say, “Goodnight, then.”
“Sweet dreams, Jihoonie.” He leans to leave a soft and gentle kiss on my cheek before letting go of my hand and smile at me one last time.
When he leaves, I am once again surrounded by the silence of the night. The moon, peeking from the grey clouds, shines on me who’s alone and lost in a love maze who only seems to grow wider around me as days goes by.
“Idiot,” I whisper to make sure the wind won’t bring my words to him. “I wasn’t suffering for Chanyeol. It was for you.” I gulp, trying to push down the knot forming in my throat. “For a while, I was stupid enough to think that you kissing me was a blessing but it turned out to be a curse. I couldn’t sleep at night because as soon as I closed my eyes, I could feel the ghost of that kiss. I couldn’t eat because nothing tasted the way your lips did. The only thing I could do was to keep myself busy and try not to think about it but I failed. Every song I tried to write ended up being about you. Every single thing I did reminded me of you.”
At this point, I am too tired to pretend that I’m fine.
Too tired to fool myself into thinking that I don’t need his love.
Too tired to tell myself that it’s okay as long I am the only one suffering.
That’s why with tears falling from my eyes and with the moon looking over me, I whisper into the night, “Can you please love me?”
Notes:
And here we are, back with the angst! (Did we ever leave it, though?) Hansol too has to witness to this mess now!
Things are getting quite complicated for the two of them with Chanyeol back in track.
Don't be angry with Joshua for helping Jihoon getting back with Chanyeol, though. He knows about Soonhoon's true feelings and he has a bigger plan laid out inside that devil-ish mind of his.And, yes, most of the dialogues during the tournament and the BooSeok drunk part are real dialogues the members had.
As always, let me know what you think about the chapter and the characters in the comments or on twt!
PS: I think I'll set with one update a month since it helps me coming back to you with a long and eventful chapter! So, this time too, thank you so much for reading this and I'll see you next month!
I love you all!!!!
Chapter 29
Notes:
Hellooo!!!
Before starting, I want to leave here an amazing fanart
my friend @zelmalheiros did for this story. Thank you so much for this, you made me so happy with it <3I'll leave some of the playlists I used to write this chapter + the song mentioned at the end of the chapter.
Playlist 1
Playlist 2
Lionel Richie - Hello
Enjoy the ride!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Soonyoung’s point of view
Light footsteps coming from the hallway and echoing in the silence of the second floor are the sounds warning me that my mother is probably coming into my room. I shut my eyes closed and breathe slowly, making sure my chest rises and falls in a pace similar to the one you have while sleeping.
The sound of her steps grows louder as she walks in my room, passing before my bed to reach the window and fling the curtains open to let the morning light chase away the darkness.
As the light hits my face, I groan and shift in my bed pretending that she has just woken me up.
“Don’t do that. You know I feel like shit,” I bringing the blankets over my head to make things even more believable.
“Language,” she reprimands once she sits on my bed, placing a hand on where she thought my shoulder is. “And you know I need to take your temperature and make sure you have everything before going to work.”
“Can’t I do it by myself later? I want to sleep a little bit more.”
“It’s going to take a second, then you can sleep as much as you want.”
Huffing, I take the covers off and my mother is ready with one of those hi-tech thermometers, the ones who look like guns. She points it at my head and sighs when it beeps. “It’s early morning and your temperature is already this high.” Her free hand moves from my shoulder to brush my hair and caress my cheek. “I should call the office and tell them I’m not going to work today.”
“Don’t worry, mom,” I say as I place a kiss on her palm and smile. “I will be sleeping the whole morning and you’ll be back at lunch anyway.”
“But I’ll still ask the company to let me work from home in the afternoon until this fever of yours goes away. My job is important but you matter more.” She places a kiss on my forehead and ruffles my hair. “Do you have everything you need?”
“I have my pillow and blankets so, yes, I definitely have all the things I need to sleep.” I giggle.
Mom rolls her eyes, trying to hide her smile. “I’ll bring you some medicine before going to work. Don’t fall asleep in the meantime.”
“I won’t.”
She gets up from the bed and goes downstairs. I can hear the faint noises of cupboards opening and then closing, of the water being poured down and I try to only focus on them so that my mind won’t start wandering again.
Mom quickly returns to my room, a tray in her hands with two bottles of water, a glass and a pill. She puts the tray down on the bedside table and helps me lifting my upper body so that I won’t choke while swallowing the pill, making it go down with some water.
“Remind me to never let this pill sit on my tongue anymore, not even for a second. It tastes horrible,” I complain, sticking my tongue out as if to prove a point.
“Don’t be too fussy. It’s not like you’re going to take this forever.” She chuckles. “Now, lay down and sleep. I’ll be back before you wake up and it will be like as if I’ve never left.”
“That’s a bit creepy, mom.” I pretend to shiver and she laughs at that. “Don’t say that ever again.”
“I won’t stop, especially now that I know it actually spooks you.” She fixes the blanket, making sure I’m covered up until my chin and leaves a kiss on my cheek. “I’ll see you later.”
Closing my eyes and shifting under the covers I say, “Later, mom.”
Then, she leaves. The sound of the footsteps gets fainter as she walks down the stairs and reaches the entrance. There’s a beat of silence, probably because she’s wearing her coat and shoes, followed by the distinct sound of the lock opening and then the loud one of the door shutting.
And I am here, alone, again.
I was alone in the shadows of the night and I am alone again in the bright light of the morning. Two opposite settings but feeling exactly the same, lonely. And I'm not used to it.
You see, it’s not the kind of physical loneliness due to the fact that I’m by myself. If that was the case, I could call one of my friends and they would be here right away, making this feeling vanish.
No, this one is another kind of loneliness.
It comes from the depths of your heart, it lingers there and you don’t know since when it’s been sitting there or the reason why. What you know is that you had lived your life day by day not noticing it but then, one day, you wake up and you’re aware of it.
From then on, you slowly slip into what may be only called Hell and you feel yourself going crazy because the more you try to understand what this feeling is, the more you get hurt by it. However, you can’t help it. The only thing you want is to find a way to stop wondering about why there’s an empty space inside your heart, about what could be the missing piece that you’re trying so hard to find.
Yet, you keep on failing, keep walking down the wrong paths so you’re only left with a growing pain that little by little becomes unbearable to the point you find yourself laying on your bed, face buried in your pillow as you cry and your heart aching as if someone was trying to rip it from your chest with their bare hands.
Chaos takes over your head, thoughts becoming a mess of unanswered questions and you can’t get an ounce of sleep, not at all.
And, yes, this has basically been my life for the past four days and it got me sick. Lack of sleep and stress resulted in a high fever, just like it happened to Jihoonie last month. Truth be told, this whole situation is almost funny because I nagged him so much about taking care of himself but, in the end, I'm no better than him and I'm sure he will come at me as soon as he knows it.
A small, sweet smile tugs at my lips at the thought of him complaining and mocking me.
"You dared telling me that I should rest more and not let you worry but look who's worrying who now," He would say, hitting the back of my head before making me lay down and tucking my blankets.
Although I’m smiling at the idea of this happening, my heart aches because I’m just fooling myself with this delusion.
Jihoon won’t be coming home to be by my side. He knows it would upset Chanyeol, that they’ll end up fighting if he comes here and I can’t let this happen. Jihoon suffered too much when they broke up and I don’t want him to experience it again. Not now that he’s healing.
I sigh, deeply, and turn to grab my phone and earphones. I randomly choose a song in hopes that it will help to put this endless loop of thoughts on hold. Closing my eyes, I let myself be lulled by the r&b melody playing and slip into the comfortable darkness which soon surrounds me, making me feel like I’m floating in the night sky.
With the first two songs, it kind of works. My mind clears, becoming an empty room in which only the music echoes. It’s so peaceful in there that for a while I’m almost sure I can even fall asleep. However, everything takes life again the moment the third song starts.
A soft yet melancholic tune fills my ears and its notes carry with them something that reminds me of Jihoon’s features, of the soft yet melancholic expression he wore the last night we saw each other, which, I guess, mirrored mine.
The darkness standing before me turns into some kind of stage and I stop floating as I'm called to be part of the audience for the "mise-en-scène" of my memories.
Images hazily roll before my eyes as the different emotions I felt that night made every moment feel like it was passing in a rush and I couldn’t really grasp it. Everything is blurry in my mind, every move I did, every word I said and it’s because I didn’t really think about them. I had let my heart take over and I think that was why when I had seen Jihoon, I hugged him and started crying.
Almost two weeks had gone without us seeing each other so when my arms wrapped around him and felt the weight of his body against mine, my heart had clenched and it hit me just how much I had missed him, his voice, his laughter, the banters with him. We were standing in the middle of the road in a cold winter night but I’ve never felt warmer than I did the moment he embraced me as I cried buckets and buckets of tears.
Tears of relief because he was there with me and I was there with him and nothing had changed between us.
Tears of joy because he was holding me, comforting me and saying that he had missed me too.
Tears of fear because I realised it could’ve been the last time for us to stay like this. Alone and holding each other close. Or worse. It could’ve been the last time for us to be friends as Chanyeol could get in the way and tell him that we can’t see and talk to each other anymore.
And it’s out of fear that I asked him if he isn’t afraid of losing me. However, once the question was out, I was even more scared to hear his answer. What if he said he wasn’t afraid of losing me? Would it mean that I’m just a meaningless presence in his life? That with or without me everything will still be the same for him? I don’t think I would be able to take this blow.
I remember his thumb stopped brushing my cheek and his pupils shaking before saying that he was afraid too. I had relaxed but got tense again when he added that he wanted to trust Chanyeol and wait for him to change his mind.
Thousands of questions stormed my brain. Thousands of what-ifs that didn’t seem to matter compared to the one promise that could change us and our future.
“If he ever makes you choose between me and him, please, choose me.”
That’s what I told him. But why I did that when I couldn’t even answer to Joshua asking me the same thing? If the time would come for me to choose between Wonwoo and Jihoon, will I be able to choose my best friend over the boy I love?
As if on cue, my phone vibrates on my chest and, startled, I shoot my eyes open.
“Speaking of the devil…” I whisper to myself as I unlock the screen to answer the text.
Nonu:
Good morning!
How are you today, my love?
Hoshiya:
Morning hyung...not good.
I’m sick.
Nonu:
You too?
Hoshiya:
Who else is sick?
Nonu:
Mingyu.
Apparently, he has a stomachache from eating too much spicy ramyeon.
In fact, today’s practice is cancelled.
Hoshiya:
Why does hyung eat it when he knows he’s going to get sick?
It’s not the first time that happens.
Nonu:
He says it’s too good not to eat it.
Hoshiya:
I can’t with him.
Nonu:
None of us can hahaha.
What about you?
What got you sick?
Hoshiya:
I don’t know but I suddenly woke up and felt like shit.
Turns out I’m running a fever.
Nonu:
I bet it’s because you still sleep with your window open.
Am I right?
Hoshiya:
Yeah hahaha
You know me way too well.
Without even really meaning to do it, I lie to Wonwoo. My fingers typed the answer and send it before I could even realise I was telling him a lie.
Since when lying has become so easy and natural?
Nonu:
Of course, I do!
I’m your stunning boyfriend!
Hoshiya:
Who said that you’re stunning?
Nonu:
You told me.
A lot of times.
Hoshiya:
I don’t recall doing such a thing.
Nonu:
Should I list all the times you did that?
Well, okay.
Hoshiya:
Don’t.
It would be too cringy.
Nonu:
So you now remember?
Hoshiya:
Yes, I do.
I did call you stunning and handsome quite a lot.
Nonu:
And I did so too.
I’ll never get tired of saying how cute you are.
Hoshiya:
Stop it!
You’re making me blush.
Nonu:
Don’t blush now that I can’t see you!
Do it later, when I’ll come to your house.
Hoshiya:
You’ll come to my house?!
Nonu:
I mean, can I?
I’m free today and I want to see my boyfriend who’s not feeling so well.
Hoshiya:
I think my mom will be home, though.
Nonu:
We can say that I’m your “boy” friend.
Hoshiya:
Are you sure about this?
I don’t want you to pretend if you’re not comfortable with it.
Nonu:
I’m sure.
Can I come after lunch?
Hoshiya:
Do you miss me that much?
Nonu:
Yup.
I want to see you as soon as possible.
Hoshiya:
I’ll text you when I’m done eating.
Nonu:
See you later then.
Sleep some more if you can and call me if you need anything.
Hoshiya:
I will∼
You too try to rest in the meantime.
Nonu:
Let’s meet in a dream, then.
Was it too cringy?
Hoshiya:
A bit, but, let’s do it.
Nonu:
See you in a while.
I send a heart emoji and then close my eyes again.
Wonwoo is coming to my house and my mom will meet him for the first time. I’m one hundred percent sure she’s going to storm me with questions as soon as he will leave. And you all know how mothers have this thing of magically figuring out when their children like someone or are in a relationship so it won’t be no use lying to her.
Having my mind focused on something different than this weird feeling of emptiness and being lulled by the music helps me slowly drifting away from the real world, ready to meet the boy I love in my dreams.
I am about to eat my last mouthful of rice when I send a text to Wonwoo.
Hoshiya:
I’m done eating!
You can come home.
And not even five minutes later, the doorbell rings.
I run to the door and swing it open. “Wonwoo hyung? What are you doing here?”
“You told me I could come,” Wonwoo shrugs and then smiles.
“I mean, how come you’re already here?!”
“Oh, that.” The tall boy brings his gloved hand to stroke his nape. “Actually, I was at Joshua hyung’s house.”
“What?”
“We were at his house to rehearse and if I went back home, it would’ve taken too long to come here to you. That’s why I convinced hyung to let me stay until you would’ve called me.”
Wonwoo words hit my heart in a way that makes it crazily skip inside my chest. My cheeks are flushed and I stutter while saying “H-how can you be so s-straightforward!”
“I told you, I like when you blush so I try my best to make it happen.” He smiles again, scrunching his nose and all the butterflies inside my stomach threaten to fly away.
“I hate you.” Pretending to be sulky, I move so he can walk inside before my mom comes to get us.
“No, you love me,” Wonwoo says as he takes his coat off.
At that moment, my mother appears in the hallway. She’s drying her hands with the edge of her apron, some strands of hair have fallen out from her bun so she quickly fixes them behind her ear before getting closer to where we are standing to greet her guest.
“Hello, young man.” She sports her best and sweetest smile. “You must be Wonwoo, right?”
“I am.” Wonwoo respectfully bows and then grabs my mom’s hand to shake it. “It’s a pleasure to meet you, Mrs Kwon.”
“The pleasure is mine. Soonyoung told me a lot about you.”
“He did?” Amused, Wonwoo turns to me and smirks.
“Yes. He couldn’t shut up about the books you’ve suggested him to read or about how good you are at rapping.”
“MOM!” I cry out to stop her from spilling more. “You don’t need to tell him everything!”
“Why?” She asks, pretending to be confused and continuing with her ‘innocent’ act. “I did the same when Joshua, Seokmin or Jihoon came here for the first time but you didn’t complain.”
“That was different.”
“How come?” She quirks her eyebrows and grins. “Is Wonwoo a special friend?”
“WE’RE GOING UPSTAIRS. BYE, MOM,” I yell as I grab Wonwoo by his wrist and practically drag him upstairs, far away from my mother, before she could embarrass me even more.
The afternoon, with Wonwoo around, goes by in the blink of an eye and it saddens me that the time for him to go back home has come.
I watch him leave from the window inside the living room before going upstairs and lay down on my bed, still feeling giddy as I think about the things we did together.
We watched two different tv series and the first one was so boring that we were about to fall asleep not even halfway through the first episode. But we were too much into the second series that none of us dared to speak and my mother risked her life when she interrupted us to bring some fruit to snack on and the medicine for my fever.
Then, he asked me for help with some lyrics of a song he was writing for a friend. Luckily, we got most of it done before getting lost in our rap battle, trying to make the most absurd one-verse songs about a random object picked among the thousands placed inside my room.
Lastly, we were sitting on my bed, one in front of the other, and playing some games on our phone while he was telling me about the group, about how more and more people are attending their Friday night gig, how the word of this great band spread around the area to the point they were even hired for some festivals that are going to be held in spring and summer.
Upon hearing the news, I couldn’t stop smiling, feeling like a proud mother. They’re becoming such a big hit by only relying on their efforts and their teamwork. I wouldn’t be surprised if one day, they would come to me and say that some company has recruited them and wants the band to officially debut in the music industry.
They’re talented and their music is amazing but what matters the most is that they enjoy what they’re doing and their songs hold a message that they want to share with the people listening to them. Plus, when I saw them rehearsing for the first time, I was so mesmerised by them and I was so drawn into their performance that I can’t even imagine how crazy must it be when they’re doing the real thing.
As I was telling myself that it probably won’t take too long for me to see them on the stage, a soft knock echoes in my room.
“Can I come in?” My mother’s voice is muffled by the door.
“Yes, mom.”
She slowly opens the door and turns the light on before coming to sit on the armchair next to my bed. “I’m sorry if I teased you and made you feel uncomfortable in front of your friend.”
“There’s no need to apologise. What you said is true. I do talk about him a lot.” I awkwardly laugh as I scratch my nape.
“Just like it was true that you didn’t react like this with the others.” She sighs. “Are you not that close?”
“Oh no, we are close.”
“So, am I right?”
“About what?” I ask, already knowing what she’s about to say.
“That he’s a special friend?”
“I knew you were going to ask me…” I sit in the middle of the bed and rub my face, feeling a little bit uncomfortable with having to share this info with my mom. We’re close, sure, but I never told her about my love life.
“So? You’re stalling.”
“Yes, Wonwoo is my boyfriend.” And as soon as the words leave my mouth, I duck my head and I feel all the blood inside my body rushing to my face.
“I knew it!” She throws her fist in the air but when she notices the way I’m looking at her, she clears her throat and says, “I mean, I’m glad you found someone you like and you feel comfortable with. Love is such a beautiful thing when you’re a young, teenage boy.”
“I like him a lot, mom.” I fumble with the blanket covering the lower half of my body. “It’s a little awkward to say it out loud but I really like him. My heart runs, leaving me breathless, at the thought of seeing him and my stomach ties in hundred of knots when he does something cute. Sometimes we fight but I’m so happy when I’m with him.”
“Soonyoung-ah.” My mom starts, getting up from the armchair to sit on the bed and ruffle my hair. “Hearing that you’re happy makes me happy too but I feel like I need to tell you this.” She takes my hands in hers and looks at me in the eyes. “My mom once told me that between someone who makes your heart beat faster, makes you feel giddy and someone who makes you feel warm, safe and secure, you should always choose the latter.”
“Do you think grandma was right?”
“She was, that’s why I’m telling you this.”
“You know, Jihoon once said something like this.” Another small smile appears at the mention of Jihoon’s name both on mom’s face and mine.
“He did?”
I nod. “I can’t remember the exact words but he said that true love is when you feel comfortable with the person next to you, when you can feel their warmth and know that you don’t need anybody else.”
“I see that our Jihoonie is a clever boy.” She chuckles. “However, he’s right. Being too all over each other sometimes may be dangerous for the relationship as you tend to overlook the small things that one day can become a huge problem. I hope it won’t be the case with you and Wonwoo but I also hope you’ll be careful.”
“I will, mom.” I hold her hands tighter to reassure her.
“Speaking of Jihoonie, don’t you have to call him?” Mom lets go of my hand and quickly stands up.
“Uh?”
“I know you two have been talking on the phone till late for the past week. I hear you giggling from the other room.” She says as she walks to the door. “I’ll bring you a tray with dinner so you won’t waste any time.”
“What the fuck?” I ask myself when she leaves the room.
Well, it’s true that Jihoon and I have been calling each other every day since that night in front of his house and it’s partly because of Chanyeol and partly because he’s been so busy that he could barely text during the day. That’s why, at night, we would spend our time on the phone, talking about our day or about nothing at all. Silence took the best when it got too late to talk or when he was too tired and it then was broken by the soft snore of Jihoon who, at some point, would’ve fallen asleep. Sometimes, when I told him I wasn’t feeling sleepy yet, he would sing me a lullaby in hopes to help and it was fascinating how it really worked. These were the only times I could close my eyes and rest for a while until those thoughts came back in the middle of the night to take my sleep away and keeping me up all night.
Five minutes later, my mom is back with my dinner and, brushing the matter off, I take my phone in one hand and, with the other, I grab a mouthful of kimchi jeon .
Hoshiya:
Ji, are you busy?
I place my phone next to me, waiting for an answer that comes sooner than I expected.
Woozy:
No, I’ll call you right away.
And, in fact, not even five seconds after reading his message, Jihoon’s name and photo appear on my screen.
“Hello!” His voice is bubbly, unlike the other days.
“Is this Lee Jihoon?”
“Yes! It’s me!” Again that tone.
“WHAT HAVE YOU DONE TO THE REAL LEE JIHOON? HE WOULD NEVER ANSWER ME LIKE THAT!”
“Idiot.”
“Oh, forget it. It’s really you. My grumpy Jihoonie.” I coo at him over the phone.
“Shut up! I was just happy that I’ve finally had a day off!”
“I know, Wonwoo told me that Mingyu was sick.”
“And what about you? Are you okay, Soonyoung? Your voice seems to be a bit hoarse.” Jihoon sounds worried and I can’t help but shake my head.
“I’m coming down with a fever,” I say as I eat some of the leftover bokkeumbap from lunch.
“Really? Why didn’t you tell me?”
“You would’ve known if you checked the group chat. Wonwoo sent a text there.”
“I’m sorry but I’ve been sleeping the whole day and I actually took my phone for the first time today when you sent me that text.”
“That must be telepathy.”
“Yeah, sure.” We both chuckle at the dead-serious tone Jihoon used in reply to my excited one. “How are you feeling now?”
“Good, I think? My fever has come down but I still need to wait another couple of days to fully recover.” I pour a glass of water and drink it slowly, careful not to spill anything on the bed.
“Ah,” Jihoon sighs. “I wish I could come there to keep you company.”
“Don’t worry, Ji. I know you’re busy. Plus, you’re going to see me every day starting from next week.” My tone going again an octave up because of the excitement.
“Oh, please, don’t remind me that school starts in what? Four days?”
“It’s actually three.” I hold the phone in between my shoulder and ear so that I can get up to place the tray on the desk and turn the lights off. Using my phone’s torch, I find my way back to the bed and lay on it.
“Oh no, that’s even worse!”
I roll my eyes, knowing he won’t see me. “Stop being overdramatic. I am the overdramatic one between us.”
“You’re right. I’m sorry I tried to take the spot away from you.” He laughs and it must be contagious because I find myself laughing too. “What are you doing?”
“Just had my dinner and now I’m laying down. What about you?”
“I’m on my bed, too. I’m feeling already drowsy and it’s not even ten!” He yawns and I can hear the rustling sound of his bedsheets.
“Do you want to hang up and sleep?” I ask, not wanting to keep him from sleeping but oddly hoping he wants me to stay over the phone.
“No, I think I will fall asleep faster if I listen to your voice. You know, it has a soporific effect on me.” His chuckle comes off so sweet and it may be because he’s already with a foot into the dreamland. “I wish I could talk to you longer but I can’t keep my eyes open.”
“Don’t worry. It makes me feel better knowing that you’re getting some sleep.” I adjust the blankets, making sure that I’m covered, and put the phone between my ear and the pillow.
Like that, I start talking about nothing in particular, I blabber about my day and make up a short story on the spot.
I talk and talk until I hear Jihoon’s snoring on the other side.
Listening to him and to the muffled sounds coming from downstairs, I slowly fall into a deep and peaceful slumber for the first time in what it felt like years.
And maybe, just maybe, it was because, when I closed my eyes, it felt like Jihoon was right next to me.
Three days later...
“Are you still excited about school?” The voice coming from the other side of the device asks.
“Of course I am, Jihoonie!” I pour some hot water inside a mug where I have already put the tea bag. "Tomorrow is the day I can finally see Joshua, Seokmin and you after forever!"
"Soons, it's been only a week since you last saw us."
"A week is way too much! We used to meet every day before the holidays started!” Taking the cup, I leave the kitchen and bump into my mom. She mouths, ‘is it Jihoonie?’ and I nod.
“Jihoon! Come here one of these days! I’ll make your favourite dish and you can sleep here too! I miss you!” My mother shouts, clearly trying to make her son go deaf.
Jihoon laughs and says, “Put me on speaker.” Upon hearing the shift in the audio quality signalling that the speakerphone is on, he starts talking to my mother. “Good evening, Mrs Kwon. I would really like to come there but the band is taking a lot of my time.”
“Yet, every night you have time to stay on the phone with my son.” She glares at me as if I’ve been keeping her from seeing Jihoon, while in reality, I just want to see him as much as she wants. “You could come here instead.”
“You’re right, Mrs Kwon. You’ll have to pardon me and I’ll make sure to come there as soon as I can, bringing you a bouquet of your favourite flowers.”
“I’ll be waiting and, until then, no pardon for you.” She chuckles. “Now, I’ll leave you two talking. Goodnight, Jihoonie.”
“Goodnight, Mrs Kwon.”
Turning off the speakerphone, I bring the phone to my ear but Jihoon doesn’t speak. He doesn’t say a word until he hears the click of my door closing.
“You didn’t tell her, right?”
“About why you don’t come here and why we haven’t been hanging out a lot? No, I didn’t.” I sigh as I place the mug on the window sill to go and grab a blanket from my bed. “Knowing her, she would tell us not to care about Chanyeol and do what we want to do.”
“She would definitely do that.”
“That’s because she doesn’t know how scary your boyfriend can be.” I go back to where the armchair is, sitting with my knees close to my chest, blanket laid to cover them and mug of tea back in my hand. “I can’t shake away the image of him glaring at me at Seungkwan’s party.”
“Please, don’t make me think about that night. It was absolutely the worst.” He sighs. “Plus, Your boyfriend is scary too.”
“Before being my boyfriend, Wonwoo is one of your best friends, don’t forget it.”
“I could never forget.” And his tone seems kind of sad.
“Now that I think about it, you seem to attract scary people.”
“Are you one of them?”
“Maybe?” I creepily snicker after taking a sip of my hot tea. “Do you think I’m scary?”
There’s a beat of silence as Jihoon is seriously thinking about the answer. “Sometimes you are,” he then says.
“Uh? When?”
He just laughs, bitterly, and drops the topic to ask me “So, how are things going with Wonwoo?”
“Good, I guess. We’ve been texting when he’s free and I told you that he came to see me the other day.”
“So your mother knows you are a thing?”
“I wasn’t planning to tell her, but she cornered me so I had no choice.”
“Oh, I see.”
“She said not to tell anybody, but I will spill this tea to you. She said that…” I stop to create some suspense and to drink the last bit of tea.
“What?”
“That you’re still her favourite.” Placing the empty mug on the nearest furniture, I get up from the armchair to go laying on the bed. “Please, tell me what kind of spell you cast on her. She adores you more than anyone else.”
“I didn’t do anything though.” The way his words sound brings me the image of the smile that I’m sure has bloomed on his lips. “Her son must be terrible, then.”
“Hey! I’m not terrible!”
“You’re not?”
“Not that often.”
“Exactly.” He laughs and shifts on his bed as I hear the rustling sound of the sheets.
“What about you and Chanyeol?” I then ask and everything goes silent for a while, the name turning the atmosphere quite heavy.
“We’ve been texting a lot and he came to some of the practices too. Seems like he has toned his possessiveness down.” He sighs a long and tired sigh. “I hope tomorrow everything’s going to be okay.”
“How can it be okay if we still have to avoid each other?” Hurt, that’s how I sound right now and I really am.
“We can’t do that. We’re seat-buddies so we have to interact at some point.”
“But what if Chanyeol does something to change this too?”
“He can’t. The teacher is the one changing our seats so he has no control over that.”
“I know but I have this unsettling feeling that something is going to happen tomorrow, something we won’t like.” I shift on the bed, laying on my left side and bringing my hands under my cheek, phone held between my ear and pillow. “And even if we stay like this, he would keep an eye on us, making sure we don’t talk at all.”
“Don’t worry, Soonie,” Jihoon says with the sweetest and calmest voice he can manage without cringing. “We will find a way to talk...like we always do.”
“You may be right.”
There’s silence coming from both sides of the phone before I laugh because of the cheesiness of our words. Soon after, Jihoon laughs too and the mood seems to be light again and I am so relieved about that.
“Now, why don’t we go to sleep? I don’t want you to get late at school and blame it on me,” Jihoon suddenly says, trying to wrap up the conversation.
“I could always blame it on you and, for your information, I’m hanging up because you are the one who needs to sleep so you won’t be late.”
“Whatever makes you sleep at night!” I know he’s rolling his eyes at the ceiling even if I can’t see him.
“Goodnight, Jihoonie. I’ll see you tomorrow!”
“Goodnight, Soons.”
We end the call at the same time, not fighting over who has to hang up first, and I plug in the charger before getting lost in my thoughts and then get to the morning with a dead battery and useless phone.
Don’t worry, though, tonight’s thoughts aren’t the ones who usually keep me up at night.
These are thoughts about me being excited at the idea of meeting my friends; of maybe falling back into a more stable routine that lets me spend more time with them, even using homework as an excuse to hang out even more; of being finally happy after a tough week of inexplicable up and downs.
These are thoughts that help me falling right into Morpheus’ arms, who’s ready to cradle me and hum an unknown song before sending me in a new dream, where even the impossible becomes possible.
And, that night, I dream so many things that I’m sure I won’t remember any of them when I’ll open my eyes again in the morning.
However, I could never forget those deep sad-looking eyes, staring right at me, right through me, asking to be saved, to be loved; those hands softly caressing me as if I was the most fragile thing in this world; those arms tightly wrapped around me, I remember them shaking as if afraid of letting me go; that head gently leaning on my chest and that voice coming off so weak and speaking words that easily find their way to my heart, ready to pierce it or nestle in there.
“Even if we’re lost, even if the whole world is against the two of us, I know we will find a way to each other. Like we always do.”
“I’ll see you at lunch,” Joshua says after leaving a peck on Seokmin’s cheek. “Please, keep an eye on Soons. He’s been weird since I picked him up.”
“I hear you!” I screech, flicking Joshua’s forehead. “I’m not weird.”
“Yes, you are! When I came to your house you were already dressed and you were skipping on the way to school.” He shivers as he replays the scene in his head. “Definitely weird.”
Seokmin nods in agreement. “I know, right? He’s never been this early at school.”
“It’s just that I don’t want to be late, plus, I wanted to enjoy this sunny winter day until it lasts.” I open my arms and throw my head back, letting the rays hit what’s exposed of my skin and basking in the sensation.
“See? He’s been weird again,” Joshua whispers in Seokmin’s ear, who brings a hand to cover his mouth as he giggles.
“And I can still hear you!” Turning around to glare at him, I almost hit with my hand one of the students passing by in the courtyard. “Seokmin, let’s abandon him here. We’ll see him in a few hours anyway.”
Joshua doesn’t even have the time to give another quick kiss on Seokmin’s cheek that I have already grabbed him by the wrist to literally drag him inside our classroom.
It’s still early so a lot of students are roaming around the corridors. Small groups are chatting by the lockers and you can hear them catching up or planning where to go on the weekend. Other groups can be seen with their books open, studying to be ahead of classes. Some people, still half asleep, drag their bodies to their classroom to maybe sleep some more before the bell rings.
As expected, there’s barely someone in our class and Seokmin and I take this opportunity to talk for a while longer. We sit at my desk, sharing songs we have been listening to and already coming up with a schedule to study together since mid-term exams are around the corner and we need to be fully prepared for it.
“The waiting is making me so nervous,” Seokmin suddenly says as he draws a time-table on his phone with the tip of his index. “I’m not even completely involved in this but I’m feeling nervous.”
“What are you talking about?” I ask Seokmin, body completely turned towards him and kind of knowing what he’s referring to.
“I mean Chanyeol and Jihoon. Aren’t you nervous about what’s going to happen once they step in this room?”
“I am.” Shoulders sagging in defeat. “I’ve been thinking about what could happen for days.”
“Do you think he will do something?” Seokmin asks, not looking at me as he busies himself with copying the schedule on his phone. “He could keep Jihoon away from you during lunchtime and after classes but he can’t make a scene when the teacher is in the class because you and Jihoon are sitting next to each other.”
“He knows he can’t. That’s why I thought he will make us change seats.”
“Chanyeol doesn’t decide that. He can’t do shit about it.” Seokmin is getting quite worked up, catching the attention of the few people sitting in the room.
“That’s what Jihoon told me and I swear I wanted to believe him...”
“But?” He asks when he hears me trailing off.
“But we know how Chanyeol is!” I raise one of my arms in frustration, pointing at the desk of the said boy. “Once he sets his mind on something, he doesn’t stop until he gets that something. And you know what he wants now?” Seokmin opens his mouth to answer but I tell him before he could even say a word. “Me out of his way because I’m the number one threat to his relationship.”
He sighs and rubs his temples. “I know, I fucking know and one day I hope karma bites him in the ass for all the shit he’s doing.”
“Woah, calm down, Seokmin.” I snort and pat his back. “You’re swearing way too much.”
“It’s just that he frustrates me. It’s so frustrating seeing you two pini-”
Seokmin’s voice is covered by the bell ringing and by the noise caused by our classmates as they rush inside the class to take their places. The result? I couldn’t hear a thing about what my friend has just said.
The moment I am about to ask Seokmin to tell me again why he’s frustrated, the teacher walks in the room followed by a smugly looking Chanyeol and Jihoon, who tries to keep his face expressionless but his eyes betray him as they show how troubled and resigned he must be feeling now.
“Please, stay where you are, Lee Seokmin-ssi,” Mrs Kim says when Seokmin stands up to go back to his desk. “From today on, that is going to be your seat. Meanwhile, Lee Jihoon-ssi will take your previous spot.”
The whole classroom goes silent. Someone looks between me and Chanyeol while someone else doesn’t even dare to lift their head from their books. However, each and every one of them sported the same expressions: shock, thrill, expectation. Yeah, because they all expected either me or the taller boy to say or do something that could help them understand what the hell was happening or that could eventually end up in us fighting.
Honestly, the thought of Chanyeol going to the teacher and asking her to switch seats infuriates me way too much. I’m fed up of his childish behaviour and I feel like a ticking bomb which can explode any minute now.
But the moment my eyes meet Jihoon’s, the bomb defuses.
He’s standing next to Mrs Kim and he looks smaller than he usually does. He’s staring at me, defeated and asking to be forgiven because of the way Chanyeol is acting, because he can’t do anything about it, because he gave me false hope about this whole situation. And I want to smile to reassure him, to tell him not to worry about me as long as they’re happy, but I don’t have the strength to do such a simple thing.
“Since no one is against this little switch, we can start with our first lesson of this new year. Mr Park, Mr Lee, go to your seats,” Mrs Kim solemnly says, sitting on her chair and flip through her book.
Ten minutes into the lesson and Seokmin starts scribbling words on the notebook strategically placed between us.
I can’t believe what has happened.
Kind of expecting this
but now I don’t know what to think.
That Chanyeol is definitely taking this too far.
Okay, he’s jealous but this is too much even for him.
He never cared when other people tried to flirt with his exes.
Because now it’s different, Seokmin.
He really cares about Jihoon.
Bullshit.
If that was the case, he wouldn’t be doing this to him.
He is trapping him in a cage and maybe now Jihoon is okay with it
however, how long is going to take for him to try and escape?
What if he doesn’t want to escape?
He will.
Sooner or later, he’s going to feel suffocated by this love
which, to be honest, can’t even be defined like that.
Love shouldn’t be a trap.
I don’t know, Seok.
Maybe we’re overreacting.
Overreacting?!
Yes.
I mean, we never tried to put ourselves in Chanyeol’s shoes.
Maybe he just doesn’t know what to do since it’s the first
time for him to actually love someone.
He will understand that what he’s doing is wrong
and that Jihoon and I are nothing more than friends.
Soonyoung, you’re being too optimistic but, for your
happiness, I really hope that I am the one in the wrong...
Four days later…
Contrary to Seokmin’s hopes, it turns out that I am the one in the wrong.
I hoped that Chanyeol would sweeten as days passed but he has only tightened his leash around Jihoon’s throat.
One could think that four days aren’t enough to make things change for the better, but, trust me, they were enough to worsen the situation.
As expected, he made it impossible for Jihoon and me to exchange even a look during our classes or when we would randomly walk past each other in the corridors. During our breaks, he made sure not to leave Jihoon’s side and whenever he had some kind of duty with his music club, he would use Jihoon’s love for music as an excuse to drag him along.
Of course, all of this had also affected the progress made with Jihoon in the past week. If we had been texting or talking on the phone for hours, now he barely had the energy to send me a goodnight text before falling asleep, tired out by the practices and the stress he’s been put under because of this whole thing.
However, the worst had yet to come.
Mrs Kwak is busy writing some hanja on the board when Seokmin pokes my arm with the sharp end of his pencil. Too focused on the pain I am feeling, I almost yell his name out but when I turn to him, he's pointing at our notebook.
I have been mulling over this quite a lot because I wasn’t
sure if I should tell you or not.
You’re worrying me.
What happened?
A rumour has spread in our school.
Every day someone starts a new rumour.
You know I don’t care about them.
Even when it’s about you?
What?!
When I got to school, I was stopped by a lot of people
wanting to know if what they heard was true.
Please, tell me already.
Basically, the whole school knows that you tried
to steal Chanyeol’s boyfriend.
You must be kidding me.
I’m not. Someone has been going around
saying that you’re sticking with Jihoon just to irritate Chanyeol
and that you’re pretending to be Ji’s best friend.
What kind of bullshit is that?
How can they think I pretended it?
Apparently, they remember how you and Jihoon used to
be at each other’s throats. So they think that you treating him kindly
is some sort of plan to hurt Chanyeol.
They’ve gone crazy.
I would never do that no matter how much I hate that guy.
Jihoonie is too precious for me to do such a thing.
I know...people do say all sort of evil against others.
Do you think that Jihoonie knows?
Don’t think so. No one would dare telling him to his face.
Plus, I pray that he stays in the dark. Hearing about this
would only worsen his condition.
What do you mean? His condition?
I promised Joshua not to tell you but you need to know this too.
Hyung told me that Chanyeol has been following him from school
to the practices, to make sure he doesn’t meet with you when classes end.
And Jihoon does nothing about it?
No. He’s just there but the hyungs said that he’s not himself anymore.
He doesn’t joke around, doesn’t threaten Mingyu or Seungkwan and speaks
just if what he has to say has to do something with the practices.
It’s just like I told you.
This love is trapping him and is making him suffer even if he says he’s okay with it.
I thought that helping him getting back together with Chanyeol
would’ve been enough for him to stop suffering for love. I guess
I just fooled myself. He’s not okay and he won’t be if I’m around.
What do you want to do?
Stop being selfish and let him go.
Me fighting to have him in my life is clearly becoming a problem for him.
That’s why I have to step back and walk out of his life.
If I do that, maybe Chanyeol will change and set Jihoon free.
He won’t set him free when he knows that, the moment he opens
the cage, Jihoon will run to you.
He won’t run to me.
He will and you know it better than I do.
After all, you’re the one who made him promise to choose you
over Chanyeol if the day ever came.
Shit. I shouldn’t have told you.
But you did and I’m telling you to stay exactly where you are,
to wait for him to come back because he will. He promised you
and I’m sure he won’t break that promise.
Thank you, Seok, for telling me all about this and for
knocking some sense into me. I will trust Jihoonie because I know
that we will find a way to each other.
We always do.
Two weeks later…
It took me a couple of weeks to get used once again to the crazy routine prior to the midterms and to all the people going crazy because of it. During those days, students lives basically revolve around two activities: the first one is attending classes to take more notes and trying all the possible mock tests; the second one is studying at all hours and in every place that you think will help to boost your productiveness.
Seokmin and I had our schedule, our war strategy, planned in every single detail.
Mondays and Tuesdays are made to study in as you need to avoid any kind of distraction coming from the outside world. We usually are at my house where nobody can bother us since my parents’ work till dinner time. Sometimes, when it gets too late for Seokmin to go back home, he sleeps over and we can get more studying done before going to bed.
Wednesdays and Thursdays are made for “ Coffee & Goodpie ”. Studying becomes hard in the middle of the week because you start feeling tired, mentally and physically. That’s why you need to be out of your house where it’s easier to doze off and nap. The cafè is a great choice because we have Kihyun refilling us with sweets and coffee to feed not only our stomachs but also to fuel our brains and avoid falling asleep on the books.
Fridays and Saturdays are library days. As the weekend starts, shops get busier and our parents are home so there’s no place to study other than the library. Silence reigns supreme which is what you want after a week of bombing your ears with people’s talking. So with backpacks full of books, snacks and cans of coffee or energy drinks, Seokmin and I spend our weekend sitting at the furthest table of the public library, an area that in those five years had basically become our hideout during this time of the year.
Sleeping in, binge-watching series and going out for a walk were the things allowed to do on Sundays, the only day left to rest before another crazy week kicks in.
A foolproof plan that kept us busy every minute of the day to the point I had no time to stop and think about something not concerning the subjects I was studying.
However, at night, my mind had plenty of time to think, to freely wander from one thought to the next one in a continuous flow that left almost no space for resting.
A tiring day had gone by and another equally tiring one had to start but I would spend most of the night laying awake on the bed and thinking about either the whole situation with Jihoon or that weird feeling that I can’t still name and that keeps devouring me from the inside.
Tonight is no exception.
The sound of a randomly-playing ballad fills and breaks the silence of the night. I keep staring at the ceiling, eyes now used to see in the dark, as I replay the crazy events from this week inside my mind.
It all started last Friday with Jihoon.
"Do you think Joshua would help us reviewing this part of the grammar?” Seokmin asked after closing his English textbook.
“Why should we ask for help, though? We’re doing great already,” I answered, not really looking in his direction as I was too focused on reading the notes from the morning classes.
“I know but we could use a native speaker! I bet we would immediately improve!”
“Just say that you want to see Joshua because you miss him!”
“Who misses me?” Joshua’s head suddenly popped from behind a shelf of the library, startling the poor Seokmin.
“Your boyfriend did.” Unfazed, I closed the book and moved it on the side so I could lean on the table and close my sore eyes for a bit. “He wanted to use English as an excuse to spend time with you.”
“Soonyoung! Stop exposing me!” Seokmin screeched. “But he’s right. I did miss you.”
“What about you, Soons, did you miss me?”
I shot my eyes open at the sound of that familiar voice and I found myself face to face with Jihoon, eyes piercing right through mine and his big, bright smile back on his thin rosy lips.
“Jihoon-ah...is it really you?”
The other boy slowly nodded and his smile became even wider and sweeter. I immediately stood up, not caring about the chair that almost went flying on the ground because of the sudden motion, and hugged Jihoon who was already with his arms open, ready to catch me.
“Of course, I missed you!”
With every second ticking by, the hug tightened as we relished in the other’s scent and warmth. We got so lost in each other that we forgot of the couple’s presence until Seokmin cleared his throat and said, “Enough with the public display of affection. There are people in front of you.”
“Remember the words you just said next time you kiss Joshua in the courtyard!” Rolling my eyes, I went back to sit on my chair and grab a piece of dried squid from the package left open on the table.
“Touché,” Joshua teased Seokmin as he went in for a kiss that, of course, was rejected.
“How come you are here?” I asked Jihoon after munching a bit on the squid. “What about Chanyeol?”
“He just left the city.” Jihoon sat on the chair next to me and snatched the piece of squid from my hand. “He won’t be here for the whole weekend and this means only one thing...” He took a bite of the dried fish and left the sentence hanging, probably wanting us to guess.
“You’re going to stay with us?” Seokmin asked, eyes sparkling at the idea.
Jihoon nodded as he was still chewing the food.
“Oh my God! This is an event that needs to be celebrated!” Seokmin peeked at Joshua who was equally excited. “I propose to spend the next 72 hours together!”
“It would be great but we should down it to 48. We have our gig tonight,” Joshua’s words made Seokmin deflate like a balloon, enthusiasm being blown out of him.
“Sounds good to me,” I said after being silent for a while, still shocked by Jihoon’s presence. “This way, we have enough time to plan something with the others too.”
“What if we do something just the four of us tomorrow and then we’ll meet the others on Sunday?” Seokmin proposed and his idea picked everyone’s interest.
“I like this suggestion but what could we do?” Jihoon asked, basically voicing what everyone was thinking.
“Since the weather forecast announced snow for the night, you can all come sleeping at my house.” Then I turned towards Jihoon. “What do you think?”
“Personally, this plan is already approved.”
“We’re in, too!” Seokmin says from behind me.
“I bet mom will be so glad to see you there,” I said still looking exclusively at Jihoon, my eyes are drawn in his so much that it was impossible to break the eye-contact.
“And I can’t wait to eat her delicious food again.”
“Prepare to be fed like a pig.”
“I’m ready for it.”
It was great to see Jihoon being his old self again during those two days.
Without Chanyeol around, the dark and gloomy aura that had previously surrounded him was gone, allowing him and all of us to breathe again after a long time of excruciating sadness.
That Saturday, Seokmin and I still went to the library together to get some study done and not fall back with our schedule. At some point, Jihoon and Joshua had joined us and the moment we set our foot outside the library, our well-deserved quality time together had started.
We went to the nearest ice cream place, ordered the biggest bowl they could sell and regretted buying it halfway through eating it.
After a walk in the perennially-busy city, we went to my house where my mother had already cooked us all of our favourite dishes. We wolfed down any kind of food that was laid right in front of us till the risk of our bellies popping from being too full became real. Feeling tired but not too much, we watched a movie while sipping some tea until all of us got knocked out without even getting to reach our beds.
The morning after, we slept in and went for a couple of hours to “ Coffee & Goodpie ” before coming back and help mom with making lunch. In the afternoon, Joshua and Jihoon had to leave because of practices but we saw each other again in the evening with the rest of the boys too. We had gone playing arcade games and bowling for hours, the losing team from both games buying dessert for all of us at the small diner next to the bowling alley.
Since Wonwoo and I stuck at each other side for most of the night, I couldn’t really spend a lot of time with Jihoon, still, I was happy from seeing him teaming up with Vernon to mock Seungkwan or being evil with Jeonghan who was planning to pull a prank on Joshua. When Seokmin said that Jihoon was out of himself, it broke my heart but him being like this with his hyungs made my heart feel full.
However, the reunion lasted for a very short while because, on Monday, Chanyeol was back and ready to control Jihoon again. Coming from this kind of weekend where Jihoon and I were together for almost two whole days, the idea of not being able to talk to him again was unbearable. I was already expecting a cold and distant Jihoon who wouldn’t dare to spare me a glance in fear of upsetting his boyfriend.
So imagine how surprised I was when he greeted me in the schoolyard as I was talking with both Seokmin and Joshua; when he beamed at me as our eyes met in class; when he texted me a “fighting∼” in the afternoon, knowing that I was probably studying, and then we texted again later that night when he got back home from practising.
I was even more surprised when he did the same thing the day after, brushing off the glares Chanyeol would shoot him if he caught Jihoon in the act.
But the peak of my astonishment was reached when, on Thursday, Jihoon asked me to sleep over at his house. Actually, his text was more like “When you finish studying with Seokmin, come here. You’ll probably have dinner at the cafè, so I can offer you a hot chocolate with cookies and a comfortable bed to sleep on. Don’t use the fact you don’t have your pyjamas as an excuse because, last time, you left one here. About the uniform, you can either use my spare one or you can go home early in the morning to get changed.”
Tell me, how could I refuse that? He basically tempted me with food and left no room for a negative answer.
And I swear, thanks to him, I had the best night of sleep.
“Why did you do it?” I asked after both of us had been silently staring at the ceiling in Jihoon’s room. Laying on my back, I had my right arm stretched out for Jihoon to lean his head on as we were squeezing in his bed which was meant for just one person.
“What?” He asked back confused, turning his head to look at me.
“Calling me here tonight. Why did you do it?”
Jihoon sighed and went back to look at the ceiling. “Because I wanted to spend some time alone with you. I missed you.”
“Then why did you have to ignore me last week?” I almost whispered, too hurt by the way he had treated me, too hurt at the memory of the pain I went through every night thinking about what to do to free him from that harpy’s claws.
“I thought that Chanyeol had some right to be jealous since it was true that I spent most of my time with you instead of staying with him. I wanted him not to hurt because of my wrongdoings and going along with his decisions seemed the most reasonable thing to do then. As I told you, I thought it could help him realise that we are just...friends.” His voice kind of slowed down at the end of the sentence as if it was too hard for him to say that last word. But as he yawned right after, I thought the shift in his voice was just because he felt sleepy.
“Why aren’t you ignoring me now too, then? What has changed?”
“Nothing and that’s the problem. Chanyeol hasn’t changed a thing about his behaviour, it only worsened as he thought he had complete control over me. Plus, he spread that stupid rumour…” Jihoon trailed off, trying to calm himself down and stop himself from saying something way too bad about Chanyeol.
“You know it too?!”
He nodded his head. “The whole school was talking about it so it was impossible not to hear. After that, I knew I had reached my breaking point. I couldn’t tolerate his behaviour any longer and had to do what I felt like it was right for me because there’s no point in hoping he will change.” He took a short pause as he shifted on his side. Our faces were inches away and his eyes were set on mine. “That’s why I came back to be my old self.”
His words held longing and something close to sadness in them. Afraid he could break any moment and burst out in tears, I turned my whole body around to embrace him. His head nuzzling on my chest as I buried one hand through his hair.
At that moment, I thought that the world could’ve disappeared and I wouldn’t have cared because Jihoonie was by my side and I felt warm, secure and safe.
Before I could get lost in the moment, Jihoonie spoke. “Should we go to sleep? A little bird told me you haven’t been sleeping well these days.”
“Can Seokmin keep his mouth shut?” I groaned and buried my face in Jihoon’s hair.
He giggled and nuzzled closer. “Nope. But he did well by telling me. Is there something bothering you?”
“Yes? Maybe? I don’t really know.” I sighed and went back to brush Jihoon’s hair, the action calming my nerves and making me less nervous to tell him the truth. “It’s just that, when the morning turns into night and the darkness comes, that very darkness seems to reach my heart and mind too. I can’t see and can’t feel what is really happening inside of myself. I stay there, in my room, being neither emotional or emotionless. It’s like I’m desperately trying to feel something but I don’t know what I am supposed to feel. There’s this blank space haunting me, asking to be filled but I’m confused and lost about how to do it. The more I think about it and the more I fail in finding an answer, the more it worsens.”
“Then don’t think about it.” Jihoon’s hand came to play with one of the buttons of my shirt. “If thinking makes it worse, stop doing that.”
“Easier said than done, don’t you think?”
“The darkest place is under the candlestick.”
“Uh? What do you mean?”
“It’s an old proverb. It means that we usually don’t see what’s right under our nose. Probably, the solution to your problem is here but you can’t see it because you’re too blinded by the bright light.”
“Then what should I do?” I asked him, desperation and tiredness evident in my voice.
“Wait for the light to dim and you will found the answer you’ve been looking for.”
“I hope you’re right because I’m slowly going crazy.”
“What do you mean you’re going crazy? You already are a crazy idiot,” He jokingly said and laughed when I broke the hug and turned around, back facing him as I pretended to be hurt by his words. “Aw, someone is sulky?” He cooed at me and kept laughing. “I’m sure I can make you laugh in just three seconds. Three…” A rustling sound came from my side as Jihoon was probably taking the blankets off of him. “Two…” The weight on the bed shifting as he was moving around. “One...here I come.” Jihoon threw himself on me and started tickling me.
I laughed hard as I tried to wiggle myself free but it was no use to do that as Jihoon was stronger than me. “I give up! I give up!” I said in between a laugh and the other, tapping on the bed to surrender.
“See? I made you laugh in three seconds.” Jihoon was so proud of himself because his plan was a success.
“But you cheated!” I complained, wiping away the tears fallen from having laughed too hard.
“I don’t care as long as it worked.”
And when we laid down on the bed, as if our bodies were magnets, we were again in each other arms.
“Let’s get some sleep now. I’ll sing you a lullaby.” Jihoon shifted closer, tightening his hold around my waist and turning his head so that his cheek was squishing against my chest.
Jihoon quietly hummed a vaguely familiar tune. The soft melody, that seemed to be made for his soft voice, chased away all the thoughts that had relentlessly stormed my mind and, for once since all of this had started, I felt like it was okay for me to close my eyes and stop thinking.
As I told Jihoonie, not thinking about it was easier said than done because when I stop and I am left with nothing to do or to distract me with, my mind can’t help but go back there, in that dark and cold place. However, there had been some small changes because for the following two days I could sleep and recharge my batteries. I was no longer as stressed as I was before talking about it with Jihoon.
Then you’re asking yourself why I cannot sleep tonight?
The answer is simple. Because of the text Jihoon sent me a couple of hours ago to which I agreed without really thinking about the consequences.
Woozy:
Tomorrow we have nothing scheduled with the band.
As I think Wonwoo is going to take you out in the evening,
I’ll steal you for a couple of hours in the afternoon.
I crave one of those milkshakes from “ Vinyl Art ” and you’ll come with me.
We haven’t been there together in ages.
Hoshiya:
Call!
I want one of those too.
Come to my house at 4pm and then we’ll go there.
Only after the reply was sent and read it dawned on me how “dangerous” it was for us to hang out together. One thing was being “hid” in someone’s house, but walking side by side in the broad daylight would be risky. I’m afraid that if Chanyeol finds out, it will be the time he finally causes a scene and I’m sure we will throw hands at each other because I won’t stay put. I don’t want that to happen because I know Jihoon still cares about his boyfriend even when he acts like a total dickhead.
However, I really wanted to let prevail the part of me that was excited at the idea of spending more time with my best friend eating some quality food and listening to music. To us, this is the definition of a perfect afternoon.
Determined not to let the fear overtake me, I slowly fall asleep as I try letting go of every negative thought and telling myself that, in the end, everything is going to be alright.
The cafè isn’t really crowded at this hour of the day, there are just a few people enjoying their drinks and the soft old-but-gold songs playing in the background as they read a book, study or simply observe those around them.
Luckily for us, our favourite table is free. It’s the one placed next to a huge window from which you can admire the beauty of the Han river.
The shop was high enough to let you see what was happening in the street and it also allowed you to witness the sun disappearing behind the skyline made of countless skyscrapers as it set into the night.
Jihoon and I are sitting at the table, the piece of strawberry cake we decided to share and our drinks are already gone. We’re just here, waiting for the sun to set before having a quick look at the LPs in the new entries section and then leave.
We are chatting and showing each other pretty lame memes when Jihoon suddenly freezes for a second.
“This song,” he says as he lifts his finger and points at the speakers behind himself. “I know it.”
“Really?” I ask, perking my ears up and trying to recognise the unfamiliar tune.
“Lionel Richie’s Hello.” His smile widens at the mention of the title. “My dad listened to it all the time when I was a kid. Then it became my favourite too.”
But before I can say something else, he closes his eyes and taps his fingers on the table to follow the rhythm of the songs.
At first, he hums the melody but soon enough, he’s quietly singing what I presume are the exact lyrics of the song.
I long to see the sunlight in your hair
And tell you time and time again how much I care
Sometimes I feel my heart will overflow
Hello, I've just got to let you know
My heartbeat increases and I can’t tear my eyes away from him who looks like he’s deep into the song as if it was his own.
The sincerity he puts in the way he sings these words makes me feel like they do come from the bottom of his heart and are meant for me to hear. Not with my ears but with my heart and soul.
The dim light of the cafè and the warm light seeping from the window as the sun sets over the city create a sort of golden aura surrounding Jihoon’s figure, making him look like an ethereal being.
The things I feel at this very moment are way too many and happening all at the same time for me to try understanding and describing them. I feel like I will soon be overwhelmed by my own emotions as I keep looking at the boy sitting before me, still singing his heart out.
Suddenly, I’m reminded of both the words my mom said to me when she found out about Wonwoo and of Joshua hyung’s question I couldn’t answer to.
“Between someone who makes your heart beat faster, makes you feel giddy and someone who makes you feel warm, safe and secure, you should always choose the latter.”
“Who will you choose, Soonyoung? Is it going to be Wonwoo or Jihoon? With whom do you want to be happy?”
I avoided asking myself this question for way too long, probably because I wasn’t too sure what I wanted, probably because I already knew but I was too afraid of the answer. But I can’t run away from it forever and the time to face it has come.
With whom I feel the happiest? Is it Wonwoo or is it Jihoon?
Wonwoo is the kindest boy I have ever met, he’s clever, talented and a true gentleman. He makes sure to compliment me to see me blushing and shying away from him. He makes me live that teenage romance that you often hear about in the pop songs playing every day at the radio where you go out on dates at every hour of the day; where you are all over each other and you keep saying the words ‘I love you’ because it feels like they’re never enough to express how you’re feeling inside. He makes my heart race with every action of his and he makes me feel giddy and anxious to meet him. I’m happy in his company and I still think I don’t deserve someone as good as him in my life.
On the other side, there’s Jihoon. Our Jihoonie. He’s the cutest boy on earth, a bite-sized tsundere with a fucked up sleep schedule that brightens my days. At first, we used to fight a lot but then we became the bestest of friends, we became inseparable and spent a lot of time together. I’m so fond of him and the way he acts; I adore his smile, framed by those two deep dimples, that makes his eyes disappear into crescents; I love his sense of humour and the way he tries to reject any display of affection from the hyungs and often threatens them with his guitar; I love his soft hair and how simply brushing my hand through his strand makes me forget about all the problems and the stress afflicting my mind. However, what I adore and love the most is holding him tightly with his head tucked under my chin and his nose nuzzling on my chest. With him in my arms, I feel like I’m invincible, like I could face any problem without any fear because I have him with me. With him in my arms, I feel like I’m home because with him I can cry and I can laugh. With him in my arms, I feel warm, safe and secure.
But who can I choose when I care for both of them, when I know I cannot live without them?
Too caught up in my thoughts, I didn’t notice that the song is already coming to its end judging by the instrumental part now playing. Jihoon is still following the rhythm with his fingers. He didn’t notice at all that I spaced out for a couple of minutes.
The last chorus plays and he sings along.
'Cause I wonder where you are
And I wonder what you do
Are you somewhere feeling lonely, or is someone loving you?
Tell me how to win your heart
For I haven't got a clue
But let me start by saying...
There’s a short pause before the finale and Jihoon shoots his eyes open and locks his gaze with mine as he whispers the last words.
...I love you.
At that moment, once again, I feel like the time has stopped and my heart stumbled in its beats before running even faster than it was before.
All the people standing there faded out as none of them matters anymore. Only the two of us do, sitting here at this very table, trying to engrave this moment of us in our hearts so we will never forget.
Still looking at each other, Jihoon reaches for my hand and takes it, fondly smiling at me.
And it’s when his fingers brush my skin that it feels like I’ve woken up from a long dream and see the boy in front of me for the first time.
It feels as if, up until now, I was blinded by the bright light and couldn’t see the truth. But, now, I can finally see him together with all the things I failed to notice before this epiphany.
Jihoon was right. He always is.
I had to wait for the light to dim before I could find out that my answer had been here all along.
Notes:
Writing this chapter has been a quite a challenge for me because some parts are fillers while others are important for the storyline so I didn't know how to link them and keep the flow of the story. I hope it isn't too weird or confusing!
But let's talk about what happened.
Finally, Soonyoung is aware of his feelings! Let's give him a round of applause! It took him some time but he has realised that Jihoon isn't just a friend. We have to thank Joshua and Soons' mother for this!Any idea of what's going to happen next?
Let me know in the comments or with a mention/dm on twitter!I hope you liked the chapter and I'll see you next month!!!
Thank you so much for the support and I love you all <3<3<3
Chapter 30
Notes:
This was the most challenging chapter I've written for this story and I hope you will all enjoy it!
I'll see you at the end!!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
'I like Jihoon. I like Lee Jihoon.'
These are the first words that come into my mind the moment I close the door behind me after waving goodbye to Jihoon and watched him walk back home.
I honestly don't know how I managed not to freak out in front of him, because, when I step into my room, I go on full panic mode as the realisation sinks in. Pacing back and forth in the small space before my bed, hands lifted to either ruffle or pull my hair in desperation, I can't seem to calm down and it's because of how hard the truth has hit me.
Knowing that I can't handle this alone, with my hands slightly shaking, I take the phone out of my pocket and dial Joshua's number.
Two rings and he answers. “Hello?”
“Hyung, are you on a date with Seokmin?”
“No, I was trying to find something interesting to watch, why?”
“Can you come here?”
Joshua must've felt that something was off because he asked me “Are you okay? Don't you have to go out with Wonwoo later?”
“Wonwoo hyung said that his friends dragged him out with them.”
“Give me five minutes and I'll be there. Do I still have my pyjamas there?”
“You do, you bring some spare clothes if you have to go out tomorrow.”
“Okay, I'm getting ready,” Joshua says before hanging up.
Ten minutes later, Joshua and I are in my room. He is sitting on my armchair, one knee close to his chest and the other leg dangling as he sips from his mug of hot chocolate, while I am on the floor, leaning with my back on the edge of the bed, head thrown back and eyes closed.
“What happened?” Joshua asks as he places his mug on the desk.
“Promise me you won't tell a soul about this,” I say, briefly opening my eyes to look at Joshua. “Not even Seokmin has to know this, for now.”
He brings his right hand to his heart so he can properly swear. “I promise.”
Closing my eyes again, taking a deep breath and releasing it in a long sigh, I start talking. “I was with Jihoon until a while ago. We went to Vinyl Art because he told me he hasn't been there in a long while. What happened is that when we were there, I don't know why, but I started feeling...weird.”
“What do you mean by weird?”
“Weird as in the fact that I felt things I don't usually feel with him and those times I did, I never gave it much attention. You know, he was singing with his eyes closed, bathing in the sunset and he was so beautiful that I couldn't tear my eyes from him, from his delicate features. My heart was running so fast I thought it was about to break free from my chest.” I stop for a moment as my lips stretch in a soft smile as that image of Jihoon reappears before my closed eyes. “Then, as the song was fading, he turned around to sing the last words while looking at me. At that moment, I knew I was fucked.”
“And the words were?”
“I love you,” I whisper, hearing Joshua gasping right after.
“Do you...” He starts but leaves the question hanging.
“I think I do, hyung,” I answer, knowing exactly what he wanted to ask. “I like Jihoon.” Opening my eyes to stare at the ceiling I say, “When the words came out of his mouth, they violently shook my heart and made me realise that I want him to say those words to me again and again while meaning them.”
“And how does this make you feel?”
“Guilty, scared, confused...a lot is going on inside my mind and I can't think clearly of this matter.”
Joshua slowly stands up and comes to sit next to me, leaving the empty cup on my desk. He wraps his arm around my shoulders and brings me close to him, head on his chest so that he could brush my hair to soothe me. “Do you want me to help you with sorting things out?” When I nod my head yes, he continues, “Okay, do you have an idea of why you feel guilty?”
“It's because of Wonwoo. I love him so much but knowing that I like Jihoon too makes me feel as if I've been playing with him this whole time, that I've been with him only because I was too dense to realise my feelings for Jihoon. I feel like I'm cheating on Wonwoo even if nothing happened between Jihoon and me and I don't want to be a cheater, you know how much I hate it.” Joshua hums but doesn't say anything, waiting for me in case I had to add something else, which I do. “Chanyeol, too. Maybe he saw the truth before I did and that's why he's been so territorial when it came to Jihoon. I may even be the cause of that fight they had before the New Year started...”
“We don't know that, Soons, but I understand why you think that way, especially because Chanyeol's jealousy worsened after that.” Joshua keeps carding his hand into my hair as he asks “Are you scared you are the cause?”
“Yes, but that isn't the only thing scaring me. I'm afraid of so many things now that I know what I really feel about Jihoon but the first one is still losing him even if the reason slightly changed. What if I can't pretend to be his friend anymore? If it becomes too hard for me to hide my feelings? I'll end up losing Jihoon and I don't think I could handle that...I would be wrecked. The same thing would happen if I come to lose Wonwoo. The boy has been nothing but romantic with me, treating me like the gentleman he is and making me feel the centre of his world, making me feel special. I'm afraid he will find out too, just like Chanyeol did and hate me for that. He has already suffered a lot and doesn't deserve to go through that pain anymore. I can't do this to him.”
“I bet there's more you're afraid of, am I right?”
“I'm scared that the truth will be eventually out and that Wonwoo will lash out at Jihoon, blaming him for ruining our relationship, for not being a good friend and that this will influence the band too. I don't want you guys to fight or be affected by our personal matters. It'd be so bad for your career.”
“You don't have to worry about that. Seungcheol would never let this happen. He knows which buttons to press to make those brats being reasonable about the band matters.” Joshua chuckles and I wish I could be as relaxed as he is. “What are you confused about then?”
I stand up and walk closer to the window, hugging myself because of the coldness suddenly hitting me at the lack of Joshua's body next to mine. I look at the cloudy night sky and sigh. “I don't know, hyung. There's this little voice in the back of my head saying that today I was swoon by him just because we haven't seen each other a lot, because of the atmosphere created by the lights and because of the song. That voice is saying that I'm only in a big delusion and that it will vanish once I wake up again since this image of him will be faded compared to how vivid it is now.”
“Unluckily, I can't tell you anything about what you feel for Jihoon,” Joshua says as he stands up too to come closer to me. “You're the only one who holds the truth, you're the only one who knows if you like him for real or if this just one big delusion.” He grabs me by the shoulders and drags me so that I am standing next to my bed. “But I can advise you to follow your guts and rest for now. Sleep and let everything sink in. Tomorrow, it's Sunday, we have no school so you won't have to see Jihoon and I can keep both him and Wonwoo busy for you. Take the day to think about it. Make a list of pro and cons about the two of them, write down what you feel, let your stream of consciousness take the control over your mind and hand. Do anything you can to clear your confusion, even just a tiny bit. If by the end of the day you realise you were just drawn in the moment, then there's nothing to worry about. If you do realise that there's something more to that, we can think about what to do, okay?”
“What would I be doing without you?” I ask him, turning around and diving in his already open arms.
Joshua hugs me tight and I hear his soft chuckle. “You would've already packed up and flown back to Japan.”
“That's actually a great idea! Thank you, hyung.”
“Don't.” He playfully smacks the back of my head. “Now, let's get some sleep. Tomorrow is going to be a long day.”
Jihoon’s point of view
Another cold winter day has started, a Sunday to be precise.
The snow stopped falling a while ago but the I can see the three crowns swinging as the wind blows strong, so I make sure to bundle up before setting even a foot outside my house. I don’t want to risk getting sick again, not when midterms are about to start.
When I reach the front door, I turn one last time towards the small squared mirror hung on one of the walls. I look at my reflection for a few minutes. In my head, the words ‘do it because it’s now or never’ repeated on a loop.
For days, I’ve been giving myself this kind of pep talk. This line was the one that kept repeating the most, to the point that it started feeling like the verse of a song that gets stuck in your head after listening to it a couple of times and you can’t help but sing it over and over again until something else replaces it. However, I never dared to live by those words until today, the day on which something will change.
Nodding at the Jihoon that is looking back at me from the mirror, I wrap a random scarf around my neck and mouth and, with nervous strides, I step out, moving quickly towards my destination.
The streets are too quiet despite being almost midday but, again, I guess that it’s just too cold to be wandering around. Everyone must be in their houses, under their warm blankets, lost in some faraway land in their dreams or maybe sitting on the couch, bodies pressed close to their loved ones and cups of fuming tea or hot chocolate in their hands to chase the cold away. Some others may be watching tv, reading a good book or just catching up with their friends after a long and busy week. Basically, they’re probably enjoying their spare time, relaxing before another series of crazy days welcomes them.
Not too long in the walk, my loud thoughts replace the unusual quietness of the surroundings. The clashing sides about this matter decided to have yet another debate inside my mind as if this isn’t what they’ve been doing for the past twenty-four hours.
One side is expressing its worries, telling me to turn tail and go back home to enjoy a cup of tea as I work on some music or study. It wants me to stop from doing whatever I’m thinking of, certain that it’s only going to hurt those involved in the matter even more, a reckless decision that will leave huge scars on me and all the ones close to me.
The other side is urging me to walk faster, to seize this opportunity to finally do something for me, something that I know I won’t regret doing later on in my life. That’s because this part of me thinks that the moment to free myself has come. I have to take this huge burden off of my stiff shoulders before it stiffens my heart too.
Even if I’d lowkey choose the first side out of fear and nervousness, it’s already too late to do that and it’s because of a text I have mindlessly sent yesterday night after drinking way too much at Seungcheol hyung’s house.
‘I’ll come to your house tomorrow. We need to talk.’
It’s all I have written and it makes me, the sender, so anxious so I can’t even imagine how he felt when reading it, how his eyes may have shaken as he read and read again the same sentence, imagining the tone with which it should’ve been read.
Anger? Sadness? Desperation?
Funny thing is that I don’t know it too.
Am I angry at him? Maybe.
Sad? A little bit.
Desperate? Definitely, but it’s only because I don’t want to lose the person I care about the most.
At that, Soonyoung’s face pops inside my mind and I can’t help but let a smile grow wide on my lips.
The boy has been nothing but patient with me and this whole fucked-up situation with Chanyeol, still wanting me to be his friend despite my boyfriend making things difficult for the both of us. Whenever I tried to take a step towards Soonyoung, Chanyeol was there to pull me back, hurting Soonyoung in any way he could in the process. However, we were so stubborn because the more Chanyeol tried to get us apart, the more he brought us together, neither of us wanting to let the other one go.
It makes me smile thinking that if last year someone told me that Soonyoung and I would end up being this close, I would’ve probably laughed at them, saying something along the lines of “It’s impossible, we’re way too different.” or “I would rather shave all of my hair.” or even “We’re just incompatible.” And, god, how much I would’ve been wrong.
Yes, Soonyoung and I are different, everyone can see that.
He’s always shining bright wherever he goes, flashing smiles to whoever looks at him and his positive vibes being highly contagious. He’s energetic, he can’t stay still for more than five minutes and because of that, he’s often on the look for something new to do that can keep him busy and moving.
He loves being surrounded by people and gets immediately comfortable with them to the point of throwing his arm around someone’s shoulder from the very first meeting. He loves being showered by their compliments and doesn’t get too flustered by them. He loves being straightforward, not afraid of saying or doing whatever crosses his mind.
On the contrary, I am gloomy for most of the time, rarely smiling if it’s not around my friends. I’m lazy, I love laying down on my bed and do nothing because sometimes my days are way too busy and all I’d like to do is to stay still. I like being with my friends but I treasure my time alone.
It takes time for me to be comfortable with someone and I don’t like skinship. I’m way too shy and the moment I receive a compliment, my ears become red and I do nothing but telling people they’re being too kind.
Plus, as I’m more on the introverted side, I could never be as straightforward as him. It’s because of all of the aforementioned things that I usually come off as a cold-hearted person.
If you see it like this, you can say that we’re total opposites, like day and night.
That’s what I thought too before realising that there aren’t just the bright, warm day and the dark, cold night. There are moments when these two parts of the day fade into each other and that’s why we have dawns and sunsets. It’s then that day and night meet and share some precious moment together, being the same thing for a while in a wonderful spectacle of colours.
Soonyoung may be the day and I may be the night but we learnt that when we’re together, our colours come together too and create beautiful dawns and sunsets. This is all thanks to some of the common interests we share.
For example, we both love music to the extent that he can’t live a day without listening to at least one of his favourite songs and I play in a band; we both love anime and tv shows and often find each other planning a whole marathon when we find something interesting enough to give up on some sleep; we both are crackheads even if I pretend to hate his lame jokes but he knows that I’m no better than him.
These are just some of the things that brought us together, that let us bury the hatchet and finally become closer.
However, sometimes, I wonder if it would’ve been better if we still hated each other, if we avoided being in the same space for more than two minutes. Would we be hurting less now?
I mean, if Soonyoung hated me, his problems with Wonwoo would be non-existent and Chanyeol wouldn’t despise him, there wouldn’t be a reason for that. If he hated me, he wouldn’t have eyes filled with longing and sadness whenever he tries to talk to me but gets stopped by my boyfriend. He wouldn’t suffer at all.
If I hated Soonyoung, I would probably love Chanyeol the way he deserves to be loved, I could be a true friend to Wonwoo, genuinely helping him with his relationship and being happy that he has found someone who truly appreciates and loves him. I wouldn’t be affected by all the little thing Soonyoung does, by all of his hugs and by how he likes to place his hand in my hair, brushing the strands in a painful lovingly way. My heart wouldn’t be screaming at me this much because I can’t have him, because he doesn’t love me.
However, as I reminisce the moments we spent together, I think that if I was given the chance to go back in time and change things, I would go down the same path because it’s better living with this pain than without Soonyoung in my life. Everything has been brighter since that night he found me standing in the rain.
I was a ship, lost in the storm and risking to be wrecked when I found my lighthouse, my safe harbour.
He became my only certainty even in the worst of the days.
Everything came and went but my feelings for him were always there, growing stronger and stronger to the point I thought my heart wouldn’t be big enough to keep them.
Yesterday, I thought my heart was about to burst for real in too many different moments.
The first one was when he opened the door of his house looking huggable as hell. His white sweater peeking from his huge black coat and the red scarf, messily wrapped around his neck, was covering half of his face so when he smiled, only his rising cheeks and his eyes closing into crescents could be seen. He looked so soft that I had to hold in the urge to tiptoe and lower his scarf enough to leave a peck on the tip of his nose.
Another one was when we were walking to the bus stop and he suddenly took one of my hands to put it together with his in his pocket, saying that I seemed to be feeling cold. He didn’t let my hand go until we were sitting on the bus, one earphone each as we listened to a random playlist on his phone. I was so scared, thinking that he might have felt my pulse while holding my hand but it was good, feeling the weight of his hand against mine.
The last one was when we were sitting at our table at
Vinyl Art
and the sun started setting almost as if it was following the rhythm of
Lionel Richie’s Hello
. I kept my eyes closed, hand supporting my chin as I was facing the window, fingers tapping both on one of my cheeks and on the table. Humming and singing to the song came automatically as I often listened to it.
To an outsider, it could’ve seemed that I was lost in the rhythm while I was actually lost in thought.
Every word that danced to my ears tried to convince me to tell Soonyoung the truth, to tell him how I really feel, how this song was perfectly mirroring the way I feel about him. But doing so would mean to take a leap in the dark, not knowing where I will land. Being direct was too risky and that’s why, as the song was ending and the last verse had already played in my mind, I went for a more subtle confession. I turned my head and opened my eyes, letting the words
“I love you”
slip out of my mouth as our gaze locked. Soonyoung was already looking at me with shiny eyes, his lips slightly parted and breathing quite ragged. His stare felt so intense and charged of so many different emotion that I couldn’t help but feeling drawn to him, feeling like I had to do something.
That’s why I smiled at him and let my hand move forward.
However, the moment I took his hand, I felt newfound electricity running through my veins that has never been there before. Maybe he felt that too because his gaze shifted on our hands and then back to me.
It was when his lips stretched too in a warm smile that I was sure my heart was going to burst.
And it was at that moment that I knew what to do next.
When I arrive in front of his door, I can't bring myself to knock just yet.
Standing there with my back facing the door and the cold wind gently caressing the right side of my face, I nervously bite my lips and shift my weight from one leg to the other as I try to make my heart slow down.
This is going to be a risky move and things will never be the same after this but even if I don't know if it's the right thing to do, I have to end this suffocating scenario that is slowly eating us up.
Taking deep breaths, I turn around and finally ring the bell. He must've been waiting for me as he quickly opens the door.
“Let's go in for a bit,” Chanyeol says, waiting for me to take off my coat and shoes before making his way to the kitchen.
He quickly makes us a cup of green tea, asking short questions about my day in the meantime and not asking why I suddenly told him that we need to talk and it's because he's either too nervous to ask or because he already knows what I want to say. He's stalling so that the moment doesn't come. My heart breaks a little at the thought of him suspecting things and being afraid, just waiting for the time I would've come to him to confirm his fears.
I'm afraid too but I remind myself that I'm doing this not only for myself but for him too, for his happiness.
Once he hands me the mug, he sits way too far away than he would've usually done. His head is hanging low and his fingers running along the rim of his cup, probably waiting for me to drop the bomb on his already broken heart.
Neither of us dared to speak and the room would've been dead quiet if not for the sharp sound of the clock's hands ticking the time away or the sighs escaping Chanyeol's lips as he waits for what it must be the end.
It's suffocating, I feel the knot in my throat closing tighter and tighter as I glimpse at his face. His eyes lost all the focus and light in them, his jaw is in tension as he grits his teeth, probably not to cry, probably not to yell.
Seeing him like that, makes me want to brings up all the happy memories we made together, all the smiles we smiled while looking at each other.
But, at that moment, reality hits me.
'Have we been really happy?'
And as if on cue, all the unhappy feelings fill up in the back of my mind. There were so many of them that I felt like they could've overflown the entire room, making clear that we can't do this anymore.
Our relationship hardened since Soonyoung and I became close friends. Chanyeol did nothing but watching his own back, afraid that Soonyoung would've cowardly stabbed him to take me away.
Because of that, we fought a lot: after school, on the phone, during our dates and the time he left me in the park. But, in the end, every fight remained unsolved. We never really tried to talk about what was wrong with us. We only tried to ignore the big elephant in the room, burying our problem by getting back together, by spending more time with each other, fooling ourselves that those were moments of true happiness.
Thinking about it now, with our behaviour we only wandered in the same place again and again not getting anywhere. However, the more we wandered, the more the place that our relationship was felt unfamiliar. At least to me. His arms around me, his hand in mine, his lips against mine didn't feel right anymore. None of that could compare to the warm hugs Soonyoung would give me, the soft hand caressing my hair or face, his full lips eagerly kissing mine.
I am about to get lost in the thought of Soonyoung, again, when Chanyeol lifts his head and his eyes meet mine. Keeping our gaze fixed on the other is too painful that we both end up turning our heads.
Suddenly, Chanyeol sighs. “If you can't say anything now, let's talk next time.”
“No...we can't push this anymore,” I say as I turn my head again towards him who's still looking somewhere else. “You know that too.”
“I don't, Jihoon. I don't know.” The right corner of his mouth lifts in a bitter smile. “Is it the end this time?”
“I have given this a lot of thought. Not only in the past days but in the past months and...yes, this is the end.” I take a short pause and sigh before saying the words I had in my mind for the past months but never dared to say. “Let's break up.”
“Did you ever love me?” He asks, eyes staring in the void.
“At first, I did.”
Chanyeol turns his head around to look at me and there's desperation in his eyes. “Then can't we go back? Back to when you truly loved me?”
Slowly shaking my head I say, “I don't want to fool you anymore, to give you false hope only to let you down again, to hurt you even more than you already are.”
He snorts as his eyes become glassy with tears. “You knew that you were causing me pain, yet you kept doing it. Then why did you change your mind now?”
“Because I realised that I don't want you to be tangled with a person who can't love you and make you happy. You deserve much more than suffering while staying by my side.”
“Can't love me? Is it because you love that Kwon Soonyoung?”
Lowering my head, I don't answer his question but he takes my silence as a yes.
“I knew it.” Tears start falling from his eyes. “I knew that one day I would've lost you to him...the way you look at him...you never looked at me like that, you know?” He wipes his tears with the back of his hand but they keep falling. “I thought I could keep up with it as long as you were by my side but at some point, it became unbearable. Watching you run to him, lightening up and smiling whenever he showed up. I was jealous of all that. I wanted you to love me as you love him but no matter what I did, you would only be getting far from me and I hated Soonyoung for that.”
“The fault is mine. I am the one you should hate,” I say as I fidget with the cup of the now-cold tea, which had been forgotten.
“I do. I hate you because you made me fall in love with you when your heart belonged to someone else. You took my heart away when all you wanted was Soonyoung.”
Silence breaks in our conversation again, words dying in my throat.
I can't deny what he said because it's the truth, I can't ask to be forgiven because I don't deserve it, not now. He must be wanting me to say something but I can't lie to him anymore. So I stay still, staring at him crying as the ticking of the clock becomes louder and louder, echoing the cracks deepening in Chanyeol's heart.
It's before his heart could completely shatter that Chanyeol looks at me for one last time, saying, “Go away. I want to be alone.”
Without any other word, he gets up and walks to the door, swinging it open.
Grabbing all of my things, I stop right outside his door and say, “You'll be happy again, Chanyeol. You already know that I'm not worthy of your tears. You're a beautiful person and, soon, you'll find someone who will truly and deeply fall for you. I'm sure of it.”
Soonyoung’s point of view
Just as Joshua said, today has been a very long and tiring day.
We woke up to my parents walking into my room to say they were going out for shopping and that breakfast was already waiting for us downstairs.
A ton of waffles later, Joshua quickly changed to his spare clothes and went back to his house to start his plan of keeping Wonwoo and Jihoon away from me, so I could have time for myself.
The moment hyung stepped out of my house, I did nothing but think. I spent the whole day on my bed, at my desk or on the armchair next to the window being swamped by the thoughts that had broken the banks and flooded my mind.
Some of them were so overwhelming and breathtaking that they almost got me drowning in them; some others were quickly flashing by as they were already fading, while others felt so vivid as if I had just lived them the day before.
The only moments I was able to resurface and breathe were when my mother called me to eat or when Seokmin asked me if tomorrow I wanted to go with him to a bookshop before coming to my house and study. I mentally thanked them for the little distraction from the mess happening inside of my head today: scenes turned into different ones while the morning turned into afternoon and then night.
Everything revolved around one question: “There was any sign that I liked Jihoon before realising it myself?”
To answer that, I had to go back and analyse the past few months of our friendship and at some point, I went even further back, to the days we couldn't stand each other. I tried to remember all the things I could about us, about what we did and how I felt, especially when he did something that could've been considered heart-throbbing or heartbreaking.
By the end of the day, I could list about six moments that may be deemed, for sure, as signs that I was too dense to catch up.
Let me introduce you to what I call “Exposing Soonyoung's True Feelings Party.”
1: Jihoon's fandom.
One of the things that annoys me the most are his so-called admirers.
From the day he set foot in our school, every single girl had flirted at least once with him. Even some bold male students asked Jihoon out or gave him gifts. The girls were the most annoying ones, though.
They confessed their feelings to him every single day and they still do it despite Jihoon being already in a relationship with Chanyeol. This is because they're convinced that Jihoon will see in them the love he is looking for and that he composes about. Don't get me wrong, the latter isn't the idea I have of them, it's what they literally say while chatting with one another in the hallways or in the cafeteria as they plot ways to get to Jihoon's heart. I even heard some of them talking in detail about the things they would like to do to him if they were left alone in a room with the boy.
At first, I thought that they riled me up because they were noisy and couldn't shut up about their dirty fantasies, wet dreams and silly plans to win Jihoon. In the end, I realised I got annoyed because every word of their was about Jihoon. To put it in another way, I cared about what they said because it's Jihoon.
Had it been another random person, I would have cared less of their conversation, I probably wouldn't even know what they were talking about, just like I did before Jihoon came here.
2: Jihoon's first kiss with Chanyeol.
Just as the title says, this is about the time I saw Jihoon and Chanyeol kissing.
Back then, I couldn't stop thinking about it, about the way Jihoon was leaning on the wall, a blushing mess before he tiptoed and put his hands on Chanyeol's shoulders as they kissed. The scene flashing before my eyes every now and then, making me angry because the shorter had walked right in the taller's love-trap.
I remember myself wanting to believe to Seokmin that Chanyeol's feelings weren't sincere, that he seduced Jihoon just because he wanted the new-comer to be his new toy. Many months have passed since then and so much water under the bridge, as they say, when we realised that I was right, that the one walking into the love-trap was Chanyeol. He wasn't just playing with Jihoon, he really fell for the boy and this made him act like a possessive boyfriend all the time.
However, the truth is that the moment I saw them, I felt kind of betrayed, low-key jealous that he had chosen the heartbreaker over me, even if at that time there was still a lot of bad blood between the two of us. Maybe a small and foolish part of me wanted that “hate” to turn into some kind of chemistry and not a friendship-related one. But I told myself it was just because I read way too many stories with the “enemies to lovers” dynamics. Honestly speaking, though, why would've he fallen for me? For someone who did nothing but mock him about his height and bother him? It's already a miracle that we became friends after that and that we get along so well. It's almost as if those days never existed and I'm grateful we left all of that behind of us.
So, moral of the story, that day was another sign that, yes, I already liked Lee Jihoon.
3: Jihoon under the rain.
Of course, my mind would bring up that moment again since, after that day, I decided to change the relationship between us.
The memory is so vivid that I still tear up every time I think about it.
I was in my room, lights off as I was trying to fall asleep after being out the entire afternoon with Joshua, Seokmin and Wonwoo hyung. However, I couldn't close my eyes. I was still too excited about my alone time with Wonwoo that I kept turning and tossing, kicking the blanket as the highlights of the day replayed in my mind: the cute hats we wore, the pics we took and then Jihoon.
At the thought of the boy, I suddenly got up to sit in the middle of the bed and stayed like that for a while. Once again, I had been rude to him and the tension between us had surely made Wonwoo and Chanyeol a little bit uncomfortable. That night, though, I felt bad about me acting like a dick to Jihoon and my mood kind of fell.
That was when the rain started falling and, knowing it would've taken a while for me to actually feel sleepy, I got up from my bed and went to sit on the armchair to look at the world outside being showered by the rain falling from the sky, some of the drops were furiously tapping on the window, breaking the silence of the night. Not a soul could be seen down the streets as nobody would've been crazy enough to go out when the weather was like that.
Well, nobody but Jihoon.
He was drenched, walking without an umbrella but he seemed to be unbothered by it as if the rain was the last of his problems. Probably, he was going back home after his date with Chanyeol, his pace slowing down until he suddenly stopped in front of my house, head turned to the side to look at my door. I bolt up from the chair and get closer to the window, trying to get a better look at him but the drops painting the glass blurred Jihoon out. I remember asking myself why he was standing there, if something bad had happened to him but had no one to talk to or if he was simply trying to get a cold and skip school.
Patiently, I waited for him to get himself together, to realise he couldn't be out there and that he had to go back home. However, he just stood there, looking small and fragile, like he could break any moment now and my heart clenched at the sight. I couldn't ignore it when I was dead worried about him.
So I went downstairs, threw the first coat and shoes I could find on and then ran outside to talk to him, to see if he needed me.
When Jihoon spotted me, his eyes widened in a rather comical way and if I wasn't worried I would've probably laughed at him. He then asked me what I was doing out there and I told him half of the truth. I guess that my plan to look calm completely failed and that my shaking voice betrayed me because after explaining himself, Jihoon wanted me to calm down. Plus, he was puzzled as of why I was suddenly being so nice to him, why I was caring about him. Yeah, why was I like that?
At that time, I told myself and him that I was worried just because I cared about the band and their schedule, but the truth was that all I was concerned about was him. I wanted to bring him inside, let him warm up and either sleep here or simply lend him some clothes before going back home. But I am a coward. I was too scared to be rejected to ask. After all, we still hated each other so why would've he accepted to sleep at my house? In the end, I convinced him to at least take my umbrella with him and send him back, even if it kind of hurt me to watch him go away.
It was the moment his fingertips brushed on my skin that I felt some kind of electricity running between us and it was probably then, with that image of him looking like a drenched kitten, that I realised I wanted to take care of him because I hated seeing him looking that fragile, that weak. I wanted to see him smiling just like when I teased him before disappearing into my house.
I came to notice that his happiness is my most valuable treasure.
4: Jihoon’s body.
I know, I know.
I said that Jihoon's fans bothered me with all of their fantasies about Jihoon but I never said I disagreed with them, to be honest, I cannot blame them.
See, despite eating loads and loads of food, Jihoon's body is ripped since the kid still has time to go to the gym at least three times a week. I swear to god, he's a pro at managing his time.
That's not the point, though.
Luckily or unfortunately, it depends on the point of view, I saw his naked body only twice since we've met.
The first time was when he slept here while we were doing our English project on Pride and Prejudice.
The morning after, he confidently walked into the living room with a towel covering just the lower half of his body and he started teasing me as if him being half-naked in my living room was an every day kind of thing. Meanwhile, I got so shy that I could barely look at him.
However, I still managed to quickly peek and saw him looking like one of those characters coming straight out of an anime. He was fucking glowing in the morning light because of his wet skin, the rays hitting the right spots to highlight his muscles flexing because of his arms crossed on his chest. He was so fucking hot and I was tempted to run to him so I could feel his arms.
Thank god I am shy or else things would've been awkward between the two of us, just like the second time I walked on him.
This time, though, he was fully naked.
I remember his back facing the door so my eyes naturally went from his back rippling at every move of his while he dried his hair and then they landed on his round and firm butt.
Between you and me, his butt is a 10 out of 10 and I would totally and definitely slap it until both cheeks are completely red and...what? Don't “Soonyoung” me! You would think the same if you had seen it. You can't judge me when it's his butt that is the perfect size to be grabbed and squeezed.
To be even more honest with you, I think I had at least a couple of wet dreams involving Jihoon. There's also a very vivid one I recently had in which the two of us were in my room and I suddenly started making out with him until we landed on my bed and were grinding our crotches together. But then we stopped because I guess I woke up.
However, even if I'm embarrassed by my dirty thoughts, they're part of the wake-up call making me notice that there's something about him that turns me on, that awakens the tiger inside of me and that makes me want to be wild with him.
This kind of worries me because not even with Wonwoo I can feel what I feel with Jihoon.
5: Jihoon and I in people’s eyes.
Another thing that had me think about my relationship with Jihoon is how the others see us.
Literally, every person who sees us, automatically thinks we are together and when we would tell them that we are just best friends, no one believes us. Vernon wasn’t the first one who asked more than once if we were sure that we aren’t dating. We even had someone at school telling us we could trust them as they would keep our relationship as a secret if we were cheating on our respective boyfriends. It was crazy but, luckily, it never happened again.
However, when I would ask them why they don’t believe us, they would all say the same thing. They say that the way we bicker, the way we gravitate towards each other, the way our eyes sparkle when we’re together and even the atmosphere around us are different as they’re charged with a fondness people say is bond to a love that goes beyond friendship.
Of course, I would always say that they read too much into things, that Jihoon and I only get along very well and that is why we have great complicity. However, now I’m not that sure anymore. Probably it’s like this for Jihoon but not for me. I was so into the thought that we are the bestest of friends that I couldn’t see that there was indeed more and maybe these outsiders could see it better than me, they could see how really whipped I am for this guy to the point that I can never say no to him and try to do anything I can to spend time with him, even if it’s just for a while.
One of the people who noticed this was Wonwoo. I don’t know when it happened but he did and he kept it for himself until he exploded the day we had that huge fight. His face, contorted in frustration and anger, will forever be engraved in my memories and if at that time I blamed him for not understanding him, I now blame me for not understanding him. All the things he pointed out to me, how I’m with Jihoon for most of the week, how I steal glances when I can’t talk to him, how I mention him whenever I can, are true.
I do hang out with Jihoon almost every day because I enjoy being with him.
I do look at him when we’re in the same room and I can’t talk to him knowing that Chanyeol would kill me on the spot.
I do mention his name whenever I talk about the things I like, about what I did or I am planning to do. Jihoon is almost in every sentence of mine.
Wonwoo was also right when he told me I was way too concerned about Jihoon when he was ill. Thinking about it I would’ve done most of that with all of my friends but not all of that, especially living in their house for a couple of days (Joshua and Seokmin are different cases because we’re like brothers so their houses are like mine and vice versa). But he was wrong when he said that Jihoon comes before anyone else. Yes, I like Jihoon and now I know that I maybe like-like him but it doesn’t mean that he comes first. I also said that Jihoon sometimes makes me feel things that Wonwoo can’t but I still
love
Wonwoo and I can’t forget about this overnight.
It would be lying to myself.
6: Jihoon, all of my life.
It’s not really a point as I consider this one more of a conclusion to what I’ve been thinking the whole day.
Jihoon, all of my life.
But what does this mean?
It means that if before there was a very tiny possibility of me having to live without him, now I’m sure that I want Jihoon to be by my side for the rest of my life.
Be it as a friend, be it as a mere acquaintance, be it as something more than that, I can’t see a life without Jihoon.
My future has Jihoon in it. The places, the time, the people around me may change in my imagination, but Jihoon is always there.
This is quite surprising considering how much it takes me to actually warm up to someone, to let them in and take such an important space in my heart. Jihoon was able to broke all of the records and become, in a very short time, a person that I definitely treasure and adore; a person to whom I am thankful because of how much light and warmth has brought to me. Seriously, if I were to lose him someday on the path towards my future, I think I would go crazy. It would be as if someone suddenly turned off all the lights and told me to find my way out in a pitch-black room. I’d feel so lost to the point I could say goodbye to my sanity.
You may think that I am exaggerating but I am not. This is really how much he means to me. Jihoon to me is as important as the stars are to the sailors roaming the seas at night or as a treasure chest is to a greedy pirate.
The thought of losing him makes me so scared and I had proof of it during the last month, because of Chanyeol.
Seeing him slowly getting farther away from me, avoiding me and not knowing it wasn’t because he wanted to but because he had to, made me feel like a total wreck. I was afraid I had done something that could’ve hurt him without meaning it. I was afraid that he didn’t want to see me anymore. I couldn’t do anything though, too scared that if I said something it could’ve worsened things, irritating him and being called out for being too clingy.
However, when I found out the real reason behind his strange behaviour, to my surprise, all of the sadness transformed into determination to fight for him, to let him know that I couldn’t let him go that easily.
It happened the night of Seungkwan’s party when I waited for him outside his house.
Recalling it now, made me realise how starting from that hug and the way we held each other close, to the way his hand wiped away my tears and the words whispered which left our mouths in puffs of air, everything felt so intimate and we were so delicate as if not to break that frail atmosphere surrounding us. We put our hearts on our sleeves and desperately prayed for time to stop flowing so we wouldn’t be pulled once again into different paths.
I can’t speak on Jihoon’s behalf but, to me, it wasn’t a moment between friends. It was a moment between two longing souls who tried to reach out in fear of losing each other forever and it was because a future together was nothing certain to them.
As of now, the days that have yet to come are still dark considering the way Chanyeol is pressuring Jihoon but there’s something different about me.
That something that had me snap and gave me more courage to fight for Jihoon, to defy all the obstacles getting in our way because I’m determined to have Jihoon, all of my life.
“Wow, Soonyoung! You look like shit and the week has just started!” Seokmin said as soon as I took my seat beside him.
“Good morning to you, too, Seokmin.” Sarcasm dripping from my words as I drop my head on the desk and close my eyes.
“Didn’t sleep well?” He asks, repeatedly poking my head.
“That and it’s been such a tiring weekend. I’m no longer used to hanging out.” I want to tell him the truth but this is not the place to do it. We-know-who has way too many spies here.
“But you went out on Saturday,” Seokmin says and it sounds more like a question than an affirmation. “Speaking of which, were you with Wonwoo?”
“No, I was with Jihoon. We went to Vinyl Art for a couple of hours.”
“Really? And Chanyeol knows?” He whispers the last part so that the people around us couldn’t hear.
I lift my head enough to shake it before placing it down again on the wooden surface. “Jihoon didn’t tell him or else my head wouldn’t be attached to my neck anymore.”
“You’re right. Good point.” He sighs and then gasps. “Speaking of the devil…” he gets closer to whisper in my ear. “...Chanyeol is here, alone, and he looks even worse than you do.”
At that, I shoot my eyes open and the tall guy is indeed not okay.
His eyes were bloody and swollen as if he did nothing but cry. His hair dishevelled, clearly he didn’t even try to fix them before coming to school. His uniform, too, is a mess. His pullover wasn’t long enough to cover the shirt coming outside of the pants, the first two buttons left undone and his tie hanging loose around his neck. When he reached his desk, he left himself fall on the chair and immediately spaced out, not answering to his friends’ calls or reacting to people waving their hand in front of his face.
“He’s here but he’s absent,” I say to no one in particular.
Seokmin, however, hears me. “I know, right? He looks like a ghost. I wonder what happened to him.” He folds his arms on his chest and gives it a thought. “Do you think he found out about Saturday?”
I freeze, heart thumping. He couldn’t have found out, right? “Ay! It’s impossible! Maybe he couldn’t sleep just like it happened to me.”
“We will find out now.” Seokmin points at the door. “Jihoon is about to walk in.”
And in fact, three seconds later, Jihoon opens the door. Seokmin must’ve seen him coming from the window facing the corridor. His eyes, immediately land on our spot and he waves at us while brightly smiling. However, there was a hint of sadness in his gaze.
‘Did they really fight?’
Jihoon walks to his spot and when he’s in front of Chanyeol’s desk, he stops to greet him but the taller is still spacing out or probably pretending not to see him. Realising that his boyfriend is probably avoiding him, Jihoon’s smile completely falls. He lowers his head and drags himself to his own desk, taking some books out to review his homework and not meet other students’ eyes because they had already started whispering any sort of things.
Seokmin and I looked at each other and both shrugged, confused at what was happening. We decided to brush the matter off because it’s their problem, because we thought it was something temporary and that by the end of the day we would’ve seen Chanyeol glued to Jihoon’s side.
When days passed by and the two of them didn’t have any kind of interaction, well, then we started getting worried.
Usually, they would be exchanging notes at the end of the lessons and write paper texts to each other at least once per class. They would spend their lunch break sitting together in a corner of the cafeteria or, if it was sunny, on one of the benches in the school’s courtyard. After school, Jihoon would walk together with Chanyeol to the main gate and kiss him goodbye before he went to practice.
This week, none of that happened.
In class, they were still sitting close to each other but not a word was exchanged at the end of the lesson and not a piece of paper was passed from one to the other. At lunch, Chanyeol would be with his friends in the cafeteria, while Jihoon walked away in the opposite direction, probably going to one of the music studios. When classes ended, Jihoon would try to stall so Chanyeol would leave first. I’m not joking when I say that they don’t even steal glances anymore. It feels so cold between them as if they were strangers.
I’ve been meaning to ask Jihoon what has happened but the midterms being near, made it impossible for us to meet outside the school and to have a talk while being face to face. By the end of the day, we barely had the time to phone-call for a quick good night as both of us were super tired and too sleepy to function.
It’s the day before midterms that I finally get to have a proper talk to Jihoon even if it’s via text.
Woozy:
Hello, my friend.
Hoshiya:
You’re back already?!
You just took a break!
Woozy:
I gave up.
What is done is done and my brain is too full to keep learning stuff.
Hoshiya:
True, though.
I feel like my head is about to explode.
Woozy:
Do it outside or else your mother will scold you for making a mess inside your room.
Hoshiya:
She would revive me only to make me clean up.
Woozy:
You got that right.
Hahaha
Hoshiya:
Better take aspirin then!
I think I wouldn’t even be able to go out later if it keeps hurting like this.
Woozy:
Where are you going?
Out with Wonwoo?
Hoshiya:
Nope, even though I would love it.
I’m going to crash at Seokmin’s house for a late-night cram session.
Woozy:
You are such nerds, studying till late.
Hoshiya:
Says the one who will probably have the best marks even if he has given up.
I hope you fail.
Woozy:
I hope you fail, too.
Hoshiya:
What great friends we are, am I right?
Woozy:
Absolutely right!
And that’s it! This is the right moment to play dumb and try to understand what’s happening between him and Chanyeol.
Hoshiya:
Btw, aren’t you going out?
Maybe you can have a cram session with Chanyeol.
Woozy:
I don’t think that’s possible.
Hoshiya:
Why?
Woozy:
Nothing, really…
Hoshiya:
Are you sure?
It doesn’t seem like nothing to me.
But if you don’t want to talk about it, I understand.
Jihoon immediately reads the text but he doesn’t answer.
After a couple of minutes of staring at the screen, I sigh and put the phone aside.
Maybe I struck a nerve and he really wanted to let the matter go and if this is the case, he won’t answer until I change the subject by using a random meme.
However, five minutes after I locked my phone, a notification pops up on the screen.
Woozy:
Chanyeol and I broke up.
Definitely.
“WHAT?!” I yell and immediately run my hands to my mouth to shut myself up. With the corner of my eyes, I look at the closed door scared that my mom will come upstairs asking me why I was screaming. When time passes and no one comes, I relax a bit. Grabbing the phone, I furiously type on the keyboard.
Hoshiya:
WHAT?!
Why didn’t you tell me?
Woozy:
Honestly, I don’t know.
Sometimes it still feels unreal that it happened.
I think I wanted to process it first before telling people.
Hoshiya:
So not even the others know?
Woozy:
Not even the others.
Hoshiya:
Oh, Jihoonie.
It’s must’ve been hard for you.
What are you going to do?
Woozy:
It was.
Nothing, I guess.
We won’t get back together…
Hoshiya:
I’m sorry, Jihoonie.
Woozy:
You don’t have to.
And you don’t need to worry about me.
It’s going to be okay.
Hoshiya:
If you say so…
Woozy:
Now, I’ll go back to study.
I don’t want to fail as you will.
Hoshiya:
I won’t fail!
Woozy:
You will!
Talk to you later, idiot.
Hoshiya:
Later, knob.
Jihoon left the chat before even reading my message.
Turning my phone with the screen facing the desk, I leave my room for a while to stretch my legs and go downstairs so I can take aspirin for my headache which just worsened – if that was even possible.
As I’m pouring the water inside of a glass, I can’t help but think how Jihoon quickly tried to change the subject after telling me about his breakup.
He’s been insecure about this relationship for a while, telling me he understood Chanyeol’s behaviour but still feeling a little bit oppressed by it. However, there’s something in his texts, something in his words that bugs me a lot. It feels like he’s sad, like he didn’t want this to really happen since he strongly believed that things would’ve changed once his boyfriend realised that their relationship is safe. Perhaps, even if he didn’t say it, there’s a part of him that still hopes for things to get better, that spending some time apart will make them realise how much they need each other.
I can’t hide, though, that the news made me feel guiltily relieved.
Knowing that Jihoon is free from Chanyeol’s cage had my heart thumping in excitement. That meant we could go back to be friends just like before, hanging out at school or on the streets without having to fear Chanyeol’s wrath upon us. Moreover, it gave me some silly hope – that I immediately regretted – about the turns my relationship with Jihoon may take. But, again, the pain was clear to me from the way he was talking about it and the last thing I want is for Jihoon to be hurt.
Different scenarios of Jihoon going back to Chanyeol and happily smiling at his boyfriend play in my head and make my heart heavy but if he needs to be with Chanyeol to be truly happy, I can do my best to stay put in my place and get my indecisive heart under control.
“Soonyoung! Shouldn’t you be studying?” My mom asks when she founds me spacing out in the middle of the kitchen, a glass full of water still in my hands.
“Yes, mom.” I turn my head to her and flash a smile. “I just came downstairs to grab an aspirin.”
“You could’ve called me and I would’ve brought it upstairs, my dear.”
“Don’t worry. I needed to stretch my legs and take my eyes off of the books for a while because of how sore they feel.” I stretch my leg forward and rub one of my eyes to prove my points.
“Poor my baby.” She walks to me with open arms and envelopes me in a loose hug. “I hope this hellish week goes by quickly so you can rest a bit.” She leaves a kiss on my forehead before stepping away. “Do you want me to peel you some fruit?”
I look at the clock and see that it’s already time for me to go to Seokmin’s. “No need, mom. I’m going to take my backpack, my duffel bag and head straight to Seokmin’s place.”
“You’re already going there?”
“Yeah, he wants to study a bit before dinner and then continue after or else we’ll end up staying awake all night long.”
“Okay, my darling. Remember to send me a text when you get there and before going to sleep!”
“Yes, mom. Enjoy the living room now that you can! Soon, Joshua and I will be taking over it!”
She laughs and ruffles my hair. “I will!”
Grabbed my stuff and left the house, the only thought on the way to Seokmin’s house is how I hope that the flame of this hopeless love between Chanyeol and Jihoon sparks again so that Jihoon won’t suffer.
'Don’t worry, Jihoonie. You’re right this time too. Everything is going to be alright.'
After an exhausting and stressing week, we’re finally free!
Midterms are over and I swear I saw some students kneeling in the middle of the yard and thanking the gods because they survived another deadly exam session.
Lack of sleep, over-eating or starving, anxiety, being on the edge and be ready to fight whoever lays his eyes on you...yeah, exams take a great toll on students’ health and you could see it from how every people you met in the hallways or in the classroom looked like walking corpses.
Today too, our physical condition was no better but all the students have a smile plastered on their faces, relieved that this session has reached its end. Some are probably worried about the outcome, some others know they have miserably failed and others fear their parents’ reaction to their grades but none of that matters now. They’re all just happy they’re free from the hell they’ve been living in for the past days.
“Are you going home?” Seokmin asks me when we stop outside the gate.
“Yup. I’m so tired and all I want to do is taking a nap.”
“You know you don’t have to wait for Joshua because he’s already gone, right?”
“I do remember that. He grabbed Jihoon right after the bell rang and dragged him away,” I say, recalling the scene from before when hyung bolted inside the room and literally kidnapped the shorter.
“Weird. But I think it was something urgent or else he would’ve waited for us.” Seokmin checks his phone and I peek on his screen, seeing that he has no new message. “Definitely urgent. He didn’t text me at all.”
“I’ll keep his house on check and when he’ll come back, I’ll go there and question him.” I hit with my fist the palm of my other hand, trying to look as much intimidating as I can. “No one leaves my best friend hanging!”
“Sounds like a plan! But, please, don’t hurt him. I still need him in one piece.” Seokmin chuckles and winks.
“Ew!” I shout, covering my ears and looking at him in disbelief. “Too much information!”
“Soonyoung! I didn’t mean that!” Seokmin hits the back of my head.
“Then why did you wink?! It made it weird.”
“My eye was twitching, it wasn’t a wink!”
“Sure, Seokmin. I totally believe you.” I cover my chest with my hands, bracing myself. “I took you for the innocent type of guy but I guess you’re not anymore. What kind of things you and Joshua did when you were alone?”
“Please, go home!” He kicks my butt and shoves me in the direction of my house. “I’ll talk to you later!”
“Bye, Seok!”
I keep on waving at him until he gets in his father’s car.
Taking my phone out of my backpack and plugging the earphones in, I head home to take my well-deserved nap.
The worst week of this month has passed and we’re now left with few days of school before the spring festival and the spring break start.
All the students of my year are especially excited about the festival since it’s going to be our last and so they want it to be memorable.
Early in the morning or at the end of the classes, all you could hear was people chit-chatting about which booth to present to the students’ council and which activities to suggest that could possibly create a joyful atmosphere but even be an occasion for couples to be formed. Anyone could tell that the latter was the main reason why people looked forward to the event. They all hoped to find the right one when randomly partnered with another student during the events, maybe it was going to be someone new or someone they already knew. Maybe it’s because the season brings love in the air or maybe because students are finally carefree enough to open up their hearts, but they do find love, sometimes even everlasting from what the alumni told us when they would come to the festival to reminisce the birth of their love in our very school courtyard.
However, what everyone really looks forward to, is the main event which has a different topic every year: one year, the school invited some magicians for a magic show; the next one they had a dance show, with a lot of students covering famous groups’ songs or dancing to original choreographies. This year, it was finally the time for singers to showcase their abilities and that meant bands can join too! Joshua already told me that Jeonghan’s bitches are going to perform and they will shine so bright on that stage, stealing hearts in the same way they steal mine whenever I listen to their songs. Most of all, I’m so excited because this will be the first time for me to actually watch their stage like pros and not as a bunch of guys singing in a garage, messing with each other as they play and sing. I wonder how cooler they can get because, as of now, their dork side has eclipsed the cool one.
Lost in thoughts of Jihoon and Wonwoo on the stage, I barely notice that I’m already in front of my house. Ringing the bell, I kick a pebble away as I wait for my mom to open the door.
“Love, you’re already here?” She asks, fixing some strands of hair, which fell from her messy bun, behind her ears. Stains of flour are on her face and cover part of the apron she’s wearing. “I thought you would be with Seokmin.”
“I was too sleepy to hang with him.” I toe my shoes off and throw a curious look at her back as she leaves to head towards the kitchen. “What are you doing?”
“Biscuits!” She yells from the other room. “For tomorrow!”
“Tomorrow? Why? Is it someone’s birthd-” I stop mid-sentence the moment I step foot in the kitchen and see the counter covered in heart-shaped biscuits and cookies, ready to be covered in pink, red and white frosting.
“What do you mean? Tomorrow is Valentine’s day!” She throws her hands in the air, making some red frosting fly on the fridge. “I’m baking these for your father and for you since you are the two loves of my life.” She then pouts, gently throwing the sac-à-poche on the counter. “Honestly, I wanted it to be a surprise but you ruined it by coming home now!”
“Why wouldn’t I be home after a school day?” I ask, sitting on one of the stools next to the counter and grabbing a broken biscuit, knowing that mom won’t use it.
“Shouldn’t you be out buying a present to Wonwoo?” She takes an empty sac-à-poche and fills it with the pink frosting to decorate the pastries. “Or did you already buy it?”
“Oh, fuck.” My hands reach my face, squishing it in frustration at my dumb self. “Do you believe me if I told you I was one hundred percent sure I bought it but in reality, I didn’t?”
“First of all, language,” mom says, glaring at me. “Second, I wouldn’t be surprised. Sometimes you’re so forgetful!”
“I am not! In my defence, I was too focused on the exams and on studying!” Then I stretch on the counter, trying to avoid the tons of whipped cream mom left there, to grab her arm in desperation. “What should I buy now?”
“I don’t know, my son.” She sighs. “I only met him once and couldn’t talk to him so I don’t know what does he like.” She says in a reprimanding and kind of annoyed/bitter tone.
“Mom, are you still sulking because I haven’t introduced Wonwoo to you as my boyfriend yet?”
“Yes and now that you’re done with midterms, you better bring him here for dinner or I’ll hit your ass with this spatula.” She swings the flat metallic utensil in the air, motioning how she will use it on me.
“Language! You can’t say the a-word if I can’t say the f-word!”
“I’m your mother and I can say both the a and the f word. However, why don’t you ask Joshua and Seokmin? I think they will be more helpful than I am about the gift matter.”
“I’ll text them now, hoping they’ll answer me.”
With that, she goes back to frosting the biscuits and I lean on the fridge to text Seokmin first.
Hoshiya:
Seok.
I
have
a
big
problem
.
Are
you
there
?
Seeeeeeeooooooook.
Spamming is the only way to be sure he’ll immediately answer. His notification tone is a really annoying one so imagine it repeated for twelve consecutive times. He’ll do anything to make it stop. And in fact, I was about to send the thirteenth text when he replies.
DonkeyKong:
WHAT?!
WHAT DO YOU WANT?
Hoshiya:
Tomorrow is Valentine’s day.
DonkeyKong:
So what?
Hoshiya:
I forgot to buy a gift for Wonwoo.
My inside panic mode is on.
DonkeyKong:
How did you forget?
We’ve been talking about it the whole week.
Hoshiya:
I don’t know but I did!
What can I do?
Any last-minute idea?
Do you know if Wonwoo needs something?
DonkeyKong:
He’s your boyfriend, not mine.
How am I supposed to know?
Hoshiya:
fslkdjgjh
My mind is blank because I’m panicking.
DonkeyKong:
What about buying him dinner?
Hoshiya:
Can't do that.
Nonu told me that tomorrow is his aunt's birthday.
He will go to her house for a family dinner.
We’ll meet for a short while outside our school before he goes there.
DonkeyKong:
Mmmh…
He’s not the type to wear accessories.
So no necklaces or bracelets.
Hoshiya:
Nope, he won’t wear them.
DonkeyKong:
What about a book?
Hoshiya:
OMG. YES!
Recently, he told me about a book he wanted to read.
I think it was Dickens’ A Tale Of Two Cities.
DonkeyKong:
Great, you know what to buy.
I gotta go now because I’m preparing my surprise for Shua hyung.
Hoshiya:
You really got those rare action figures he’s been looking for?!
DonkeyKong:
I did!
There’s nothing I can’t do for my Joshua hyung.
Hoshiya:
Ew.
That was too cheesy even for you.
DonkeyKong:
You’re the one to talk, Mr I-am-the-cheesiest-when-it-comes-to-Wonwoo.
Hoshiya:
BYE.
“Mom, Seokmin told me to buy a book for him. Do you think the bookshop in the neighbourhood is still open?” I ask mom while changing the chatroom from Seokmin’s to Joshua’s.
“Yes, but you need to hurry,” She says, not even looking at the clock to check the time.
“I will. Need to check something with Joshua hyung first.”
Hoshiya:
Hyung.
I know you’re online.
Help me, please!!
Joshuji:
With what?
Hoshiya:
I want to buy a book for Wonwoo hyung as a Valentine’s gift.
Do you think this is enough or do I need to do more to impress him?
Joshuji:
I don’t know what do you mean by “more” and it kind of scares me.
So just keep it simple.
Hoshiya:
Define your idea of simple.
Joshuji:
Simple as in something he will like and not scare him.
For example, I’m bringing Seokmin to the Han River for a picnic.
We will wait for the sun to set and it will be simple yet romantic.
Hoshiya:
I can’t take him out, though.
He won’t be here tomorrow.
Joshuji:
Oh, right.
He’s going out of town.
Hoshiya:
Exactly.
Joshuji:
Then the book is okay.
Knowing him, he will read it while travelling in the car.
Maybe you can give him something to eat during the trip.
Hoshiya:
What do you think about cookies?
The ones I made for you some time ago?
Joshuji:
He will love them!
And please, make some for me too!!!
Hoshiya:
Only because you helped me.
Joshuji:
You’re the best, Soons.
Hoshiya:
You are!
Thank you!
Joshuji:
Before I forget, tomorrow I can’t come with you to school.
I have to cook things for my picnic with Seok.
Hoshiya:
Okay.
Just give me a call to make sure I’m awake and I won’t be late.
Joshuji:
Will do!
Good luck with the baking!
After sending a kissy emoji to Joshua, I lock my phone and grab the wallet from my bag.
“Mom, I’ll leave my things there. I’m going to the bookshop and then I’ll come back to bake some cookies!” I shout when I’m already in the hallway to put my shoes on.
“Be quick! I have to make dinner too!” She shouts back.
“Yes!”
When the door clicks behind my back, I start running towards the shop, clutching the wallet close to myself in order not to lose it and wondering if Jihoon is planning something to win Chanyeol back.
Agape, I stand in front of my desk where, not one but two, colourful bouquets are laid.
The first one is very simple, a mix of red and white roses, decorated with some baby’s breath here and there. The second one is richer in colours because not only it has white roses but also white gardenias and baby blue forget-me-not.
“Seokmin, do you see them too?” I ask, nudging Seokmin who’s busy sniffing his bouquet of flowers.
“I do and they’re so pretty!” He shifts closer to me and it’s his time to nudge me. “Do you know who sent them?”
“Nope.” Letting my bag fall on the floor, I go sitting on my chair and check for any card attached to the decorative paper prettily wrapped around the stems. When I find them on the back, Seokmin places his bouquet down and rushes to my side so he can read them with me. The one coming from the roses reads:
For a long time, I’ve been wishing to find the right one for me, and I found you.
For a long time, I wanted a love that would feel just right, and I found you.
I’ve been dreaming of a heart that could match mine, and I found you.
So, on this special day, I want to tell you something I’ve been meaning to say for a while.
Thank you for letting me be the one for you and for being the one for me.
I love you, now and forever.
Wonwoo.
I don’t move for a full minute, too caught in the moment. An idiotic smile blooms on my face as I re-read the cheesy words from the card once, twice again.
“That was so sweet! I’ve never thought he was the type that could write something this romantic! You’re so lucky!” Seokmin squeals as he hits my shoulder. “C’mon! Read the other one! It may be something even cheesier!”
I grab the other note and slowly read the printed message on it.
Lost, I’ve been wandering in this cold world until you found me.
Didn’t know what love truly meant until you found me.
However, no matter how strong my feelings were, I could only admire you in secret.
I could only stand here in hopes you will never forget me.
In hopes I can keep loving you even when it will be painful to do so.
But my heart longs for you, now and maybe forever.
ㅇㅈ
“Oh...my...God,” Seokmin says, taking short pauses between each word to add a dramatic effect. “Our Soons has a secret admirer!”
“Me? Nah. Maybe it was meant for someone else.”
Seokmin snatches the card from my hands and looks for something. His eyebrows raise when he finds it. “It’s definitely for you! There’s your name written at the back of the card.”
“WHAT?” I take the card back and see that, indeed, my name is printed in a fancy font in the right corner of the card. “Who sent it though?”
“Ieung and jieut ...Yoonji? Yeji? Wonjae?” He lists a series of name that match the initials but don’t ring up any bell in our heads.
“Believe me, I have no idea who sent this.”
“Me neither. It could’ve been anyone from this school but given the message, they must be closer than we think.”
“Probably. I still think they got the wrong Soonyoung, though,” I say as I put the cards inside the front pocket of my bag and proceed to place the latter and the flowers inside the lockers at the back of our classroom.
Seokmin does the same and by the time we reach our seats, Jihoon walks in with five girls hovering around him, each one of them shoving in his face a box of chocolates made especially for him. The boy gets to his desk and sits down, not sparing a glance to the girls who follow him. He turns around and quickly greeted us with a full smile before going back to stare right in front of him.
Jihoon is like a marble statue, not showing a single emotion but annoyance on his face and blatantly ignoring everyone else around him. The girls stood in our class, fighting against each other about whose gift Jihoon is going to accept until the teacher walks in and sends them away. Only then, Jihoon relaxes enough to look in our direction again and give us a triumphant thumbs-up as Mrs Kim starts explaining the project we have to work on during the upcoming spring break.
Time does fly when you’re caught up in your own world made of daydreams, memories and random/deep thoughts.
The moment the teacher finished talking about the project, I drove off in the faraway lands inside my mind and came back just in time for lunch.
Jihoon, Seokmin and I get in line with our trays to get some food and then join Joshua, who was already halfway through his kimchi jjigae. As soon as Seokmin’s puts his tray down on the table, his arms fly to wrap around Joshua’s neck for a hug.
“Thank you for the flowers, hyung. I love them!”
“It was nothing, really. I know how much you like sunflowers.” Joshua leaves a soft peck on Seokmin’s cheek and the latter, suddenly shy and blushing, decides to shift his focus on the food before him.
“Get a room, you two! Jihoonie and I are trying to eat!” I complain, throwing a napkin at Joshua who’s still looking at Seokmin with his love-struck face.
“You’re just jealous because you and your boyfriend will never be as cute as we are.” The elder cups his cheeks and strikes what’s supposed to be a cute pose.
“Did you mean corny?! Because in that case, I’m glad we’re not like you.”
“I second that,” Jihoon says and then points his spoon at the couple. “You two are disgusting.”
“Again, that’s just jealousy speaking.” Seokmin’s expression is a mocking one as he puts a spoonful of rice in his mouth. “They’re envious of the beautiful flowers you sent me.”
“Excuse you, but I got two bouquets!”
“Two?!” Joshua asks confused. “I know that one was from Wonwoo but the other one?”
“Wait, how do you know that one is Wonwoo’s?”
“How do you think it got there? I woke up extra early to be here before they opened the gates so that I could get to your class, leave the bouquet on your and Seokmin’s desk and then walk away without anyone noticing.” Joshua smirks, proud of his well-done job. “So, who sent the other?”
“A secret admirer!” Seokmin squeals in a very high-pitched and nasal tone. “They brought him roses, gardenias and forget-me-not. It’s so pretty and the message printed on the card was so romantic.”
“No signature on the card?”
I shake my head. “Just an ieung and a jieut at the end of the message.”
“Ieung and jieut ?” Joshua’s eyes shift on Jihoon who suddenly tensed up.
“Yup. Do you have anyone in mind?” I ask him, taking the change in his expression as a sign of him knowing who the sender is.
“It could be anyone. There are a lot of people whose name start with those letters.” He lays back on his chair, arms crossed over his chest and eyes still fixed on Jihoon. “But, one day, you’ll find them. They may be closer than you think.”
“Hyung! I told him the exact same thing!” Seokmin excitedly turns towards Joshua. “We really must be soulmates!”
“Again, ew.” Jihoon chimes in after being silent for a while. His shoulders are definitely less tense than before but he’s not completely relaxed.
“What about you, Jihoonie. Any admirer?” Joshua asks as he wraps his arm around his boyfriend’s shoulders.
“Not to flex but I got at least 5 invitations to dinner, 20 Valentine’s cards, 10 chocolate boxes and one girl just straight up asked me to be her boyfriend.” He sighs, brushing a hand through his hair. “Rejected all of that in the kindest way I could manage aka ignoring them.”
“What a heartbreaker brat you are! I didn’t raise you to be like that!” The elder teases, gaining chuckles from all us.
“I know but I didn’t want to lead them on.”
“I can’t believe them. As soon as they heard that you’re single, they openly started running after you,” I say, trying to hide how annoyed I feel at the thought of all the people who tried flirting with him right after the news of the break up spread inside our school.
“What can I do. They can’t resist a handsome face like mine.” Jihoon nudges my side with a smug face on and while the inner me agrees with him, the outside me can only stick his tongue out.
“And they can’t resist from spreading false rumours,” Seokmin glares at a couple of girls who are whispering to each other as they look at our table or, to be even more precise, at the lack of space between Jihoon and me.
“What is it this time?”
My friend hesitates for a while before saying, “They believe that Chanyeol and Jihoon’s break up is Soonyoung’s fault. Someone said he meddled in their relationship just because he hates Chanyeol and had nothing better to do. Some others said it’s because he actually has a crush on Jihoon despite already having a boyfriend.”
“Oh,” I say, shoulder sagging out of...disappointment? I don’t know. It just feels like shit to be the one always been blamed when there’s trouble in paradise.
“What the fuck are they saying?” Jihoon slams his spoon on the tray, the loud sound catching the attention of the few students sitting around us. “Why do they feel the urge of speaking when they don’t know shit of what really happened? No, why do they have to meddle in others’ business?”
“Calm down, Jihoonie.”
“No, I won’t. I don’t want them to blame you for something I did. I was the one who broke up with Chanyeol and I did it out of my own free will.”
"We know it and deep down even those people know it. They spread rumours just because they are the ones who have nothing better to do and enjoy telling fake stories so they can be entertained by the reactions of those around them," Joshua says putting his free hand over Jihoon's so can he calm the latter down. "It's a waste of time getting worked up because of people like them."
"You're right." Jihoon's grip on the spoon loosens and so does Joshua's grip on the younger's hand. "They don't deserve my anger."
"Thank you, Jihoon. For defending me." I smile at him and he does the same. We kind of lose ourselves in each other's eyes until someone clears his throat to grab our attention.
"What a wise man I have by my side." Seokmin gushes and leans his head on hyung's shoulder.
"Oh my God! Please, stop! All of this public display of affection is making me lose my appetite!" I say, understanding that Seokmin is basically trying to change the topic and lightening the mood.
"If so, give me your rice. Mine is already gone and I crave some more." Jihoon reaches to grab my tray and in particular the bowl of rice.
"The cook didn't cave in your charm when you asked for more?"
"No, this new cook hasn't fallen for my charm…..yet."
"I hope he will be so annoyed by you he won't look at you when serving lunch."
"They will find you annoying first!"
Like that, Jihoon and I start bickering, leaving the rumours behind our backs and filling our minds with each other's bubbly laugh. All while Seokmin and Joshua keep on being lovey-dovey and disgustingly sweet right in front of our (literal) salads.
Someone may think that spotting someone in a crowd must be the most difficult thing to do because, how can you see a single person when they're surrounded by hundreds of people?
Well, this is true but, to me, spotting Wonwoo in a herd of students running out of the school has always been the easiest thing to do. It's like there's a soft bundle of light coming out of the sky which lands exactly wherever Wonwoo is. Maybe it's only my whipped mind that imagines these manhwa-like effects but it actually works. When I follow that beam I find him at the end, waiting for me with the sweetest and warmest smile on his lips.
I did that too a while ago and, now, I'm standing in front of him, mirroring his smile.
“Happy Valentine's day, love,” He greets me, giving a quick peck on my lips.
“Happy Valentine to you, too.” Flustered, I hide my face behind the bouquets.
“You got my flowers!”
“I did. Joshua did a great job in delivering them.” I giggle and peek from behind the flowers. “They're so pretty.”
“But among them, the prettiest flower is you.”
“Don't be so cheesy!” I playfully hit him on the arm, feeling the blush creeping on my cheeks.
“Love seeing you this flustered.” He bops my nose, his deep chuckle sending me to heaven. “Oh? There's another bouquet, too.” Pointing at the other flowers, he asks, “Who gave them to you?”
“Seokmin.” I immediately lie, thanking myself to have put the card inside my bag so that he couldn't see it. I can't tell Wonwoo that a 'secret admirer' got them for me. He would surely overthink and tell me to get rid of them even if I don't want to. They're too pretty to be thrown into the garbage. “Every year we get each other flowers or chocolates for both Valentine's day and White day. You know, since we've been single until the end of last year,” I say, half lying and half not because we did exchange gifts in the past years and included Joshua into this too.
“Afraid you wouldn't get flowers from your respective boyfriends?” He jokes, playfully pinching my cheek.
“Yes! We didn't imagine that you two would pull such a surprise to us!”
“That was only the beginning. I have another surprise but I'll give it to you later.” Wonwoo reaches for my hand and takes it, intertwining our fingers. “Let me walk you home first.”
“Are you sure? You have to go out of town and I don’t want you to waste your time on me.”
He shakes his head. “First of all, I won't be wasting time. The time I spend with you is amazing and I treasure every second of us.” He kisses the back of my hand and rubs the same spot with his thumb. “Second, I'm sure. I still have an hour or so before we need to go.”
“Today, you're cheesier than usual.” I roll my eyes, pretending to be annoyed by his words.
“And I know you're loving it.” He then lightly tugs at my hand. “Let's go.”
The entire walk to my house is something so ordinary but it somewhat feels magical. The way the sun shines on us, the way our intertwined hands sway in the small gap between our bodies, the way we look at each other as we tell about our morning. Time flies and we're soon in front of my place. We stop in the middle of the driveway and turn around so we're facing each other.
“Before you show me your surprise, I want to give you my gift,” I say, handing him the bag I've been holding since I left my class. “Here.”
Wonwoo lets my hand go to take the bag. He carefully unties the red ribbon I used to keep it closed and the corners of his lips slowly lift up when he sees the item on the inside. “No way.” He hangs the paper bag on his wrist to hold the book in both of his hands. “A Tale Of Two Cities! You got it.”
“Yup and there's both the original and the Korean version in it.”
“Thank you so much, Soonie! I will read it as soon as I get inside the car.”
“Speaking of which, there are also cookies in that bag. You can eat them on the ride to your aunt's house.”
“Will do! Oh my God.” He keeps staring at the book, his whole face lit up in happiness. “I'm so happy I can cry.”
“Please, do. I want to brag about making the cold-hearted Wonwoo cry.”
“You wish!” He chuckles and flicks my forehead.
“Ouch! Is this how you thank me for my gift?”
At that, he comes forward and gives me a full kiss on the lips. “Now, it's my turn.” And he hands me a rectangular box, taking the flowers from my hands. “Don't get too surprised.”
Refraining myself from shaking the box to check its content, I untie the ribbon and unwrap it in a not delicate way. When I lift the lid, I almost drop on my knees, feeling light-headed. “You're one crazy hyung.”
“Do you like it?”
“Do I like it?! Are you kidding me?!” I shriek, voice reaching a pitch I didn't know it was reachable. “It's 'Lucifer', the only SHINee album I was missing! I absolutely love it!” Not capable of closing my mouth anymore, I turn it around in my hands not believing I finally have this album. “How did you find it? I've been looking for it for months!”
“I have my ways,” He says, smiling at me.
“You know that I love you, right?” I hook an arm around his neck and dive in for a kiss.
“If you say it like that, it seems like you love me just because I got you the album.”
“It's not like that and you know it!” I give him another peck. “You're incredible.”
“Incredible is my middle name.”
“Thank you, Jeon Incredible Wonwoo. Not only for this,” I say, showing him the album. “But for everything you do for me.”
His hand comes up to my cheek to caress it as he says, “No, thank you, for letting me be the only one for you.”
A pang of guilt attacks my heart at those words but I have to smile.
How I wish that was true, that he was the only one for me. However, that feeble voice inside my mind keeps reminding me that there's someone else who holds a space inside my heart, someone I will probably never be able to push away for the sake of my relationship with Wonwoo.
“Now, I have to go,” hyung says, his shoulder sagging as he speaks. “I wish I could've stayed with you tonight.”
“I wish that too but your family is important, so go and spend time with them.”
He walks me to the door and gives me back the bouquets with another peck on the lips. “I'll send you a text as soon as I arrive and I will surely enjoy your gifts on my way there.”
“You better do.” I giggle. “Go, or else you'll be late!” I playfully shove him away and he walks backwards until the end of the driveway, waving at me the whole time with an idiotic smile plastered on his face.
It's only when he disappears behind a corner that I get inside.
Before going upstairs, I stop inside the living room to get two vases for the flowers. Once they're filled with enough water, I take the paper off the bouquets and let the stem dive in. I fix some of the flowers who are threatening to fall out and leave the vases at the centre of the dining table as they suit this room's atmosphere better.
When I'm inside my room, I let myself fall on the bed. Suddenly, it's like all of the energies have left my body, leaving me drained and tired.
Failing to keep my eyes open, I slowly drift in a deep sleep with a happy but also aching heart.
'Why can my heart beat this fast because of Wonwoo but also hurt because it longs for someone else? Why is all of this happening to me?'
When the sound of a notification on my phone wakes me up, I roll on my side. Seeing that no light hits my face, I shoot my eyes open and notice that the sun has already gone down.
Frantically grabbing my phone to check the time, I sigh in relief as there's still plenty of time before dinner. My mother would've scolded me if she came home to an empty kitchen and a me still sound asleep. I quickly change into some more comfortable clothes and then rush downstairs to start making dinner.
When all is left to do is to wait for the food to cook, I take my phone out to check the notification I got before.
It was Wonwoo.
Nonu:
I'm home.
Are you there?
Did you perhaps faint after I left?
Hoshiya:
I did faint.
Nonu:
WHAT?
Hoshiya:
I fell asleep the moment I got on the bed.
Nonu:
Idiot!
I thought you fainted for real.
Hoshiya:
Isn't suddenly falling asleep the same thing as fainting?
Nonu:
I don't think so.
You gave me a minor heart attack, though.
Hoshiya:
I won't do that again, I promise!
Nonu:
You better keep your promise.
Did you just wake up?
Hoshiya:
Woke up fifteen minutes ago but I had to cook.
Did you safely get to your aunt's?
Nonu:
I did.
The cookies were really good and I was so immersed in the book
that I barely noticed that an hour has gone away.
Hoshiya:
I'm so glad that you liked my gifts.
Nonu:
They are the best!
I gave some of the cookies to my parents and aunt too.
They loved it.
Hoshiya:
Really?
Nonu:
Yup!
They said they would like for you to bake some more.
And maybe bringing them yourself.
Hoshiya:
I would faint before that!
For real this time!
Nonu:
Don't worry.
I already told them that you'll do that when you are ready.
Hoshiya:
My boyfriend is the best in the world.
Nonu:
I know.
Remember that I am Jeon Incredible Wonwoo.
Hoshiya:
Indeed.
Nonu:
Soonie, I have to go now.
They're calling me from downstairs.
I'll text you later if you're not already asleep.
Love you!
Hoshiya:
Okay, hyung.
Talk to you later.
Love you too!
It's after dinner when I was lazily on my computer deciding which show to watch first that I get a text from Jihoon.
Woozy:
Can you come to the neighbourhood's park?
I'm bored and I want to go out.
Hoshiya:
I was about to watch something, but I guess it can wait.
Be there in ten minutes.
Woozy:
Make it here in five.
I'm already waiting for you on the swings.
Hoshiya:
So demanding tonight.
Woozy:
Only because it seems like it's going to rain soon.
Hoshiya:
I'll run there, then.
Woozy:
Don't bump into anyone.
Hoshiya:
Still using this joke with me?
And I won't since you're not on the streets.
Woozy:
You know better than me that this joke will never die.
Hoshiya:
Just so you know, I'm rolling my eyes.
Woozy:
Stop doing that and hurry up!
Hoshiya:
Then stop texting me!
I can't get dressed and answer you at the same time.
Woozy:
This is because you can't multi-task.
Hoshiya:
As if you can.
Now, I'll go.
You made me waste two minutes!
With that, I throw my phone on the bed so I can put on the first pair of sweatpants and hoodie I find inside the closet.
Hurriedly throwing my coat on, I tell my parents I'm going to meet with Jihoon and then I'm off to reach the park which is a couple of minutes walk from my house. When I get there, I see Jihoon sitting on one of the swings, a bag sitting on the other one.
“Wow, you let a bag take my place next to you!” I joke as soon as I get close to him, standing in front of the not-really-empty swing.
“Yeah, it came here, like, thirty seconds ago and it wanted to use the swing so bad. I couldn't say no.” Jihoon stands up to whisper in my ear, “Actually, I don't think it knows how the swing works.”
I giggle. “Should we teach it how to push itself?”
“Nah, take its place and let it sit on your lap as you both swing back and forth.”
“That's a good idea!” Patting Jihoon's shoulder as I compliment him, I grab the bag with my other hand so I can sit on the swing. “We're so weird.”
“That's the fun part of us.” Jihoon chuckles as he slowly pushes himself on the swing. “However, happy Valentine's day. That is your present.”
“My present?!” I asked confused. “You got me a gift?”
He nods his head and clears his throat. “I've been meaning to give it to you since this morning but never found the right time to do so.” His eyes dart from the spot in front of him to the ground, to the leaves rolling on the nearby slide, but they never meet mine. “It's nothing, really, but I hope you like it.”
With slightly trembling hands, I open the bag and get the square box inside of it. Before taking the lid off, I steal a glance at Jihoon who's still looking around himself and he looks so soft with his white woollen coat. Smiling to myself, I peek inside the box and find a silver bracelet with the words ‘I'll be the spring to your smile - J’ engraved on it.
“Do you like it?” He asks as he stands up and walks to me, to stand in front of me.
“What does this mean, Jihoon?”
“That I want to be the one to make you happy, to be the reason for every smile of yours.”
“Why?” A single word coming out of my lips, excited but also afraid of the answer that is about to come.
“Because I like you.”
“Jihoon...” I trail off, not knowing what to say.
Out of all the gifts I got today, this is surely the one that surprised me the most.
Jihoon likes me.
Lee Jihoon, my best friend, likes me.
In another occasion, or maybe in another life, I would be celebrating with a small victory dance at the news of my feelings being reciprocated but right at this moment, I can't. I really can't do anything at all.
When did he start liking me since until last week he's been together with Chanyeol? Did he lie to him or is he lying to me? Is he confused about his feelings and mistook our friendship for something else?
A train of questions is running inside my head and it's so fast that I can't catch it up. Everything feels so blurry and I don't feel like I can really wrap my mind around it. Is it really happening or am I imagining all of it?
Jihoon is looking at me with expectant eyes, waiting for me to say something. But what can I say, though?
My hearts is protesting against my mind, yelling at me so that I can tell Jihoon the truth. It wants me to say that I realised that I like him too, that I want him in my future, that I want his hand to hold on the path of our life. I really wish I could tell him all of this, that I don't care about the rest as long as it's him and me, however, it would be too selfish.
First of all, I have to think about Chanyeol and the rumours. The boy would turn into a beast if he came to know about this and it would only give credits to the people who are calling me a whore behind my back, saying that it was my fault if those two broke up. Despite all the wrong he did in the past, Chanyeol would be seen as the victim and I'd end up being the bad guy. I wouldn't stand this, not when he made Jihoon go to hell, not mentioning all the boys he seduced and threw away once he got bored of them. Yes, maybe he truly cared and loved Jihoon and maybe the breakup really took a big toll on him, but he can't be victimised when he's only having a taste of his own medicine.
Second, Wonwoo. He's my boyfriend, my feelings for him are still here and they can't disappear overnight nor I can pretend they don't exist. I love Wonwoo, the way he takes care of me, the way we click and just everything about him. Even if I like Jihoon too, Wonwoo is the kind of person I always dreamed of, my prince charming. He makes me feel loved, special and I'm so grateful for it. I truly love him from the depths of my heart and I can't ignore it.
Third, the band. If I tell Jihoon the truth about my feelings, not only Wonwoo will get hurt but the whole Jeonghan's bitches could be compromised. A fight might break out between the two and ruin their career now that it may take off for real. They've been dreaming and waiting for this moment since who knows how long and who am I to take it away from them? The future of seven people is at stake and, again, this stake is way too high to be reckless, to ignore the consequences of my actions. They deserve to fly high but they can't do that if I open my heart to Jihoon.
As I am about to answer, raindrops start falling from the sky. Jihoon was right about the rain, he’s always right about everything. It's a thin but persistent rain and while I'm distracted by the sound of the drops hitting the nearby slide, he takes my hand and asks, “Will you be my Valentine?”
Jihoon’s point of view
The pace of the rain is fastening as time flows. It's pouring but neither of us seems to be bothered by it as we don't move from our places.
Soonyoung is still sitting on the swing while I'm standing in front of him, intensely looking into his eyes for the first time this night.
After dropping that bomb, I expected him to throw a fit, to yell at me to get lost and don't appear in front of him ever again. I would've understood him because I think I would react that way if someone who I considered a best friend for the past six months or so, confessed to me on Valentine's day. However, all I can see in his eyes is confusion and hesitation, which is already a big achievement for me, unless he's thinking of a gentle way to tell me to fuck off.
As we silently stare at each other, waiting for something to happen, our clothes and hair are getting drenched but we don't budge or give up. We keep on staying like that, not saying a word.
He must be in shock because it was so sudden and it hasn't been long enough since I've broken up with Chanyeol so he must be even more confused as to why I am suddenly confessing, also knowing that he has a boyfriend. Maybe I didn't choose the right time but I can't do anything about it.
I know that he's dating Wonwoo, that he loves him and that I can't be as good as him, but I like him. I like him to the point I'm doing this, risking our everything for a confession. I've pictured all the possible scenarios in my head, getting ready for the worst and for the highly-probable rejection, but I had to do it.
I've been dying inside as I watched him being happy with Wonwoo, showing him all the sides I loved the most: his being grumpy when he's way too hungry or sleepy to function; his being stubborn when he sets his mind onto something; how adorable he is when he turns into a little kid who needs care and cuddles until he feels better and how he denies all the things he did before so he can come off as a grown manly man who doesn't know what cuddles are; his being cute and innocent that activates this motherly instinct inside of me, making me want to protect him from all the bad things that could come across in his life.
I've been dying to be the reason for all of his smiles as they never fail to make my heart stop beating and make me lose my breath.
I would like to be the only one in his eyes, too, the one he thinks about when he wakes up and the one he dreams of when he goes to sleep.
I would like to be the one coming to his mind when his favourite song comes on shuffle, the one who he's nervous to meet for a date and for whom he dresses up to impress, even though he doesn't need that because he could wear his pyjamas and he would still have all of my heart.
I would be the one spoiling him, buying him all the things he wants to eat, taking him to all of his favourite places or to the ones he hasn't been yet, like Busan that we promised to visit together as soon as we could.
I would like to do so many things for him, like being his shoulder to cry on when he's sad, the friend to smile with when he's happy, the buddy he needs when he'll feel like getting crazy and drunk.
In other words, I would like to be the one by his side for the rest of our lives but is it possible when all of the odds are against me? Is it foolish to hope that something between us will change because of a sudden confession made under the rain?
“Soonyoung, I asked you something,” I say, walking closer to him until there are only a few centimetres left between us and with his hand still in mine. “Will you be my Valentine?”
He gulps down, pupils shaking still not sure about what to do. “Since when did you like me?”
“I cannot fix on the hour, or the spot, or the look or the words, which laid the foundation. It is too long ago. I was in the middle before I knew that I had begun.”
“You're quoting Pride and Prejudice.” He points out and at that, I smile at how he could recognise the quote right away.
I nod my head, my eyes still fixed in his. “Because I feel just like Mr Darcy. I don't know when I exactly started feeling something for you, but it happened. When I found out, I was already head over heels for you. I probably am way too deep into you and I don't know if I can get out nor if I want to.”
“But why telling me if you know that I am with Wonwoo?”
“Because I couldn’t hide it anymore. I've kept this in for so long to the point I thought I was about to go crazy.” And it's true. I will probably regret all of this later but I had to let it finally go. “So, will you accept my heart?”
Again, silence sets between us and no one dares to move, not even the wind is blowing anymore. That's until Soonyoung puts his other hand on mine, gently rubbing circles on its back with his thumb. “I...can't.”
At that, my heart drops and breaks into a billion pieces. No matter how many times I imagined this rejection, nothing really prepared me for it. It still hurts like a bitch because of that stupid tiny hope I held on to until the very end. The smile on my face falters and my eyes are brimming with tears as I watch Soonyoung standing up, my hand still in his.
“I'm sorry but I can't. I have a boyfriend and you're mine and his best friend.” He squeezes my hand as he speaks. “I love you as a friend and...I think we're better off as such. Would I sound too selfish if I asked you to stay as we are now?”
“It is selfish.” Soonyoung's expression changes into one of worry as the words leave my mouth. “But I'll try letting my feelings go. Just give me some time to get over it,” I say, thinking that stabbing myself one hundred times would've been less painful.
“Thank you, Jihoon.” His lips lift in a tight smile as he lets my hand go. “Let's go home now or else we will catch a cold.”
“Yeah, let's go.”
Outside of the park, he kisses my forehead and runs towards his house, leaving me alone in the rain.
The tears that threatened to spill, finally fall from my eyes, getting mixed to the water coming from the night sky.
My heart hurts so bad and I wish I could scream until my lungs and throat burn, I could cry until my head feels like exploding, I could run until my limbs fall off. I would do anything to lessen the pain of these broken hopes and heart. But I know that none of that would actually help.
Nothing can heal these scars but time and distance.
I wish so bad I could disappear from here, to run somewhere far away until all of these stupid feelings would go away, however, I can't. I promised Soonyoung that nothing would change between us, that I can still be his best friend.
One will think that, once again, I've been an idiot and maybe I really am someone who doesn't learn from his mistakes but there was something about the way Soonyoung spoke, the way he looked at me as he was holding onto my hand that made me accept his request of being friends. This means that I will have to push all of my feelings in the furthest corner of my heart but, no matter how hard it will be, I can do this much as long as it will keep me by Soonyoung's side.
I feel like, one day, something will happen and it will be worth the wait and the pain.
Notes:
First of all, happy holidays to y'all! I hope you're having a great time and you're properly resting during these days, eating some good food too!
I'm sorry it took two months to update the story but things have been bad and busy in November so I got to write only from the beginning of December. Don't worry, the situation is better but I will still be busy since my exam session is coming. However, I thought that instead of long-ass chapters, I can post shorter ones so that I don't miss my monthly deadline with you guys. I hope I can keep this promise!!
One thing that I can keep for sure is the angst.
I swear, it's for plot purposes, I don't like giving you this prolonged angst and it will end at some point. But, for now, we need it.
A positive note is that we can finally celebrate about Jihoon breaking up with Chanyeol! Plus, you know what they say, confessing is risky but at least it makes the other person aware of your feelings for them so that things may change in the future. Who knows what is going to happen now that Soonyoung knows that Jihoon likes him too hehehe.Last thing, I hope this year ends in the best way possible and that next year is going to be an amazing one! Thank you for sticking with me for a whole year of this fiction and I also hope we can be together till the end of the story!
Love you all!!!PS: Yes, the break up part was inspired by Seventeen's I Don't Know hehehe
Chapter 31
Notes:
Helloooooooooooo!! I bet you thought you'd seen the last of me but I pulled a Wei Wuxian and came back from the dead.
I don't want to hold you up here, so I'll see you at the end of the chapter.I'm sorry for the long wait and I hope you can still enjoy the chapter T-T
Ps: The two hoobaes mentioned later in the chapter are Gugudan's Mina and former Pristin's Nayoung.
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Soonyoung’s point of view
Another day of school has ended and, with it, another day without seeing Jihoon.
Things have been like this for a week now and even our classmates started seriously worrying about him not coming to school, especially because, when they asked us, neither Seokmin nor I could tell them where he was gone.
Truth be told, I do have an idea as of why he hasn’t shown up but it’s just a random thought, a conjecture that gradually and dangerously turned into overthinking.
‘ What if the reason behind him going MIA was what happened between us? What if he was just sick again? Or worse, what if he had suddenly left without saying anything to anyone?’
After all, it’s not like Joshua or I have been to his house to check if he was still there.
The radio club has been hectic and I’ve been helping my mother with packing her things for an imminent business trip meanwhile Joshua had some extra shifts at the library and then went on dates with Seokmin. Even if Joshua saw him when practising with the band, it’s not like he told me. I guess he assumed I knew Jihoon’s whereabouts.
For the past days, my mind has been filled with all kind of thoughts about him and what has possibly happened to make him skip school. It was so cramped up in my head that there was almost no room left for anything else.
The result was me turning into a walking mess, ready to snatch Mingyu’s primacy as the clumsiest person in the world, the WrecKing.
Why? Because all I’ve been doing for days was being out of my mind, doing things without really focusing on them, resulting in me getting involved in all kinds of minor accidents.
Poor Seokmin had been there to witness most of it, like the time I crashed face-first into a lamppost on the way home because I was too busy thinking and kicking a pebble instead of looking at what was ahead of me or when, for three days in a row, I almost threw the chopsticks inside the garbage bin instead of putting them in the sink.
Since my distraction was slowly reaching a concerning stage, Seokmin told Joshua about it and he, too, turned into my guardian angel. They united to protect me from myself in the times I was with them, also getting to the extent of reminding me to take care of my basic needs like eating or drinking water since I quite often forgot about it.
Feeling like I was only burdening them, more than once I tried to reassure them by saying things like “Don’t worry, I’m sure I will snap out of it the moment I’ll have to focus on the spring festival.” Words that I desperately wanted to believe. But when I became convinced that it was going to be okay, I soon realised I was only fooling myself.
Today is finally the afternoon before the festival and, to set up our booths in the courtyard, Mrs Kim let us leave our classroom a couple of hours earlier than we were supposed to. She said she knew how painfully long it takes to do this kind of job and dismissed us with a smile and a “fighting”. Despite being astonished by the change of demeanour of our usually strict teacher, everyone had left in a hurry, mainly because afraid of Mrs Kim changing her mind or finding out we were pranked. However, when all of the students reached the assigned spot for their booth, no one dared to slack off, thinking that the faster they did the job, the faster they would go back home and get ready for the real thing.
The radio club had a pretty simple theme since our only duty is to announce the schedule of the different booths and be there if people needed more information about the different available activities. In the afternoon there would be no need for it, but a couple of hoobaes insisted on keeping it open as a way to practice their broadcasting skills. At first, the president was against the idea but then he gave his permission because, after all, they were the ones taking our place starting from next year.
Of course, this year too, Seokmin and I are in charge of the booth. We decided to go for a simple news anchor-like style with a fancy wooden countertop and a couple of professional-looking chairs behind it. On the front part of the countertop, the hoobaes found funny the idea of putting a banner reading “Seoksoon Talk! News Booth” and some of our best derp face printed on it. Without even thinking about it twice, we agreed with it because it was in every way Seoksoon-style. The rest of the equipment, like the console, the microphones, the speakers, isn’t something that can be left outdoor at night since humidity can ruin it or someone may even steal it. So another duty of ours was to come early at least one hour before the opening of the gates to the “public” to bring what we needed, set it up and check, with the help of the music team, if everything was working properly.
Seeing people running back and forth in the yard, screaming and laughing as a banner comically falls on someone’s head or as someone gets paint on their faces, makes me realise how something as ordinary as this can put everyone in such a great mood.
After the gloomy days of the exams, the school came back to a new life as some of the students animated the hallways with their chit-chats about the festival, about bringing their friends to join their club’s activity and some were even wondering if, with this spring atmosphere in the air, they could finally score a date with their crush.
Although watching people being this excited had never failed to put a smile on my face, I couldn’t feel any of their spirit. I wasn’t really in the headspace for it.
All I had in my mind, all I have in my mind is how Jihoon’s sparkly eyes turned into ones of shattered hopes as the words “I love you as a friend” came out of my mouth. That moment alone, that shift in his gaze, made me realise that all of the pain I felt in my life was nothing compared to how much it hurts seeing the light in the eyes of your loved one slowly fading because of the shadow cast by the pain.
And the worst part is that you have no one to blame for that shadow but yourself.
“Watch out!” Seokmin yells as the hammer I mindlessly placed on the countertop is about to lose balance and fall right on my foot.
I quickly grab the tool before it could crush one of my toes and put it back on the wooden surface, this time checking that it’s not too close to the edge. Wanting to thank Seokmin, I turn around and watch him sigh for what I think it’s the umpteenth time of this week alone.
“Thank you and I’m sorry,” I say with an apologetic smile.
“You’re saying those words again.” Seokmin hits the nail in the upper corner of the banner for one last time before turning around. “Look, I didn’t want to ask because I was waiting for you to open up.” From his tone, it is clear that he’s slightly upset. “What happened to you and why are you bottling your feelings? I’m worried.”
Here it is. The question I’ve been trying so hard to avoid.
‘What should I tell him now?’
Lying is definitely not an option.
Seokmin doesn’t deserve this since he’s my best friend and took care of me so dearly from the moment I stepped foot in this school. However, I’m so scared of laying all the truth out.
‘Will he understand me? Is he going to be disappointed in me? Angry because I love two people at the same time?’
Closing my eyes, I take a deep breath. Even if I’m afraid, even if he’s going to be mad, I owe him an explanation. “Something did happen but I can’t tell you here.”
“Too many people who could eavesdrop?” He stands up to put his tools back in the box. He sees me nodding and adds, “Let’s go to my house then. Did you bring your duffel bag with your change of clothes to stay over the night?”
“Yup, they’re in Joshua’s car. Are you sure I won’t bother?” I ask, playing with my fingers, suddenly feeling guilty as I keep on troubling Seokmin. I’ve been nothing but a burden to him and I hate it.
“You’re not and you know it. Mom will be happy to have you again at our house. It’s been so long since the last time you slept over.” He smiled and ruffled my hair.
“It’s because you keep coming to my house so you can be closer to Joshua hyung.”
“That’s not true.”
“Then why are you blushing?” I point at his cheeks, which are slowly turning red, and chuckle.
He quickly covers his face with his hands and a muffled “I am not!” can be heard. He then coughs and fixes his hair by shaking his head. In the most serious tone he can pull, he says, “If you’re done here, let’s go.”
After a quick stop in the school’s parking lot to greet Joshua and take my bag, we go to Seokmin’s house.
The first thing we do is changing into our comfortable pyjamas, then we go downstairs where Seokmin’s mother is already waiting for us with two aprons in her hands, silently asking for help with cooking dinner. Seokmin and I exchange a glance and, knowing we cannot run away as we would need to zoom by Mrs Lee’s side to get to the door, we reluctantly take the piece of cloth from her, wear it and go straight to the kitchen counter.
As we cook, Seokmin’s mother asks what are we going to do at the festival. That was a big mistake for her because Seokmin and I immediately start with a detailed explanation of the activities scheduled for the next two days and even try some of our banters for the morning announcements.
Mrs Lee will never get used to the amazing chemistry we have and she keeps saying that we’re a match made in heaven but we tell her that this is nothing compared to when Seungkwan is with us too. The three of us make wonders together.
Dinner time is quieter considering that we’re busy stuffing our mouths with food but still, there’s room for some jokes which don’t fail to make the Lees burst into a fit of laughter. When we’re done eating, Seokmin’s mother shoves a box of cookies into our hands and sends us upstairs.
“So, what happened?” Seokmin asks as soon as he closes the door behind him, not even waiting for me to sit on his bed.
“It’s a long story so sit down first.”
And he does, sitting close to the bedpost, putting a pillow behind his head. “Hand me the cookies and you can start.”
I do as he asks and sit next to him, legs crossed and eyes focused on my hands resting on my lap. “Do you remember when a while ago Jihoon and I went to Vinyl Art without Chanyeol knowing?”
“I do. Why?”
“Well, that day I had a kind of epiphany.” I close my eyes, recalling that exact image of Jihoon, the peaceful expression painted on his face with the colours the sunset cast on his fair skin. “I realised I like him...as something more than a friend.”
Seokmin coughs, almost choking on the cookie he was happily munching on. I hand him the bottle of water that was on the bedside table and after gulping a quarter of it, he shouts a “WHAT?”
“Yeah.”
“How?”
“I don’t know. It’s just that he whispered the words ‘I love you’ as he was singing along to a song and it was at that moment I knew I was fucked up.”
“Couldn’t it be that it was just because of the way the whole atmosphere made you feel?” Seokmin asks, putting the box of cookies away.
I gently shake my head, the hint of a smile on my lips. “I knew from the way my heart shook that it was love.”
“Then why didn’t you tell me?” The tone of his voice is sweet but at the same time laced with so much worry that I feel guilty of having kept this hidden from him.
“I was scared of saying it out loud because I was convinced that once it was out in the world, I couldn’t hide it anymore. I wanted to believe that I was just too deep into the moment we were sharing but when the day after, I was in my room, thinking about us, I came to the realisation that I’ve been liking him for so long but was too dumb to realise,” I play with the hem of my shirt, still not confident enough to look at Seokmin.
“What about Wonwoo?”
“This is one of the problems. I love him. I’d only fool myself if I said the contrary. He’s the kind of person I always imagined to have by my side, the kind of man I wanted to spend my life with.”
“But? I know there’s more you want to say.” Seokmin puts his hand on my shoulder to encourage me.
“But maybe he’s not what I need.”
“What do you mean?”
“You know, wanting and needing are two separate things.” I shift on the bed to sit in front of Seokmin, taking the box from his side of the bed. I grab one of the cookies and put it in front of his eyes. “This cookie, do you want it?”
“Yes, I want it.”
“But do you need it? You just had dinner.”
“No, I don’t...but I want it anyway. Give it to me.” He snatches the cookie from my hand and takes a big bite from it.
“That’s what I mean. Wonwoo to me is like that cookie for you. I want him because I like him but he may be not what I need. When I’m with him I feel giddy and in love but at the same time I keep on being scared of this happiness suddenly disappearing; I keep on thinking that I might be only living a dream that will end once I open my eyes. It’s like our relationship it’s a bubble that may burst at any moment.”
“What about Jihoon, then?” He asks before eating the last bite of the cookie and shaking the crumbs off of his shirt.
“Jihoon…” I pause, a small pang at the heart as I think of where he and I are right now, how what we had may be ruined forever. “Jihoon is like the water after a long walk in the summer heat; like the sun on a winter day to warm you up and the soft breeze on a spring day to cool you down; like a holiday after a long and stressing month of studying. In other words, he’s what you want and need. A best friend, a partner in crime, a safe and comfortable home to return to at the end of the day. He’s all of that and even more.”
Seokmin comes closer to me and puts both of his hands on my shoulders. At that, I lift my head and find him staring intensely at me. “My friend, I know that you probably don’t want to hear this but...you’re totally whipped for him.”
“I know.” Escaping from Seokmin’s hold, I bury my face in the pillow and groan as he pats my back.
When I feel Seokmin’s hand retreating, I turn my face around to look at him. He thinks about something for a while before asking, “But if Wonwoo is not what you need, why are you still with him?”
Expecting this question from him, I sigh and go back to sitting in the middle of the bed to, once again, face him. “Because in the end, I still love him. I can’t ignore it and I don’t want to hurt him. He has suffered so much in the past. I don’t want to leave another wound when the past ones are just starting to heal.”
“Have you thought that, however, your heart will long for Jihoon while you’re with Wonwoo and, at some point, he will notice that you’re not totally there for him? This will end up with both of you suffering.”
“Actually, the three of us,” I say in a low voice, averting my eyes from Seokmin’s.
“Wait? Three? Don’t tell me Jihoon is the third one.”
Keeping my eyes trained on my lap, I nod. “This is actually what has been troubling me.” I take another deep breath with my eyes closed and then spit the words “Jihoon confessed to me” as fast as I could, hoping that Seokmin wouldn’t faint from the overload of information.
“HE WHAT?” He screeches. “JIHOON CONF-” I shove a cookie in his mouth before he could finish yelling the sentence.
“Yes. On Valentine’s day, when Wonwoo was out of town, he brought me a gift and told me he likes me.”
“Is this some sort of drama? Do you want to sell the rights to TvN? They make really good dramas these days.”
I punch him on the chest. “This is not the right time to joke. I’m being serious.”
“You’re right but it really feels like a story from a drama or a webtoon.” Once again, he shakes the crumbs off of him and the bed. “So, Jihoon likes you too.”
I nod without saying another word.
“How did you feel when he confes-?”
“On cloud nine,” I say before Seokmin could even finish asking. “I felt like my heart would burst because I knew that my love is reciprocated.”
“However, judging from how you’ve been behaving, I guess it didn’t end well.”
“How could it end well? When I like another man too? When surrendering to his love would mean giving credit to those awful rumours going around our school? When an ‘I like you too’ could mean trouble for my friends?” My voice gets quieter with each question and I can feel my eyes brimming with tears.
“Trouble for your friends? Do you mean the band?”
“Yeah. If I accepted Jihoon’s heart, it would mean that Wonwoo would then lash out at Jihoon and things in the band won’t be the same as before. Everything will be ruined because of me.” Voice breaking as I try to choke down the sobs, I take a deep breath before saying “I asked him to still be friends and fuck...I can never forget how his expression fell. I broke both of our hearts but his crushed the loudest. It was the only thing I could hear after the words left my mouth. He told me I was being selfish but that he was going to try getting over his feelings. Seeing how he hasn’t been coming to school, I started thinking that maybe he doesn’t really want to be my friend again.”
Seokmin wipes a tear streaming down my face and I expected him to scold me again, to tell me that I needed to stand up for my feelings. However, he tucks me in his embrace and says, “Don’t cry, Soonie. I still think that you’re dumb because you’re letting yourself be the one suffering but I can see that you’re doing this to protect what they hold dear. And let me tell you, it takes courage to do this, to let whom we hold dear go and see them being happy without us.” At that, incapable of holding my tears any longer, I bawl my eyes out, face buried in Seokmin’s chest and hands gripping at the fabric of his shirt. “You’re so brave, Soonyoung, and I’m sure that everything is going to end well.”
Sniffling, I lift my head a little to ask, “How can you be sure when I don’t even know if he wants to speak to me again? What if he doesn’t show up anymore?”
“Letting him go doesn’t necessarily mean that you have to lose him.” Seokmin wipes my tears away with the sleeve of his pyjamas before carding one of his hands in my hair. “I know you and I saw the things you did in the past so you wouldn’t lose him because of Chanyeol. I trust you and your stubbornness in finding a way to fight for him now,” he says with a fond smile, which doesn’t fail at calming me down. “As of him showing up or not, we will know tomorrow at the festival.”
“THE FESTIVAL!” My eyes go wide as I look for my phone to check the time. “It’s so late and we need to wake up early! Why didn’t you stop me from talking?”
“Because you needed to let it out and I don’t care about losing some sleep if it means that I can see my best friend a little bit less troubled!”
“You’re really the best, Seok. I would be lost without you and Joshua hyung.” I jump on him for a hug but end up knocking him down on the bed.
“Then why did you just pull a wrestling move on me?”
“It was supposed to be a hug.”
“No, you wanted to kill me.”
“I didn’t!”
“Come here, let me hug you in the same way you hugged me, then.” Seokmin turns around blocking my legs with his and locking my head in a loose hold.
Having struggled for a while to break free from his grip, we look at each other and laugh out loud before wishing ourselves a good night and drifting off in those deserved few hours of sleep.
“Are you looking for something exciting to do?”
“I do!”
“Do you want to feel the adrenaline rush?”
“I do!”
“Do you like getting prizes?”
“I do!”
“Then I know the right place for you!”
“Really?”
“Of course, I do,” Seokmin says into the microphone with a smug tone. “It’s the C6 booth where you can shoot at empty cans to win wonderful prizes! Dolls, plushies, food coupons and a lot more!”
“But hurry up!” My voice louder than I intended it to be. “This booth and all the others will close in an hour for the lunch break which will be followed by the afternoon games!”
“We will be back later for the last greeting and if you need more info about the booths or the other activities held during this festival, you can find us at booth C17.”
“Even though we’re hungry, I promise we won’t eat you alive, so feel free to come to us if you have any question!”
With that said, we switch the mics off and turn towards Mina, a cute hoobae from our radio club. She came here running a while ago, yelling that she had some good tea to spill about what was happening with the music club. Since we were getting ready for the last announcement, we told her to wait a moment and she has been fidgeting behind us for almost ten minutes now.
“Can I talk?” Mina asks, her eyes big and sparkling as she waits for our answer.
“What happened?” Seokmin stands up so she can sit on his chair.
Mina gives him a shy smile and fixes a strand of hair behind her ear. “I was guiding a couple to the cotton candy booth when I walked past the one prepared by the music club. The atmosphere was so weird and you know why? Because the only two people standing there were Chanyeol and Jihoon. They didn’t dare to look at each other but I could see Chanyeol stealing glances towards Jihoon’s direction and only a fool couldn’t notice that he is still hurt.” Mina sighs “They looked so happy together! I wonder what happened that led them to break up.”
‘So Jihoon is here…’
Seokmin’s eyes shift from the girl before him to me. He watches me gulping and feeling rather uneasy about the topic so he tries to put Mina back on track with her story. “I think that we shouldn’t dwell on it, it’s their relationship so it doesn’t concert us.” His voice is sweet just like his smile and Mina slightly blushes. “Is this what you wanted to tell us?”
“No, it wasn’t that.” She shakes her head, realising she was getting lost in her train of thoughts. “When I left the couple, I went back to check on them and I noticed there were a lot of girls crowding to where Jihoon was. They were shouting all kind of things, from how handsome he looks today to confess their love for him. The audacity of one of them, though...woah. She went to grab Jihoon by the wrist and asked him to date her, telling him to forget about that asshole and petty ex-boyfriend of his. She did that while staring directly at Chanyeol who was right beside them.” Upon hearing that, Seokmin and I can’t contain our shock.
“IS SHE OUT OF HER MIND?” Seokmin screeched. “DOES SHE THINK THAT BEING MEAN WILL BENEFIT HER?”
I put a hand on his shoulder, trying to calm him down. However, I can’t help but feeling anger bubbling inside of me as well.
Yes, Chanyeol may be mean and petty but he has feelings too and she has no rights whatsoever to say that, to hurt him even more than he already is.
“What happened then?”
“I was about to sprint towards her and drag her away but I couldn’t even take a step that Jihoon had swatted her hand away and was clenching his fists on his sides. It was clear as day that he was doing his best to contain himself but the girl had to say ‘What? Was I wrong? Isn’t it the reason why you broke up with him?’ It was at that moment that something clicked inside of Jihoon and he snapped. He lost all of his composure and yelled ‘What do you know, uh? Why do you care about something that doesn’t concern you at all? An asshole? Petty? You’re the one being an asshole and petty, using your words to hurt another person and why? To woo me? Do you really think that this is the way to win me over? Oh, you couldn’t be more wrong. I don’t want to see you ever again but before that, you’d better apologise to Chanyeol.’ The girl seemed hesitant, even offended, at first but she eventually apologised and left. Jihoon turned around to look at Chanyeol and gave him a small smile which the taller returned before going back to manage the queue at their booth.” Mina didn’t leave any detail out of her story, even trying her best to impersonate both the girl and Jihoon.
No one talks for a while, still processing what we’ve just heard from our hoobae.
I can’t help but feel guilty, as if all of this was nothing but my fault.
If I didn’t befriend Jihoon, if I didn’t get closer to him none of this would’ve happened. They would still be together, still going on dates and, what is most important, they would still be happy. That’s because without me around, Chanyeol wouldn’t have had any reason to be jealous, to be scared of someone taking Jihoon away from him, he would’ve been carefree just like he was at the beginning of their relationship. Without me bugging him, Jihoon wouldn’t have gotten confused about our friendship and would’ve focused on Chanyeol only.
If I just stood still, if only I minded my own business, things would’ve probably been better.
Noticing how the expression on my face had fallen, Seokmin breaks the silence.
“Jihoon may have snapped but he was right. Not a single thing he said was wrong” He sighs and shakes his head. “I just hope he’s not blaming himself too much for this.”
Head hanging low and with a feeble voice, I start saying, “Yeah...because it’s not his fault...it’s-”
“It’s no one’s fault.” Seokmin interrupts me, knowing exactly what I was going to say next. “Breaking up or falling out of love is nothing new. It happened to a lot of couples before them and it will happen again and again. It’s pretty normal for people to rush into a relationship only to then realise that it was only infatuation or that they hate a certain habit of their significant other. In that case, what can they do? They break up and then move on because they come to realise they just weren’t meant to be together. This is what happened to them too. We don’t need to know the reason, we need to know that they broke up and that it will take time but they will eventually be happy with their own new life.”
“Sunbaenim, you’re really cool!” Mina gives two thumbs up to Seokmin. “I have goosebumps all over my arms.” She rubs one of her hands up and down her arm as if to prove her words.
“What? There’s nothing extraordinary about what I said.” He puts his hands in his pockets and looks away with a smug-ish smile.
Seokmin is right. It happens all the time. But before I could overthink this whole situation again, I shoot up from my chair and clap my hands. “Time to go back to work! We can’t slack off!”
Mina looks at the watch on her wrist, eyes going wide. “Oh my god! I have to run. Nayoung will scold me for leaving her alone.” She rushes around the counter and bows to us, before sprinting away.
Seokmin gets close and pats my back as I still look a bit down. “Let’s make our last announcements so we can go and have some fun later, shall we?”
I nod, a small smile tugging at the corner of my lips.
Seokmin lightly squeezes my shoulder before going to sit on his chair and putting his headphones back.
Once we turn the mic on and my smile finally matches Seokmin’s, all of the worries seems to be gone and I tell myself to enjoy this peace of mind until it lasts.
“This has been all for today!” Seokmin brightly says.
“Yahaaaaaa” I shout as loud as I can while trying not to be too close to the microphone. “I hope you enjoyed being in our company because we surely enjoyed yours!”
“If you’re sad our show has ended and you already miss us, then you don’t have to worry!”
“We will be back tomorrow morning with more energy and funnier jokes!”
“But we will miss you anyway!” Seokmin’s tone changes into a cutely upset one.
“Aww, so sweet, our Seokminie.” I coo at him. “Well, let’s wrap this up, shall we?”
"Seoksoon talk, Soonseok talk, everybody talk, kakaotalk!” Seokmin and I shout in unison. “Thank you so much for being with us and we will see you later at the playground!”
I was busy turning the microphones off and putting some of the gear away while Seokmin was texting the hoobaes so they could come and take over the radio show when I see Seungcheol and Jeonghan drawing closer to our booth.
“Hyung! Good morning!” I squeal and wave at them with a big smile plastered on my face.
“Good morning guys!” Seungcheol says as he leans with his right arm on the counter, body sideways and facing Jeonghan.
Seokmin raises his head upon hearing his voice and he’s a little bit surprised at the sight of the couple. “Seungcheol hyung, Jeonghan hyung, did you just come here?”
“Not really, we had a little tour of the festival and grabbed something to eat before coming to your booth.” Jeonghan has both of his arms dangling on our side of the counter since he’s sprawled on it.
“Speaking of which, did you eat already?” Seungcheol asks not really focusing on us but looking at somewhere in the distance.
“We didn’t have the time. A little problem took away most of our break-time and since we were doing announcements we couldn’t ask our club members to bring us some food.” As if it was waiting for its moment to shine, Seokmin’s stomach rumbles.
“You’re lucky you have us.” A low-pitched voice coming from behind me chimes into our conversation. At that moment, I feel a pair of strong arms sneaking around my waist and I don’t need to turn around to know that it’s Wonwoo. He pushes me towards his chest and I kind of melt when I can feel that familiar warmth radiating from him.
“So, so lucky.” Another familiar voice says. I peek at my side and see Joshua, wrapping Seokmin’s shoulders with his arm.
I turn around in Wonwoo’s hold to look at his face. “What are you guys doing here?”
Wonwoo leans in to peck my lips and pats my head. “We came to pick you up so that we could go together to the playground.”
“And since Seokmin avoided my question about if he had eaten or not, I supposed you guys didn’t so we brought you lunch.” Joshua lifts his arm, revealing the black bag he was holding in his hand. Seungcheol forcibly drags Jeonghan away from the counter so that Joshua could lay the various take-away tinfoil containers on it.
“But we need to pack some of the equipment first. Then there are some students coming to replace us for the afternoon.” Seokmin fights against Joshua who’s already pushing his boyfriend to sit on the chair.
“We’ll do it for you and Jeonghan can entertain the students in the meantime. Now, sit and eat.” Joshua finally wins the fight and puts Seokmin on the chair, moving a bowl with spicy tteokbokki in front of him.
“You should hurry up and fill your stomachs before Mingyu comes and eats everything,” Jeonghan says with his eyes trained on the screen of his phone, clearly busy texting. “Seungkwan said they’ll be here in five minutes.”
“Did they go to pick Jihoon up?” Seungcheol asks right when I was eating a piece of kimbap and I almost choke on my food. I quickly grab a bottle of water and empty half of it to save myself from suffocating.
“Yes, they were going to his booth and, apparently, they met Jihoon along the way. He was already about to leave. Mingyu and Hansol had to convince him to stay here with us.” Jeonghan summarises the texts he got from our friend.
‘Doesn’t he want to be here because of what happened with Chanyeol? But probably is because he knows I’ll be here and he doesn’t want to see me, right?’
I sigh, trying to ignore the pain I feel inside at the thought of Jihoon purposely avoiding me.
“Soons, is everything okay?” Joshua asks, placing his hand on my shoulder and squeezing it. “Did something happen?”
Not knowing what to answer but knowing I couldn’t say what was on my mind, I decided to stay quiet and look down at the food in front of me. I can feel all of the guys’ eyes on me and thankfully, Seokmin understands the situation.
Shifting the focus on himself, Seokmin asks, “You didn’t hear what happened, hyung?” Joshua shakes his head, confirming that he indeed knows nothing. “Jihoon and Chanyeol were managing the music club booth and a girl caused quite the commotion. She confessed to Jihoon while insulting Chanyeol and Jihoon stood up for Chanyeol, yelling at the girl.”
“What a bitch!” Jeonghan slaps his hand on the counter, hitting a pair of wooden chopsticks and making them fly away. Seungcheol patiently picks them up and throws them into the nearest bin. “My son did the right thing, though.”
“He’s not your son,” Wonwoo says once he finished packing everything and I jump a little on my chair, having forgotten for a while that he was here. “But I agree with you, hyung. If Jihoon snapped, the girl must’ve said some mean things.”
“Yeah...he rarely reacts like that.” Seungcheol scratches the back of his head and pouts. “But I wish it didn’t happen. I’m sure it ruined his mood.” He sighs. “Jihoon was so excited to spend some time with us again since, you know, his relatives visiting his family had him being busy to the point he couldn’t hang out with us.”
Seungcheol’s words hit me hard, causing a wave of shock that sends my brain in tilt. “Oh, so that’s why he hasn’t been around,” I say out loud without even realising it.
“You didn’t know? Weird...” Wonwoo exclaims. Seungcheol and Jeonghan exchange a knowing look and I start sweating, scared they could find out the truth.
“Jihoon and I didn’t text that much these days. The festival kept me busy so I didn’t have the time.” I fake a smile, trying to look as convincing as I possibly could.
They seem to have bought it since none of them says another word about the matter. On the contrary, Seungcheol even takes this as a chance to change the topic.
While everyone is busy talking and joking as we wait for the rest of the group, I slowly find myself tuning the boys’ voices out to follow my own train of thoughts.
Jihoon wasn’t avoiding me.
This thought alone made me feel relieved, as if I just took a breath of fresh air after being locked for way too long in a room with no windows or doors and where the air had become stale. Overthinking his actions brought me to take a step back, then another one and another until I eventually found myself in that room filled with fears and insecurities that pinned me to the ground, their only purpose being slowly suffocating me. At first, I tried my best to get out of here but it eventually got to the point where fighting against these fears felt so ridiculous that I let them win, let them convince me it was my fault if Jihoon wasn’t around, that I was indeed being too selfish and harsh, that I should’ve not only let him go but also lose him, let him flee from my side because he doesn’t deserve any of this.
Jihoon deserves someone who can make him happy, who can cherish him and protect him, making him feel safe. Someone who can love his best qualities and love his flaws even more. Someone who can love him and only him.
All I’ve been doing was hurting him with my words and actions. So how could I even remotely think I can be that person for Jihoon?
I’m no good for him and probably never will.
“Jeonghan hyuuuuuung!” Seungkwan’s yell breaches through the spiral of thoughts inside of my head. I shoot my head up and see him running to then latch on Jeonghan’s arm. Mingyu is running too and almost trips in his own feet, all of this to reach the counter and grab a piece of kimbap which he inhales in the blink of an eye. Hansol and Jihoon, on the other hand, are still far behind. Hansol is excitedly talking about something and Jihoon is looking at him in awe, a smile on his face that reaches his ears, making it clear how much he adores the boy.
When they’re almost at our booth, Jihoon turns his head towards us and our eyes meet for the first time after that night. His smile falters and eventually disappears, his eyes become glassy and he clenches his fists, probably wishing to be anywhere but here, to see anyone but me.
It looks as if he’s ready to run away but instead of doing that, he keeps walking towards us. The closer he gets, the more I feel overwhelmed by the veil of sadness I can see in his eyes and that he’s trying so hard to hide with the fake smile he is now sporting as he stops right before me.
“Jihoon!” Seungcheol grabs the younger and hugs him. “I’ve missed you so much!”
“I didn’t miss you, though.” But his words don’t match his actions as his arms are already wrapped around hyung’s middle.
“That’s not what you said to me and Seungcheol yesterday over the phone.” Jeonghan shoves his boyfriend away so that he too could hug Jihoon.
“I was lying.”
“Like you’re doing right now.” Jeonghan giggles and breaks the hug, ruffling Jihoon’s hair before moving away.
“Leave him alone, you know he’s a little tsundere.” Joshua chimes in as he extends a hand towards Jihoon to high-five him. The same happens with Wonwoo and Seokmin. The latter jokingly scolds his boyfriend. “Hyung, he just got here and you’re already teasing him?”
“Will they ever grow tired of it?” Jihoon asks as he shakes his head, feigning disappointment.
“Never,” The three eldest reply in chorus at which everyone laughs.
Everyone but me because, at that moment, Jihoon turns towards me and, with a soft yet sad smile, greets me. “Hi, Soons. It’s good to see you again.”
“Jihoon...have you been...doing well?”
‘What a stupid and uncomfortable question, Soonyoung! Good job.’
“Yes, I’m good.” He rubs his nape. “Actually, I’m sorry if I couldn’t text you that much but I’ve been kind of busy.”
“Oh, d-don’t worry.” I stutter. “I-I’ve been busy too.”
And, after that, an extremely awkward silence settles among the whole group. That’s because Jihoon and I don’t know what else to say to keep the conversation going and the others aren’t used to this kind of atmosphere between the two of us, so they’re probably in a state of shock.
I can’t blame them since they’ve always seen us attached to the hip, pestering each other and making infinite banter.
This, I don’t even know how to define it, is an extraordinary event but not in a positive way and the longer we remain silent, the more uncomfortable I am with knowing that I should probably do something even if I feel completely powerless.
The one breaking the silence, though, is Jeonghan who kind of grasps the situation. He repeatedly claps his hands to grab our attention. “Well, since we’re all here, should we go to the playground already?”
Joshua checks his phone and sees it’s already 2:45 in the afternoon. “We have 15 minutes left before they start. Let’s clean up and then we’re ready to go.”
“Let’s have some fun today, guys!” Seungcheol cheers followed by all of us shouting a loud “YES!”, gaining a few dirty looks by some passers-by.
The mood seems to have lifted as we all work together to clean the booth. However, I can feel a pair of eyes closely following my every move. I don’t even need to turn around to know that those eyes belong to Jeonghan and that I will soon have to make up a story as of why Jihoon and I are this awkward.
Since there was a tight schedule to follow, the moment the clock stroke 3 pm, the students hosting the event immediately told those who had gathered at the playground about the different games we were going to play.
The first one was a mix of tag and the floor is lava. They had prepared a course for us with bricks, tables and other things we could climb on. For ten minutes, the tagger could chase the other players. However, the ones chased cannot escape through the designated exit for the first five minutes of the game and they cannot run because..safety first! Since It would’ve been too difficult to catch someone without really opening their eyes, the tagger was given the “wang nuni” chance, in other words, they can keep their eyes open for 30 seconds for a maximum of three times.
It was so funny how everyone was climbing on the benches or on top of each other in a human tower to make sure that at least one of them was safe. Some others were taking the bricks away so they could stray away from the original course and fool the tagger. Of course, Seungcheol belonged to the latter. He was walking past Jihoon and the younger had stopped him, willing to form some sort of alliance to win the game but the moment they shook their hands to seal the deal, Seungcheol bent down to grab the bricks on both sides of Jihoon. He then ran away in the opposite direction. Jihoon was now an easy prey for the tagger.
At the end of the last round, everyone was talking about how they’re left with trust issues and trauma from how terrifying the “wang nuni” sounded.
After a short break to put away all of the items used for the game, we dived into the second one. The classic hide and seek with the tagger counting till thirty and then going around to catch the other players. The turn is over when the tagger catches ten people and the first one getting caught becomes the tagger in the next turn.
The fun part of this game wasn’t when the people were freed and started running around the playground while screaming in happiness, it was when someone (read Seokmin) thought the current turn had finished and so they carelessly left their hideout ending up getting caught.
The third and last group game was green light, red light in which the tagger had to make sure not to lose to avoid the penalty of a group indian bap.
Needless to say, I was the best tagger at this game because of my “cheating” skills. I made the eldest hyungs and some other people move or speak to confuse and catch them and I’ve always been a fast runner so it was easy for me to grab whoever touched my back to free the other players. However, I sucked big time when I wasn’t the tagger. Too eager to win, I would hide wherever I could in order not to be seen by the tagger and walk freely but every single time, I’d end up making a mistake that had me caught. This never failed to make people laugh so it was still a win for me.
Two hours had gone by when the time to make teams for the next games came.
And this, my dear friends, was the moment when the atmosphere shifted. Well, at least for me.
Jeonghan’s bitches decided to stick together including, of course, Hansol, Seokmin and me.
I was so excited at the idea of the ten of us playing together and having a good time despite the hyungs being overly competitive and determined to win as many rounds as we could even though the hosts told us it would be useless since there’s no final prize.
Jeonghan and Joshua hyung were already planning a way to cheat during the telepathy and the charades games meanwhile Seungcheol hyung was busy picking who he thought was the best at the musical chairs or the right sequence for the mouth-to-mouth game.
All of this plotting eventually resulted in an extremely uncomfortable situation for Jihoon and me because, willingly or not, we ended up standing right next to each other every single time.
The telepathy game went quite smooth thanks to the secret code Jeonghan had made up right before the game and the same was for the charades game. The cheating part came easy since the hosts were so busy watching the one currently doing the action that they forgot to look at those behind them who mouthed the right answer to the one in charge of guessing.
The situation was already awkward as I tried to avoid Jihoon as much as I could without being too suspicious and risking the others noticing.
Problems arose when playing the mouth-to-mouth game.
Seungcheol’s strategy was to have us lined up alternating a tall member with a shorter one so it was easier for us to pass the paper without it falling on the ground. He put Jihoon right in between Mingyu and me, doubling my burden of being towards the end of our line.
I expected Wonwoo to contest the decision and move to my place but he didn’t. Maybe because, in the end, he thought it was just a game and there was no harm in it; maybe because he knew Seungcheol would’ve told him to rest assured since the paper will never fall and so there were no risks for a kiss.
Until the game started, I couldn’t bring myself to spare a glance towards my right, still trying my best to avoid him for his own good.
The referee blows the whistle and the strategy seems to be a successful one. The first six people do a wonderful job of passing the paper.
Before taking the sheet from Wonwoo, I take a deep breath, mentally preparing for what was coming next.
The moment I turn my head around, I realise that what I was seeing was worse than whatever I was expecting to find. He is standing with his mouth slightly open, ready to receive the paper but he was so nervous.
Instinctively, I bring my hands up to hold his head and, to steady himself, Jihoon grabs my arms.
The closer I draw to him, the stronger he squeezes my arms and my heart tightens too. He wears a painful expression and I feel my eyes getting watery. The way his pupils nervously shake and frantically search for something inside mine sends warning alarms to my brain who’s too busy taking in the sight of Jihoon to understand what was going on.
It hit me when, for a second, I could feel his lips through the thin paper and my mind completely shut down at that weirdly familiar sensation.
It was as if they had already touched before today, as if my lips already knew his.
This sends my mind in a loop of me wanting that damn sheet to fall so I could feel his lips for real, feel better the warmth they radiate, sending shivers down my spine whenever they touched mine.
Scared of what I was thinking, I considered for a moment to quit the game but knowing it would make it suspicious and draw the attention on our group, I decided to hang in there and pretend that everything is fine, pretend that Jihoon’s painful gaze at every fake kiss of ours isn’t a stab to my heart.
‘Is he wishing it to be real? Is he wishing this was not happening at all?’
As soon as the game ends and we have another break, I bolt away feeling like I need some space for myself, some air to breathe.
“Where are you going, Soons?” Joshua yells, making me stop in my tracks.
“To buy some water at the vending machine inside the school. I’ll be back before you start with the musical chairs.”
“Buy some for us too!” Seungcheol says while running in place to warm his legs up.
“I’ll come with you,” Jeonghan catches up with me and throws his arm on my shoulders. “You alone can’t bring 10 bottles.”
And from the way his eyes once again darts from Jihoon to me, I know that this isn’t the only reason why he joined me.
“Do you want to talk about it?” Jeonghan asked as I hand him the fourth bottle of water.
“About what, hyung?” I pretend not to understand to buy time and make something up.
“Jihoon.” He doesn’t beat around the bush and goes straight for it. “You two haven’t been around each other at all today when you’re usually attached to the hip doing nothing but ignoring the rest of us.”
“We never ignored you.”
“Soonyoung, sometimes we have to ask you both a question three times before you hear us and a fourth one for you to actually reply. If this is not being in your own world and ignoring us, I don’t know what it is then.” He scoffs taking another bottle into his hands. “However, that’s not the point. Something happened and the others may have not noticed but I did because you idiots can’t even be subtle.”
At this point, keep denying things won’t help with my situation but it’s not like I can tell him the truth that I struggled so much to tell Seokmin who’s my bestest of friends. “I don’t want to talk about it, hyung.”
“Are you sure? Hyung here has a lot of experience on how to handle a little grumpy Jihoon. I can help you.”
Smirking, I put the last few coins inside the vending machine with my free hand. “I’m sure you can but we just had a small fight, nothing to worry about.” I lie. “I guess that the fact we haven’t seen each other since then made things a little bit more awkward.”
Jeonghan sighs and leans with his shoulder on the machine, arms crossed over his chest. “I know you’re lying to me and I promise I won’t insist on the matter but, please, make up with Jihoon. You both are clearly not okay with how things are right now. I don’t know how serious the reason behind your fight was but it’s better to fix it now before it’s too late.”
“I hope we can fix it…”
“Hope? You were the one who went down a warpath when Chanyeol didn’t let you spend time with Jihoon.”
“But the situation is diff-”
“Different or not,” Jeonghan interrupts me as he sets off for the playground. “Don’t give up on Jihoon. He put down so many walls to let you in, walls that he didn’t put down not even with us. Don’t make Jihoon regret opening up to you, okay?” he doesn’t even wait for my answer and disappears behind the corner of the main hallway.
Jeonghan words hit the right spot.
The situation might be totally different from before because he now came out about his feelings for me and I realised mine for him, even though I cannot be open and honest about them. However, if I don’t do something now, I might regret it forever. If I stay still, it could cost me even his friendship and I know I won’t bear it. I can’t bear a life without Jihoon.
‘I have to talk to him and do it quickly before it’s too late for me.’
Too late for us.
‘They’re wrapping up,’ I think as the hosts thank all the people who have joined them for the afternoon and wish them a good night, promising to meet them tomorrow as they will be hosting the show too. ‘Joshua said he was going to give Seokmin and me a ride to Seok’s house. Jihoon will surely go with him so they can go home together afterwards. I’ll take this as my opportunity to make small talk with him, lay the ground for the big talk.’
And it was a flawless plan if it wasn’t for Seungkwan who asked, “Hyung, can’t we practice a little bit more tonight? I suddenly feel so nervous and insecure.”
“Seungkwan,” Seungcheol walked to him and put his hand on the younger’s shoulder to reassure him. “Don’t worry. You’ll be great.”
“We need to rest now so we can be fully charged for tomorrow.” Wonwoo chimes in. “We used a lot of our energies for today’s games.”
Seungcheol nods. “Wonwoo is right.”
“But hyung, they gave the setlist to us today and we won’t be performing until the afternoon.” Seungkwan insists, his eyes growing bigger to look cuter and convince his hyungs. “We can practice just a couple of times and then go home.”
“I don’t know..”
“Pretty please, hyung?”
Seungcheol looks at Joshua and Jeonghan who both nod. He sighs. “Let’s go to my house, then.”
At that, I felt as if all the hopes and efforts I had put into mustering the courage to talk again with Jihoon were like a piece of paper that got crumbled and thrown into the bin. Useless.
Suddenly, the idea of this being a sign from the heavens crosses my mind. Maybe they were telling me to leave the poor guy alone since he would be better off without me.
“You go first. I’ll drive these two to Seokmin’s house,” Joshua says while pointing at Seokmin and me.
The guys all nod and start leaving while waving their hands at us, screaming to look forward to tomorrow. We wave back at them and, for a short while, Jihoon and I look at each other and he gives me a small smile that is enough to set my heart on fire.
Burning with determination, I clench my fists and think, ‘I’m Kwon Soonyoung. I’ve always swum against the tide and I’ll go against heavens too if needed. I won’t let you go, Jihoon. Not today nor ever.’
“And this is all for today! We hope you enjoyed today too.”
“But don’t go away just yet! There’s more music to jam to after the lunch break!”
“You can even party with us live, right Seokmin?”
“That’s right! We will be there to hype some of our friends and to celebrate our last spring festival as high school students.”
“So please, feel free to join us! Now, should we wrap up?”
“Sure! This has been Seokmin...”
“...and Soonyoung!”
“Seoksoon talk, Soonseok talk, everybody talk, kakaotalk!” Seokmin and I are so in sync that we don’t even have to countdown anymore before shouting our famous line.
We turn off the mic and we both sprawl our upper bodies on the counter in front of us, feeling tired all of a sudden. Seokmin’s eyes are half-closed from the drowsiness since, this morning too, we had to wake up extra early to make breakfast and set up the radio equipment at our booth.
Despite not having that much to do because of the main event of our festival taking up the whole day’s schedule, our club was still in charge for some of the announcements like reminding students of the upcoming performances or which were the booths taking turns to sell food and drinks.
Luckily for us, as Seungkwan reminded us yesterday, Jeonghan’s bitches were scheduled to perform in the afternoon. This gave us the time to finish our job, pass the baton to Mina and Nayoung for the afternoon broadcast and grab something to eat before joining the crowd to watch our friends’ show.
The number of people who came today to support their friends or just enjoy a free music show was huge. While at the booth, I’ve seen that a lot of students or outsiders came in but I’ve never imagined that there would be this much. The whole playground area was packed with groups of friends jumping up and down as they got hyped by the performer rapping to their favourite BewhY song; girls swooning as a handsome guy was singing Dean’s Half Moon while playing the guitar; loads of people cheering for a young boy dancing and singing to Park Sang Chul’s Unconditional Love to liven up the mood after a heartbreaking song.
“I checked the line-up and they’re about to perform,” Seokmin shouts so that I can hear him over the general shouting. “Let’s get closer to the stage!”
“Do you think we can?” I ask, close to his ear and pointing at the sea of students before us. “There’s Jihoon and your boyfriend’s crazy fandom in the first couple of rows, they won’t let us near the stage.”
“If we don’t try, we will never know.” He smirks and immediately starts squeezing himself into the crowd, apologising when his elbow or foot collided with someone’s side or shin.
When we succeeded in reaching a good spot, we decided it was better not to further test our luck and settle there. If up until now people had been kind enough not to push us back, we might face a dreadful fate with the fierce fandom that was standing right in front of us.
“Let’s give a round of applause to Lee Chan!” The student hosting yesterday’s games walked in, clapping for the boy in a green sequin jacket who had just finished singing the trot song.
“Thank you so much!” Chan shouts into the mic, bowing to the crowd and then leaving the stage wearing a satisfied expression, knowing that his performance has been a memorable one.
“And now, the moment most of you had been waiting for!” The MC’s voice is suddenly overpowered by the squealing of the girls present here. “I see that you know who I am talking about.”
“YES” They all shouted back.
“Well, then!” The lights behind the host turn on revealing the instruments, waiting to be played by their owners, and some mic stands. “Without further ado, let me introduce you Jeonghan’s bitches!”
The crowd roars as the boys come one by one on the stage, taking their places.
Joshua and Mingyu go to their electric guitars which have already been plugged in the speaker system; the same thing was done with Jeonghan’s bass. Seungkwan who is usually playing the keyboard, today was empty-handed as he stood in front of the middle mic stand, Wonwoo and Seungcheol on both of his sides.
Then, there’s Jihoon. It was as if the spotlight was following him to his drums, making him shine brighter among the others.
Seeing him makes me unconsciously smile but sadness creeps up as I think about how I hadn’t the chance to mend our relationship, to tell him that I’m sorry because of how I acted the day before, treating him almost as if we were just acquaintances. I acted that way so I wouldn’t hurt him but it was useless and it maybe even worsened the situation.
At Seokmin’s house, when he was already asleep and I kept tossing and turning, I considered texting him as it may have felt easier, for both of us, to tell the truth about what to do to make this friendship work without any awkwardness, but then discarded the idea. Jihoon was probably exhausted after all those games and the late-night practice and needed to rest. Moreover, in case it took a wrong turn, I didn’t want our conversation to influence today’s performance.
In the end, the best way to deal with any kind of confrontation is to talk face to face, am I right? No matter how easy it is to talk about things over the phone or behind a screen, nothing is like looking into someone’s eyes and see if you’re hurting them with your words, if you’re not being careful enough and, most importantly, if they really mean what they’re saying. And I want this. I want to see from the eyes I know the best if Jihoon can really handle being friends with an asshole like me.
That’s why I’m going to talk to him after the show, letting him and myself enjoy the moment.
Screams die down as the host leaves the stage, everyone is clearly looking forward to which song Jeonghan’s bitches chose to perform.
It’s only when Jihoon raises his drumsticks in the air to count the tempo that I notice he’s using the black ones I gave him on Christmas, the ones with the “from Hoshi to Jihoonie” carved on it.
The thought of him probably using them as his lucky-charm for the show tugs at my heart in both happiness and pain.
However, I don’t have the time to dwell on it that Wonwoo sings, just half of a second before the accompaniment. Seokmin and I look at each other. They’re not singing one of their original songs but covering 5 Seconds of Summer’s Youngblood.
Remember the words you told me, “love me 'til the day I die”
Surrender my everything 'cause you made me believe you're mine
Wonwoo’s voice is low, almost like a growl, and his eyes are closed as he sings his lines that immediately pierce me like a sharp blade.
In some ways, they resonate with what we are, with the way I told him that he’s the only one for me, the only one I’ll love till the end. Even if we knew that life can be unpredictable and things may someday change, we chose to believe it.
He lowered his guard because of me, he believed I was his.
Who would’ve known that what he least wanted was already happening behind his back.
I barely catch Seungcheol’s lines as my mind is busy thinking about Wonwoo, but then I tell myself to concentrate on Seungkwan who is now singing.
The boys are giving their best, some of them playing their instruments with their eyes closed so they wouldn’t feel overwhelmed by the crowd; their voices are all on point, even in the harmonisation and the back-up vocals.
The mood they decided to set with the song was almost an angsty one, with the drums almost reminding of the heartbeat sound of the main character of the love story they’re singing about, but people are still super hyped by the energy the performance in its whole exudes.
One look around and you could see the students jamming with their hands in the air, bodies swaying to the music and feet stomping on the ground to follow the rhythm.
Shifting the gaze back to the guys, I could tell that they are all nervous but, despite this, they look like professionals.
‘They truly are born to be on the stage.’
The tempo is picking up, the song is almost at its chorus that I thought was going to be sung by Seungkwan as he can clearly manage the high pitch of it.
As I am nodding my head to the music, I stop for a moment as I hear Jihoon singing.
Youngblood
Say you want me
Say you want me
Out of your life
And I'm just a dead man walking tonight
But you need it, yeah, you need it
All of the time
I’m shocked and it’s not because of Jihoon’s voice but because of how heartfelt this verse sounded coming from him.
I can’t help but drift away with my thoughts once again.
They take me back to the Jihoon standing in the rain on Valentine’s day. The way he was looking at me, with hope and fear in his eyes, as he waited for my answer to his confession. A heartbreaking answer followed by a selfish request that could’ve sounded both harsh and pitiful. Jihoon knew I asked that because I really love him as a friend.
But what if he fears that I want him out of my life since his feelings are out in the sun and could be a burden for me? What if he thinks that I told him to stay friends just so he wouldn’t feel too bad? If this is the case, I wish he could see the truth inside of my heart, how much I am yearning for him.
The music tuned out altogether until Jihoon’s voice briefly pierces through the soundproof barrier that had apparently risen around me.
Lately our conversations end like it's the last goodbye
Again. That feeling that he’s talking about us.
It’s been a while since our conversations all felt like they were the last ones, not knowing what was going to happen the day after and if we would still be able to talk to each other. At first, it was because of Chanyeol always finding a way for us to part or avoid each other. Now things have changed and if these conversations do end like that it’s because of us, because of how dangerous this relationship of ours could be with him wearing his heart on his sleeve and me hiding my true feelings into the farthest corner of my heart, repressing them with the risk of a huge explosion that could fuck things up.
“They’re doing great, right?” Seokmin shouts in my ear, nudging my side and bringing me back to reality.
“Amazingly!” I give him the best smile I can manage at the moment and decide to stop all of the thoughts from taking my focus away from my friends.
From this moment on, I do my best to empty my mind and let the music flow through my body, having it swing to the music.
My head feels lighter without that storm of thoughts clouding it. Finally, I genuinely smile and laugh as Seokmin mimics the way Joshua rushed to the mic to sing his part as he almost forgot about it or the way Mingyu tried to look hot as he played the guitar, probably thinking to turn most of Jihoon’s fans into his.
By the time the chorus comes again, we are jumping and singing as loud as we can together with the rest of the crowd, some missing a couple of words in the process but it doesn’t matters since we’re having fun.
In the middle of the performance, a spotlight moves together with Jeonghan who’s walking towards Seungcheol and the girls at the front scream, fanning themselves as they see the sweat glistening on hyung’s porcelain skin, making him look even more like an ethereal being. An angel, as someone says in front of me.
The audience is totally drawn into the gig and I can’t help but feel proud of it, of how talented they are and how this could be a springboard for the success they’ve been aiming to for the past years.
You push and you push and I'm pulling away
Pulling away from you
Jihoon shouts in the mic as the way he plays the drums becomes even more powerful towards the end of the song. Wonwoo, whose energy too was still high, takes the mic off of the stand, reaches the edge of the stage and crouches. He looks somewhere in the crowd and sings.
I give and I give and I give and you take, give and you take
He sticks his tongue out and brushes his hair back before going back to his place to sing the last chorus together with all of the guys. His action causes one of the girls at the very front to almost faint.
The melody abruptly ends, the lights go off and I’m standing there, rewinding all of the events of these past months and feeling like the worst two-timer in the world.
“Here!” Seungkwan flails his arms in the air for Seokmin and me to see.
He’s standing outside the door of the building used as the backstage area for the artists and when we spot him, we run to him. Seungkwan is immediately crushed in a group hug and if at first, he couldn’t move out of surprise, a second later he’s hugging us back and jumping in a circle with us.
When we finally let him go, he says, “Follow me, I’ll bring you to our waiting room.”
“Ooooh,” Seokmin and I say in unison and in a mocking yet impressed tone. “Sounds like you’re a pro, hyung,” I add while nudging him with my elbow.
Seungkwan scoffs but he’s still flattered by the words, we could tell by the little smirk tugging at his lips. “Come on, let’s get in already.”
He walks in first, with the two of us trailing behind. There aren’t a lot of people around and I guess it’s because most of the artist who had to perform, already did so in the morning and decided to go back home.
Few were the ones who stayed here to either chill or help the hoobaes getting ready for their gig, giving advice or talking about how the crowd was hyped and how it felt to be on the stage surrounded by the cheers of your friends and of the people that came there to watch. On a day like this, it felt good to see how some of the students who often pass as assholes because of their competitiveness with studies can turn into such excited and supportive people. You can see them bonding with their hoobaes over music or video games; exchanging numbers so they can hang out during the spring break and go to a game fair or a concert; laughing as they crack jokes to break the awkwardness of their first meeting.
As we turn into another hallway, we see from afar a girl shyly standing around a boy no less shy than her as he scratches the back of his head. After telling her something and watching her nod in agreement, he gives her a quick kiss on her cheek before sprinting away in embarrassment. A loud “YA!” comes from the girl who later says out loud that he should come back and take responsibilities for her racing heart. She then turns around and, realising that we witnessed the whole thing, runs away while covering her flushed face.
“Ah, young love.” Seungkwan smiles as he opens the door to their waiting room, revealing the boys all sprawled on their chairs or the floor, sweat still glistening on their skin. Hansol was the only one sitting in a proper position while scrolling on his phone. “What are you doing?!” Seungkwan’s voice goes up of an octave. “I told you to make yourselves decent while I was gone to pick Soonyoung and Seokmin up.”
“Did you really expect that we could do that?” Mingyu doesn’t even raise his head to look at Seungkwan while talking. “My knees gave in right after the gig. It’s already a miracle that I got here.”
“I hate to say it but Mingyu is right this time.” Jeonghan agrees, half of his body laying on top of three chairs put in a row while the other half is left dangling in the air.
“We were so fucking nervous.” Seungcheol gets up only to adjust Jeonghan’s body, making sure his boyfriend wouldn’t fall from the chairs. “I thought I might throw up while singing.”
“Me too.” Joshua chimes in. “But then I saw my lovely boyfriend in the crowd and I couldn’t allow myself to look less cool.” He looks at Seokmin and pats the space on the floor next to himself.
Seokmin takes the hint and sits next to Joshua, who immediately lays down, his head on his boyfriend’s lap. “That’s why you almost forgot to sing your lines and almost tripped in the wires to reach the mic?” Seokmin teases.
“You saw that?!”
“It was pretty difficult to miss, hyung.”
Everyone bursts out laughing and Seungkwan, not anymore on the offence, goes sitting on Hansol’s legs, who puts his phone away to hug the other’s waist.
Meanwhile, I stand at the door, scanning the room and seeing Wonwoo and Jihoon sitting at the opposite sides of the room. The air between the two of them seems a bit tense as they look at each other and then at me. It was a silent war to which only I could put an end by choosing the “right” side.
But let’s be honest...do I even have a choice?
If I go to Jihoon, Wonwoo will be upset about it. Then, of course, I have to go to Wonwoo and sit on the chair next to his, glancing towards Jihoon’s side while doing so. He looks defeated, as if there was a part of him that despite knowing what I was going to do, still hoped for me to come to him.
Toughening my heart up, I turn to Wonwoo and smile at him. In return, he pecks my lips and after that, his body visibly relaxes.
“Seems like we gained some new fans today,” Seungcheol suddenly says.
“You definitely did! The crowd was thrilled!” I bounce excitedly on the chair.
“All those around us were jamming so hard to the song,” Seokmin adds, pointing then at Jeonghan. “Most girls were even shouting his name out loud.”
“Of course they would.” Jeonghan raises from the chairs and smirks. “I’m the archangel Jeonghan descended on Earth to bless you with my looks.”
“I couldn’t agree more.” Seungcheol plays with Jeonghan’s hair. The latter turns around and the way they look at each other is so sweet that Mingyu gags. Seungcheol looks at the puppy still lying on the floor. “You don’t agree?!”
“Excuse me, have you seen how they were going crazy for me when I was sweating?” Mingyu asks, his hand on his chest, almost offended.
“They were most probably grossed out.” Seungkwan’s face is so serious and the tone of his voice so flat that we can’t help but fall into another burst of laughter.
“Guys, let him live.” Wonwoo intervenes even though he himself is laughing. “What matters is that they liked our performance.”
“And that we gave the best of us,” Joshua adds to which the rest of the guys nod.
“What about you, Jihoonie?” Jeonghan asks, glancing towards the boy who has been weirdly silent all of this time. “Why aren’t you saying anything?”
“I’m just tired. I was so nervous that I couldn’t sleep a wink last night.” Jihoon stands up and tries to straighten his crumpled white shirt, not meeting anyone’s eyes in the process. “You all did great, hyungs. I’m really proud of you all.” He fakes a smile and puts his denim jacket on.
“Wait, are you going somewhere?” I instinctively ask. Jihoon’s eyes widen and he shoots his head towards me. He clearly wasn’t expecting me to say something, to stop him from leaving. When his gaze meets mine, I can see a veil of happiness in those eyes filled with both physical and mental tiredness and a pinch of sadness.
“Aren’t you coming with us to ‘Coffee & Goodpie’ to celebrate?” Wonwoo’s arm sneaks around my shoulder and Jihoon’s gaze shifts on him.
“I’m sorry, but I feel on the verge of passing out.” He gives another tired smile and bows to all of the hyungs. “I’ll see you all tomorrow.”
When Jihoon turns his back at us and heads to the door, I bolt up from the chair.
Wonwoo’s shocked gaze, as well as the other boys’ eyes, is suddenly on me, but I don’t care about them and take a step towards Jihoon, determined to follow him outside so I can apologise for my behaviour.
Feeling agitated at the idea that this might be the last time for me to try making things better, to make this friendship work, I reach him at the door and I’m ready to tell him to wait for me when there’s a knock on the door.
“Were we expecting someone?” Seungcheol asks and looks around only to see everyone shaking their heads.
“Come in!” Jeonghan shouts after another knock on the door.
The door opens and a tall, middle-aged man wearing formal clothes walks in together with one of the students hosting the event. “Guys, I’m sorry to interrupt you but this man wanted to meet you,” The boy says, then stepping aside to let the man be seen by everyone.
“Good evening. I’m Cha Chin Hwa. It’s a pleasure to meet you.” Mr Cha bows to us which startles the guys sitting and laying on the floor. They all rush to stand up and bow back to him.
“Mr Cha, I’m sorry if it sounds rude,” Seungcheol starts saying as he walks to the middle of the room. “Why did you want to see us?”
Mr Cha smiles and takes out his business card, handing it to Jihoon since he is the one closest to him. While Jihoon is busy inspecting the card, I hear the student shocked voice saying “Don’t you know him? He’s from one of the most famous agencies of our country. He’s a scouter.”
Incredulous, I snatch the blue card from Jihoon’s hands and turn it to the side where Mr Cha’s name is. Under the three syllables of his name, the word scouter is printed in shiny golden letters.
At that moment, only one thought crossed my mind.
‘I am going to lose my friends, the people I love...I’m going to lose Jihoon.’
Notes:
And that was it! A filler chapter with a little bit of a twist at the end after four months.
I'm really, really sorry that you all had to wait so long for an uneventful chapter like this T-T I've been trying so hard to write this chapter for the past months through which I experienced a major block and a lot of stress. Exams to study for, the coronavirus outbreak that had my last exam of this semester postponed of half a month, sadness post-cancellation of the OTY in Europe concerts, quarantine that means parents at home that leave you little to no time to sit in front of the computer, get in the flow of the story and write something that makes sense. It's been tough to the point that I almost decided to give up writing altogether. However, I didn't. The thought of you reading the story and the immense support Zels gave me were what made me pull through it all. I could never stop being grateful to all of you and to her.
However, back to the chapter! How many of you could see this happening? Jeonghan's bitches being scouted it's a big deal that will change so many things from now on, maybe even the pace of the story!
I'm curious to know what you all think will happen now so let me know your theories in the comments!!I hope to see you soon with the next chapter or a new short story!! Until then, please stay safe and always be happy!!!
I love you from the bottom of my heart!!
Chapter 32
Notes:
Rumour has it that an author named Yleisnotonfire updates this story once in a blue moon.
It turns out that, tonight, there is a blue moon so here the chapter is!
(I'm obviously joking...it's just that I've run out of ideas for the intro lol)
Enjoy the chapter and I'll see you at the end notes!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
With the big turn of events, what should have been a small celebration at Coffee & Goodpie turned into a big party at the nearest samgyeopsal restaurant. It is quite packed as a lot of people from our school apparently decided to come here too. We wait for a while, playing silly games in the meantime.
Once we’re inside, we don’t waste any more time and proceed to order a monstrous amount of meat and side dishes as if we are throwing a party for twenty or more people. As we slowly lose ourselves into the happiness of the moment and forget about our surroundings, we are growing louder and louder. Because of this, the owner of the place came a few times to our table, asking us to lower our voice but eventually gave up when she realised our excitement couldn’t be contained.
When the food arrives, the true chaos begins. On one side, Mingyu is nagging Seungcheol because of how unevenly cut the pieces of samgyeopsal are; on the other side Seungkwan and I are hyping Seokmin who’s grilling the meat in a very cool way but then Joshua hits him on the shoulder, telling him to make sure he doesn’t burn anything; Jeonghan and Wonwoo are making the drinks for the hyungs after claiming to be the ones who know the exact ratio of beer and soju for a perfect drink; Hansol and Jihoon, having nothing left to do, are animatedly talking about who between Black Panther and Iron Man would win in a one-on-one fistfight.
Before starting eating, Seungcheol raises his glass and clears his throat.
“To today’s performance! We did great, guys!” He shouts and stretches his arm forward so we clink the glasses in the middle of our tables, giving the kick-start to our celebration with a refreshing drink.
“This has been one legendary day, am I right?” Joshua asks, looking around himself in search of approval.
“Of course! Today is the day we moved our first steps on the path to fame!” Seungkwan clicks his tongue and points at Joshua.
“When do you think we’ll release our first album?” The fact that Jeonghan is joking is evident from his half-smile but Mingyu, who wasn’t looking at him, seems to take him seriously.
“I don’t know but I hope it’s going to be soon, so we can have our first official concert too!” Mingyu’s eyes are closed, probably imagining the crowd under the stage roaring for them.
“Do you think we will become famous overseas too?” Seungkwan nudges Wonwoo’s side with his elbow.
“Don’t you think you two going a bit too fast?” Wonwoo pokes Seungkwan’s cheek with his index, he then grabs the bottle of soju and pours himself a shot.
“What do you mean? The scouter totally liked us.” Mingyu pouts, upset that Wonwoo ruined their daydreaming.
“Wonwoo is right.” Seungcheol chimes in. “I get that you’re excited but don’t run too fast because you may fall and get hurt.” He grabs his chopsticks to eat a piece of samgyeopsal before continuing “The scouter liked us but now we need to impress the rest of the people who’ll watch our audition.”
“We need to be flawless, then. Thankfully, we get a week to practice.” Seungkwan smiles, probably feeling ecstatic at the idea of performing on a bigger scale.
“Should we choose a song already? This way, we won’t waste time tomorrow to brainstorm,” Jihoon says, the tired and sad expression he had in the waiting room has been replaced by sparkly eyes and a huge smile. “What do you think will leave them with a good impression of us?”
The question sparks a storm of shouts and suggestions, which come muffled to my ears. I see their faces lighting up as an idea comes to their mind or pointing fingers at each other as if they want the person they’re pointing at to agree with their choice. I see lips moving to speak or stretch to either pout or smile.
Happiness, excitement, passion, I can see all of it on their faces and in their gestures but why the only things I can feel right now are sadness and anxiousness?
“Don’t you know him? He’s from one of the most famous agencies of our country. He’s a scouter.”
Incredulous, I snatch the blue card from Jihoon’s hands and turn it to the side where Mr Cha’s name is. Under the three syllables of his name, the word “ scouter” is printed in shiny golden letters.
“A scouter?” Joshua asks as soon as he recovers from the shocking news. The others’ mouths are still hanging open, eyes darting from their friends to the man standing next to the door.
“That’s right.” Mr Cha nods and smiles. “I work for One-Seven K company. Have you ever heard of it?”
Seungkwan’s jaw is about to reach the floor at the mention of the agency’s name. “Of course, we did! It’s a well-known company after all!”
“Good, we won’t be wasting too much time with the introduction of the company.” Mr Cha chuckles. “We can go straight to the point.” He walks to the centre of the room and gestures us to sit down on the few chairs that were around.
Jihoon, who is looking at Mr Cha as if he has grown two heads, seems to finally thaw out. He turns around to look at Jeonghan who is mouthing him to hurry up and sit. Jihoon does as he’s told and goes sitting in between Seungcheol and Joshua. I follow him but stop on the side where Seokmin and Hansol are standing.
“I think we all know why I am here and what I want to tell you, right?” Mr Cha straightforwardly asks.
Taken a little aback, the boys exchange a look before nodding. “You’re here to scout us?!” Seungcheol tone raising up at the end makes his statement sound like a question. He’s trying so hard to hide his excitement but he’s on the verge of failing.
Mr Cha nods. “I watched your performance a while ago and I was genuinely impressed. Your stage presence is strong and you know what to do to keep the crowd hooked. I liked that.”
“Thank you.” Seungcheol bows his head, hands politely resting on his knees.
“It looked as if it wasn’t your first time on a stage. You did well with the line distribution too! Did you have the chance to perform before today?” The scouter asks, his gaze shifting from Seungcheol to Wonwoo.
Feeling like he was waiting for him to answer, Wonwoo says, “Yes. We usually do gigs in a small pub on Fridays and sometimes we get called for live sessions at festivals or small events.”
“So you have quite some fame already.” The left corner of the man’s mouth curves up, hand going to rub his chin. “Are you a tribute-band? I’m asking because you covered a western group’s song.”
“No, we’re not.” This time, the one answering is Jihoon. “In our live sessions, we sing our own songs, the one we as a group produce. Today, we chose to cover another artist’s song so we could involve the crowd.” Lips drying because of the attention being solely on him, Jihoon stops talking to run his tongue on his lower lip. “We didn’t want to be the only ones singing and getting hyped, we wanted the students and the other people to sing along with us and feel as excited as we were.”
Noticing that Mr Cha isn’t saying anything and afraid he wasn’t pleased with Jihoon’s answer, Seungkwan hurries to add, “But if you want to hear one of our songs now, we can either sing it live or play the track on our phones.”
“That won’t be necessary.” Mr Cha finally says as he stands up. “I’ll look forward to listening to it next week at our auditions. Saturday, 8 am at One-Seven K .”
Everyone stands up too and they all bow to the man standing before them. Seungcheol is the last one to straighten his back up and, soon after, he says, “We won’t be late.”
“You better not be. This is a one-time opportunity, take it at all costs.”
And with that said, Mr Cha walks out of the room, leaving behind a bunch of young men happily jumping in a circle and chanting that they made it.
“YES! THAT SONG WOULD BE PERFECT!” Seungkwan shouts and it’s so loud that not only I get abruptly brought back to reality but also all of the people around glare at him.
“Then, it’s decided,” Jihoon bangs his hand on the table, then reaching for his glass to hold it mid-air. “Let’s take over the music industry!”
“You heard him guys, let’s become the best band in the world!” Seungcheol raises his glass too for another toast. “To our dreams coming true!”
“CHEERS!” We all roar and down the drinks in one big gulp.
The empty glasses are put on the table with a loud thud echoing the one of my heart dropping inside my chest.
“We got carried away by the moment that I have lost the count of how many drinks we had since we came here," Hansol says before shrugging and pouring some more beer into his glass.
"I think we’re around the tenth." Wonwoo takes a lettuce leaf from the metal tray in the middle and puts a piece of meat on it.
"Were you actually counting?" I ask while passing him the garlic.
"No, but Seungcheol hyung gets tipsy and makes emotional speeches after his tenth glass and, right now, he looks like he's ready for one of those." Wonwoo puts the hot pepper paste on the meat, makes a wrap and eats it.
As if on cue, Seungcheol clears his throat and everyone's attention is on him. "Guys, I want to tell you something. I’ve been meaning to say this since the moment we came off the stage but things, luckily good things, have happened and it got delayed. Now, before most of you get too drunk to remember this, I wanted to say...” He closes his eyes for a second, taking a deep breath. “Thank you.”
No one speaks but everyone’s looking at him, eyes softening after hearing those two words that, with the most feeble breath, left his lips.
“Thank you for your existence, for walking into my life, for making my future look brighter. Sharing the same dream as you has turned me into a happier person. I feel so lucky to have met you and deeply bonded with every single one of you.” Seungcheol wraps his arms around Jeonghan and Mingyu’s shoulders as he was sitting between them. “Promise me, that no matter what happens, what life has in store for us, we will be together forever, okay?”
All of us nod, a hint of a smile on our lips. “We promise,” Seungkwan is the first one to answer, immediately followed by the rest of the boys.
Seokmin, Hansol and I weren’t saying a thing, convinced that the speech was only for the members. Noticing this, Seungcheol’s gaze shifts on us. “Aren’t you going to promise? You’re part of Jeonghan’s bitches. You too are family.”
At that, my heart skips a beat, touched by how soft Seungcheol’s voice is when saying that we’re their family too. Nodding more to myself than to him, I say, “I promise to never leave, hyung.”
And it’s when everybody else goes back to what they were doing before the speech, that the words I just said feel like a stab in my chest.
‘I won’t leave you, but can you really promise you won’t leave us behind?’
“Soonyoung, is everything okay?” Seokmin whispers in my ear.
I turn my face to look at him, forcing a smile. “Of course, I am! Why shouldn’t I be okay?”
“Your eyes are watery and red.” He points at my eyes and shuffles closer. “I’ve noticed that you’ve not been really present tonight. Do you want to go outside and talk about it?” Seokmin looks around to check if some of the boys is eavesdropping the conversation before saying, “We can use the excuse that you’re bothered by the smoke so they won’t suspect a thing.”
“Seok, don’t worry.” I put my hand on his knee and give it a light squeeze. “We’ll talk about it another day. I still haven’t sorted all the thoughts running in my head so I wouldn’t know what to say. Just give me some time, please?”
Seokmin’s eyes are fixed into mine, trying to understand if I’m giving an excuse to avoid talking or I’m being sincere. When he established that the latter could be the most probable case, he sighs and pats my hand on his knee. “Okay...remember to not overthink, though.”
“I promise I won’t.” Another smile, far more heartfelt than the first one, tugs at my lips. “Thank you, Seok. For worrying about me.”
“Don’t thank me, you stupid.” Seokmin lightly hits the back of my head. “I worry because I care about you.”
“And I love you.”
“Ew, get away from me. I have a boyfriend, you know?” Seokmin jokingly pushes me away from him, but this only makes me want to be more annoying, wrapping my arms around him.
“I’m not jealous, though? You can love me too!” I wail while shaking him and acting like a child.
“Wonwoo, your boyfriend is trying to hit on me!” Seokmin calls for help to which Wonwoo immediately responds by tickling my sides.
Yelping, I let Seokmin go and I soon find myself wrapped in Wonwoo’s arms. “Did you hit on him?” He asks, pretending to look annoyed but the corner of his lips are slightly curved upwards.
“I just told him that I love him. I meant as a friend but he misunderstood.” I cuddle closer to Wonwoo and while looking at Seokmin, I say “Maybe he has a crush on me but doesn’t want to admit it.”
“What?” Seokmin shrieks. Offended, he brings his hand on his chest. “Me a crush on you? Maybe it’s the other way round.”
“You wish but you’re the one who fell for my charms.” I stick my tongue out to him
“Which charms? Do you have any?”
“There’s enough meat roasting on the grill,” Joshua suddenly says. “We don’t need you two to roast each other, too.” He turns a piece of samgyeopsal on the barbecue in the middle of the table. “Now, eat that so we can leave. I have to drive you babies home.”
“I’m not a baby,” Seokmin complains but still doing what Joshua tells him, taking a piece of the sizzling meat from the grill with his chopsticks.
“And it’s not even midnight, yet. Why do we have to go home?” I whine, pouting at Wonwoo in hopes he can help me change Joshua’s mind.
However, he looks at me and says, “Because you woke up early for two days in a row and you need some rest after these two tiring days.”
“You need rest too, though.”
Wonwoo hums in agreement. “We will stay here just long enough to witness Mingyu and Seungkwan embarrass themselves as they try to win an arm wrestle competition against drunk Seungcheol.”
“They manage to lose even when Seungcheol is drunk?” I ask, looking at Seungcheol with a weird sense of admiration. “He’s cool!”
“And what about me?” Wonwoo pouts.
“You’re super cool because you’re my boyfriend.” I kiss his cheek as he hums contently at the answer.
When I go back to sit properly so I can eat without the risk of choking, I see with the corner of my eyes that Jihoon is looking at me. Sadness masked behind the happy grin he’s flashing while talking to Hansol.
Having dropped me in our neighbourhood, Joshua makes a U-turn and sets off in the direction of Seokmin’s house. I keep waving at them until the car disappears from the main road and, sure they cannot see me anymore, my hand and smile drop at the same time.
My feet act on their own and instead of bringing me back home, they walk along the dim-lit road of the neighbourhood. Step after step, I find myself standing in front of the playground Jihoon and I have been on Valentine’s Day.
It is deserted just like that night. The children and the youngsters that usually play in here are probably sleeping in their houses considering how late it is now.
Hands buried in the pocket of my denim jacket, I hesitantly take a step forward, almost worried that, by entering, I could wake up the sleeping ghost that the memories of that night are.
Once I’m inside, I stop. Stupidly waiting for something to suddenly hit me, be the shadow of Jihoon walking past me or his feeble voice confessing his feelings for me. When nothing happens and only the sound of the howling wind reaches my ears, I shake my head and reach the first bench I spot. Usually, I like to sit on a swing, rocking back and forth to lull myself back to a peaceful state of mind. But today I don't feel like I can do it.
My already mess of a mind is bringing back the memories of that night, pushing me closer to the border of a dangerous cliff. The force of these thoughts, eventually make me fall and I feel myself breaking down.
Sitting on the bench, I bring my knees up to my chest. I hug them as I’m looking for some sort of comfort in my loneliness. I put my chin on top of my arms and close my eyes. The rustling sound of the new-born leaves is harmonising with the meowing of a few stray cats. Both sounds muffled but still able to break in the silence of the night.
When I open my eyes again, the tears that I’ve kept from falling can’t be held anymore. Like a stream they flow down, the drops hitting the back of my hands with an interrupted and agonizing rhythm.
“Why am I like this?”
I say out loud, out of habit, maybe expecting for someone to come and hold me while I cry. But instead, I only feel more pathetic. I bury my face in my hands and sob harder and louder, wishing for the pain to go away and release my heart from this permanent stranglehold. The more I cry, the more the grip around my heart tightens instead of loosening. When it gets harder to breathe, I force myself into taking deep breaths in hopes it helps to clear the storm raging inside my head and chest.
Having dried the tears with the sleeves of my jacket, I slide on the bench so that my feet can touch the ground again and my head can lean on the backrest. Staring at the dark sky, I see the half-moon shining bright in all of her beauty. A bitter and hoarse chuckle escapes from my lips, finding it almost funny how she too, like me, is showing only half of herself. But unlike her, that will soon show up in her wholeness, I’ll have to be like this for who-knows-how-long.
I spent so many weeks feeling down for one reason or another and I tried my best at hiding it when in front of others so they wouldn’t worry. However, as time went by, all of the thoughts and the worries that I stored inside, pushed against the marble mask of happiness I had shaped for myself. Pressure increasing, the mask couldn't resist anymore and eventually cracked a little but only Seokmin and Joshua could see what was hiding behind it. Only they could understand the reasons behind my actions.
Now that I was finally ready to take away some of the weight off of the walls of this mask by making up with Jihoon, another heavy blow unexpectedly hit me. The cracks couldn’t help but expand and deepen, almost reaching the core of the mask and risking to break it altogether.
Of course, I am super happy for the boys being scouted. After all the hard work, the sleepless nights and even some fights, finally their moment to shine has come. They’ll soon be walking on the path that seemed so far away to them and almost impossible to reach as the road before it was way too steep and difficult to climb. As Wonwoo said, there’s still an audition to pass but, let’s be honest, the odds of them not being accepted are close to zero.
They all have powerful voices and are amazing with the instruments they play; their stage presence is strong and no one can take their eyes off of them once they perform; they’re versatile and can easily adapt to playing any music genre; their teamwork is impeccable; Jihoon writes fantastic songs through which they can express themselves so well. Jeonghan’s bitches is truly one of a kind as they have all one usually looks for in a great band. If they were to reject them, it would be a huge loss for One-Seven K.
However, the joy of them fulfilling their dream brings with it the grief of having to sacrifice something.
Every kid of our age has had at least one person from their class being cast by one of the various agencies in the capital and became a trainee for god-knows how long. They rarely attended school, coming just for some random lessons and exams; they rarely kept in touch with their friends as they’ve been busy with vocal lessons or examinations; they rarely saw their families because they had to spend days and nights in the practice room or even go abroad for some higher training in dancing or learning a foreign language. Of course, this doesn’t apply to all of them but most had to leave the people and the hobbies they loved to chase after their aspiration, relying only on themselves and the strangers who later might become like family or stay as mere business partners.
Seungcheol said that we should be together forever and this might be the case for the seven of them but is it the same for us too? How long will it take before we become just a nuisance to them as we cling on the expectation for them to spare some of their time to hang out with us?
The thought of losing them drives me crazy.
They’ve become such an important part of my everyday life that’s impossible to imagine even a single day without them, without their texts flooding the group chat, the derp pictures coming in the most unexpected moment and that instantly brightens the day; without the long talks with Jeonghan and Seungcheol on the most random but deep topics being thrown in our conversations; without Mingyu’s clumsiness and dad-jokes that cracked a smile even when they were way too bad; without Seungkwan completing the SeokSoon duo with his wittiness and hyped energy that matched ours; without Joshua with whom I spent the most important moments of these past five years, who’s been like a real brother to me, the strongest pillar on which I was sure I could lean on anytime; without Wonwoo who’s been so far such a great boyfriend, pampering me up whenever he could and making me feel like the centre of his world, like a prince.
Despite having lived multiple days without Jihoon, I still cannot see him out of my life. We’ve gone from being enemies to best friends when it seemed impossible to do so; we’ve gone through thick and thin together, fighting against whoever wanted us apart; we’ve been there for each other at all times of the day and the night; we’ve seen the best and the worst of the other; his arms have always been like a safe home to return to when everything in the outside world felt like it wasn’t right.
He’s the only one who can understand what falling in love twice means. The first time being with the wrong person at the right time, the time we needed to be loved the most; the second time being with the right person at the wrong time.
“I guess that the karma is making us pay the consequences of having fallen for each other when our hearts were supposed to belong to someone else,” I whisper, covering my eyes with one hand as new tears stream down my face.
Maybe this is the universe’s way of telling me to leave Jihoon alone, that this is the perfect occasion for him to let go of the feelings he has for me so he can live happily and without feeling guilty towards Wonwoo. Maybe I’m supposed to be a passer-by in his life with the purpose of making him stronger for what is yet to come. At one point in his days, I’ll just be a painful memory for which he will be thankful as it will help him grow into the man he will be.
If this is what is going to happen, then to me he’ll forever be my biggest regret, the risk I never took despite knowing that it was going to be worth the fear. He’ll be like that one sad song you love so much but never play, afraid of hurting too much.
Tears fall and fall, making me no longer able to focus on my thoughts. The loud sobs escaping from my mouth echo in the empty park. My body shakes from both the crying and the coldness of the night. It shakes for what it seems like hours. It calms down only when, drained of all of the strong emotions I have felt until a while ago, my heart numbs.
Recollecting myself, I get up from the bench and walk back to my house before it gets too late.
Once I’m in my room, I feel exhausted all of a sudden. The festival, the events of these few days and the crying has worn me down to the point I don’t even have the strength to change my clothes before collapsing on my bed. The moment I do so, my phone buzzes. It’s a message from Joshua. I manage to read it despite my eyesight being blurry but I fall asleep before I can reply to it.
Joshuji:
I know you weren’t home.
Seen you walking through the door just now.
I’m not going to ask you anything, just wanted to tell you
that I hope you feel a little bit better after getting some fresh air.
When you’ll be ready to talk about it, I’m only one call away.
Love you a lot, Soons!
Jihoon’s point of view
Pulling our most serious expression to conceal how much we’re actually freaking out, the guys and I walk inside the One-Seven K company building. It’s only half-past seven in the morning but the lobby is packed with almost a hundred people murmuring at the same time, making my ears hurt a little from the noise.
Squeezing our way to the empty space Mingyu spotted, we try not to bump into this or that person practising their choreographies or cut the way to those who are frantically pacing back and forth in the vain attempt at calming themselves down. When we reach our spot, I can take a better look at the room and notice that the students and younglings here are mostly by themselves or in pairs. There isn’t a group as big as ours.
Thinking about it, being scouted as a whole group, especially from a big company like this one, is a rare thing. Training a group formed prior to the auditions is much more difficult than training people individually and have them later join a group. This is because, in the first case, the group has already an established style in which they perform so they are less malleable than people who have no experience in being in a group and perform as such. In the latter case, they even have the possibility to combine the trainees in a way as such to create the “perfect” group, ready to debut and become the next sensation. Groups like Jeonghan’s bitches have such a great bond within its members that it would be difficult to have someone else join and alter the band’s balance. This is the reason why, when scouters go to school festivals or talent shows and watch groups perform, they’d usually pick only the most outstanding members, a number that rarely goes beyond two.
Seeing that Mr Cha walked in the backstage to invite all of us to the audition could mean only two things. The first one is that he liked us as a whole package and wanted the others in the company to see what he has seen. The second one is that he didn’t know which one of us to choose and so he thought he would let the director pick the ones he deems suited for the agency’s image. Yes, because there’s still the risk of them wanting to sign a contract with only a couple of us. However, knowing this, we all promised that we’re in this together and so, as much as this opportunity is a rare one, even if only one of is left out, we’re all out.
Jeonghan’s bitches started dreaming together and will continue to be together till the end of its days.
“Jihoon-ah,” Seungkwan calls my name, nudging my side.
“What?”
“We got to go.” He nods his head towards the centre of the room. “Mr Cha has just explained that we're going inside the audition room in groups of ten or so candidates. He has done the first roll call and called our name.”
“Already?!”
“Yeah...I guess you were spacing out. Are you nervous?”
The people around us crowd around Mr Cha, ready to follow him inside the company. Some of the candidates are trying to win his favour by using this or that flattery but Mr Cha doesn't seem too fazed by it. We're the last ones to reach the group and when we do, the man's lips slightly curve up as If he is relieved that we came. Then, he immediately shifts his eyes back to the clipboard in his hands. Once he makes sure that the first group of people is all here, he walks to the turnstile gate and let us in before entering. He reaches the head of the group and proceeds along the long white hallway.
“It would be weird if I wasn’t, hyung.” I sigh and, with the corner of my eyes, I see Seungkwan do the same next to me. “I know how much we practised and how much passion we put into it but we also know that this isn't enough to let us pass the audition. The directors are the ones deciding if we're worth it or not.”
He nods his head in agreement. “They don't see the struggles one had to go through to get here. They see one performance and judge what they see and hear in front of them at that very moment.”
“It may seem unfair but if you think about it, this is how it is supposed to be done.” Jeonghan, who apparently has been listening to us, intervenes. “After the debut, a group needs to perform in front of a lot of people who, especially at first, know almost nothing about the work we did to get on that stage. They judge what they see at the moment and get an impression of us solely on that.”
“However, the people in the audition room do see if someone has the talent and the potential to become that person who can do great on stage after going through some training,” Seungcheol says from behind, his head peeking in between Seungkwan and me. “No one is born a professional performer after all.”
Before someone could keep the conversation going, Mingyu turns around. His eyes are wide in shock and motions us to get closer. When we do, he whispers, “I heard those in front of me saying that Junhui and Minghao are going to assist the audition and even help the directors.”
“Junhui and Minghao as in the members of My Ai, aka the most famous duo from One-Seven K?” Seungkwan, trying his best not to squeal, whisper-shouts. When Mingyu nods, he adds, “Are you kidding me?”
“I'm not...I mean, I don't know if it's true or not but if that's the case, we're going to meet THE stars.” Mingyu claps like a seal from how excited he is.
“Wait, shouldn't be they in China to promote their new album? What are they doing here?” Seungcheol asks, visibly confused but thrilled.
Seungkwan clicks his tongue, a clear sign that he's ready to sass the elder. “You claim to be one their number one fan but I see all you do is lying.” He shakes his head and proceeds explaining, “Their promotions start next week as during this one they have to shoot for an episode for Knowing Brothers and one for 1 Night 2 Days.”
“They're so busy but still found time to be here?” Seungcheol's eyes are full of admiration.
“Maybe the directors wanted them to watch the candidates too. I mean, if they really are here.”
“Mmh...I wonder why, though.” Jeonghan rubs his chin.
"I guess we'll find out when we get in the room," Wonwoo says, patting Jeonghan's shoulder. "It won't take that long, anyway."
As we talk, the group suddenly comes to a halt in a huge waiting room, filled with sofas and vending machines.
Mr Cha turns around to face all of us who are staring at him, waiting for instructions. He clears his throat and fixes the glasses on his nose before giving one more look at his clipboard. "This is where you're going to stay while waiting for the others to audition. While the candidates are in, I please you to keep quiet because the studio is soundproof so we won't be hearing you, but the people in the offices around here, can." With his hand, he points at the various closed doors. "Once you walk out of the room, you are free to leave the building, there's no need to wait for all of the candidates of your group to finish, okay?"
"Yes." All of us answer in unison, doing a small bow to Mr Cha.
"Good. The first one to enter is Lee Chan."
"I'm here!" The young boy takes a step forward.
Since the moment I saw him in the lobby, I noticed he had a familiar face but couldn't remember where I had seen him. However, the moment they called his name, I recognised him. He must be the boy who sung a trot song during our school's festival and he became so popular among the students after his show. From that little I've seen in his video on our school page, Lee Chan seemed a talented and promising boy. I wonder if he’s going to be picked by the agency.
"Let's go in, shall we?" Mr Cha gives him a small smile and Lee Chan nods. "The rest of you can sit down on the sofas.”
We do as we’re told and watch Lee Chan walk in the room, disappearing behind the white door. The click sound of the door closing unlocks everyone’s panic mode.
No one dares to say a word, afraid of being scolded by the workers, but the gazes are enough to understand that we’re all feeling the same things. One look at one random guy and you’ll see his expression mirrored by the girl next to him, by the little boy next to her and so on. However, there’s nothing we can do apart from sitting on these couches, going through an endless wait.
Eyes never leaving the digital display hanging on the wall in front of me, I’ve watched the time slowly clock by.
When Lee Chan walked triumphantly out of the room not even ten minutes later, saying that he did it and got in, everyone’s mood brightened.
‘The first audition was already a success. Will it be this easy for us too?’
This was the general unspoken hope of all the candidates in the waiting room and it helped brighten the mood. But when the next three people were all rejected, the atmosphere was back to being gloomy.
I cannot stop shifting on the sofa as I wait for our turn to come; Mingyu who is sitting next to me is biting his nails; Seungkwan is next to the coffee machine, obviously going over his part in his head as his he keeps the tempo with his foot; Jeonghan and Wonwoo are next to the window, basking in the sunlight with their eyes closed as some of the female candidates sneak looks at them; Joshua and Seungcheol are pacing back and forth in the room, trying to calm themselves down.
“Al1, it’s your turn,” the girl who has just come out of the audition room says.
For a moment nobody moves until we realise it is our turn. Going for a formal audition, we couldn’t use Jeonghan’s bitches as our name so we gave them our old name Al1. The seven of us rush to the door and we take a deep breath before walking in.
As soon as we reach our spot in the middle of the room, we bow to the directors and producers sitting at a long table in front of us. Rumours being true, Junhui and Minghao are here too.
After the general presentation of the band and the individual one, Mr Cha turns to look at his colleagues and says, “These are the boys I was telling you about.”
“I expect a lot from you then,” The man sitting in the middle going by the name Kang Bon Hwa and who’s probably the CEO says. “Mr Cha praised you a lot.”
“We will live up to your expectations.” The fire burning in Seungcheol’s eyes doesn’t go unnoticed and Mr Cha nods with a smile on his lips.
“Since we’re all curious about seeing this famous performance live, what do you think about playing just a small part for us before starting with the real audition?” Mr Kang rotates his ballpen in between his fingers while with the other hand he flips through some papers to find a blank page.
I look at the others and read on their faces the same panic I feel inside. We aren’t ready to play Youngblood again, we haven’t practised for it. We spent a whole week getting ready for our main song and a side one in case they wanted to listen to something different. The thought of them wanting to watch our cover hasn’t crossed our minds at all. However, if we refuse to do so, we can say goodbye to the audition at this exact moment.
I take a deep breath and I’m the first one to move, bowing to the audition committee and then reaching the drums. If we want to be seen as professionals, we have to act like ones and this means we have to overcome all of the difficulties, showing that they’re not much of a problem for us.
One by one, the others too bow and go to their respective position, spending a few seconds getting accustomed to the instruments the agency prepared for us. Before the judges could make a comment on how nervous we looked or our hands are shivering, I bring my drumsticks together, giving the others the tempo.
I close my eyes, trying to channel the feelings I had inside of me back at the festival.
‘What was I thinking about when we played?’
Once Wonwoo sings his part, I remember and the name makes me feel a pang in the heart, one that I grew too familiar with.
‘Soonyoung.’
Of course, I was thinking about him. Since the moment Seungkwan had us listening to this song, the slanted-eyed boy’s face popped inside my head. Probably, it’s because of how some of the lyrics spoke to me on a personal level.
There are lines that remind me of how Soonyoung and I were while I was dating Chanyeol. Hanging out, lazing around at my house or just talking for hours over the phone, there’s nothing the two of us didn’t do just to spend as much time as we could together. But every time we said goodbye, each time we left the other’s side there was a bittersweet feeling lingering in the air. We were both aware of it but, at the same time, we couldn’t fight it. That’s why, afraid it was going to be the last time, I held him tight in my arms and prayed in my heart to stay with him, talk to him, see him once more.
Some other lines remind me of the deadlock we’re in now, driving me insane, and I have no one to blame but myself for it. If I’m here, in this situation, is only because of me and of how careless I was the night I confessed. If I only stood in my place, Soonyoung would still be talking to me and not trying to avoid me.
I kind of deserved it.
However, what angers me a little is how he was the one asking to stay friends but he’s now backing out. Maybe I was just deluding myself thinking that he cares about me and didn’t want to break our friendship but I’m starting to think that he said so only because he wanted to be polite.
When he asked, I was ready to bear all of the pain that would’ve come by standing by his side if being friends was what he really wanted. But, apparently, he didn’t want that. He wants me out of his life but doesn’t know how to say so.
‘You push and I’m pulling away from you’
On that night, I told myself that waiting for him would’ve been worth the wait and the pain. But I’m not that sure anymore.
Seeing how he acts around me, how he seems so uncomfortable when I’m in the same space as him, makes me feel like he’s trying to push me away. At this point, having lost all of my hopes, I wondered if pulling away from him was the right thing to do. Maybe, at least one of us could be happy.
I’m not the one who relies a lot on the signs given by the universe but seeing how we got cast for an audition right after singing this very song, well, I couldn’t really turn a blind eye to it.
Pulling away may be the solution to the problem. Staying away from each other means that he can be his own old self, carefree and comfortable around his friends. It means that I can suffer less while waiting for the memory of him to slowly fade and the pain in my heart to numb.
Having been too deep in my thoughts, I barely realise that the song has ended. Mildly panicking, I look at the other’s expressions to check if perhaps I messed up something while playing but seeing the small smirk on Seungkwan’s face, I relax. We did great, at least in our standards.
After a moment of silence, the audition board members clap their hands for us. Mr Cha looks proud of the performance, his chest having puffed as he shoots glances at his colleagues almost as to say “I told you.”
“When Mr Cha said you were good, I didn’t think you were this good!” Mrs Jo, a woman who might be in her thirties, says.
Everyone nods in agreement as another man speaks, “Yes! I’m excited to see what they will do with their own song, now.”
“I’m sure they will leave us as speechless.” Mr Cha points at us with his whole hand. “Whenever you’re ready.”
Mr Cha is a man who barely knows us, yet he is so confident about us and our skills. Seeing him smiling at us to silently encourage us to do our best, makes me feel like I want to burn the stage with our passion and give this performance all of me so I can repay the man of his trust and support.
With few shifts of instruments and positions, we ready to let them see who Jeonghan’s bitches really are.
Having checked everyone for one last time, Seungcheol nods towards me, giving me the signal to start.
Once again, I raise my drumsticks midair to beat a slower tempo. Just a few notes in and the atmosphere from before changed into a calmer and sadder one to suit the mood of the ballad. Seungkwan is at the keyboard, playing a gentle melody accompanied by the occasional drums and strumming of the guitar. Seungkwan, Joshua and Jeonghan’s soft vocals alternate in singing about a heartbreak: being left behind, wanting to be saved and wishing for the pain to stop.
The pain doesn’t stop, though, and the longing slowly turns into anger. Because of this shift, the whole mood of the song changes and a new beat drops. The drums play a little faster and the rhythm is heavier than before. The electric guitar and the bass make their entrance too as well as Seungcheol and Wonwoo’s rap. They’re almost growling as the anger grows: angry for being lied to, for the broken promises, anger towards oneself for not being able to let go.
In the end, the song goes back to the original pace, the sweet melody that feels somewhat lighter as the bad feelings have been let go of but it’s also sadder.
When even the echo fades, Mr Cha rises from his seat to clap. Shortly after, his colleagues and Junhui do the same. Minghao, on the other side of the table, is sitting but he’s clapping too with the hint of a smile on his lips.
“You’re really great,” Minghao is surprisingly the first one to speak. “and it’s not something I tell anyone.”
“True,” Junhui nods. “He barely compliments others so this means that you were amazing!”
“Of course, this doesn’t mean that you can’t strive to be even better.” Every trace of friendliness quickly disappeared from Minghao’s face. “There’s always room for improvement.”
“Absolutely,” Seungcheol answer as he bows to the other man.
“Have you produced this song?” Mrs Jo asks in a neutral tone.
Seungkwan points at me, standing by his side. “Yes, our maknae Jihoon produces all of the songs and we help him with lyrics and arrangements.”
“So, Jihoon. Can you talk a bit about the song? To see if I got all you wanted to convey.” Mrs Jo’s attention is all on me.
I gulp before taking a step forward and bowing to the committees. “Yes. The song is called ‘Secrets of a soul’ and it’s about the lingering feelings someone may have after a breakup. At first, it’s just sadness and wanting the significant other to come back and mend the broken heart. But then, as time passes, the sadness becomes anger towards the other person for leaving the protagonist of the song feeling miserable. But it’s also anger towards themselves for not being strong enough to let this love go. In the end, though, one realises that their significant other is not coming back. This means that one has to learn how to live with their crippled heart until someone new will come to mend it.” I take a breath as I spoke with no pause in between my words, almost as if I was rapping. “However, the person we’re talking about is someone who is seen always smiling by the people they keep around. So, all of this struggle happens inside the protagonist’s mind. These feelings are the secrets of their soul that no one but themselves will ever know.”
“So the shifts in the rhythm and in the genre reflect the shifts of the emotions inside the person,” Mingyu adds to make sure the audition board sees the big picture.
Mrs Jo looks genuinely amazed at the work, which is a great boost for my confidence and for the others’ one too. “Your story almost matched with what I felt while listening to it. The only differences are because I related to some part of the song based on my own experience but this is normal when it comes to music, am I right?” She giggles. “Jihoon, you did a great job producing it but even a greater job was done by all of you together.”
Mr Cha nods in agreement and says, “It’s easy for the one who wrote it to get the feelings right when he sings or plays, but to someone who’s ‘foreign’ to them it may difficult to channel the same kind of emotions. However, you were all on the same wavelength, you all made the song yours in every possible way.”
“Mr Cha wasn’t exaggerating when he said that you’re almost like professionals already.” Mrs Jo smiles as she scribbles down something on her papers. “But as Mr Xu said, there is room for improvement. You need to polish some of your vocals and some parts of the melody but the overall feeling is fantastic.”
“I actually can’t wait to have a collab with them,” Junhui says as he shifts on his chair and looking at Minghao.
The latter fixes the glass on the bridge of his nose. “Why not. They seem like cool guys. However, in the meantime you neet to do your best. Okay?”
“Yes, sunbaenim!” We all shout at the top of our lungs.
Despite having relaxed as time went by, some uneasiness is still left. Especially when we have been receiving compliments left and right but the one who has to give the final judgment is saying nothing.
Mr Kang has been sitting with one hand supporting his chin while with the other jotted words down on his notebook. He silently watched the two performances but not a word has left his mouth. Even if he said he was looking forward to what we had to show, it almost felt as if at a certain point he had just lost interest in us. This made me fear that it was almost sure we didn’t pass this audition.
‘There are thousands of other people like you right outside that very door. They can do the same if not better than what you did.’
At this point, this is the kind of comment I expect to hear from the man. I am ready to receive this slap on the face, the slap that will bring me back to reality. Maybe this has only been a dream, maybe I even imagined the positive feedback and I’ll soon wake up in my room to live yet another painful day without Soonyoung. Passing this audition was maybe my only way out of this infinite loop of pretending to be fine and breaking down but it seems like it is about to crumble down.
Mrs Jo and Mr Cha are about to call out Mr Kang’s name, when the latter stands up from his chair and, wearing a serious expression on his face and with a firm tone, says “Welcome to One-Seven K. You can train here starting from tomorrow and I look forward to working with you.”
Soonyoung’s point of view
“Yes, Seok, I’m almost there…
“I know I’m the only one missing but I can’t run!
“The street is too crowded.
“I’m here. I’ll come in.”
Finally being outside Coffee & Goodpie, I hang up the phone and put it inside the pocket of my denim jacket. Not completely trusting Seokmin, I check from the big glass on the side of the building if the others are in there too.
‘Okay, he was telling the truth…’ All of the boys are gathered around a large table in the middle of the room, looking way too serious and even a bit gloomy.
Shaking my head and putting a big smile on, I walk around the building to get to the main entry. Once I step in, as if he was a meerkat, Seokmin’s head pops up among the others. On his face, there’s no trace of happiness and his pupils are shaking. He’s playing with Joshua’s fingers, something he does when he’s nervous. My smile drops in the fraction of a second and my feet almost rush me to the table. Not finding the courage to greet them, I just stand there, stealing glances at the others. They seem down, shoulders sagging and hushed sighs leaving their mouths, eyes trained on their laps.
When I turn back to Seokmin, he has his lips pursed and nods almost imperceptibly, making my heart sink, breath stuck in my throat.
‘Did they not make it?’
My entire body freezes at the thought of them being rejected at the audition. It just doesn’t make sense to me. It doesn’t seem right. How wrong have things gone for them to be like this?
I don’t know how long I stand there, panicking inside, before Seungcheol moves and pats the stool between him and Wonwoo.
“Soonyoung, sit down.” His voice is so small that almost breaks my heart. “We have to tell you something. Seokmin and Hansol already know, Joshua and Seungkwan told them.”
“Yes, hyung.” Finally feeling my body again, I rush to sit between them and take Wonwoo’s hand in mine. “Tell me everything.”
Seungcheol sighs as if he doesn’t know where to start. He cannot even look at me in the eyes. “We’ve been at the agency this morning and…” The man pauses and points at his boyfriend. “Jeonghan, you tell him. I can’t…” His voice breaks, trying hard not to cry.
Patting his boyfriend’s back, Jeonghan steps in. “You know how much effort we put into rehearsals, no?” He asks.
“I know,” I say. “You almost didn’t sleep for a week straight to practice.”
He nods and proceeds to say, “We went there and before playing our song...they asked us to perform Youngblood again.”
My eyes go wide at the mention of the song. “They did what?! Don’t they usually have a video for that?”
“They do but still wanted to see us live.”
“So, what happened?” I hurry him, not being able to bear the slow burn anymore, Wonwoo squeezing my hand.
Jeonghan sighs and licks his lips as he brushes a hand through his locks. “We played it and played our song right after..” He pauses for what it seems like an eternity before saying, “Joshua, you say it.” He looks away from me, eyes towards the ceiling to prevent the tears from falling.
Having run out of patience, I turn to Joshua and plead him with my gaze along with my words. “Hurry up, please. Don’t tell me that…”
“WE PASSED THE AUDITION!” Joshua yells, throwing his hands in the air.
A loud roar comes from the boys sitting around me while I sit there, not fully grasping the situation. Confused as what is really going on, I watch the others cheer while shaking the person sitting next to them; watch them standing to jump in circles, dragging Kihyun, who was passing by, to celebrate with them.
Grabbing Seungcheol’s arm to have him look at me, I ask, “Did I just get pranked?!”
“Yup.” His laugh is a mischievous one as he runs to repair himself behind Wonwoo. “And you should’ve seen your face.”
“Actually, I recorded everything.” Seungkwan waves his phone in the air. “This moment should never be forgotten!”
Bolting up, I run around the table to hit Seungkwan’s shoulder. “Delete it. It’s not funny!”
“It is, indeed.” Seokmin snickers “You’ll think the same when you rewatch it.”
“I hate you all!” I plop down on my stool, arms crossed on my chest. “But I have to admit that you’re acting was great. You fooled me.”
Wonwoo scoots closer with his chair and pinches my cheek. “Their acting was bad, it’s you who’s easy to fool.”
I stick my tongue out to which he chuckles, his nose scrunching in that way I always find so adorable.
“Don’t you have anything else to say?” Seungkwan asks as he leans on the table, hand supporting his chin.
“Well...what should I say…” I take my time, enjoying the way the expectantly look for my reaction. “CONGRATULATIONS! I AM SO PROUD OF YOU!” I shout and another wave of cheers comes from them. However, this time Kihyun comes to shush us, still a bit fearful of getting dragged in the chaos.
When everyone has eventually calmed down, we place our orders for something to drink and eat while Seokmin, Hansol and I listen to the others taking turns to tell the details of the audition. How they felt nervous, how the competition was strong and how they managed to smite the whole board to the point they don’t want to waste not even a day of their training.
“Starting tomorrow, we’ll officially be One-Seven K trainees!” Seungkwan shrieks directly in Hansol’s ear who’s probably used to it since he doesn’t budge.
“We will also live together!” Mingyu excitedly throws his hands in the air, wiggling his entire body. “Isn’t it amazing?”
“Well, considering how we basically lived together for the past week, I don’t know if I have to be happy or get ready to live in a dumpster,” Wonwoo says and then comes to not-really-whisper in my ear. “They left wrappers and cans on every possible surface because they were too lazy to clean after themselves.”
“Okay, first of all, it was so we wouldn’t waste time! We needed every second to practice.” Seungkwan raises from his stool, looking like he’s ready to fight Wonwoo. “Second, you didn’t clean up either!”
“What are you saying?! I did!” Wonwoo strikes back. “Mingyu, Jihoon and I were the only ones who cleaned!”
“Jihoon-ah! Say something!” Seungkwan turns to Jihoon, who is sitting next to Hansol, looking for support.
“This time, I’m on Wonwoo’s side.” With one sentence only, Jihoon triggers Seungkwan’s nagging side.
Meanwhile Seungkwan is busy explaining what happened and his reasons in a very dramatic way, I can hear Jeonghan on the side saying “It’s going to be like this every day, am I right?”
Joshua nods, defeated. “I’m afraid it is going to be even worse.”
“We need some rules…” Seungcheol sighs. “But we will think about it when we will be in our dorm.” He then smiles at Kihyun who’s finally here with our order.
For a while we all sit in silence, eyes glued to the sandwiches, mini cakes and macarons that our friend is gently placing in the middle of the table. The guys must have all been hungry since the moment Kihyun leaves, they all throw themselves over the food.
‘They must’ve been too nervous to eat breakfast this morning.’
Since I’m not that hungry, I move my stool back so I don’t get in Seungcheol or Wonwoo’s way. Sipping on my drink, I let my eyes wander on each one of them. The light they radiate whenever they’re this happy, it’s almost blinding. Imagine having nine tiny suns brightening every day and night of your life. This is how it feels having them by my side. This is how special they are.
My heart swells in size whenever memories of the time spent together flood my mind, making me realize how dreadful and dark my world could be without them. It’s always mind-blowing how important they came to be and the amount of affection I feel for them.
When my wandering eyes land on Jihoon, my heart shrinks so quickly that a sharp pain crosses my chest.
‘Jihoon.’
Of course, my eyes stopped there. It can’t be helped.
Jihoon is sitting across from me, sharing a piece of red velvet with Mingyu. The latter is trying to feed him but he refuses, making the tall guy sulk like a baby. The scene must be of Jihoon’s liking since it brings a smile on his face, eyes turning into two perfect crescent moons.
Knowing that I’ve been staring at him for way too long, I shift my gaze on the food. I just steal some glances whenever I can, to catch just a little bit more of the look I always loved on Jihoon.
To me, he looks the most beautiful when he smiles. That sweet curvature of lips breaking through the sharpness of his features and softening them. It feels like a spell he secretly casts to entrance people. And oh, if someone is immune to it, that could never be me as I’m enchanted by it each day more. Trust me when I say that, whenever he smiles, I would gladly get lost in it and never be found.
However, instead of getting lost in it, I have lost countless moments of him smiling. How much I hated myself for it, for how gloomy he looked in the times we were together. This week has been quite the exception but I guess it’s only because he has new reasons to be happy that overthrow the ones he has to be sad. The idea of living with his friends; training under a big company and debut; having the possibility of working with professional producers so he can improve his skills; hopefully receiving the love of thousands if not millions of fans.
Things might be really good for him in the future and it might be because none of the reasons for this new-found happiness has me in it. This further proves that Jihoon can be truly happy only if I’m out of the picture.
Suddenly, a hand comes on my tight, gently squeezing it. I look up and see Wonwoo wearing a worried expression. “Why do you look so down?”
“No, I don’t,” I lie, fast to smile at him even if it’s forced.
“Don’t lie to me.” Wonwoo moves to take one of my hands in his. “What happened?” He rubs his thumbs on my skin and a shiver goes down my spine.
“Nothing, I don’t want to spoil the mood.” I avert my gaze from him but I’m met with Seungcheol’s eyes.
“You won’t,” He says in a serious tone, sounding like the leader he is. “You can tell us anything.”
Hesitantly, I look around myself and watch the others nodding to both agree with Seungcheol’s words and to encourage me. ”Well, I was just thinking that from tomorrow your training will start, meaning that you will be busy...” I squeeze Wonwoo’s hand for comfort before asking the question I’ve been afraid to ask. ”Doesn’t this mean we can’t spend time together anymore?”
Seungcheol’s eyes go wide and his lips pout when he exclaims, ”Of course, we can!”
”Soons,” Joshua calls for me with almost a reprimanding tone. “We might end up having less free time but this doesn’t mean that we won’t spend it with Seokmin, Hansol or you.”
”Joshua is right.” Jeonghan chimes in.
“What about your families, though?” I ask, trying to make them reason about it. “You must spend time with them.”
“True, but we will manage things so we can spend time with both our families and you.” Jeonghan stretches his body to pat me on the shoulder.
”Last week, I made ourselves promise that we will be together forever,” Seungcheol says, fierce eyes looking at each and every one of us. “And I meant it.” When his eyes land on me, his face softens. “There is no way we will let go of you. We’re family.”
“Most of us are dating each other, though. Isn’t that incest?” Jeonghan asks, hitting his boyfriend’s shoulder.
“It’s not like we’re blood-related!” Seungcheol whines. “And what I meant is that we…”
“We’re brothers from another mother,” Hansol says out of nowhere, winking at Seungcheol after interrupting him.
“But…” My words are cut off by Wonwoo.
”You know that if hyung said it, he will do it for real. He’s a man of his words.” Wonwoo smiles at me and, for a while, it seems that all of my worries disappeared.
”Is this what was bothering you?” Seungcheol asks.
Pouting, I nod. “Now I feel like an idiot, though.”
”There’s no need to...If I were in your shoes, I would be feeling the same.” Seungcheol ruffles my hair. “That’s why I want to assure you that we’re not going anywhere without you three.”
I look at him with glassy eyes. A single tear does escape despite how much I tried to hold it in. ”Okay, hyung, you’re going to make me cry.”
Seungcheol suddenly hits on the table with the palm of his hand. ”I, Choi Seungcheol, leader of Jeonghan’s bitches and self-proclaimed father of this family, promise that, no matter what, we will be together.”
”Hyung, stop before I cry a river.” Seokmin’s cheeks are wet with tears that he has probably shed while we were talking.
I take a look at the rest and they were more or less in the same state as the two of us: on the verge of crying.
”GROUP HUG!” Seungkwan shouts before he could cry, too.
I get dragged to one side of the table. The boys push Seokmin, Hansol and I to stand together and then throwing their arms to envelope us in a giant hug. We stay like this for a while, until another waiter comes to scold us because we’re blocking his way.
Laughing at ourselves because of how emotional we became, we lively chat for a while longer, forgetting of all our worries and fears.
Then, the time comes for the boys to go home. They need to pack their things as their journey to fame is about to start.
This time, for real.
We say our goodbyes after hugging the shit out of each other and wished the boys the bestest of luck. Wanting to follow Wonwoo to help him packing and spend more time with him, I instead find myself in the same car with Joshua, Seokmin and Jihoon in the direction of our houses.
The whole ride home is a bit awkward as Jihoon and I don’t really talk to each other unless the circumstances call for it. Joshua tried to strike a conversation with us when we got in the car but sensing how it was going nowhere, he gave up and turned on the stereo so that no one could feel uncomfortable in the attempt of filling in the silence.
Leaning with my head on the glass, I close my eyes and let the music bring me to a happier place, some sort of heaven. I can see myself standing in a huge field where the grass reaches my ankles. I’m taking in the view of the hills and mountains surrounding me, the breeze grazing my skin and the grass tickling it. The sound of the birds makes me feel as if I can fly with them so I open my arms, hoping to take flight and soar the sky towards a place where none of the pain I caused in the real world exists.
It’s a place where all of us are carelessly running in a field, rolling in the grass and chilling in the sun.
It’s a place where Jihoon and I can lay on the ground, one hand behind our heads to support it and the other pointing at the sky as we try to guess the shapes of the clouds, bursting out laughing when the other says something ridiculous. He would bring his hand on his stomach as he laughs, his eyes closing and head tilting to the side and I would just watch him with a smile adorning my lips and a fond gaze. When he calms down, I would turn on my side, both arms under my head, waiting for him to look at me and see his reflection in my eyes, see how he is in my eyes: perfect in every way.
In the meantime, I would get lost in his gaze as I try to guess what he’s thinking about and if he can see how smitten I am by him. We would probably stay like this till the sun sets on us or even during the dark twilight which, to me, wouldn’t seem that dark since I’d have the brightest star, my light, lying right beside me.
When my hand is about to reach his face, he disappears. Slowly and painfully. Like him, the others too disappear one by one and I am left alone in that green space that now feels like hell.
Before I could try and run to look for the boys, I’m brought back on Earth by the car abruptly stopping.
We’re in front of Jihoon’s house.
Watching him getting ready to leave feels like someone has put a heavy concrete block on my chest. I would like to shout him not to leave yet, not to leave things like this between us because I couldn’t live with the thought of him thinking that I might not want to be his friend anymore but all the courage I had gathered on the day of the festival is gone. Once again, I’m a coward.
“Then, I’ll get going,” Jihoon says when he has collected his bag and jacket. “I’ll see you tomorrow hyung. Seokmin, Soonyoung, until next time, I guess.”
“Bye, Jihoon. Take care of yourself, okay?” Seokmin twists his body so he can pat Jihoon’s shoulder.
“Yes, don’t worry.” Jihoon nods one last time and briefly looks at me weakly waving at him, words stuck in my throat.
He gets off the car and goes, slowly, on his driveway. Thinking that Joshua would now drive towards my house, I tear my eyes from Jihoon’s back to look in front of me. However, Joshua doesn’t restart the car. He turns around and looks at me with a scolding gaze.
"Are you letting him go like that?" He nods in Jihoon’s direction.
Joshua doesn’t need to add anything else to his words. His gaze is enough to convey all of his unspoken thoughts. ‘Are you letting him go without saying something? Do you really want things to end like this? With you two probably ending up not talking to each other ever again?’
"I don't want to," I whisper as I turn my head to watch Jihoon who’s now closer to his house's door.
“Once he disappears behind that door, it’s the end,” Seokmin says as he looks in the same direction as me. Jihoon has stopped in his tracks to look for his house keys. "So what are you waiting for?"
‘In the worst-case scenario, I won’t see him for a while so I’ll have my time to heal, right? At least I won’t blame myself for not trying.’
Fueled by a spark of courage, I nod and whisper a soft "thank you" to both of my friends before bolting out of the car, shouting "Jihoon-ah!" and running to Jihoon.
He turns around, confusion and shock written all over his face. "Yes?"
When I catch up to him, I can’t look at him right in the eyes. Rubbing my neck and with my head turned towards the door, I say, "I can help you if you want…"
"Doesn’t Joshua hyung need help with his luggage?" He asks before I even finish speaking.
Pretending that the tone of his voice didn’t hurt me and summoning the stubborn and annoying me, I answer, "He does but Seokmin is going to help him. Plus, I thought it could be a chance for me to greet your mother since I haven’t seen her in a while."
“It would be rude of me to say no now, right?” Jihoon lets out a bitter scoff and moves to open the door. "Come in, then." He takes off his shoes and, after shouting “I’m home” to his mother, he disappears in his room.
Mrs Lee, who came to check on Jihoon, is surprised when she sees me standing like an idiot outside the door. She hurries me inside and waits for me to take off my shoes before patting my head, asking me how I’ve been doing and scolding me for having lost weight and for not visiting.
She spends quite some time chatting about what has happened in the time I wasn’t here, how much Jihoon was stressed because of the festival first and the auditions later; how often he would skip meals to practice in his room or how he would rush out of the house and come back a couple of days later to just shower and change his clothes; how happy he was when in the morning he came back home with the news of having passed the audition but became sad when he mentioned the fact he wouldn’t be able to spend time with his parents starting from tomorrow. Of course, Mrs Lee said she will be missing her child but she has to let him go for him to achieve his dream of becoming an artist.
When she realises that it’s rude of her to keep me in the living room when I should be spending some more time with Jihoon, she shoves a dish full of fruit into my hands and shooes me away.
Legs threatening to give in from the nervousness, I wobble towards Jihoon’s room. I take my sweet time to collect my emotions and force a calm expression on my face before reaching for the doorknob with a trembling hand. When I walk in, I find a quite messy room.
The closet is almost empty as the clothes that it once contained are scattered on Jihoon’s bed and desk. Some were on the floor too, Jihoon dancing around them, careful not to step on this or that shirt. A huge suitcase lays open in the middle of the room, one side already full of badly folded clothes.
“Give me that, I’ll fold it for you.” I stretch my hand towards him who is trying to fold a T-shirt against his chest.
At first, Jihoon seems reluctant and ignores my words but feeling my eyes on himself, he throws the piece of cloth to me. Careful of not stepping on his things, I make myself some space in front of the luggage and sit on the floor. I fold his shirt and put it in the luggage, extending my arm in his direction “Another one.”
Jihoon picks up another T-shirt and gives it to me, without looking at me. We spend time working in silence. Him handing the clothes and me folding them before putting them in the suitcase.
It was an uncomfortable silence and I thought about anything I could’ve said to ease the tension but every word that came up into my mind felt as if it would’ve only worsened the already tense mood. So I just kept my mouth shut, waiting for Jihoon to say something.
And he eventually did.
Jihoon’s voice comes from behind me as he’s sitting on his bed when he asks, “Why are you doing this, Soonyoung?”
I freeze for a second even though I was expecting this question to come. “Helping you packing, I think it’s obvious,” I say, pretending not to know the true meaning behind his words.
“Don’t play pretend.” Jihoon sees right through me. “You know I don’t mean that. Why are you here when we haven’t talked for...a month?”
“Almost a month and a half,” I answer, a bitter smile coming to tug at the corner of my lips, feeling like a fool for keeping track of the time. I put the piece of cloth I was folding inside the luggage and turn with my body towards him. “I’m sorry, Jihoon.”
“For what? For having ignored me when you were the one suggesting we should be friends? Were you trying to fool me? Because you totally succeeded with that.” He spits out the things he may have kept inside all this time. “I am a fool who believed you and your words.”
“I never tried to fool you! I really meant it when I said that I still wanted to be your friend!” I half-shout after being hit right where it already hurt.
“Then why did you do that? Why didn’t you reach out to me?” Jihoon’s tone is low as he slowly speaks each word. “I told myself to not count the first couple of days as you may have needed time to process everything and throw it in the furthest and darkest corner of your mind; I told myself you would’ve texted me or come to my house as if nothing ever happened because you promised me. But you didn’t come nor sent one of your annoying stickers in our chat. Did you know how I felt? Like a fucking idiot who couldn’t read into things and see that, in reality, you didn’t want to have anything to do with me!” Jihoon is heavily breathing as he didn’t pause in between his words at all. It looks as if he has just run for one hundred meters at his full speed and probably his heart did, fueled by anger and repressed emotions.
Wanting to calm Jihoon down, I go sitting next to him on the bed. “Seeing how you didn’t come to school, I thought you weren’t ready for me to be back in your life as a friend. I wanted to give you space but in the end, I just turned into a coward who was scared of taking the first step and who hid behind the thought of you not wanting to talk to me.” Lifting my hand to put it on his back, I immediately let it fall sure that he wouldn’t want me to touch him. Not right now. “I’m really, really sorry, Jihoon.”
“You’re sorry.” Jihoon scoffs. “Do you think that this is going to erase all that has happened?”
“No.”
“Do you think this is going to heal my broken heart and stop me from regretting confessing to you?” He is hurt and every word of his feels like a knife cutting through my skin, leaving wounds deep enough to bleed without killing me.
“No.”
“Do you think that one sorry can bring us the way we were before? Are we going to pretend you didn’t hurt me?”
“No…”
“Then what the fuck do you think you’re doing?!” He shouts, not caring if his mother could hear him. “Tell me, Soonyoung, what is it that has you keep coming for me? Why do you keep scarring me with false hope?!” He bursts out crying as he keeps shouting, “What?! Tell me!”
Heart tearing apart at the sight of Jihoon breaking down, I take him in my arms and hold him tight against my chest. He grips the front of my shirt as he bawls his eyes out, letting all the pent up feelings and frustration go.
One of my hands goes to pat the back of his head. “I’m not asking you to forgive me. I know that I don’t deserve it. I’m here, Jihoon, to tell you that I realised that what I did was bad, that I was an idiot for letting you suffer like this. I’m here because I wanted to sort things out before it was too late. I didn’t want you to leave tomorrow thinking that I don’t care about you and our friendship.”
“But do you truly care?” Jihoon’s voice is muffled by the fabric of my shirt and his sobs.
“I do, I care about you a lot, much more than you think. If I didn’t, I wouldn’t be here, now. I would’ve let you go without saying a single word.” I hold him even tighter in my embrace, putting my cheek on the crown of his head.
Tears start spilling from my eyes too. Jihoon and I stay like that, in each other arms and pouring our hearts out.
When we calm down, I take his face in my hands and wipe his cheeks with my thumbs. “I’m sorry, Jihoon. They’re not empty words. I do regret what I did and won’t ever stop apologising to you.” With one of my hands lingering on his face, I put the other on his head to brush his hair. “They may sound like empty words to you since I already said these words once but then let this chaos happen again. But I mean it when I say I missed you. Are you still willing to try and be friends again?”
“Friends…” Hurt flashes in Jihoon still glassy eyes at the mention of the word and I’d just want to dig a hole and bury myself alive in it instead of watching him suffer. However, this is the best I can offer us now. “I can do that. But I won’t trust you that easily.”
“I’ll make sure to gain your trust again, sir.” I salute him as a soldier would do, in hopes to have him crack a smile.
It works as Jihoon’s lips lift upwards and then lets an “idiot” out before jokingly pushing me away to go back to packing his things. The atmosphere that had been awkward and turned gloomy, is now light, filled with moments of banters and us catching up with the things we missed about each other's lives.
This still hurts but at least it’s better than it was before.
Right before dinner time, Jihoon and I finish packing the luggage and a small backpack too. Having done my job, I am ready to leave. However, Mrs Lee stops me while I am putting my shoes on, insisting that I should have dinner with them. No matter how many times I refuse with the reason of the Lees spending the night with their son, Mrs Lee would ask me again until I am basically forced to give up on being stubborn and accept the invite.
Dinner goes by in a flash. Jihoon tells them about the prank they pulled on me earlier that day. Jihoon’s parents take turns into telling stories about Jihoon, on how much of a crybaby he was when taking music lessons. Jihoon told them countless times to stop but this only made them laugh and want to tell more embarrassing stories about their son. And they do so while Jihoon and I are eating some fruits.
To thank his mother for having me over, I give a hand with the cleaning and so does Jihoon. For a while, I feel so at ease as things are exactly like they were before.
Soon, the time for me to go back home comes. When I greet them, both Jihoon’s parents tell me to stop by one of these days even if Jihoon is not around as I’m always welcome to their house. I thank them and promise I’ll be here whenever I can.
“Wait for me, I’m coming with you,” Jihoon says, sitting on the floor to put his shoes on.
“I’m not a kid, Jihoonie. I live around here so none is going to kidnap me,” I wave my hands before Jihoon’s face to try stopping him from following me. “You should go to your room and rest!”
“I’d like to walk you home, though.” Jihoon is already tying his shoe-laces, sign that there’s no way of changing his mind. “Haven’t done that in a while.”
Sighing and rolling my eyes to the sky, I answer “Do as you want.”
Like that, we walk side by side for the short stretch of road between our houses. A comfortable silence settles between us as we don’t want to ruin this almost surreal moment of us being together, our arms brushing against each other as there’s no gap left between our bodies.
When we get outside my house, it seems as if neither of us wants to leave first so we stand there, facing each other until I throw my arms around Jihoon for the last hug before who-knows-when. It’s short but intense and my head almost spins from how tight we are holding each other.
“I’ll drop by Joshua’s house tomorrow morning before you both leave.” I sigh as Jihoon breaks the hug. “Won’t let you two go without having seen my face one last time.”
“You know that we will probably be home at the weekend, right?” Jihoon chuckles.
“So? Five days is still a long time without Jeonghan’s bitches around.”
“Dramatic.” Jihoon rolls his eyes and shakes his head, but unlike in the past, his expression is a fond one.
“Now, go home and sleep! You’ll need it for the times you would like to sleep but you can’t!” I shoo him away.
“Sleepless nights are about to come but what’s new about them? I would like to remind you that I’m used to this lifestyle.” Jihoon jokes as he walks to the end of the driveway and stops to wave his hand at me from afar. “Good night, Soons.”
My heart jumps in my chest at the nickname. Joshua and the rest of Jeonghan’s bitches use it too but it always has another effect coming from Jihoon. “Good night, Jihoonie.”
Waving for a while longer, he then turns his back to me and goes home. After releasing a long sigh, I rush inside my house.
I quickly greet my parents and give them the good news about the band. Then, with the excuse of being tired and of having to wake up early in the morning, I leave them to reach my bedroom. Closing all of the curtains to shut out even the moon and the stars, I sit on the armchair with my knees close to my chest.
Alone in the dark, I can finally let all of the tears I have held in while greeting Jihoon.
“You have let go of your hard feelings towards me. Now, you can slowly let go of me, too. Be happy, Jihoon. This is all I wish for you.”
Notes:
Here we are! Finally, all 13 of them have appeared in the story! Lee Chan as the legend he is and JunHao as the kings of China and Korea. Don't worry, they won't disappear! I'll find a way to have them pop up from time to time as the story unfolds.
Also, Soons and Ji are on talking terms again! Gosh, they were being unreasonable to the point that it took Jeonghan's bitches passing the audition for them to make up. I know the process of them making up may seem too fast but they still have feelings for e/o so they can't help but "forgive" the other a tad bit too fast even if they say the opposite with their words.
I wonder what will happen next...what are your guesses? Let me know in the comment!!As always, I want to thank you for being patient and putting up with me and this slow-burn story! I swear, I didn't plan for it to be this long but there are so many scenes that are fun to write that I don't have the heart to skip them! But I promise more exciting things will happen in the future!! Stay tuned if you're curious to see what will be of these two hehehe
Again, Zels, this one is for you! Thank you for being such a great friend, supporting and encouraging me when things seem to be tough. You're the best!
One last thing and I promise to shut up. I LOVE YOU ALL! STAY HEALTHY AND SAFE!
Chapter Text
Soonyoung’s point of view
Since the moment the Jeonghan’s bitches members have joined One-Seven K, there have been major changes in everyone’s daily routine. Some things were easy to get accustomed to, some others took more time but it was nothing we couldn't handle.
One of the weirdest things for me was having to break the habit of finding Joshua in front of my house’s door at eight sharp every morning. That's because going together to school has been one of the certainties in my life for the past few years and not seeing hyung waiting for me with his signature smile or hurrying me up...well, it felt kind of sad.
Of course, there were times where Joshua would skip school or wouldn't have to work so I had to go by myself but it was never for more than two days in a row! So, one week later, I was kind of a wreck but, as I said before, time flew by and it became less traumatic walking to school alone.
Thankfully, there was my lovely Seokmin.
He would wait for me at the gate or, if it was too hot, in the shadow cast by one of the high trees in the courtyard. The moment he would see me, his lips curved to give me the brightest smile to chase away the gloominess on my face and, most probably, to hide his own sadness. After all, he too missed his boyfriend.
The two of us would often stop for a short chat with the kids from our club before reaching our classroom. There is where I would get all nervous, sitting at my desk and exchanging some banter with Seokmin while mindlessly stealing glances at the door.
“Are you waiting for him?” Seokmin would ask once he realised I have spaced out from the conversation.
“Yeah, but I don’t know if Jihoon will come today,” is the answer I give my friend every single day.
See, the company respected Jihoon’s decision to continue his studies so he will graduate and then attend college. However, Jeonghan’s bitches are given their schedule late at night or first thing in the morning, so we never know when Jihoon will come to attend classes.
Due to the group’s schedule, Jihoon can only come when the staff manages to push practices in the afternoon. That’s why we don’t know which days he will show up. Sometimes he attends school for four days in a row or at least twice a week, meanwhile, there are times he doesn’t come at all.
Catching myself feeling nervous at the thought of him coming to school, I would tell myself that I shouldn’t care about this and keep living my life without Jihoon in the picture. The faster I get used to it, the better will these lonely days get.
Though I’m desperately trying, I can’t help but wait for him, wondering how he will look on that day. I can’t help but feel excited when he walks through the door and approaches us. His pearly smile, in contrast with the deep and dark circles around his eyes, never fails to bring a small “heartquake” inside my chest.
‘A mess. This is what I am.’ I would tell myself whenever my heart and mind can’t agree on what to do with my feelings for Jihoon.
It’s an unceasing push and pull between loving him and letting him go.
The days Jihoon is at school are undoubtedly some happy ones since Seokmin and I get to spend time with our friend. However, they can also be quite stressful for Jihoon.
Almost launching his bag onto his desk, Jihoon would almost skip to where Seokmin and I are sitting and greet us with a bear hug, going over how much he missed us. When he decides that it is finally time to release us, we dive in some small talk and Jihoon would tell us how he’s been doing or show us photos he took of our friends sprawled on their beds, with their mouths open and probably drooling. Before classes start, we would spam the groupchat with voice notes or short videos in which we mock our sleeping hyungs.
Then the bell would ring and signal the end of our peace.
Our classmates would storm inside the room and drag Jihoon to the middle of the room, rudely interrupting our conversation. In the short break in between classes, students from all over the school would come to interrogate him on all sorts of things. The few times Jihoon would manage to eat lunch with us, someone would come to our table and ask for autographs or talk about the trainee life and the celebrities he has met until now, both from his company and not.
Being on the path of becoming a public figure and knowing that past events can shape his future reputation, Jihoon would politely answer all the questions and comply with the endless requests at the expenses of his lunch getting cold or of the already little time he has with his friends.
When we are less lucky, Jihoon gets literally abducted by his friends from the music club of which he’s still an active member. They would ask him to share some of the tricks he learns with his vocal coaches and he would gladly share the ones he can actually teach. Like him, there are people in this club who wish to become artists in the future and will eventually learn this kind of things, so he doesn’t see why he cannot tell them already and help them being one step ahead of the game.
The most stressful moment of the day, though, is when a literal horde of screaming girls rush to where JIhoon is and surround him. The first time it happened, Seokmin and I were shocked at how the number of his fans had doubled just right after the festival and the spreading of the news about him joining one of the big companies of the country.
Even people who were never interested in his music would approach him just because he’s a soon-to-be idol. This makes them want to talk to him just so they can later have their few minutes of fame. It’s like I can already see them boasting to their friends or on the Internet that they’ve spoken to the Lee Jihoon, a celebrity.
At the end of the day, Jihoon’s manager would come and save him from the wild fans trapping him. With a few bows to the people still waving at him, Jihoon would get in the manager’s car ready to reach the practice studio where the others were probably waiting for him. Feeling guilty for all the disruptions throughout the day, Jihoon would send us an apology text along the lines of “I’m sorry I left you hanging. I’m sad we couldn’t spend that much time together today. I promise I will make up to you two soon” .
Seokmin and I can imagine how exhausting it might have been for him to deal with all those people, so we tell him to just rest during the ride and after practice. He doesn’t need to worry about us since we will have him for ourselves on the weekend.
As tiring as this “routine” may sound, Seokmin and I were nonetheless happy to have Jihoon with us.
Just him and no one else. It made those days feel like the old good times.
Having told Seokmin my intentions, he never really leaves me alone with Jihoon. However, he would spare glances towards the two of us, studying our gazes and our smiles. After all, he knows how Jihoon and I feel towards each other, so he knows what every gesture of ours means.
And that’s because he knows that and how much I suffered without Jihoon by my side that, one day, he asked me, “Why are you doing this?”
“I told you. If I stick around, he will never be truly happy and never will I. We will always stand there, back to back, wondering what could’ve happened if we turned around, what would’ve happened if we got together.” Saying it out loud made me realise how stupid this reasoning sounded.
“Do you know that you cannot completely disappear from his life? You have to see him whenever you are with Wonwoo or Jeonghan’s bitches.” Seokmin tried to make me reason.
However, to me, it sounded like the only path I could walk on. So, stubbornly, I kept saying, “I know, but there’s hope he will grow tired of me and maybe even find someone else to love. Then, being in the same room will probably be easier, at least for him. What is sure, though, it’s that we’re all bound to suffer if I keep reaching out to him.”
Seokmin deeply sighed and put a hand on my shoulder. “At least promise me that if he reaches out to you as a friend, you won’t reject him. Remember that you were the one who told him that your friendship still mattered.”
“Yes, Seok. It matters...he still matters to me.”
My plan was basically avoiding approaching Jihoon first whenever we saw each other in person and I didn’t even text him first.
However, Jihoon turned out to be more proactive than I thought he was. He was the one walking to me at school and the one sending me funny memes to strike a conversation. The latter was something we were used to doing before these feelings we were trying so hard to hide turned our friendship into a mess.
Back in the days, we used spending hours talking on the phone. But that wasn’t an option anymore unless you wanted to hear the ruckus going on inside their dorm. The few times Jihoon tried to call me, Joshua would sit next to him to eavesdrop our conversation and to yell things like “hi Soons”, “miss you” or randoms “I know, right?”. Then, you would hear Mingyu begging the others not to leave their things around the living room; Seungkwan nagging Seungcheol and Wonwoo, who apparently liked to spend most of the time in the dorms playing games. Jeonghan was the only one who couldn’t be heard because, knowing him, he was somewhere inside the house taking a nap.
That’s why, after a couple of traumatic experiences, Jihoon decided to have mercy on my ears and decided that texting was way better. So he texted me whenever he was waiting for his turn to shower, as he ate dinner or when they were watching a movie he couldn’t really focus on.
As time went by, talking to him became comfortable again and it also came natural losing ourselves into these nocturnal conversations that revolved around a lot of different things: the way we spent our day; the mini-events the various clubs are hosting before the hell that will break with finals and CSAT; the way the library is less packed now that Joshua isn’t working there anymore; the rumours about a new-born couple who aims at the title of “power couple” of the school; how quick the students' council is moving to get things ready for our graduation day.
And that, my friends, is a day Jihoon, Seokmin and I look forward to in both excitement and dread.
We’re so excited to leave the high school days behind as they’ve been kind of a hassle for us in many different ways. At the same time, though, we’re scared of leaving the somewhat safe world that our adolescence has been. We’re scared of taking another step towards an oh so scary world made of responsibilities which feel bigger than us, younglings who don’t have a clue of how the world really works as we didn’t get the chance to experience it. And yet, we’re thrown into it with nothing but the little knowledge we gathered from textbooks and the pressure of our parents’ expectations.
The pressure that already started the moment we first stepped our foot into school but for someone it weighs even more as years go by and the CSAT exam nears. “The results of your test and the university you’ll get into are going to heavily determine your future”, adults say, leading us teenagers to walk around with our noses buried in books or puffy eyes void of any emotion, afraid of failing.
Luckily, not everyone goes into full panic mode. Some of us don’t aim at being at the top of our class or of the whole school. We just work to get grades which are good enough to enrol at the university we like the most.
And, speaking of universities, I proudly announce that the three of us have already chosen where to go. Seokmin and I have hosted many different radio shows and even had our own show for quite some time. This led to the birth of our dream of becoming broadcasters and keep working together in the same field. Who knows, maybe one day we can become hosts of our own talk show. So ‘School of Media & Communication’ seems the best option for us.
Meanwhile, due to his schedule and the impossibility of him attending classes in person, Jihoon decided to pick a university with online courses and exams. He said he wants to study music and producing so he can have a better understanding of the field he’s currently working in.
If everything goes as we planned it, maybe one day Jeonghan’s bitches will promote one of their albums on a SeokSoon show. With probabilities of this happening, I can’t help but wonder how all of us will be when the time comes. Will our chemistry be as good as it is now if not even better? Will we fall out to the point it would be awkward for us to meet?
Well, no one knows yet. Seokmin says there’s no use in wondering about the future and we should rather focus on the present, where things are going great.
Yes, as Seungcheol promised, our group on KakaoTalk is alive and breathing!
Of course, due to everyone’s duties, it stays rather quiet in the morning but it gradually comes to life after Seokmin and I come back home from school till the point it becomes super busy when the boys get off work around ten in the evening. They usually start the conversation talking about how early they woke up or how late they are going to sleep because they have some work left to do; how strict their trainers are or how their meetings with the company’s staff have been going. When they’re not sending the derp pics they’ve collected during the day, they tell us about some of the concepts for their first album since they already know their debut date.
I know you’re asking yourselves “What?! A debut date?! Already?!” and the answer is YES! The countdown to their debut has already started and we can’t wait for them to shine on the stage.
Jihoon’s point of view
Moving into the new dorm has taken a lot more than we expected. To choose the rooms, we had to play multiple rounds of rock, paper, scissors until everyone was satisfied with what they got, including the roommate.
By the time we were done unpacking, we – read as Mingyu – were too tired to cook dinner.
“Tonight is the night we moved in,” Seungkwan starts, “so we need to follow the tradition and order some jajangmyeon .”
“And some tangsuyuk too!” Seungcheol high fives Joshua when Seungkwan nods.
“Just don’t forget to order some plain rice for me,” I say as I put the last package of instant ramen inside one of the cabinets in the kitchen.
“We could never forget.” Joshua taps a few times on his phone and shouts an excited “Done!” when he places the order. “Now, we just need to wait.”
And we indeed waited while playing word games to decide on who is going to pay for the meal. Joshua was the chosen one. When we heard the bell ringing, Joshua took his wallet and walked to the door. He expected to find the delivery guy so imagine his and our shock when we saw Mr Cha holding the bags full of our food. Seungkwan hit Mingyu on the shoulder and the latter ran to help Joshua taking the bags out of the man’s hands.
“Before someone says something, the meal is on me,” Mr Cha says as he walks inside the living room where we all are gathered. “It’s your reward for making it into the company.”
“Thank you so much”, Seungcheol says while bowing. We do the same.
“Now, sit down and eat before the noodles get too soggy.” He smiles and sits at the table with us.
During the whole dinner, Mr Cha asked us to tell our point of view on the audition; how it was saying goodbye to our families; how the new accommodation is and the arrangement of the rooms; if we’re excited about the life that is ahead of us.
When the ice between the man and us has definitely melted, Seungkwan clears his voice and asks, “Mr Cha, why are we in a dorm?”
Everyone turns to look at him as if he was crazy to ask such a question. “Pardon?” Mr Cha asks back.
“I mean, usually companies don’t have trainees live in a dorm unless they’re part of a group that is close to debuting,” Seungkwan explains under the amused gaze of the man, meanwhile the rest of us have realised that Seungkwan has a point. It is weird that we’re in an apartment when we’ve just become trainees.
“Because you’re soon debuting. Easy, no?” Mr Cha smirks, waiting for our reactions which are not late to arrive.
Mingyu almost choked on a piece of yellow radish and had to punch his own chest to help it go down; Seungcheol dropped his chopsticks in the half-empty dish of tangsuyuk as he was reaching for a piece of meat; Joshua, Jeonghan, Seungkwan and I had fallen dead-silent, thinking the man was just messing with us.
Spoiler alert, he wasn’t.
“Are you surprised?” Mr Cha teases us. “Well, it’s your fault that you left such a good impression on the company’s board! You amazed them with your talent!”
He then proceeded with telling us that Mr Kang wanted us to debut as soon as we can considering we already have a discrete number of fans thanks to the gigs we’ve been doing and thanks to the school festival. As they had told us at our audition, there are some things to be fixed but it is nothing we can’t work on with a few months of training.
They said that, if things go smoothly, we are ready to debut before the end of this year! And if the public’s response to the group is good, we can start right away with fan-signs and even a tour across the country!
“Do you know that the training is going to be tough and the teachers won’t be soft at all?” Mr Cha asks.
“We know and we cannot be more ready for it.” Seungcheol looks at us and then nods to the man standing before him.
“Then I’ll see you tomorrow morning at the company. At seven, your manager will come to pick you up. Rest well!”
And when he leaves, we hug the shit out of each other and skip around the house. Then, we come down from the clouds and clean the room before going to bed. The day after was going to be the beginning, the real one.
As Mr Cha announced, life has been quite hectic after the news of our debut but it was nothing we weren’t expecting. There were a lot of things that needed to be done in quite a short time. Because of this, we had no breaks in the morning but some spare time in the evening.
By ten o’clock we were at the dorm and despite how tough the day had been, we had some energy left to joke around and banter in the group chat with Seokmin, Soonyoung and Hansol. Watching everyone smile inside the house made my heart swell in size.
The guys were happy and so was I.
Honestly speaking, I thought that seven men living together would’ve been a disaster. Of course, we already had experienced staying for more than a week in the same house but here we were talking about a whole different kind of cohabitation.
I have to admit that things went better than expected with some rules listed down on a small blackboard hanging on one of the kitchen’s walls and the general silent agreement of respecting each other’s spaces. The atmosphere was really peaceful and there were few to none disagreements about things, probably because we were too tired to argue or because we’ve been friends enough to know how to take each other without causing useless dramas.
As we told Mr Cha, we were ready for the huge changes awaiting for us but there was one thing the hyungs feared a bit.
The change of their relationship status.
It’s no secret that, in the music industry, dating is not easy at all. Paparazzi are always looking forward to creating a new scandal issue about idols dating and everyone knows what the outcome is. Some people actually keep supporting the idols and their careers but there are also the ones who think a relationship can only get in the way of an artist’s career on many different levels: they could skip practices to meet their partner; sneak out from their dorms to go clubbing; lose fans as some of them would probably feel uncomfortable about fanning over a taken person.
Because of these reasons, agencies tend to insert a “no-dating” clause in the contracts with their artists to prevent any issue with their idols. Even if I was not in a relationship at the moment, I was still afraid of this rule, so I can only imagine how scared the hyungs were at the idea of having to break up with their boyfriends.
Hell, it would be impossible for Jeonghan and Seungcheol to act indifferent since they live under the same roof and have to see each other 24/7!
Knowing this topic would’ve soon been brought up at a meeting with the staff, the hyungs were determined to make the company reconsider and accept their terms: we are free to date but the moment it gets in the way of our career, the CEO can kick us out and even raise the fee for the termination of our contract. To us, it seemed like a great deal as it showed how serious we were about this.
The day of the meeting eventually came and we were in this huge conference room discussing the debut concept with our stylists when Mr Cha walked in. The laughter slowly died and the tension inside the room could’ve been cut with the plastic knife Jeonghan hyung was casually holding in his hand.
Once we talked about the training and the salary, Mr Cha said, “We will now discuss your relationships with people outside the company.” He cleared his throat and loosened his necktie. “The board knows that most of you are already dating.”
Everyone stopped doing whatever they were doing, breathing included. Gazes were shifting between Mr Cha and Seungcheol. The latter looked pale but ready to fight. “Sir, we would like-” Seungcheol’s words never saw the light of the day as the man lifted his hand to interrupt the younger.
‘That’s it. He’s going to tell them to break up or we won’t debut at all,' was what I thought at the moment.
“Mr Kang wanted you to know that it’s okay to date,” were instead the words that left Mr Cha’s mouth. “But, you need to keep your relationship a secret and try not to get caught by the paparazzi.”
Silence fell again inside the room and the staff almost laughed at our confused expressions. “What? We thought that…” Mingyu trailed off, not exactly knowing what he should’ve said in this kind of situation. None of us was trained for this.
“That we would tell you to break up? We considered saying that as a prank but we might’ve scared you too much.” He giggled when his eyes landed on Seungkwan’s expression. “We know that our country isn’t exactly supportive of same-sex relationships but we are and our artists' happiness and well-being is our top priority. If having a boyfriend makes you happy, who are we to tell you to break up?”
“Sir…” Seungkwan was moved to tears and unable to continue his sentence.
“There’s no need to get this emotional, Seungkwan. You all should know by now that we’re not cruel and cold-hearted.” He almost went to ruffle the crying boy’s hair but then retracts his hand, maybe thinking that he has already shocked the other enough. “As I said before, the only term from our party is that you should be careful of your surroundings when you are with your special someone, understood?”
“YES, SIR.” We all shouted without thinking about it twice. Keeping a secret was ten times better than having to completely give up on the people we love.
The result was that rare were the times the hyungs went on dates in the city. It was too risky. Those few times they wanted to go out, they never went alone. Group dates were safer and that’s why Mingyu and I, the only singles ones, often had to tag along with the couples so we would look like normal teenagers who enjoyed hanging out together.
When in public, the hyungs refrained from being too close to their lovers. In particular, Wonwoo didn’t even glance at Soonyoung for a second too long to prevent people around them misunderstanding him. However, Soons is one who is used to having a lot of skinship with his friends and the ones he cares about, so he seemed kind of hurt by Wonwoo’s actions despite knowing it was this or nothing at all.
It’s not a surprise that everyone preferred when the ten of us hung at someone’s house on the weekend. This way, the hyungs were free to do whatever they wanted without feeling like all the eyes were on them, like someone was waiting in the dark to call out on them. Plus, it was also an occasion for us to get some more rest after an exhausting week.
Our Jeonghan’s bitches nights mostly revolved around cooking meals together; watching whatever movie we could find on Netflix; sitting on the sofa just bantering and making small talk. These were the nights the couples couldn’t leave each other’s sides, not even for a second.
Seungkwan and Hansol couldn’t take their hands off of each other; Joshua would pamper Seokmin in every possible way; Wonwoo and Soonyoung would smile while whispering sweet nothing into their ears. Jeonghan and Seungcheol were the only ones who managed to keep their public display of affection at the bare minimum but it’s only because they are always together, literally.
All of this, of course, is done in front of Mingyu and me. You cannot even imagine how hard we tried to ignore them as we played on the Playstation until it was time for us to leave.
Even though I tried so hard no to tear my eyes from the television, my gaze still shifted to Soonyoung whenever he laughed at one of Wonwoo’s jokes or when he cooed at his boyfriend. Seeing his eyes shine brighter than any star while being in Wonwoo’s arms broke my heart a little. I wanted to hate him for that, for looking this happy with someone that’s not me, but I physically cannot do that. I cannot hate what I dearly love, even if it hurts me.
And although I know that one step further away from him means a step closer to my own happiness, I still want to run to him.
Just like a fool.
Notes:
First of all, I want to apologise that all I can offer after three months of waiting is just a filler chapter which is not even THAT good.
I've been in a slump with this story for quite some time and I figured that it was better to post that little I had instead of keeping you all waiting. Maybe writing a slow burn was too ambitious of a project for me. Even if I make huge jumps in the timeline, I have to explain what happened in the between and sometimes, to me, the way I describe those events feels too much like a summary. So I have to rewrite them at least a couple of times before I am quite happy with it.
Sometimes I get discouraged by the whole process and think that it would be better to end it here. However, you don't need to worry. When I think about the people who are still reading this story I tell myself how much all of you and the characters as well deserve an ending. Even if it will take a lot of time, I promise to you that I will finish it.
Omg, I've been "talking" for too long fakdjg I'm sorry!The second thing I wanted to say is that I will use my second account (@Yleisnotonfire2)
exclusively to talk about the stories I'm writing/I plan to write. I'll probably post some plots and then polls to let you decide which story do you want to read next! I hope to see you there hehe!With this said, stay safe and take care of yourselves!! I love you all and I'll see you with the next chapter/story ;)
Chapter Text
Soonyoung’s point of view
Ordinarily.
This is how I would describe the way things are going, at the moment, in my life.
Seokmin and I are both thrilled about our last days as high schoolers despite having to spend most of the day with our faces buried in books.
We attend classes in the morning, now mostly made of mock tests and self-study sessions during which the teachers take some time to go over the wrong answers or the difficult topics.
In the afternoon, the two of us are either at the library with a couple of our classmates or, if we need to get rid of distractions, we come to my house. Our plan is to study one subject and then go on the Internet to find mock tests from the previous years. This way we can check if we need to strengthen our knowledge about that subject or if we can proceed with the next one.
By the time evening comes, our brains are practically fried and we do deserve a break before memorising some flashcards.
Going for a walk in the streets or watching a movie is what Seokmin and I do when we’re alone. However, there are days when Hansol is free from his own “adult-duties” and hangs out with us, usually, at Coffee & Goodpie . When Kihyun asks us what we’re doing there, we tell him it’s to make sure he doesn’t forget our faces or gets used to the quietness of the shop. In reality, we wait for Kihyun to finish his turn and join us at the table to chat with him. Of course, in the meantime, we don’t miss the chance to drink something and munch on cookies. Kihyun often asks about Jeonghan’s bitches and how things are going for them as he too was looking forward to them debuting. He says it’s because he can brag with all the people he knows about what amazing artists his friends are but we know it’s because he wants the best for them as we do.
After the stop at the café, if we feel too frustrated to go back home and study Kihyun brings us to his friend’s coin noraebang . There, we go crazy as we dance and sing our stress out, eating an unhealthy amount of chips and corn-dogs to tame our hungry stomachs.
This being our routine, the weekend seems to come faster, almost as if it was just around the corner. It’s like when a guest knocks on your door but you have lost track of time and you’re not really ready to welcome them in. Weekends feel like this kind of guest but I'm more than ready to welcome them in. That’s because, when they come, they chase away all the piled-up stress. You feel relaxed, yet energetic even if you know that the stress and the tiredness will come back on Monday.
However, to be completely honest, I only feel like this because on Saturdays we host our Jeonghan’s bitches day .
We tend to spend the whole day either at mine or Mingyu’s house as our parents are usually out for work. Normally, the activities one can do at home are quite limited but we have Jeonghan who can turn anything into a challenge, even watching a movie.
Basically, we choose a movie no one has watched yet and before hitting the play button, we pair up. Every pair has to decide on a word and when one of the characters says that word, it’s a point for the pair. The ones with the lowest score are those who clean up at the end of the day. The first times we played this game, Jeonghan and Seungcheol were usually on the podium as we were too naive and let them choose the movie or the easiest words like
“when”
or
“what”
. Then, we set some rules:
1) Only the newly released titles shall be played;
2) Easy words shall be banned.
And oh you should see how funny it is when Jeonghan and Seungcheol lose. They do nothing but fight while cleaning, blaming each other for the chosen word.
Another kind of challenge we usually do is Masterchef - Jeonghan’s bitches edition .
Only the skilled cooks are allowed to the kitchen in a match to make dinner. This leaves Mingyu, Joshua and me as the main chefs competing against each other while Seungcheol, Seokmin and Hansol help with the preparation of the ingredients. Jeonghan and Seungkwan, of course, are the MCs but they’re also the judges together with Wonwoo and Jihoon. They watch us cooking, asking what we decided to make, why and if we’re confident about winning. Sometimes they tease the assistants, asking them if they have any idea of what they’re doing or convincing them to sneak some food for extra points on the final evaluation.
With at least two different dishes per group, we sit at the table and dig in before the four judges can finish the food with the excuse of “we must taste the dishes multiple times to be sure about the results”. In the end, they even forget to announce who the winner is because of how full and happy they are.
There are times, though, when everyone is just too tired to function.
Jeonghan can’t think of a funny activity to do; Wonwoo and Jihoon are sleeping with their eyes open; Seokmin goes silent. Geez, even Mingyu and Seungkwan are too tired to bicker like they usually do. These are some of the red flags which tell us that it is better to just rest. Laying down on the couch or on the sleeping bags spread on the floor, we chat about the most random topics as we wait to get knocked out by the tiredness.
Let me tell you, group naps are the best for two things. The first one is because when the others are still sleeping, you can take the best derp pictures and funnily edit them. The second is rather personal and it’s about me getting to sleep cuddled to Wonwoo. Sharing a blanket, legs tangled and my head on his chest while his arms are tightly wrapped around me. I like falling asleep with the steady beat of his heart, although I am now used to another kind of heartbeat, much faster and in unison with mine.
By the time we wake up, it’s already dinner time. Starving but with no will to cook, we order take away food from the nearest place, playing some video games as we wait. Once the food arrives, we eat while watching some random broadcast on tv and clean up before saying our goodbyes.
However, on some weekends, staying at home feels stuffy. The idea of spending one more minute trapped by the four falls we see every day makes us insufferable. Maybe it’s because school and work frustrated us way too much during that week but we need fresh air, we’re in need of freedom and adventures.
This is how we find ourselves taking long walks in our neighbourhoods, skipping in our steps while singing songs or racing against each other in the empty roads; we rest on benches inside the playground as we wait for children to go home so we can take their spots on the swings and slides; we have dinner at our favourite chicken or barbeque place where the owners, upon seeing how much of an appetite we have, often brings us one extra serving of side dishes or rice.
If Joshua and Seungcheol have their cars, we go to the amusement park where everyone tries all the scary rides, the ones no one would dare to ride by themselves. Since Mingyu is scared of heights, he stays on the ground, taking pictures and videos of Seokmin and Seungkwan screaming for their lives. After running all morning long inside the park, we are practically starving so we look for stands selling food and eat as much as we need to fuel our bodies.
If the weather allows, in the early afternoon, we reach the seaside.
During the trip, we stop at the first service area we spot to buy snacks and drinks for a picnic on the beach. As soon as we step out of the cars, Seokmin, Jihoon, Hansol and I take our shoes off so we can run barefooted in the sand meanwhile the rest takes care of the “few” things we bought on the way. Joshua lays down the blankets on the sand then helps Wonwoo setting the food and the beverage on them; Mingyu takes pictures of the scenery around him, using Jeonghan as his model for some time; we’re still running on the beach when Seungkwan and Seungcheol start threatening to leave us behind if we get wet while playing too close to the water. Then, having had enough of scolding us, they both come to grab our ears and drag us to the rest of the group.
We drink, eat, watch the sun slowly bathing into the sea that himself has coloured with different shades of orange, pink and gold. Jazz music plays in the background to set the perfect mood which then leads us to joke about how we should stop doing this sentimental stuff that makes us look as if we’re in a coming-of-age movie. Still, we find ourselves cool and that’s why we keep listening to chill songs with the windows rolled down and the wind rustling our hair on the way back home.
Of course, because of Jeonghan’s bitches contract with their company, we do all of these things while being as discrete as possible, trying not to be too affectionate with each other. More attention and effort is put when we go out for dates but we feel like we can loosen up a bit when we hang as a group.
How did we react to the news of the contract...well, we’ve been in a state of shock for some time, then came to our senses and celebrated the good news.
I mean, the three of us —aka Hansol, Seokmin and me— were spending every moment of our days waiting for our boyfriends to call and break up with us. Although it was going to hurt like hell, we promised each other not to cry nor cling on them. We needed to let them go as their career, their future, is more important than a relationship. Moreover, I honestly thought this could be an occasion for me to test the universe and my love life. If we were meant to be, no matter what happened or how many years we spent apart, Wonwoo and I would’ve found each other again. If not, it would mean that we need to get on the look for our person, the one who will truly make us feel as a whole.
Luckily, what we expected never happened. Well, we did get a call but it was to tell us that we could keep dating as long as we kept everything a secret.
In an industry as tough as the music one, receiving an opportunity like this is a blessing. Only a fool would’ve said no to such a great deal and proceed to complain about not being able to have proper dates. Hiding was ten thousand times better and more thrilling than lying every night on your bed with your heart broken in a million pieces, pretending it doesn’t hurt at all.
So the contract is the reason why Wonwoo and I walk with a huge gap in between our bodies whenever we’re outside. He doesn’t hold my hand, he does his best not to let our shoulders brush if we accidentally get squeezed closer. He doesn’t steal glances my way or look at me in the eyes when talking to me.
Long story short, my boyfriend treated me the same way he treated friends from outside the Jeonghan’s bitches group but I was okay with it, telling myself this is what he had to do to keep our relationship safe. I even convinced myself that he has to act this distant because people could tell from miles away that we’re lovers from the way we stood next to each other or from the love in our gazes.
‘There’s nothing wrong with it. Everything is fine.’
Or so I wanted to believe until I felt him slowly slipping away from me.
At first, I was truly okay with him acting distant. He was cold but I was aware that there was a contract that implicitly asked him to be like that. In fact, he turned into a different person when we were home.
There Wonwoo came back to be the precious little bean I fell in love with: someone who liked to laugh at his friends’ antics, staying close to me with one of his arms permanently wrapped around my middle or my shoulders. He would hug me tight and peck my lips at every chance he got. He would let me sit on his legs or he would be the one resting his head on my lap while I brushed my hand through his hair. When he was feeling particularly good, he couldn’t stop teasing me, poking my cheeks whenever I smiled and showing me his beautiful nose scrunch.
Every time I looked at him, it reminded me why I love him. He shines so brightly when he’s in his element, surrounded by the people he loves. The cold expression he usually wears to scare people off disappears. The way he talks and approaches his friends makes you realise that he tends to close up with strangers out of shyness and because of how much he got hurt in the past.
Wonwoo isn’t one who easily lets people in his life. He is wary about letting his guard down. Seokmin and I have been a huge exception to the point that, to this day, the boys still tease him about being super whipped for me. I usually tease him too but when I do, I end up thanking him for letting his walls down with me because I came to know what a wonderful person he truly is.
But at some point, Wonwoo doesn’t seem to be the same anymore. Something about him doesn’t seem quite right.
To check if I am the only one perceiving this change, I ask Seokmin and Joshua if they noticed Wonwoo being weird. They look at me as if I am the one who’s crazy because, to them, Wonwoo is exactly the same as always with his arms glued around my waist or my shoulders, never losing the chance to display our affection with constant physical contact.
However, they all feel like empty actions to me. There’s no warmth at all in what he does.
This has my heart shaking in fear, making me afraid I have gotten so used to him that his affectionate acts are just whatever. Getting used to him means problems, though. With time I would start taking him for granted and this would lead to us fighting and breaking up. It would give life to the fear of my relationship with Wonwoo being nothing but a soap bubble.
Beautiful and magical but bound to burst.
It’s only later that I realise it is not me that got used to what I have with Wonwoo. It’s him who has turned aloof.
The wake-up call for me has been the way he started skipping the Jeonghan’s bitches meetings.
“I’m busy with rap practices.”
“I have a very important training this afternoon, I can’t skip it.”
“You know that I started taking composing lessons, the teacher wants me there.”
“My mom said my relatives want to see me so we have to visit them.”
“My dad said he missed having his son around and wants me to have dinner with them.”
One excuse at the time, he doesn’t show up anymore. At this point, it is impossible not to think that something has happened, causing him to feel uncomfortable. Especially with me, since the two of us don’t even spend that much time together anymore and he ghosts me when texting.
Saying that our relationship has gone back to the day we first met would be a lie as, even then, we weren’t this awkward. Seeing what we have come to be now, makes me feel completely powerless.
‘Is he too stressed?’ I thought when I first stopped to think about him and the things he was doing. It made so much sense to me because the debut was getting closer and closer. The other boys too would sometimes sacrifice one of our nights for the sake of practices, the impressions there were a billion things left to do weighing down their shoulders.
‘Has he changed or have I changed?’ Is what I asked myself when I saw that the boys were all acting the same with me but not him. Wonwoo was the only one who made me shiver and not in a good way.
Maybe he’s trying to distance himself from me, waiting for the time he will be super busy and cutting ties with me will come naturally. We wouldn’t be arguing and our relationship would die without saying a single word.
The possibility crossed my mind because, in the past, Wonwoo often mentioned how afraid he is of confronting someone. He doesn’t want to be disappointed nor hurt by the other person’s words and actions, so he avoids it.
“Keeping your mouth shut doesn’t hurt as much as saying the wrong thing or a mean one,“ Wonwoo said with a bitter smile. “Deep are the scars words can leave.”
Which is true. Sharp as they are, words do leave the worst scars, the kind that is hard to tend to and heal. Years could pass but, if poked too much, they can hurt again. They’ll always be there as a reminder of the pain you went through.
Wonwoo is way too aware of it and yet he has wounded me with his own words once.
“You say I come first but I’ve never actually been your priority.”
His words, his tone, his expression and the spite in his eyes were all aiming at taking me down. And he did. To this day, that moment lingers in my head, poking my wound so I can feel the pain again.
Lately, it has been stinging so much to the point that I want to scream in Wonwoo’s face “why should you be my priority if I’m not yours?”
He told me that I don’t care about him but he’s no better than me. He’s been avoiding me, not caring how it affects what we have. I want to yell that I am such a fool for how much I care. If he didn’t come first, I wouldn’t cry for him or spend my nights laying awake on my bed, thinking about what went wrong; I wouldn’t blame myself for not doing enough to show my love for him; I wouldn’t pretend I’m indifferent to my best friend’s feelings.
If he wasn’t my priority, I would’ve broken up with him the moment Jihoon confessed to me. But I didn’t. I didn’t want Wonwoo to suffer because of me. I chose his happiness over mine and Jihoon’s.
Although I’d like to take these feelings out, I can’t. At the moment, I’m too busy dealing with the doubts filling my mind. Doubts that, as Joshua says, can only be solved by confronting the other party and have them dissipate the thick fog blurring our rational side.
Yes, that is the right thing to do but I can’t bring myself to actually do it. I’m just too afraid of what Wonwoo’s answer might be. So this is why I opt to stand still, waiting for better days to come.
But it was vain hope.
You see, this deadlock with Wonwoo had me figuring out how alike I and my boyfriend actually are. I was complaining about him cutting ties with me without a single word on the reason why he’s doing this, but I am no better than him.
I am doing the exact same thing with Jihoon.
After telling him that we could still be friends, I am trying my best to let him go so he can get used to a life where there’s no place for someone like me. My plan was to slowly disappear, turning colder and colder towards him until, one day, he wouldn’t have noticed that I wasn’t there anymore.
Feeling like I’m in Jihoon’s shoes now, I see how stupid of an idea this was.
Yes, words may hurt like hell but disappearing in thin air seems way worse. There’s nothing to hold on to. A word, a gesture, a glare that lights the flame of anger towards the person who has left us behind. There’s only emptiness that one tries to fill with the countless doubts, what-ifs and blame for oneself, feeling discarded as if they meant nothing in the other person’s life.
It’s like one of those bruises you suddenly find on your body. At first, you don’t notice it but it slowly turns darker and it hurts, leaving you wondering why it is there and how did you get it.
The only difference is that this one bruise won’t disappear after a few days. It will be there, painful to the touch and not whitening with time.
Not wanting Jihoon to feel like I do, I tell myself to stop acting like I was trying to push him away and just go with the flow, enjoying any moment I could with him until he grows tired of me.
I’ll stop running away from him and try running by his side, instead. I’ll keep his pace for how much he needs me to.
Like I should’ve learnt from my past experiences, things don’t go as you wish them to. How many times has this happened already? I honestly lost track.
As if I am stuck in a déjà-vu, the moment I decide to fix things with Jihoon, he too starts skipping our outings more and more. One time he comes late, the next ones he doesn’t come at all. Seungcheol says it’s because he spends his whole day and night inside his studio, too busy making music to meet with anyone who’s not a producer or one of his members.
As Joshua later explained to Seokmin and me, seeing how the self-produced songs were already at a high level, the company had given Jihoon the chance of producing Al1 ’s debut album. Of course, they wouldn’t leave him alone to do all the job, there would’ve been experts by his side, ready to help and guide him whenever he needed it.
Jihoon was joy-stricken when they brought this up to him. He felt like his skills were being recognised and even though he needed help now, he knew he would’ve been soon able to do everything by himself. That’s why he had accepted the task.
After some time, reality sunk in. Jihoon understood what a huge responsibility this was. It wasn’t just a couple of songs he had to make for a gig at the pub. They were talking about their debut album, songs that will introduce them to the world and can determine the success of the group.
Sensing how Jihoon was feeling from the staff talking in the company, Mr Kang in person met with Jihoon to tell him he shouldn’t worry too much.
“If I didn’t think you were capable, I would’ve never suggested you being the main producer of this album. Plus, this isn’t something you have to do right away. Focus on some general training first and give us the time to set up a good studio for you, then we will have a meeting about the songs.”
Jihoon did what he was told to. He didn’t worry about the production, he practised with the members and hung out with us whenever he could, even during the weekdays. If inspiration suddenly struck him, he would pause whatever he was doing to take his phone and record himself humming a melody or to take note of some words which could come in handy as lyrics later.
When the studio was ready and the idea of debuting seemed more real, pressure started cracking Jihoon.
“He now says there’s no time to waste and locks himself up in the studio barely eating and sleeping,” Joshua sighed.
“That’s why he looked like a ghost when he came to school the other day,” Seokmin said while looking at me. “He fights to keep his eyes open and his mind is always somewhere else.”
“Yeah...we’re taking turns to take care of him. We help with the music, keep him company, bring him food and water but he shoos us when we tell him to sleep. You know, we need to play the Jeonghan card to convince him it’s time to go back to the dorm since Jihoon only listens to him. It works twice in a week, no more than that.”
My heart broke when I heard that Jihoon was yet again overworking himself. The idea of him feeling frustrated at how the tracks or the lyrics may not be perfect made me gloomy and sad.
The day he came to school that week, it was impossible not to notice how tired he looked. When Seokmin and I asked him what was wrong and if he needed to fake a stomach ache to rest in the infirmary, he brushed the matter off.
“We practised until late yesterday. The new routines of the different lessons are difficult to keep up with and you can’t help but feel tired.” He smiled at us trying to reassure us but there was something to it that it only worried us more. “You don’t need to worry about me. The hyungs are as wrecked as I am.”
We pretended to believe him but immediately asked Joshua who then told us what happened.
After that day, he stopped coming to school. Busy with practising, composing and cramming for the exams, Jihoon didn’t have the strength to attend classes from early in the morning till the afternoon. It would’ve meant not getting any sleep and wasting time he could’ve spent working.
At some point, I thought about visiting him at the studio and checking on him. I’m sure the hyungs are doing a great job at taking care of their youngest member but I wanted to meet him. I wanted to see with my own eyes how Jihoon is doing, watching him eat and convince him to get some more sleep while I’m there. Jihoon never said it out loud but he quite liked to take naps while hugging, he looked so peaceful whenever he fell asleep cuddled to me.
However, from what the others have told me, people tend to barge in that studio without any warning and it would be risky for him if we get caught alone in there. I am not part of the staff nor a member of the group so the studio is not a place for me to be at. God only knows what could happen if they misunderstood the situation. Jeonghan’s bitches career would probably end before even starting.
That’s why I opted to check on him through texts, clinging on the thought that I will eventually see him on our graduation day which is only a few days away. It was going to be the perfect occasion for us to meet and for him to take a day off.
Our chat looked like this at some point of the night.
Hoshiya:
Today, Mrs Kim thought you were at school!
She kept calling your name when asking questions to the class hahaha
Woozy:
It’s not the first time she does this hahaha
if it happens again, our classmates will think she biases me.
But we know that’s not the case.
Hoshiya:
Maybe you are her bias and it’s only you who don’t know.
Woozy:
Do you think this is the reason why I have low grades in her subject?
Hoshiya:
Of course!
She does it to hide her preference.
Woozy:
You know, I wouldn’t mind if she showed her bias
and my grades went a little bit up.
Even just one point would be perfect.
Hoshiya:
My hunch is that she might lower your grades in hopes
for you to come back to school and protest.
But only because she misses you.
Woozy:
She doesn’t miss a good-for-nothing like me.
Hoshiya:
Well, I would like to tell you that everyone misses you at school.
Woozy:
Does everyone include you?
Hoshiya:
Don’t you ask this every single day?
Woozy:
I do but you never know!
You might have not missed me at all today!
Hoshiya:
You're being dramatic just because you want me to say it.
Woozy:
Maybe.
Hoshiya:
You little shit.
Woozy:
Nothing I don't know!
So, did you miss me?
Hoshiya:
I miss you and I would be very happy if you went to sleep
instead of being annoying through texts.
Woozy:
I miss you too, Soons.
Hoshiya:
Don't avoid my nagging!
You need to rest if you want your brain to properly function!
Woozy:
Mine has never correctly functioned.
Hoshiya:
That, I know but let's save what's left of that brain.
Woozy:
Funny how you are the one saying that.
Hoshiya:
Ha ha ha.
Now, go to sleep before I tell Seungcheol hyung that you're still awake
despite having wished a good night to everyone in the group chat one hour ago.
Woozy:
You would never.
Hoshiya:
Try me and you'll have Cheol hyung barging in your studio
and give you an earful until you fall asleep.
Woozy:
I'll go to sleep.
Hoshiya:
Great choice.
Good night, Ji!
I'll talk to you tomorrow.
Woozy:
Good night, Soons.
And thanks.
Many times I absentmindedly typed replies such as “dream of me” or “I love you”, thumb hovering the send button, but deleted them after a long sigh. It wouldn’t have been fair. Giving Jihoon hopes about my feelings, only to have him watch me running away because I can’t leave Wonwoo. It's the cruellest thing I could do and I feel like I’m already selfish enough when I tell him that I missed him.
You know, I can lie about anything if it means that Jihoon won’t be in pain but I can’t pretend I don’t miss him.
I miss waking up to a heart fluttering at the idea of seeing him at school and spend time with him; I miss taking walks with him in the afternoon, watching the sunset from our table at Vinyl Art as we listen to some retro music; I miss seeing him walking around my house or lazing on my couch with the phone in his hands, not really minding what was happening around him; I miss the Jihoon beaming when he opened his house’s door and found me holding his favourite muffins or the Jihoon who likes cuddling when he’s too tired and doesn’t care about his image of the boy who doesn’t like skinship; I miss watching him space out as he brainstormed a song in the middle of a class or him being busy writing a note that would’ve soon landed on my desk.
In other words, I miss Jihoon...all of him.
Studying and practising hard every single day brought us to put on hold our Jeonghan’s bitches reunions on the weekend. This kind of gave a break to my heart and mind. I didn’t have to spend my evenings crying and dwelling on what to do with Wonwoo. I didn’t have to face his cold eyes that now more than ever made him feel unreachable. I only had time to focus on the subjects to review for the upcoming tests and, maybe time to feel disappointed in Wonwoo as, when I checked my phone, there was no incoming message from him.
Busy as we all were, none of us had realised how fast time had flown by until, one night, we found ourselves planning the graduation party for me, Seokmin and Jihoon on Jeonghan’s bitches groupchat.
Joshuji:
Tomorrow’s the big day!
DadCheol:
My youngest sons are graduating.
It seems like yesterday that I sent them to school for the first time.
Pupgyu:
No, you didn’t.
Kwannie:
Shhh, don’t ruin his emo dad moment.
Pupgyu:
He’s not their real father.
DadCheol:
It’s like I am.
I’ve watched them growing up.
Pupgyu:
But...
Kwannie:
Shhh!!
Don’t.
1004Han:
Gyu, you know how grumpy he gets
when you disagree with him too many times.
Pupgyu:
You’re right.
I’ll shut up.
DadCheol:
ANYWAYS.
My children are leaving high school.
Hoshiya:
FINALLY!
Woozy:
Honestly?
I couldn’t wait for this moment!
DonkeyKong:
One less problem without school!
Pupgyu:
You have university later.
Kwannie:
Shhh
Hoshiya:
One
Woozy:
Less
DonkeyKong:
Problem.
Pupgyu:
Y’all are getting scary.
Kwannie:
If you only knew when to shut up,
the babies wouldn’t be so scary.
Hoshiya:
We
Woozy:
Not
DonkeyKong:
Babies.
DadCheol:
This is what happens
when they hang out too much with Jeonghan.
1004Han:
And I’m so proud of them.
Joshuji:
Please, don’t turn into three little Jeonghans.
One is too much for the whole world.
1004Han:
Thank you, Shua, for the compliment.
Joshuji:
But it’s not.
DadCheol:
Only one in the whole world and he’s mine to love.
Suffer me, bitches.
1004Han:
Woah, slow down.
There are a lot of people who are ready to love me.
You have to share.
DadCheol:
:(
1004Han:
I’m only Cheollie’s to love.
DadCheol:
:)
Hoshiya:
That
Woozy:
Was
DonkeyKong:
The
Pupgyu:
Most
Kwannie:
Disgusting
Noni-vernonie:
Thing
Joshuji:
We’ve seen today.
We don’t need to see more of it so please, stop.
Hi, Hansol!
Pupgyu:
Stop shoving your love into our faces.
Kwannie:
Not everyone here is lucky enough
to have their boyfriend in the band,
you know.
1004Han:
Not my problem.
Joshuji:
You little…
Nonu:
Guys, you’re going off-topic.
Pupgyu:
Hyung, are you done showering?
Nonu:
Yes, you can use the bathroom if you need it.
Kwannie:
Kim Mingyu, don’t you dare go now.
We need to discuss this graduation party.
Pupgyu:
Boo Seungkwan, if you haven’t noticed,
I’m sitting before you and I haven’t moved a muscle.
Kwannie:
I’m not that interested in you
so I don’t follow every move of yours.
DadCheol:
GUYS, DON’T YOU DARE FIGHT
OR I’M COMING THERE TO SCOLD YOU.
1004Han:
He’s already on his way out of the room.
Pupgyu:
I’m sitting still.
Kwannie:
So am I.
DadCheol:
Stop glaring at each other.
Kwannie:
How do you know?
1004Han:
He’s watching you from the keyhole.
Woozy:
The door to your room has a keyhole?
1004Han:
It doesn’t.
He just made one.
Hoshiya:
I won’t ask how he did it.
Nonu:
Guys, you’re losing focus again.
Joshuji:
Before someone can say something else.
Are we going to throw a party tomorrow?
Pupgyu:
Of course why not.
Kwannie:
You don’t even have to ask.
DadCheol:
So, where and when?
Joshuji:
My house is free so we have a place.
And maybe we can do it at night.
DonkeyKong:
Don’t you have practices the day after?
1004Han:
Technically, yes.
Practically, Mr Cha said we can come in late
because we could use a break.
DadCheol:
So that even Jihoon can rest more.
Woozy:
As if I’m working a lot.
DadCheol:
You’re always locked up in your studio
and come out only when we have to practice together.
1004Han:
Bet you don’t know that Mingyu uses
your bed as his wardrobe.
Pupgyu:
Hyung!
You promised you wouldn’t tell him.
1004Han:
I said I would’ve tried not to tell him.
Kwannie:
Never trust Jeonghan hyung.
DonkeyKong:
He loves bringing chaos.
Noni-vernonie:
Just like Loki.
Nonu:
FOCUS PLEASE
Joshuji:
Thank you, Wonwoo.
So tomorrow, at my house, 7 pm.
Pupgyu:
Jeonghan hyung and I are going to buy the meat to grill.
DadCheol:
I’ll bring the drinks for the ones of age.
Nonu:
Going to buy dessert at Coffee & Goodpie
on the way to Shua hyung’s house.
Noni-vernonie:
Guess this leaves me with buying the snacks.
Kwannie:
I’ll bring myself and that’s more than enough.
1004Han:
No, it’s not.
Kwannie:
Ugh, fine!
I’ll go with Hansol
making sure he buys lots of snacks and soft drinks.
Hoshiya:
Can we do something, too?
DonkeyKong:
Yeah, I feel pretty much useless.
Woozy:
Me too.
Joshuji:
Rest.
That’s what you can do.
DadCheol:
While we take care of the party, the three of you should rest.
You’ve worked so hard for this day.
You can relax.
Hoshiya:
But…
DadCheol:
No buts.
It’s the least we can do.
Joshuji:
Would you look at the time?
It’s already so late!
You three go to sleep.
The hyungs will take care of the rest.
DonkeyKong:
Don’t stay up too late, though.
Joshuji:
Afraid I’ll sleep in and miss your graduation?
DonkeyKong:
Yes...
Joshuji:
Don’t worry.
I’ll be there for sure.
Now, go to sleep and dream of me, alright?
DonkeyKong:
I will.
Love you.
Hoshiya:
Ew
Woozy:
Guys
Pupgyu:
Please
Kwannie:
Stop
Nonu:
That
Noni-vernonie:
Was
DadCheol:
Disgusting
1004Han:
And we don’t need to see more of that today.
Joshuji:
You little shits.
1004Han:
You get what you deserve.
Some alumni from our high school once said that, in their whole lives, they never slept as well as they did the night before graduation.
No thoughts, no pressure, just pure bliss at the idea of starting anew from there.
Because of them, I eagerly waited for this day to come, wanting to feel what they had felt too.
But gosh, they were lying.
“Sleep like a baby, my ass,” I muttered as I changed position again.
I’ve been tossing and turning in my bed since the moment I laid down, too nervous and excited to really sleep. There were too many thoughts crossing my mind to really focus on one and maybe fall asleep to it.
‘What will my parents do when seeing all of the Jeonghan’s bitches together?’;
‘Will someone slip on their way to grab their diploma? Will it be me?’;
‘Oh my God, I bet Mingyu will dress all fancy and it will be swarming with girls asking for his number.’;
‘How should I act around Wonwoo?’.
That was the question that made me the most anxious. I was going to spend a whole day with Wonwoo after such a long time and I had no clue about what to do. Was it okay to hug him? To be by his side and take his hand? Are we too awkward to show any kind of affection? Will he move away if I get too close to him?
Unanswered questions. That’s all I had at the moment and I hated it. I hated how our relationship seemed to have reached a dead end. I hated how afraid I was to ask Wonwoo about it, I was afraid of whatever answer he was going to give me.
‘I am the same. If you feel like I have changed, maybe it’s because you are the one who has changed.’ Doubts, mistrust and more misunderstandings from both sides would’ve followed.
‘You’re right. If this is a dead-end road, how are we supposed to go on? It’s better if we break up.’ Sadness, tears, pain were going to be the only companions of our days and nights.
Both sounded like terrible answers that were going to break our bond and bring tensions with the rest of the group too. The boys would either try to patch things up between Wonwoo and me or feel extremely uncomfortable with the two of us standing in the same room. I didn’t want that. Their life was already going to be full of burdens and uncomfortable moments because of their career and the last thing I wanted was for them to lose even that tad bit of peace and fun they usually find when the ten of us come together.
At some point, before the sun started rising, I found myself bitterly snickering in the darkness of the room, the chirping birds seeming to be laughing with me. Or maybe at me.
‘I am so pathetic.’ I shifted position for one last time and finally closed my eyes, worn out by the thinking and the feeling. ‘They all say that time is the best medicine...maybe it will fix us too.’
But which us was I truly wishing for?
Dismissing the last alarm on the phone, I stretch on the bed and let the sweet scent of waffles coming from downstairs fill my nostrils and make my stomach growl. Even if I only slept for a couple of hours, the sun seeping in my room doesn’t bother me. On the contrary, it makes me feel energised to the point that I jump out of the bed and do more stretching in front of the window, taking in the sight of the few white and grey-ish clouds painting the light blue canvas the sky is.
Sweet breakfast, not feeling tired, good weather. Nothing can possibly go wrong on such a great day like this one.
Going against my parents’ complaints, I leave the house first and fast-track my walk to school. Yesterday, Seokmin suggested that the two of us plus Jihoon should meet at the school gates one last time for the sake of the old times.
When Jihoon arrives, surprisingly on time, we reach the school gym where the ceremony is going to take place.
As we walk in, we get quite taken aback by how big the place looks without the equipment that usually sits in there. At first, students doubted the school could host the ceremony there but seeing it now, it can definitely welcome all of the students and their relatives. What catches my eyes is the podium at the very end of the room. It’s the one they used for the festival and it will now serve the principal and a few teachers who need to give their last speech to the students. I’m sure they will congratulate us for having come this far, keeping up with our hard work which will help us reach our goal in life.
Opposite to the podium, there are quite a lot of rows of chairs for the students and the school board to sit. The walls are decorated with a few garlands of flowers in different styles and shapes. There were some banners too, at least two for each class other than the ones we gifted the teachers.
Seokmin spots some of our classmates and we rush to sit next to them. Despite having an hour left before the ceremony, the seats are almost all taken. Students gave up sleep in order to come in early since this could be the last time they see their classmates.
It doesn’t necessarily mean one will stop being friends with the others but not everyone has the luck to choose the same path and go in the same direction. Once people enrol in different schools, it would be difficult for them to adjust their schedules and go meet their friends. Not to mention the ones who will start a whole new life abroad, enrolling in a foreign university and probably staying there, after they get the degree.
Also, not all the people left behind are friends. Some students may feel like today is the day of their long-awaited re-birth. They can finally break free from all of the people who caused them pain, who pretended to be friends only to backstab them.
Depending on the case, different are the emotions hidden behind the smiles of the students sitting in this very place and talking about the memories they made during the past years.
When the teachers arrive too, the murmuring in the room grows louder. They are giving one red rose to each student as they make their way to the front rows. A few students giggle, saying they’re going to give the flower to their partner later today; others are genuinely touched and even shed a tear.
After a while, the students’ relatives appear and the ceremony can finally start.
Hearing that last year’s speech took a whole two hours and a half, we had made turns to take naps meanwhile others thought it could be a good chance to level up in their mobile games. However, to our surprise, we are let go in less than an hour. Before the principal could change his mind and prolong his speech, everyone leaves the gym to meet their parents and friends in the courtyard.
Mine and Seokmin’s parents are standing together in a corner next to the gym’s entrance so we could easily spot them. Jihoon, on the other hand, had to go on a quest to find his parents and our friends too.
Thankfully, it doesn’t take him too long and ten minutes later, he is back with his parents and the rest of Jeonghan’s bitches . My mom immediately greets Joshua, whining about how she misses having him at home and how she will get upset if next time he’s back he doesn’t come to greet her. The same does Jihoon’s mother with me, telling me to go to hers for a cup of tea even if Jihoon is not around. I get a tad bit tense as I feel Wonwoo’s eyes on me but I don’t have the time to look at him because Joshua —my angel— is already introducing him and the rest of the boys to the parents.
It takes only a few banters from Seungkwan to make the awkward mood between the guys and our parents disappear. Our fathers are already in love with Seungcheol and Wonwoo’s way of speaking and the aura they emit. Meanwhile, our mothers have been successfully swooned by Mingyu and Jeonghan’s manners and looks. Soon, everyone is joking and talking as if they’ve known each other for ages and not just minutes.
Then, our classmates call Seokmin, Jihoon and me to go and take some pictures together. This gives the kick-start to a never-ending photoshoot not only with our class but also with our parents and friends. Someone has even brought some props for the occasion: glittery hats, wigs, weird glasses and masks. Loud waves of laughter resonate in the whole courtyard as we’re all enjoying the moment.
The time to part comes and my parents try so hard to convince our group to join us for lunch for some more bonding time but to no avail. The boys are set on going home for a quick meal before invading Joshua’s house and getting ready for the party.
So, my parents and I opted to go back home and order some takeout food to eat while watching the rerun episodes of an action drama the three of us used to like.
By the time I finally wake up from the food coma, the sun is already setting. I take my phone from under the pillow and when the screen lights up, I feel quite frightened at the sight of the last message in the Jeonghan’s bitches groupchat. It is from an hour ago.
DadCheol:
We’re all here.
See the three of you at 7pm.
Don’t be early nor late.
After that, nothing. They all went mute and this is super weird. Usually, the chat would be flooded with derp pictures and videos by now but it is all too quiet.
DonkeyKong:
From 1 to 10
how much are you tempted to go to Joshua’s
and check if they’re all still alive?
Seokmin’s message suddenly pops up, the notification sound startling me.
Hoshiya:
11.
What about you?
DonkeyKong:
You don’t even know.
Not hearing from them makes me think
that Seungkwan may have murdered Mingyu.
Hoshiya:
Maybe Jeonghan killed them both.
DonkeyKong:
I can definitely see that happen.
Hoshiya:
Should we go?
DonkeyKong:
And risking facing Seungcheol’s wrath
after he told us not to come early?
No, thanks.
Hoshiya:
You’re right.
It’s better to wait and hope not to find a pool of blood later.
DonkeyKong:
You’re too dramatic.
Hoshiya:
Said the one who thought of the whole murder scenario.
DonkeyKong:
Touchè.
What are you doing?
Hoshiya:
Just took a nap.
You?
DonkeyKong:
I’m about to go and get ready for tonight,
something you too should be doing
since it’s past 6pm.
Hoshiya:
I know, I would’ve already been in the shower
if it wasn’t for a certain someone texting me.
DonkeyKong:
Who is this someone?
Hoshiya:
I don’t know,
someone who seems to be too much into Cluedo.
DonkeyKong:
Seems like an interesting guy.
Hoshiya:
I never said it was a guy, you dumb.
DonkeyKong:
Right.
My bad.
For once, I’m the dumb one.
Hoshiya:
Once?
DonkeyKong:
Between the two, you’re dumb.
Hoshiya:
Because you’re dumber?
DonkeyKong:
Ah ah ah.
Funny.
Hoshiya:
I know, that’s one of my best traits.
Now, if you’ll excuse me, I have to go.
I don’t want to be scolded by Seungcheol.
I’ll see you later.
DonkeyKong:
Later!
“Jihoon, where the hell are you?” I am tempted to yell but I somewhat manage to gently ask.
“I’m coming, please wait for me,” Jihoon answers on the other side of the call, short on breath.
“Hurry! It’s already 6:59!” I say as Seokmin shoves his phone in my face with a worried and mildly scared expression.
“I’m behind you!”
I turn around and see that Jihoon is indeed running at full speed towards us as he hangs up on the phone, not even trying to put the device back in his pocket. It will make him lose some precious seconds. When Seokmin notices him too, he rings the doorbell.
Seungcheol opens the door the exact moment Jihoon reaches our side and he seems satisfied at the sight of the three of us being right on time. “Don’t stand there! Come on in!” He says before making way inside the house.
“Need...water...feel...like...dying,” Jihoon announces in between pants, a hand holding his aching side. Like that, he goes right away in the kitchen, not greeting the others and missing —for a matter of seconds— the confetti that suddenly rains upon us.
The ones responsible for it are Mingyu and Seungkwan from the second floor. I catch a glimpse of them putting away the basket which contained the confetti and then taking the stairs to join the rest of the boys in yelling their congratulations.
When Seungkwan realises Jihoon is missing, he goes on the look for him and drags his body in the living room where he has Jihoon rolling in the multicolour papers scattered on the floor.
“You dare escape like that?! Did you think you could avoid this?! Well, you were wrong!” Jeonghan says as Seungkwan keeps torturing a laughing Jihoon.
“In my defence, I wasn’t expecting it,” Jihoon wipes a tear from the corner of his left eye. “I was so thirsty after running here.”
“He ran?” Jeonghan looks at Seokmin and me, who nod to confirm Jihoon’s version of the story.
“This means that you were going to be late,” Seungcheol chimes in.
“But we didn’t!” Seokmin takes Seungcheol away before he could give an earful to Jihoon.
“Yeah! Does it matter if he ran or not? What’s important is that we are here and we’re going to party the night away!” I say hugging Jeonghan and whispering a ‘thank you for the surprise’ in his ear.
My tactic seems to work since Jeonghan is now smiling and helping Jihoon getting up. I shake my head with a smile on my lips as I go next to Wonwoo.
Out of habit, I put a hand on his shoulder and give him a quick peck on the cheek which, thankfully, he doesn’t avoid.
This small gesture makes me feel like, maybe, tonight it won’t be too awkward between the two of us.
“Before anyone decides to sit on the sofa and never get up again, let’s go into the kitchen,” Mingyu says as he pushes Jihoon towards the said room. “The food is ready and the grill outside is just waiting for the meat to be cooked.”
“YES! I was starving!” Seungcheol exclaims, already licking his lips at the prospect of eating.
Wonwoo takes my hand and a small smile tugs at the corners of his mouth while he rubs his thumb on my knuckles. My heart skips a beat at the sudden sweetness and I’m relieved to see that my skin hasn’t forgotten his touch. The familiar surge of electricity isn’t late to arrive.
Tightening my grip on his hand, we walk to the kitchen and naturally sit next to each other.
As we stuff our faces and fill our bottomless stomachs, the mood inside the room is just perfect.
Mingyu is running back and forth from the small backyard where he’s grilling the meat with the help of Seokmin and Jeonghan; Jihoon and Hansol are busy showing each other the newest memes the latter has found on the net; Joshua, Seungcheol and Seungkwan are being loud about something that apparently is related to the company and their practices; Wonwoo and I are left alone doing casual talk and catching up with what we’ve been doing in the past weeks.
His words and sentences may be shorter than what they used to be but his hand holding mine under the table and the look in his eyes fill in the small silences.
Of course, all of the fears I felt until today didn’t disappear. I was still silently looking for the red flags that could make me understand what’s wrong with us. However, feeling again his love through his glances and touches eased my heart a bit.
Dinner eaten and dishes put in the dishwasher, we move to the living room where games and snacks have been waiting for us. To warm up, we play a quick round of the hongsam game with no penalties. Chaos ensues the game and we decide to tone it down before the neighbours decide to barge in the house and kick us.
So what better game than the truth-only game? If one refuses to answer the question or goes around it, the penalty is drinking one shot of vodka. Unfortunately for me, not even the minors are exempted from the penalty, Jeonghan and Joshua saying that if we don’t want to drink, we should just answer. By the end of the game, Seokmin hasn’t drunk at all while the rest of us has had at least two shots of vodka.
Since they have to go to work in the morning, they switch games again and Seungcheol is now planning a FIFA tournament on the PlayStation. Jeonghan and I backed out: he prefers laying down on the sofa while I feel a bit dizzy from the alcohol.
After making sure that I’m okay, they go back to choose the teams and when I’m sure they’re too busy to notice me, I leave the room and sneak into the backyard to get some fresh air.
As I close the door behind me and take a quick look around, I wish I had the strength —more like the balance— to go and sit on the chairs in that little garden, maybe next to the grill which is probably still warm.
However, to avoid falling with my butt on the humid grass, I decide it is better to simply lean on the small bannister on the side. Elbows sitting on the rail and hands clasped together, I slightly raise my head up to the sky, to look at the greyish clouds running in the sky, letting themselves be carried by the blowing wind of the night. The moon takes the chance to play her little game of hide and seek, going back and forth between hiding from me and showing me all of her beauty.
When the breeze hits my skin and a shiver runs down my spine, I regret not sneaking out a blanket to huddle in it at a time like this. Despite the cold, I don’t want to get in so I stay there, with my head still looking up. I close my eyes, take a deep breath and my head spins a little but it’s not an unpleasant sensation. On the contrary, I let that vortex behind my eyelids lull me, the faint sound of the cars and of rustling leaves being my lullaby.
I am so relaxed, basking in that moment of pure bliss, that I hadn’t heard the door behind me clicking open. This explains why I jump when it suddenly shuts close. I turn around a little too fast and I almost fall back from the dizziness. Jihoon quickly grabs me by the arm and helps me stand until my head stops spinning.
“You should be more careful,” he says, letting go of me as soon as he’s sure I won’t fall.
“And you shouldn’t startle people, jeez.” I giggle, motioning him to come and stand close to me.
“Next time, I’ll announce myself with some trumpets.” He shakes his head. “Deep in your own thoughts?”
“Just appreciating how beautiful this night is.” I sigh, closing my eyes again. “There is something about it that makes me feel weirdly calm.”
“It’s the effect of the alcohol, my dear Soons. That is the true cause of your calmness.” Jihoon’s sarcasm earns him a light slap on the arm.
“But the world seemed to have stopped or at least quieted down. Don’t you feel it?”
“I don’t feel it but I kind of understand what you mean,” Jihoon says as he finally comes to stand next to me, back facing the garden and both elbows on the rail. “Have you thought that it could be that the ones slowing down are us and not the world? After all, we’re finally taking a pause after years of school and months of practice. We were running non-stop toward our goals.”
“But now we can pause for a while and do the things we had to put on hold. Am I right?”
“Yes….we should live these moments to the fullest, without any regret because one day, we will look back on them and wish we could go back in time and be this carefree again” Jihoon sighs. “I wish I had more time to spend like tonight. You know, with the guys and... you .”
He turns around and his eyes find mine already set on him, taking in the sight of the moonlight shining on his fair skin. The way he’s looking at me has me growing weak. A knot tying in my throat, making it difficult to speak and breathe.
“We will have our nights! You and Seungcheol were the ones who told me so and now you’re going back on your words?”
“I’m not. It’s just...” He takes a short pause, shifting so he can look at me without straining his neck too much. “...with the debut come the promotions at the music shows and in as many programs as we can land so people will get to know us. Then, you have to start working on side activities and the next album. Meeting now already seems difficult so I can’t imagine how hard it can turn later.”
“But won’t it make us enjoy more the time we’ll get to spend together?” I shoot him a smile, not knowing if I’m trying to calm him down or myself. The idea of falling out with them is shaking my heart so bad that my breath gets caught in my throat for a second. Luckily, Jihoon doesn’t seem to notice. “We won’t remotely think of holding back and we’ll live in the moment. No worries, no sadness, only happiness and satisfaction of what we have right there.”
“Are you trying to convince me or yourself?” Jihoon chuckles and the knot in my throat suddenly unties.
“Both of us?” Caught red-handed, I chuckle too.
“You’re right, though.” He releases a long sigh. “In the times we’re apart, we’ll be excited and look forward to the moment we’ll be together again.”
“Exactly. Plus, distance makes us appreciate more what we may take for granted.”
“Who better than us knows this, right?” Jihoon mutters under his breath, the words making my heart clench...and it hurts.
“Right…” I trail off, leaning with my chin on my shoulder and feeling my smile fade away.
There was a time Jihoon and I took our friendship for granted, sure that nothing could’ve come in between us. Then, things changed and we now have lost track of how many times we went down different roads thinking it was the best for the other; of how many times we grew apart only to later realise we can’t leave each other’s side.
The chaos of the past year had us going from one difficult situation to another. However, those hell-like days helped us realise how precious we are for one another.
While deep in thought, I catch Jihon opening his arms, motioning with his head to go to him. He stands like that, not saying a word and just waiting for me. I look at his glassy eyes, down to his lips stretched in a small smile and then my eyes fall on his neck which is...glowing?
I take one step closer and notice from his unbuttoned shirt that, sitting at the base of his neck there’s a pretty necklace with a golden crescent moon filled with little diamonds which are catching the moon’s light. Hanging from the upper end there’s a little star.
“You still have it…” I feel my eyes getting watery too and a light shiver taking over my whole body.
Jihoon looks at me slightly confused before realising what I’m talking about. His hand automatically reaches for the necklace I gave him after our first dinner with the group. “Of course, I do,” he says in a soft voice. “I’ve been wearing it a lot these past days. It made me feel like you were closer to me and giving me the strength to put it up with the work. It’s stupid, I kno-”
“It isn’t…” I take out the star-shaped necklace I’ve been hiding in my pullover. “Back then, Seokmin mentioned a necklace of mine that matched yours...here it is.” I show the necklace and my breath hitches in my throat at the light in Jihoon’s eyes when looking at it. “Been wearing this since we started finals for the same reason.” I play with the star hanging from my neck. “You know...I missed you so much.” I let the words slip out of my mouth without looking at Jihoon and staring at the moon instead. “I tried to focus on the things that I needed to do, on matters that pressed me, but in the back of my head, at the bottom of my heart, all I had was you.”
Jihoon moves closer, closing the gap between our bodies. His arms gently come to wrap around my middle and his head softly lands on my chest.
My arms move on their own will and embrace Jihoon in a loose hug.
“I missed you too,” Jihoon says and I could feel his cheek moving against the fabric of my pullover as he speaks. It tickles a bit but I like the feeling.
I tighten the hug so that Jihoon’s head is tucked under my chin. One of my hands travels up, on his back, stopping right where his heart is. I can feel it under my palm, beating insanely fast for me. I know he can hear mine running at the same pace for him.
Being here, basking in the moonlight and in the quietness of the night, heart beating as one was an unspoken agreement that we liked each other. As people, as friends, as lovers. Even if we shouldn’t.
Time flows but we can’t feel it. We’re too deep in the hug that we so desperately needed and longed for to notice trivial things like that. What mattered was our bodies worn out by the lack of care, our hearts broken by the endless pain and our souls broken by the distance getting closer and closer, wanting to feel the other and to heal as only we can mend each other’s wounds.
“I probably shouldn’t say this but…” Jihoon suddenly says, breaking the silence but not the hug. He takes a pause, closing his eyes to muster up some courage. “I’ve been missing you to the point that every song I composed, every lyric I’ve written ended up being about you, about us .” He shifts in my arms so he can look at me with his tear-filled eyes. “It is so selfish of me to drop this on you, hoping it will bring you to me…” He trails off and gives me a bitter chuckle before continuing “But I guess it is now or never. I doubt there will be another chance for me to tell you this, in this perfect mood.” He then locks eyes with me and whispers “I’ve missed you and I miss you every single day you’re not in the same room with me.”
A single tear escapes from his eye and I immediately cup his face with my hands, thumbs rubbing his soft skin. Despite my hands being ice cold, Jihoon doesn’t flinch at the touch.
He was right, he shouldn’t have told me.
The words he said pierced right through my heart, tears filling my eyes and blurring my vision.
‘I’m sorry, Jihoon. I’m sorry you have to feel like this. It’s all my fault and I’m not worthy of your love.’
These are words that get stuck in my throat as Jihoon stands there, staring at me. His hand comes to cover mine and he tilts his head enough to leave a warm kiss on the palm of my hand.
My heart stops beating and I stop breathing too. The touch of his lips on my skin sends a wave of warmth throughout my body.
The irrational part of me would like to kiss him right here, right now and the way Jihoon slightly tilts his head back shows that he wants that too. My lips itch at the thought of touching and capturing his. We’re getting closer by the second and I can feel his breath on my skin when we hear someone coughing.
We jump away from each other, coming back to our senses.
“Jihoon! Mingyu hyung is looking for you. It’s your turn to play FIFA,” Seokmin says, his expression unfazed as if he hasn’t seen anything.
“Oh, right. I forgot. We still have an ongoing match.” Jihoon awkwardly laughs. “I’ll go in first, then.” He walks inside the house, hand scratching the back of his head and eyes trained on the floor.
Seokmin waits for the door to close before turning around and whisper-yelling at me. “What do you think you’re doing?”
“Nothing!” I say, trying to walk past him and go back inside.
“Not so fast.” He grabs my arms, making me stay right where I am. “Do you know what would’ve happened if the one sawing that wasn’t me? Uh? What if Jeonghan or Seungkwan saw it? Or worse. What if Wonwoo was the one seeing it?”
“Look, Seok, I know.” I sigh, pinching the bridge of my nose. “It was so careless of me to stand that close to him but I swear that nothing happened!”
“But something was about to happen if I hadn’t butted it! I’m sure the moment between you too was oh-so-perfect but you need to keep your emotions in check.” Seokmin's tone is stern. “Remember that you are the one who said you didn’t want to act on your feelings. You told Jihoon to stay as friends. Doing this...you’re confusing and hurting him even more.” He shakes his head “Not to mention that you would have tortured yourself if you had really kissed him.”
“You’re right...I wouldn’t have forgiven myself for acting like this and hurting Jihoon…” My knees go weak at the thought of what could’ve happened if we kissed or if Wonwoo was the one walking in on us.
Seokmin lets go of a sigh before coming to pat my back. “You know that I’m being harsh not because I’m an asshole but only because I want you to be happy, right?”
“I know and I couldn’t be more thankful to have a friend like you, Seok.” I flash him a small smile. “Honestly, I would’ve done the same if I was in your shoes.”
“We only mean the best for each other.”
“We do.”
A few more pats on the back and Seokmin walks inside. After a while spent debating whether to follow him or not, I go back inside too.
I wouldn’t have borne standing alone in the place where I was about to betray myself and let down the ones I love.
Once I was back in the room, Jihoon only looked at the screen, focused on the 2D players chasing on the screen even when it wasn’t his turn to play. In the meantime, I stayed next to Jeonghan on the couch, my head leaning on his shoulder as we watched the others getting excited about the match.
The time to go to sleep arrived and Seokmin and I were the only two who had to go back home. When I was about to leave, Wonwoo asked if I wanted him to walk me home. Since he looked sleepy, I told him I could go back on my own. To my surprise, he didn’t insist after that but I didn’t give it too much of a thought.
I only wanted to go home so I could drop the fake smile I’ve put on for the rest of the night.
Back in my bedroom and sure my parents were already sleeping, I collapsed on the armchair next to the window.
‘I’m so tired…’
I rub my aching forehead, letting out a long and exhausted sigh. Things turned kind of awkward from the moment Jihoon and I came back from Joshua’s yard and I’m praying that no one noticed.
‘Why do I have to lose control when I’m with him? If it wasn’t for Seokmin…’
Groaning, I pull out my hair, too frustrated by my own actions. The moon, who was still up in the sky, is watching over me. She is probably entertained by the sight of a stupid human who’s trying so hard to fix his life but ends up messing it more. She must be curious about what the stupid human will do next.
‘What can I do to save what is left of us?’
Apologising and telling him it was a mistake would be like rubbing salt on his wounds, proving that he should’ve said nothing.
Blaming it on that little vodka in my system isn’t an option. People say that alcohol makes you do the things you don’t dare doing when sober. This would give him hopes that, once again, have high chances of being crushed.
Pretending that nothing happened, letting it go, would look as if the moment we had and the things we said weren’t meaningful which is absolutely not true. Every word of his, every word of mine was meant to show each other how we still care about what we have despite everything.
‘Gosh, listen to me! Who am I trying to fool? I tell myself that I’m being so selfless by letting him go but the truth is that I’m so fucking selfish. The best thing I could do for him is to stop acting like a douche...I’m starting to think that all my second-guessings are just an excuse. I’m only an asshole who doesn’t want Jihoon to stray away from me.’
I sigh again and close my eyes, hands torturing my hair again. Behind my lids, I replay over and over the scene from before: the way I was holding him tight, his heartbeat, me softly caressing his fair skin, us ready to kiss.
The memory of each action made my own heart sink more and more.
Then a detail, something about the moon shining on his face while I was cupping it, triggers a memory.
Suddenly, I’m hit with vivid images of a night that feels so distant.
Me opening the door to my room and finding Jihoon sitting on the edge of my bed, head held in his hands.
I remember him standing up but not coming close, almost as if he was scared of me.
“It’s just that I suddenly felt this urge to kiss you,” I told him as my eyes fell on his lips, thinking about the jolt of electricity I felt when my lips touched his soft ones a while before.
I remember wanting more of it and my mind was clouded by the desire of kissing him for real.
And I did it.
I grabbed his face in my hands and kissed him.
Our lips moving in sync, our bodies getting used to the way the other moved.
Then our tongues met, danced together and tasted each other as we moved closer to the bed.
Jihoon sat on my lap as my hands roamed under his loose sweater, wanting to feel more of his skin.
Images of me grabbing Jihoon by his firm thighs and laying him on the bed flash before my eyes.
Jihoon was under me with swollen lips, dishevelled hair, short on breath.
His white collarbone was peeking from the sweater and, drunk in the moment, I sunk my teeth in it after leaving a trail of wet kisses on it.
This had brought at least one of us back to reality. Jihoon pushed me away, saying that what we were doing was wrong.
“No...no...no...”
Tears leave my eyes like a fast-flowing river, hands clasped on my mouth to muffle the sobs.
My heart is ripping at the idea of how much pain I inflicted on Jihoon. It is tearing apart upon realising why Jihoon disappeared on the New Year’s morning without saying anything.
He must’ve been so disgusted with me, driven by nothing but my hormones and the alcohol.
What is worse, though, is me forgetting that night. I had it easy whilst he had to remember everything and pretend to be okay when he wasn’t. He must’ve been broken and it was all my fault.
‘How am I going to fix this?’
Notes:
What a ride.
The ups and downs keep going on between these two, uh?! And what is happening to Wonwoo? Who knows hehehe (If you have any theory, let me know)On a serious note, I thought it would take me less to finish this one but this autumn session at uni has been quite something. It sucked all of my energies and I wasn't able to write a single word for a whole week and a half. I stood with the docs open on my computer but nothing came out. Honestly, I don't even know how this chapter came out in terms of quality (I hope it was at least mediocre).
Can you believe that next week this story will turn 2 years old? It seems like yesterday that I posted the first chapter but we're here two years later with 34 chapters and a plot which has probably reached its midpoint.
I'm feeling so emotional and I am so grateful that you still keep showing love for this story despite the slow burn and the angst. I hope you'll stick around to see what will it be of these two T-TPS: I was thinking about doing a special chapter for the 2nd anniversary with some of the lyrics Jihoon has written about Soonyoung. If you want it, let me know and I'll work on it right away!
Chapter 35: Chapter 35 - Jihoon's lyrics (Special Chapter)
Notes:
All the lyrics are written by me and edited by @midnightsweets (go check her aus on ao3, they're amazing!)
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
But all love does
is tearing us apart.
Ignite my heart
Set it on fire
Let it turn my love
to ashes.
Rain knocks on my window
Love knocks on my heart.
One bears my tears
One bears your smile.
I want to feel love
so cliché
it's going to be
yet another love song.
And when I’m powerless
ready to give up
Just take my hand
and tell me
we’re gonna make it through.
If I asked
would you stay by my side
or would you leave me behind?
Don’t give up on me
as we’re meant to be.
Fell in autumn like leaves
Cold in winter like snow
Like a swallow you came back in spring
Now I dread the unknown summer.
One kiss
And I was damned
Not for a night
But for eternity.
Don’t want to go
Can’t we stay like this
my hand in yours
till the end of time?
I am fine
but not really
I needed saving
and you did it.
Love comes
with no breaks
it sounds scary
but I am here
Come and crash my heart
When you’re not with me
my heart stops
my soul is empty
without you
I am numb.
At the end of the day
even the whitest and purest
becomes one
with darkness.
Drew my heart on a paper
And realised
Some blank spaces
are meant to stay empty
no matter how many times
you try to fill them.
I wish you were here
holding me in your arms
I wish I was in your heart
for you to love me the way I do.
Like the moon needs the earth
I need you to keep on going
Like the moon needs the sun
I need you to keep on shining.
We fall in love
waiting for that same love
to raise us up
until we reach heaven
or to bring us down
until we reach hell.
Hold me
Say you’ll never leave
Even if it’s a lie
even if it’s for a while
Hurt me
Let me feel safe
in your embrace
One last time.
Do we love to live?
Do we live to love?
The right thing
is to let you go
but I’m afraid
of the void.
Tonight I’ll ask the moon
to light up your dreams
the same way
you light up mine.
When they’ll ask
what’s my favourite song
I’ll just say
my heartbeat when I am with you.
And when I think of love
All I see is your smile
And when I think of home
All I see is your arms.
Winter is not as cold
as the side of my bed
where you used to lay.
There’s no melody
sweeter than your laughter.
Take me with you
somewhere our fears
can’t find us.
Lonely nights
Playin’ with the stars
but what they show me
is the way your eyes shine.
And your drunken lips
got me drunk
in the idea
of what we could be.
Sunsets
Retro music
Laughter
Love
That’s all we need
and all we’re made of.
10 times
100 times
hurt me as you want
I won’t mind
but let me be by your side.
And your eyes
they tell me stories
you haven’t told
yourself yet.
Dying inside
far from you
Flying away
to be with you.
Alcohol isn’t that bitter
When I taste it from your lips.
Notes:
Another rollercoaster driven by Jihoon's feelings and thoughts about his relationship with Soonyoung. These two are making me going crazy T-T
This special chapter was written for the 2nd anniversary of this story. Anniversary that was supposed to be celebrated yesterday and not today (lol) but I posted another story which was a gift for a friend so here we are today and...HAPPY BELATED 2ND BDAY!!
Hope you enjoyed it and I hope to see y'all soon with another chapter! Love you all!!!
[spoiler: debut might be coming already (together with SeokSoonHoon age...you know...the coming of age...bad pun, I know)]
Chapter 36
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
“Man I can’t believe you’re leaving tomorrow,” I say as soon as Seokmin opens the door to his house, completely skipping the greetings part. “Do you really have to go?”
“You make it sound as if I’m leaving for good…” Seokmin sighs and moves on the side so I can walk in. “It’s for three days anyway.”
“But Gangneung is pretty far from here!” After leaving my padding on the coat hanger, I follow Seokmin up the stairs and to his room.
Hadn’t I known that Seokmin was packing his suitcase, I would’ve thought a bomb had exploded in there: a huge suitcase was sitting on his desk; shoe boxes are lined up on and at the bottom of the bed; different coats hanging on the edges of each piece of furniture; clothes scattered here and there, with occasional piles in some points of the floor.
‘He dared to make me feel like I was the one exaggerating things while hiding this mess of a room. Wow…’
“Far?! You’re the one who is going to leave me behind for a month to go to Japan.” Seokmin picks a white sweater with navy and red stripes on the V neck from the floor and places it besides the suitcase.
“Fair enough...by the way, can I help you with anything?” I point at the suitcase which has only underwear laying in it. “Seems like you still have a lot to pack.”
“Everything’s under control! Just find somewhere to sit and relax!” He pats my shoulder and lets a slightly nervous laugh out. Clearly, he is lying and failing to hide his mild breakdown about what to bring with him for the short trip.
I sigh, knowing that in thirty minutes top Seokmin will be asking for help. “If you say so…”
Since I didn’t have the heart to move the boxes from the bed, I look for a small empty space on the floor and sit there. For a while, I silently watch Seokmin pondering and mumbling to himself, switching and matching clothes for his outfits and then fold them in a neat pile on his chair to pack them later.
Sitting here like this triggers a memory from the day the guys passed their audition at the company.
I was at Jihoon’s house with the excuse of helping him pack and visit his mother but the truth was that I wanted to mend our relationship that, like glass under pressure, was starting to show some cracks.
From time to time, the spite-coated words Jihoon said to me resurface from the depth of my memories.
‘What is it that has you keep coming for me? Why do you keep scarring me with false hope?!’
Months have passed since that moment but I haven't found an answer to those questions yet. More than once I had tried to let go of Jihoon so he could be happy but there was something that made it impossible for me to do so. It was as if there was a constant, unexplainable pull that had me go for him, wanting to be someone he needed by his side. This kind of selfishness, though, scarred him more than once. For too many times.
At this point in time, another person would’ve given up on their feelings and moved on to find someone worth loving and hurting for, someone that would eventually reciprocate their feelings and not feed them with false hopes like I keep on doing. One too many smiles, one too many miss you, one too many affectionate hugs or kind words were enough to have Jihoon hope that something has changed between us, that I was finally going towards him like something more than a friend. But then I let him down, pulling myself back one step too many.
There were many occasions like that. When he confessed, for example, or when I kissed him and proceeded to forget it. That was such a wrong move from my side. It was the first piece of a domino that, by falling, gave the start to a series of events leading Jihoon to his confession, to me avoiding him so he wouldn’t feel uncomfortable and to us in his bedroom crying as we made up before he left to become a trainee.
Sometimes I wonder what would’ve happened if I insisted on going to Wonwoo’s house that day or if I chose to stay in the car and go back home. What would’ve it been of Jihoon and me? Would’ve we found another way to make up? To go back on our joint path? Who knows...but I did not once regret what I did on that day.
“Soonyoung, are you listening to me?”
Seokmin wiggles his foot in my line of vision and I snap out of my trance-like state.
I shake my head to get completely ridden of the haze. “Honestly? No...I was distracted by some random thoughts.”
“I asked what is going on in that head of yours…” Seokmin sighs as he folds yet another pair of jeans. “You’ve been spacing out for quite some time.”
“Did I?” I scratch the back of my head, disappointed but not surprised by my behaviour.
Lately, it's been like this a lot. One matter is taken care of, another one pops up. The pressure of quickly solving these issues have been taking a toll on me. My thoughts end up looping around the same problem over and over until it goes away. The consequence is me not being really here, head up somewhere, far away from my friends almost all the time.
“That’s why I should’ve helped you with the packing...I need to keep myself busy because the moment I stand still, thoughts come flooding my mind. ”
“What kind of thoughts?” He throws whatever he was holding on his bed and comes to sit right in front of me. “Tell me.”
“Nope!” I vigorously shake my head. “You’re going on a trip and need to relax, not to feel burdened by my thoughts!” Averting my gaze from his, my eyes land on the framed picture of us hanging on one of his walls.
Seokmin hits me on the arm. When I shoot my head to look at him, he flicks my forehead. Not caring about me wincing in pain, he says, “I will relax better once I know what’s bothering you. So stop brooding and spill it. What happened?”
“Do you remember when we played spin the bottle at my house on New Year’s Eve?” It’s too generic of a question the one I asked, I know. However, I can’t bring myself to be more specific, too ashamed at how impulsively I acted back then.
He takes his time to bring back to his memory the part of the night I am talking about. It shouldn’t be too difficult for him since he hadn’t drunk that much. “Yes...what about it?”
“Well, some days ago I got flashes of one of the last rounds…” I trail off, literally not knowing how to explain him without imploding.
“Are you talking about the part where you kissed Jihoon?” Seokmin casually asks.
“What?!” He got me looking like the Drew Scanlon meme for a second because of how blunt he is. “How did you bring it up that easily?”
“That you kissed him?”
I dive to shut his mouth with one of my hands, the other catching the back of his head. It’s too much hearing it again, knowing that it’s something that must’ve hurt someone I treasure so much.
“Ut?” Seokmin’s voice comes out muffled because of my hand, which he licks to get free. Disgusted, I wipe it on his leg as he says, “Since you look down, I supposed it was about him. Am I wrong?”
“No, you aren’t...it is about him and that specific moment.” I look at my fingers playing with the small silver ring on my thumb “Could you please tell me again what happened in detail? I was drunk and things about that night feel a bit hazy.”
Seokmin falls silent for a while, gaze focused on some point behind me, as he recalls the unfolding of the event. “Mmmh...Joshua dared you to kiss the person sitting on your side which, as we know, was Jihoon. At first, you were confused if Joshua was being serious or not, then you turned around and stared at Jihoon for quite some time. The rest of us was giggling and waiting for you to throw a tantrum because of how ridiculous the dare sounded.” Something seems to strike him as his eyes suddenly widen. “Actually, I remember Joshua telling me the day after that he decided on such a dare because he was sure you were going to refuse and drink some more.” He nods at himself, proud of having included an important piece of information. “Going back on the main story, when Jihoon was about to say you didn’t have to do it, you went for his lips. Needless to say, we were all petrified. Jihoon included. That’s when both Joshua and Jihoon said it was better to wrap up and end the night there.”
The room falls silent after Seokmin finishes speaking. I feel my pupils shaking as well as my hands. The gravity of the situation weighing down on me even more. “...Wow...What an idiot.”
“You were…” Seokmin trails off to sigh and pat my shoulder. “I never told you because on the next day you weren’t freaking out. I figured you had forgotten it and that maybe you didn’t need to be reminded.”
“But I am freaking out now. And much more than I would’ve done back then…”
“Why?” Confused, Seokmin stops patting my shoulder. “Look, Wonwoo won’t know it if this is what you’re worried about. It was just a peck on Jihoon lips, something the others have surely forgotten. See?! Hadn’t you asked me that question, I wouldn’t have remembered too! Soons, it’s not a big deal.”
“ That peck might’ve not been a big deal but what happened later…” I trail off again to hide my face under the hem of the blanket hanging from Seokmin’s bed. I am not ready to see the disappointed look on his face while I tell him how much I’ve fucked up.
“What do you mean? We all went to sleep?” The pitch of his voice goes higher due to the confusion and worry.
“The rest of you, not me or Jihoon. When Jihoon left the living room, I went looking for him. I think I had a moment of lucidity during which I wanted to apologise for making him feel uncomfortable. That’s when things went wrong.”
“How wrong?”
“Terribly wrong...I kissed him again and when he kissed me back, I took things too far.” I groan out of frustration at myself. If I could get out of my body and slap myself I would’ve done it. “At some point, we were basically making out and foreplaying.”
A beat of silence is what follows the confession of my crime, my sin. In that silence, I can almost hear the gears in Seokmin’s head turning as he processes the information and considers whether to murder me on the spot or after I repented. Since he can’t get my blood on his hands, he decides to yell. “YOU WHAT?! SOONYOUNG HAVE YOU LOST YOUR DAMN MIND?! MAKING OUT?! FOREPLAY?! DO YOU KNOW HOW BAD WHAT YOU DID IS?!”
“I KNOW, SEOK! I AM ASHAMED OF MYSELF TOO! BUT PLEASE CALM DOWN AND DON’T YELL!” I move the blanket from my eyes and watch Seokmin, who had gotten up, sit again in front of me with his eyes closed. “Before you say this, I know that being drunk isn’t an excuse for what I did. I shouldn’t have lost control.”
Seokmin takes a long breath. Inhales. Exhales. Inhales again and he exhales his breath with a rapped “I wish I could slap some sense into you but I guess it would be vain.”
“Don’t worry. I have already, both physically and mentally, slapped myself.”
“Good. Also, Shua hyung will do that for me when you’ll tell him.”
I widen my eyes in shock and point a finger at myself. “I’ll tell him?”
“Of course. You don’t want to keep this from him, trust me.”
The warning tone in Seokmin’s voice reminded me of the fuss Joshua hyung made the last time I forgot to spill him some tea that I had already spilt with Seokmin. “You’re right, I don’t want to.”
“Now, let me pretend I’ve calmed down and let’s get back to the main topic.” He clears his throat and pierces me with his eyes as he asks, “So, you don’t know what to do, right?”
“R-right.” I stutter intimidated by Seokmin’s gaze. “None of my plans would work. For example, I could pretend not to remember, letting things as they are but it would look as if I’m avoiding taking my responsibilities. At the same time, bringing it up with Jihoon seems too sudden and could be like rubbing salt on an open wound.”
Seokmin scratches his temple as he considers the options. “The second one would be actually good if Jihoon remembers.”
“He does...I’m one ninety percent sure he does.”
“How do you know that? Did he tell you?”
As he looks alarmed by my statement, I am quick to make things clear. “He didn’t but I figured out he does. For starters, he drank way less than I did. He was acting weird for quite some time after that day. The last clue was his expression during the mouth-to-mouth game at the school festival. It gave it away..”
“Wow…” Seokmin scoffs, not believing his ears. “He must like you a lot , then.”
“Seok, it’s no time for jokes.”
“I’m not making any! It’s true!” He says with wide eyes and pouting at the false accusation. “If he hasn’t told you to fuck off, it means he’s not that mad at you.” Again, he puts a hand on my shoulder and squeezes it. “Trust me, had I been in his shoes, I would’ve dropped your ass, if not destroyed it, right after the kiss.”
Seokmin has a point. Maybe there’s still hope for me. “You really think he doesn’t hate me?”
“Not as much as you think he does! But to be sure, you can always ask him.”
“How?”
“What do you mean how?” Seokmin facepalms and I mentally facepalm too. “Meet up with him if he can or call him and talk about it. Bringing that moment up again could be painful but you both need to face it. Sooner or later the truth about you knowing will come out. You should apologise now so he won’t end up hating you later for not telling him you remember that night.”
I grab the hand Seokmin has on my shoulder and hold it in mine. With the most serious face and grateful heart, I say “When did you become this wise, uh? Did you date behind my back or are you Seokmin’s hidden twin who came to take his place?”
“Shut up!” He swats my hand. “First of all, there’s no twin. Second, I’ve watched enough movies and series to know how this kind of things ends if there’s lack of communication. You’re already not communicating your true feelings to him so let’s not hide anything else, okay?” His smile is so cheeky and it makes my hands itchy to punch it away. With love, of course.
“That was a low blow!” I put my hand on my chest, feigning indignation at what he said. “I would expect this from Joshua hyung, not from you!”
“Guess I’ve been spending so much time with him that I actually became like him.”
That’s it. My time for revenge. “In the end, you are what you eat, right?”
“YOU DIDN’T-”
Expecting his reaction, I bolt out of his room. I try running for the bathroom to hide and save myself but Seokmin is faster. He succeeds in grabbing me before I could even graze the doorknob.
Careful not to loosen my shirt and at the same time careful not to lose me, he drags me by the collar in his room. His ears are burning red from the embarrassment and I find myself fondly giggling at how innocent he still is. Jeonghan hyung would tease him to death for this.
Once Seokmin and I have had our harmless fight, he goes back to packing his things. The silence we have settled in gives me the time to take out my phone and text Jihoon.
Hoshiya:
Jihoonie
Do you have time this week to meet up with me?
Or do you prefer talking over the phone?
Woozy:
Midnight at our spot, okay?
Our spot.
I have been reading the message over and over again. No matter how many times I hear or read those two words, my heart doesn’t get used to them. It stops for a second only to leave me with a weird mix of giddiness and bitterness afterwards, the latter caused by how hypocrite of me it is to feel this flustered at the idea of having a place for the only two of us.
Whenever I come down from this high, I do know that the butterflies in my stomach have no right to fly around.
‘But, Soonyoung, is this spot the playground in your neighbourhood?’ is what many of you might be thinking. Weirdly enough, the place Jihoon is talking about is not the playground. Although it has been dear to us in our better days, lately it has held quite some painful memories of disappointment and heartbreaks. It is a place that, deep down, both of us wanted to let go so that the memories could slowly disappear too, like smoke in the air.
Since Jihoon has moved to the dorm and it’s quite difficult for him to come back to our neighbourhood in the middle of the week, we have found a place that we could easily reach, even at night. That’s none other than the Ttukseom Hangang Park – the area beneath the resort and the bridge to be specific.
It’s a place I came across to one of the first times I’ve been wandering at night with Seokmin and Joshua. During the day it bustles with people because of the different attractions but it’s actually quieter at night, with just a few couples or groups of friends having late-night picnics.
Our spot is the nearest one to the riverbank, close to the dark water which trembles as it shily tries to mirror the wonderful city’s skyline. Skyscrapers, buildings, cars crossing the bridge and the bridge itself paint the water with various shades of green, red, blue and yellow. It’s a painting occasionally ripped by the couples passing by on swan boats. But it’s quick to go back to its original state, reflecting the beautiful night view. It’s almost as if it remains unfazed by the momentarily destructive trail of love.
A blanket is neatly spread on the ground and I laid out some soft drinks and a dosirak I bought on my way here at the convenience store for Jihoonie. Knowing him, he will probably come here straight from his studio and without having had anything to eat.
I’ve been waiting for him for the past ten minutes, enjoying the peaceful atmosphere of the park. Legs distended in front of me, leaning on my elbows, head slightly tilted on the side. I have my eyes closed as I bask in the faint music I can hear from somewhere behind me and the soft chatting and laughing of the people in the background. I’m so immersed in it that I barely notice Jihoon sitting next to me on the blanket. The only way I noticed was the whiff of the familiar scent of his cologne and the sudden change of my heart rate, whose BPM was faster than the song playing not too far away from us.
“You’re here?” I ask with my eyes closed, not ready to face him just yet.
“No, I’m a ghost that you can only hear and not see.” I can hear the click of the can opening. “Of course, I’m here.”
Chuckling, I still open one of my eyes to check if he’s really here. “Good, now eat something.”
“Woah, bulgogi dosirak . You have really outdone yourself, Soons!”
“Only the best for the best artist in our country,” I say as I sit properly to pass him the chopsticks from the bag I’ve been keeping next to me.
He scoffs. “Best artist, my foot. We haven’t debuted yet and the industry is full of great artists.”
“But no one is like my Jihoonie.” I reach out to ruffle his hair but stop when I see he’s wearing his cap.
“I’m sorry but you don’t have an exclusive on me. I’m not your Jihoonie, I am my fans’.” Jihoon breaks the pair of wooden chopsticks and dives in the rice first, his favourite.
“You’re right.” Again, I chuckle. “I need to share you with the whole country, if not the whole world now.”
“Indeed.” He answers with his mouth full, a few grains of rice flying out which has me giggle.
After a while of silence during which Jihoon finishes his late dinner, he asks me “So, what did you want to talk about? I doubt you just wanted to feed me to make sure I won’t starve to death.”
I knew this moment would come but a part of me hoped that Jihoon would’ve forgotten the actual reason why he’s here and just enjoy the company and the food. But again, it’s Jihoon we’re talking about. He rarely forgets something.
“Uh...I don’t even know where to start…”
And it’s the truth.
There are so many things I would like to tell him. To apologise for. At the same time, bringing them up means opening up old wounds that he might have wanted to seclude in the furthest corner of his mind.
I feel so bad about this.
Whatever I’ll say, it will make me feel as if I’m only caring about getting rid of my own guilt and not caring about him.
“Please. You left me hanging for a whole day. Start from anywhere.”
Gulping, I look at Jihoon in the eyes and say “Lately, I remembered something that has happened between us. It’s something I did and I’m sure you haven’t forgotten as I did…”
I trail off but Jihoon is ready to pick up from where I left. “Are you talking about our kiss at your house?”
“Y-yes.” Once again, I’m baffled by how blunt someone can be about something so delicate. “So you really remember.”
“You know, I wasn’t that drunk when it happened…” Jihoon takes a sip of his soft drink, eyes glued on the river before him. “Why are you bringing it up, though?”
“Because I wanted to apologise.” I move my eyes on the river too, looking at a couple taking pictures on the swan boat passing before us. “I did things that had me worry from the moment the memories of that night came flashing before my eyes.”
“I won’t tell Wonwoo if that’s what you’re worried about,” Jihoon says. A hint of sadness and spite in his words.
“It’s not that…” I sigh and turn around to take one of Jihoon’s hands in mine. “I was worried about you. About how much I must’ve hurt you and how difficult it must’ve been to be the only one remembering.” My eyes are trained on my thumb caressing his knuckles.
Jihoon softly gasps, taken aback by my words. “It was...it still is difficult,” he answers. His voice is broken as he probably is rewinding the suffering he had to go through by himself. “But what can we do? It’s not like we can go back in time and stop ourselves from doing it.” He flashes me a bitter smile.
‘I wouldn’t stop them, Jihoonie. I would tell them to do it again and then sort their feelings before things get too complicated.’
I don’t have the time to reply because Jihoon adds, “Plus, it’s not like you were the only one doing the kissing. I have my share of guilt in this. I let my feelings take the best of me and acted on impulse, ready to blame it all on the alcohol in case you remembered.” Jihoon takes another sip of his drink. “At that moment, the aftermath didn’t seem important.”
“We were selfish, not caring about how much we were hurting each other and the people around us.”
Jihoon takes his hand away from my grasp and sighs. “I always tell you’re an idiot when, in fact, I’m no better than you.”
“So...I can call you idiot from now on?” I try to joke to lighten up the mood a bit.
Jihoon catches what I was trying to do so he replies, “Definitely better than vertically challenged . Don’t you think I forgot the time you used to call me like that.” He manages to shoot me his most threatening glare.
“It was ages ago! And you should admit that you were kind of an asshole to me.” I’m quick to defend myself.
“Still, you had a soft spot for me,” He points out with a satisfied expression plastered on his face.
“Touché.” I put my hands in the air to surrender. I could never win an argument against him. “So...no hard feelings between us? You don’t hate me?” I ask him, going back to our conversation. Just so you know, while asking I am using the most effective weapon in the world, the puppy eyes.
Jihoon lets go of a deep sigh. “I told you that I am as guilty as you are so I couldn’t possibly hate you. That would make me a hypocrite.”
Giddy at his answer, I decide to push my luck and throw another joke in. “The truth is you can’t resist me when I flash you my big eyes.”
And I indeed pushed my luck too far.
“I take back what I said. I hate you,” Jihoon says feigning disgust before jugging the rest of his soft drink.
“Nooooooo, you can’t take it back!” My cry draws the attention of quite a few people sitting around us.
“Oh, yes I can.”
As he laughs at me begging him not to take back the fact he doesn’t hate me, a bulb lights up in my head about something I’ve been meaning to ask Jihoon.
“Jihoonie,” I suddenly call for him. The tone of my voice seems to alarm him as he’s quick to recompose himself and listen to me. “Am I the only one feeling this or Wonwoo has been acting weird lately?”
“Define weird.”
I hum, thinking about how to explain what I’ve been feeling without sounding like an obsessive boyfriend. “For example, he has been missing our meetings, rain-checked a lot of our dates, often ghosts me on KakaoTalk and when he replies, his texts are either dry or monosyllabic.” I only list a few of what, to me, looked like bright red flags. “But then, at our graduation party, he was back to his old self.”
“Mmmh...I see what you mean and I kind of felt that too.” Jihoon lays down on his side so he could still face me. “He has been a little bit colder with all of us these days. The guys say it’s because he’s busy and tired.” He motions me to get closer to him and when I do, he whispers “I shouldn’t be saying this but he’s been taking piano and composing lessons. He’s away most of the day so it might be true. But I think there is something he isn’t saying and the others don't seem to catch. I don’t know what though.” He shrugs.
“You’re saying something is bothering him and that’s why he acts cold?”
Now, this has me worried. What could possibly be bothering him to the point he’s doing this? Could it be something that I did? Is it my fault again?
“Yes but, again, I’m only expressing my opinion. The members could be right and this is just a tough time for him.”
“It is tough for you too but you’re not acting as he does.” I am whining and this catches me off guard too. It’s not like me to do this. “To be precise, we’re talking more now than we did before you were cast by your company.” I am complaining like a little child and, therefore, I am treated like one.
“Soons, not everyone reacts the same way to the new things happening in their lives.” Jihoon pats my hand, standing in between our bodies. “Both Wonwoo and I are working hard on the things we want to improve for the benefit of the whole group. But while I try to reach out to you and my other friends to de-stress, Wonwoo might be the type who closes himself until he’s done with what he’s doing.”
“Do you think I should talk to him?” I ask looking at our hands instead of meeting his eyes.
“I think you should wait. He might be sensitive about the topic and act on an impulse because of the stress. Wait for us to debut and then we’ll see how things will go from there, okay?” He flashes me a reassuring smile.
“You’re right. You always are.” I finally smile too.
“So I can take back what I said before about me being an idiot.” Jihoon steals my drink and takes a sip from it.
“No, that stays,” I complain as he, again, wants to take back something.
“Okay, but let’s be clear. I’ll be idiot number two since you’re still the number one.”
I know I shouldn’t be testing his patience like this but I can’t stop myself from saying, “Like BoA’s number one?”
“I didn’t mean like that-”
I cut off Jihoon’s words to annoy him by singing BoA ’s No. 1 . He covers his ears and sings a different song so he won’t hear me but he gives up the moment I take one of his hands off and he’s forced to listen to me singing the rest of the chorus.
Another obstacle that life put in our path has been overcome. We have been scarred in the process and some wounds might still be bleeding without the other person knowing. However, none of this seems to matter at this moment where Jihoon and I can be once again carefree, enjoying the happiness coming from being together. Happiness that we both know could easily get lost to a new hardship blocking our way.
Until then, we’ll just be two friends light-heartedly making happy memories to cherish in our darkest days.
Notes:
I know this chapter is very short and rushed but I will be kind of busy in the next few days and I wanted to end this year with Soonhoon being in a good place and on a good note. I promise that next year will be full of even more exciting moments between these two and some twists/dramas no one expects (if you do, it’s because you know me well by now).
This has been a tough year for everyone. In one way or another, we reached its end. Someone reached the goals they set for themselves, someone didn’t. Either way, it’s perfectly fine since everyone did their best to overcome the hardships we came to face throughout this year. Fear, anxiousness, restrictions, being apart from our loved ones. We are slowly overcoming it all or at least pushing them away from us.
We don’t know what’s expecting us in the future but we know that thanks to this 2020, we gained a new strength that will help us with whatever problem we might face in the future as things will look like a piece of cake compared to a pandemic.
Again, you all worked hard and each and every one of you is amazing.Thank you for being on this journey with Soonhoon and me this year too. Thank you for putting up with my angst ass. Thank you to those who give kudos and comment. Thank you to my silent readers. I love you all and I hope to find you well next year! Happy New Year to everyone!! Stay healthy, stay happy.
Chapter 37
Notes:
Guess who's back, back again...
The three songs mentioned in this chapter are, in order:
- Dusty Spriengfield - I close my eyes and count to ten
- Sasha Sloan - Dancing With Your Ghost
- Crush feat Taeyeon - Don't Forget
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
I remember the break before University being one hell of a time. Perhaps, it was the busiest I've ever been in my nineteen years of life.
Don't get me wrong, it's not that it has been a bad time. It's just that there were so many things to do, so much to prepare for and it often felt like I hadn’t enough time on my hands to do everything that needed to be done.
Maybe it was from the moment Seokmin left for the trip with his parents or from when Jihoon and I talked about our first kiss but, at some point, time had flown without me really noticing and if I try to recall what I did, some things are vivid and some others are just blurry as fuck.
For example, I clearly remember leaving Seoul for a little more than a week to visit my relatives and friends in Japan. Something we do every year when there's a school break.
My parents decided to stay a few days longer because last Christmas I didn’t come here and I will probably be in Seoul this year too. Honestly, I thought it was a good idea. That trip was going to be my chance to rest both my body and mind from all of the stress accumulated in the past year.
Of course, it was a foolish thought. It slipped my mind that the people I was going to visit would've been excited to see me after a whole year.
My friend came to my house first thing in the morning and literally kidnapped me the whole day. They brought me to the new hot places in town and the ones we used to hang out at when I used to live here; they introduced me to the people that have recently joined their squad, aka their boyfriends and girlfriends, and I couldn't let them go without telling some stories of our days as the popular ones in middle school.
When evening came and I parted ways with my friends, my parents would drag me to my relatives' house. There, my aunt would feed me any kind of food despite me telling her I had eaten plenty when I was out with my friends. The brief moments my mouth wasn't full of tonkatsu , both my aunt and uncle showered me with questions about my life, if I had any plan to come back here after graduating and about working in the broadcasting branch of my cousin's company.
By the time we went back to our house, I was worn out and my head hurt like crazy but, nonetheless, I was happy. I had been surrounded by people with whom I shared a huge part of my life and whom I missed a lot while I was away. We brought back old memories as we were making new ones; we shared our stories so we could catch up and feel that we are still part of each other's life.
Actually, from the moment they saw me, they treated me as if I was never gone and it was something I didn't know I needed. It made me realise that no matter how far I go or for how long I am away, I have a place in the world where I can return to.
What made me the happiest, though, was how even those who were kind of jealous and possessive of me back then were genuinely happy for me. They were glad to hear about the new friends I made in Seoul. They already knew of Seokmin and Joshua so they mostly asked about the others: how happy and in love Seungcheol and Jeonghan look from the pictures; how we can stand Seungkwan and Mingyu chaotic asses; how they can't believe how sweet Wonwoo and Jihoon are and how their intimidating looks deceived them.
After they insisted on listening to some of their songs, they wished them the best for their debut and said they would definitely cheer and support them. They even said they won't miss the chance to attend their concert when they'll come to Japan while on tour.
It felt good seeing how my friends here accepted and were enthusiastic about my other friends. Of course, my family too was as supportive...especially my aunt after mom told her about Mingyu and how he would make a perfect son-in-law.
Needless to say that my aunt grew curious about him to the point she swore she will come to Korea to meet him and maybe introduce him to my cousin. A horrific scene of her pestering Mingyu flashed before my eyes. Shivering in fear, I told her Mingyu is actually in a very serious and committed relationship with a girl chosen by his family so he's totally off-limits. Then, I glared at my mom before she could suggest introducing someone else from the group to my cousin.
Ten days or so passed and my time to go back to Korea came. My friends had me leaving after promising not to let a year pass before visiting again.
Once I was back, the groupchat was flooded with texts about an announcement Jeonghan's bitches had for Seokmin and me. They asked us when we could meet and, despite wanting to see them so badly, I told them that I was tired in need of some actual rest before I turned into a walking corpse.
1004Han:
One day.
That's how much time we can give you.
Hoshiya:
Yes, sir.
It’s enough, sir.
1004Han:
And you, Hong Jisoo,
don't even think of going to Soonyoung's while you're
at your parents' and spoil him the surprise.
Joshuji:
I won't even be at my parents' tomorrow?!
It's not the weekend yet so we have practice.
Hoshiya:
I wouldn’t even have the energy to listen to him.
1004Han:
Still, no spoilers.
DonkeyKong:
I don't understand why Vernon hyung knows it already
but I don't.
Pupgyu:
That's because Seungkwan can't keep his mouth shut
for more than one second.
Kwannie:
Eye-
Dadcheol:
He's right on this one.
Kwannie:
Fine!
I did wrong one time!
I'm sorry!
Pupgyu:
One time?
Kwannie:
Yes.
You're the one who keeps messing things up.
Not me.
1004Han:
Stop it.
We're talking about something important
so if you need to fight,
do it face to face and not in the chatroom.
Thanks.
Pupgyu:
Fine.
Kwannie:
See you in a minute.
Dadcheol:
Don't fight in the living room, please.
Jihoon just fell asleep.
1004Han:
He did?!
My child is finally getting some rest.
Anyway, as I was saying,
we'll see you two at Mingyu's house
on Friday right after lunch.
Hoshiya:
Can't you spoil just a little bit
of what you have to tell us, hyung?
1004Han:
Not a single word will come out
of my mouth :)
DonkeyKong:
Shua hyung?!
Pretty please?!
Joshuji:
It's abofadkgjgakdl
DonkeyKong:
Hyung?
1004Han:
Not a single word will come out
of Joshua's mouth too :)
DonkeyKong:
I'm mildly scared...
Hoshiya:
Me too...
I won't ask any more questions.
1004Han:
Good boys :)
Dadcheol:
Now, get some rest :)
And that's what I did. I rested for the next 36 hours.
The first night I was back, I went to sleep right after dinner. I dived under the pile of blankets on my bed not even bothering to unpack my suitcase, which I abandoned in one corner of the room. It was a dreamless sleep from which I woke up in the late morning. It was too late for breakfast so I just unloaded my luggage directly into the washing machine and went to change into some comfortable clothes for the house.
The rest of the day was spent moving from the couch where I was watching movies with my parents, to the chair in the kitchen to eat lunch and dinner and my bed again where I caught up with the unread messages and then went to sleep.
The day after I woke up with a text from Joshua.
Joshuji:
Come to my house at 2pm.
We'll go to Mingyu's in my car.
Hoshiya:
Oh?
You're home?
Joshuji:
Not yet.
I'll be there by lunchtime, why?
Hoshiya:
Nothing, I thought you could come here for a while.
Mom keeps saying that she misses you.
Joshuji:
I miss her too T-T
I promise I'll come to sleep at your house
some time next week.
Ask her if she can make her kimchi bokkeumbap.
Hoshiya:
Don't even need to ask.
I'm sure she will make it knowing how much you like it.
Joshuji:
That's why she's the best T-T
Anyway, I gotta go.
See you later!
Hoshiya:
Later, hyung!
Taking the rest of the morning for myself and to quickly clean my room, I had lunch with my parents and left the house when it was a few minutes to two. Joshua was already waiting for me in front of his door. Next to him was standing Jihoon in all of his tiredness. His deep dark circles were visible from afar. He greeted me with a smile that didn't reach his eyes and a small “Hi” tiredly leaving his mouth. I shyly greeted him back with a wave of the hand but I preferred not to say a single word. Jihoon was barely standing up and I doubted he had the energy to keep a conversation going, so I decided to not even start one.
We got in the car and, as expected, he fell asleep the moment he sat down. Joshua and I didn't talk much either, the few things we said were whispered so we wouldn't wake Jihoon up just yet.
Unfortunately for him, the trip to Mingyu's house was a rather short one but he looked a little bit better than he did ten minutes before.
When we reached the others, Seokmin was already in the living room, sitting next to Seungkwan. He was trying to get something out of the hyung before my arrival. Meanwhile, Jeonghan charged at us the moment Seungcheol let him out of their loose hug.
“Did you two say something to Soonyoung while coming here?” Jeonghan pointed his finger at Joshua first and then at Jihoon.
“No, we didn't spoil the surprise,” Joshua said after a long, tired, sigh.
“I was sleeping so I know nothing.” Jihoon made his way to the couch and plopped between Wonwoo and Mingyu, leaning his head on the taller's shoulder. It was such a rare sight that Seungcheol took his phone out and captured the moment to later tease the younger.
“Maybe we should share the news before Jihoon falls asleep again.” Joshua went to wave his hand in front of Jihoon who was slipping again in the dreamland.
Jeonghan walked to stand in the middle of the room, cleared his throat and with a solemn tone to his voice said, “Seokmin, Soonyoung. Please, sit down and grab each other's hand. You may need it.”
Rushing to sit next to Seokmin, I almost slipped on one of Mrs Kim's fancy carpets causing the rest of the hyungs giggle and whispering a series of “cute”. “You can say what you need to say, hyung,” I said while grabbing Seokmin’s already sweaty hand.
“Well, as you may know, our debut is nearing but we couldn’t disclose the exact date...until, today.” Jeonghan pressed the on button on the remote he had apparently been holding since the beginning. A photo slowly appears on the black screen at his back. It’s the seven of them striking one of those ‘we are a cool band’ kind of poses. The words ‘New World by Al1’ were written below in a fancy font and the date was on top of their heads. I squinted my eyes to read it and they widened right after. I turned towards Seokmin and I found him looking at the screen with his mouth wide open.
“Am I reading this well?” Seokmin asked, his voice muffled by the hand that went to cover his mouth.
Jeonghan said nothing. He was looking at us with excited eyes and a grin that was about to split his face in two. Around him, the others were all nodding and their feet were tapping on the floor to create a drumroll effect.
“You’re debuting...IN TWO WEEKS?” I yelled at the same time I was getting up, forgetting I was still holding Seokmin by the hand and making him stand up with me. “ARE YOU FREAKING SERIOUS?”
“My parents are not home so you can swear if you want,” Mingyu informed us.
“ARE YOU FUCKING SERIOUS?” I said once again. “THIS IS NOT A PRANK, RIGHT?”
“WE’RE NOT HALLUCINATING?!” Seokmin yelled too.
“We’re serious and you’re not hallucinating,” Seungcheol stood up and walked next to Jeonghan, sneaking a hand around his waist. “In two weeks our first music video and album will be on different platforms.”
“And we’ll have our debut showcase,” Wonwoo said with a proud smile on his face. “It seemed too far of a goal to achieve...I can’t believe we’re almost there.”
Time slowed down all of a sudden while I was watching them. The happiness and excitement were evident in the expressions of each and every one of them, their reactions different but similar at the same time.
It was pure bliss seeing how they were hugging the shit out of the person standing next to them, staring at the screen with watery eyes.
What has been a dream for who knows how long was now two weeks away from becoming reality. And thinking about how they wanted Seokmin and me to be with them at the exact moment the news was shared with the rest of the world, made me feel blessed. That action alone meant they wanted to live this happiness with us.
I was tearing up but I didn’t know I had started fully crying until Wonwoo came next to me and wiped my tears with his sweater paws. I looked at him through my watery eyes and hugged him as more tears were spilt.
Before any of us could realise it, we were all wrapped in a big group hug and cried for what seemed to be a very long time.
Needless to say how embarrassed we were when Mingyu’s parents came back home to find ten men weeping while standing in the middle of their living room.
“My eyes are so red,” Mingyu chuckled as he checked himself in the huge mirror next to the window. “It’s better than Seungkwan’s puffy eyes, though.”
“Shut up, Kim Mingyu!” Seungkwan landed his open hand in the middle of Mingyu’s back. “That’s unfair! You were crying harder than I was!” Vernon grabbed Seungkwan and tried to take him away from the taller man before he could really fight him.
Joshua’s eyes darted from one face to another, then on his reflection caught in the black screen of the turned-off television and stated, “No one looks better than another. We’re all a mess. No wonder Mrs Kim got worried and thought something bad had happened.”
“None of us was expecting to cry this much,” Jihoon said, rubbing his bloodshot eyes contoured by dark circles. “I can’t feel my eyes anymore...are they in their spot or did they fall?”
“They’re there.” Seokmin nodded after checking in all seriousness Jihoon’s face as if his eyes could’ve fallen out of his orbs for real.
Jeonghan shook his head when he caught Seungcheol silently sobbing in the corner. He sighed and said, “I’ll give you all fifteen minutes to pull yourselves together. Then, ready or not, we’re going out to celebrate.” He took a wallet out of his pocket and waved it in the air to both grab our attention and win our love.
“Oh, great Yoon Jeonghan! We thank you for being so generous and willing to pay for our dinner. No one in this world is like you!” Seungkwan looked at the wallet and then at Jeonghan in awe.
The words ‘Yoon Jeonghan’ and ‘pay’ in the same sentence, had Seungcheol finally looking at his boyfriend. He then touched the back of his jeans and let a long, exhausted, sigh out. “Of course, he’s willing and generous. That’s my wallet.”
“That’s where you’re wrong, my love.” Jeonghan walked to Seungcheol and boop-ed his nose. “We’re boyfriends, so it’s our wallet.”
“Do I even want to rebate? Can I even win this argument?” Seungcheol rhetorically asked, eyes rolling and the hint of a fond smile on his lips.
“Not a chance.” Jeonghan giggled as he turned back to look at us. “See? Dinner’s on us.”
Mildly worried for Seungcheol’s finances, our cheer wasn’t as loud as Jeonghan expected it to be. But he knew better than to be disappointed by it. Yoon Jeonghan knows way too well that once food comes into our sight, there’s no thing such as worrying for someone’s money.
In fact, we ate till our bellies risked bursting. But before Seungcheol could pass out at the sight of the bill, we insisted on splitting it. We’re not that heartless after all.
Two weeks seem like a long time but with classes finally beginning and having to adjust to the new schedule, you realise that fourteen days can go by in a blink of an eye.
However, despite being super busy, Seokmin and I managed to meet up with the boys, in a group or one-on-one, whenever they could spare us some time.
Among those times, three specific moments can be considered the “highlights” of those two weeks.
1. Vinyl Art with Jihoon
Jihoon and I often met at our spot next to the river at night time. It was mostly when he wanted to run away from his studio for a bit to breathe some fresh air. When he was free and could come back to our neighbourhood to visit his parents, we would meet at his house in the early afternoon.
However, there was this one time when he caught me by surprise, sending me a text a bit earlier than lunch.
Woozy:
If you’re free this afternoon...
should we go to Vinyl Art?
I checked the text one, two, three, four times because I couldn’t believe my eyes. We’ve been avoiding crowded spaces for a while so why did he want to go there? It was so out of the blue but I couldn’t bring myself to ask him if there was a particular reason behind that invitation. He might have taken it as me not wanting to go out with him.
So, even though I had to review some notes I took in class that morning, I told him to let me know at what time I should be at said cafè. Notes and books could’ve waited before becoming my top priority. At that time, meeting Jihoon whenever he asked was what mattered. I bet there won’t be many chances to hang out with him like this in the future. Too busy dealing with work or stormed by fans asking for a pic or an autograph every two steps he’ll take.
Long story short, that was how later that afternoon, Jihoon and I were sitting inside our favourite themed café.
Some things had changed from the last time we had been there: more LPs on the shelves of both new and old artists; a section where you could leave your old vinyl discs so that other people could either play them at the cafè or pick them up to take them home; each table had their own record-player with two pairs of headphones, that way people could listen to different songs at the same time without any trouble; they even replaced the old stereo system with one linked to a jukebox so that clients could choose a song to play for the whole café, just like it happened in the good old times.
And it was ironic to think that even us, sitting in that very place, had changed. We were not the same people we used to be months ago in the old Vinyl Art. Events happening in both of our lives led us to change and become the two young men we are now, sitting across each other, sipping on our hot chocolates.
Jihoon seemed to be thinking about something similar during the time we silently enjoyed the music playing in the room because he then broke the silence saying, “Do you remember the last time we came here?”
I nodded “Of course, I do. It seems like aeons have gone by but it was only a few months ago...”
Jihoon chuckled as he looked outside the window. “We came here in secret because Chanyeol didn’t want us to meet.”
“Wonwoo too,” I added. “He never said it out loud but he didn’t like us hanging out alone.”
“But we didn’t listen to them. In the end, there was nothing wrong with what we were doing…”
‘Besides falling in love with each other’ were the words my mind silently added to Jihoon’s sentence left unfinished.
Sighing, I stirred the hot chocolate to let the whipped cream mix with the rest of the drink. It gave me some time to think about how to word my thoughts. Then I said, “A lot of things have changed since that day and not in the most peaceful and quiet of ways.”
“My life got turned upside-down...I broke up with Chanyeol, I confessed to you and got rejected. Then I got scouted by one of the most important agencies in Seoul, I produced a whole album for the group and now I am days away from debuting.” Jihoon listed the said things on his fingers.
‘If you only knew how I truly felt that day and what was going on inside of me…’ was what I wanted to say but instead, I went for a simpler “I got it.” I rolled my eyes, feigning annoyance. “You want to say that life was being a bitch but now you’re young, thriving and soon-to-be rich while I am young, lame and bound to have a curved back and sore eyes from too much studying.”
“True but you said it, not me.” Jihoon shot his hands up as if the gesture would further prove his innocence.
However, it only gained him a smack on his arm. “You were supposed to say that it’s not true, that I am not lame and I will thrive too.”
“If you want to thrive, you need to have some tragic events in your life first.” Jihoon then pointed at himself. “For me? It was the break-up and being rejected.”
A pang of guilt at the word ‘rejected’ made my heart clench in a painful grip but he made a point. “Am I not going through that now?” I jokingly asked to distract myself from the pain.
“What do you mean?! You’re still with Wonwoo.”
“Ji, considering how much I’ve been seeing and talking to Wonwoo, I’m no different from being single.” I looked at him for a quick moment before saying. “You and I are quite similar after all.”
The mirthless laugh leaving my throat and breaking in the middle, had Jihoon worry that we might have touched a topic that shouldn’t have been brought up. He must’ve been afraid that the crack in my laugh meant that I was about to cry, so he grabbed my hand and stroked my knuckles with his thumb.
The unexpected touch had me shoot my gaze up from my drink, to our linked hands and then at him. He was already looking at me, his pupils slightly shaking. I could see the concern and a hint of something that looked like a parental instinct, one that makes you want to wrap your arms around the other person and shield them with your body to warden the bad and hurtful things off.
Not being able to be left unshaken by the sweet intensity of that gaze and afraid he could read on my face the feelings that have been flooding my entire body from the moment he took my hand in his, I decided to change the topic. And what better topic to distract him if it’s not music?
When Jihoon and I walked in Vinyl Art, we were immediately attracted by the new jukebox. Seeing how our eyes were shining at the sight of the device, one of the waiters walked up to us and told us we could use it if we wanted, explaining to us what to do to play a song. Needless to say, we spent ten minutes scanning the whole set of available songs, looking for something both of us liked.
At some point, I left Jihoon choosing the song to go and order our drinks thinking that the pressure of our hot chocolates being made would’ve sped up the choosing process. However, when I came back, Jihoon was still there, blankly staring at the jukebox. Not being able to reach an agreement, we randomly pressed some buttons and the chosen song turned out to be one we had recently heard in a movie with a cool scene set in a jazz bar.
I pointed at one of the speakers behind Jihoon and said “I think the song we chose is coming up. Isn't it about the time that it plays?”
But the song that played wasn’t Glenn Miller ’s In the mood , the one we chose. It was one I wasn’t very familiar with but Jihoon flinched and I took it as a sign that he indeed knew the song. As expected from one who listened to all their parents' vinyl collection while growing up.
The intro could’ve thrown anyone off and have them think it was made for a tango, a passionate kind of music that I had only seen danced in Moulin Rouge . In my head I could picture a couple dancing to it, their bodies pressed to each other, burning in wanting and lust.
However, the whole passionate feel went down a notch the moment a woman’s voice took over the melody.
It isn’t the way you look
And it isn’t the way that you talk
It isn’t the things that you say or do
Make me want you so
It is nothing to do with the wine
Or the music that’s flooding my mind
But never before have I been so sure
You’re the someone I dreamed I would find
Seeing how steady the melody was, I decided to concentrate on the lyrics. Even if I didn’t understand it whole, I could get what it was about. I was once in the woman’s shoes too.
You know, when you stop and think about what love means to you or to think about the person you love, you find yourself asking the question “why is it them and not someone else?”.
At first, you tell yourself it’s probably because they look a certain way or because of how alluring the way they talk is.
Then, you think it’s because of the atmosphere around you, because of the alcohol that makes you see the world and them in a prettier way or it’s because you looked at them when a certain song was whispering feelings of love to your heart.
But, the deeper you go, the more you understand that all those things are only a part of the true reason you love someone.
It’s the way you make me feel
The moment I am close to you
It’s a feeling so unreal
Somehow I can’t believe it’s true
The pounding I feel in my heart
The hoping that we’ll never part
I can’t believe it’s really happening to me
The melody shifted to a more gentle and lovely one, as the singer listed off the true reasons why she deemed this person to be the someone she dreamed to find.
Guess what? They were no different from mine.
I looked at Jihoon and could feel all of that. The tingly feeling on my skin because of his touch; the pounding in my heart because of the way he was looking at me and caressing my hand; the hoping that whatever happens in the future won’t have us parting because it would crush me.
Neither could I believe that it was happening to me.
I was supposed to feel all of this with Wonwoo, the one I liked from the very first moment I set my eyes on him.
Instead, it was happening with the man sitting before me. The one with whom I’ve been through thick and thin. The one who grew on me until he became an essential person in my life.
I close my eyes and count to ten
And when I open them you’re still here
I close my eyes and count again
I can’t believe it but you’re still here
And there it went the tango again, a sadder veil added to it because of the fear subtly exposed in the sung words. The feelings for the other person are so perfect that it seems something one can only feel and see in the oniric dimension. No matter how many times you tell yourself it’s all real, you can’t shake off the impression of everything being nothing but a dream.
At that very moment, I too was afraid of closing my eyes and opening up again only to find myself alone in my bedroom, that afternoon with Jihoon being nothing but a figment of my imagination which longed to be closer to Jihoon.
However, his touch kept me grounded.
He was truly there with me.
We were strangers a moment ago
With a few dreams but nothing to show
The world was a place with a frown on its face
And tomorrow was just, I don’t know
But the way you make me feel
The moment I am close to you
Makes today seem so unreal
Somehow I can’t believe it’s true
Tomorrow, will you still be here?
Tomorrow will come but I fear
That what is happening to me is only a dream
At that, Jihoon held my hand tight. His eyes were exactly mirroring my thoughts and fears.
It must’ve felt unreal to him the fact we were sitting in Vinyl Art without having it to be a secret kept to ourselves.
But what felt the most unreal was how close we came to be and how much we grew up, coming to stand for ourselves and what we have, not letting anyone else come in between us.
Still, there are some things we have no control upon. The future has plenty of uncertainties.
The fear will always be there, brewing deep down our hearts, and having us guessing if the other person will be with us the next day or if we’ll need to wake up from this beautiful, yet angst, dream.
I close my eyes and count to ten
And when I open them you’re still here
I close my eyes and count again
I can’t believe it but you’re still here
I close my eyes and count to ten
And when I open them you’re still here
When the song ended, both of us let go of the hand we had been holding, eventually breaking eye-contact. Jihoon went back to look outside the window while I had my eyes land somewhere that it wasn’t Jihoon’s profile.
Neither of us said anything while the song we had chosen on the jukebox was playing, completely changing the mood we were in a couple of seconds ago. It was an atmosphere made of tension and unconfessed feelings.
I felt naked. The words from the song had spoken on my behalf, letting me come clean about all of my unsaid fears about the days ahead of us.
They were all out in the open without me having to do anything.
The song kept echoing in my mind even that night when I was all alone in my room. Laying on my bed with my eyes closed, I was unconsciously counting to ten as if to do a reality check on what had happened not only that day but in my life up until that very moment.
I played the song once again from my phone.
In my room, there was an old song, a passionate tune that hid the fear of loving someone that felt too good to truly exist.
There was also a young man, a passionate teenager who hid his love in fear of losing someone that felt too good to truly exist.
2. Late-night drive with Wonwoo
With Wonwoo it was a totally different story.
The fact we were going to see each other less after his debut didn’t ignite in him any fire. It was like he didn’t feel the need to see me, to be alone with me.
During those two weeks, we would hang out with the entire group. If it happened for the two of us to be alone, it was hella awkward for no reason at all. We just caught up about work or school inside his parked car until late at night. Nothing else.
One night, though, he kind of surprised me.
It was two in the morning when he started his car’s engine without saying a word. Being in front of a convenience store in his neighbourhood and having seen the time, I thought he was driving to my house but instead, he was getting further away from there.
“Where are we going?” I asked him, confused, while pointing towards the direction he should’ve taken.
“We’re going on a late-night drive. I want to take you somewhere.” He said, not taking his eyes off of the road.
After that, none of us spoke again. He was busy driving, looking at the road signs to make sure he wasn’t taking wrong turns while I was sitting there, looking at the lights of the sleepless city while wondering where he was taking me.
It had been a while since he had done something on impulse like that. I honestly thought I’d never see this side of him again, the one which made me feel alive and on edge, always trying to predict his next move and being speechless for how far I was from the actual surprise.
The drive lasted for quite some time. I had let the window roll down and leaned my head on the side so the wind would brush on my face, eyes kept closed as the random playlist playing from Wonwoo’s phone was filling the silence between us.
Because of the whole atmosphere feeling quite normal, I didn’t dare do anything besides that, too scared to ruin the moment we were having.
I was feeling so relaxed thanks to the wind and the music that, at some point, I had even fallen asleep.
Not having noticed the car stopping, Wonwoo had to call my name and poke my side quite a few times before, groaning, I opened my eyes.
When I did, I found myself facing a black sea filled with white, yellow, red and blue dots adorning the dark silhouettes of the tall buildings and long bridges. The city looked like a different kind of starry night.
It was an unexpected sight that left me with my mouth hanging open.
“Do you like it that much?” Wonwoo asked me with a chuckle and poking my side one more time.
“Are you kidding?” I said as soon as I got myself together. “It’s wonderful!”
“I’m glad that you like it.” His eyes darted from me to the sight and then sighed. “I’ve been meaning to show you this but lately the air wasn’t that clean so we could’ve missed this.”
“How did you find this place?”
“One of my friends told me about this place and I’ve been coming here whenever I feel like I need some inspiration. Whether it’s for a song or for the next step to take in life.” Wonwoo let a low-toned laughter rumble in his throat. “As clichè as it may sound, watching everyone from above reminds me of how small we all are compared to the world we live in. It makes me think of what little we do in our daily life when there are thousands and more things we could do and try. It sounds so scary but at the same time, it pushes me out of my comfort zone, making me go down paths I wouldn’t usually choose. Of course, not every road will lead to a happy moment but I’m learning not to regret my choices. There is no certainty that if I made a different choice the outcome would’ve been different or that I wouldn’t regret it as well....” He trailed off for a second before saying “Sorry, I’ve been rambling too much.”
I smiled at him, a light wave of electricity running up my body because of his sparkling eyes. “You didn’t. The truth is that I like when you talk about such deep matters with me. You do not talk with anyone about your take on life. I always felt honoured when you did that. Right now, it makes me feel like I still matter enough for you to share your thoughts and special places.”
The last part came out of my mouth before I could even fully process what I was saying. It was totally uncalled for in that situation and bound to be misunderstood.
In fact, Wonwoo’s eyes dimmed and he looked as if he was about to say something when his phone suddenly rang. He looked at the caller’s ID and let out the nth sigh of the night but it was different compared to the previous ones.
“It’s Cheol hyung. I have to take it.” He gave me a tight smile and got out of the car to talk to Seungcheol without waiting for my reply.
He shut the door and walked a couple of steps away from the car, enough for me not to hear the conversation between him and hyung.
I was left alone in the car, hands rubbing both my temples and eyes shut. I was frustrated at myself and at how easily I let go of those pent up thoughts.
Of course, I was bound to tell him but the timing was surely the worst. At that moment, I didn’t know whether to hope he would let me clear the misunderstanding or hope he’d ignore it to avoid fighting this late at night.
In the silence, a familiar tune coming from the stereo caught my attention. It was a song I knew way too well and its timing gave me the chills.
It was ironically perfect.
Bringing my legs up on the seat, knees close to my chest, I lean with my head on the headrest and listen to it, basking in the familiar melody and words.
Holding on too tight
Head up in the clouds
Heaven only knows
Where you are now
How do I love
How do I love again?
How do I trust
How do I trust again?
I stay up all night
Tell myself I'm alright
Baby, you're just harder to see than most
I put the record on
Wait 'til I hear our song
Every night I'm dancing with your ghost
Eyes closed and darkness surrounding me, I almost felt like I was back to those sleepless nights. I used to lay down on my bed, trying to recall the moment things between Wonwoo took the wrong turn; thinking about what path we chose to eventually find ourselves close but feeling distant at the same time.
When did the love I felt while looking at him turn into nostalgia?
When did his warm touch start feeling too cold?
How come I felt like I didn’t know the person beside me anymore?
Questions and worries ended up keeping me up all night. Pointlessly trying to reassure myself, I kept telling myself that I was alright, that things were good the way they were because it was just a phase.
Wonwoo had just picked up things that made him busier and harder to meet than the rest of the group. Jihoon was like that too. Once it ended, things would’ve slowly fallen back in place and our paths would’ve been back to being joint.
He wouldn’t no longer have felt like a ghost who everyone but me was able to see and hear.
The song had yet to end when the door clicked open and the car slightly shifted as Wonwoo sat down. I didn’t move and didn’t dare to open my eyes, afraid of the look I’d find on his face.
“Soons, are you crying?” Wonwoo asked in a worried tone. A second later, I could feel fabric dabbing the skin right beneath my eyes.
I yet have to understand which entity possessed my body or where did I find the courage but after a long time hurting alone, I finally asked him, “Why? Why are we acting like this? Why do you feel so cold and distant even when I have you near me and when I am holding your hand? Why do I feel like I have to weigh every word and move of mine because I’m afraid of doing the wrong thing and pushing you farther away from me? Do I have to be this scared?”
Wonwoo’s answer didn’t come.
I waited and waited but he wasn’t saying anything.
My heart fell in my socket at the idea that it might’ve all ended at that very moment. Taking a deep breath and feeling my whole body shaking both because of the tears and fear, I turned my head around to look at him. My eyes were blurry but I could still see the hint of a sad smile tugging at his lips.
“You’re finally looking at me,” he said as he took one of my hands in his, rubbing my knuckles. An action that felt like a déjà-vu but that stirred a different sensation in me. “I’m sorry I didn’t know you felt this way...”
“How could you when you don’t even ask me how I’m doing anymore?” I snapped, yanking my hand away from his. “You rarely text me and when you do, it’s to tell me that you’re tired, that you’re going to sleep or to rain-check our dates. And when we do meet, we only talk about generic and superficial stuff. Even the small talk feels stiff.”
Wonwoo brushed a hand through his hair and licked his lips, an action that back in our better days never failed to have my heart skip a few beats. “Look, Soons, I am sorry. It’s been pretty hectic since the moment they cast us. We have been running non-stop towards our debut. We didn’t have much time.”
“Don’t use we when it was only you who was like that.” I pointed right at him, even poked his chest to make him better understand that it was something he did alone. “Despite the load of work you all had — and of which I know too well — the rest of our group still had time for me and Seokmin. They never skipped our gatherings and if they had extra spare time, they’d call and meet us at the cafè.”
“If you know it too well, you would also know that I picked a few extra activities. That's why I’ve been a tad bit busier.”
He was growing more frustrated with every accusation I made and it only made me angrier because, at that moment, I felt like, between the two of us, I was the only one who had the right to feel that way. I was the wronged one, not him.
“If I know, it’s not thanks to you.” I scoffed. “I had to ask Joshua where in the hell my boyfriend was and what was he doing that he couldn’t possibly pick up his phone not even for a second to send me or answer one of my texts. Hell, Jihoon is as busy as you are but he finds time for us too!” My voice was going octaves higher at every word that I was saying. “Why are you the only one who’s hard to reach? Are you avoiding me? To use your words, did we choose a path leading to a dead end?”
Wonwoo stretched forwards to grab my shoulders with both of his hands and had me turn around so I could completely face him. He then cupped my face, as if he knew I was going to look away, and said, “Soons, I’m sorry. But I told you that it’s because I’m busy. If I didn’t live in the dorms, not even the guys would see me.”
‘I’m not supposed to be at the same level as them...I am your boyfriend.’ Is what I wanted to tell him but I bit my tongue and stood quiet. A gut feeling told me things wouldn’t end well if I didn’t stop talking.
“I promise I’ll try harder so you won’t be feeling like this anymore. Okay?” He stared at me, waiting for a hint that I had understood and believed his promise.
But did I?
“Okay,” I said in a small voice and left a small peck on the palm of his hand, trying to swallow the lump stuck in my throat, threatening to make me cry again.
Wonwoo gave me a relieved smile, but the moonlight didn’t help him hide that little pain he held in his eyes. He rubbed my cheeks with his thumbs for a while before letting go of my face and turning the car engine on. “We should go now. It’s already so late…”
‘Yeah. It’s indeed so late…’
3. Joshua’s sleepover
Since he’s a man of his word, Joshua hyung freed some time in his schedule so he could come to my house to eat my mother’s infamous kimchi bokkeumbap and to sleep over.
My parents were overly excited to have him in the house after such a long time. When I asked them, of course, they denied it but the evidence against them was strong.
For starters, their excitement was directly proportional to the amount of sweet and savoury snacks they bought. There were small piles of snacks in every visible corner of the kitchen and a huge pile next to the sofas where we usually sleep on.
The second giveaway was the way they were acting around Joshua: pampering him up, giving him the biggest portions of food and asking tons of questions about how’s he been doing and when will be the next time he’ll come home.
The last hint was the way they were looking at hyung from the moment he had walked in. It was as if they couldn’t believe Joshua was really standing at our doorstep or sitting in the living room. I bet they even thought for a second that the one before them could’ve been a hologram or an AI robot.
Trust me, I’m not exaggerating things just to have a slightly funny story to share before the main events of that night. I actually lost count of how many times I have mentally facepalmed during the whole course of the evening.
Thankfully, after spending time with us watching a random movie in the living room, they decided to go to bed as in the morning they had to work. My mom spent an extra five minutes making sure I had understood that I shouldn’t keep Joshua awake till late since he needed to rest too.
An eye-roll and ten okay later, my mom left too and Joshua and I were eventually alone. We were sitting on the floor, back leaning on the sofa behind us, a duvet covering our legs and each of us had a bowl full of M&M’s in their hands as we were distractedly watching the replay of The Matrix .
“So…how are things going between you and Seok?” I asked when I caught hyung typing something on his phone.
“As if you didn’t know already.” Joshua scoffed. “You’re with him the whole day.”
“But I want to hear it from you.” I threw a piece of the chocolate treat in my mouth and munching I asked again, “How are things going?”
Joshua put his phone down and took again the bowl in his hands. “I assume you know about the small fight we had a couple of days ago.”
“I do,” I confirmed as I nodded. “I also know that you didn’t talk to each other for a day because of it.”
“Seokmin ignored all of my texts…I swear I wanted to make up right after it!”
“What was the reason, though? Seok didn’t tell me.”
Joshua let out a sigh while rubbing the side of his neck. “Promise me you won’t laugh.”
“I promise you.” But two of my fingers were already crossed behind my back.
He closed his eyes, embarrassed, as he said in just one breath, “We fought over which Shrek movie is the best one. He kept saying it was the first one while we all know that the true masterpiece is the second one.”
Truth be told, I already knew the reason why they fought but hearing him saying it again and defending his choice, made me fold in two from how much I was laughing.
“Stop laughing! It’s a serious matter and you promised you wouldn’t laugh!” He repeatedly hit me on the back to make me stop but it didn’t work. “Ya! Show some respect to your hyung’s problems.”
“I’m sorry,” I managed to say in between a fit of laughter and the next. “It’s just that I can’t believe your first fight as a couple was because of Shrek.”
“As I told you, serious matters.”
“Sure it is.” Wiping my tears, I finally calmed down and patted him on the back. “Just so you know, I’m not judging the reason you fought. It’s just...cute.”
“The way Seok was trying to yell at me was indeed cute.” And there it was the idiotic smile he has when talking or thinking about his boyfriend. It was sickeningly adorable.
“Gross.” I pretended to gag, earning another smack in the middle of my back. “I’m glad you made up, though.”
“Disagreeing on something isn’t a reason to stay mad at the love of my life for more than a couple of minutes.”
“Love of your life? Aren’t we running Mr Hong?”
“I am not. That’s what he is for me, hence the reason I call him like that.” Joshua casually threw an M&M’s in the air and caught it back in his mouth. “So, things are back to normal between us.”
“Back to being the lovey-dovey couple that you are.”
“Exactly.” He winked at me before saying, “But enough about me. How are things going with your boyfriend?”
“Are you sure you want to hear that?” I asked him before unpacking the baggage of issues between me and Wonwoo.
“You know me. If I wasn’t sure, I wouldn’t have asked at all.”
“Get yourself comfortable then.”
Joshua did. He turned around so he was facing me in a merman pose: on his side, elbow on the sofa, hand supporting his chin. “I’m all ears.”
“Do you remember when I told you that Wonwoo was acting weird for some unknown reason?”
“Yes...I remember telling you that he was just a tad bit busier and that’s why he wasn’t hanging out with us anymore.” He rubbed his hand on his chin as he thought of that moment. “But I saw how you two were acting at your graduation party and assumed that it was all resolved. Was I wrong?”
“Kind of? I mean, I haven't figured it out myself yet so I don’t know what to tell you.”
“Have you tried asking Jihoon? It is no secret that the two of them are close. Maybe he knows something we don’t.”
‘They were indeed close until I came in between them,’ I thought but didn’t say as Joshua wasn’t updated about the latest events of this weird love triangle. Setting a mental reminder to talk about that issue too, I answered “Yes, I did. I met with him and asked him about it. He said that he felt Wonwoo being colder than usual too. At first, he was agreeing with you, saying it was because of the new projects he’s been working on. Then he suggested that there might be something he isn’t saying.”
“Something that’s bothering him...” Joshua hummed, wondering what could’ve been bugging the younger. “Maybe it is work-related but he isn’t sharing it so he won’t burden us?”
‘Jihoon and I don’t think it has to do with work...’
I shrugged. “Maybe...the thing is I recently had an argument with him too.”
“With Jihoon?” Joshua asked, confused.
“No, with Wonwoo.”
“Oh, dear. What happened?” Joshua asked, looking concerned.
“He took me out and then we went for a late-night drive. While we were together, one thing led to another and I couldn’t hold it in anymore. I shot a barrage of questions about why do I have to walk on eggshells when I’m with him, why we barely talk to each other and why he’s the only one who hasn’t time for me.” My voice broke at some points as I relived those moments.
“From how you look right now, I guess his answer wasn’t what you were hoping for…” Joshua scooted closer and wrapped me in a loose side-hug.
“Empty sorries and lots of excuses this is what he had for me.” Sighing, I tucked my head under his chin wanting to feel the warmth that, lately, has been so hard to feel. “Every I’m sorry was followed by a but . He only wanted to condone his actions and not once he held me in his arms to comfort me, to tell me that brighter days are ahead of us because not a thing has changed between us. He didn’t even deny my last accusations about him avoiding me and our relationship going towards a dead end. He just made yet another empty promise which I’m sure wasn't heartfelt at all…” My sight slowly blurred, tears threatening to fall at any second.
“I’m about to ask you something that may sound rude...why are you still with him if you feel like this? Love isn’t supposed to be like this. You shouldn’t be spending your time with your significant other thinking if you should or not say or do something.”
“Because a stupid part of me wants to have faith in him and in the fact that he will eventually come back to me.” And how stupid I sounded! I was aware of that but I couldn’t tell Joshua everything yet.
However, his next words took me off guard. “Are you sure it doesn’t have anything to do with Jihoon?”
“Did Seokmin tell you something?” I asked on impulse, mind empty due to the surprise.
Joshua moved from our hug to stare at my face and study my expression. The panic and the beads of sweat couldn’t be hidden because of our proximity. He hummed in a low tone, probably pondering his next words. “Truth be told, I was referring to the day you told me you were confused about your feelings for Jihoon. It’s been such a long time and I realised I haven’t come back on the topic so I was asking now. However, judging by your expression and by how quick you went on your defensive mode, I guess something happened that Seokmin knows and I don’t, right?”
Wanting to hit myself for having let panic take over and for not being bright enough to dodge the question, I said, “Well, since it was a lot to take in, I was planning to tell you after your debut but I guess I have to spill this tea now.”
“You’re absolutely right.”
That’s how I ended up spending part of our night going down the memory lane of what happened between me and Jihoon since the last time we went to Vinyl Art together. How it was true that the secret admirer who left a gift for me on Valentine’s day was Jihoon.
“I knew it was him. He tensed up right when you mentioned the initials on the note.” Joshua had a smug face because of his right guess.
How, that very night, he told me to meet him at the playground, gave me a bracelet with a quote and his initials engraved on it.
“Can I see it?” Joshua asked and, when I took the bracelet to him, he read the quote out loud. “ I’ll be the spring to your smile. Okay, this is cute.”
How, under the falling rain, he confessed his feelings for me and I had to reject him, tell him to be just friends.
“Oh, Soons...I am happy to hear that Jihoon likes you, that he has finally admitted it but...it must’ve hurt rejecting him.” Joshua gave me a bear hug despite me telling him it was okay.
I told him how cowardly I was avoiding Jihoon because I was scared of my own feelings and because I wanted to give Jihoon time and space to get himself together after I broke him down due to my selfish request.
“Thank God I told you to get out of my car and help him with his suitcase the day of the audition or else who knows what would’ve happened. You two are so stupid.”
How, lately, we’ve been spending time together; found our own place to meet up. How at the graduation party we almost kissed and how it triggered the memory of that infamous night.
“Wait...you two MADE OUT? ON YOUR BED? WHILE WE WERE ALL INSIDE THE HOUSE?” Joshua whisper-shouted. “Soons, I didn’t know you had it in you. I am impressed but also WHAT THE FUCK DO YOU THINK YOU WERE DOING?”
I told Joshua about the brief moment Jihoon and I shared together the other day at Vinyl Art and about how it hurts pretending that I don’t have feelings for him when it’s the complete opposite.
“There is no doubt that you two are attracted to each other and it’s obvious that you’re not okay anymore with the way Wonwoo has been acting,” Joshua said after taking a moment for himself to process everything that he had missed in these months. “Then why don’t you break up with Wonwoo and start it over with Jihoon? Wonwoo will be sad for a while but he will eventually move on and find his own happiness, like you and Jihoon will find yours if you get together.”
“It’s not like I didn’t think about it, hyung. However, it’s more complicated than that.”
“And why is that?”
“Because the picture is much bigger than this. My relationship is going to affect the band too. Don’t say it’s not true because you know that I’m right this time.”
Joshua shifted his position as a way to take more time, not willing to admit defeat that easily. “Enlighten me. How will it affect us?”
“First of all, even if I break up with Wonwoo because of these obvious reasons, he will lead it all back to Jihoon. He will think Jihoon is the true reason I am leaving him and the rest is just a bunch of excuses. Knowing Wonwoo, after that he will take personally everything Jihoon does and it won’t take long before he explodes. The two will argue and it will affect the whole group because they will want the members to take sides and if someone says they’re neutral, they will assume some of them secretly took the other’s side.” As I was running out of breath, I stopped for a second and then continued with my list of reasons. “Point two, if Jihoon and I get together, no one can assure that things will actually be better for the three of us, that we will eventually be happier. What if things don’t end up as “planned” between us? What if we break up soon after? What if we realise we have ruined our friendship and even the one with Wonwoo for a teenage romance that wasn’t worth experiencing? The third point is that whatever happens, our squad won’t be the same as before. It will be so awkward for you to hang out with us because of the tension. I’m shivering at the thought of how cold the room will be…”
“Soons, dear Soons.” How many times did I hear this coming from Joshua? Every time he started a sentence like that, it meant that he was about to spit some facts I wasn’t ready to hear but that I will later realise it was actually what I needed to hear from a friend. “Those are all what ifs, those are your fears , They’re not reality and even if some of them have a high chance of happening, it doesn’t mean they will. There’s no way to know for certain what is going to happen in the future and isn’t this what makes life more exciting, more thrilling? If we knew exactly what is ahead of us, there wouldn’t be any point in living at all. Life is all about wondering what to do next, where to go, what we will feel. It’s all about making choices over which we will cry or laugh later on in life despite their outcome. Of course, fear will be our surest companion during our journey but it’s what makes us ultimately act. Be it that we cower in fear or be brave to overcome it, fear is the foundation of all of our choices.” Joshua sighed, realising that he was following his train of thoughts instead of giving me advice. He licked his dry lips and said. “What I am trying to say is that it’s normal to feel like you do, going down a spiral of what ifs, but you shouldn’t dwell too much on it. You should do what makes you feel better, okay? The ones who truly care about you will understand your choices, respect them and even do their best to adjust according to them. Your ultimate goal in life is your own happiness and satisfaction.”
“But what if being stuck in this limbo is the best choice for me?” I asked without looking at hyung in the eyes. My focus was all on the carpet underneath our legs. “Is that a bad thing to do?”
“If you deem it to be good for you, then it’s not a bad thing to do. It only means that, as of now, you don’t have the answers you were looking for, the ones which will make you choose which way to go. You will know with time.” Joshua came closer and hugged me again. His hands were rubbing up and down my back, comforting me. “Now, promise me not to worry about us. If something happens, I’ll scold them for how unprofessional they are, mixing work and private matters. Also, you know us. Awkward mood?” Joshua scoffs. “When did it ever happen?”
There, in Joshua’s warm embrace, I felt relieved. For the first time in a while, things didn’t seem that dreadful and I was relaxed enough to let a chuckle escape my mouth. “You’re right and...I promise you.” Hugging him back as tight as I could, I said “Thank you, Shua hyung.”
After that, being late as fuck and fearing that my mother would come down to scold us, we went straight to our respective sofas, wishing each other a quick good night and then falling right into Morpheus’s arms.
‘Thank you, hyung. Yours and Seoks are the only ways I know I’ll fearlessly walk down for the rest of my life.’
The boys' debut came a few days after Joshua’s sleepover at my house.
Though it was a pity we couldn’t be together to react to their music video and album, I was in seventh heaven. The moment we were all looking forward to had finally come.
Hansol, Seokmin and I had been together since our classes ended at midday. We were at my house and none of us had been able to sit down for longer than five minutes. To calm ourselves down, we had to pace around the whole living room and kitchen area, munching on some peperos to avoid biting our own nails.
Thankfully, some time before the video would be posted, the guys called and told us they were already at Mnet ’s backstage, getting ready to perform. From their shaking voices, we could tell they were excited about presenting themselves to the world, to eyes eager to know them and to the people who were ready to enjoy their music with them. Hearing from them allowed us to actually quiet down for a while. It was no time to be this nervous when they probably were feeling even more frantic than we did. Because of that, we composed ourselves and gave them our best words of encouragement, reassuring them. We told them not to worry as we were sure it would all go smoothly and that we would be cheering for them in front of the tv screen.
Ten minutes before 6 pm, the three of us were sitting on my couch doing different things. Seokmin kept refreshing the company’s YouTube channel in hopes the MV would be released a few minutes before the set time or maybe he was just thinking that doing so would make time flow faster; I was keeping in touch with Joshua and Jihoon’s parents, updating them about their sons and how they were doing backstage; Hansol was on Twitter, scrolling through the Al1 and Hymn of Dream — aka their title track from the album New World — hashtags to check what people were saying about our friends.
“I’m seeing so many overseas fans…” Hansol said, still scrolling. “They seem to be pretty well-known outside Korea.”
“Let me see.” I looked at his phone screen. “Woah...that’s a lot of English and memes! Looks like they’re all excited about this debut too...”
“Ugh!” Seokmin suddenly groaned. For a second we thought he was complaining about the overseas fans but he said, “Why does time always fly but now, instead of going faster, it is flowing so slowly. I’m getting frustrated here!” He kicked his feet in the air, like a child throwing a tantrum.
Hansol nodded in agreement. “It’s been 5:56 for ten minutes already.”
“You know that doesn’t make sense, right?” I looked at both of them, slightly questioning their sanity.
“Oh, it’s 5:57!” Seokmin yelled before complaining again that these were the longest three minutes of his entire life.
They eventually went on like that until the digital clock on the television finally showed it was six o’clock.
Hansol and I locked our phones and tossed them on the side while Seokmin, emitting a long shriek, cast the video on the big screen in front of us.
Wearing fancy clothes and with full make-up on, there our friends were either standing still singing and playing their instruments or acting for the sake of the concept.
To summarize it, both the song and the video were about them, about how they came together because of a common dream and how it is now within their reach. They sing about how despite the happiness, it is kind of surreal to be reaching heaven this quick but as long as they have each other and work hard, everything is going to be fine.
Basically, the message they went for was “the right balance of determination and love can help make your dream come true.” It was an encouragement not only for themselves but for their fans and to whoever took their time to listen to the song which, honestly, was a total bop!
It wasn’t a biased opinion because people on the net were going crazy about it and, obviously, about their visuals too.
An hour went by with us watching the video at least ten times and listening to the whole album twice. The time for them to perform came and we immediately changed the channel on the television to watch them.
The moment they appeared on the screen, all cool and dressed like in the video, Seokmin and I let out a scream like all the fans in the studio did. Hansol was trying to keep it cool but he was screaming inside too.
Not waiting for a second longer, they performed their title song in perfect Jeonghan’s bitches style, putting their heart and soul into it so they would be left with no regrets at the end. With that song, they highlighted both their powerful rap and their fine vocals and the parts were equally shared among them which is something important. No one is left in another member’s shadow in terms of lines.
After three songs and a lot of deadly shots that had Seokmin and me faint, they left their spots and walked towards the crowd. People were holding banners with their names and cheering for them, ecstatic.
From what Hansol read on Twitter , lots of people became their fans by watching videos of their old gigs that were uploaded on YouTube , explaining why a new-born group had already that many fans at their debut stage.
When they were all lined up, Seungcheol, being the leader, started their group greeting. Then, they went one by one for the individual introduction. The close-up shots on Jihoon and Wonwoo had my heart clench. Their make-up and the beams of sweat on their faces glistening under the spotlight made them look painfully beautiful, especially when they smiled towards the camera. They were standing side by side, nudging each other with their elbows as they looked at the sea of people before them. It was a sight I hadn’t seen in a very long time: the two of them acting like the best friends they are.
Watching them had me realise once again that, after all, I was right about keeping everything to myself. Telling them the truth at such a crucial moment in life would’ve done more harm than good. Who knew what would’ve happened between them.
One sure thing was that they wouldn’t have been brightly shining on the stage like they were doing, feeling accomplished as if they had conquered the world. Their smiles, going from one ear to the other, and their sparkling eyes gladdened my heart which had been growing weak over time and under the weight of a choice I decided to carry by myself. For their sake.
The Jihoon and Wonwoo before my eyes were worth every sleepless night of mine.
The show ended after some skits and a few more songs. Silence fell in the room when we turned off the television and the three of us, who moved to sit on the floor so we would be closer to the screen, blankly stared at each other. Seokmin was the first one to speak.
“Am I the only one who feels empty?”
Neither Hansol nor I spoke. We only shook our heads to let Seokmin know he wasn’t alone.
It wasn’t a mere energy-drained kind of emptiness. It was also the familiar void that takes you when something you were enjoying so much, something good ends, leaving you with the question “what am I supposed to do now?” despite having a shit ton of other things you could easily do. The show was so good that it left us like that: spacing out despite having to clean the room and maybe go to Coffee & Goodpie to meet Kihyun and show him some clips of the guys since he couldn’t probably watch the live stage.
We didn’t know how much time we spent like that before being brought back on Earth by our phones chiming at the same time. It was the group chat for sure.
PupGyu:
We did iiiiiiiiiiiiit!!!
Kwannie:
Did we?
It’s all like a dream to me.
PupGyu:
I can pinch you if you want a reality-check.
Kwannie:
Don’t you dare come close to me.
You’re sweaty.
PupGyu:
And so are you.
Joshuji:
Already squabbling you two?
PupGyu:
Kwan started it.
Kwannie:
And I’ll also be the one to end...you.
1004Han:
I’ll be the one ending both of you.
PupGyu:
At the beginning of our career?
1004Han:
Yes.
Our fans won’t miss you if I do it now.
DadCheol:
He’s being serious.
Joshuji:
Deadly serious.
Noni-vernonie:
ba dum tss
Kwannie:
I can’t believe you appeared to say this
but not to defend me.
PupGyu:
That’s because Hansollie loves me
as his hyung.
Noni-vernonie:
I’m sorry, but I only love Seungkwan.
PupGyu:
...that hurt.
Joshuji:
ANYWAY.
Hansol is here.
Where are Seokmin and Soonyoung?
Hoshiya:
I’m here!
DonkeyKong:
I’m here too hyung!
DadCheol:
So, did you watch the MV?
Hoshiya:
We did.
PupGyu:
Listened to the album?
DonkeyKong:
We did.
Kwannie:
Watched the debut stage?
Noni-vernonie:
We did.
1004Han:
Please, say something about it.
Jihoon is waiting for your review
he can’t stop shaking his legs from how nervous he is.
Hoshiya:
Oh really?
I won’t say anything, then.
Woozy:
YA!
IT’S NOT TIME TO TEASE ME.
SPEAK.
Noni-vernonie:
Honestly, I really enjoyed it.
It was just perfect for my style.
DonkeyKong:
The stages and the MV were so cool!
We screeched and squealed for two hours straight.
I think it got to the point I have lost my voice.
Plus, the neighbours are probably going to sue us.
Especially Soonyoung and me.
Joshuji:
Drink some warm honey water.
Your wonderful voice will be back in no time.
PupGyu:
Ew.
Joshuji:
And you, Soons?
What do you think?
Hoshiya:
That I wasn’t disappointed.
From the video, to the songs,
to the stages and your interactions with the fans,
everything was done in your own Jeonghan’s bitches style.
You told your stories with your songs
in the same way you did before joining the company
and you were acting like yourselves in front of the fans,
not pretending to be someone else to make yourselves more likeable.
DonkeyKong:
True
we couldn’t shut up about how you were tense at the beginning
but ultimately showed how natural you are on the stage
and your easy-going personalities.
Even the grumpy duo Jihoon - Wonwoo hyung
were at ease by the end of it.
Nonu:
Hey, I’m not grumpy.
PupGyu:
You are, hyung.
Hoshiya:
What we want to say with these long-ass messages is
that we’re so fucking proud of you!
Joshuji:
Language.
Woozy:
Here is hyung in his Captain America mode.
Kwannie:
As he should since he’s from L.A.
Noni-vernonie:
ba dum tss
1004Han:
Cheol is crying thanks to you three.
DadCheol:
I am not.
1004Han:
You are
and I would send a picture
if I wasn’t too tired.
DadCheol:
Okay, maybe I am.
My children are proud of me
and that made me a tad bit emotional.
Joshuji:
Thankfully, he already removed his make-up.
Noni-vernonie:
Is he crying that much?
Nonu:
He is.
DadCheol:
Stop exposing me!
Woozy:
We won’t.
DadCheol:
Then you’re uninvited to the celebration party for our debut.
Joshuji:
We live together, you can’t uninvite us.
DonkeyKong:
You’re going home to party?
DadCheol:
Not today, maybe tomorrow.
Of course, you three are invited!
Tomorrow we’ll text you the details.
Noni-vernonie:
Yay, a party!
Hoshiya:
I wouldn’t miss the chance to be with you all.
Kwannie:
I feel like, lately,
everything is an excuse good enough to gather and party.
PupGyu:
Nah, we just had a lot to celebrate!
Nonu:
Guys, the manager is looking for us.
We need to go.
DonkeyKong:
Make sure to eat dinner!
Hoshiya:
If later you’re too tired to talk
don’t worry about us and go to sleep!
Joshuji:
Okay, moms.
Bye!!
When no other text was sent in the chat, we locked our phones and got up from the floor. It was time to clean up and bring my place to the way it was before.
Since it got too late to go to the café, we decided to stay home and start dinner before my parents would come back.
TMI: The aforementioned chores were done with New World as background music.
As we imagined, the guys didn’t text later that night, meaning they had most surely passed out on their beds which was totally understandable.
The tension and the fatigue were the ultimate combos to make someone fall asleep as soon as they rested their heads on the pillow.
That night, lying alone on my bed, I fell asleep with a slightly jittering heart at the thought of being together again with them in the same room the next day.
‘Hope I won’t do anything stupid.’
To my surprise, nothing worthy of note happened the night after.
This stays between us but I was expecting a different kind of party from them, like the mildly wild ones we had for Seungkwan hyung’s birthday or our graduation. I honestly imagined walking in a house with dim lights, music blasting from the speakers and maybe some alcohol too. Guess how taken aback I was when all I saw were balloons gathered in some corners of the living room, soft background music, a table full of different kinds of foods — freshly cooked or delivered — surrounded by pillows to sit on.
Turns out the party they had been planning was instead a chill night among friends, filled with laughter due to the behind the scenes anecdotes on the debut show, the skits and the dry run.
The atmosphere was so light, warm and wholesome. All of the tension weighing on my shoulders at the thought of Wonwoo, Jihoon and I in the same room was lessened at every story and joke.
There was no jealousy or hatred in Wonwoo’s eyes when I got a tad bit closer to Jihoon.
There was no pain in Jihoon’s eyes when Wonwoo would put his arm around my shoulders and had me lean against him.
By the end of the night, my worries were replaced by the genuine happiness that I only felt when all of us were united as a family, just like tonight.
Sadly, we couldn’t stay there until late or spend the night in their dorm, as they had a recording early in the morning and some interviews on radio shows.
While saying our goodbyes to Jeonghan’s bitches and planning when to meet again, I had an unsettling feeling inside my stomach. It made me wish we could’ve stayed there for a while longer; it had me steal a quick kiss from Wonwoo, his lips warm at the touch and spicy from the tteokbokki he had just eaten; it had me walk to Jihoon to hug him so tight that it left both of us breathless and aching.
Before leaving, I looked at all of them waving at us from the door with a huge grin on their faces. I engraved that moment and those expressions inside my heart as I smiled back with an ominous feeling inside.
‘Why am I feeling like this?’
As if it was possible, we had gotten even busier after that party at the dorm.
University life had eventually gained the upper hand.
Eight o’clock lessons almost every day that ended late in the afternoon; reviewing notes in groups after classes to make sure we hadn’t missed anything important; studying in the library until dinner time, if not past it, for assignments due to the end of the week; working our asses off with group projects which counted as half of our final grades. In other words, Seokmin and I were swamped by books, copies and notes and could barely see the end of it since midterms were a permanent concern. It was almost worse than high school but the positive thing was that we were finally giving our total focus on the career we wanted to pursue in the future.
There were a few occasions, though, when we could stop to catch our breaths but the sad thing was they never matched our friends’ breaks.
Seokmin briefly thought about buying tickets for Music Bank so we could watch them perform live and surprise them at the same time. Maybe we could’ve also spent the rest of the evening with them if they were done for the day. It wasn’t actually a bad idea but, in the end, we preferred to keep watching them from home. We didn’t want to take two spots away from the fans. The show could’ve been their only chance to see the guys whilst we have the privilege of being their friends and of having seen them countless times during rehearsals.
We missed them but there wasn’t much we could do to have our schedules coincide.
Still, we tried our best to include them in the things we did whether it was going to the movies, trying food at a new restaurant or stall on the street, or going on a one-day trip with Vernon. As expected from students majoring in Broadcasting, we were making whole coverages of our “dates”, complete with short video interviews. It soon became our thing and it got to a point where even Seungkwan and Mingyu spammed the groupchat with videos like that about Jeonghan’s bitches daily routine or special events.
It was something that made us feel closer to each other despite being distant.
Instead, for Al1 being busy was a great sign. It meant the band was doing wonders in the industry despite being rookies with less training compared to their seniors or other fellow rookie groups and despite being a band in a sea full of performing groups. Most said it was because of One-Seven K being a renowned agency, which is partly true considering that people pay a bit more attention to artists debuting under the big labels.
However, my theory is that the experience gained through the gigs and the festivals helped them understand how to engage and interact with fans. They had learnt what to do to make people enjoy their music to the fullest. Plus, they’re a bunch of charming, funny and witty guys who eventually make their way through your heart and find a space they will settle in for a very long time.
Anyway, because of their popularity, other than the promotion schedule at the usual music and radio shows, they were called to appear in various talk shows and variety shows. Also, when their promotions were about to end, the company had to prolong it for another week upon request of the members wanting to please the fans begging to see more of them.
When they weren’t on stage, they kept being close to their audience by doing as many live broadcasts as possible. Be it one for which they had prepared a script with things to talk about or games to play or a random one done in their dorms eating food or just chilling on the couch they had tons of fans cheering for them and reposting the best moments on Twitter . Seokmin and I tried not to miss any of these lives so we could support them too. Plus, it was fun teasing them at the end of the broadcasts in case they had been a bit awkward, too flirty or chaotic.
Promotions ended but it didn’t mean Al1 could completely rest. They had their own variety show to shoot called One for Al1 ; they were attending fan-signs both physically and online to meet national and international fans; they were called to take part in the Dream Concert and other important festivals hosted by universities or big corporations. The little spare time they had was spent either in the practice room, in Jihoon’s studio or with their parents. However, when they hadn’t scheduled events early in the morning, we could visit them at the dorms or meet outside late at night if Seokmin and I had to finish our school work first.
Before anyone could realise it, the time for the end of the year shows and awards had come. This meant more practice and more work for them as they wanted to deliver different performances despite having a small repertoire of songs.
The first big event for them was MAMA where they won their first award in the band category and had a collaboration with Zero , aka Lee Chan, the guy from the school festival and the auditions.
Chan had debuted not too long after them and being from the same agency, they thought it would be cool to show a short piece where Chan danced and Al1 accompanied him before they could part and perform their own songs.
Needless to say, everyone was swept off their feet from that collab. No one was expecting rookies to deliver such a high-level performance.
Our friends couldn’t believe they were able to attend such important events not too long after their debut. They never stopped telling us what a great honour was for them to be surrounded by the artist they always looked up to. Plus, they were super excited at the thought of attending other ceremonies like MMA, Gayo Daechukjae, Gayo Daejeon and there were also awards waiting for them at the beginning of the new year like the Seoul Music Awards and the Golden Disc Awards .
The only favour they asked was to have their schedule freed on December 31st due to a special and private schedule. After receiving an explanation and assuring that it wasn’t anything that could end up tarnishing the band’s image, the company kindly granted them this little wish.
A wish that leads us to today, December 30th.
DonkeyKong:
I can’t believe you guys are doing this.
Hoshiya:
Y’all are crazy.
Ditching Gayo Daejejeon to celebrate New Year with us?
Nonu:
Soons, you know it’s no ordinary New Year.
PupGyu:
It’s a special one.
Kwannie:
We need to properly celebrate your coming of age!
DadCheol:
You two and Jihoon will be adults in around 24 hours.
1004Han:
But they’ll still be my babies.
Woozy:
Says who?
I am not your son.
1004Han:
I said so and yes, you are my son.
Watch what you say
or you’ll go to sleep without dinner.
Woozy:
I’m in my studio.
You can do nothing to me.
1004Han:
Watch me camp in front of your door
and stop any delivery from coming inside.
And don’t you try saying I wouldn’t do that
because you know too damn well that I would.
Woozy:
I’m zipping my mouth.
1004Han:
Wise choice, my son.
Joshuji:
There’s nothing to worry about, though.
They might be legally adults
but their mentality will still be one of three-year-old children.
Hoshiya:
Hyung!
WOW!
DonkeyKong:
The slander...
Woozy:
As if you lot are any different from us!
Nonu:
Touché…
Kwannie:
They’re not wrong.
Sometimes I ask myself how you are the hyungs.
PupGyu:
It’s not like we’re any mature either.
Kwannie:
Speak for yourself.
Nonu:
Yes, but again,
that is not the reason why we’re all here.
Kwannie:
And what is the reason?
PupGyu:
Oh, God.
The party, Seungkwan.
The party.
Kwannie:
Right.
I thought I was the main topic.
Noni-vernonie:
You’re my main topic.
Kwannie:
Nonie...I love you.
Noni-vernonie:
I love you too.
Woozy:
Keep the PDA out of this chatroom,
thanks.
PupGyu:
ANYWAY, THE PARTY.
Hoshiya:
Like last year, my house is free.
Woozy:
I thought your parents weren’t going to Japan?!
Hoshiya:
They weren’t but my aunt was insisting
and they left yesterday.
Seokmin has moved in with me in the meantime so I wouldn’t be alone.
Joshuji:
It’s a pity that I can’t be there too.
Hoshiya:
No, please.
I would risk getting diabetes with you two
in the same room for days.
DonkeyKong:
You’re too much.
Hoshiya:
I’ll take it as a compliment.
Nonu:
Okay.
So, tomorrow at your house.
Hoshiya:
Yes!
Though we’ll be at Seok’s home for dinner.
DadCheol:
Oh, don’t worry.
We’ll go have dinners with our families
then meet you after midnight.
1004Han:
Can’t wait to teach you some drinking games.
Joshuji:
It’s going to be so much fun.
Woozy:
Soons, I dread that your place will be our grave.
Hoshiya:
Don’t worry.
I already asked my neighbours to lend us their garden
so we can bury ourselves there.
Noni-vernonie:
Cool!
Kwannie:
...you what?!
DonkeyKong:
He’s messing with you.
We made hangover soup and stored it in the fridge
together with loads of water to keep us hydrated, though.
DadCheol:
Good, we only need to party now!
The next afternoon, at some time around four, the bell to my house rang. Seungcheol, Joshua and Seungkwan had come by to drop the groceries before going to their respective houses. They were in charge of buying all the snacks we needed for the night, afraid the ones I already had home wouldn’t have been enough for ten hungry boys. They also brought a tremendous amount of alcohol. While unpacking, I saw something like five different brands of beer, liquors, soju and a three-litre bottle of homemade soju which is known to be stronger than the regular one.
Seokmin and I took a picture of the bottles lined up on my kitchen table and sent it to the groupchat. Most were in disbelief and some of them were proud of the choice the trio made. Meanwhile, Jihoon kept saying that we needed to ask Kihyun to come by in the morning to bury our bodies. Jeonghan tried reassuring him, reminding him we didn’t have to chug everything down at once. They were to last for the whole night and nothing would happen if we responsibly drank. “All is well as long as we don’t drink past our limit.” to quote him.
Before we could leave the house in the evening, Joshua came by to help us take out the futons for the night and rearrange the couch disposition so that there was enough space to move the long table in the middle of the living room.
We set the shot and regular glasses all around the table, the liquors that didn’t need to be in the fridge and some of the snacks too. We also plugged in the karaoke machine Joshua brought from his house, saying he knew the boys would want to sing since, according to them, “there is nothing as glorious as drunk-singing”.
The three of us also took the chance to spend some time together, sitting on my bed playing Halli Galli and laughing when the bell would fly across the room when someone hit the mattress too hard in the rush to ring it. My parents, knowing with whom I was, video-called so they could wish a happy new year to Seok and Shua hyung too. They kept us company, telling stories of what my relatives were doing there until Seokmin parents came to pick us up.
Dinner was quite simple, just a few traditional dishes and a cake to celebrate our coming of age as soon as midnight struck. It felt kind of odd, though, to celebrate our entrance into adultland.
Having more responsibilities and being prosecutable by law aren’t exactly on my list of things to celebrate.
Not even thirty minutes after midnight, Seokmin’s dad is driving us to my house. There, we find the boys already waiting at the door, shaking in the coldness.
“You finally got here!” Seungcheol yells as soon as we get out of the car. “I thought I would be freezing to death!”
“Sorry! We got caught up in traffic,” Seokmin says while I look for my keys. “Apparently, everyone decided to go out now.”
“Let’s hurry inside.” I open the door wide and wait for them to get in before walking inside the house myself.
One by one they take off their shoes and hang their coats before scattering in different parts of the house.
Seungkwan, Vernon and Seokmin go straight to the living room, turning the TV on and discussing which playlist is more apt for the kind of gathering we are having.
Seungcheol and Wonwoo go to the kitchen to grab part of the drinks stored in the fridge while Mingyu trails them so he can make some pajeon to eat while drinking makgeolli . I told him that I could’ve made them before going to Seok’s but he insisted on making some on the spot or else they wouldn’t be as good.
Jihoon and Joshua are looking for a deck of cards in my room for a game we will play later.
Then, there’s Jeonghan, calling for me so he wouldn’t be the only one lazy-ing on the couch while the others are busy doing things.
Once everyone is done with their thing, we sit down around the table and pour each other drinks. Seungcheol waits for our glasses to be filled before doing his end of the year speech.
“You did quite a lot of these speeches in the past days,” Jeonghan mocked him. “This should be a cakewalk!”
“Stand up so we can see you!” Joshua yells.
“Stop it!” Seungcheol throws a shrimp chip at Joshua, perfectly hitting his forehead. “It doesn’t get any easier but...it’s only you here so I am more relaxed.”
“What do you mean only you ?” Seungkwan pretends to be offended by hyung’s words. “Are we not as important as the other idols and our fans?”
“Wow...I never expected to be treated like this by you of all people.” I slowly shake my head, feigning disappointment.
“It’s not like that!” Seungcheol waves his hand before himself, flustered and not wanting us to misunderstand. “It’s because you are family to me so I’m more comfortable around you!”
Jihoon scoffs and looks at Cheol hyung. “Trying to be smooth after your mislip?”
“You know I’m not smooth at all. I’m only being honest.”
“True, he’s not smooth.” Jeonghan chimes in as he pats his boyfriend’s shoulder. “Now, mister-no-smooth, can you please do your speech or do you want to wait for the sun to rise?”
“Raise your glasses,” Seungcheol says and the rest of us do as told among hushed finally and oh god thanks . “Despite some difficulties along the way, this year has been a good one for all of us. In one way or another, the ten of us started a new chapter of our lives. Al1 trained and debuted; our three maknae started university; Hansol told us on his way here that he has been recruited as a songwriter and producer by PrismFilter which is the company that works together with One-Seven K …” At the last news, Seokmin and I shot our heads towards Hansol, mouthing a why didn’t you tell us to which he replied by moving his glass in Seungcheol’s direction. The latter waited for us to bring our eyes back on him before continuing. “As I was saying, new beginnings! I’m not going to lie and say that it will be only sunflowers and rainbows from now on. There will be difficulties awaiting us around the corner but what matters is that we can face and overcome them together. Let’s never forget that we’re not alone in this, that every one of us has their hand stretched for the other to take. Why? Because, as I said before, we’re family. So, toast to us who are now and forever.”
“To us!” We all cheer with a small delay from person to person as some of us, myself included, are wiping our tears. Seungcheol words don’t fail to make us feel like we’ve found a place in the world where we truly belong.
If I had my doubts last year, tonight I’m sure of something while I look at the people in this room laughing and clinking their glasses. ‘Be it as friends or lovers, we were meant to be together. Our souls recognised this before we did but, thank God, now we know it too.’
From that toast onwards, all we did that night was drink while doing other things that had us forgetting how much alcohol was being actually ingested.
For the first round, we ate the pajeon Mingyu made and drank makgeolli as our friends told us some backstage stories from the different shows they had been attending: the feeling of having their own waiting room; how, in the hallways, they could see members from other groups being busy recording some behind the scenes content to upload on their channels; the delicious dosirak handed to them after the dry run of the stage; the blinding flashes coming from the photographers’ cameras while on the red carpet; the bright and warm lights pointing at them on the stage, making them sweat more than they would’ve had normally done; the amazing after-show dinners and small parties with the idols they had befriended since their debut.
The guys’ eyes were shining so bright as they spoke of this new life with huge grins on their faces...it was contagious! Just by looking at them, I found myself smiling and having wet eyes! And the way they wouldn’t miss any small detail in their narration of the events? It made me feel as if I was there with them too when everything happened! I could picture the whole scene before my eyes and even perceive the emotions they felt at that moment.
For the second round, Jeonghan and Joshua thought about a simple card game where each one of us got a card. Before turning it around, each person had the possibility of exchanging it with someone else from the table or with the deck. In the end, the one or ones with the lowest card had to drink a shot of vodka and so did the ones who dared to laugh at the others’ misfortune.
Seokmin and Vernon, who were past the tipsy stage halfway through the game, weren’t being able to hold themselves and kept laughing and drinking to the point that Seungkwan suggested changing the game before they could finish all the bottles by themselves.
In the third round, Mingyu and Wonwoo brought the homemade soju from the kitchen while Jeonghan was explaining one of the drinking games he wanted to teach us so badly. It basically consisted in clicking the shot glass on the table. One click, the turn goes to the person next to you; two clicks and goes the person sitting two seats away from you; three clicks and it reverses the direction of play.
The first time playing it, the hyung went slow so we could better understand the rules but that was it. After that, it was hell.
They would target one of us maknae and use tricks to have us confused so we could drink. When we caught up with what was going on, we became just as evil as they were. The maknae alliance first pointed to Mingyu hyung as a target and then knocked out Joshua hyung.
We didn’t dare mess with Jeonghan hyung because we knew we were going to play another game before the karaoke session. We knew better than having him as our enemy.
Never have I ever was the next game. Usually, we played it on birthdays to have some juicy gossip and find out things we didn’t know about each other. But tonight, it was all aimed to have someone getting drunk hence the questions being pretty dumb and not even worth to be mentioned here.
I know you’re curious, though, so I’ll tell you that they were on the calibre of “Never have I ever cheated on a school test”.
By the time we turned the karaoke machine on, most of us were on the verge of passing out. That’s why we decided to clean up the mess in the living room and wash the dishes to both sober up and have lesser housework to do in the morning.
Of course, we were still tipsy and some of us kept drinking beer but it was way better than before. We weren’t laughing at each other for no reason anymore but because of the random performances as we were singing.
From Norazo and PSY ’s songs to the saddest ballads, we did it all but the highlight moment was Jeonghan rapping. I was in awe the whole time because of how good he was.
“I want to sing this song!” Joshua yells while I was in the middle of telling Jeonghan to officially join the rap line of the group.
“This is a good one.” Wonwoo, who was sitting next to me, points at the screen where the title has just appeared.
Crush ft Taeyeon - Don’t forget .
My eyes widen and the words “This is one of my favourite songs” leave my mouth before I can realise it.
“Then sing it with me!” Joshua grabs my wrist and drags me in front of the TV, handing me the other microphone. “You start.”
But before the song could start, Joshua says, “Shit, I don’t know the lyrics though.” He scans the room and when he lays his eyes on Jihoon, he gestures the other to come. “Jihoon, you know it, don’t you? Can you take my place?”
Jihoon scoffs. “Why would you choose a song you don’t know?” He complains but eventually stands up and walks to the ‘stage’. “C’mon, hyung. Give me the mic.”
The younger snatches the microphone from a smug, not sorry at all Joshua and comes to stand right before me.
Be it on purpose or by accident, Joshua’s doing had Jihoon and I being at the centre of the room, singing while gazing into each other’s eyes. What’s crazier is that the song is yet again one that speaks my heart so loud that it’s almost embarrassing.
It’s not that I am ashamed of my feelings. It’s just that I am embarrassed because Jihoon is not the only one listening to them. Eight more people are looking at us, making it difficult for me not wanting to be swallowed by the ground. But the moment the music plays, I can’t help but see this as one of the few chances I’ll ever have to tell him what I feel while hiding behind a song.
You and I, even if we become strangers some day
Even if we become two people who can’t ever come together again
Don’t forget me, don’t lose me
Even if you’re holding someone else’s hand
Even if you’re somewhere I can’t ever reach you
Don’t forget me, don’t lose me
We’re looking at each other right now
I hope this moment lasts forever
I’m worried that Time would get jealous of us
Don’t ever change, always by my side
Forever together, my love
Despite knowing Jihoon and I feel the same way about each other, it still catches me off-guard when, while looking at me with a sincerity that mirrors mine, he sings his last part.
I hope you’ll remember me someday
I hope you’ll look back at least once
Please don’t let go
Keep looking at us
Oh My love even after time passes baby
You and I, even if we become strangers some day
Don’t forget me, don’t forget me
‘I won’t forget you, Jihoon. I could never forget you even if I wanted to.’
Wonwoo’s point of view
The moment I close the door behind me, the cold wind hits my face at full force. My padding opens and I shiver while mentally cursing myself for not having dressed more warmly and maybe put a scarf on. But, again, I would’ve never thought I’d be rushing out of Soonyoung’s house in the middle of the night.
It should be around five in the morning and, of course, the road is empty except for some stray cats jumping out of someone’s bushes. The lights inside the various houses of the neighbourhood are off, people already sound asleep compared to the boys inside the house who were still awake and full of energy, ready to party the dawn away.
When I left them a while ago, they were too busy doing their things to pay any attention to what I was doing or how I was feeling. That’s why I managed to get out without being noticed or questioned.
It became too stuffy to be in the same room as Jihoon and Soonyoung, especially after their duet which has been a real slap in the face to me. The way they were fondly looking at each other had me feel nauseous.
I was right there, sitting not too far away from them, but they didn’t care. They didn’t care about our friends either. It was as if they were the only ones inside the room and no one was watching them. This is how they usually act when they’re around each other and that’s why, last year too, I accused Soonyoung of liking Jihoon and of not being brave enough to break up with me.
It was very low of me to say that but after tonight, I won’t feel guilty because of it anymore.
Their little antics, their gazes...it is as clear as the sky on a sunny day that they have fallen for each other and I’m in the way.
I only realised tonight that, in their fairytale, I am the villain who’s hindering their journey to the happy ending.
Maybe I unconsciously was a villain.
I haven’t been giving Soonyoung the attention he deserved and I hurt him with my absence but it was because I wanted him to want me more. I wanted to see if he still cares about me because I still love him.
My actions might have made me like a bad person, an antagonist but I am not the only villain in this story. They’re just as bad.
Looking back at the times spent together, the two of them didn’t do a great job at hiding their feelings. Every thing they did, every time they tried to ignore each other only to go back to sticking to their side was further evidence of how they truly feel about the other. The accusation thrown back then wasn’t actually a mere conjecture after all.
They hurt me, they tore my heart apart in different ways and occasions while putting on the show of being my best friend and my boyfriend. They betrayed me and my trust.
At this point, breaking up with Soonyoung might be the wisest thing to do...but if I’m seen as a villain I might as well be one. For how childish and cruel it may sound, I want them to hurt just as much as I am hurt.
“Hyung! Where are you going?” Mingyu’s voice breaks my train of thoughts. I abruptly stop and turn around to see the tall guy running towards me with only his hoodie and a pair of sweatpants on. Puffs of air are leaving his mouth as he breathes in the cold weather.
“What are you doing here?”
He flinches at the harsh tone of my voice. “I noticed you were leaving and I’ve actually been calling you for a while but you didn’t hear me. Your thoughts were probably louder than I was.” Mingyu giggles but I don’t. “So, where are you going?”
Wanting to be alone, I blurt out “My house”. If I said I was walking to our dorm, he would've followed me.
“At this hour?” Mingyu asks, visibly confused.
“Yeah.” I know he won’t be convinced by that short answer so I hurriedly add, “My parents called me. An urgent matter came up so I have to go home right now.”
Mingyu can easily see right through my lie. My face must’ve looked too relaxed for an emergency at home so he knowingly asks, “Are you sure it’s not because of Soonyoung and Jihoon?”
Upon hearing those words and seeing how he was looking at me, something clicks in my brain. Suddenly, angry and annoyed, I push away Mingyu who, in the meantime, got closer to me. “What do you know, uh?”
‘If he noticed what is going on, then the others may have noticed it too. I must’ve looked like a fool or they must've pitied me.’
“I told you my parents called for me.” I shove Mingyu again. He isn’t stopping me and keeps backing with every push.
‘I’m sure Mingyu they’re secretly rooting for them. They may be ready to leave me behind. It’s going to be just as it was back then. I’ll soon be alone.’
“Do you want to call and have them telling you? Uh? Is this what you want?” I yell and push him one last time before coming back to my senses.
‘What the fuck am I doing? Why am I taking my anger and my fears on him?’
I close my eyes, pinching the bridge of my nose. I take a deep breath before whispering, “Just go back home, Mingyu. I don’t want to fight with you.”
And before he can say something or I could fall apart right there in front of him, I turn around and walk away.
‘Forgive me, Gyu. Forgive me for I couldn’t bear the bitter truth.’
Notes:
Finally, we got some first-person narration from Wonwoo and it had to be a rather angst one...poor Wonwoo...
Things may take a weird turn from this moment onwards since Wonwoo decided to act like a villain...who knows!
One thing is for sure and it's that everyone's life will be pretty monotonous for a while and there will be some crucial moments from time to time. We will be mostly focusing on those, hence the big jumps in the story's timeline. (But if there are events or a particular situation you want to read about, don't hesitate to tell me! I can try and include them in the narration ;) )I wish I could update sooner but uni and the lack of wifi in my house for two whole months slowed down the writing process. Then there was the whole mess in the fandom which had my mood reach its lowest point. Not to mention that for the past two days my computer wasn't cooperative at all! But here we are, slowly getting better with time and reaching the end of the Seventeen draught hehe.
I hope you enjoyed the long-ass chapter which was yet another rollercoaster of emotions.
I hope you had a great start to the year and if it wasn't like that, remember that there are 9 months ahead of us and things can turn for the better!Omg, this note sounds so awkward hahaha
Stay safe, stay healthy and I'll see you all soon (I hope lol). Love ya <3
Chapter 38
Notes:
Finally. It happened. I've come back from the dead with a new chapter for you!
I hope you'll enjoy it!!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Soonyoung’s point of view
DadCheol:
Tonight, we’ll be in Seoul.
We have a late evening flight.
I think we’ll all go straight to our dorms
and sleep what’s left of the night away.
Said the last text I read in our group before leaving my house that evening.
The phone kept buzzing for a while but I didn’t check nor reply to any chat. Spending some time by myself was what I needed when there’s a lump in my throat that makes it hard to breathe. I know I was supposed to feel ecstatic at the news, after all I was waiting for this day to come and even I can’t explain why I was being like that.
After a stop at the convenience store to buy some triangle kimbap to fight hunger, I sit at the usual spot inside the Ttukseom Hangang Park. A place that is filled with memories of me and Jihoon, a place which lately has housed only me.
Yes, because three months have gone by since the last time I saw him and Al1.
With the beginning of the new year, their company proposed a huge project to them, aimed at increasing their popularity. More or less, it consisted of: appearances in tons of variety shows which have been asking for them since their debut; cameos in big-shot dramas; collaborations with the artists they befriended at both music and award shows; recordings of content for their own channel. Without being told twice, they accepted the proposal. So all of this, plus the regular rehearsals of the group, made it difficult for them to free their schedule to meet up with us. Their spare time rarely matched Seokmin and mine who were equally busy with projects and studying for the upcoming exam session.
However, texting daily and video-calling whenever we could, made being distant, doable.
One day, One-Seven K announced that Al1 would be opening concerts for My Ai. It would’ve been only on the Asian stops of the tour, still, the company thought it could be a chance for them to gain more experience about the life they will be leading while touring and get used to performing in front of huge crowds. Also, it could be an occasion to promote themselves and expand the fanbase as well.
Needless to say, the members were thrilled at the thought of their first “unofficial” tour and so were we. Of course, Seokmin, Hansol and I went to both the concerts held in Seoul, we couldn’t lose this precious chance. And let me tell you, they were something else compared to what we had seen before. Shining brighter than all of the stars in a galaxy, they tore the stage apart and stole the heart of hundreds of people. Not a single person wasn’t praising them in the break between the opening and My Ai’s show which made the three of us feel proud of them since we know what they’ve been through to stand on that stage.
Then, the moment for them to leave the country came. As we couldn’t possibly drop them at the airport and risking getting in the way of them and their staff, we settled for a quick dinner at the dorms the night before. It wasn’t anything fancy: delivery food, non-alcoholic drinks and infinite banter while choosing which souvenirs they should bring from all of the countries they would be visiting.
At first, the idea of them touring didn’t faze me. After all, we weren’t seeing each other that often and the texting didn’t stop despite them being busy. But as our chat kept being filled with pictures of them rehearsing or hanging out with Junhui and Minghao, of sceneries different from the ones around here, I realised how actually far away we were.
Usually, we’re under the same sky, in the same city and we could end up meeting each other by chance while walking on the streets. These days, even if I miss them, I cannot drop by Jihoon’s studio and wait for them to show up.
There was no one to wait for in that room.
This situation kind of scared me but I tried to hide it. It would’ve been too selfish of me to tell them or even Seokmin about how sad I felt at the thought of not being able to see them, how time seemed not to flow at all when counting how many days were left until their return. Of course, despite these feelings harbouring inside of me, I was genuinely happy for them. Their hard work and talent were being recognised by someone who didn’t belong to their close group of friends. The world was starting to acknowledge them, making their dream of spreading their message and happiness through music gradually come true.
Knowing how much I missed them, hearing of their return should’ve sent me on cloud nine in an instant. But I am not feeling that high. On the contrary, I am weirdly sinking down. Wait, maybe anxious is a better choice of word to explain what is going on with me.
The reason for it all is that I will have to face Wonwoo.
You must be thinking, again? I mean, I know, I get it. I bring up the same topics over and over and it’s starting boring me too. But I guess this is how monotonous my love life is. Also, just like you, I wanted to believe that things with Wonwoo were better after that talk in his car before the year’s end when he promised not to hurt me anymore. However, as I suspected, it was just an empty promise and I wish I could tell Joshua ‘see? I was right.’ Though he tried contacting me first and look more interested in my everyday life, with the excuse of the tour and the preparations for it, he faded away once again.
At this point, I’m not even surprised and I am starting to see how confronting him again on the matter would be a waste of time and air. Our relationship is clearly broken. No matter how much I try fixing it and pretend it has beautifully come together, one small push and it will crumble down. It already happened many times but I was too focused on keeping it all together for his sake to see that, in reality, the one breaking down was me.
This time is different, though.
If he’s okay with us being this way, why shouldn’t I? If he says that he’s doing his best and making enough time for me, why should I be upset and disappointed about him rain-checking our dates or pretending to care when he doesn’t? From now on, I’ll just treat him like he treats me for as long as I can put up with it. For the band’s sake, of course, not his. There’s no point in making him one of my priorities if he doesn’t the same with me.
And, who knows, I could even break up with him if I get tired and the moment feels right.
With my legs going numb for how long I’ve been sitting in the same spot without moving, I leave the park to stretch a bit.
Walking alone on the streets, hands buried in the pocket of the jacket, nose and cheeks slightly cold from the chill breeze feels so peaceful. Not having someone to talk to or the hurry to go somewhere, I can indulge myself in taking pictures of the lively boats afloat in the river or of the moon shyly peeking from the city skyline while being accompanied by the faint sound of the water flowing mixed to the chatter of the people who, like me, don’t want to go home yet in such a lovely spring night.
As that unusual tune faded and the night became darker, I found myself at the entrance of the Seoul Forest. Upon reading the name of the place, I remember that one year has gone by since the first time I came here with Jihoon.
It was a year filled with special memories made with him, some of which are now coming to flood my mind as I set foot into the park.
S pring was slowly turning into summer and the weather was getting hotter by the day.
The cherry blossoms season was coming to an end but thankfully there were a lot of spots from where you could admire the beauty of those fleeting flowers. It’s a must to go and ta ke pictures under the trees but, despite being on a break from classes, we were still busy students since our high school life was coming to an end. So, none of us had the time to visit one of the many parks in the city and enjoy the white and pinkish clouds made of flowers and the scent coming from the petals fluttering among the people.
There’s no shame in admitting that watching my friends and relatives’ posts on Instagram made me envious and sad. I wanted to go there with Jeonghan’s bitches too and have fun but my duties came first. I’m famous for knowing how to party but I’m also quite diligent.
One day, I was completely drained of any energy after a full morning and afternoon of studying and I took advantage of Jihoon sending me a text to take a break.
Woozy:
Are you alive?
Hoshiya:
I am, I think.
Does empty count as being alive?
Woozy:
Empty as in hungry?
Hoshiya:
As in with no energy left.
Woozy:
I guess that means you lived too hard
and are close to abandoning this world.
Hoshiya:
Mmmh...
that sounds like what I am about to do.
Abandoning the world.
I am close to smashing my face on a pillow and sleep.
Woozy:
For a second you scared me.
I thought you wanted to leave for good.
Hoshiya:
Too young for that.
I have many things left to do
and so much time spent studying to make up for.
Like taking pretty spring pics.
Woozy:
I take it that you’re still upset about the cherry blossoms.
Hoshiya:
You’re damn right.
All I see on Instagram is people going to the park
and taking a lot of pictures with their friends and lovers.
Woozy:
Want me to take you to see them?
Hoshiya:
How?
You’re busy and you must be even more tired than I am.
Woozy:
I am never tired.
Hoshiya:
That’s a lie and you know that.
Woozy:
So, do you want to go with me or not?
Hoshiya:
The dutiful me wants to say no
but the yolo me is yelling yes.
When would you like to go?
Woozy:
Does tonight sounds good to you?
Hoshiya:
Tonight? Isn’t it better to go in the afternoon?
Woozy:
Have you ever seen the blossoms at night?
Hoshiya:
Never.
Woozy:
Then, trust me.
Tonight is perfect.
Hoshiya:
If you say so.
Woozy:
Good.
Now take a nap and I’ll come to pick you up after dinner.
Hoshiya:
Thanks, Jihoonie.
And after sending a heart emoji while having real teary eyes, I did as he said. I took a long nap to regain the lost energy and took a quick shower before starting dinner. When my parents came back home from work, I told them about Jihoon’s plan. They were quite surprised by the sudden rendezvous but said it was okay for me to go as long as Jihoon stopped to eat some dessert with us. They were grateful that, finally, someone was bringing their son’s ass, my ass, outside of his room after a long day stuck on books and screens.
So there they were, happily conversing with him while I was in my room getting changed to go out with him. Jihoon came with a t-shirt thinking it was going to be warm too at night but it was quite chilly so I lent him one of my hoodies.
By the time we left my house, it was some time past 9 pm. Some people were already riding the subway to go back to their houses, some others were on their way to have fun around because the night was still young in their eyes. Jihoon and I were in our own world as we were talking about everything and nothing, studying everyone’s face and wondering what life they could be living. It was something we did to help Jihoon with his inspiration to write songs. It proved to be useful and also funny, so we were doing it whenever we could.
When we got to the Seoul Forest’s park, I was expecting to see the place bustling and be as lively as it is during the day but I was surprised to see it was rather empty. I stopped walking, confused as if it was really okay for us to go in the park. It was so quiet that it felt like it was some holy place in which we weren’t allowed to enter. I was scared we could be breaking the peaceful atmosphere surrounding the park.
“Shall we go in?” Jihoon asked me, lightly pulling at the sleeve of my hoodie. “If we wait a little bit more they will close on us.” He chuckled.
“Yeah…” I answered, still feeling like we were trespassing a sanctuary.
We walked around for a while at a slow pace, Jihoon letting me admire that familiar but new-looking place. I often came here with my parents or with Joshua but it was always in the morning or in the late afternoon, never at night. This was a new and very pretty sight for me.
I was taking picture of a path sided with trees and lighted blue by the LEDs when Jihoon tapped on my shoulder. He then pointed at somewhere on my left side. Turning around towards the direction pointed by him, I was met with these huge trees crowned by bright white flowers. My mouth was hanging open as I was running, mesmerised, to the cherry trees. At night, with the sky tinted in a deep blue, the bloomed flowers looked like snow suspended in the air but not ready to fall. Only some " flakes" were fluttering here and there before touching the ground thanks to the light breeze travelling through the branches.
“This is so beautiful.” I managed to say, under my breath, after one of those petals fell on my nose.
“I knew you would like it.” Jihoon’s smile could be heard in his words. “We’re so used to seeing them in the daylight that we never consider coming to look at them at night. But I find them prettier like this.”
“Yeah…I think I know what you mean.” I took a pause in between my words, distracted by the snowing petals. “There’s something magical about them. They look more fragile, delicate and...pure.”
“Just like us.”
“Uh?” Puzzled, I looked at Jihoon who was looking with shining eyes at the white cloud above our heads.
He smiled, his lips only parting a bit in the middle. “At night, aren’t we people more delicate and fragile? Aren’t we purer in our thoughts and emotions?” Jihoon squatted to take a bunch of petals from the ground and lightly caressed them as if they could rip if he wasn’t careful enough. “Don’t you think that the petals are like our insecurities, our masks and our tears? It takes only the smallest gust of wind for them to fall.”
“But those don’t fall only at night.”
“Right.” He tilted his hand to let the petals in his hand gently rain again on the ground. “However, I feel like in the light they put on an act. They let their petals fall to be praised, to leave people in awe due to their beauty, to show them that the fall is needed to later grow even more beautiful. At night, though, they’re alone. Their petals falling come to be the worst part of themselves, the one they wish to shed, to push as far away as possible. But there’s no one watching or praising them, no one comforting them.” Jihoon put his hand in the front pocket of the hoodie. “The same goes for us. When the night comes, we drop all the acts and we’re true to ourselves. We cry in the darkness of our rooms but there’s no one to watch, no one comforting us saying that everything is going to be alright, that we did a good job and that letting go of our insecurities will bring better things to us.” He sighed.
We remained silent for a while. Another gust of wind brought some of those precious petals to us standing beneath the branches.
At that moment, I thought to myself that Jihoon is a genius artist for a reason. His sensibility is out of this world. The way he looks at the things surrounding him and the emotions they unleash in him aren’t ordinary at all. The more I thought about it, the more I knew I could’ve never seen those flowers differently if it wasn’t for him and his mind.
“We should cherish this view, then,” I said as I walked towards the trunk, putting a hand on it. “And I promise to come back next year too. To keep them company and praise them some more.” My words were welcomed by more falling flowers as if the tree was grateful for that promise.
Feeling proud, I turned towards Jihoon to tease him and tell him I was the tree’s favourite and instead of his eyes, I was met with the eye of his phone’s camera. After taking the picture, he laughed. “You should see your face in the last photo I snapped. You look like that scared hamster meme!”
“Hey! I bet you would look no better if someone took a pic of you while turning around!” I strode towards him and snatched the phone from his hands, trying to prove my point as his camera was still open.
The rest of the night was spent laughing and running around the park, making memories and keeping them in photos we later shared only between us two.
♫♫♫
In the usual rainy summer season, the Jeonghan’s bitches group was longing for a trip to the seaside to enjoy a relaxing day, pigging out on the beach and playing in the water.
However, with the never-ending rain, the hopes for that one-day trip was slowly fading away.
PupGyu:
It rains today too…
DonkeyKong:
Can’t we go anyway?
We may be lucky and the rain could stop by the time we reach the beach.
1004Han:
It could but we could also go there for nothing but a quick round-trip
DadCheol:
Or spend the day between cafes and restaurants
Joshuji:
I hate to say it, but they’re right.
Hoshiya:
But I want to see the sea at least from afar…
DonkeyKong:
You know, for healing purposes…
Kwannie:
I checked the forecast and it said that tomorrow is going to be sunny.
Should we try going tomorrow?
Our schedule is also free so we can go there in the morning.
Nonu:
At what time you said there was the bus, Gyu?
PupGyu:
The fastest one is at 9 am and we should reach Naksan Beach around 10:50
Noni-vernonie:
Sounds like a reasonable time to me.
1004Han:
We’d actually have time to sleep
then get ready to meet you and SeokSoon at the bus station.
PupGyu:
Dong Seoul Terminal to be more precise.
Kwannie:
Then it's set.
Tomorrow we’ll go to the beach!
Prepare your bags now
if you forget something, remember that no one is going to lend you anything.
PupGyu:
Not even the sunscreen?
That’s like a prime necessity.
Kwannie:
You either bring yours or you'll burn.
Noni-vernonie:
That sounded like you would be the one burning him.
Kwannie:
Nonieee you know I would never do that
1004Han:
You would
Joshuji:
You would
PupGyu:
You would
Kwannie:
Maybe.
It depends on what he did to anger me to the point of wanting to burn him.
DadCheol:
Hannie
remind me to hide any inflammable things we have at the dorm
and at the studio.
1004Han:
Yeah…
PupGyu:
But I never do anything to anger you!
1004Han:
You do
Joshuji:
You do
Kwannie:
You do
Leaving my phone dinging because of the little friendly fight, I took my backpack from the closet and put in there all the things I thought could come in hand: a towel, sunscreen, goggles, cards to play some games and a folding umbrella in case it rained on our way back to the bus. Food and water were going to be the last thing to carry, so I brought the bag to the kitchen and left it on a chair, a post-it to remind myself to check I had all I needed.
The next morning the alarm went off but the room wasn’t brightly lighted. Rubbing my eyes, I walked to the window and saw grey clouds slowly running in the sky as the rain fell to the ground, creating small dark pools here and there on the streets.
“Shit,” I muttered under my breath, going back to lay on my bed and checking the phone for any news from the boys.
The group chat already had something like fifty texts about staying home and cusses to the forecast for giving us false hope. Again, I proposed to go there anyway because maybe the weather would get better during the day, but no one wanted to take the risk of coming back home sad and with a cold.
No one but Jihoon.
When the day before he hadn’t sent a single message in the chat, I thought he hadn’t much interest in going to the beach and preferred staying in the empty dorm to rest. However, he texted me in our private chat, telling me not to unpack my bag and just go together.
Apparently, he was looking forward to today to the point he didn’t care whether it was pouring or hailing. He wanted to go and spend a day away from his work, from his responsibilities.
So there we were at the station, buying our tickets and looking for the right terminal. Once we made sure that the bus we were on was the one going to Naksan , we fell asleep to the sound of the rain pattering on the window and of the soft music playing from our shared earphones.
By the time we got to Naksan , the rain subsided a little. We sheltered ourselves in a cafè for less than an hour before the rain completely stopped and the sun peeped through the clouds.
“Let’s buy some snacks at the convenience store before going to the beach,” Jihoon said as he took his bag and phone to leave the cafè.
“I packed some chips, banana kicks and water.” I followed him outside while looking for my wallet underneath the food. “I think we only need to buy something for lunch.”
“Chicken dosirak ?” Jihoon asked pointing his finger at me, already knowing the answer.
“Chicken dosirak .”
We bought everything we needed at the nearest convenience store and headed to the beach. Having found an umbrella close to the shore, Jihoon laid down his blanket first and then went straight to dip his feet in the water. Instead, I took my time to lay my blanket and enjoy the feeling of the wet sand beneath my feet, breathing in the scent of the sea coming at me in a gentle whiff.
At that time, I remember thinking that I wouldn’t have realised how much I missed going to the beach if I hadn’t gone there. I had almost forgotten how happy I’d get just by watching the wide body of water becoming one with the sky at the horizon; by listening to the sound of the waves rising before crashing on the shore.
Jihoon was looking at me with a smile on his lips. When I joined him in the water, he was still smiling at me. I asked him why and if something happened while I was zoning out.
His answer was unexpected, making my heart flutter as fast as the wings of a butterfly.
“Because you are smiling and I think I’ve never seen you smile this bright since we have met. You look even more beautiful. We should come to the beach more often if it means I can see you like this.”
His ears were red as he spoke those words but never once he stuttered or shyed away from my gaze.
Jihoon was staring right into my eyes, not wanting to miss my reaction.
“Stop it or it might get to my head.” I kicked some water in his direction, chuckling. “It’s just that I’m on another level of relaxed when I’m here. It’s as if all of my worries and bad feelings all disappear. Completely wiped out. There’s only the sound of the waves filling my head.” I explained, trying to change the subject and in hopes that he didn’t catch how hard his words crashed on the shore of my heart.
“Exactly what I’m looking for. Wiping out all of my thoughts so that I can start afresh with my recent work,” Jihoon said, eyes following a small crab he noticed on the sand. “Lately, it’s stressing me out more than it should.”
“I’m sure you’ll be a new person by the end of the day. You will be inspired to write at least 30 songs,” I joked.
“Should I trust you?”
“Definitely.”
“Just so you know, you’ll be labelled as a scammer if I write 29 songs instead of 30 as you said.” Jihoon finally chuckled, seeming already a bit more relaxed.
Time flew by as we were taking endless pictures of both the scenery and us, sending them to the chat to enjoy the reactions from the guys who regretted not coming. They didn’t expect the weather to change and become super sunny all of a sudden.
After risking our lives with how much we were teasing them, we turned off our data and ate our lunch in the cool shadow cast by the umbrella, laying down with our eyes closed when our stomachs were ultimately full.
An hour or so passed with us having done nothing but fill our ears with the sound of the waves and of the people passing and chatting.
We couldn’t go for a swim since the swimming season had ended so we opted for a short walk on the shore, our feet getting wet when the water longed to be on the land. No need to mention that the peaceful walk turned into a whole battle when he sprayed water on me for speeding up and leaving him behind after I saw a cute small crab. We went back to our umbrella completely wet from head to toe, sand sticking to our feet and clothes as we were running. Unluckily for us, we didn’t bring anything to change and we couldn’t possibly go back to the bus like that so the best option for us was to take advantage of the sun before it was completely set and let at least our shirt dry. For the trousers, well, we decided that putting the towels on our seats and trying to make them as thick as possible not to wet the upholstery was our only option.
In the meantime, we played a few rounds of a card game Jihoon knew and of which I didn’t understand the rules even after five rounds.
When the time came to catch the bus, we reluctantly packed our things and left the beach.
We had tired ourselves so much that we fell asleep as soon as our butts hit the seat and woke up only when a kind man tapped on our shoulders while saying we reached our destination.
On our way to the subway station, still feeling a bit drowsy, neither of us spoke for quite some time.
“Did you have fun today?” Jihoon asked out of the blue.
“I did. I had spent so much time in the city that I had forgotten how much I liked the seaside.” A smile bloomed on my lips once again. “And you? Did you get rid of all the negative vibes and found inspiration?”
“Yup.” I saw Jihoon nodding with the corner of my eyes. “I think you were right this morning and I will be able to write a lot.”
“See? This means I know you better than you know yourself.”
Jihoon chuckled. “It’s actually quite absurd and scary but you’re right. Still, you’re a scammer because I don’t think I have enough for 30 songs.”
“Cut me off some slack! I just threw a random number in the conversation! I didn’t actually mean that many songs.” I chuckled too when he shrugged his shoulders to say that it wasn’t his problem. “Do you think we’ll come back here?” I asked, my smile dropping a little bit. “It would be so fun to spend another day like this with all of Jeonghan’s bitches.”
“If they’re brave enough to face a rainy day, we can even go back in the next few days,” Jihoon answered after mulling over it for a short while. “It wouldn’t be a bad idea to have another day off.”
“It’s decided then. Let’s see if we can convince them to defy the weather and spend a day away from the comfort of the dorm!”
“Sure.” He giggled at my enthusiasm. “But now you should be running to the platform. Your ride is about to come.”
“Oh, right.” I slapped my forehead. “I forgot we’re not taking the same train. Guess I’ll go then.”
“Let me know when you’re back home,” Jihoon shouted as I was running away.
“You too!” I waved without turning back to look at him.
We went our separate ways, my heart now calmer and filled with much more happiness than yesterday.
And with the scent of the sea still lingering in the air and stuck to my clothes, that short summer getaway ended.
♫♫♫
Autumn has come and Jihoon and I found ourselves again at the Seoul Forest.
The two of us hanging out at the park was a spur-of-the-moment thing as Jihoon suddenly texted me, saying he was getting sick of his studio and was in dire need of a breather. I wasn’t doing much at home since Hansol hyung and Seokmin cancelled their plan of meeting at Coffee & Goodpie at the last minute.
Hoshiya:
Do you want to meet up?
Woozy:
I don’t feel like being active, though.
Should we just stay home?
Hoshiya:
Ji, how is that different from staying inside your studio?
Sure, it’s a bit larger but it’s still a closed space.
Woozy:
And so are the cafè, the pc bang, the noraebang
and the places we usually spend time at.
Hoshiya:
I know, I’m not that dumb.
That’s why I was thinking of something else.
Woozy:
What?
Hoshiya:
What if we go to the park to listen to music?
This way, you don’t have to use energy on speaking
because the music will fill the silence.
Also, an open space.
Woozy:
That would be amazing for me but are you sure it won’t be boring for you?
Hoshiya:
What do you mean?!
If you, music and nature are involved, there’s no way I will get bored.
Woozy:
Okay, then.
Should we go to Seoul Forest?
Hoshiya:
I was thinking of going there too.
Woozy:
Then I’ll see you in a while.
I’m already leaving the studio.
Hoshiya:
I’m leaving too.
See you soon!
Fast forward and we were there just like we were in spring.
However, instead of walking under a pink and white rain, we were sitting on a bench surrounded by a golden sea made entirely of fallen ginkgo leaves.
Each of us had our earphones plugged in Jihoon’s splitter jack and enjoyed the music playing from random autumn-themed playlists.
Neither of us had said a word from the moment we sat down and, following the laidback melodies, I soon tuned out from reality.
In a scenery like that one, it felt as if time stopped and I was thrown into another world, which was quite similar to the ones you read of in fairy tales. If I could see myself from the outside, I bet that my eyes were sparkling while slowly taking in as much as I could of that enchanting view.
Breathing in the chilly air, I then let it out in small and contented sighs because of how lovely that evening was. The sunset was bathing everything in its golden light, bringing out those romantic hues that perfectly suit the much melancholic autumn.
Lovely was also the guy sitting next to me who had apparently dozed off at some point. I chuckled at the sight of his head hanging on the side, his mouth slightly open and his phone about to fall off from his relaxed hands.
Trying not to wake him up, I picked up the phone and was about to put it in my sweater’s pocket when I notice that the notes app was open. On the white page, there were only a few lines, probably lyrics.
Leaves falling like I do.
I wonder, do they get hurt too?
Picking them up, keeping them close to you.
I wonder, would you keep me close too?
My heart and stomach clenched in a too familiar way as I locked the screen, not wanting to invade Jihoon’s privacy any longer. To be more honest, it was because I didn’t want to feel guilty anymore. Those words and his pain were my fault and I couldn’t do much about it.
Unluckily, no god nor fairy godmother gave me the power to bring us a happily ever after.
Not even giving me the time to wish I had never read those words, he woke up after not feeling the weight of his phone in his hand. The worried look on his face dissipated when I handed his device to him, forcing a small smile as I did so.
We spent some more time enjoying each other’s company but the quietness of that magical autumn evening had been broken by the too loud, abrupt and harsh reality.
♫♫♫
“Guess who’s here!”
I said in a tinkling voice as I barged in Jihoon’s studio only to freeze on the spot when I saw he was sitting in front of his brand new console. Mr Choi, his mentor, was next to him, moving on auto-pilot as he was fiddling with the keyboard and adjusting the samples. Their gazes were focused on the two huge monitors standing before their faces while listening to the Christmas carol resonating in the whole room.
Jihoon had told me that he was working on a cover Joshua and Seungkwan recorded as a surprise gift for their fans but I didn’t think he was doing it now. After all, he was the one who called me over, saying he was just hanging out with Mr Choi.
Bowing to excuse me, I put the hot drinks on a nearby table, took off my coat and sit in the quietest way possible.
“I arranged the base a bit differently so it can fit the two better. What do you think?” Jihoon asked, his eyes fixed on the man sitting next to him.
“It’s pretty good.” Mr Choi smiled at him. “No need for Joshua and Seungkwan to come back and record again. We can use the same files as before.”
“Exactly my thought since they’re busy with another schedule these days and I don’t want them to be at the studio during the time they should use to rest.”
“Caring as always.” The man sighed as he turned around in his chair. “I wish you cared about yourself too. You’ve been working non-stop for two days.” He looked at me and said, “Soonyoung, I’ll leave him in your care. Let him have a break while I work on the final touches of the song, okay?”
“Yes, sir!” I brought my hand up to show a thumb up. “Jihoonie, come here.” I patted the space next to me on the little couch facing the window. “I have hot chocolate and a warm blanket.”
“The prospect of a sweet drink and a nap is very much tempting.” Jihoon chuckled as he got up from his chair and strode towards me. “Which one is mine?”
“They’re all the same, so…” I shrugged.
He took one of the cups, handed me another and brought the third one to Mr Choi before taking place on the sofa. I held my cup with one hand while trying to fix the blanket on Jihoon with the other to make sure there was no spot left uncovered.
Jihoon and I made a little cheers motion before taking a long sip of the drink, both happily sighing when it finally warmed our bodies.
Mr Choi didn’t waste time and went back to work while the two of us were enjoying the view in silence with the jazzy carol in the background.
Outside, the snow was dancing while carried by gusts of wind only to then gracefully land on the already white streets and buildings which were slowly coming to life with their hundreds of lights while, on the contrary, the sky was getting darker and darker.
Winter had taken over not only the weather and the scenery but also the hearts of people who were getting ready to embrace the nearing Christmas season. It was rather a cranky time of the year if you consider the races to get presents and the hard work it is to decor your house but it is also the happiest one: you eat delicious home-made food for days while spending quality time with the people you see every day and also with those who are usually too busy to hang out.
It’s a special moment born to remind ourselves how little are the things which make us truly happy. We don’t need huge gifts or fancy dinners but only a room full of warmth and people we love.
Speaking of which, my eyes suddenly focus on Jihoon’s reflection in the glass. He was holding the paper cup with both his hands hidden in sweater paws, his legs crossed under the blanket, the hint of a smile tugging at his lips. He looked as if he was lost in his thoughts and it made me curious about what he might’ve been thinking.
Was he wishing to be walking among the bustling crowd instead of being there working? Or was he imagining himself on a holiday in a warm city on the other side of the world? Was he getting inspired for a new song by the sight? Was I there in his thoughts or was he wishing to be happier with someone who can freely love him?
I didn’t know the answer to any of those questions but I did know that he was definitely on my mind.
Looking at the lighted streets had me wishing to be walking around with him, his hand linked to mine and buried in my pocket, stopping at every shop window to look for the gifts to buy our friends and family. Feeling the cold had me wishing to be on the other side of the world with him, enjoying the winter from a beach in a tropical city. Watching the snow falling inspired me to write thousands of what may end up being cliché poems about his fair skin and the beautiful but fleeting happiness we share when together.
Jihoon had me wishing for this and a lot more, wishing for a future where both of us could be happy. Be it together or not.
“Soons, thank you,” Jihoon suddenly said, his hand patting my knee. “I really needed to take a break. Even if I couldn’t go outside, it was good to sit here and look outside.”
He wore the sweetest of smiles I ever saw on him and his eyes were twinkling. As I was slowly getting lost in his gaze, I could hear Joshua’s voice singing words perfect for this moment.
And as I look around
Your eyes outshine the town they do
“Now, can you land me your lap for a quick power nap?” Jihoon asked all in one breath.
I stretched my legs out and reached for a pillow to put on my thighs. “Of course, I can. Sleep as much as you want.”
“Twenty minutes will do the job.” He chuckled and laid his head on the pillow, covering the rest of his body with the blanket.
“Good night, Jihoonie,” I whispered in his ear, brushing my hand through his hair until he fell asleep.
♫♫♫
For every season, be it the cherry blossoms, the rain, the ginkgo leaves or the snow, Jihoon and I watched something fall around us without realising that we were too falling more and more in love with each other. I wonder how much is this falling going to hurt once we will meet the hard concrete beneath us.
Four seasons later and I am back to the place where I was with Jihoon, wishing he was next to me to enjoy the falling petals at night.
“See? I came back and kept the promise I made to you,” I say to the tree after checking that no one is around me.
The last thing I need is people thinking I’ve gone crazy.
Walking closer to the tree, I end up sitting with my back leaning on the trunk and eyes looking up at the branches.
“You know, I envy you.” I pick up a petal from the grass and play with it. “You look so beautiful even when you’re baring yourself. Jihoonie said you do that because you know that it’s only by letting go of the prettiest part of you, your flowers, that you can grow fruit. And when you do so, others look at you in awe and wish to see more of it” I take a short pause to let the petal fall from my hand. “But it’s not the same with us. When we let go of our pretty words and façade, when we bare ourselves in front of others, we end up alone most of the time. It happened to me too, a lot. However, this time, I found friends who instead of leaving, stood by my side. I found people who are willing to wait and see the fruits I can grow. I don’t know if you remember Jihoonie, the boy I came here with last year, but I hope he is one of those willing to stick around despite how ugly is the side of me I’m baring.” A small bitter laugh escaped through my lips. “How many petals he can watch falling before leaving me?”
“Who is leaving you?”
Startled, I turned around to look in the direction the voice came from.
Standing on the small pinkish path leading to the tree is Jihoon. A black mask and the lowered baseball cap cover most of his face but his voice and eyes gave him away.
“What are you doing here?” I ask him, eyes widened in surprise. “Weren’t you supposed to go to your dorm and rest after the trip? How much did you hear?”
“You didn’t answer in the chat so I was a bit worried.” He walks closer and points to a spot next to me, silently asking if it was okay for him to sit there too. I nod and, while sitting, he takes off his mask. “Then, on the way to the studio to get some work done, I checked the date and remembered the promise you made last year. I was pretty much sure I would’ve found you here.” He chuckles, having been proven that he knows me this well. “As for how much did I hear, why do you ask? Were you talking about me?”
“What? You just came back and you’re already working?” I roll my eyes and shake my head while Jihoon just shrugs not even trying to rebut, aware of being a workaholic. “Also, I was telling the tree that a certain dumb guy couldn’t be here because he’s too busy and famous to come to meet an old friend.”
“So you were badmouthing me.”
“Something like that.”
We both let out a soft giggle before sighing and falling into a comfortable silence.
I keep looking at the petals above me pirouetting in the air until one falls on Jihoon’s head. His eyes were closed, probably due to tiredness from the tour and the flight.
Bringing my legs closer to my chest and laying my head on my knees, I take a moment to stare at Jihoon’s profile: his pale skin that could compare to the moon; his long lashes kissing the top of his cheeks, rosy due to the soft wind and so it is the point of his nose; his lips are stretched in a contented smile.
I wonder how such a man could exist for real and how was possible to not fall for him. Not only for his looks but for how he acts, for how he’s caring despite pretending to be an ice king, how fragile he is behind that tough-man-mask.
I could go all night long listing the reasons why Jihoon is special, but he interrupts me.
“Did you miss me that much?”
“Uh?”
“You’ve been staring at me for quite some time”
“How do you know? You have your eyes closed,” I say while widening mine.
“I can feel your stare. Also, I peeked and you didn’t even notice.”
“Okay, okay.” I raise my hands to surrender. “I missed you,” I say while letting myself fall on Jihoon, my head landing on his lap to have a better look at his face.
“I missed you too, Soons. Quite a lot, actually.” He says with the most serious expression he has ever pulled while looking straight into my eyes.
I cough to hide the thumping sound of my heart. Shying away from his gaze, I change the topic to let myself calm down. “So, how was the tour?”
“It was a blast. All those new places were filled with people who were cheering for us, vibing with us and our music. Some of them were even asking for an encore before the main stage of Junhui sunbae and Minghao sunbae. It felt all so familiar and new at the same time. I mean, we are used to performing but the scale, the atmosphere, the work behind the stage and many other things are so different. My feelings were amplified by the rush of adrenaline I felt inside of me. I also got inspired to write new songs to the point I had to buy a new notebook because the one I had brought with me was already full.” He releases a contented sigh. “The CEO was right. We needed to grab this chance to have a taste of what our own tour will be like.” Jihoon is speaking while gazing in the distance, clearly reliving all of the moments and emotions he got to experience while away. It is great to see his eyes glistening, to admire the light that shone in them whenever he talked about the stage and Al1’s music.
At that moment, his eyes come back to me who is still laying on his lap. “Though, I have to admit that many times I wished you were there to share all of that with us...” Just as if we were in a movie, a drizzle of petals comes to surround us when Jihoon says, “...with me.”
‘Be still my heart. This is not the moment to die.’
But how could I not die when he’s looking at me with such a soft gaze? When the mood is this perfect and romantic?
Would’ve it been a movie, this would be the scene where the two main characters kiss and then confess their feelings, leading to their happy ending.
This is not the case for us, though.
“I wished we could be there.” I get up while bitterly snickering. “Seokmin and I could’ve led the fan chants for you guys. After all, we’re the special members of your fandom.”
“Yeah...you are.” I’m sure Jihoon was lowkey expecting this reaction from me. Nonetheless, he looks a bit hurt as he changes the topic to prevent spoiling the mood too much. “Let’s leave the catch up to the next days when we’re all together. I bet the members will whine if they find out that we met today and I spoiled the episodes from the tour.”
“I can already hear Jeonghan and Seungkwan saying that it wouldn’t have hurt you to wait a couple of days.”
“Oh, me too.” Jihoon shivers at the thought. “So, how did you find your tree friend?”
“It’s doing great and it’s as pretty as it was last year. I was going to take some pictures to commemorate our reunion but my battery is almost dead so I thought it was better to save it in case of an emergency.”
“Do you want to use mine?” Jihoon takes his phone out of his pocket while still asking. “Wait, now that I think about it, I still have pictures from last year on here.”
He unlocks the screen and taps on the gallery icon before scrolling like there’s no tomorrow to find the said pictures. When he does find them, he proudly turns the phone around to show the photo he took of me with one hand on the trunk, eyes closed as I was widely smiling, the cherry blossoms above and around me.
I get short-breathed at the sight.
‘Is this how Jihoon sees me?’
“W-wow. Have you ever considered becoming a photographer?” Is the only thing I managed to say, the beating of my heart too loud for me to think of something else. “This looks pretty good.”
“Nature and model’s merit, not mine.” Jihoon opens the phone’s camera. “Shall we take some photos now?”
Like that, we spent the rest of the night taking all different kinds of pictures, from the silliest ones while striking weird poses to the serious ones of us standing next to each other with a crown of flowers above our heads.
‘I’m back home.’
Author’s point of view
Soonyoung’s parents had called him, worried because it was past two in the morning and he wasn’t home yet, forgetting to text or leaving them a note about being late. Not really willing to do so, the two of them parted ways with the promise of meeting on the next day for a coffee break.
Finally, Jihoon is on his way to the studio with his head up in the clouds and eyes glued on the screen of his phone. With a smitten look on his face, he was scrolling through the pictures he took with Soonyoung, carefully choosing the one which would become his new lock screen.
At this point, he doesn’t care if Wonwoo sees it or not. It’s not like his friend has any right to act like a jealous boyfriend since he’s not properly taking care of Soonyoung.
Having decided to go with a cute photo, he sets it as his wallpaper.
Jihoon is slipping his phone in the pocket when he bumps shoulders with a girl. He stops to ask her if she’s okay, taking the chance to apologise for not having noticed her. The girl reassures that it was nothing and that she should be the one apologising as she was not paying attention to where she was going, too busy chatting with her friends.
Having verified that the girl was indeed okay, Jihoon takes his leave.
The petite girl, bows to greet and thank him. When she does so, she notices that there’s a phone on the ground.
She takes it and starts running to reach Jihoon before it’s too late.
However, at that moment, a notification lights the phone screen, revealing the wallpaper picture: t wo guys under a cherry blossom tree, one giving a kiss on the other’s cheek who’s winking at the camera, his fingers in a V sign.
She blinks twice, convinced she’s seeing things but she’s not.
The man holding the phone was Jihoon from Al1 and he was happily receiving a peck from another boy.
The girl hasn’t fully processed what was happening but, with a hand moving faster than her brain, she uses her phone to take a picture of the other’s lock screen to then run after Jihoon.
“Excuse me, you dropped your phone!” She yells, short on breath, once she is closer to Jihoon.
“Oh, I didn't notice. Thank you so much.” Jihoon takes the phone, nodding to greet her once again before leaving.
When he is far enough, the girl goes on her way too, the expression on her face growing creepier by the second.
Notes:
Aaaand here we are. We reached what could be considered the starting point of the story. Shit (pardon me) is about to happen. Who wants to guess what's next?
Also, the pace of the story will probably pick up a lot: things will happen faster than you expect and chapters will probably be of this length.
I don't know how frequent updates are going to be since I have apparently become as busy as Al1 are. But rest assured that I won't be dropping this baby.
To all of you who sent me messages during this hiatus time, thank you.
To those of you who still supported and loved the story despite the hiatus, thank you.
I don't lie when I say that your support and seeing how much you love this monstrosity of a fic are the things that keep me going. I know I'm not the best writer and that this plot has repetitive parts, lots of angst and clichés, not to mention the tons of inaccuracies but thinking that there are people who want to read what I have to say, that want to be on this journey with me, makes me truly happy.
To those who are still here, I hope we can be together till the end of this story.
I love you all and remember to stay safe! <3ps: the lyrics in the autumn memory are original, meanwhile the ones from the winter memory come from the carol This Christmas by Donny Hathaway!
Chapter 39
Notes:
(See the end of the chapter for notes.)
Chapter Text
Jihoon’s point of view
“Ugh…my back hurts so much,” I complain while turning on my side to grab my phone from the floor and turn off the alarm.
Sleeping on the two-seat sofa inside the studio probably wasn’t one of the best ideas since I had gone through a long flight and a night out.
After meeting with Soonyoung, I could’ve gone straight to my room but I had felt so inspired to write about the time we spent together, that I went to the studio and worked till the wee hours. However, all the fatigue from the night and pain disappears once my phone screen lights up. The photo with Soonyoung was still there, reassuring me that what happened wasn’t just a long and happy dream.
“I’m sure Soons would mock me for the sappy choice…but I like it so mu-” My eyes drift from our faces to the notification bar and the amount of missed calls and texts gives way to a frown that easily wipes out the smile on my face. “Uh? Did something happen?”
Scrolling, the most recent notification catches my eye.
I can see from the preview that it’s from Mr Cha.
Mr Cha:
We need to call for an emergency meeting.
Make sure to call me as soon as you read the text
and call your manager too so he can bring you here.
Thinking the urgency might be due to some problems with our near-future schedule, I hurry to open the strangely silent Al1 chat.
Woozy:
Guys, what’s up with the emergency meeting?
There’s no reply from any of them.
‘Maybe they’re still sleeping. I mean, I only got up a while ago myself…’ I think, trying to justify the lack of response but as more time passes without an answer, I keep growing anxious.
Deciding it would do worse on my sanity to stay still and wait for a sign from my friends, I call our manager as per said by Mr Cha and send a text to the latter to say that I’m on my way. While waiting for my ride, I grab the few things I brought with me and, feeling a bit chilly, I throw on a jacket Mingyu had left in the studio before the tour.
I’m about to head downstairs for some fresh air when the phone rings.
DadCheol:
Ji, before I tell you, sit down.
Woozy:
Why?
DadCheol:
Please, do as I say.
‘I just called the manager and he won’t be here for another fifteen minutes…guess I can do as hyung says.’
Going back to the couch, sitting down takes me more than I would like to admit, my back and legs feeling sore from the uncomfortable sleep.
Elbows resting on my knees and phone glued to my eyes, I text a “done” to Seungcheol, heart dropping into my sockets from the suspense.
A part of me is trying to convince myself he is about to give me good news and I shouldn’t worry too much but the eerie air surrounding me and the time he is taking to write are telling me I should expect quite the opposite.
‘If it was something exciting, he wouldn’t have made it so dramatic. Jeonghan or Seungkwan may have done that, but not him.’
DadCheol:
Seeing your text, I suppose you haven’t logged in to
any of
Al1
SNS accounts, right?
Woozy:
Right.
I woke up not too long ago and the first thing I saw
were tons of missed calls from the agency.
They said there’s an emergency meeting
but I’m confused as to the reason.
DadCheol:
Open
Twitter
and go to our mentions.
You’ll understand why.
Switching from KakaoTalk to Twitter faster than light, I do as I’m told.
When the page finally loads, I’m left speechless at the sight of lots and lots of tweets with the same picture attached to them.
My jaw drops together with my heart while seeing the picture that locks my phone being shared among hundreds of people and all over the net. Each tweet is accompanied by comments on who the person next to me might be, my sexuality and how smitten I look.
There are a few people who are asking others to delete the picture and stop speculating about things they don’t know but no one seems to care. They’re much more interested in digging into the matter and finding out who’s the one kissing my cheek.
Woozy:
I don’t understand.
How…
DadCheol:
I don’t know.
Did something happen yesterday?
At the question, I try recalling the events of the night, starting from the moment I left the park.
However, the panic I’m feeling at the thought of Soonyoung being found out clouds my memories. What would happen to him and his life if people target him? Will I be able to protect him if our fans end up harassing him?
‘Lee Jihoon, you don’t have the luxury and the time to panic. Be quick and remember. It might be an important step to end things and keep Soons safe.’
Racking my brain to clear its haze, I realise there’s only one moment that could’ve caused all of this.
Woozy:
On the way to the studio
I bumped into a girl and dropped my phone.
After a while, that very girl came after me to give it back
and then left.
DadCheol:
She must be the one who took the picture
and spread it online.
Woozy:
But…why?
I wasn’t mean to her and she seemed kind too…
1004Han:
Most of the time,
people don’t need a real reason to do something
that might hurt others.
It’s just because they think they have the “power” of doing so
while others don’t.
DadCheol:
I’m sorry Jihoonie…
As I rub my forehead with one hand, a deep sigh escapes my mouth.
‘Why did I do to end up in such a fucked up situation? And why did I have to drag Soons with me?’
Woozy:
Guess I’m the only one who has to attend the meeting then.
DadCheol:
I wish I could be there with you
but Mr Cha told us to stay at the dorm and not go out.
I’ll be glued to my phone, though.
Call if you need anything.
1004Han:
We’ll run to you despite what the agency said
as you matter more to us.
Joshuji:
In the meantime, I’m going to check on SeokSoon too
and explain to them what’s happening.
Woozy:
Thank you, hyungs.
I’ll see you later.
Right at that moment, the manager texts me that he’s arrived and is waiting for me.
With another deep sigh, I get up and get ready to leave the studio.
Locking the door, I realise that depending on how things turn out, this could be my last time here.
Once again I open the door and take a look at the space where many of my nights were spent and most of my tears and sweat shed. If I weren’t to come here, I wouldn’t have met my mentors and I wouldn’t have improved so much as an artist and, probably, I wouldn’t have come to understand many of the feelings that I had then poured into Al1’s songs.
It’s a place that saw suffering and hardships but never regrets. It’s a place that allowed me to walk the road to happiness and I hope I won’t have to part from it. Of course, the same goes for the people I’ve been walking this path with. It would be too soon for us to go our different ways.
‘Everything’s going to be fine’, says Soonyoung’s voice in my head and I suddenly wish he was here, saying those words in his happy-go-lucky tone as he patted my back. Nonetheless, just thinking about it gives me the courage to face whatever is waiting for me.
Taking a deep breath, I then repeat out loud “Yes, it’s going to be fine.” before closing the door.
There’s not a single sound coming from behind the door I’m facing, the one leading to the huge meeting room where CEO Kang and Mr Cha are supposed to be. This atmosphere that can be perceived from the outside frightens me. It’s as if I’m a prey who’s about to walk on its own into a predator’s den. The only thing is that I’m no innocent and clueless prey. Something concerning me happened and it’s something that could damage both the group and the agency so I have to take responsibility even if I’m a victim too in all of this.
Heart pounding in my chest, I walk into the room. Eyes diverted their attention from the papers before them to stare at me. From their expressions, I can tell everyone’s holding their breath as CEO Kang is barely refraining from starting his inquisition. They’re all pretending to be patient and wait for me to reach my place around the table in the middle of the room.
“I’m truly sorry to have caused such trouble and for being the reason why you had to take precious time from your already busy schedule for this meeting.” I do a 90° bow and keep that position for a while until the chairman tells me it’s okay to sit down.
“Mrs Seo, can you please turn the projector on?” Mr Cha asks one of the other employees who hurriedly does as told. On the wall behind the man, the incriminated picture slowly comes to vision.
I only now noticed that Soons eyes were blurred out. It might be nothing as the original poster knows his true identity but it gives me hope that he can be safe and suffer no damage from this.
‘Thankfully, it’s only me that the girl was targeting...’
“Jihoon, care to explain who is this guy in the picture with you? And why are people saying that he’s your boyfriend?” Of course, the one to ask the questions is the CEO.
“He’s my friend and high school classmate, Kwon Soonyoung. We often hang out together and sometimes he visited the studio I work at,” I answer truthfully. There’s no point in lying and making excuses as it would only worsen things. “He’s friend with the rest of Al1 too.”
Mr Kang looks at Mr Cha to receive confirmation of what I have just said. The latter nods and the CEO’s expression seems to relax a bit having seen that I am cooperating and stating the truth of the facts. “So, what’s the story behind this picture? How did this happen when you have just returned from a successful tour?” He keeps asking.
“Yesterday, after we came back, I met up with my friend. We spent some time at the park and took pictures together to commemorate the event. One of these was set as wallpaper on my phone. On the way to the studio, I bumped into a girl and dropped my phone. I was walking away when she ran after me to give me my phone back. I’m positive she’s the one who took the picture as she’s the only one who could’ve seen it. I don’t know her name nor I have seen her face so I can’t be of help in identifying her,” I explain everything in just one breath. “I’m sorry for having inconvenienced you and for not being careful enough. I shouldn’t have put that picture on display as I am a public figure and should’ve paid more attention to my surroundings. I’m terribly sorry because I have caused trouble not only for myself but for the agency and my members too. I am ready to accept whatever punishment you seem fit for me.” My head hangs low, high-key dreading the next words Mr Kang will speak.
The CEO audibly sighs as he stands up. Leaning with his fists on the table, he says “Since you haven’t done anything wrong, there’s no need to give you a harsh punishment. But it’s also true that you haven’t been careful enough as we asked you to do so we’ll be giving you extra training hours for a month and put you on cleaning duties of your practice room for two months.”
“Yes, sir. Thank you for being understanding.” I spring from my chair to bow once again, all while trying not to cry.
It’s too early to celebrate but the fact that I can keep practising with Al1 is already a huge thing for me.
“Mrs Seo, add the details our Jihoon referred to the official statement we’ve been discussing earlier and release it as quickly as possible.” Mr Kang then addresses another employee. “Mr Choi, you make sure to talk with the press and explain the whole situation just as Jihoon did. Mr Cha, you escort him back to the dorm and tell the others too about him and the consequences of his actions. As for the rest of you, go back to your office and start thinking of a plan based on how the people and the press will react to the news. Keep an eye on their posts and all the search tags that will trend in the next hours. We need to be ready for anything and we’ll do an update meeting in two days’ time. Until then, keep up with the good work and if you find who posted the picture first, immediately report it. Got it?”
“Yes, sir.” Everyone responds in one big voice before rushing out of the room, me and Mr Cha included.
By the time Mr Cha takes his things from the office and we reach the parking lot, the statement has already been released.
Hello.
This is One-Seven K.
We would like to provide a statement regarding the leaking of a picture depicting AL1’s member JIHOON that happened in the morning.
First, please allow us to apologise for not issuing an immediate response.
After the spreading of the post online, our company discussed, together with the artist, the nature of that picture and inquired about the events that might have led to the leak. During this process, we were able to verify that it was indeed a case of invasion of the privacy of both our artist JIHOON and the other party in the photo who is still considered a victim despite the perpetrator’s action of blurring part of their face.
JIHOON stated that he had gone to meet a friend of his and after parting with them, he had bumped into someone. The collision caused our artist to drop his phone. Not having noticed it, he had walked away and the aforementioned person went after him to return the device. They’re the only person who came in contact with JIHOON, hence the only ones who could have seen the picture of the artist and his friend.
Unfortunately, as of yet, we don’t know who the person is, but we will do our best to investigate further into the matter. We also ask for your cooperation: if you know or have clues about the culprit you can contact the agency at any time.
We ask for your understanding and to wait for further development of the case.
Once again, please allow us to offer our apology for the tardiness of a statement on the issues related to our artist.
The umpteenth sigh of the day loudly resonates in the closed and quiet space of Mr Cha’s car.
Once reunited with the rest of the members, Mr Cha and I took turns explaining what has happened and how the company decided to deal with the news.
As the explanation went on, the expressions on the members’ faces changed many times, shifting from confusion, to shock and finally to understanding when they came to know the whole truth.
Only one of them had anger written all over his face from the moment I stepped inside the room. For the sake of peace and to prevent angering him further, I tried avoiding his eyes as much as I could.
Outside, the sun is hidden behind the tall concrete building when Mr Cha finally says, “If you don’t have any more questions, I’ll take my leave,” and starts walking towards the door. “Except for practice and vlogging for the side channel, you won’t have any major schedule for the next couple of days. Rest during this spare time and don’t give yourselves more work. Also, take this time to reflect on the fact that one small thing for how innocent it is, can be turned into a bigger issue once it’s out in the open.” With those words and waving his hand in our general direction, he leaves.
Silence falls into the room, only the sound of the automatic lock of the door can be heard. Looking outside the window or hiding their faces behind their hands, no one dares to glance in my or in Wonwoo’s direction nor do they dare to leave us alone.
Like me, they too have noticed how on edge he has been for the past few minutes. With his leg bouncing up and down, Wonwoo looks like a ticking bomb waiting for its countdown to finish and to explode.
Judging from their expressions, the others are clearly having an internal debate on whether it’s best to defuse him or not. I wish I could tell them that, as of now, it’s impossible to do so. It’s better not to delay the moment and let him go off now that we’re prepared, that I am prepared to handle the explosion.
‘Here goes nothing.’
I take a deep breath.
“For all the trouble that I’ve caused and for the stress I added to your tiredness, I’m truly sorry.” Standing up, I bow to all of them. “I know this apology may not sound heartfelt now and I would understand if you resented me. I’ll make sure to work harder and behave better so there won’t ever be a second time to this.”
“Jihoon…”
Seungcheol starts but he’s soon interrupted by Wonwoo who springs up from his seat and rushes to me, grabbing my shoulders.
“There shouldn’t have been a first time at all, Jihoon,” he says, inches away from my face. “We’ve worked hard to be where we are now and we did our best to never jeopardise our efforts. The only thing the agency ever asked was to keep it low, to not cause any trouble and what did you do? You got yourself in a scandal about your sexuality and a possible relationship. Not only that, you were about to drag Soonyoung too into this. Do you realise that you’re in a position where you should even thank whoever put that photo on the internet? You know, since they had a tiny bit of decency and decided to blur out Soonyoung?” At that, Wonwoo releases me, taking a few steps backwards.
“I am aware of that. I’m thankful that at least he is safe. I was really worried when I saw the picture and I still am. He doesn’t deserve to have his life become a mess because of me.”
Despite taking in Wonwoo’s comment and answering him calmly, his words do irk me.
I take a step towards him, shortening our distance again. “But would you see, it took a scandal for you to worry about your boyfriend?”
“I’m always worried about him,” He says through gritted teeth, seething annoyance.
“Liar.” I spit out the word with much more venom than I intended to. “If you were worried, you would be on the phone, talking to him and making sure he’s alright. You wouldn’t be wasting your time arguing with me.”
“What do you know, uh? Why are you so pressed about my relationship with Soonyoung? Spending a bit of time with him and being my friend made you think that you have the right to meddle in our business?” Wonwoo lightly pushes me away.
“Spending a bit of time with him?” Annoyed, I scoff. “If we compare, the one spending a bit of time with him it’s you, not me. I’m barely a friend to him and yet I’m more present than you are.”
“Oh, trust me, I know how much time the two of you spend together.”
“That’s because you’re not there for him,” I say, poking my index in the middle of his chest. “Do you think he likes hanging out with me so much? It should have been you taking him to see the cherry blossoms when he had been dying to go; riding on a bus to the beach with him despite the chances of rain; sitting with him on a bench doing nothing but listening to music or spending an evening inside with a warm drink because it’s too cold outside. Rather than doing this with me, I’m sure he would have preferred being with you, his boyfriend.”
“But I see you’ve taken my place just right for that part, you know, going on dates and all. Also, don’t you think that I would have done all of that if I had the time? I couldn’t go out with him simply because I’m busy not because I don’t want to!”
“That’s the problem, hyung.” I feel myself raising my voice, not being able to keep my cool any longer. “You don’t put the effort to make time for him in your day and your life. I’m busy too but I still try to go and see him at least once a week and so do the others.” I angrily point my finger toward the guys on my side and then I go back to poking his chest with it. “So why can’t you?”
“Let me ask you again, why do you care? Why do you care so much about what I do or don’t do?”
Tired of filtering my words, I blurt out, “Because I love Soonyoung and I don’t want to see him suffer because of you! I can’t stand seeing you not treasuring someone like him who he adores and loves you so much to the point he could literally do anything for you if you asked.”
From the corner of my eye, I catch the others members freezing on their spot. Some because they had no idea I was harbouring such feelings inside, some because they knew but thought I was never going to say it to anyone, especially not to Wonwoo.
“Finally you said it.” He bitterly chuckles. “Not like you were any good at hiding it. You could tell from miles away how whipped you were for my boyfriend. Did you have fun going behind my back all this time? Doing this to me when you knew exactly what I had gone through in the past?”
“God, why are you being like this, hyung?.” I let it out in a frustrated shout. “Do you think I had fun trying to mend Soonyoung’s wounds caused by your lack of interest in him? Do you think I was laughing and being happy when I knew that all the smiles he flashed at me were instead hiding pain due to your absence? All this time, I’ve been nothing but a shoulder he could cry on when he missed you and someone whom he could lean on when he couldn’t take his sadness anymore.”
‘This is all I can ever be for him…nothing more.’
“How noble of you.” Mockery is evident in his tone. “The knight in shining armour has arrived to save the day. Why, let me reward you for your effort and hard work in keeping the poor prince-in-distress safe.”
“Hyung, are you fucking serious now? How can you act like this when we’re talking about another person’s feelings? One you’re supposed to cherish!”
“I’m sure you think I’m being an unreasonable brat, right? But since you know everything, tell me, how should I be acting? ‘Shit you’re right, why didn’t I think about that?’; Oh, thank you very much for telling me how you feel about my boyfriend.’; ‘Oh, thank you for taking care of him so dearly in my stead’; ‘Oh my, what a monster am I, hurting the one I love so much.’ Should I be saying this? Why? All this time, neither of you ever stopped and considered what I could be feeling.” He swats away my hand from his chest and takes his turn to point at me. “Between the two of you, you’re the worst. Do you know why? Because you claimed to love me as one of your best friends and yet you went on to hurt me. Until it was only you who had that smitten look all over your face, I could still close an eye on the matter. But how could I silently accept the world you two created in which there was no place for me?” Wonwoo bitterly laughs. “So, Jihoon, I’m asking you this. Am I really the only villain in this tale? Are the knight and the prince-in-distress truly innocent?”
I fall silent for the lack of comebacks.
For the past months, Wonwoo has been acting like an asshole to Soonyoung. The things he did and the pain he inflicted cannot be justified as he intended to hurt his lover. But he’s right. I hurt him too. I didn’t want to see his pain. I was blinded by the delusion that I alone was suffering due to my unrequited love.
“I didn’t know…” I whisper but he hears me because of how close we are standing.
“How could you, after all? You had eyes for him only whenever we were together. You didn’t care about your surroundings. How could you have never noticed?” Wonwoo’s voice broke for a second in the middle of the sentence. He is close to crying and he’s trying his best not to.
Before tears could escape from his eyes, he walks to his room. Not knowing what to say or do, I keep standing in the middle of the room, head hanging low. Joshua and Seungcheol rush to me meanwhile I can hear Mingyu and Jeonghan following Wonwoo to his room, probably in hopes to calm him down.
The bomb finally went off but the mess it left behind was bigger than what any of us could expect.
‘I wonder how much time will it take for all these wounds to heal…’
Notes:
Hello everyone!!
I'm sorry for being MIA for so long T-T
Things got busier than expected and they still are. Exams, babysitting my nephew and writer's block really took a toll on me and before I noticed it, 5 months had gone by since the last update of this story. During this time, more than once I have thought about sitting in front of the computer and writing a bit but nothing came to my mind. I would end up staring at the blank screen for a while before giving up or the moment I sat down, other things came up which didn't give me the time to do anything else.
As time went by like that, I was considering announcing the last chapter as the end of "season 1" or announcing its hiatus at least until Uni ended but thought it would only make me lazier about overcoming the block.
Maybe I'll consider posting shorter chapters like this one to keep things more updated if the block loosens a bit. Who knows. Let's see how things go for now and, for everything else, I'll keep you updated! I thank you very much for bearing with me! I hope to see you real soon!!!Remember to stay healthy and to take care of yourselves <3
I love you all <3
Chapter 40: Ending (for now?)
Notes:
It's been a year and here I am with the last chapter for this long-ass story. I won't be able to write for a while but I didn't want to leave the story hanging like this so I decided to write a summary of what I thought for this story's events and ending. I hope you enjoy it!
(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)
Chapter Text
Despite the statement released by the agency, the rumour about Jihoon worsens and a lot of people get to the conclusion that the statement may have been a way to cover for Jihoon’s sexuality. Ji locks himself inside the dorm and doesn’t want to go out, scared of seeing with his own eyes the disappointment in the band’s fans.
After a couple of days, the agency calls Jihoon to explain the situation: they haven’t released another statement because they had decided to observe the public reaction to those speculations. Of course, there were contrasting opinions so the final decision is for Jihoon to make. He’s given two options: either coming out or lying by revealing the existence of a girlfriend (a fake one) that he had been dating even before the band’s debut. However, the risk in both cases is the same. Al1 could lose part of the fandom due to his sexuality or because they wouldn’t believe his words.
Jihoon struggles with his decision. He doesn’t want to pretend to be with someone if it means that there’s the risk of losing Soonyoung even more. Then, he reminds himself not to be selfish because this isn’t a matter that involves him alone but it can affect the whole band’s reputation. One mistake and all their hard work would vanish. He still decides to take some time to think about it. Jihoon knows he will regret whatever choice he will make but he still wants to be sure to make the one that would let fewer people suffer (he’s used to this).
Soonyoung reads the news about Jihoon and immediately texts Joshua to better understand what is going on. They decide to meet at Joshua’s parents’ house where they even spend the night. Joshua explains about the post with Jihoon’s wallpaper and Soonyoung starts feeling guilty because if they hadn’t met or if they hadn’t taken those pics, none of this would have happened. Joshua reassures him saying that it wasn’t his fault, the only one who should be blamed is the person who posted that pic and invaded their privacy.
While they are together and they’re checking the people’s reactions on Twitter, Soonyoung sees the pic of Jihoon with a girl. They’re seen holding hands on the riverside and even if they’re both wearing masks, Soonyoung could tell that it was Jihoon as he could recognise the other anywhere. With an ache in his chest, Soonyoung thinks that the two look good together and even after Joshua tells him that it’s a fake girlfriend to keep the rumours at bay, Soonyoung can’t help but think that most of the fake-dating relationship he has read about end up with the two characters falling in love for real. And maybe, that’s what Soonyoung hopes for Jihoon so that the other could be happy and not stuck in their painful limbo.
Months go by during which Wonwoo and Soonyoung are not even on a talking basis anymore. They just exchange formalities and a couple of empty words. With his relationship with Wonwoo clearly coming to a dead end and with him seeing less and less of Jihoon due to work and his fake-dating thing, Soonyoung feels lonely. Seokmin isn’t even there for him as he is away for an exchange project with another school in Busan. Soonyoung spends days by himself and can’t stop asking himself where things go wrong for them.
In the meantime, when he doesn’t have work to do, Jihoon closes himself in his studio making songs cover with Soonyoung in his mind. It’s the only thing he can do since he doesn’t have the courage of facing him after the scandal. He knows they would both break down and wouldn’t be able to do anything to cheer the other up. Apparently, that’s how things were destined to be for them. That’s why Jihoon decided to show his love for Soonyoung with songs (like I’m Yours by Jason Mraz) that then posted on the band’s youtube channel in hopes that Soons will see them.
One night, that weird balance that was created by all those events came crushing.
Wonwoo, wanting to get a change of pace, meets up with some friends in a club where he’s seen with a girl. Pictures are taken and the scandal comes to life. Digging deeper into the story, people (and also Al1) find out that it is not the first time that Wonwoo meets with that girl. A lot of pictures people had taken on the different occasions they had caught Wonwoo clubbing starts being shared on SNS and there’s also one in which one could clearly see that Wonwoo was kissing the girl.
Soonyoung is in disbelief and Seokmin (who had returned from the exchange project) tries to calm him down by saying that it could be fake, it could be an edited picture since there are people like that who like to add fuel to the fire just for the sake of being entertained. However, Soonyoung is sure it’s not fake. Wonwoo is wearing the scarf Soonyoung gifted him. There was no mistake.
Despite knowing that the one in the pictures is indeed Wonwoo, Soonyoung does nothing. He knows too well that he has no right to make a scene, on the contrary, he thinks he deserves it. For having hurt Wonwoo and for keeping him by his side despite his growing feelings for Jihoon.
However, this nothingness doesn’t sit right with Wonwoo who had hoped that at least this scandal would’ve gotten a reaction out of Soonyoung so he would have known that Soonyoung cared for him. They fight and Wonwoo yells that he wished Soonyoung had cared about him in the same way he cares about Jihoon and leaves the house, making it obvious that they had broken up.
After the huge fight, not knowing what to do anymore, Soonyoung holes himself in his house, going out only for his classes because he doesn’t want to end up bumping into Al1. He starts hanging out with Seokmin and Vernon only when the band goes away for a national tour.
During the tour, Jihoon and Wonwoo start fighting too because of Wonwoo’s scandal. Jihoon asks Wonwoo why did he do that, if he did stop to think that hooking up with another girl would have hurt Soonyoung; he says that fame went straight to Wonwoo’s head, making him believe that he could toy with people’s feelings. At that, Wonwoo can’t keep silent anymore and tells him that they are the same since Jihoon too has hurt Soonyoung with his own scandal and fake relationship. Plus, Wonwoo makes the big reveal in front of everyone in that room: he had known that Soonyoung, in truth, loved Jihoon but decided not to break up because they had to suffer just like him. They were the ones who played with his feelings and put up the best friend/boyfriend act with him.
When they come back from the tour, Soonyoung has disappeared. He wasn’t in Seoul anymore. He took advantage of the spring break to go back to Japan and try to cheer himself up after all of the events of the past months. Jihoon would like to reach him, to check on him and spend some time together but he can’t due to his tight schedule. Jihoon can only text Soonyoung in his free time and it hurts him because he knows that this is his fault. If only he hadn’t confessed his feelings, none of this would have happened.
Another time skip and it’s summer break. Al1 was on their Asian tour and Soonyoung decided to go on a little trip with his parents to Busan.
While Soonyoung is walking on the seaside, feet dipped into the water, a gust of wind makes his straw hat fly and he doesn’t notice as he’s lost in his thoughts. That’s when someone puts his hat back. He turns around and sees Jihoon who tells him that this was a coincidence. The tour had finished two days ago and they had come back to enjoy their free time before diving into work again. Jihoon came to Busan after remembering the promise he had made to Soonyoung to go there together.
Flustered, Soonyoung keeps silent and Jihoon giggles when he notices how their encounter was similar to the one Elizabeth and Mr Darcy had in Mr Darcy’s estate after a long time spent apart. The only difference was that they hadn’t fought due to pride or prejudices (even if at the beginning both of them were proud and full of prejudices against the other). Jihoon then shyly takes Sonyoung by the hand, afraid of being rejected. When the other lets his hand be held, they start walking together until the sun sets.
It’s night and they’re still at the beach. After some time spent just basking in each other’s presence, Jihoon asks Soonyoung when did he fall for him (in the same way Elizabeth asked Mr Darcy). At that, Soonyoung chuckles and answers while inching closer to Jihoon “I cannot fix on the hour, or the spot, or the look or the words, which laid the foundation. It is too long ago. I was in the middle before I knew that I had begun.” The two kiss and the story ends.
Will they get together? Will they not? Will they mend their broken relationship with Wonwoo? I leave that up to you…
Notes:
Here we are. After a year.
Time flew by and before I knew it I hadn't posted anything for a year. It's been so hectic for me that finding even 5 minutes to sit down and write a few words became difficult.
I'm sad that this story had to end like this as I knew there were other things that could happen in the middle of these big events but as I said in the note at the beginning, I didn't want this story to be incomplete. As rushed as it may seem, I wanted to give this story an end for the time being in hopes that one day I can sit down and write every single scene and give it a proper ending.
In the meantime, I thank you all for the support and the love you showed for this slow slow slow burn of a story and again I'm sorry for not being able to fully keep my promise of ending the story. I hope that one day we can see each other on here again and I hope that you can all stay healthy and happy.I love you all,
your least favourite author on ao3

Pages Navigation
wiimusicplays on Chapter 1 Sat 01 Dec 2018 04:25PM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 1 Sat 01 Dec 2018 04:39PM UTC
Comment Actions
chaekachu on Chapter 3 Mon 04 Jan 2021 12:21AM UTC
Comment Actions
lattecaramel on Chapter 6 Fri 04 Jan 2019 11:08AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 6 Fri 04 Jan 2019 11:51AM UTC
Comment Actions
lattecaramel on Chapter 6 Fri 04 Jan 2019 01:09PM UTC
Comment Actions
zelmalheiros on Chapter 6 Sat 12 Jan 2019 01:22AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 6 Sat 12 Jan 2019 03:16AM UTC
Comment Actions
lattecaramel on Chapter 7 Sat 12 Jan 2019 01:40AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 7 Sat 12 Jan 2019 03:17AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 7 Sun 20 Jan 2019 10:12AM UTC
Comment Actions
Teitatoo on Chapter 9 Sun 20 Jan 2019 09:41AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 9 Sun 20 Jan 2019 10:13AM UTC
Comment Actions
moonbeamflwr on Chapter 9 Sun 20 Jan 2019 03:56PM UTC
Last Edited Sun 20 Jan 2019 03:57PM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 9 Sun 20 Jan 2019 11:10PM UTC
Comment Actions
zelmalheiros on Chapter 9 Mon 21 Jan 2019 12:08PM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 9 Mon 21 Jan 2019 10:08PM UTC
Comment Actions
chaekachu on Chapter 10 Mon 04 Jan 2021 08:49AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 10 Mon 04 Jan 2021 04:50PM UTC
Comment Actions
TilB3 (Guest) on Chapter 11 Mon 04 Feb 2019 01:28PM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 11 Tue 05 Feb 2019 06:36PM UTC
Comment Actions
Teitatoo on Chapter 12 Tue 12 Feb 2019 05:58PM UTC
Last Edited Tue 12 Feb 2019 05:58PM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 12 Wed 13 Feb 2019 05:26PM UTC
Comment Actions
zelmalheiros on Chapter 12 Sat 16 Feb 2019 06:55AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 12 Sun 17 Feb 2019 12:23AM UTC
Comment Actions
chaekachu on Chapter 12 Mon 04 Jan 2021 10:41PM UTC
Comment Actions
moonbeamflwr on Chapter 13 Thu 21 Feb 2019 12:34AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 13 Thu 21 Feb 2019 09:43AM UTC
Comment Actions
zelmalheiros on Chapter 13 Thu 21 Feb 2019 07:13AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 13 Thu 21 Feb 2019 09:46AM UTC
Comment Actions
chaekachu on Chapter 13 Mon 04 Jan 2021 11:07PM UTC
Comment Actions
moonbeamflwr on Chapter 14 Mon 25 Feb 2019 12:05AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 14 Mon 25 Feb 2019 11:33AM UTC
Comment Actions
TilB3 (Guest) on Chapter 14 Wed 27 Feb 2019 09:29AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 14 Wed 27 Feb 2019 09:16PM UTC
Comment Actions
ju (Guest) on Chapter 15 Wed 27 Feb 2019 09:57PM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 15 Thu 28 Feb 2019 06:47PM UTC
Comment Actions
moonbeamflwr on Chapter 15 Thu 28 Feb 2019 03:31AM UTC
Comment Actions
Yleisnotonfire on Chapter 15 Thu 28 Feb 2019 06:48PM UTC
Comment Actions
Pages Navigation